harris furniture company manufactures living room furniture through two departments 538905

Harris Furniture Company manufactures living room furniture through two departments: Framing and Upholstering. Materials are entered at the beginning of each process. For May, the following cost data are obtained from the two work in process accounts.

Framing

Upholstering

Work in process, May 1

$ –0–

$ ?

Materials

450,000

?

Conversion costs

261,000

330,000

Costs transferred in

–0–

600,000

Costs transferred out

600,000

?

Work in process, May 31

100,000

?

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) If 3,000 sofas were started into production on May 1 and 2,500 sofas were transferred to Upholstering, what was the unit cost of materials for May in the Framing Department?

(b) Using the data in (a) above, what was the per unit conversion cost of the sofas transferred to Upholstering?

(c) Continuing the assumptions in (a) above, what is the percentage of completion of the units in process at May 31 in the Framing Department?

enos printing corp uses a job order cost system the following data summarize the ope 538795

Enos Printing Corp. uses a job order cost system. The following data summarize the operations related to the first quarter’s production.

1. Materials purchased on account $192,000, and factory wages incurred $87,300.

2. Materials requisitioned and factory labor used by job:

Factory

Job Number

Materials

Labor

A20

$ 35,240

$18,000

A21

42,920

22,000

A22

36,100

15,000

A23

39,270

25,000

General factory use

4,470

7,300

$158,000

$87,300

3. Manufacturing overhead costs incurred on account $49,500.

4. Depreciation on equipment $14,550.

5. Manufacturing overhead rate is 90% of direct labor cost.

6. Jobs completed during the quarter: A20, A21, and A23.

Instructions

Prepare entries to record the operations summarized above. (Prepare a schedule showing the individual cost elements and total cost for each job in item 6.)

at may 31 2012 the accounts of mantle manufacturing company show the following 538796

At May 31, 2012, the accounts of Mantle Manufacturing Company show the following.

1. May 1 inventories—finished goods $12,600, work in process $14,700, and raw materials $8,200.

2. May 31 inventories—finished goods $9,500, work in process $17,900, and raw materials $7,100.

3. Debit postings to work in process were: direct materials $62,400, direct labor $50,000, and manufacturing overhead applied $40,000.

4. Sales totaled $210,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a condensed cost of goods manufactured schedule.

(b) Prepare an income statement for May through gross profit.

(c) Indicate the balance sheet presentation of the manufacturing inventories at May 31, 2012.

shown below are the job cost related accounts for the law firm of jack 538798

Shown below are the job cost related accounts for the law firm of Jack, Bob, and Will and their manufacturing equivalents:

Law Firm Accounts

Manufacturing Firm Accounts

Supplies

Raw Materials

Salaries and Wages Payable

Factory Wages Payable

Operating Overhead

Manufacturing Overhead

Service Contracts in Process

Work in Process

Cost of Completed Service Contracts

Cost of Goods Sold

Cost data for the month of March follow.

1. Purchased supplies on account $1,500.

2. Issued supplies $1,200 (60% direct and 40% indirect).

3. Time cards for the month indicated labor costs of $60,000 (80% direct and 20% indirect).

4. Operating overhead costs incurred for cash totaled $40,000.

5. Operating overhead is applied at a rate of 90% of direct attorney cost.

6. Work completed totaled $75,000.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions for March. Omit explanations.

(b) Determine the balance of the Work in Process account. Use a T account.

pure decorating uses a job order costing system to collect the costs of its interior 538800

Pure Decorating uses a job order costing system to collect the costs of its interior decorating business. Each client’s consultation is treated as a separate job. Overhead is applied to each job based on the number of decorator hours incurred. Listed below are data for the current year.

Estimated overhead

$920,000

Actual overhead

$942,800

Estimated decorator hours

40,000

Actual decorator hours

40,500

The company uses Operating Overhead in place of Manufacturing Overhead.

Instructions

(a) Compute the predetermined overhead rate.

(b) Prepare the entry to apply the overhead for the year.

(c) Determine whether the overhead was under- or overapplied and by how much.

deglman manufacturing uses a job order cost system and applies overhead to productio 538801

Deglman Manufacturing uses a job order cost system and applies overhead to production on the basis of direct labor costs. On January 1, 2012, Job No. 50 was the only job in process. The costs incurred prior to January 1 on this job were as follows: direct materials $20,000, direct labor $12,000, and manufacturing overhead $16,000. As of January 1, Job No. 49 had been completed at a cost of $90,000 and was part of finished goods inventory. There was a $15,000 balance in the Raw Materials Inventory account.

During the month of January, Deglman Manufacturing began production on Jobs 51 and 52, and completed Jobs 50 and 51. Jobs 49 and 50 were also sold on account during the month for $122,000 and $158,000, respectively. The following additional events occurred during the month.

1. Purchased additional raw materials of $90,000 on account.

2. Incurred factory labor costs of $70,000. Of this amount $16,000 related to employer payroll taxes.

3. Incurred manufacturing overhead costs as follows: indirect materials $17,000; indirect labor $20,000; depreciation expense on equipment $19,000; and various other manufacturing overhead costs on account $16,000.

4. Assigned direct materials and direct labor to jobs as follows.

Job No.

Direct Materials

Direct Materials

50

$10,000

$10,000

51

39,000

39,000

52

30,000

30,000

Instructions

(a) Calculate the predetermined overhead rate for 2012, assuming Deglman Manufacturing estimates total manufacturing overhead costs of $980,000, direct labor costs of $700,000, and direct labor hours of 20,000 for the year.

(b) Open job cost sheets for Jobs 50, 51, and 52. Enter the January 1 balances on the job cost sheet for Job No. 50.

(c) Prepare the journal entries to record the purchase of raw materials, the factory labor costs incurred, and them anufacturing overhead costs incurred during the month of January.

(d) Prepare the journal entries to record the assignment of direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead costs to production. In assigning manufacturing overhead costs, use the overhead rate calculated in (a). Post all costs to the job cost sheets as necessary.

(e) Total the job cost sheets for any job(s) completed during the month. Prepare the journal entry (or entries) to record the completion of any job(s) during the month.

(f) Prepare the journal entry (or entries) to record the sale of any job(s) during the month.

(g) What is the balance in the Finished Goods Inventory account at the end of the month? What does this balance consist of?

(h) What is the amount of over- or under applied overhead?

for the year ended december 31 2012 the job cost sheets of cinta company contained t 538802

For the year ended December 31, 2012, the job cost sheets of Cinta Company contained the following data.

Job

Direct

Direct

Manufacturing

Total

Number

Explanation

Materials

Labor

Overhead

Costs

7640

Balance 1/1

$25,000

$24,000

$28,800

$ 77,800

Current year’s costs

30,000

36,000

43,200

109,200

7641

Balance 1/1

11,000

18,000

21,600

50,600

Current year’s costs

43,000

48,000

57,600

148,600

7642

Current year’s costs

58,000

55,000

66,000

179,000

Other data:

1. Raw materials inventory totaled $15,000 on January 1. During the year, $140,000 of raw materials were purchased on account.

2. Finished goods on January 1 consisted of Job No. 7638 for $87,000 and Job No. 7639 for $92,000.

3. Job No. 7640 and Job No. 7641 were completed during the year.

4. Job Nos. 7638, 7639, and 7641 were sold on account for $530,000.

5. Manufacturing overhead incurred on account totaled $120,000.

6. Other manufacturing overhead consisted of indirect materials $14,000, indirect labor $18,000, and depreciation on factory machinery $8,000.

Instructions

(a) Prove the agreement of Work in Process Inventory with job cost sheets pertaining to unfinished work. (Hint: Use a single T account for Work in Process Inventory.) Calculate each of the following, then post each to the T account: (1) beginning balance, (2) direct materials, (3) direct labor, (4) manufacturing overhead, and (5) completed jobs. (b) Prepare the adjusting entry for manufacturing overhead, assuming the balance is allocated entirely to Cost of Goods Sold.

(c) Determine the gross profit to be reported for 2012.

stellar inc is a construction company specializing in custom patios 538803

Stellar Inc. is a construction company specializing in custom patios. The patios are constructed of concrete, brick, fiberglass, and lumber, depending upon customer preference. On June 1, 2012, the general ledger for Stellar Inc. contains the following data.

Raw Materials Inventory

$4,200

Manufacturing Overhead Applied

$32,640

Work in Process Inventory

$5,540

Manufacturing Overhead Incurred

$31,650

Subsidiary data for Work in Process Inventory on June 1 are as follows.

Job Cost Sheets

Customer Job

Cost Element

Gannon

Rosenthal

Linton

Direct materials

$ 600

$ 800

$ 900

Direct labor

320

540

580

Manufacturing overhead

400

675

725

$1,320

$2,015

$2,205

During June, raw materials purchased on account were $4,900, and all wages were paid. Additional overhead costs consisted of depreciation on equipment $700 and miscellaneous costs of $400 incurred on account.

A summary of materials requisition slips and time tickets for June shows the following.

Customer Job

Materials Requisition Slips

Time Tickets

Gannon

$ 800

$ 450

Koss

2,000

800

Rosenthal

500

360

Linton

1,300

1,200

Gannon

300

390

4,900

3,200

General use

1,500

1,200

$6,400

$4,400

Overhead was charged to jobs at the same rate of $1.25 per dollar of direct labor cost. The patios for customers Gannon, Rosenthal, and Linton were completed during June and sold for a total of $18,900. Each customer paid in full.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the June transactions: (i) for purchase of raw materials, factory labor costs incurred, and manufacturing overhead costs incurred; (ii) assignment of direct materials, labor, and overhead to production; and (iii) completion of jobs and sale of goods.

(b) Post the entries to Work in Process Inventory.

(c) Reconcile the balance in Work in Process Inventory with the costs of unfinished jobs.

(d) Prepare a cost of goods manufactured schedule for June.

agassi manufacturing company uses a job order cost system in each of its three 538804

Agassi Manufacturing Company uses a job order cost system in each of its three manufacturing departments. Manufacturing overhead is applied to jobs on the basis of direct labor cost in Department D, direct labor hours in Department E, and machine hours in Department K. In establishing the predetermined overhead rates for 2012, the following estimates were made for the year.

Department

D

E

K

Manufacturing overhead

$1,200,000

$1,500,000

$900,000

Direct labor costs

$1,500,000

$1,250,000

$450,000

Direct labor hours

100,000

125,000

40,000

Machine hours

400,000

500,000

120,000

During January, the job cost sheets showed the following costs and production data.

Department

D

E

K

Direct materials used

$140,000

$126,000

$78,000

Direct labor costs

$120,000

$110,000

$37,500

Manufacturing overhead incurred

$ 99,000

$124,000

$79,000

Direct labor hours

8,000

11,000

3,500

Machine hours

34,000

45,000

10,400

Instructions

(a) Compute the predetermined overhead rate for each department.

(b) Compute the total manufacturing costs assigned to jobs in January in each department.

(c) Compute the under- or overapplied overhead for each department at January 31.

for the year ended december 31 2012 the job cost sheets of dosey company contained t 538807

For the year ended December 31, 2012, the job cost sheets of Dosey Company contained the following data.

Other data:
1. Raw materials inventory totaled $20,000 on January 1. During the year, $100,000 of raw materials were purchased on account.
2. Finished goods on January 1 consisted of Job No. 7648 for $93,000 and Job No. 7649 for $62,000.
3. Job No. 7650 and Job No. 7651 were completed during the year.
4. Job Nos. 7648, 7649, and 7650 were sold on account for $490,000.
5. Manufacturing overhead incurred on account totaled $135,000.
6. Other manufacturing overhead consisted of indirect materials $12,000, indirect labor $16,000 and depreciation on factory machinery $19,500.

Instructions
(a) Prove the agreement of Work in Process Inventory with job cost sheets pertaining to unfinished work. Calculate each of the following, then post each to the T account: 
(1) Beginning balance, 
(2) Direct materials, 
(3) Direct labor, 
(4) Manufacturing overhead, and 
(5) Completed jobs.
(b) Prepare the adjusting entry for manufacturing overhead, assuming the balance is allocated entirely to cost of goods sold.
(c) Determine the gross profit to be reported for 2012. 

robert perez is a contractor specializing in custom built jacuzzis on may 1 2012 his 538808

Robert Perez is a contractor specializing in custom-built jacuzzis. On May 1, 2012, his ledger contains the following data.

Raw Materials Inventory

30,000

Work in Process Inventory

12,200

Manufacturing Overhead

2,500 (dr.)

The Manufacturing Overhead account has debit totals of $12,500 and credit totals of $10,000. Subsidiary data for Work in Process Inventory on May 1 include:

Job Cost Sheets

Job

Manufacturing

by Customer

Direct Materials

Direct Labor

Overhead

Stiner

$2,500

$2,000

$1,400

Alton

2,000

1,200

840

Herman

900

800

560

$5,400

$4,000

$2,800

During May, the following costs were incurred: raw materials purchased on account $4,000, labor paid $7,000, and manufacturing overhead paid $1,400.

A summary of materials requisition slips and time tickets for the month of May reveals the following.

Job by Customer

Materials Requisition Slips

Time Tickets

Stiner

$500

$400

Alton

600

1,000

Herman

2,300

1,300

Smith

1,900

2,300

5,300

5,000

General use

1,500

2,000

$6,800

$7,000

Overhead was charged to jobs on the basis of $0.70 per dollar of direct labor cost. The jacuzzis for customers Stiner, Alton, and Herman were completed during May. The three jacuzzis were sold for a total of $36,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries for the May transactions: (i) for purchase of raw materials, factory labor costs incurred, and manufacturing overhead costs incurred; (ii) assignment of raw materials, labor, and overhead to production; and (iii) completion of jobs and sale of goods.

(b) Post the entries to Work in Process Inventory.

(c) Reconcile the balance in Work in Process Inventory with the costs of unfinished jobs.

(d) Prepare a cost of goods manufactured schedule for May.

bell company s fiscal year ends on june 30 the following accounts 538810

Bell Company’s fiscal year ends on June 30. The following accounts are found in its job order cost accounting system for the first month of the new fiscal year.

Raw Materials Inventory

1-Jul

Beginning balance

19,000

31-Jul

Requisitions

(a)

31

Purchases

90,400

31-Jul

Ending balance

(b)

Work in Process Inventory

1-Jul

Beginning balance

(c)

31-Jul

Jobs completed

(f)

31

Direct materials

80,000

31

Direct labor

(d)

31

Overhead

(e)

31-Jul

Ending balance

(g)

Finished Goods Inventory

1-Jul

Beginning balance

(h)

31-Jul

Cost of goods sold

(j)

31

Completed jobs

(i)

31-Jul

Ending balance

(k)

Factory Labor

31-Jul

Factory wages

(l)

31-Jul

Wages assigned

(m)

Manufacturing Overhead

31-Jul

Indirect materials

8,900

31-Jul

Overhead applied

117,000

31

Indirect labor

16,000

31

Other overhead

(n)

Other data:

1. On July 1, two jobs were in process: Job No. 4085 and Job No. 4086, with costs of $19,000 and $8,200, respectively.

2. During July, Job Nos. 4087, 4088, and 4089 were started. On July 31, only Job No. 4089 was unfinished. This job had charges for direct materials $2,000 and direct labor $1,500, plus manufacturing overhead. Manufacturing overhead was applied at the rate of 130% of direct labor cost.

3. On July 1, Job No. 4084, costing $145,000, was in the finished goods warehouse. On July 31, Job No. 4088, costing $138,000, was in finished goods.

4. Overhead was $3,000 under applied in July.

Instructions

List the letters (a) through (n) and indicate the amount pertaining to each letter. Show computations.

khan products company uses a job order cost system for a number of months there has 538811

Khan Products Company uses a job order cost system. For a number of months, there has been an ongoing rift between the sales department and the production department concerning a special-order product, TC-1. TC-1 is a seasonal product that is manufactured in batches of 1,000 units. TC-1 is sold at cost plus a markup of 40% of cost. The sales department is unhappy because fluctuating unit production costs significantly affect selling prices. Sales personnel complain that this has caused excessive customer complaints and the loss of considerable orders for TC-1. The production department maintains that each job order must be fully costed on the basis of the costs incurred during the period in which the goods are produced. Production personnel maintain that the only real solution to the problem is for the sales department to increase sales in the slack periods. Andrea Parley, president of the company, asks you as the company accountant to collect quarterly data for the past year on TC-1. From the cost accounting system, you accumulate the following production quantity and cost data.

Costs

1

2

3

4

Direct materials

$100,000

$220,000

$80,000

$200,000

Direct labor

60,000

132,000

48,000

120,000

Manufacturing overhead

105,000

153,000

97,000

125,000

Total

$265,000

$505,000

$225,000

$445,000

Production in batches

5

11

4

10

Unit cost (per batch)

$53,000

$45,909

$56,250

$44,500

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following questions.

(a) What manufacturing cost element is responsible for the fluctuating unit costs? Why?

(b) What is your recommended solution to the problem of fluctuating unit cost?

(c) Restate the quarterly data on the basis of your recommended solution.

in the course of routine checking of all journal entries prior to preparing year end 538812

In the course of routine checking of all journal entries prior to preparing year-end reports, Betty Eller discovered several strange entries. She recalled that the president’s son Joe had come in to help out during an especially busy time and that he had recorded some journal entries. She was relieved that there were only a few of his entries, and even more relieved that he had included

rather lengthy explanations. The entries Joe made were:

1

Work in Process Inventory

25000

Cash

25000

(This is for materials put into process. I don’t find the record that we paid for these, so I’m crediting Cash, because I know we’ll have to pay for them sooner or later.)

2

Manufacturing Overhead

12,000

Cash

12,000

(This is for bonuses paid to salespeople. I know they’re part of overhead, and I can’t find an account called “Non-factory Overhead” or “Other Overhead” so I’m putting it in Manufacturing Overhead. I have the check stubs, so I know we paid these.)

3

Wages Expense

120,000

Cash

120,000

(This is for the factory workers’ wages. I have a note that payroll taxes are $18,000. I still think that’s part of wages expense, and that we’ll have to pay it all in cash sooner or later, so I credited Cash for the wages and the taxes.)

4

Work in Process Inventory

3,000

Raw Materials Inventory

3,000

(This is for the glue used in the factory. I know we used this to make the products, even though we didn’t use very much on any one of the products. I got it out of inventory, so I credited an inventory account.)

Instructions

(a) How should Joe have recorded each of the four events?

(b) If the entry was not corrected, which financial statements (income statement or balance sheet) would be affected? What balances would be overstated or understated?

you are the management accountant for williams manufacturing your company does custo 538814

You are the management accountant for Williams Manufacturing. Your company does custom carpentry work and uses a job order costing system. Williams sends detailed job cost sheets to its customers, along with an invoice. The job cost sheets show the date materials were used, the dollar cost of materials, and the hours and cost of labor. A predetermined overhead application rate is used, and the total overhead applied is also listed. Nancy Kopay is a customer who recently had custom cabinets installed. Along with her check in payment for the work done, she included a letter. She thanked the company for including the detailed cost information but questioned why overhead was estimated. She stated that she would be interested in knowing exactly what costs were included in overhead, and she thought that other customers would, too. Instructions Prepare a letter to Ms. Kopay (address: 123 Cedar Lane, Altoona, KS 66651) and tell her why you did not send her information on exact costs of overhead included in her job. Respond to her suggestion that you provide this information.

lrf printing provides printing services to many different corporate clients 538815

LRF Printing provides printing services to many different corporate clients. Although LRF bids most jobs, some jobs, particularly new ones, are negotiated on a “cost-plus” basis. Cost-plus means that the buyer is willing to pay the actual cost plus a return (profit) on these costs to LRF. Alice Reiley, controller for LRF, has recently returned from a meeting where LRF’s president stated that he wanted her to find a way to charge more costs to any project that was on a costplus basis. The president noted that the company needed more profits to meet its stated goals this period. By charging more costs to the cost-plus projects and therefore fewer costs to the jobs that were bid, the company should be able to increase its profit for the current year. Alice knew why the president wanted to take this action. Rumors were that he was looking for a new position and if the company reported strong profits, the president’s opportunities would be enhanced. Alice also recognized that she could probably increase the cost of certain jobs by changing the basis used to allocate manufacturing overhead.

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) What are the ethical issues in this situation?

(c) What would you do if you were Alice Reiley?

many of you will work for a small business some of you will even own your own busine 538816

Many of you will work for a small business. Some of you will even own your own business. In order to operate a small business, you will need a good understanding of managerial accounting, as well as many other skills. Much information is available to assist people who are interested in starting a new business. A great place to start is the website provided by the Small Business Administration, which is an agency of the federal government whose purpose is to support small business.

Instructions

Go to www.sba.govand in the Small Business Planner, Plan Your Business link, review the material under “Get Ready.” Answer the following questions.

(a) What are some of the characteristics required of a small business owner?

(b) What are the top 10 reasons given for business failure?

data for cascio company are given in be16 8 production records indicate 538863

Data for Cascio Company are given in BE16-8. Production records indicate that 18,000 units were transferred out, and 2,000 units in ending work in process were 50% complete as to conversion cost and 100% complete as to materials. Prepare a cost reconciliation schedule.

The Smelting Department of Mathews Manufacturing Company has the following production and cost data for November.

Production: Beginning work in process 2,000 units that are 100% complete as to materials and 20% complete as to conversion costs; units transferred out 8,000 units; and ending work in process 7,000 units that are 100% complete as to materials and 40% complete as to conversion costs.Compute the equivalent units of production for (a) materials and (b) conversion costs for the month of November.

kopa company manufactures ch 21 through two processes mixing and packaging in july t 538868

Kopa Company manufactures CH-21 through two processes: Mixing and Packaging. In July, the following costs were incurred.

Mixing

Packaging

Raw materials used

$10,000

$28,000

Factory labor costs

8,000

36,000

Manufacturing overhead costs

12,000

54,000

Units completed at a cost of $21,000 in the Mixing Department are transferred to the Packaging Department. Units completed at a cost of $106,000 in the Packaging Department are transferred to Finished Goods. Journalize the assignment of these costs to the two processes and the transfer of units as appropriate.

the assembly department has the following production and cost data for the current m 538869

The assembly department has the following production and cost data for the current month.

Beginning

Units

Ending

Work in Process

Transferred Out

Work in Process

–0–

20,000

12,000

Materials are entered at the beginning of the process. The ending work in process units are 70% complete as to conversion costs. Compute the equivalent units of production for (a) materials and (b) conversion costs.

robert mallory has prepared the following list of statements about process cost acco 538871

Robert Mallory has prepared the following list of statements about process cost accounting.

1. Process cost systems are used to apply costs to similar products that are mass-produced in a continuous fashion.

2. A process cost system is used when each finished unit is indistinguishable from another.

3. Companies that produce soft drinks, motion pictures, and computer chips would all use process cost accounting.

4. In a process cost system, costs are tracked by individual jobs.

5. Job order costing and process costing track different manufacturing cost elements.

6. Both job order costing and process costing account for direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.

7. Costs flow through the accounts in the same basic way for both job order costing and process costing.

8. In a process cost system, only one work in process account is used.

9. In a process cost system, costs are summarized in a job cost sheet.

10. In a process cost system, the unit cost is total manufacturing costs for the period divided by the units produced during the period.

Instructions

Identify each statement as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.

calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory analyze effects of each method on 538770

Calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory; analyze effects of each method on financial statements apply lower-of-cost-or-market rule; calculate inventory turnover ratio. (Lo 3, 4,5,6)

The following series of transactions occurred during 2007.

January 1

Beginning inventory was 70 units at $10 each

January 15

Purchased 100 units at $1 1 each

February 4

Sold 60 units at $20 each

March 10

Purchased5 0 units at $12 each

April 15

Sold 70 units at $20 each

June3 0

Purchased1 00 units at $13 each

August 4

Sold I 10 units at $20 each

October 1

Purchased8 0 units at $14 each

December 5

Sold 50 units at $21 each

Required

a. Calculate the value of the ending inventory and cost of goods sold, assuming the company uses a periodic inventory system and the FIFO cost flow assumption.

b. Calculate the value of the ending inventory and cost of goods sold, assuming the company uses a periodic inventory system and the LIFO cost flow assumption.

c. Calculate the value of the ending inventory and cost of goods sold, assuming the company uses a periodic inventory system and the weighted average cost flow assumption.

d. Which of the three methods will result in the highest cost of goods sold for the year ended December 31, 2007?

e. Which of the three methods will provide the most current ending inventory value for the balance sheet at December 31, 2007?

f. How will the differences between the methods affect the income statement for the year and the balance sheet at year end?

g. At the end of the year, the current replacement cost of the inventory is $1,100.

Indicate at what amount the company’s inventory will be reported using the lower-of-cost-or-market rule for each method (FIFO, LIFO, and weighted average cost).

h. Calculate the company’s inventory turnover ratio and days in inventory for the year for each method in items a, b, and c.

the following merchandise inventory transactions occurred during the month of june f 538771

Calculate cost of goods sold, ending inventory, and inventory turnover ratio. (LO 3, 6)

The following merchandise inventory transactions occurred during the month of June for the Furlong Corporation

June 1

Inventory on hand was 1,000 units at $8.00 each

June 7

Sold 750 units at $10.50 each

June 18

Purchased2 ,000u nits at $8.80e ach

June 21

Sold2,225 units at $10.50 each

Jwe2’7

Purchased2 ,500u nits at $10.00e ach

Required

a. Assume Furlong uses a periodic inventory system and compute the cost of goods sold for the month ended June 30 and ending inventory at June 30 using each of the following cost flow methods:

1. FIFO

2. LIFO

3. Weighted average cost

b. Using the information for item a, calculate the inventory turnover ratio and days in inventory for the month of June for each method.

c. Assume Furlong uses the perpetual inventory system and compute the cost of goods sold for the month ended June 30 and ending inventory at June 30 using each of the following cost flow methods:

1. FIFO

2. LTFO

calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory analyze effects of each method on 538773

P5-11A. Calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory; analyze effects of each method on financial statements; apply lower-of-cost-or-market rule; calculate inventory turnover ratio. (LO 3,4,5,6)

The following information is for Manuel’s Pharmacy Supply Inc. for the year ending December 31, 2010.

At January 1, 2010:

. Cash amounted to $19.375.

. Beginning inventory was $16,000 (160 units at 9100 each).

. Contributed capital was $15,000.

. Retained earnings was $20,375

Transactions during 2010:

. purchased 150 units at 9110 each

. purchased 190 more units at $120 each

. Cash sales of 390 units at $200 each

. Paid $11,500 cash for operating expenses

. Paid cash for income tax at a rate of 30Vo of net income

Required

a. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year and ending inventory at December 31, 2010, using each of the following cost flow methods:

1. FIFO periodic

2. LIFO periodic

3. Weighted average cost periodic

b. For each method, prepare the balance sheet at December 31, 2010, a multistep income statements, statement cash flows, and statement of changes in shareholder’s equity for Manuel for the year ended December 31, 2010.

c. What is income before taxes and net income after taxes under each of the three inventory cost flow assumptions? What observation scan you make about net income from the analysis of the three methods?

d. At the end of the year, the current replacement cost of the inventory is $ 12,750.

Indicate at what amount the company’s inventory will be reported using the lower of-cost-or-market rule for each method (FIFO, LIFO, and weighted average cost).

e. For each method, calculate the inventory turnover ratio and average days in inventory for the year ended December 3I,2010.

the following information is from the financial statements of afua s international p 538774

Calculate the gross profit ratio and inventory turnover ratio. (LO 6)

The following information is from the financial statements of Afua’s International Pasta Corporation.

For year ended (amounts in thousands)

June 30,2 009

June3 0,2 008

June3 0,2 007

Sales( domestic)

$416,049

$429,813

$44s,849

Cost of sales

92,488

98,717

110,632

Inventory

17,030

16,341

12,659

Required

a. Calculate the gross profit ratio for the last 2 years shown.

b. Calculate the inventory turnover ratio for the last 2 years shown.

c. What information do these comparisons provide?

hines fruit corp sells fresh fruit to tourists on interstate 75 in florida a tornado 538775

Estimate inventory.

Hines Fruit Corp. sells fresh fruit to tourists on Interstate 75 in Florida. A tornado destroyed the entire inventory in late June. In order to file an insurance claim, Hazel and Euglenia, the owners of the company, must estimate the value of the lost inventory. Records from January 1 though the date of the tornado in June indicated that Hines Fruit Corp. started the year with $4,000 worth of inventory on hand. Purchases for the year amounted to $9,000, and sales up to the date of the tornado were $16,000. Gross profit percentage has traditionally been 30%.

Required

a. How much should Hazel and Euglenia request from the insurance company?

b. Suppose that one case of fruit was spared by the tornado. The cost of that case was $700. How much was the inventory loss under these conditions?

deborah hartranft s professional costumers inc made the following purchases in novem 538776

P5-18. Analyze purchases of merchandise inventory. GO 1)

Deborah Hartranft’s Professional Costumers Inc. made the following purchases in November of the current year.

November7

Purchased$ 2,5000 merchandise terms 3/15, n/Z0,FOB shipping point

November 12

Purchased $4,3000 merchandise terms l/05,nl25,FOB destination

November 16

Purchased $6,2000 merchandise terms 2 /10, n/4},FOB shipping point

Required

a. For each of the listed purchases, how many days does the company have to take advantage of the purchase discount?

b. What is the amount of the cash discount allowed in each case?

c. Assume the freight charges are $115 on each purchase. What is the amount of freight that Professional Costumers must pay for each purchase?

d. What is the total cost of inventory for Professional Costumers for the month of November, assuming that all discounts were taken?

international sports merchandising inc made the following purchases in august of the 538777

Analyze purchases of merchandise inventory. (LO 1)

International Sports Merchandising Inc. made the following purchases in August of the current year.

August 5

Purchased $12,2000 of athletics hoes terms l/I5, nlz,FOB destination

August 14

Purchased $11 ,600o f training gear, terms2 /10, n/15, FOB shipping point

August 19

Purchased $3,500 of tennis rackets and tennis balls, terms 3/05. n/10. FOB destination

Required

a. For each purchase by what date is the payment due, assuming the company takes

advantage of the discount?

b. For each purchase, when is the payment due if the company does not take advantage of the discount?

c. In each case, what is the amount of the cash discount allowed?

d. Assume the freight charges are $170 on each purchase For which purchases is International Sports Merchandising responsible for the freight charges?

e. What is the total amount of inventory costs for the month of August, assuming that all discounts were taken?

record merchandising transactions prepare financial statements and calculate gross p 538778

Record merchandising transactions, prepare financial statements, and calculate gross profit ratio: perpetual inventory system. (LO 1, 2,4,6)

At the beginning of April, Morgan Parts Company Inc. started with a contribution of $20,000 cash in exchange for common stock from its shareholders. The company engaged in the following transactions during the month of April.

April 3

Purchased merchandise on account from Thompson Supply Co. for $5,000, terms 1/10, n/30

April 4

Sold merchandise on account to Brown Company for $3,500, terms

April 7

2/10,n/130. The cost of the merchandises old was 91,500.

April 8

Paid $100 freight on the sale to Brown Company

April 10

Received credit from Thompson Supply Co. for merchandise returned for $500

April 15

Paid Thompson Supply Co. in full

April 16

Received payment from Brown Company for sale made on April 4 Purchased merchandise for cash for $3,200

April 17

Received refund from supplier for returned merchandise on April 16 cash purchase of $350

April 19

Purchased merchandise on account from Kelsey Distributors for $4,100, terms 2/10, n/30

April 20

Paid $350 freight on April 19 purchase

Apnl2l

Sold merchandise for cash for $12,110. The cost of the merchandise sold was for $9,500.

Apr1l24

Purchased merchandise for cash for $5,300

April 25

Paid Kelsey Distributors for purchase on April 19

Aprtl27

Gave refund of $800 to customer from April 2l. The cost of the returned merchandise was $535.

April 30

Sold merchandise of $2,000 on account with the terms 2/10, n/30. The merchandise cost $1,200.

Required

a. Enter each transaction into the accounting equation, assuming Morgan Parts

Company Inc. uses a perpetual inventory system. Start with the opening balances in cash and common stock described at the beginning of the problem.

b. Calculate the balance in the inventory account at the end of April.

c. Prepare the four financial statements (including multiple-step income statement) for the month of April. (Balance sheet at April 30.)

d. Calculate the gross profit ratio.

record merchandising transactions and prepare single step and multiple step income s 538779

Record merchandising transactions and prepare single-step and multiple-step income statement perpetual inventory system.(LO 1, 2, 4,6)

FOXX Supplier Inc. sells plant food to retail landscaping and gardening stores. At the beginning of May, FOXX Supplier had a $15,000 balance in cash and $15,000 in common stock. During the month of May, the following transactions took place

May 3

Purchased 500 pounds of plant food on account from the manufacturer for $20 per pound. The terms were 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. Freight costs were $90.

May 6

Sold 50 pounds of plant food to Center Street Garden Supply for $35 per pound on account, with terms 2110, n/30, FOB destination’ Freight costs were $15.

May 10

Paid the manufacturer for the May 3 purchase

May 15

Received payment in full from Center Street Garden Supply

May 17

Sold 200 pounds of plant food to Perry’s Plants on account for $34 per pound, with terms I/10, n130, FOB shipping point. Freight costs were $100.

May 19

Returned 10 pounds of spoiled plant food to the manufacturer and received cash payment of $20 per pound

May 20

Purchased 300 pounds of plant food on account from the manufacturer for $20 per pound. Terms were n/30, FOB destination. Freight costs were $50.

May 24

Sold 150 pounds of plant food to Sam’s Pest Control for $24 each for cash. Sam’s picked up the order, so there were no shipping costs.

May 31

Paid for the purchase on May 20

May 3 1

Declared and paid cash dividends of $ 150

Required

a. Enter each transaction into the accounting equation, assuming FOXX Supplier Inc. uses a perpetual inventory system. Start with the opening balances in cash and common stock described at the beginning of the problem’

b. Calculate the cost of goods sold for May and the ending balance in inventory.

c. Prepare the multiple-step income statement and the statement of changes in shareholders’ equity for the month of May, and the balance sheet at May 3 1.

d. Calculate the gross profit ratio for FOXX Supplier. Explain what the ratio measures.

you are the accountant for celebration company and your assistant has prepared the f 538780

Analyze accounting methods and prepare corrected income statement (. LO 1,2, 4)

You are the accountant for Celebration Company, and your assistant has prepared the following income statement for the year ended December 31,2006.

Celebration Company
Income Statement
For the year ended December 31,2 010

Sales revenue

$650000

Sales returns and allowances

$18,100

Freight expenses

2,000

Selling expenses

48,300

(68,400)

Net sales

581,600

Expenses

Cost of goods sold

350,000

Salary expenses

82,000

Rent expenses

10,000

Administrative expenses

23,500

Dividends

4,000

Total expenses

469,500

Net income

$112,100

You have uncovered the following facts:

1. Sales revenue includes $6,000 of items that have been back-ordered. (The items have not been delivered to the customers, although the customers have paid for the items.)

2. Selling expenses includes $4,000 of allowances that were given to customers who received damaged products.

3. Rent expense includes $400 worth of rent that applies to 2011.

4. Salary expenses include $10,000 loaned to one of the executives for a boat.

a. Prepare a corrected multistep income statement for the year. Celebration shows sales as the net amount only on its income statement.

b. Write a memo to your assistant explaining why each effort you found is incorrect and what the correct account instrument should be.

barney s flowerpot company uses a perpetual inventory system so the cost of goods so 538781

Analyze results of physical count of inventory and calculate cost of goods sold.

(LO 1,2,7,8)

Barney’s Flowerpot Company uses a perpetual inventory system, so the cost of goods sold is recorded and the inventory records are updated at the time of every sale. The company’s accounting records showed the following related to May 2008 transactions

Units

Cost

Beginning inventory, May 1

300

$ 600

+

Purchases during June

4,000

8,000

=

Goods available for sale

4,300

$8,600

Cost of goods sold

3,300

6,600

=

Ending inventory May 31

1,000

$2,000

On May 31, 2008, Barney conducted a physical count of its inventory and discovered there were actually 900 units of inventory on hand.

Required

a. Using the information from the physical count, correct Barney’s cost of goods sold for June.

b. How would this correction change the financial statements for the year?

c. What are some possible causes of the difference between the inventory amounts in Barney’s accounting records and the inventory amount from the physical count?

calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory and analyze effect of each method 538782

Calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory and analyze effect of each method on the financial statements

Washington Company had the following sales and purchases during 2009, its first year of business

January 8

Purchased 125 units at $100 each

February 20

Sold 75 units at $150 each

April 13

Sold 35 units at $150 each

June2 8

Purchased2 35 units at $105 each

August 2

Sold 175 units at $150 each

November 24

Purchased 140 units at $110 each

Required

a. Calculate the ending inventory, the cost of goods sold, and the gross profit for the

December 31, 2009, financial statements under each of the following assumptions:

1. FIFO periodic

2. LIFO periodic

3. Weighted average cost periodic

b. How will the differences between the methods affect the income statement and balance sheet for the year?

calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory analyze effects of each method on 538783

Calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory; analyze effects of each method on financial statements apply lower-of-cost-or-market rule calculate inventory turnover ratio. (LO 3,4, 5,6)

Hillary’s Diamonique buys and then resells a single product. Here is some information concerning Hillary’s inventory activity during the month of August 2008.

August 2

860 units on hand at a total value of $10.320

August 6

Sold 400 units at $14 per unit

August 8

Purchase 640 units at $11 per unit

August 12

Purchase 425 units at $10 per unit

August1 5

Sold 600 units at $12 per unit

Augus2t 1

Purchase 300 units at $9 per unit

August 24

Sold 800 units at $16 per unit

Augus3t 1

Purchased 100 units at $8 per unit

Hillary’s uses a periodic inventory system.

Required

a. Calculate the value of the ending inventory and cost of goods sold, assuming the company uses a periodic inventory system and the FIFO cost flow assumption.

b. Calculate the value of the ending inventory and cost of goods sold, assuming the company uses a periodic inventory system and the LIFO cost flow assumption.

c. Calculate the value of the ending inventory and cost of goods sold, assuming the company uses a periodic inventory system and the weighted average cost flow assumption.

d. Which of the three methods will result in the highest cost of goods sold for August?

e. Which of the three methods will provide the most current ending inventory value for Hillary’s balance sheet at August 31,2008?

f. How would the differences between the methods affect Hillary’s income statement to August and balance sheet at August 31, 2008?

g. At the end of the year, the current replacement cost of the inventory is $6,730.

Indicate at what amount the company’s inventory will be reported using the lower of-cost-or-market rule for each method (FIFO, LIFO, and weighted average cost).

h. Calculate the company’s inventory turnover ratio and days in inventory for the month for each method in items a. b. and c.

the following merchandise inventory transactions occurred during the month of novemb 538784

Calculate cost of goods sold, ending inventory, and inventory turnover ratio. (LO 3, 6)

The following merchandise inventory transactions occurred during the month of November for Party Heaven Inc.

November 5

Inventory on hand was 2,000 units at a cost $4.00 each

November 12

Sold 1.500 units at $6.00 each

November 16

Purchased 4,000 units at $4.40 each

November 23

Sold 4,300 units at $6.00 each

November2 9

Purchased5 ,000u nits at $5.00e ach

Required

a. Assume Party Heaven uses a periodic inventory system and compute the cost of goods sold for the month ended November 30 and ending inventory at November 30 using each of the following cost flow methods:

1. FIFO

2, LIFO

3. Weighted average cost

b. Using the information for item a, calculate the inventory turnover ratio and days in inventory for the month of November for each method.

c. Assume Party Heaven uses the perpetual inventory system and compute the cost of goods sold for the month ended November 30 and ending inventory at November 30 using each of the following cost flow methods:

1. FIFO

2, LIFO

analyze effect of cost flow method on financial statements and inventory turnover ra 538785

Analyze effect of cost flow method on financial statements and inventory turnover ratio. (LO 2,4,6)

Castana Company is considering changing inventory cost flow methods. Castana’s primary objective is to minimize their tax liability. Currently, the firm uses weighted average cost.

Data for 2007 are provided.

Beginning inventory (2,000 units) Purchases

$10,000

5,000 units at $6 each

$30,000

4,000 units at $5.50 each

26,000

6,000 units at $7 each

42,000

Sales

15,000 units at $10 each

$150,000

Operating expenses were $12,000 and the company’s tax rate is 25%.

Required

a. Prepare the income statement for 2007 using each of the following methods:

1. FIFO

2. LIFO

b. Which method provides the more current balance sheet inventory balance at December 31,2007? Explain your answer.

c. Which method provides the more current cost of goods sold for the year ended December 37 , 2007 ? Explain your answer.

d. Which method provides the better inventory turnover ratio for the year? Explain your answer.

e. In order to meet Castana’s goal, what is your recommendation to Castana Company? Explain your answer

calculate the gross profit ratio and inventory turnover ratio lo 6 538788

Calculate the gross profit ratio and inventory turnover ratio. (LO 6)

The following information is from the financial statements of Toys for Toddlers Company

For year ended

December 31,

December 31,

December 31,

(amount sin thousands)

2007

2006

2005

Sales

$2,534,135

52,187,438

$ 1,925,319

Cost of goods sold

1,634,562

1,383,655

1,229,277

Inventory

54,353

47,433

45,334

Required

a. Calculate the gross profit ratio for the last 2 years shown.

b. Calculate the inventory turnover ratio for the last 2 years shown.

c. What information do these comparisons provide?

cynthia s cotton candy company sells cotton candy to visitors at a traveling county 538789

P5-138. (Appendix B) Estimate inventory. GO 9)

Cynthia’s Cotton Candy Company sells cotton candy to visitors at a traveling county fair.

During a drought a fire destroyed the entire inventory in late July. In order to file an insurance claim, Cynthia, the owner of the company, must estimate the value of the lost inventory.

Records from January 1 through the date of the fire in July indicated that Cynthia’s Cotton Candy Company started the year with $4,250 worth of inventory on hand. Purchases for the year amounted to $8,000, and sales up to the date of the fire were $17,500. Gross profit percentage has traditionally been 35%.

Required

a. How much should Cynthia request from the insurance company?

b. Suppose that one bag of cotton candy mix was spared by the fire. The cost of that bag was $50. How much was the inventory loss under these conditions?

manufacturing cost data for orlando company which uses a job order cost system are p 538791

Manufacturing cost data for Orlando Company, which uses a job order cost system, are presented below.

Case A

Case B

Case C

Direct materials used

$ (a)

$ 83,000

$ 63,150

Direct labor

50,000

140,000

(h)

Manufacturing overhead applied

42,500

(d)

(i)

Total manufacturing costs

145,650

(e)

213,000

Work in process 1/1/12

(b)

15,500

18,000

Total cost of work in process

201,500

(f)

(j)

Work in process 12/31/12

(c)

11,800

(k)

Cost of goods manufactured

192,300

(g)

222,000

Instructions

Indicate the missing amount for each letter. Assume that in all cases manufacturing overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor cost and the rate is the same.

a job cost sheet of sandoval company is given below 538793

A job cost sheet of Sandoval Company is given below.

Job Cost Sheet

JOB NO.

469

Quantity

2,500

ITEM

White Lion Cages

Date Requested

7/2

FOR

Todd Company

Date Completed

7/31

Date

Direct
Materials

Direct
Labor

Manufacturing
Overhead

7/10

700

12

900

15

440

550

22

380

475

24

1,600

27

1,500

31

540

675

Cost of completed job:

Direct materials

Direct labor

Manufacturing overhead

Total cost

Unit cost

Instructions

(a) Answer the following questions.

(1) What are the source documents for direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead costs assigned to this job?

(2) What is the predetermined manufacturing overhead rate?

(3) What are the total cost and the unit cost of the completed job? (Round unit cost to nearest cent.)

(b) Prepare the entry to record the completion of the job.

torre corporation incurred the following transactions 538794

Torre Corporation incurred the following transactions. 1. Purchased raw materials on account $46,300. 2. Raw Materials of $36,000 were requisitioned to the factory. An analysis of the materials requisition slips indicated that $6,800 was classified as indirect materials. 3. Factory labor costs incurred were $55,900, of which $51,000 pertained to factory wages payable and $4,900 pertained to employer payroll taxes payable. 4. Time tickets indicated that $50,000 was direct labor and $5,900 was indirect labor. 5. Overhead costs incurred on account were $80,500. 6. Manufacturing overhead was applied at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost. 7. Goods costing $88,000 were completed and transferred to finished goods. 8. Finished goods costing $75,000 to manufacture were sold on account for $103,000. Instructions Journalize the transactions. (Omit explanations.)

for each of the following independent situations calculate the amount that the purch 538722

Calculate cost of inventory. (LO1)

For each of the following independent situations, calculate the amount that the purchasing company would record as the cost of each inventory purchase.

a. Invoice price of goods is $5,000. Purchase terms are 2/70, n/30 and the invoice is paid in the week of receipt. The shipping terms are F.O.B. shipping point, and the shipping costs amount to $200.

b. Invoice price of goods is $3,000. Purchase terms are 4110n, l30 and the invoice is paid in the week of receipt. The shipping terms are F.O.B. destination, and the shipping costs amount to $250.

c. Invoice price of goods is $2,500. Purchase terms are 2/10, n/30 and the invoice is paid 15 days after receipt. The shipping terms are F.O.B. shipping point, and the shipping costs amount to $250.

using the following information calculate inventory turnover ratio the average days 538732

Calculate the gross profit ratio, inventory turnover ratio, and average days in inventory. GO 6)

Using the following information, calculate inventory turnover ratio, the average days in inventory, and the gross profit ratio for Barkley Company for the year ended December 31, 2012. (Round to two decimal places.)

Sale

$ 125,000

Cost of goods sold

75,000

Ending inventory, December 3I, 2011

15,275

Ending inventory; December 31,2012

18,750

Net income

26,500

calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory periodic weighted average cost 538739

Calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory: periodic weighted average cost.

(LO 3,4)

The For Fish Company sells commercial fish tanks. The company began 2006 with 1,000 units of inventory on hand. These units cost $150 each. The following transactions related to the company’s merchandise inventory occurred during the first quarter of 2006.

January 20

Purchased 500 units for $160 each

February 18

Purchased 600 units for $170 each

March 28

Purchased4 00 units for $180 each

Total purchases

1,500 units

All unit costs include the purchase price and freight charges paid by For Fish. During the quarter ending March 3I,2006, sales totaled 1,700 units, leaving 800 units in ending inventory.

Assume For Fish uses a periodic inventory system and the weighted average cost flow method.

a. Calculate the cost of goods sold that will appear on For Fish Company’s income statement for the qualifier ending March 31.

b. Determine the cost of inventory that will appear on For Fish Company’s balance sheet at the end of March.

calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory perpetual weighted average cost lo 538740

Calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory: perpetual weighted average cost. (LO 3,4)

Advanced Music Technology Inc. sells MP3 players. The company began the third quarter of the year on July l, 2008, with 750 units of inventory on hand. These units cost $50 each.

The following transactions related to the company’s merchandise inventory occurred during the third quarter of 2008.

July 15

Sold 450 units for $150 each

August 29

Purchased5 00 units for $90 each

September 15

Sold 450 units for $200 each

September2 8

Purchased5 00 units for $11 7.50e ach

September3 0

Sold 800 units for $250 each

All unit costs include the purchase price and freight charges paid by Advanced Music Technology.

Assume Advanced Music Technology uses a perpetual inventory system and the weighted average cost flow method.

a. Calculate the cost of goods sold that will appear on Advanced Music Technology’s income statement for the quarter ending September 30.

b. Determine the cost of inventory that will appear on Advanced Music Technology’s balance sheet at the end of September

use the following data to answer the following question 538741

Apply the lower-of-cost-or-market rule. (LO 5)

Use the following data to answer the following question.

Ending inventory at cost, December 31,2011

17,095

Ending inventory at replacement cost, December 37, 2011,

16,545

Cost of goods sold, balance at December 31,2011

250,165

Sales revenue, balance at December 31 ,2011

535,780

Cash, balance at December 3I,2011

165,340

What inventory amount will this firm report on its balance sheet at December 31,2011?

ian s small appliances reported cost of goods sold as follows 538746

Calculate inventory errors. (LO 8)

Ian’s Small Appliances reported cost of goods sold as follows.

200s

2006

Beginning inventory

$130,000

$ 50,000

Purchases

275,000

240,000

Cost of goods available for sale

405,000

290,000

Ending inventory

50,000

40,00

Cost of goods sold

$355,000

$250,00

I an’s made two errors:

1. 2005 ending inventory was understated by 95,000.

2. 2006 ending inventory was overstated by $2,000.

Calculate the correct cost of goods sold for 2005 and2006.

assume the following transactions for jennifer s fix it up inc took place during mar 538748

Record merchandising transaction perpetual inventory system.( LO I,2)

Assume the following transactions for Jennifer’s Fix-It-Up Inc. took place during March. Jennifer’s uses a perpetual inventory system. Enter each of the transactions into the accounting equation.

March 3 Purchased televisions from Sanyo on account at a total cost of $650,000, terms 2/10, n/25

March 8 Paid freight of $1,000 on televisions purchased from Sanyo March 16 Returned televisions to Sanyo because they were damaged. Received a credit of $ 1 5,000 from Sanyo.

March22 Sold televisions costing $125,000 for $225,000 to Joe’s Sport’s Bar & Grille on account, terms n/15

March 28 Gave a credit of $2,800 to Joe’s Sport’s Bar & Grille for the return of a television not ordered. Jennifer’s cost was $1,600.

discount wines inc had a beginning inventory balance of 85 450 and engaged in the fo 538749

Record merchandising transaction perpetual inventory system.( LOI,2)

Discount Wines Inc. had a beginning inventory balance of $85,450 and engaged in the following transactions during the month of October.

October 2 Purchased $15,000 of merchandise inventory on account from Joe’s Winery with terms 2/10, nl30 and FOB destination. Freight costs for this purchase were $750.

October 5 Returned $ 100 of damaged merchandise to Joe’s October6 Sold $18,000 of merchandise to Tasty Catering Service on account, terms2 115,n /30 and FOB shipping point. Freight costs were $155.

The cost of the inventory sold was $10,500.

October l0 Paid the amount owed to Joe’s

October 10 Discount granted Tasty an allowance on the October 6 sale of $200 for some soured wine.

October 23 Received payment from Tasty

October 29 Paid sales salaries of $1, 500

October 31 Paid the rent on the ware house of $1,450

Enter each of the transactions for Discount Wines Inc. into the accounting equation, assuming they use a perpetual inventory system.

calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory periodic weighted average cost 538750

Calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory: periodic weighted average cost.

(LO 3,4)

Sandy’s Clean Carpet Company sells commercial vacuums. The company’s fiscal year begins July 1,2006, and ends June 30, 2007. Sandy’s began the year with 1,500 units of inventory on hand. These units cost $200 each.T he following transactions related to the company’s merchandise inventory occurred during the first quarter of the year’

July 15

Purchased4 50 units for $195 each

August 28

Purchased5 75 units for $190 eac

September1 0

Purchased6 00 units for $185 each

Total purchase

1,625 units

All unit costs include the purchase price and freight charges paid by Sandy’s Clean Carpet.

During the quarter ending September 30, 2006, sales in units totaled 1,950 units.

Assume Sandy’s Clean Carpet uses a periodic inventory system and the weighted average cost flow method.

a. Calculate the cost of goods sold that will appear on Sandy’s Clean Carpet Company’s income statement for the quarter ending September 30.

b. Determine the cost of inventory that will appear on Sandy’s Clean Carpet Company’s balance sheet at the end of September

calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory perpetual weighted average cost lo 538751

Calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory: perpetual weighted average cost. (LO 3,4)

Cutting Edge Enterprises Inc. sells flat-screen televisions. The company began the last quarter of the year on October 1, 2009, with 750 units of inventory on hand. These units cost $1,000 each. The following transactions related to the company’s merchandise inventory occurred during the last quarter of2009.

October 15

Sold 450 units for $3,000 each

October2 9

Purchased5 00 units for $1,800e ach

November 15

Sold 450 units for 94,000 each

December 28

Purchased 500 units for 92,350 each

December 30

Sold 800 units for $5,000 each

All unit costs include the purchase price and freight charges paid by Cutting Edge Enterprises.

Assume Cutting Edge uses a perpetual inventory system and the weighted average cost flow method.

a. Calculate the cost of goods sold that will appear on Cutting Edge Enterprises’ income statement for the quarter ending December 31, 2009.

b. Determine the cost of inventory that will appear on Cutting Edge Enterprises’ balance sheet at the end of December.

radio tech sales amp service inc began the month of april with three top of the line 538752

Calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory: periodic FIFO. (LO 3,4)

Radio Tech. Sales & Service Inc. began the month of April with three top-of-the-line radios in inventory, Model # RD58V6Q; each unit cost $235. During April, nine additional radios of the same model were purchased.

April 9

Purchased three units at $230 each

April 11

Sold five units at $350 each

April 17

Purchased two units at $195 each

April 18

Sold one unit at $350

April20

Sold two units at $350 each

April 28

Purchased four units at $180 each

Assume Radio Tech. uses a periodic inventory system and the FIFO cost flow method.

a. Calculate the cost of goods sold that will appear on Radio Tech.’s income statement for the month of April.

b. Determine the cost of inventory that will appear on Radio Tech.’s balance sheet at the end of April.

use the following data to answer the following question 538756

Apply the lower-of-cost-or-market rule. (LO 5)

Use the following data to answer the following question.

Ending inventory at cost, June 30, 2010

$25,18

Cost of goods sold, balance at June 30, 2010

25,130

Sales revenue, balance at June 30, 2010

150,550

Cash, balance at June 30,2010

(75 5)

Ending inventory at replacement cost, June 30, 2010

285,155

ASB Hardware Inc. uses a perpetual inventory system and the FIFO cost flow method to account for its inventory. What inventory amount will ASB Hardware report on its balance sheet at June 30, 2010?

tire pro company s records reported the following at the end of the fiscal year 538761

Calculate inventory errors. (LO 8)

Tire Pro Company’s records reported the following at the end of the fiscal year.

Beginning inventory

$ 80,000

Ending inventory

85,000

Cost of goods sold

295,000

A physical inventory count showed that the ending inventory was actually $78,000. If this error is not corrected, what effect would it have on the income statement for this financial year and the following fiscal Year?

the records of florida tools shop received the following information related to the 538762

Estimate Inventory

the records of Florida Tools Shop received the following information related to the inventory destroyed in Hurricane Frances.

Inventory, beginning of period

$300,000

Purchases to date of hurricane

140,000

Net sales to date of hurricane

885’000

Gross Profit ratio

55%

The company needs to file a claim for lost inventory with its insurance company. What is the estimated value of the lost inventory?

guppies amp mollies inc made the following purchases in july of the current year 538763

Analyze purchases of merchandise inventory. (LO l)

Guppies & Mollies Inc. made the following purchases in July of the current year.

July 3 Purchased$ 7,500 of merchandise terms 3/10, n/30, FOB shipping point

July 6 Purchased$ 4,100o f merchandise terms 2 /15, n/45, FOB shipping point

July 11 Purchased$ 8,600 of merchandise terms 3/5, n/15, FOB destination

Required

a. For each of the purchases listed, how many days does the company have to take advantage of the purchase discount?

b. What is the amount of the cash discount allowed in each case?

c. Assume the freight charges are $250 on each purchase. What is the amount of

freight that Guppies & Mollies must pay for each purchase?

d. What is the total cost of inventory for Guppies & Mollies for the month of July, assuming that all discounts were taken?

record merchandising transactions prepare financial statements and calculate gross p 538765

Record merchandising transactions, prepare financial statements, and calculate gross profit ratio: perpetual inventory system. (LO 1,2,4,6)

At the beginning of February, Ace Distribution Company Inc. started with a contribution of $10,000 cash in exchange for common stock from its shareholders. The company engaged in the following transactions during the month of February.

February 2

Purchased merchandise on account from Enter Supply Co. for $7, 100, terms 2/ 10, n/45

February 5

Sold merchandise on account to Exit Company for $6,000, terms 2/10, n/30 and FOB destination. The cost of the merchandises old was 94,500.

February 6

Paid $100 freight on the sale to Exit Company

February 8

Received credit from Enter Supply Co. for merchandise returned for $500

February 10

Paid Enter Supply Co. in full

February 12

Received payment from Exit Company for sale made on February 5

February 14

Purchased merchandise for cash for $5,200

February 16

Received refund from supplier for returned merchandise on February 14 cash purchase of $350

February 17

Purchased merchandise on account from In ware Distributors for $3.800. terms 1/10. n/30

February 18

Paid $250 freight on February 17 purchase

February2 1

Sold merchandise for cash for $10,350. The cost of the merchandise sold was $8,200.

February 24

Purchased merchandise for cash for $2,300

February 25

Paid In ware Distributors for purchase on February 17

February 27

Gave refund of $200 to customer from February 2I.The cost of the returned merchandise was $135.

February 28

Sold merchandise of $3,000 on account with the terms 2/10, n/30. The merchandise cost $2.300.

Required

a. Enter each transaction into the accounting equation, assuming Ace Distribution Company uses a perpetual inventory system. Start with the opening balances in cash and common stock described at the beginning of the problem.

b. Calculate the balance in the inventory account at the end of February.

c. Prepare the four financial statements (including multiple-step income statement) for the month of February.

d. Calculate the gross profit ratio.

record merchandising transactions and prepare multi step financial statement perpetu 538766

Record merchandising transactions and prepare multi-step financial statement: perpetual inventory system (LO 1, 2,4,6)

The following transactions occurred during March 2007 at the Five Oaks Tennis Club.

3-Mar

Purchased racquets and balls on credit from Spaulding Company for $700. with terms 3/05, n/30

4-Mar

Paid freight of $50 on the March 3 purchase

6-Mar

Sold merchandise to members on credit for $400, terms n/30.The merchandises old cost $300.

10-Mar

Received credit of $40 from Spaulding for a damaged racquet that was returned

11-Mar

Purchased tennis shoes from Reebok for cash for $3,000

13-Mar

Paid Spaulding Company in full

14-Mar

Purchased tennis shirts and shorts from Nike Sportswear on credit for $5,000, terms 2/10, n/14

15-Mar

Received credit of $50 from Nike Sportswear for damaged merchandise

18-Mar

Sold merchandise to member so n account,$ 950, terms n/30. The cost of the merchandises old was

22-Mar

Received $650 in cash payment on account from members

24-Mar

Paid Nike Sportswear in full

26-Mar

Granted an allowance of $30 to members for tennis clothing that faded when washed. (Customers)

30-Mar

Received $320 in cash payments on account from members

30-Mar

Paid cash operating expenses of $300 for the month

Required

a. Suppose the Five Oaks Tennis Club started the month with cash of $8,000, merchandise inventory of $2,000, and common stock of $10,000. Enter each transaction into the accounting equation, assuming Five Oaks Tennis Club uses a perpetual inventory system.

b. Calculate the cost of goods sold for March and the ending balance in inventory.

c. Prepare the multiple-step income statement, and the statement of changes in shareholders’ equity for the month of March, and the balance sheet at March 31.

d. Calculate the gross profit ratio for Five Oaks. Explain what the ratio measures.

you are the accountant for baldwin company and your assistant has prepared the follo 538767

Analyze accounting methods and prepare corrected income statement.

You are the accountant for Baldwin Company, and your assistant has prepared the followings income statement for the year ended September 30, 2001.

Baldwin Company
Income Statement
For the year ended September 30,2007

Sales revenue

$850,00

Sales returns and allowances

$225, 00

Freight costs

14,300

36,800

Net sales

813,200

Expenses

Cost of goods sold

540,000

Selling expenses

1 50,000

Insurance expense

20,000

Administrative expenses

40,000

Dividends

8,000

Total expenses

758,000

Net income

$ 55,200

You have uncovered the following errors:

1. Sales revenue includes $5,000 of items that have been back-ordered. (The items have not been delivered to the customers, and the customers have not been billed for the items.)

2. Selling expenses includes $250 of allowances that were given to customers who received damaged product.

3. Insurance expense includes $100 worth of insurance that applies to 2008.

4. Administrative expenses include a loan made to worker who had some serious financial trouble and needed $500 to pay a hospital bill. The worker plans to repay the money by the end of December.

Required

a. Prepare a corrected multistep income statement for the year. Baldwin shows sales as the net amount only on its income statement.

b. Write a memo to your assistant explaining why each error you found is incorrect and what the correct accounting treatment should be.

beard company uses a perpetual inventory system the company s accounting records sho 538768

Analyze results of physical count of Inventory and calculate cost of goods sold. (LO1,2,7,9)

Beard company uses a perpetual inventory system. The company’s accounting records showed the following related to June 2006 transactions.

Units

Cost

Beginning inventory June 1

200

$ 600

+

Purchasing in june

1,700

5,100

=

Goods available for sale

1,900

$5,700

Cost of goods sold

1,500

4,500

=

Ending inventory June 30

400

$1,200

On June 30, 2006, Beard conducted a physical count of its inventory and discovered there were only 375 units of inventory actually on hand.

Required

a. Using the information from the physical count, correct Beard’s cost of goods sold for June.

b. (Appendix A) How would this correction change the financial statements for the year?

c. What are some possible causes of the difference between the inventory amounts in Beard’s accounting records and the inventory amount from the physical count?

jefferson company had the following sales and purchases during 2006 its first year o 538769

Calculate cost of goods sold and ending inventory and analyze effect of each method on financial statements (.L O 3,4)

Jefferson Company had the following sales and purchases during 2006, its first year of business.

January5

Purchased4 0 units at $.100e ach

February 15

Sold 15 units at $150 each

April 10

Sold 10 units at $150 each

June3 0

Purchased3 0 units at $105 each

August 15

Sold 25 units at $150 each

November2 8

Purchased3 0 units at $110 each

Required

Calculate the ending inventory, the cost of goods sold, and the gross profit for the December 31, 2006. Financial statements under each of the following assumptions:

a. FIFO periodic

b. LIFO periodic

c. Weighted average cost Periodic

d. How will the differences between the methods affect the income statement and balance sheet for the Year?

acme print shop purchased a new printing press in 200 7 the invoice price was 158 50 538667

Calculate capitalized cost and depreciation expense (L O 1,2)

Acme Print Shop purchased a new printing press in 200’7.The invoice price was $158,500, but the manufacturer of the press gave Acme a2%o discount for paying cash for the machine on delivery. Delivery costs amounted to $1,500, and Acme paid $500 for a special insurance policy to cover the press while in transit. Installation cost was $1,350, and Acme spent $3,000 training the employees to use the new press. Additionally, Acme hired a new supervisor at an annual salary of $65,000 to be responsible for keeping the press online during business hours.

Required

a. What amount should be capitalized for this new asset?

b. To calculate the depreciation expense for 2007 , what other information do you need? Do you think the company should gather this information before purchasing the asset? Why or why not?

on january l 2007 the oviedo manufacturing company purchased equipment for 170 000 t 538668

Calculate and analyze depreciation under alternative methods. (LO 2)

On January l, 2007, the Oviedo Manufacturing Company purchased equipment for $170,000. The estimated useful life of the equipment is 4 years, and the estimated salvage value is $10,000. The company expects the equipment to produce 480,000 units during its service life. Actual units produced were:

Year

Units

2007

100,800

2008

130,080

2009

139,200

20to

109,920

a. Calculate the depreciation expense for each year of the 4-year life of the equipment using

1. Straight-line method

2. Double-declining balance method

3. Activity method (Round your answers to the nearest dollar.)

b. How does the choice of depreciation methods affect net income in each of the years? How does the choice of depreciation methods affect the balance sheet in each of the years?

peps co purchased a new machine at the beginning of 2006 for 6 400 the company expec 538670

Calculate and analyze depreciation under alternative methods. (LO 2)

Peps Co. purchased a new machine at the beginning of 2006 for $6,400. The company expects the machine to last for 5 years and have a salvage value of $400. The estimated productive life of the machine is 100,000 units. Yearly production: in 2006-28,000 units; in 2008-16,000 units; in 2OO9-14,000 units; in 2010-20,000 units.

Required

a. Calculate the depreciation expense for each year of the 5-year life of the machine using

1. Straight-line method

2. Double-declining balance method (Round to the nearest dollar.)

3. Activity method using units

b. For each method, give the amount of accumulated depreciation that would be shown on the balance sheet at the end of each year.

c. Calculate the book value of the machine at the end of each year for each method.

lb company had the following balances in its intangible assets accounts at the begin 538671

Account for intangible assets (LO 3)

LB Company had the following balances in its intangible assets accounts at the beginning of the year. The patents have a remaining useful life of l0 years, and the copyright has a remaining useful life of 7 years.

Patents

$35,000

Copyright

21,000

Goodwill

40,000

Transactions during the year:

1. At the beginning of the year, LB filed for a new patent. The costs totaled $20,000. Its useful life is estimated at 10 years.

2. LB incurred R&D costs of $60,000 related to new product development’ No new products have been identified.

3. LB evaluated the goodwill for impairment and reduced its book value by $2,000.

4. LB successfully defended one of its patents in court. Fees totaled $ 24,000.

Required

Show each of the transactions in the accounting equation, including any adjustments that would need to be made for the year-end financial statements. Then, prepare the intangible assets section of the balances sheet at year-end.

in january 2004 harvey s hoola hoop company purchased a computer system that cost 37 538672

Account for change in estimates for depreciation. (LO 4)

In January 2004, Harvey’s Hoola Hoop Company purchased a computer system that cost $37,000. Harvey’s estimated that the system would last for 5 years and have a salvage value of $2,000 at the end of 2008. The company uses the straight-line method of depreciation.

Analyze each of the following independent scenarios.

a. Before the depreciation expense is recorded for the year 2006, computer experts tell Harvey’s that the system can be used until the end of 2008 as planned but that it will be worth only $500.

b. Before depreciation expense is recorded for the year2O06, Harvey’s decides that the computer system will last only until the end of 2007. The company anticipates the value of the system at that time will still be $2,000.

c. Before depreciation expense is recorded for the year 2006, Harvey’s decides that the computer system will last until the end of 2008, but that it will be worth only $ 1.000 at that time.

d. Before the depreciation expense is recorded for the year 2006, computer expenses tell Harvey’s that the system can be used until the end of 2012 if the company spends $4,000 on upgrades. However, the estimated salvage value at that time would be $0. Harvey’s decides to follow the experts’ advice and upgrade the computer system.

Required

Calculate the amount of depreciation expense related to the computer system Harvey’s Hoola Hoop Company would report on its income statement for the year ended December 31, 2006, for each scenario.

a a truck that cost 25 000 had an estimated useful life of 5 years and no salvage va 538673

Account for disposal of an asset. (LO 5)

Analyze each of the following independent scenarios.

a. A truck that cost $25,000 had an estimated useful life of 5 years and no salvage value. After 4 years of using straight-line depreciation, the company sold the truck for $6.000.

b. A machine that cost $50,000 had an estimated useful life of 12 years and a salvage value of $2,000. After 10 years of using straight-line depreciation, the company sold the completely worn-out machine for $400 as scrap.

c. An asset that cost $40,000 had an estimated useful life of 4 years and a salvage value of $2,000. After 3 years of using double-declining balance depreciation, the company sold the asset for $11,000.

d. A machine that cost $15,000 had an estimated useful life of 5 years and no salvage value. After 4 years of using straight-line depreciation, the company deemed the asset worthless and hauled it to the dump.

Required

For each scenario, calculate the gain or loss, if any, that would result upon disposal.

calculate depreciation under alternative methods and account for disposal of an asse 538674

Calculate depreciation under alternative methods and account for disposal of an asset.( LO 2,5)

Bella Interiors purchased a new sewing machine on January 2, 2007, for 948,000. The company expects the machine to have a useful life of 5 years and a salvage value of $3,000. The company’s fiscal year ends on December 31.

Required

a. Calculate the depreciation expense for the fiscal years 2007 and 2008 using each of the following methods:

1. Straight-line method

2. Double-declining balance method

b. Assume that Bella Interiors decided to use the straight-line method and that the sewing machine was sold at the end of December 2009, for $27,000. What was the gain or loss on the sale? On which financial statement would the gain or loss appear? What information does this accounting calculation provide for future decisions?

calculate depreciation under alternative methods and account for disposal of an asse 538675

Calculate depreciation under alternative methods and account for disposal of an asset.( LO 2,5)

Perfect Heating and Air purchased a truck 3 years ago for $50,000. The company expects the truck to have a useful life of 5 years with no salvage value. The company has taken three full years of depreciation expense.

Required

a. Assume that the company uses straight-line depreciation. If the truck is sold for $25,000, will there be a gain or loss on the sale? If so, how much? How will the sale affect the financial statements for the year?

b. Assume that the company uses double-declining balance depreciation. If the truck is sold for $15,000, will there be a gain or loss on the sale? If so, how much? How will the sale affect the financial statements for the year?

c. Assume the company uses straight-line depreciation and sells the truck for $20,000. Would there be a gain or loss on the sale? How would that change if the company had been using double-declining balance depreciation?

due to an umpire strike early in 2006 umpire s empire had some trouble with its info 538676

Analyze and correct accounting errors related to long-term assets.(Lo 9)

Due to an umpire strike early in 2006, Umpire’s Empire had some trouble with its information processing and some efforts were made in accounting for certain transactions. Evaluate the following independent situations that occurred during the year:

a. At the beginning of 2006, a building and land were purchased together for $100,000. Even though the appraisers determine that 90% of the price should be allocated to the building, Umpire’s decided to allocate the entire purchase price to the building. The building is being depreciated using the straight-line method over 40 years, with an estimated salvage value of $10,000.

b. During the year, Umpire did some R&D on a new gadget to keep track of balls and strikes. The R&D cost $20,000, and Umpire capitalized it. The company intends to write it off over 5 years, using straight-line depreciation with no salvage value.

c. Near the beginning of the year, Umpire spent $ 10,000 on routine maintenance for its equipment, and the accountant decided to capitalize these costs as part of the equipment. (Equipment is depreciated over 5 years with no salvage value.)

d. Umpire spent $5,000 to extend the useful life of some of its equipment. The accountant capitalized the cost.

Required

a. For each, describe the error made and list the effect, if any, that the uncorrected error would have on the following items for Umpire’s 2006 financial statements: net income, long-term assets and retained earnings. If there is no error, simply write N/A next to the item.

b. Describe the adjustments that would correct the company’s accounting records and make the 2006 financial statements accurate. If there is no error, write N/A next to the item.

the executives for sea world bought a piece of property adjacent to the park with an 538677

Calculate capitalized cost and depreciation expense (LO 1,2)

The executives for Sea World bought a piece of property adjacent to the park with an old, run-down motel. The cost of the land with the old motel was $1,500,000 Real estate commissions and fees including the title search were $317,850. SeaWorld paid its attorney $15,000 to review the contract and complete the purchase of the land on July 1, 2008. The resort paid $25,750 for the old motel to be demolished and an additional $17,850 for sugar white sand to be hauled in to prepare the land for use. The company paid $80,000 for some palm trees for the new area. Sea World hired three new employees at a salary of $35,000 a year each to maintain the landscaping for the new area.

Required

a. What amount should be capitalized for this new asset?

b. Would there be any depreciation expense for land at the end of 2008? Explain your answer.

wta tennis academy purchased a new ball machine at a cost of 18 000 at the beginning 538678

Calculate and analyze depreciation under alternative methods. (LO 2)

WTA Tennis Academy purchased a new ball machine at a cost of $18,000 at the beginning of January 2005. The machine was estimated to have a salvage value of $2,000 at the end of its useful life of 4 years. A machine like this is supposed to deliver 160,000 hours of service. The actual number of hours that the machine was used per year was:

Year

Hours

2005

40,000

2006

60,800

2001

39,200

2008

20,000

Required

a. Calculate the depreciation expense for each year of the 4-year life of the ball machine using

1. Straight-line method

2. Activity method

3. Double-declining method

b. How does the choice of depreciation methods affect income in each of the years?

c. How does the choice of depreciation methods affect the balance sheet in each of the years?

clean water co purchased a new water filter at the beginning of 2010 for 200 000 it 538680

Calculate and analyze depreciation under alternative methods. (LO2)

Clean Water Co. purchased a new water filter at the beginning of 2010 for $200,000. It is expected to last for 8 years and have a salvage value of $32,000. The estimated productive life of the machine is 200,000 units. Yearly production: in20l0-45,000 units; in 2011-29,000 units; in 2012-41,000 units; in 2013-22,000 units; in 2014-25,000 units: in 2015- 15,000 units ; in 201 6-1 6,000 units ; and in 2017 -7,000 units.

Required

a. Calculate the depreciation for each year using each of these depreciation methods:

1. Straight-line method

2. Activity method based on units

3. Double-declining balance method (round to the nearest dollar)

a. For each method, give the amount of accumulated depreciation that would be shown on the balance sheet at the end of each year.

b. Calculate the book value of the water filter at the end of each year for each method.

larkin company had the following balances in its intangible asset accounts at the be 538681

Account for intangible assets.( LO 3)

Larkin Company had the following balances in its intangible asset accounts at the beginning of the year. The trademarks have a remaining useful life of 5 years, and the copyright has a remaining useful life of 10 years.

Trademarks

$85,000

Copyright

50,000

Goodwill

80.000

Transactions during the year:

1. At the beginning of the year, Larkin filed for a new trademark. The costs totaled $40,000. Its useful life is estimated at 5 years.

2. Larkin incurred R&D costs of $30,000, related to new product development. No new products have been identified.

3. Larkin evaluated the goodwill for impairment and reduces its book value by $20,000.

4. Larkin successfully defended its copyrights in court. Fees totaled $10,000.

Required

Show each of the transactions in the accounting equation, including any adjustments that would need to be made for the year-end financial statements. Then, prepare the intangible assets section of the balance sheet at year-end.

in july 2006 hallmark company purchased a computer system that cost 7 000 the compan 538682

Account for change in estimates for depreciation.(LO 4)

In July 2006, Hallmark Company purchased a computer system that cost $7,000. The company estimates that the system will last for 5 years and will have a salvage value of $2,000.

The company uses the straight-line method of depreciation and has a June 30 fiscal yearend.

Analyze each of the following independents scenarios.

a. Before depreciation expense is recorded for the fiscal year ended June 30,2009,

Hallmark decides that the computer system will last until June 30,2011 but that it will be worth only $800 at that time.

b. Before depreciation expense is recorded for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009, Hallmark decides that the computer system will last only until June 30, 2010. The company anticipates the value of the system at that time will still be $2,000.

c. Before depreciation expense is recorded for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2009,

Hallmark decides that the computer system will last until June 30,201I but that it will be worth only $1,500 at that time.

d. Before depreciation expense is recorded for the fiscal year ended June30,2009, Hallmark’s computer experts decide that the system can be used until June 30, 2013 if the company spends $1,000 on upgrades However, the estimated salvage value at that time would be 0. Hallmark decides to follow the experts’ advice and upgrade the computer system.

Required

Calculate the amount of depreciation expense related to the computer system Hallmark will report on its income statement for the fiscal year ended June 30,2009, for each scenarl0.

a a company van that cost 32 000 had an estimated useful life of 8 years and no salv 538683

Account for disposal of an asset. (LO 5)

Analyze each of the following independent scenarios.

a. A company van that cost $32,000 had an estimated useful life of 8 years and no salvage value. After 6 years of using straight-line depreciation, the company sold the van for $12,000.

b. A copy machine that cost $35,000 had an estimated useful life of 5 years and a salvage value of $5,000. After 2 years of using double-declining balance depreciation the company sold the copy machine for $10,000.

c. A company truck that cost $48,000 had an estimated useful life of 7 years and a salvage value of $6,000. After 5 years of using straight-line depreciation and driving the truck many miles on tough terrain, the company sold the completely worn-out truck for $850 for spare parts.

d. A state-of-the-art computer that cost $29,000 had an estimated useful life of 4 years and a salvage value of $2,000. After 3 years of using double-declining balance depreciation, the company sold the computer for $6,000.

Required

For each scenario, calculate the gain or loss, if any, that would result upon disposal.

calculate depreciation under alternative methods and account for disposal of an asse 538684

Calculate depreciation under alternative methods and account for disposal of an asset. (LO 2,5)

A&W Root Beer Company bought new brewery equipment on January 1, 2008, for $64,000. The company expects the equipment to have a useful life of 8 years and a salvage value of $8,000. The company’s fiscal year ends on December 31.

Required

a. Calculate the depreciation expense for the fiscal years 2008 and 2009 using each of the following methods:

1. Straight-line method

2. Double-declining balance method

b. Assume that the company decided to use the double-declining balance method and that the brewery equipment was sold at the end of December 2009, for $42,000. What was the gain or loss on the sale? On which financial statement would the gain or loss appear? What information does this accounting calculation provide for future decisions

calculate depreciation under alternative methods and account for disposal of an asse 538685

Calculate depreciation under alternative methods and account for disposal of an asset.( LO 2,5)

The Queen Grande View Hotel purchased a van 3 years ago for $62,000. The company expects the van to have a useful life of 4 years and a $10,000 salvage value. Queen Grande View has taken three full years of depreciation expense.

Required

a. Assume that Queen Grande View uses straight-line depreciation. If the van is sold for $20,000, will there be a gain or loss on the sale? If so, how much? How will it affect Queen Grande View’s financial statements for the year?

b. Assume that Queen Grande View uses double-declining balance depreciation. If the van is sold for $9,750, will there be a gain or loss on the sale? If so, how much? How will it affect Queen Grande View’s financial statements for the year?

c. Assume Queen Grande View uses double-declining balance depreciation and sells the van for $23,000. Would there be a gain or loss on the sale? How would that change if Queen Grande View had been using straight-line depreciation?

during 2007 jule s gym had some trouble with its information processing due to sever 538686

Analyze and correct accounting errors related to long-term assets. (L0 9)

During 2007, Jule’s Gym had some trouble with its information processing due to several hurricanes, and some effors were made in accounting for certain transactions. The firm uses straight-line depreciation for a1lo f its long-term assets. Evaluate the following independent situations that occurred during the year:

a. At the beginning of the year, a basket purchase of a building and land was made for $350,000. The appraisers indicated that the market value of the land was $135,000 and the market value of the building was $250,000. So, Jule’s Gym allocated $135,000 of the purchase price to the land and the remainder of the purchase price to the building. The building has an estimated useful life of 20 years and an estimated salvage value of $25,000.

b. The plumber spent a great deal of time repairing broken toilets in one of the gym’s buildings this year. Total cost, which Jule’s Gym capitalize do was $5,000.

Jule’s Gym decided it was best to leave it on the books as an asset and not write it off, because the toilets will be used for quite a few more years. (Use 20 years as the estimated remaining useful life of the toilets.)

c. Jule’s Gym purchased a new van. It cost $20,000 and is expected to last 3 years.

It has a salvage value of $2,000. To properly equip it for transporting gym equipment between locations, the inside was customized at a cost of $6,000. The cost of the van was capitalized, and the cost of the customization was expensed.

d. Jule’s Gym spent $5,500 on routine maintenance of its exercise equipment. The cost was expensed.

Required

a. For each, describe the error made and list the effect, if any, that the uncorrected error would have on the following items for Jule’s Gym’s 200’7 financial statements: net income, long-term assets, and retained earnings. If there is no error, simply write N/A next to the item.

b. Use the accounting equation to show the adjustments that would correct the company’s accounting records and make the 2001 financial statements accurate.

when inventory is purchased it is recorded as a n and when sold it becomes a n 538709

When inventory is purchased it, is recorded as a (n) and when sold it becomes a(n)

a. liability, withdrawal

b. assets expense

c. liability, asset

d. assets contra-asset

Use the following information to answer the questions 2 through 5.

Inventory data for Newman & Frith Merchandisers Inc. is provided here. Sales for the period were 2,800 units. Each sold for $8. The company maintains a periodic inventory system.

Date

Beginning inventory

Number of Units

Cost of Units

Total Cost

January

Purchase

1,000

$3.00

$ 3,000

February

Purchase

600

$3.50

$ 2,100

March

Purchase

800

$4.00

$ 3,200

April

Purchase

1200

$4.25

$5,100

Totals

Purchase

3600

$13,400

celebration coordinators corporation began operations on april 1 the following trans 538720

Calculate cost of inventory. (LO l)

Celebration Coordinators Corporation began operations on April 1. The following transactions took place in the month of April.

a. Cash purchases of merchandise during April were $300,000.

b. Purchases of merchandise on account during April were $400,000.

c. The cost of freight to deliver the merchandise to Celebration was $25,000; the terms were FOB shipping point. The freight bill was paid in April.

d. Celebration returned $22,0000 merchandise purchased in part a to the supplier for a full refund.

e. The store manager’s salary was $3,000 for the month.

Calculate the amount that Celebration Coordinators Corporation should record for the total cost of merchandise inventory purchased in April.

use the chart of accounts you created in chapter 1 and add accounts where necessary 538352

Journalizing transactions, posting to T-accounts, and preparing a trial balance

Use the chart of accounts you created in Chapter 1 (and add accounts where necessary). All of the first month”s activity for Shine King Cleaning is as follows.

Nov 1

Evan Hudson deposited $35,000 in the business account. Also on this date, Evan transferred his truck title, worth $8,000, to the business. Evan received $43,000 of capital.

2

Wrote a check for $2,000 to Pleasant Properties. In the “for” area of the check, it states “November through February Rent.” (Debit Prepaid rent)

3

Purchased business insurance policy for $2,400 for the term November 1, 2012, through October 31, 2013, and paid cash. (Debit Prepaid insurance)

4

Evan went to the Cleaning Supply Company and purchased $270 of cleaning supplies on account. The invoice is due 20 days from the date of purchase.

5

Purchased on account an industrial vacuum cleaner from Penny Purchase costing $1,000. The invoice is payable on or before November 25.

7

Purchased a computer and printer costing a total of $1,200. A check for the same amount to the computer store was written on the same date.

9

Performed cleaning services on account for Pierre”s Wig Stand in the amount of $3,000.

10

Deposited Pierre”s check for $100 in the bank.

15

Wrote check payable to Eric Ryder for $500 for contract labor.

16

Received $3,600 for 1 year contract beginning November 16 for cleaning services to be provided to the Sea Side Restaurant. Contract begins November 16, 2012, and ends November 15, 2013. (Credit
Unearned service revenue)

17

Provided cleaning services for Tip Top Solutions for $800. Tip Top paid with a check.

18

Received water and electric bill for $175 with due date of December 4, 2012.

20

Borrowed $40,000 from bank with interest at rate of 9% per year.

21

Deposited check from Pierre”s Wig Stand for $900, with the notation “on account.”

25

Wrote check to Penny Purchase for invoice #1035 in the amount of $500.

29

Wrote check payable to St. Petersburg News for $100 for advertising.

30

Hudson withdrew cash of $600.

Requirements

1. Journalize transactions as required from the activity data.

2. Post journal entries to T-accounts and calculate account balances.

3. Prepare the trial balance at November 30.

you have been requested by a friend named dean mcchesney to advise him on the effect 538353

You have been requested by a friend named Dean McChesney to advise him on the effects that certain transactions will have on his business. Time is short, so you cannot journalize the transactions. Instead, you must analyze the transactions without a journal.

McChesney will continue the business only if he can expect to earn monthly net income of $6,000. The business completed the following transactions during June:

a.

McChesney deposited $10,000 cash in a business bank account to start the company. The company gave capital to Machesney.

b.

Paid $300 cash for supplies.

c.

Incurred advertising expense on account, $700.

d.

Paid the following cash expenses: secretary”s salary, $1,400; office rent, $1,100.

e.

Earned service revenue on account, $8,800.

f.

Collected cash from customers on account, $1,200.

Requirements

1. Open the following T-accounts: Cash; Accounts receivable; Supplies; Accounts payable; McChesney, capital; Service revenue; Salary expense; Rent expense; and Advertising expense.

2. Post the transactions directly to the accounts without using a journal. Key each transaction by letter. Follow the format illustrated here for the first transaction.

Cash

McChesney, capital

(a) 10,000

(a) 10,000

3. Prepare a trial balance at June 30, 2014. List the largest expense first, the next largest second, and so on. The business name is A-Plus Travel Planners.

4. Compute the amount of net income or net loss for this first month of operations. Would you recommend that McChesney continue in business?

contact a local business and arrange with the owner to learn what accounts the busin 538356

Contact a local business and arrange with the owner to learn what accounts the business uses.

Requirements

1. Obtain a copy of the business”s chart of accounts.

2. Prepare the company”s financial statements for the most recent month, quarter, or year. (You may omit the statement of cash flows.) You may use either made-up account balances or balances supplied by the owner.

If the business has a large number of accounts within a category, combine related accounts and report a single amount on the financial statements. For example, the company may have several cash accounts. Combine all cash amounts and report a single Cash amount on the balance sheet.

You will probably encounter numerous accounts that you have not yet learned. Deal with these as best you can.

Keep in mind that the financial statements report the balances of the accounts listed in the company”s chart of accounts, either by individual account or in summarized categories.

Therefore, the financial statements must be consistent with the chart of accounts.

assume that the weekly payroll of in the woods camping supplies is 300 538361

Assume that the weekly payroll of In the Woods Camping Supplies is $300. December 31, end of the year, falls on Tuesday, and In the Woods will pay its employee on Friday for the full week. What adjusting entry will In the Woods make on Tuesday, December 31? (Use five days as a full work week.)

a.

Salary expense

120

Salary payable

120

b.

Salary payable

300

Salary expense

300

c.

Salary expense

180

Cash

180

d. No adjustment is needed because the company will pay the payroll on Friday.

a select list of transactions for anuradha s goals follows 538371

Identifying types of adjusting entries

A select list of transactions for Anuradha”s Goals follows:

3

Apr 1

Paid six months of rent, $4,800.

10

Received $1,200 from customer for six-month service contract that began April 1.

15

Purchased computer for $1,000.

18

Purchased $300 of office supplies on account.

30

Work performed but not yet billed to customer, $500.

30

Employees earned $600 in salary that will be paid May 2.

2

Requirement

1. For each transaction, identify what type of adjusting entry would be needed.

famous cut hair stylists has begun the preparation of its adjusted trial balance as 538376

Preparing an adjusted trial balance

Famous Cut Hair Stylists has begun the preparation of its adjusted trial balance as follows:

.

FAMOUS CUT HAIR STYLISTS

Preparation of Adjusted Trial Balance

31-Dec-12

Trial Balance

Adjustments

Adjusted Trial Balance

Account

Debit

Credit

Debit

Credit

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 800

Supplies

900

Equipment

19,100

Accumulated depreciation

1,000

Accounts payable

200

Interest payable

Note payable

2,500

Fabio, capital

7,400

Service revenue

14,800

Rent expense

4,500

Supplies expense

Depreciation expense

Interest expense

600

Total

$25,900

$25,900

5

4

Year-end data include the following:

a. Supplies on hand, $300.

b. Depreciation, $1,000.

c. Accrued interest expense, $600.

Requirement

1. Complete Famous Cut’s adjusted trial balance. Key each adjustment by letter.

momentous occasions is a photography business that shoots videos at college parties 538377

Comparing accrual and cash-basis accounting, and applying the revenue recognition principle

Momentous Occasions is a photography business that shoots videos at college parties. The freshman class pays $100 in advance on March 3 just to guarantee your services for its party to be held April 2. The sophomore class promises a minimum of $280 for filming its formal dance, and actually pays cash of $410 on February 28 at the party.

1 2

Requirement

1. Answer the following questions about the correct way to account for revenue under the accrual basis.

a. Considering the $100 paid by the freshman class, on what date was revenue earned? Did the earnings occur on the same date cash was received?

b. Considering the $410 paid by the sophomore class, on what date was revenue earned? Did the earnings occur on the same date cash was received?

comparing accrual and cash basis accounting preparing adjusting entries and preparin 538378

Comparing accrual and cash-basis accounting, preparing adjusting entries, and preparing income statements

Sweet Catering completed the following selected transactions during May, 2012:

1 4 6

4

May 1

Prepaid rent for three months, $1,500.

5

Paid electricity expenses, $400.

9

Received cash for meals served to customers, $2,600.

14

Paid cash for kitchen equipment, $2,400.

23

Served a banquet on account, $3,000.

31

Made the adjusting entry for rent (from May 1).

31

Accrued salary expense, $1,400.

31

Recorded depreciation for May on kitchen equipment, $40.

4

Requirements

1. Prepare journal entries for each transaction.

2. Using the journal entries as a guide, show whether each transaction would be handled as a revenue or an expense using both the accrual and cash basis by completing the following table.

1

Amount of Revenue (Expense) for May

Date

Cash Basis Amount of Revenue (Expense)

Accrual-Basis Amount of Revenue (Expense)

3. After completing the table, calculate the amount of net income or net loss for Sweet Catering under the accrual and cash basis for May.

4. Considering your results from Requirement 3, which method gives the best picture of the true earnings of Sweet Catering? Why?

settler company was quickly outgrowing its rented office space the company decided t 538602

Calculate the cost of an asset. (LO 1)

Settler Company was quickly outgrowing its rented office space. The company decided that it could raise enough capital to buy land and build a new office building. The building was completed on September 15. Consider the following costs incurred for the new building.

Building materials

$110,000

Labor costs (including architect’s fees)

205,000

Rental of equipment used in the construction

9000

Maintenance on the building from Sept. 15 to Dec. 31

14,000

What amount should Settler Company record on the books for its new building?

corona company purchased and for 75 000 cash and a building for 300 000 cash 538626

Calculate the cost of an asset and depreciation expense. (LO l, 2)

Corona Company purchased and for $75,000 cash and a building for $300,000 cash. The company paid real estate closing costs of $8,000 and allocated that cost to the building and the land based on the purchase price. Renovation costs on the building were $35,000.

Use the accounting equation to record the purchase of the property, including all related expenditures.

Assume that all transactions were for cash and that all purchases occurred at the beginning of the year.

a. Compute the annual straight-line depreciation, assuming a 2}-year estimated useful life and a $10,000 estimated salvage value for the building.

b. What would be the book value of the building at the end of the second year?

c. What would be the book value of the land at the end of the second year?

classify the following items as either a capital expenditure or a revenue expenditur 538635

Distinguish between capital and revenue expenditures (expenses).(LO1,4)

Classify the following items as either a capital expenditure or a revenue expenditure (an expense).

a. Changed oil in the delivery truck

b. Replaced the engine in the delivery truck

c. Paid sales tax on the new delivery truck

d. Installed a new, similar roof on the office building

e. Paid freight and installation charges for a new computer system

f. Repainted the administrative offices

g. Purchased and installed a new toner cartridge in the laser printer

h. Replaced several missing shingles on the roof

i. Trained an employee prior to using the new computer system

j. Replaced the brake pads on the delivery truck

yester mfg co has had a piece of equipment for 6 years at the beginning of the seven 538636

Account for capital and revenue expenditures (expenses) and calculate depreciation expense (.LO 2,4)

Yester Mfg. Co. has had a piece of equipment for 6 years. At the beginning of the seventh year, the equipment was not performing as well as expected. First, Yester relubricated the equipment, which cost $150. Then, the company replaced some worn-out parts, which cost $520. Finally, at the beginning of the seventh year, the company completed a major overhaul of the equipment that not only fixed the machine but also added new functionality and extended its useful life by 3 years (to a total of 10 years) with no salvage value. The overhaul cost $10,000. (Originally, the machine cost $60,000, had a salvage value of $4,000, and had an estimated useful life of 7 years.)

a. Which of these costs are capital expenditures? How would these amounts appear on the financial statements?

b. Which are revenue expenditures? How would these amounts appear on the financial statements?

c. Assuming Yester Mfg. uses the straight-line method of depreciation, how much depreciation expense will be reported on the income statements for years 7 through 10?

sharper company operates a small repair facility for its products at the beginning o 538637

Account for capital and revenue expenditures (expenses) and calculate depreciation expense(.LO 2,4)

Sharper Company operates a small repair facility for its products. At the beginning of 2006, the accounting records for the company showed the following balances for its only piece of equipment, purchased at the beginning of 2004:

Equipment

$115,00

Accumulated depreciation

20,000

During 2006, the following costs were incurred for repairs and maintenance on the equipment:

Routine maintenance and repairs

$ 650

Major overhaul of the equipment that improved efficiency

22’000

The company uses the straight-line method, and it now estimates the equipment will last for a total of 11 years with $5,000 estimated salvage value. The company’s fiscal year ends on December 31.

a. How much depreciation did Shaper Company record on the equipment at the end of 2005?

b. After the overhaul at the beginning of 2006, what is the remaining estimated life of the equipment?

c. What is the amount of depreciation expense the company will record for 2006?

dave s delivery disposed of a delivery truck after using it 4 years the records of t 538640

Account for disposal of an asset. (LO 5)

Dave’s Delivery disposed of a delivery truck after using it 4 years. The records of the company provide the following information:

Delivery truck

$38,000

Accumulated depreciation

23,000

Calculate the gain or loss on the disposal of the truck for each of the following independent situations:

a. Dave’s Delivery sold the truck to Papa John’s Pizza for $12,000.

b. Dave’s Delivery sold the truck to Cornerstone Grocery for $15’000.

c. Dave’s Delivery sold the truck to John’s Plumbing for $16,000.

d. The truck was stolen out of Dave’s parking lot, and the company had no insurance.

wilson smith amp knight beer brewers purchased a building for 125 000 cash and the l 538647

Calculate the cost of an asset and depreciation expense. (LO 1,2)

Wilson, Smith & Knight Beer Brewers purchased a building for $125,000 cash and the land for $275,000 cash. The company paid real estate closing costs of $6,000 and allocated that cost to the building and the land based on the purchase price. Renovation costs on the building were $45,000.

Use the accounting equation to record the purchase of the property, including all related expenditures.

Assume that all transactions were for cash and that all purchases occurred at the beginning of the year.

a. Compute the annual straight-line depreciation, assuming a 20-year estimated useful life and an $11,875 estimated salvage value for the building.

b. What would be the book value of the building at the end of the tenth year?

c. What would be the book value of the land at the end of the tenth year?

on january 1 2008 hsieh amp wen s gourmet taste of asia purchased kitchen equipment 538649

Calculate depreciation expense: straight-line and double-declining balance methods. (LO 2)

On January 1, 2008, Hsieh & Wen’s Gourmet Taste of Asia purchased kitchen equipment for $51,500. Hsieh & Wen’s was also charged $1,650 for shipping and installation. The equipment is expected to have a useful life of 8 years and a salvage value of $3,150.

a. Compute the depreciation expense for the years 2008 through 2010, using the straight-line method (December 31 is the fiscal year-end.).

b. compute the depreciation expense for the years 2008 through 2010, using the double-declining balance method. (Round your answers to the nearest dollar.)

c. What is the book value of the equipment at the end of 2008 under each method?

classify the following items as either a capital expenditure or a revenue expenditur 538656

Distinguish between capital and revenue expenditures (expenses)(LO 1, 4)

Classify the following items as either a capital expenditure or a revenue expenditure (expense).

a. Changed the filter in the moving van

b. Painted the moving van

c. Paid sales tax on the new moving van

d. Installed a new energy-efficient air-conditioning system for the office building

e. Cleaned and lubricated sewing equipment

f. Performed routine yearly maintenance on copy machine

g. Purchased and installed a new set of energy-efficient deep fryers

h. Replaced several cracked tiles in company bathroom floor

i. Trained an employee prior to using the new energy-efficient deep fryers

j. Replaced the tires on the moving van

account for capital and revenue expenditures expenses and calculate depreciation exp 538657

Account for capital and revenue expenditures (expenses) and calculate depreciation expense (LO2,4)

Shiny & New Auto Mechanic Shop has had a piece of equipment for five years. At the beginning of the sixth year, it wasn’t performing as well as it should have been. First, Shiny & New had the equipment serviced, which cost $175. Then, the company tried replacing some worn-out parts, which cost $480. Finally, at the beginning of the sixth year, it completed a major overhaul of the equipment that not only fixed the machine, but also added new functionality to it and extended the useful life by four years (to a total of ten years with five remaining) with no salvage value. The overhaul cost $20,000. (Originally, the machine cost $65,000, had a salvage value of $5,000, and an estimated useful life of six years.)

a. Which of these costs are capital expenditures? How would these amounts appear on the financial statements?

b. Which are revenue expenditures? How would these amounts appear on the financial statements?

c. Assuming Shiny & New uses the straight-line method of depreciation how much depreciation expense will be reported on the income statements for years six through ten?

account for capital and revenue expenditures expenses and calculate depreciation exp 538658

Account for capital and revenue expenditures (expenses) and calculate depreciation expense (L O 2,4)

Global Electronics operates a manufacturing plant for production of its products. At the beginning of 2008, the accounting records for the company showed the following balances for its only piece of equipment, purchased at the beginning of 2005:

Equipment

$94,000

Accumulated depreciation

54,000

During 2008, the following cash costs were incurred for repairs and maintenance on the equipment:

Routine maintenance and repairs

$ 575

Major overhaul of the equipment that improved efficiency

30,000

The company uses straight-line depreciation and estimates the equipment will last for 5 years beginning in 2008 with a $4,000 estimated salvage value. The company’s fiscal year ends on December 31.

a. How much did the firm record for depreciation on the equipment at the end of 2008?

b. After the overhaul, at the beginning of 2008, what is the remaining estimated life?

c. What is the amount of depreciation expense the company will record for 2008?

kat amp jen s solar tan disposed of a high pressure tanning bed that had been used i 538661

Account for disposal of an asset. (LO 5)

Kat & Jen’s Solar Tan disposed of a high-pressure tanning bed that had been used in the business for 3 years. The records of the company provide the following information:

High-pressure tanning bed

$39,000

Accumulated depreciation

18,000

Calculate the gain or loss on the disposal of the tanning bed for each of the following independent situations:

a. Kat & Jen’s sold the tanning bed to Dark Bodies for $21,000.

b. Kat & Jen’s sold the tanning bed to a customer for $22,550′

c. Kat & Jen’s sold the tanning bed to Angela’s Fitness Center for $18,000.

d. The tanning salon was broken into and the tanning bed was stolen; Kat & Jen’s had no insurance.

the following trial balance of joy mcdowell tutoring service at may 31 2012 does not 538320

Correcting errors in a trial balance

The following trial balance of Joy McDowell Tutoring Service at May 31, 2012, does not balance:

JOY MCDOWELL TUTORING SERVICE

Trial Balance

31-May-12

Balance

Account

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 3,000

Accounts receivable

2,000

Supplies

600

Computer equipment

25,800

Accounts payable

11,400

McDowell, capital

11,600

Service revenue

9,800

Salary expense

Rent expense

1,700

700

Utilities expense

500

Total

34,300

32,800

Investigation of the accounting records reveals that the bookkeeper:

a. Recorded a $500 cash revenue transaction by debiting Accounts receivable. The credit entry was correct.

b. Posted a $1,000 credit to Accounts payable as $100.

c. Did not record utilities expense or the related account payable in the amount of $400.

d. Understated McDowell, capital by $600.

Requirement

1. Prepare the corrected trial balance at May 31, 2012, complete with a heading;

journal entries are not required.

showtime amusements company owns movie theaters showtime engaged in the following bu 538321

Identifying common accounts and normal account balances

Showtime Amusements Company owns movie theaters. Showtime engaged in the following business transactions in 2012:

Sep 1

Don Cougliato invested $370,000 personal cash in the business by depositing that amount in a bank account titled Showtime Amusements. The business gave capital to Cougliato.

2

Paid $360,000 cash to purchase a theater building.

5

Borrowed $260,000 from the bank. Cougliato signed a note payable to the bank in the name of Showtime.

10

Purchased theater supplies on account, $1,400.

15

Paid $1,200 on account.

15

Paid property tax expense on theater building, $1,500.

16

Paid employees” salaries $2,500, and rent on equipment $1,400.Make a single compound entry.

28

Cougliato withdrew cash of $7,000.

30

Received $21,000 cash from service revenue and deposited that amount in the bank

Requirements

1. Create the list of accounts that Showtime Amusements will use to record these transactions.

2. Identify the account type and normal balance of each account identified in Requirement 1.

vernon yung practices medicine under the business title vernon yung m d during 538322

Analyzing and journalizing transactions, posting, and preparing a trial balance

Vernon Yung practices medicine under the business title Vernon Yung, M.D. During

July, the medical practice completed the following transactions:

2 3 4 5

1 July

Yung deposited $68,000 cash in the business bank account.The business gave capital to Yung.

5

Paid monthly rent on medical equipment, $560.

9

Paid $16,000 cash to purchase land for an office site.

10

Purchased supplies on account, $1,600.

19

Borrowed $23,000 from the bank for business use. Yung signed a note payable to the bank in the name of the business.

22

Paid $1,300 on account.

31

Revenues earned during the month included $6,500 cash and $5,800 on account.

31

Paid employees” salaries $2,500, office rent $1,100, and utilities $400. Make a single compound entry

31

Yung withdrew cash of $7,000.

The business uses the following accounts: Cash; Accounts receivable; Supplies; Land;

Accounts payable; Notes payable; Yung, capital; Yung, drawing; Service revenue; Salary expense; Rent expense; and Utilities expense.

Requirements

1. Journalize each transaction, as shown for July 1. Explanations are not required.

Jul 1

Cash

68,000

Yung , capital

68,000

2. Post the transactions to the T-accounts, using transaction dates as posting references

in the ledger accounts. Label the balance of each account Bal, as shown in the chapter.

3. Prepare the trial balance of Vernon Yung, M.D. at July 31, 2012.

doris stewart started her practice as a design consultant on september 1 2012 538323

Journalizing transactions, posting to T-accounts, and preparing a tranil balance

Doris Stewart started her practice as a design consultant on September 1, 2012.

During the first month of operations, the business completed the following

transactions:

Sep 1

Received $42,000 cash and gave capital to Stewart.

4

Purchased supplies, $700, and furniture, $1,900, on account

6

Performed services for a law firm and received $1,400 cash

7

Paid $24,000 cash to acquire land for a future office site.

10

Performed service for a hotel and received its promise to pay the $1,000 within one week.

14

Paid for the furniture purchased September 4 on account.

15

Paid secretary”s bi-monthly salary, $490.

17

Received cash on account, $400.

20

Prepared a design for a school on account, $700.

28

Received $2,100 cash for consulting with Plummer & Gorden

30

Paid secretary”s bi-monthly salary, $490.

30

Paid rent expense, $650.

30

Stewart withdrew cash of $3,000.

Requirements

1. Open the following T-accounts: Cash; Accounts receivable; Supplies; Furniture; Land; Accounts payable; Stewart, capital; Stewart, drawing; Service revenue; Salary expense; and Rent expense.

2. Record each transaction in the journal, using the account titles given. Key each transaction by date. Explanations are not required.

3. Post the transactions to the T-accounts, using transaction dates as posting references in the ledger accounts. Label the balance of each account Bal, as shown in the chapter.

4. Prepare the trial balance of Doris Stewart, Designer, at September 30, 2012.

trevor moore opened a law office on september 2 2012 during the first month ofoperat 538324

Journalizing transactions, posting to accounts in four-column format, and preparing a trial balance

Trevor Moore opened a law office on September 2, 2012. During the first month of operations, the business completed the following transactions:

Sep 2

Moore deposited $39,000 cash in the business bank account Trevor Moore, Attorney. The business gave capital to Moore.

3

Purchased supplies, $600, and furniture, $2,000, on account.

4

Performed legal service for a client and received cash, $1,300.

7

Paid cash to acquire land for a future office site, $26,000.

11

Prepared legal documents for a client on account, $700.

15

Paid secretary”s bi-monthly salary, $590.

16

Paid for the supplies purchased September 3 on account.

18

Received $2,400 cash for helping a client sell real estate.

19

Defended a client in court and billed the client for $800.

29

Received cash on account, $700.

30

Paid secretary”s bi-monthly salary, $590.

30

Paid rent expense, $670.

30

Moore withdrew cash of $2,400.

journalizing transactions posting to accounts in four column format and preparing a 538325

Journalizing transactions, posting to accounts in four-column format, and preparing a trial balance Trevor Moore opened a law office on September 2, 2012. During the first month of operations, the business completed the following transactions:

Sep 2

Moore deposited $39,000 cash in the business bank account Trevor Moore, Attorney. The business gave capital to Moore.

3

Purchased supplies, $600, and furniture, $2,000, on account.

4

Performed legal service for a client and received cash, $1,300.

7

Paid cash to acquire land for a future office site, $26,000.

11

Prepared legal documents for a client on account, $700.

15

Paid secretary”s bi-monthly salary, $590.

16

Paid for the supplies purchased September 3 on account.

18

Received $2,400 cash for helping a client sell real estate.

19

Defended a client in court and billed the client for $800.

29

Received cash on account, $700.

30

Paid secretary”s bi-monthly salary, $590.

30

Paid rent expense, $670.

30

Moore withdrew cash of $2,400.

Requirements

1. Open the following T-accounts: Cash; Accounts receivable; Supplies; Furniture; Land; Accounts payable; Moore, capital; Moore, drawing; Service revenue; Salary expense; and Rent expense.

2. Record each transaction in the journal, using the account titles given. Key each transaction by date. Explanations are not required.

3. Post the transactions to T-accounts, using transaction dates as posting references in the ledger. Label the balance of each account Bal, as shown in the chapter.

4. Prepare the trial balance of Trevor Moore, Attorney, at September 30, 2012.

journalizing transactions posting to accounts in four column format and preparing a 538326

Journalizing transactions, posting to accounts in four-column format, and preparing a trial balance

The trial balance of Sam Mitchell, CPA, is dated January 31, 2012:

SAM MITCHELL, CPA

Trial Balance

31-Jan-12

Account No.

Account

Debit

Credit

11

Cash

$ 7,000

12

Accounts receivable

10,500

13

Supplies

600

14

Land

17,000

21

Accounts payable

4,700

31

Mitchell, capital

30,400

3

Mitchell, drawing

41

Service revenue

51

Salary expense

52

Rent expense

Total

$35,100

$35,100

During February, Mitchell or his business completed the following transactions:

Feb 4

Collected $4,000 cash from a client on account

8

Performed tax services for a client on account,$4,600.

13

Paid business debt on account, $2,400.

18

Purchased office supplies on account, $900.

20

Mitchell withdrew cash of $2,200.

21

Mitchell paid for a deck for his private residence using personal funds, $8,000.

22

Received $2,300 cash for consulting work just completed.

27

Paid office rent, $500.

29

Paid employee salary, $1,600.

Requirements

1. Record the February transactions in the journal. Include an explanation for each entry.

2. Post the transactions to four-column accounts in the ledger, using dates, account numbers, journal references, and posting references. Open the ledger accounts listed in the trial balance, together with their balances at January 31.

3. Prepare the trial balance of Sam Mitchell, CPA, at February 29, 2012.

recording transactions using four column accounts posting and preparing a trial bala 538327

Recording transactions, using four-column accounts, posting, and preparing a trial balance

Maurey Wills started an environmental consulting company and during the first month

of operations (February 2012), the business completed the following transactions

a. Wills began the business with an investment of $48,000 cash and a building at $30,000. The business gave $78,000 ofcapital to Wills.

b. Purchased office supplies on account, $2,000.

c. Paid $14,000 for office furniture.

d. Paid employee”s salary, $2,200.

e. Performed consulting services on account, $3,700.

f. Paid $900 of the account payable created in transaction (b).

g. Received a $600 bill for advertising expense that will be paid in the near future.

h. Performed consulting service for cash, $1,100.

i. Received cash on account, $1,100.

j. Paid the following cash expenses:

(1) Rent on equipment, $1,000.

(2) Utilities, $900.

k. Wills withdrew cash of $2,300.

4 5

Requirements

1. Open the following four-column accounts: Cash; Accounts receivable; Office supplies; Office furniture; Building; Accounts payable; Wills, capital; Wills, drawing; Service revenue; Salary expense; Rent expense; Advertising expense; and Utilities expense.

2. Record each transaction in the journal. Use the letters to identify the transactions.

3. Post to the accounts and keep a running balance for each account.

4. Prepare the trial balance of Wills Environmental Consulting Company at

February 29, 2012.

the trial balance of smart tots child care does not balance 538328

Correcting errors in a trial balance

The trial balance of Smart Tots Child Care does not balance.

SMART TOTS CHILD CARE

Trial Balance

31-Aug-12

Account

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 6,700

Accounts receivable

7,000

Supplies

700

Equipment

87,000

Accounts payable

53,000

Tilley, capital

50,500

Tilley, drawing

2,400

Service revenue

4,700

Salary expense

3,600

Rent expense

500

Total

$107,900

$108,200

The following errors are detected:

a. Cash is understated by $1,000.

b. A $4,000 debit to Accounts receivable was posted as a credit.

c. A $1,000 purchase of supplies on account was neither journalized nor posted.

d. Equipment”s cost is $78,500, not $87,000.

e. Salary expense is overstated by $200.

Requirement

1. Prepare the corrected trial balance at August 31, 2012. Journal entries are not required.

the trial balance for treasure hunt exploration company does not balance 538329

Correcting errors in a trial balance

The trial balance for Treasure Hunt Exploration Company does not balance.

TREASURE HUNT EXPLORATION COMPANY

Trial Balance

29-Feb-12

Account

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 6,300

Accounts receivable

6,000

Supplies

400

Exploration equipment

22,300

Computers

49,000

Accounts payable

2,800

Note payable

18,500

Jones, capital

50,000

Jones, drawing

4,000

Service revenue

4,100

Salary expense

$1,400

Rent expense

800

Advertising expense

900

Utilities expense

800

Total

$91,900

$75,400

The following errors were detected:

a. The cash balance is overstated by $5,000.

b. Rent expense of $340 was erroneously posted as a credit rather than a debit.

c. A $6,800 credit to Service revenue was not posted.

d. A $400 debit to Accounts receivable was posted as $40.

e. The balance of Utilities expense is understated by $70.

f. $900 purchase of supplies on account was neither journalized nor posted.

g. Exploration equipment should be $16,490.

Requirement

1. Prepare the corrected trial balance at February 29, 2012. Journal entries are not required.

party time amusements company owns movie theaters party time engaged in the followin 538335

Identifying common accounts and normal account balances

Party Time Amusements Company owns movie theaters. Party Time engaged in the following business transactions in 2012:

1 2

Aug 1

Daniel Smith invested $400,000 personal cash in the business by depositing that amount in a bank account titled Party Time Amusements. The business gave capital to Smith.

2

Paid $350,000 cash to purchase a theater building.

5

Borrowed $200,000 from the bank. Smith signed a note payable to the bank in the name of Party Time.

10

Purchased theater supplies on account, $1,300.

15

Paid $1,000 on account.

15

Paid property tax expense on theater building, $1,200.

16

Paid employees” salaries $2,700, and rent on equipment $1,700.Make a single compound entry.

28

Smith withdrew cash of $8,000.

31

Received $25,000 cash from service revenue and deposited that amount in the bank.

5 Requirements

1. Create the list of accounts that Party Time Amusements will use to record these transactions.

2. Identify the account type and normal balance of each account identified in Requirement 1.

vince rockford practices medicine under the business title vince rockford m d during 538337

Analyzing and journalizing transactions, posting, and preparing a trial balance

Vince Rockford practices medicine under the business title Vince Rockford, M.D. During March, the medical practice completed the following transactions:

Mar 1

Rockford deposited $74,000 cash in the business bank account.The business gave capital to Rockford.

5

Paid monthly rent on medical equipment, $560.

9

Paid $24,000 cash to purchase land for an office site.

10

Purchased supplies on account, $1,300.

19

Borrowed $19,000 from the bank for business use. Rockford signed a note payable to the bank in the name of the business.

22

Paid $900 on account.

31

Revenues earned during the month included $7,100 cash and $4,700 on account.

31

Paid employees” salaries $2,000, office rent $1,600, and utilities $320. Make a single compound entry.

31

Rockford withdrew cash of $8,000.

3 4

The business uses the following accounts: Cash; Accounts receivable; Supplies; Land; Accounts payable; Notes payable; Rockford, capital; Rockford, drawing; Service revenue; Salary expense; Rent expense; and Utilities expense.

Requirements

1. Journalize each transaction, as shown for March 1. Explanations are not required.

1-Mar

Cash

74,000

Rockford, capital

74,000

2. Post the transactions to the T-accounts, using transaction dates as posting references in the ledger accounts. Label the balance of each account Bal, as shown in the chapter.

3. Prepare the trial balance of Vince Rockford, M.D., at March 31, 2012.

vince smith opened a law office on april 2 2012 during the first month of operations 538338

Journalizing transactions, posting to accounts in four-column format, and preparing a trial balance

Vince Smith opened a law office on April 2, 2012. During the first month of operations, the business completed the following transactions:

Apr 2

Smith deposited $32,000 cash in the business bank account Vince Smith, Attorney. The business gave Smith capital.

3

Purchased supplies, $500, and furniture, $2,000, on account.

4

Performed legal service for a client and received cash, $1,900.

7

Paid cash to acquire land for a future office site, $24,000.

11

Prepared legal documents for a client on account, $1,100.

15

Paid secretary”s bi-monthly salary, $460.

16

Paid for the supplies purchased April 3 on account.

18

Received $1,700 cash for helping a client sell real estate.

19

Defended a client in court and billed the client for $700.

29

Received cash on account, $800.

30

Paid secretary”s bi-monthly salary, $460.

30

Paid rent expense, $730.

30

Smith withdrew cash of $2,700.

Requirements

1. Open the following T-accounts: Cash; Accounts receivable; Supplies; Furniture; Land; Accounts payable; Smith, capital; Smith, drawing; Service revenue; Salary expense; and Rent expense.

2. Record each transaction in the journal, using the account titles given. Key each transaction by date. Explanations are not required.

3. Post the transactions to T-accounts, using transaction dates as posting references in the ledger. Label the balance of each account Bal, as shown in the chapter.

4. Prepare the trial balance of Vince Smith, Attorney, at April 30, 2012.

the trial balance of john hilton cpa is dated march 31 2012 538339

Journalizing transactions, posting to accounts in four-column format, and preparing a trial balance

The trial balance of John Hilton, CPA, is dated March 31, 2012:

JOHN HILTON, CPA

Trial Balance

31-Mar-12

Account No.

Account

Debit

Credit

11

Cash

$ 5,000

12

Accounts receivable

8,100

13

Supplies

800

14

Land

14,000

21

Accounts payable

4,200

31

Hilton, capital

23,700

32

Hilton, drawing

41

Service revenue

51

Salary expense

52

Rent expense

Total

$27,900

$27,900

During April, Hilton or his business completed the following transactions:

Apr 4

Collected $7,000 cash from a client on account.

8

Performed tax services for a client on account, $5,000.

13

Paid business debt on account, $2,500.

18

Purchased office supplies on account, $600.

20

Hilton withdrew cash of $2,300.

21

Hilton paid for a deck for his private residence,using personal funds, $12,000.

22

Received $2,100 cash for consulting work just completed.

27

Paid office rent, $300.

28

Paid employee salary, $1,300.

Requirements

1. Record the April transactions in the journal. Include an explanation for each entry.

2. Post the transactions to four-column accounts in the ledger, using dates, account numbers, journal references, and posting references. Open the ledger accounts listed in the trial balance, together with their balances at March 31.

3. Prepare the trial balance of John Hilton, CPA, at April 30, 2012.

the trial balance of shermana peters registered dietician at june 30 2012 follows 538340

Journalizing transactions, posting to accounts in four-column format, and preparing a trial balance

The trial balance of Shermana Peters, Registered Dietician, at June 30, 2012, follows:

SHERMANA PETERS, REGISTERED DIETICIAN

Trial Balance

30-Jun-12

Account No.

Account

Debit

Credit

11

Cash

$ 4,000

12

Accounts receivable

7,600

13

Supplies

600

14

Equipment

16,000

21

Accounts payable

5,200

31

Peters, capital

23,000

32

Peters, drawing

41

Service revenue

51

Salary expense

52

Rent expense

Total

$28,200

$28,200

During July, Peters or her business completed the following transactions:

Jul 4

Collected $7,000 cash from a client on account.

7

Performed a nutritional analysis for a hospital on account, $4,900.

12

Peters used personal funds to pay for the renovation of her private residence, $53,000.

16

Purchased supplies on account, $800.

19

Peters withdrew cash of $2,200.

20

Paid business debt on account, $2,300.

24

Received $2,100 cash for consulting with Bountiful Foods.

25

Paid rent, $300.

31

Paid employee salary, $1,500.

Requirements

1. Record the July transactions in the business’s journal. Include an explanation for each entry.

2. Post the transactions to four-column accounts in the ledger, using dates, account numbers, journal references, and posting references.

3. Prepare the trial balance of Shermana Peters, Registered Dietician, at July 31, 2012.

van stubbs started an environmental consulting company and during the first month of 538341

Recording transactions, using four-column accounts, posting, and preparing a trial balance

Van Stubbs started an environmental consulting company and during the first month of operations (October 2012), the business completed the following transactions:

a.

Stubbs began the business with an investment of $40,000 cash and a building at $26,000. The business gave $66,000 of capital to Stubbs.

b.

Purchased office supplies on account, $2,400.

c.

Paid $18,000 for office furniture.

d.

Paid employee”s salary, $1,900.

e.

Performed consulting services on account, $3,600.

f.

Paid $500 of the account payable created in transaction (b).

g.

Received a $300 bill for advertising expense that will be paid in the near future.

h.

Performed consulting service for cash, $800.

i.

Received cash on account, $1,400.

j.

Paid the following cash expenses: (1) Rent on equipment, $700.
(2) Utilities, $500.

k.

Stubbs withdrew cash of $2,400.

4 5

Requirements

1. Open the following four-column accounts: Cash; Accounts receivable; Office supplies; Office furniture; Building; Accounts payable; Stubbs, capital; Stubbs, drawing; Service revenue; Salary expense; Rent expense; Advertising expense; and Utilities expense.

2. Record each transaction in the journal. Use the letters to identify the transactions.

3. Post to the accounts and keep a running balance for each account.

4. Prepare the trial balance of Stubbs Environmental Consulting Company at October 31, 2012.

the trial balance of building blocks child care does not balance 538342

Correcting errors in a trial balance

The trial balance of Building Blocks Child Care does not balance.

BUILDING BLOCKS CHILD CARE

Trial Balance

31-May-12

Account

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 6,300

Accounts receivable

3,000

Supplies

700

Equipment

88,000

Accounts payable

57,000

Estella, capital

50,400

Estella, drawing

2,600

Service revenue

4,700

Salary expense

3,200

Rent expense

700

Total

$104,500

$112,100

The following errors are detected:

a. Cash is understated by $4,000.

b. A $2,000 debit to Accounts receivable was posted as a credit.

c. A $1,200 purchase of supplies on account was neither journalized nor posted.

d. Equipment”s cost is $87,700, not $88,000.

e. Salary expense is overstated by $100.

Requirement

1. Prepare the corrected trial balance at May 31, 2012. Journal entries are not required.

the trial balance for treasure hunt exploration company does not balance 538343

Correcting errors in a trial balance

The trial balance for Treasure Hunt Exploration Company does not balance.

TREASURE HUNT EXPLORATION COMPANY

Trial Balance

31-Jul-12

Account

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 6,600

Accounts receivable

9,000

Supplies

200

Exploration equipment

22,600

Computers

46,000

Accounts payable

2,900

Note payable

18,900

Indiana, capital

50,100

Indiana, drawing

1,000

Service revenue

4,900

Salary expense

$1,800

Rent expense

100

Advertising expense

100

Utilities expense

700

Total

$88,100

$76,800

2 5

The following errors were detected:

a. The cash balance is overstated by $1,000.

b. Rent expense of $300 was erroneously posted as a credit rather than a debit.

c. $6,000 credit to Service revenue was not posted.

d. A $500 debit to Accounts receivable was posted as $50.

e. The balance of Utilities expense is understated by $90.

f. A $600 purchase of supplies on account was neither journalized nor posted.

g. Exploration equipment should be $17,160.

Requirement

1. Prepare the corrected trial balance at July 31, 2012. Journal entries are not required.

journalizing transactions posting to t accounts and preparing a trial balance exerci 538350

Journalizing transactions, posting to T-accounts, and preparing a trial balance Exercise 2-61 continues with the consulting business of Lawlor Lawn Service begun in Exercise 1-47. Here you will account for Lawlor Lawn Service”s transactions as it is actually done in practice.

E2-61 Lawlor Lawn Service completed the following transactions during May:

5

May 1

Received $1,700 and gave capital to Lawlor. Opened bank account titled Lawlor Lawn Service.

3

Purchased on account a mower, $1,200, and weed whacker, $240. The equipment is expected to remain in service for four years.

5

Purchased $30 of gas. Wrote check #1 from the new bank account.

6

Performed lawn services for client on account, $150.

8

Purchased $150 of fertilizer supplies from the lawn store that will be used on future jobs.Wrote check #2 from the new bank account.

17

Completed landscaping job for client, received cash $800.

31

Received $100 on account from May 6 sale.

Requirements

1. Open T-accounts: Cash; Accounts receivable; Lawn supplies; Equipment;

Accounts payable; Lawlor, capital; Lawlor, drawing; Service revenue; and Fuel expense.

2. Journalize the transactions. Explanations are not required.

3. Post to the T-accounts. Key all items by date, and denote an account balance as Bal. Formal posting references are not required.

4. Prepare a trial balance at May 31, 2012.

journalizing transactions posting to t accounts and preparing a trial balance proble 538351

Journalizing transactions, posting to T-accounts, and preparing a trial balance Problem 2-62 continues with the consulting business of Carl Draper, begun in Problem 1-48. Here you will account for Draper Consulting”s transactions as it is actually done in practice.

P2-62 Draper Consulting completed the following transactions during the first half of December, 2012:

Dec 2

Received $18,000 cash and gave capital to Draper.

2

Paid monthly office rent, $550.

3

Paid cash for a Dell computer, $1,800. This equipment is expected to remain in service for five years.

4

Purchased office furniture on account, $4,200. The furniture should last for five years.

5

Purchased supplies on account, $900.

9

Performed consulting service for a client on account, $1,500.

12

Paid utility expenses, $250.

18

Performed service for a client and received cash of $1,100.

Requirements

1. Open T-accounts: Cash; Accounts receivable; Supplies; Equipment; Furniture; Accounts payable; Draper, capital; Draper, drawing; Service revenue; Rent expense; and Utilities expense.

2. Journalize the transactions. Explanations are not required.

3. Post to the T-accounts. Key all items by date, and denote an account balance as Bal. Formal posting references are not required.

4. Prepare a trial balance at December 18. In the Continuing Problem of Chapter 3, we will add transactions for the remainder of December and prepare a trial balance at December 31.

analyzing transactions consider the following transactional data for the first month 538281

Analyzing transactions Consider the following transactional data for the first month of operations of Shine King Cleaning.

Nov 1:

Evan Hudson deposited $35,000 in the business account. Also on this date, Evan transferred his truck title,

worth $8,000, to the business. Evan received capital in return.

Nov 2:

Wrote a check for $2,000 to Pleasant Properties. In the “for” area of the the check, it states “November through

February Rent.” (Debit Prepaid rent)

Nov 3:

Purchased business insurance policy for $2,400 for the term November 1, 2012, through October 31, 2013

and paid cash. (Debit Prepaid insurance)

Nov 4:

Evan went to the Cleaning Supply Company and purchased $270 of cleaning supplies on account. The invoice is

due 20 days from the date of purchase.

Nov 5:

Purchased on account an industrial vacuum cleaner from Penny Purchase costing $1,000. The invoice is payable

on or before November 25.

Nov 7:

Purchased a computer and printer costing a total of $1,200. A check for the same amount to the computer store

was written on the same date.

Nov 9:

Performed cleaning services on account for Pierre”s Wig Stand in the amount of $3,000.

Nov 10:

Deposited Pierre”s check for $100 in the bank.

Nov 15:

Wrote check payable to Eric Ryder for $500 for contract labor.

Nov 16:

Received $3,600 for 1-year contract beginning November 16 for cleaning services to be provided to the Sea Side

Restaurant. Contract begins November 16, 2012, and ends November 15, 2013. (Credit Unearned service revenue)

Nov 17:

Provided cleaning services for Tip Top Solutions for $800. Tip Top paid with a check.

Nov 18:

Received water and electric bill for $175 with due date of December 4, 2012.

Nov 20:

Borrowed $40,000 from bank with interest rate of 9% per year.

Nov 21:

Deposited check from Pierre”s Wig Stand for $900 paid on account.

Nov 25:

Wrote check to Penny Purchase for invoice #1035 in the amount of $500.

Nov 29:

Wrote check payable to St. Petersburg News for $100 for advertising.

Nov 30:

Evan withdrew cash of $600.

Requirement

1. Prepare an analysis of the November activity using the format displayed in Exhibit 1-6 as a guide. Include the following headings: Cash; Accounts receivable, Supplies; Prepaid rent; Prepaid insurance; Truck; Equipment; Accounts payable; Unearned service revenue; Notes payable; and Hudson, capital.

let s examine a case using greg s tunes and another company sal s silly songs 538282

Let”s examine a case using Greg”s Tunes and another company, Sal”s Silly Songs. It is now the end of the first year of operations, and both owners—Sally Siegman and Greg Moore—want to know how well they came out at the end of the year. Neither business kept complete accounting records and neither owner made any drawings. Moore and Siegman throw together the following data at year end:

Sal”s Silly Songs:

Total assets

$23,000

Siegman, capital

$8,000

Total revenues

35,000

Total expenses

22,000

Greg”s Tunes:

Total liabilities

$10,000

Moore, capital

6,000

Total expenses

44,000

Net income

9,000

Working in the music business, Moore has forgotten all the accounting he learned in college. Siegman majored in English literature, so she never learned any accounting. To gain information for evaluating their businesses, they ask you several questions. For each answer, you must show your work to convince Moore and Siegman that you know what you are talking about.

1. Which business has more assets?

2. Which business owes more to creditors?

3. Which business has more owner”s equity at the end of the year?

4. Which business brought in more revenue?

5. Which business is more profitable?

6. Which of the foregoing questions do you think is most important for evaluating these two businesses? Why? (Challenge)

7. Which business looks better from a financial standpoint? (Challenge)

the board of directors of xiaping trading company is meeting to discuss past year s 538283

The board of directors of Xiaping Trading Company is meeting to discuss past year”s results before releasing financial statements to the bank. The discussion includes exchange: Wai Lee, company owner: “This has not been a good year! Revenue is down and expenses way up. If we are not careful, we will report a loss for the third year in a row. I can temporarily transfer some land that I own into the company”s name, and that will beef up our balance sheet. Brent, can you shave $500,000 from expenses? Then we can probably get the bank loan that we need.”

Brent Ray, company chief accountant: “Wai Lee, you are asking too much. Generally

accepted accounting principles are designed to keep this sort of thing from happening.”

Requirements

What is the fundamental ethical issue in this situation?

How do the two suggestions of the company owner differ?

exeter is a building contractor on the gulf coast after losing a number of big lawsu 538285

Exeter is a building contractor on the Gulf Coast. After losing a number of big lawsuits, it was facing its first annual net loss as the end of the year approached. The owner, Hank Snow, was under intense pressure from the company”s creditors to report positive net income for the year. However, he knew that the controller, Alice Li, had arranged a short-term bank loan of $10,000 to cover a temporary shortfall of cash. He told Alice to record the incoming cash as “construction revenue” instead of a loan. That would nudge the company”s income into positive territory for the year, and then, he said, the entry could be corrected in January when the loan was repaid.

Requirements

1. How would this action affect the year-end income statement? How would it affect the yearend balance sheet?

2. If you were one of the company”s creditors, how would this fraudulent action affect you?

you are promoting a rock concert in your area your purpose is to earn a profit and y 538287

You are promoting a rock concert in your area. Your purpose is to earn a profit, and you organize Concert Enterprises as a proprietorship.

Requirements

1. Make a detailed list of 10 factors you must consider to establish the business.

2. Describe 10 of the items your business must arrange in order to promote and stage the rock concert.

3. Prepare your business”s income statement, statement of owner”s equity, and balance sheet on June 30, 20XX, immediately after the rock concert. Use made-up amounts, and include a complete heading for each financial statement. For the income statement and the statement of owner”s equity, assume the period is the three months ended June 30, 20XX.

4. Assume that you will continue to promote rock concerts if the venture is successful. If it is unsuccessful, you will terminate the business within three months after the concert. Discuss how you will evaluate the success of your venture and how you will decide whether to continue in business.

michael barry attorney began the year with total assets of 126 000 liabilities of 74 538297

Michael Barry, Attorney, began the year with total assets of $126,000, liabilities of $74,000, and owner”s equity of $52,000. During the year the business earned revenue of

$110,000 and paid expenses of $33,000. Barry also withdrew cash of $69,000. How would Michael Barry record expenses paid of $33,000?

a. Cash

33,000

Expenses

33,000

b. Accounts payable

33,000

Cash

33,000

c. Expenses

33,000

Accounts payable

33,000

d. Expenses

33,000

Cash

33,000

Answers are given after Apply Your Knowledge (p. 129).

accounting has its own vocabulary and basic relationships 538298

Using accounting vocabulary

Accounting has its own vocabulary and basic relationships.

Requirement

1. Match the accounting terms on the left with the corresponding definitions on the right.

1.Equity

A. Using up assets in the course of operating a business

2.Debit

B. Book of accounts

3.Expense

C. An asset

4.Net income

D. Record of transactions

5.Ledger

E. Left side of an account

6.Posting

F. Side of an account where increases are recorded

7.Normal balance

G. Copying data from the journal to the ledger

8.Payable

H. Always a liability

9.Journal

I. Revenues – Expenses =

10.Receivable

J. Assets – Liabilities =

ned brown opened a medical practice in san diego california 538302

Journalizing transactions

Ned Brown opened a medical practice in San Diego, California.

4

3

Jan1

The business received $29,000 cash and gave capital to Brown.

2

Purchased medical supplies on account, $14,000.

2

Paid monthly office rent of $2,600.

3

Recorded $8,000 revenue for service rendered to patients on account.

2

2

Requirement

1. Record the preceding transactions in the journal of Ned Brown, M.D. Include an explanation with each entry.

texas sales consultants completed the following transactions during the latter part 538303

Journalizing transactions

Texas Sales Consultants completed the following transactions during the latter part of January:

4

Jan22

Performed service for customers on account, $8,000.

30

Received cash on account from customers, $7,000.

31

Received a utility bill, $180, which will be paid during February.

31

Paid monthly salary to salesman, $2,000.

31

Paid advertising expense of $700.

Requirement

1. Journalize the transactions of Texas Sales Consultants. Include an explanation with each journal entry

washington law firm performed legal services for a client who could not pay immediat 538305

Journalizing transactions and posting

Washington Law Firm performed legal services for a client who could not pay immediately. The business expected to collect the $16,000 the following month. Later, the business received $9,600 cash from the client.

Requirements

1. Record the two transactions for Washington Law Firm. Include an explanation for each transaction.

2. Open these T-accounts: Cash; Accounts receivable; Service revenue. Post to all three accounts. Compute each T-account”s balance, and denote as Bal.

3. Answer these questions based on your analysis:

a. How much did the business earn? Which account shows this amount?

b. How much in total assets did the business acquire as a result of the two transactions? Identify each asset and show its balance.

oakland floor coverings reported the following summarized data at december 31 2012 a 538307

Preparing a trial balance

Oakland Floor Coverings reported the following summarized data at December 31, 2012. Accounts appear in no particular order.

5

Revenues

$34,000

Other liabilities

18,000

Equipment

45,000

Cash

12,000

Accounts payable

2,000

Expenses

19,000

Oakland, capital

22,000

Requirement

1. Prepare the trial balance of Oakland Floor Coverings at December 31, 2012.

brenda longval travel design prepared its trial balance suppose longval made an erro 538308

Correcting a trial balance

Brenda Longval Travel Design prepared its trial balance. Suppose Longval made an error: She erroneously listed capital of $30,600 as a debit rather than a credit.

BRENDA LONGVAL TRAVEL DESIGN

Trial Balance

30-Apr-12

Balance

Account Title

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 18,000

Accounts receivable

1,000

Office supplies

500

Land

14,000

Accounts payable

$400

Longval, capital

30,600

Longval, drawing

3,000

Service revenue

8,800

Rent expense, computer

700

Rent expense, office

900

Salary expense

1,100

Utilities expense

600

Total

Requirement

1. Compute the incorrect trial balance totals for debits and credits. Then show how to correct this error.

the following transactions occurred for london engineering 538311

Analyzing and journalizing transactions

The following transactions occurred for London Engineering:

3 4

2-Jul

Paid utilities expense of $400.

5

Purchased equipment on account, $2,100.

10

Performed service for a client on account, $2,000.

12

Borrowed $7,000 cash, signing a note payable.

19

Sold for $29,000 land that had cost this same amount.

21

Purchased supplies for $800 and paid cash.

27

Paid the liability from July 5.

1 2

Requirement

1. Identify and perform the three steps to record the previously described transactions.

danielle neylon has trouble keeping her debits and credits equal during a recent mon 538313

Analyzing accounting errors

Danielle Neylon has trouble keeping her debits and credits equal. During a recent month, Danielle made the following accounting errors:

a. In preparing the trial balance, Danielle omitted a $7,000 note payable.

b. Danielle posted a $90 utility expense as $900. The credit to Cash was correct.

c. In recording an $800 payment on account, Danielle debited Furniture instead

of Accounts payable.

d. In journalizing a receipt of cash for service revenue, Danielle debited Cash for

$1,200 instead of the correct amount of $120. The credit was correct.

e. Danielle recorded a $540 purchase of supplies on account by debiting Supplies

and crediting Accounts payable for $450.

Requirements

1. For each of these errors, state whether total debits equal total credits on the trial balance.

2. Identify each account that has an incorrect balance, and indicate the amount and direction of the error (such as “Accounts receivable $500 too high”).

applying the rules of debit and credit posting and preparing a trial balance 538314

Applying the rules of debit and credit, posting, and preparing a trial balance

Refer to the transactions of London Engineering in Exercise 2-16.

Requirements

1. Open the following T-accounts with their July 1 balances: Cash, debit balance

$4,000; Accounts receivable $0; Equipment $0; Land, debit balance $29,000;

Supplies $0; Accounts payable $0; Notes payable $0; London, capital, credit balance

$33,000; Service revenue $0; Utilities expense $0.

2. Post the transactions of Exercise 2-16 to the T-accounts. Use the dates as posting

references. Start with July 2.

3. Compute the July 31, 2012, balance for each account, and prove that total debits

equal total credits by preparing a trial balance.

in december 2012 the first five transactions of adams lawn care company have been po 538315

Journalizing transactions, posting, and preparing a trial balance

In December, 2012, the first five transactions of Adams” Lawn Care Company have been posted to the accounts as follows:

2

Cash

Supply

Equipment

Building

(1) 53,000

(3) 40,000

(2)700

(5) 4,700

(3) 40,000

(4) 50,000

(5)4,700

Accounts payable

Note payable

Adams, capital

(2)700

(4) 50,000

(1) 53,000

3 4 5

Requirements

1. Prepare the journal entries that served as the sources for the five transactions. Include an explanation for each entry as illustrated on page 87.

2. Prepare the trial balance of Adams” Lawn Care Company at December 31, 2012.

principe technology solutions completed the following transactions during august2012 538317

Journalizing transactions

Principe Technology Solutions completed the following transactions during August 2012, its first month of operations:

4

Aug 1

Received cash of $48,000 and gave capital to the owner.

2

Purchased supplies of $500 on account.

4

Paid $47,000 cash for a building.

6

Performed service for customers and received cash, $4,400.

9

Paid $200 on accounts payable.

17

Performed service for customers on account, $2,200.

23

Received $1,600 cash from a customer on account.

31

Paid the following expenses: salary, $1,900; rent, $700.

Requirement

1. Record the preceding transactions in the journal of Principe Technology Solutions. Include an explanation for each entry, as illustrated in the chapter. Use the following accounts: Cash, Accounts receivable, Supplies, Building, Accounts payable, Principe, capital, Service revenue, Salary expense, and Rent expense.

the accounts of atkins moving company follow with their normal balances at august 31 538319

Preparing a trial balance

The accounts of Atkins Moving Company follow with their normal balances at August 31, 2012. The accounts are listed in no particular order.

Atkins, capital

$ 72,000

Trucks

$ 132,000

Insurance expense

600

Fuel expense

3,000

Accounts payable

4,000

Atkins, drawing

5,400

Service revenue

80,000

Utilities expense

500

Building

48,000

Accounts receivable

8,800

Supplies expense

400

Note payable

54,000

Cash

4,000

Supplies

300

Salary expense

7,000

Requirement

1. Prepare Atkins” trial balance at August 31, 2012.

the following information is available for x ltd for the year ended 31 may 20×1 537886

The following information is available for X Ltd for the year ended 31 May 20X1:

Net profit after tax and minority interest

£18,160,000

Ordinar y shares of £1 (fully paid)

£40,000,000

Average fair value for year of ordinar y shares

£1.50

1 Share options have been granted to directors giving them the right to subscribe for ordinary shares between 20X1 and 20X3 at £1.20 per share. The options outstanding at 31 May 20X1 were 2,000,000 in number.

2 The company has £20 million of 6% conver tible loan stock in issue. The terms of conversion of the loan stock per £200 nominal value of loan stock at the date of issue were:

Conversion date

No. of shares

31 May 20X0

24

31 May 20X1

23

31 May 20X2

22

No loan stock has as yet been conver ted. The loan stock had been issued at a discount of 1%.

3 There are 1,600,000 conver tible preference shares in issue. The cumulative dividend is 10p per share and each preference share can conver t into two ordinar y shares. The preference shares can be converted in 20X2.

4 Assume a corporation tax rate of 33% when calculating the effect on income of conver ting the convertible loan stock.

Required:

(a) Calculate the diluted EPS according to IAS 33.

(b) Discuss why there is a need to disclose diluted earnings per share.

a the issued share capital of manfred a quoted company on 1 november 2004 consisted 537887

(a) The issued share capital of Manfred, a quoted company, on 1 November 2004 consisted of 36,000,000 ordinar y shares of 75 cents each. On 1 May 2005 the company made a rights issue of 1 for 6 at $1.46 per share. The market value of Manfred”s ordinar y shares was $1.66 before announcing the rights issue. Tax is charged at 30% of profits. Manfred reported a profit after taxation of $4.2 million for the year ended 31 October 2005

and $3.6 million for the year ended 31 October 2004. The published figure for ear nings per share for the year ended 31 October 2004 was 10 cents per share.

Required:

Calculate Manfred”s earnings per share for the year ended 31 October 2005 and the comparative

figure for the year ended 31 October 2004.

(b) Brachly, a publicly quoted company, has 15,000,000 ordinar y shares of 40 cents each in issue throughout its financial year ended 31 October 2005. There are also:

? 1,000,000 8.5% conver tible preference shares of $1 each in issue. Each preference share is convertible into 1.5 ordinar y shares.

? $2,000,000 12.5% convertible loan notes. Each $1 loan note is convertible into 2 ordinary shares.

? Options granted to the company”s senior management giving them the right to subscribe for 600,000 ordinar y shares at a cost of 75 cents each.

The statement of comprehensive income of Brachly for the year ended 31 October 2005 reports a net profit after tax of $9,285,000 and preference dividends paid of $85,000. Tax on profits is 30%. The average market price of Brachly”s ordinar y shares was 84 cents for the year ended 31 October 2005.

Required:

Calculate Brachly”s basic and diluted earnings per share figures for the year ended 31 October 2005.

the capital structure of chavboro a quoted company during the years ended 31 october 537888

The capital structure of Chavboro, a quoted company, during the years ended 31 October 2005 and 2006 was as follows:

$

6,000,000 ordinary shares of 50 cents

3,000,000

10% preferred shares of $1

200,000

300,000 deferred ordinary shares of $1

300,000

12% convertible loan stock

250,000

The company has an executive share option scheme which gives the company”s directors the option to purchase a total of 100,000 ordinar y shares for $2.10 each. During the year ended 31 October 2006 no shares were issued in accordance with the share incentive scheme and the company”s obligations under the scheme remained unchanged.

On 31 August 2006 Chavboro plc made a 1 for 6 rights issue at $2.50 per share. The cum-rights price on the last day of quotation cum rights was $2.85 per share. The shares issued in the rights issue are not included in the figure for ordinary shares given above. The deferred ordinar y shares will not rank for dividends until 1 November 2010 when they will each be divided into two 50 cents ordinary shares ranking pari passu with the other ordinar y shares then in issue.

The 12% loan stock is convertible into 50 cents ordinary shares on the following terms:

(i) if the option is exercised on 1 November 2007 each $100 of loan stock can be converted into 40 ordinary shares;

(ii) if the option is exercised on 1 November 2008 each $100 of loan stock can be converted into 35 ordinary shares.

The following information comes from the statement of comprehensive income of the company for the year ended 31 October 2006:

$

Profit before interest and tax

1,253,000

less Interest

30,000

1,223,000

less Income tax, at 30%

366,900

Profit attributable to shareholders

856,100

You may assume that the yield on 2.5% government consolidated stock was 7.5% on 1 November 2005 and 6% on 1 November 2006, and that the rate of income tax is 30% throughout. Chavboro plc”s reported earnings per share for the year ended 31 October 2005 were 10 cents.

Required:

(a) Calculate Chavboro plc”s basic earnings per share in cents for the year ended 31 October 2006.

(b) Calculate Chavboro plc”s restated earnings per share in cents for the year ended 31 October 2005.

(c) Calculate Chavboro plc”s fully diluted earnings per share in cents for the year ended 31 October 2006.

(d) Calculate Chavboro plc”s fully diluted earnings per share in cents for the year ended 31 October 2005.

(e) How can an investor evaluate the quality of the earnings per share figure published in a company”s financial statements?

direct plc provided the following information from its records for the year ended 30 537898

Direct plc provided the following information from its records for the year ended 30 September 20X9:

B000

Sales

316,000

Cost of goods sold

110,400

Other expenses

72,000

Rent expense

14,400

Dividends

10,000

Amortisation expense –

PPE

8,000

Advertising expense

4,800

Gain on sale of equipment

2,520

Interest expense

320

20X9

20X8

Accounts receivable

13,200

15,200

Unearned revenue

8,000

9,600

Inventor y

18,400

19,200

Prepaid adver tising

0

400

Accounts payable

11,200

8,800

Rent payable

0

1,200

Interest payable

40

0

Required:

Using the direct method of presentation, prepare the cash flows from the operating activities section of the Statement of cash flows for the year ended 30 September 20X9.

almost ready ltd had extracted the following information from the statement of compr 537899

Almost Ready Ltd had extracted the following information from the statement of comprehensive income and statement of financial position (000s) for the year ended 30 September 20X9:

Proceeds from issue of ordinar y shares 405, Dividends paid 1,923, Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of the period 6,539, Dividends from joint ventures 228, Purchase of investments 29, Interest received 43, Tax paid 1,389, Purchase of property 115, Cash and cash equivalents at end of period 9,214, Proceeds from sale of other long term assets 24, Purchase of a business (net of cash acquired) 274, Interest paid 16, Payment of principal under a finance lease 11, Cash generated from operations 5,732.

Required:

Prepare statement of cash flows for the year ended 30 September 20X9.

the following are the financial statements of riddle plc for the last two years 537900

The following are the financial statements of Riddle plc for the last two years:

The statements of financial position as at 31 March

20X9

20X9

0

0

0

0

Non-cur rent assets:

Property, plant and equipment, at cost

540

720

Less accumulated depreciation

(145)

(190)

395

530

Investments

115

140

Cur rent assets:

315

Inventor y

412

418

Trade receivables

48

775

438

Bank

1285

51

907

Total assets

1577

Capital and reser ves:

Ordinar y shares

600

800

Share premium

40

55

Retained ear nings

217

857

311

1166

Non-cur rent liabilities:

12% debentures

250

200

Cur rent liabilities:

Trade payables

139

166

Taxation

39

178

45

211

Total equity and liabilities

1285

1577

Statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 March 20X9

$0

$0

Revenue

2,460

Cost of sales

1,780

Gross profit

680

Distribution costs

(124)

Administration expenses

(300)

(424)

Operating profit

256

Interest on debentures

(24)

Profit before tax

232

Tax

(48)

Profit after tax

184

Note: The statement of changes in equity disclosed a dividend of $90,000.

Required:

(a) Prepare the statement of cash flows for Riddle plc for the year ended 31 March 20X9 and show the operating cash flows using the ‘indirect method’.

(b) Calculate the cash generated from operations using the ‘direct method’.

in the modern commercial world auditors provide numerous other ser vices to compleme 537946

In the modern commercial world, auditors provide numerous other ser vices to complement their audit work. These ser vices include the following:

(a) Accountancy and book-keeping assistance, e.g. in the maintenance of ledgers and in the preparation of monthly and annual accounts.

(b) Secretarial help, e.g. ensuring that the company has complied with the Companies Act in the maintenance of shareholder registers and in the completion of annual returns to Companies House.

(c) Consultancy ser vices, e.g. advice on the design of information systems and organizational structures, advice on the choice of computer equipment and software packages, and advice on the recruitment of new executives.

(d) Investigation work, e.g. appraisals of companies that might be taken over.

(e) Receivership work, e.g. when the firm assumes the role of receiver or liquidator on behalf of an audit client.

(f ) Taxation work, e.g. tax planning advice and preparation of tax retur ns to the Inland Revenue for both the company and the company”s senior management.

Discuss:

(i) Whether any of these activities is unacceptable as a separate activity because it might weaken an auditor”s independence.

(ii) The advantages and disadvantages to the shareholders of the audit firm providing this range of ser vice.

manufacturing co has been negotiating with fred paris regarding the sale of some pro 537959

Scenario – Fred Paris Manufacturing Co has been negotiating with Fred Paris regarding the sale of some property that represented an old manufacturing site which is now surplus to requirements. Because par t of the site was used for manufacturing, it has to be decontaminated before it can be subdivided as a new housing development. This has complicated negotiations. Fred is a property developer and he has a private company (Paris Property Development Pty Ltd) and is also a major (15%) shareholder of FP Development of which he is chairman. The negotiators for Manufacturing Co note that the documents keep switching between Paris Property Development and FP Development and they use that as feedback as to how well they are negotiating. Is there a corporate gover nance failure? Discuss.

scenario harvey storm 537960

Scenario – Harvey Storm Har vey Storm is chief executive of West Wing Savings and Loans. Har vey authorises a loan to Middleman Properties secured on the land it is about to purchase. Middleman Properties has little money of its own. Middleman Properties subdivides the land and builds houses on them. It offers buyers a house and finance package under which West Wing provides the house loans up to 97% of the house price even to couples with poor credit ratings. This allows Middleman Properties to ask for higher prices for the houses. Middleman Properties appoints Frontman Homes as the selling agent who kindly provides buyers with the free ser vices of a solicitor to handle all the legal aspects including the conveyancing. Most of the profits from the developments are paid to Frontman Homes as commissions. Har vey Storm”s wife has a 20% interest in Frontman Homes. Are these corporate gover nance failures? Discuss

the financial statements of rolls royce plc aero engine manufacturer for the year en 537965

The financial statements of Rolls-Royce plc (aero engine manufacturer) for the year ended 31 December 1999 disclose the following matters in relation to the directors:

(a) Remuneration committee The remuneration committee, which operates within agreed terms of reference, has responsibility for making recommendations to the board on the Group”s general policy towards executive remuneration. The committee also determines, on the board”s behalf, the specific remuneration packages of the executive directors and a number of senior executives.

The membership of the committee consists exclusively of independent non-executive directors (the financial statements disclose the names of these directors). The committee meets regularly and has access to professional advice from inside and outside the Company. The Chairman of the Company (a par t-time executive director) and the Chief Executive (an executive director) generally attend meetings but are not present during any discussion of their own emoluments.

(b) Base salary The committee believes that in order to attract and retain executive directors of the right caliber and to provide them with adequate incentives to deliver the Group”s objectives, the Group should pursue a policy of offering median-level base salaries for its executive directors, and through the per formance-related schemes, the oppor tunity of upper quar tile ear nings for upper quar tile performance.

(c) Annual performance award scheme The scheme enables a maximum performance award of up to 60% of salar y to be paid to executive directors for exceptional per formance against pre-determined targets based upon return on capital employed with a tapered and reducing scale of maximum percentages for senior employees. The targets are set by the committee based upon the Group”s annual operating plans. Such payments do not form part of pensionable ear nings. One-third of total awards made are paid in Rolls-Royce shares which are held in trust for two years, with release normally being conditional on the individual remaining in the Group”s employment until the end of the period. The required shares are purchased on the open market. This arrangement provides a strong link between performance and remuneration and provides a culture of share ownership amongst the Group”s senior management.

Required:

Comment on the notes to the financial statements included above.

you are required to prepare a value added statement to be included in the corporate 537979

You are required to prepare a value added statement to be included in the corporate report of Hythe plc for the year ended 31 December 20X6, including the comparatives for 20X5, using the information given below:

20X6

20X5

£000

£000

Non-current assets (net book value)

3,725

3,594

Trade receivables

870

769

Trade parables

530

448

14% debentures

1,200

1,080

6% preference shares

400

400

Ordinary shares (£1 each)

3,200

3,200

Sales

5,124

4,604

Materials consumed

2,934

2,482

Wages

607

598

Depreciation

155

144

Fuel consumed

290

242

Hire of plant and machinery

41

38

Salaries

203

198

Auditors” remuneration

10

8

Corporation tax provision

402

393

Ordinary share dividend

9p

8p

Number of employees

40

42

(b) Although value added statements were recommended by The Corporate Report, as yet there is

no accounting standard related to them. Explain what a value added statement is and provide reasons as to why you think it has not yet become mandatory to produce such a statement as a component of current financial statements either through a Financial Reporting Standard or company law.

the following items have been extracted from the accounts 537980

The following items have been extracted from the accounts:

2005 (Bm)

2004 (Bm)

Other income

844

980

Cost of materials

25,694

24,467

Financial income

-188

54

Depreciation/amortisation

4,207

3,589

Providers of finance

1,351

1,059

Retained

1,815

1,823

Revenues

46,656

44,335

Government

1,590

1,794

Other expenses

4,925

5,093

Shareholders

424

419

Employees

7,306

7,125

Required:

(a) Prepare a Value Added Statement showing % for each year and % change

(b) Draft a note for inclusion in the Annual Report commenting on the Statement you have prepared.

proprietorship attributes applying the entity concept and preparing financial statem 538272

Proprietorship attributes, applying the entity concept, and preparing financial statements

Andrea Scarlett is a realtor. She organized her business as a proprietorship, Andrea Scarlett, Realtor, by investing $19,000 cash. The business gave capital to her. Consider the following facts at September 30, 2012.

a. The business owes $61,000 on a note payable for land that the business acquired for a total price of $83,000.

b. The business spent $23,000 for a Zinka Banker real estate franchise, which entitles the business to represent itself as a Zinka Banker office. This franchise is a business asset.

c. Scarlett owes $80,000 on a personal mortgage for her personal residence, which she acquired in 2012 for a total price of $160,000.

d. Scarlett has $5,000 in her personal bank account, and the business has $9,000 in its bank account.

e. Scarlett owes $4,000 on a personal charge account with Chico”s.

f. The office acquired business furniture for $15,000 on September 25. Of this amount, the business owes $2,000 on account at September 30.

g. Office supplies on hand at the real estate office total $1,300.

applying the entity concept using the accounting equation for transaction analysis p 538273

Applying the entity concept, using the accounting equation for transaction analysis, preparing financial statements, and evaluating business performance

Aimee Griffin practiced law with a partnership for 10 years. Recently she opened her own law office, which she operates as a proprietorship. The name of the new entity is Aimee Griffin, Attorney. Griffin experienced the following events during the organizing phase of the new business and its first month of operation. Some of the events were personal and did not affect the law practice. Others were business transactions and should be accounted for by the business.

1-Dec

Sold personal investment in eBay stock, which she had owned for several years, receiving $33,000 cash.

2

Deposited the $33,000 cash from sales of the eBay stock in her personal bank account.

3

Received $159,000 cash from former law partners.

5

Deposited $109,000 cash in a new business bank account titled Aimee Griffin, Attorney. The business

gave capital to Griffin.

7

Paid $900 cash for ink cartridges for the printer.

9

Purchased a computer for the law office, agreeing to pay the account, $9,200, within three months.

23

Finished court hearings on behalf of a client and submitted a bill for legal services, $17,000, on account.

30

Paid utilities, $1,900.

31

Griffin withdrew cash of $5,000.

Requirements

1. Analyze the effects of the preceding events on the accounting equation of the propriertorship of Aimee Griffin, Attorney. Use a format similar to Exhibit 1-6.

2. At December 31, compute the business”s

a. total assets.

b. total liabilities.

c. total owner”s equity.

d. net income or net loss for the month.

3. Evaluate Aimee Griffin, Attorney”s first month of operations. Were the results good or bad?

missy crone owns and operates a public relations firm called top 40 538275

Using the accounting equation for transaction analysis

Missy Crone owns and operates a public relations firm called Top 40. The following amounts summarize her business on August 31, 2012:

7 8 9 10

Assets

=

Liabilities +

Owner”s equity

Date

Cash +

Amount receivable +

Supplies +

Land

=

Accounts payable +

Crone, capital

Bal

2100+

0+

10,000

=

6,000+

8,100

During September 2012, the business completed the following transactions:

a. Gave capital to Crone and received cash of $10,000.

b. Performed service for a client and received cash of $1,000.

c. Paid off the beginning balance of accounts payable.

d. Purchased supplies from OfficeMax on account, $700.

e. Collected cash from a customer on account, $500.

f. Received cash of $1,900 and gave capital to owner.

g. Consulted for a new band and billed the client for services rendered, $5,800.

h. Recorded the following business expenses for the month:

1. Paid office rent, $900.

2. Paid advertising, $400.

i. Returned supplies to OfficeMax for $80 from item d, which was the cost of the supplies.

j. Crone withdrew cash of $2,700.

.

Requirement

1. Analyze the effects of the preceding transactions on the accounting equation of

Top 40. Adapt the format to that of Exhibit 1-6.

Preparing financial statements and evaluating business performance

Presented here are the accounts of Quick and EZ Delivery for the year ended December 31, 2012.

Land

$7,000

Owner investment, 2012

$32,000

Note payable

$30,000

Accounts payable

$14,000

Property tax expense

2,900

Accounts receivable

1,700

Trott, drawing

32,000

Advertising expense

17,000

Rent expense

13,000

Building

137,900

Salary expense

69,000

Cash

6,000

Salary payable

500

Equipment

17,000

Service revenue

192,000

Insurance expense

2,000

Supplies

8,000

Interest expense

6,000

Requirements

1. Prepare Quick and EZ Delivery’s income statement.

2. Prepare the statement of owner’s equity.

3. Prepare the balance sheet.

4. Answer these questions about the company:

a. Was the result of operations for the year a profit or a loss? How much?

b. How much in total economic resources does the company have as it moves into the new year?

c. How much does the company owe to creditors?

d. What is the dollar amount of the owner’s equity in the business at the end of the year?

photo gallery works weddings and prom type parties the balance of leibovitz capital 538276

Preparing financial statements

Photo Gallery works weddings and prom-type parties. The balance of Leibovitz, capital was $17,000 at December 31, 2011. At December 31, 2012, the business”s accounting records show these balances:

Insurance expense

$9,000

Accounts receivable

$6,000

Cash

$26,000

Note payable

$14,000

Accounts payable

4,000

Leibovitz, capital, Dec 31, 2012

?

Advertising expense

2,000

Salary expense

21,000

Service revenue

78,000

Equipment

70,000

Leibovitz, drawing

14,000

Owner investment, 2012

35,000

Requirement

1. Prepare the following financial statements for Photo Gallery for the year ended December 31, 2012:

a. Income statement

b. Statement of owner”s equity

c. Balance sheet

the bookkeeper of outdoor life landscaping prepared the company s balance sheet whil 538277

Preparing financial statements and evaluating business performance

The bookkeeper of Outdoor Life Landscaping prepared the company”s balance sheet while the accountant was ill. The balance sheet contains numerous errors. In particular, the bookkeeper knew that the balance sheet should balance, so he plugged in the owner”s equity amount needed to achieve this balance. The owner”s equity is incorrect. All other amounts are right, but some are out of place.

OUTDOOR LIFE LANDSCAPING

Balance Sheet

Month Ended July 31, 2012

Assets

Liabilities

Cash

5,000

Accounts receivable

2,300

Office supplies

800

Kamp, drawing

8,000

Land

28,400

Service revenue

39,200

Salary expense

3,500

Property tax expense

2,000

Office furniture

5,200

Accounts payable

2,800

Note payable

26,400

Owner”s Equity

Rent expense

700

Kamp, capital

15,700

Total assets

$70,000

Total liabilities

$70,000

Requirements

1. Prepare a corrected balance sheet.

2. Consider the original balance sheet as presented and the corrected balance sheet you prepared for requirement 1. Did total assets as presented in your corrected balance sheet increase, decrease, or stay the same from the original balance sheet? Why?

lawlor lawn service began operations and completed the following transactions during 538278

Analyzing transactions

Lawlor Lawn Service began operations and completed the following transactions during May, 2012:

1-May

Received $1,700 and gave capital to Lawlor. Deposited this amount in

bank account titled Lawlor Lawn Service.

3

Purchased on account a mower, $1,200, and weed whacker, $240. The equipment is

expected to remain in service for four years.

5

Purchased $30 of gas. Wrote check #1 from the new bank account.

6

Performed lawn services for client on account, $150.

8

Purchased $150 of fertilizer that will be used on future jobs. Wrote check #2 from the new bank account.

17

Completed landscaping job for client, received cash $800.

31

Received $100 on account from May 6 sale.

9

Requirement

1. Analyze the effects of Lawlor Lawn Service transactions on the accounting equation. Use the format of Exhibit 1-6, and include these headings: Cash; Accounts receivable; Lawn supplies; Equipment; Accounts payable; and Lawlor, capital. In Chapter 2, we will account for these same transactions a different way—as the accounting is actually performed in practice.

draper consulting began operations and completed the following transactions during t 538279

Analyzing transactions and preparing financial statements

Draper Consulting began operations and completed the following transactions during the first half of December:

2-Dec

Received $18,000 cash and gave capital to Draper.

2

Paid monthly office rent, $550.

3

Paid cash for a Dell computer, $1,800. This equipment is expected to remain in service for five years.

4

Purchased office furniture on account, $4,200. The furniture should last for five years.

5

Purchased supplies on account, $900.

9

Performed consulting service for a client on account, $1,500.

12

Paid utility expenses, $250.

18

Performed service for a client and received cash of $1,100.

Requirements

1. Analyze the effects of Draper Consulting”s transactions on the accounting equation. Use the format of Exhibit 1-6, and include these headings: Cash; Accounts receivable; Supplies; Equipment; Furniture; Accounts payable; and Draper, capital.

2. Prepare the income statement of Draper Consulting for the month ended December 31, 2012.

3. Prepare the statement of owner”s equity for the month ended December 31, 2012.

4. Prepare the balance sheet at December 31, 2012.

In Chapter 2, we will account for these same transactions a different way—as the accounting is actually performed in practice.

Practice Set

analyzing transactions consider the following transactional data for the first month 538280

Analyzing transactions Consider the following transactional data for the first month of operations of Shine King Cleaning.

Nov 1:

Evan Hudson deposited $35,000 in the business account. Also on this date, Evan transferred his truck title,

worth $8,000, to the business. Evan received capital in return.

Nov 2:

Wrote a check for $2,000 to Pleasant Properties. In the “for” area of the the check, it states “November through

February Rent.” (Debit Prepaid rent)

Nov 3:

Purchased business insurance policy for $2,400 for the term November 1, 2012, through October 31, 2013

and paid cash. (Debit Prepaid insurance)

Nov 4:

Evan went to the Cleaning Supply Company and purchased $270 of cleaning supplies on account. The invoice is

due 20 days from the date of purchase.

Nov 5:

Purchased on account an industrial vacuum cleaner from Penny Purchase costing $1,000. The invoice is payable

on or before November 25.

Nov 7:

Purchased a computer and printer costing a total of $1,200. A check for the same amount to the computer store

was written on the same date.

Nov 9:

Performed cleaning services on account for Pierre”s Wig Stand in the amount of $3,000.

Nov 10:

Deposited Pierre”s check for $100 in the bank.

Nov 15:

Wrote check payable to Eric Ryder for $500 for contract labor.

Nov 16:

Received $3,600 for 1-year contract beginning November 16 for cleaning services to be provided to the Sea Side

Restaurant. Contract begins November 16, 2012, and ends November 15, 2013. (Credit Unearned service revenue)

Nov 17:

Provided cleaning services for Tip Top Solutions for $800. Tip Top paid with a check.

Nov 18:

Received water and electric bill for $175 with due date of December 4, 2012.

Nov 20:

Borrowed $40,000 from bank with interest rate of 9% per year.

Nov 21:

Deposited check from Pierre”s Wig Stand for $900 paid on account.

Nov 25:

Wrote check to Penny Purchase for invoice #1035 in the amount of $500.

Nov 29:

Wrote check payable to St. Petersburg News for $100 for advertising.

Nov 30:

Evan withdrew cash of $600.

Requirement

1. Prepare an analysis of the November activity using the format displayed in Exhibit 1-6 as a guide. Include the following headings: Cash; Accounts receivable, Supplies; Prepaid rent; Prepaid insurance; Truck; Equipment; Accounts payable; Unearned service revenue; Notes payable; and Hudson, capital.

incomplete manufacturing costs expenses and selling data for two different cases are 537414

Incomplete manufacturing costs, expenses, and selling data for two different cases are as follows.

Case

1

2

Direct materials used

$9,600

$ (g)

Direct labor

5,000

8,000

Manufacturing overhead

8,000

4,000

Total manufacturing costs

(a)

16,000

Beginning work in process inventory

1,000

(h)

Ending work in process inventory

(b)

3,000

Sales

24,500

(i)

Sales discounts

2,500

1,400

Cost of goods manufactured

17,000

22,000

Beginning finished goods inventory

(c)

3,300

Goods available for sale

20,000

(j)

Cost of goods sold

(d)

(k)

Ending finished goods inventory

3,400

2,500

Gross profit

(e)

7,000

Operating expenses

2,500

(l)

Net income

(f )

5,000

Instructions

(a) Indicate the missing amount for each letter.

(b) Prepare a condensed cost of goods manufactured schedule for Case 1.

(c) Prepare an income statement and the current assets section of the balance sheet for Case 1. Assume that in Case 1 the other items in the current assets section are as follows: Cash $4,000, Receivables (net) $15,000, Raw Materials $600, and Prepaid Expenses $400.

the following data were taken from the records of clarkson manufacturing company for 537415

The following data were taken from the records of Clarkson Manufacturing Company for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2012.

Raw Materials

Factory Insurance

$4,600

Inventory 7/1/11

$48,000

Factory Machinery

Raw Materials

Depreciation

16,000

Inventory 6/30/12

39,600

Factory Utilities

27,600

Finished Goods

Office Utilities Expense

8,650

Inventory 7/1/11

96000

Sales

534,000

Finished Goods

Sales Discounts

4,200

Inventory 6/30/12

75900

Plant Manager”s Salary

58,000

Work in Process

Factory Property Taxes

9,600

Inventory 7/1/11

19800

Factory Repairs

1,400

Work in Process

Raw Materials Purchases

96,400

Inventory 6/30/12

18600

Cash

32,000

Direct Labor

139,250

Indirect Labor

24,460

Accounts Receivable

27,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare a cost of goods manufactured schedule. (Assume all raw materials used were direct materials.)

(b) Prepare an income statement through gross profit.

(c) Prepare the current assets section of the balance sheet at June 30, 2012.

phillips company is a manufacturer of computers its controller resigned in october 2 537416

Phillips Company is a manufacturer of computers. Its controller resigned in October 2012. An inexperienced assistant accountant has prepared the following income statement for the month of October 2012.

PHILLIPS COMPANY
Income Statement
For the Month Ended October 31, 2012

Sales (net)

$780,000

Less: Operating expenses

Raw materials purchases

$264,000

Direct labor cost

190,000

Advertising expense

90,000

Selling and administrative salaries

75,000

Rent on factory facilities

60,000

Depreciation on sales equipment

45,000

Depreciation on factory equipment

31,000

Indirect labor cost

28,000

Utilities expense

12,000

Insurance expense

8,000

803,000

Net loss

($23,000)

Prior to October 2012, the company had been profitable every month. The company’s president is concerned about the accuracy of the income statement. As her friend, you have been asked to review the income statement and make necessary corrections. After examining other manufacturing cost data, you have acquired additional information as follows.

1. Inventory balances at the beginning and end of October were:

1-Oct

31-Oct

Raw materials

$18,000

$29,000

Work in process

16,000

14,000

Finished goods

30,000

45,000

2. Only 75% of the utilities expense and 60% of the insurance expense apply to factory operations. The remaining amounts should be charged to selling and administrative activities.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured for October 2012.

(b) Prepare a correct income statement for October 2012.

garrett manufacturing company uses a simple manufacturing accounting system 537417

Garrett Manufacturing Company uses a simple manufacturing accounting system. At the end of its fiscal year on August 31, 2012, the adjusted trial balance contains the following accounts.

Debits

Credits

Cash

$16,700

Accumulated Depreciation

$353,000

Accounts Receivable (net)

62,900

Notes Payable

45,000

Finished Goods Inventory

56,000

Accounts Payable

36,200

Work in Process Inventory

27,800

Income Taxes Payable

9,000

Raw Materials Inventory

37,200

Common Stock

352,000

Plant Assets

870,000

Retained Earnings

215,300

Raw Materials Purchases

236,500

Sales

988,000

Direct Labor

283,900

$1,998,500

Indirect Labor

27,400

Factory Repairs

17,200

Factory Depreciation

16,000

Factory Manager’s Salary

60,000

Factory Insurance

11,000

Factory Property Taxes

14,900

Factory Utilities

13,300

Selling Expenses

96,500

Administrative Expenses

115,200

Income Tax Expense

36,000

$1,998,500

Physical inventory accounts on August 31, 2012, show the following inventory amounts: Finished Goods $50,600, Work in Process $23,400, and Raw Materials $44,500.

Instructions

(a) Enter the adjusted trial balance data on a worksheet in financial statement order and complete the worksheet.

(b) Prepare a cost of goods manufactured schedule for the year.

(c) Prepare an income statement for the year and a balance sheet at August 31, 2012.

(d) Journalize the closing entries.

(e) Post the closing entries to Manufacturing Summary and to Income Summary.

agler company specializes in manufacturing motorcycle helmets the company has enough 537418

Agler Company specializes in manufacturing motorcycle helmets. The company has enough orders to keep the factory production at 1,000 motorcycle helmets per month. Agler”s monthly manufacturing cost and other expense data are as follows.

Maintenance costs on factory building

$1,500

Factory manager”s salary

5,500

Advertising for helmets

8,000

Sales commissions

4,000

Depreciation on factory building

700

Rent on factory equipment

6,000

Insurance on factory building

3,000

Raw materials (plastic, polystyrene, etc.)

25,000

Utility costs for factory

800

Supplies for general office

200

Wages for assembly line workers

54,000

Depreciation on office equipment

500

Miscellaneous materials (glue, thread, etc.)

2,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare an answer sheet with the following column headings.

Product Costs

Cost
Item

Direct
Materials

Direct
Labor

Manufacturing
Overhead

Period
Costs

Enter each cost item on your answer sheet, placing the dollar amount under the appropriate headings. Total the dollar amounts in each of the columns.

(b) Compute the cost to produce one motorcycle helmet.

elliott company a manufacturer of tennis rackets started production in november 2011 537419

Elliott Company, a manufacturer of tennis rackets, started production in November 2011. For the preceding 5 years, Elliott had been a retailer of sports equipment. After a thorough survey of tennis racket markets, Elliott decided to turn its retail store into a tennis racket factory. Raw materials cost for a tennis racket will total $23 per racket. Workers on the production lines are paid on average $15 per hour. A racket usually takes 2 hours to complete. In addition, the rent on the equipment used to produce rackets amounts to $1,300 per month. Indirect materials cost $3 per racket. A supervisor was hired to oversee production; her monthly salary is $3,500. Janitorial costs are $1,400 monthly. Advertising costs for the rackets will be $8,000 per month. The factory building depreciation expense is $8,400 per year. Property taxes on the factory building will be $9,600 per year.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an answer sheet with the following column headings.

Product Costs

Cost
Item

Direct
Materials

Direct
Labor

Manufacturing
Overhead

Period
Costs

Assuming that Elliott manufactures, on average, 2,500 tennis rackets per month, enter each cost item on your answer sheet, placing the dollar amount per month under the appropriate headings. Total the dollar amounts in each of the columns.

(b) Compute the cost to produce one racket.

incomplete manufacturing costs expenses and selling data for two different cases are 537420

Incomplete manufacturing costs, expenses, and selling data for two different cases are as follows.

Case

A

B

Direct materials used

$6,300

$ (g)

Direct labor

3,000

4,000

Manufacturing overhead

6,000

5,000

Total manufacturing costs

(a)

16,000

Beginning work in process inventory

1,000

(h)

Ending work in process inventory

(b)

2,000

Sales

22,500

(i)

Sales discounts

1,500

1,200

Cost of goods manufactured

15,800

20,000

Beginning finished goods inventory

(c)

5,000

Goods available for sale

18,300

(j)

Cost of goods sold

(d)

(k)

Ending finished goods inventory

1,200

2,500

Gross profit

(e)

6,000

Operating expenses

2,700

(l)

Net income

(f )

2,200

Instructions

(a) Indicate the missing amount for each letter.

(b) Prepare a condensed cost of goods manufactured schedule for Case A.

(c) Prepare an income statement and the current assets section of the balance sheet for Case A. Assume that in Case A the other items in the current assets section are as follows: Cash $3,000, Receivables (net) $10,000, Raw Materials $700, and Prepaid Expenses $200.

the following data were taken from the records of moxie manufacturing company for th 537421

The following data were taken from the records of Moxie Manufacturing Company for the year ended December 31, 2012.

Raw Materials

Factory Insurance

$7,400

Inventory 1/1/12

$47,000

Factory Machinery

Raw Materials

Depreciation

7,700

Inventory 12/31/12

44200

Factory Utilities

12,900

Finished Goods

Office Utilities Expense

8,600

Inventory 1/1/12

85000

Sales

465,000

Finished Goods

Sales Discounts

2,500

Inventory 12/31/12

57800

Plant Manager”s Salary

60,000

Work in Process

Factory Property Taxes

6,100

Inventory 1/1/12

9500

Factory Repairs

800

Work in Process

Raw Materials Purchases

62,500

Inventory 12/31/12

8000

Cash

18,000

Direct Labor

145100

Indirect Labor

18100

Accounts Receivable

27000

Instructions

(a) Prepare a cost of goods manufactured schedule. (Assume all raw materials used were direct materials.)

(b) Prepare an income statement through gross profit.

(c) Prepare the current assets section of the balance sheet at December 31.

ortiz company is a manufacturer of toys its controller resigned in august 2012 537422

Ortiz Company is a manufacturer of toys. Its controller resigned in August 2012. An inexperienced assistant accountant has prepared the following income statement for the month of August 2012.

ORTIZ COMPANY
Income Statement
For the Month Ended August 31, 2012

Sales (net)

$675,000

Less: Operating expenses

Raw materials purchases

$220,000

Direct labor cost

160,000

Advertising expense

75,000

Selling and administrative salaries

70,000

Rent on factory facilities

60,000

Depreciation on sales equipment

50,000

Depreciation on factory equipment

35,000

Indirect labor cost

20,000

Utilities expense

10,000

Insurance expense

5,000

705,000

Net loss

($30,000)

Prior to August 2012, the company had been profitable every month. The company’s president is concerned about the accuracy of the income statement. As her friend, you have been asked to review the income statement and make necessary corrections. After examining other manufacturing cost data, you have acquired additional information as follows.

1. Inventory balances at the beginning and end of August were:

1-Aug

31-Aug

Raw materials

$19,500

$35,000

Work in process

25,000

21,000

Finished goods

40,000

52,000

2. Only 60% of the utilities expense and 70% of the insurance expense apply to factory operations; the remaining amounts should be charged to selling and administrative activities.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a cost of goods manufactured schedule for August 2012.

(b) Prepare a correct income statement for August 2012.

waterways corporation is a private corporation formed for the purpose of providing t 537423

Waterways Corporation is a private corporation formed for the purpose of providing the products and the services needed to irrigate farms, parks, commercial projects, and private lawns. It has a centrally located factory in a U.S. city that manufactures the products it markets to retail outlets across the nation. It also maintains a division that provides installation and warranty servicing in six metropolitan areas. The mission of Waterways is to manufacture quality parts that can be used for effective irrigation projects that also conserve water. By that effort, the company hopes to satisfy its customers, provide rapid and responsible service, and serve the community and the employees who represent them in each community. The company has been growing rapidly, so management is considering new ideas to help the company continue its growth and maintain the high quality of its products. Waterways was founded by Will Winkman, who is the company president and chief executive officer (CEO). Working with him from the company”s inception was Will”s brother, Ben, whose sprinkler designs and ideas about the installation of proper systems have been a major basis of the company”s success. Ben is the vice president who oversees all aspects of design and production in the company.

The factory itself is managed by Todd Senter who hires his line managers to supervise the factory employees. The factory makes all of the parts for the irrigation systems. The purchasing department is managed by Hector Hines. The installation and training division is overseen by vice president Henry Writer, who supervises the managers of the six local installation operations. Each of these local managers hires his or her own local service people. These service employees are trained by the home office under Henry Writer”s direction because of the uniqueness of the company”s products. There is a small human resources department under the direction of Sally Fenton, a vice president who handles the employee paperwork, though hiring is actually performed by the separate departments. Sam Totter is the vice president who heads the sales and marketing area; he oversees 10 well-trained salespeople.

The accounting and finance division of the company is headed by Abe Headman, who is the chief financial officer (CFO) and a company vice president; he is a member of the Institute of Management Accountants and holds a certificate in management accounting. He has a small staff of Certified Public Accountants, including a controller and a treasurer, and a staff of accounting input operators who maintain the financial records. A partial list of Waterway”s accounts and their balances for the month of November follows.

Accounts Receivable

$275,000

Advertising Expenses

54,000

Cash

260,000

Depreciation—Factory Equipment

16,800

Depreciation—Office Equipment

2,400

Direct Labor

42,000

Factory Supplies Used

16,800

Factory Utilities

10,200

Finished Goods Inventory, November 30

68,800

Finished Goods Inventory, October 31

72,550

Indirect Labor

48,000

Office Supplies Expense

1,600

Other Administrative Expenses

72,000

Prepaid Expenses

41,250

Raw Materials Inventory, November 30

52,700

Raw Materials Inventory, October 31

38,000

Raw Materials Purchases

184,500

Rent—Factory Equipment

47,000

Repairs—Factory Equipment

4,500

Salaries

325,000

Sales

1,350,000

Sales Commissions

40,500

Work in Process Inventory, October 31

52,700

Work in Process Inventory, November 30

42,000

Instructions

(a) Based on the information given, construct an organizational chart of Waterways Corporation.

(b) A list of accounts and their values are given above. From this information, prepare a cost of goods manufactured schedule, an income statement, and a partial balance sheet for Waterways Corporation for the month of November.

wendall manufacturing company specializes in producing fashion outfits on july 31 20 537424

Wendall Manufacturing Company specializes in producing fashion outfits. On July 31, 2012, a tornado touched down at its factory and general office. The inventories in the warehouse and the factory were completely destroyed as was the general office nearby. Next morning, through a careful search of the disaster site, however, Bill Francis, the company”s controller, and Elizabeth Walton, the cost accountant, were able to recover a small part of manufacturing cost data for the current month.

“What a horrible experience,” sighed Bill “And the worst part is that we may not have enough records to use in filing an insurance claim.”

“It was terrible,” replied Elizabeth. “However, I managed to recover some of the manufacturing cost data that I was working on yesterday afternoon. The data indicate that our direct labor cost in July totaled $250,000 and that we had purchased $365,000 of raw materials. Also, I recall that the amount of raw materials used for July was $350,000. But I”m not sure this information will help. The rest of our records are blown away.”

“Well, not exactly,” said Bill. “I was working on the year-to-date income statement when the tornado warning was announced. My recollection is that our sales in July were $1,240,000 and our gross profit ratio has been 40% of sales. Also, I can remember that our cost of goods available for sale was $770,000 for July.”

“Maybe we can work something out from this information!” exclaimed Elizabeth. “My experience tells me that our manufacturing overhead is usually 60% of direct labor.”

“Hey, look what I just found,” cried Elizabeth. “It”s a copy of this June”s balance sheet, and it shows that our inventories as of June 30 are Finished goods $38,000, Work in process $25,000, and Raw materials $19,000.” “Super,” yelled Bill. “Let”s go work something out.” In order to file an insurance claim, Wendall Company must determine the amount of its inventories as of July 31, 2012, the date of the tornado touchdown.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, determine the amount of cost in the Raw Materials, Work in Process, and Finished Goods inventory accounts as of the date of the tornado touchdown.

tenrack is a fairly large manufacturing company located in the southern united state 537425

Tenrack is a fairly large manufacturing company located in the southern United States. The company manufactures tennis rackets, tennis balls, tennis clothing, and tennis shoes, all bearing the company”s distinctive logo, a large green question mark on a white flocked tennis ball. The company”s sales have been increasing over the past 10 years. The tennis racket division has recently implemented several advanced manufacturing techniques. Robot arms hold the tennis rackets in place while glue dries, and machine vision systems check for defects. The engineering and design team uses computerized drafting and testing of new products. The following managers work in the tennis racket division.

Jason Dennis, sales manager (supervises all sales representatives).

Peggy Groneman, technical specialist (supervises computer programmers).

Dave Marley, cost accounting manager (supervises cost accountants).

Kevin Carson, production supervisor (supervises all manufacturing employees).

Sally Renner, engineer (supervises all new-product design teams).

Instructions

(a) What are the primary information needs of each manager?

(b) Which, if any, financial accounting report(s) is each likely to use?

(c) Name one special-purpose management accounting report that could be designed for each manager. Include the name of the report, the information it would contain, and how frequently it should be issued.

anchor glass container corporation the third largest manufacturer of glass container 537426

Anchor Glass Container Corporation, the third largest manufacturer of glass containers in the United States, supplies beverage and food producers and consumer products manufacturers nationwide. Parent company Consumers Packaging Inc. (Toronto Stock Exchange: CGC) is a leading international designer and manufacturer of glass containers. The following management discussion appeared in a recent annual report of Anchor Glass.

ANCHOR GLASS CONTAINER CORPORATION
Management Discussion

Cost of Products Sold Cost of products sold as a percentage of net sales was 89.3% in the current year compared to 87.6% in the prior year. The increase in cost of products sold as a percentage of net sales principally reflected the impact of operational problems during the second quarter of the current year at a major furnace at one of the Company”s plants, higher downtime, and costs and expenses associated with an increased number of scheduled capital improvement projects, increases in labor, and certain other manufacturing costs (with no corresponding selling price increases in the current year). Reduced fixed costs from the closing of the Streator, Illinois, plant in June of the current year and productivity and efficiency gains partially offset these cost increases.

Instructions

What factors affect the costs of products sold at Anchor Glass Container Corporation?

refer to problem 14 5a and add the following requirement prepare a letter to the pre 537427

Refer to Problem 14–5A and add the following requirement. Prepare a letter to the president of the company, Shelly Phillips, describing the changes you made. Explain clearly why net income is different after the changes. Keep the following points in mind as you compose your letter.

1. This is a letter to the president of a company, who is your friend. The style should be generally formal, but you may relax some requirements. For example, you may call the president by her first name.

2. Executives are very busy. Your letter should tell the president your main results first (for example, the amount of net income).

3. You should include brief explanations so that the president can understand the changes you made in the calculations.

steve morgan controller for newton industries was reviewing production cost reports 537428

Steve Morgan, controller for Newton Industries, was reviewing production cost reports for the year. One amount in these reports continued to bother him—advertising. During the year, the company had instituted an expensive advertising campaign to sell some of its slower-moving products. It was still too early to tell whether the advertising campaign was successful. There had been much internal debate as how to report advertising cost. The vice president of finance argued that advertising costs should be reported as a cost of production, just like direct materials and direct labor. He therefore recommended that this cost be identified as manufacturing overhead and reported as part of inventory costs until sold. Others disagreed. Morgan believed that this cost should be reported as an expense of the current period, based on the conservatism principle. Others argued that it should be reported as Prepaid Advertising and reported as a current asset.

The president finally had to decide the issue. He argued that these costs should be reported as inventory. His arguments were practical ones. He noted that the company was experiencing financealdifficulty and expensing this amount in the current period might jeopardize a planned bond offering. Also, by reporting the advertising costs as inventory rather than as prepaid advertising, less attention would be directed t o it by the financial community.

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) What are the ethical issues involved in this situation?

(c) What would you do if you were Steve Morgan?

a job order cost sheet for lowry company is shown below 537475

A job order cost sheet for Lowry Company is shown below.

Job No. 92

For 2,000 Units

Date

Direct
Materials

Direct
Labor

Manufacturing
Overhead

Beg. bal. Jan. 1

5,000

6000

5100

8

6,000

12

8000

6400

25

2,000

27

4000

3200

13000

18000

14700

Cost of completed job:

Direct materials

$13,000

Direct labor

18,000

Manufacturing overhead

14,700

Total cost

$45,700

Unit cost ($45,700 2,000)

$22.85

(a) On the basis of the foregoing data, answer the following questions.

(1) What was the balance in Work in Process Inventory on January 1 if this was the only unfinished job?

(2) If manufacturing overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor cost, what overhead rate was used in each year?

(b) Prepare summary entries at January 31 to record the current year’s transactions pertaining to Job No. 92.

manufacturing cost data for orlando company which uses a job order cost system are p 537476

Manufacturing cost data for Orlando Company, which uses a job order cost system, are presented below.

Case A

Case B

Case C

Direct materials used

$ (a)

$ 83,000

$ 63,150

Direct labor

50,000

140,000

(h)

Manufacturing overhead applied

42,500

(d)

(i)

Total manufacturing costs

145,650

(e)

213,000

Work in process 1/1/12

(b)

15,500

18,000

Total cost of work in process

201,500

(f)

(j)

Work in process 12/31/12

(c)

11,800

(k)

Cost of goods manufactured

192,300

(g)

222,000

Instructions

Indicate the missing amount for each letter. Assume that in all cases manufacturing overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor cost and the rate is the same.

the following information relates to simrin plc for the year ended 31 december 20×0 537883

The following information relates to Simrin plc for the year ended 31 December 20X0:

£

Turnover

700,000

Operating costs

476,000

Trading profit

224000

Net interest payable

2,000

222,000

Exceptional charges

77,000

145,000

Tax on ordinar y activities

66,000

Profit after tax

79,000

Simrin plc had 100,000 ordinar y shares of £1 each in issue throughout the year. Simrin plc has in issue warrants entitling the holders to subscribe for a total of 50,000 shares in the company. The warrants may be exercised after 31 December 20X5 at a price of £1.10 per share. The average fair value of shares was £1.28. The company had paid an ordinar y dividend of £15,000 and a preference dividend of £9,000.

Required:

(a) Calculate the basic EPS for Simrin plc for the year ended 31 December 20X0, in accordance with best accounting practice.

(b) Calculate the diluted EPS figure, to be disclosed in the statutory accounts of Simrin plc in respect of the year ended 31 December 20X0.

(c) Briefly comment on the need to disclose a diluted EPS figure and on the relevance of this figure to the shareholders.

(d) In the past, the single most important indicator of financial performance has been earnings per share. In what way has the profession attempted to destroy any reliance on a single figure to measure and predict a company”s earnings, and how successful has this attempt been?

gamma plc had an issued share capital at 1 april 20×0 of 537884

Gamma plc had an issued share capital at 1 April 20X0 of:

? £200,000 made up of 20p shares.

? 50,000 £1 conver tible preference shares receiving a dividend of £2.50 per share:

– these shares were convertible in 20X6 on the basis of 1 ordinar y share for 1 preference

share.

There was also loan capital of:

? £250,000 10% convertible loans:

– the loan was conver tible in 20X9 on the basis of 500 shares for each £1,000 of loan;

– the tax rate was 40%.

Ear nings for the year ended 31 March 20X1 were £5,000,000 after tax.

Required:

(a) Calculate the diluted EPS for 20X1.

(b) Calculate the diluted EPS assuming that the convertible preference shares were receiving a dividend of £6 per share instead of £2.50.

match the descriptions that follow with the corresponding terms 537391

Match the descriptions that follow with the corresponding terms.

Descriptions:

1. ______ Inventory system in which goods are manufactured or purchased just as they are needed for sale.

2. ______ A method of allocating overhead based on each product”s use of activities in making the product.

3. ______ Systems that are especially important to firms adopting just-in-time inventory methods.

4. ______ One part of the value chain for a manufacturing company.

5. ______ The U.S. economy is trending toward this.

6. ______ A performance-measurement approach that uses both financial and nonfinancial measures, tied to company objectives, to evaluate a company”s operations in an integrated fashion.

Terms:

(a) Activity-based costing

(b) Balanced scorecard

(c) Total quality management (TQM)

(d) Research and development, and product design

(e) Service industries

(f) Just-in-time (JIT) inventory

richard larkin has prepared the following list of statements about managerial accoun 537392

Richard Larkin has prepared the following list of statements about managerial accounting and financial accounting.

1. Financial accounting focuses on providing information to internal users.

2. Analyzing cost-volume-profit relationships is part of managerial accounting.

3. Preparation of budgets is part of financial accounting.

4. Managerial accounting applies only to merchandising and manufacturing companies.

5. Both managerial accounting and financial accounting deal with many of the same economic events.

6. Managerial accounting reports are prepared only quarterly and annually.

7. Financial accounting reports are general-purpose reports.

8. Managerial accounting reports pertain to subunits of the business.

9. Managerial accounting reports must comply with generally accepted accounting principles.

10. Although managerial accountants are expected to behave ethically, there is no code of ethical standards for managerial accountants.

Instructions

Identify each statement as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.

presented below is a list of costs and expenses usually incurred by barnum corporati 537393

Presented below is a list of costs and expenses usually incurred by Barnum Corporation, a manufacturer of furniture, in its factory.

1. Salaries for assembly line inspectors.

2. Insurance on factory machines.

3. Property taxes on the factory building.

4. Factory repairs.

5. Upholstery used in manufacturing furniture.

6. Wages paid to assembly line workers.

7. Factory machinery depreciation.

8. Glue, nails, paint, and other small parts used in production.

9. Factory supervisors” salaries.

10. Wood used in manufacturing furniture.

Instructions

Classify the above items into the following categories: (a) direct materials, (b) direct labor, and (c) manufacturing overhead.

ryan corporation incurred the following costs while manufacturing its product 537394

Ryan Corporation incurred the following costs while manufacturing its product.

Materials used in product

$100,000

Advertising expense

$45,000

Depreciation on plant

60,000

Property taxes on plant

14,000

Property taxes on store

7,500

Delivery expense

21,000

Labor costs of assembly-line workers

110,000

Sales commissions

35,000

Factory supplies used

13,000

Salaries paid to sales clerks

50,000

Instructions

(a) Identify each of the above costs as direct materials, direct labor, manufacturing overhead, or period costs.

(b) Explain the basic difference in accounting for product costs and period costs.

knight company reports the following costs and expenses in may 537395

Knight Company reports the following costs and expenses in May.

Factory utilities

$15,500

Direct labor

$69,100

Depreciation on factory

Sales salaries

46,400

equipment

12,650

Property taxes on factory

Depreciation on delivery trucks

3,800

building

2,500

Indirect factory labor

48,900

Repairs to office equipment

1,300

Indirect materials

80,800

Factory repairs

2,000

Direct materials used

137,600

Advertising

15,000

Factory manager”s salary

8,000

Office supplies used

2,640

Instructions

From the information, determine the total amount of:

(a) Manufacturing overhead.

(b) Product costs.

(c) Period costs.

ikerd company is a manufacturer of personal computers various costs and expenses ass 537396

Ikerd Company is a manufacturer of personal computers. Various costs and expenses associated with its operations are as follows.

1. Property taxes on the factory building.

2. Production superintendents” salaries.

3. Memory boards and chips used in assembling computers.

4. Depreciation on the factory equipment.

5. Salaries for assembly line quality control inspectors.

6. Sales commissions paid to sell personal computers.

7. Electrical components used in assembling computers.

8. Wages of workers assembling personal computers.

9. Soldering materials used on factory assembly lines.

10. Salaries for the night security guards for the factory building. The company intends to classify these costs and expenses into the following categories: (a) direct materials, (b) direct labor, (c) manufacturing overhead, and (d) period costs.

Instructions

List the items (1) through (10). For each item, indicate the cost category to which it belongs.

the administrators of crawford county s memorial hospital are interested in identify 537397

The administrators of Crawford County”s Memorial Hospital are interested in identifying the various costs and expenses that are incurred in producing a patient”s X-ray. A list of such costs and expenses is presented below.

1. Salaries for the X-ray machine technicians.

2. Wages for the hospital janitorial personnel.

3. Film costs for the X-ray machines.

4. Property taxes on the hospital building.

5. Salary of the X-ray technicians” supervisor.

6. Electricity costs for the X-ray department.

7. Maintenance and repairs on the X-ray machines.

8. X-ray department supplies.

9. Depreciation on the X-ray department equipment.

10. Depreciation on the hospital building.

The administrators want these costs and expenses classified as: (a) direct materials, (b) direct labor, or (c) service overhead.

Instructions

List the items (1) through (10). For each item, indicate the cost category to which the item belongs.

lopez corporation incurred the following costs while manufacturing its product 537399

Lopez Corporation incurred the following costs while manufacturing its product.

Materials used in product

$120,000

Advertising expense

$45,000

Depreciation on plant

60,000

Property taxes on plant

14,000

Property taxes on store

7,500

Delivery expense

21,000

Labor costs of assembly-line

Sales commissions

35,000

workers

110,000

Salaries paid to sales

Factory supplies used

23,000

clerks

50,000

Work in process inventory was $12,000 at January 1 and $15,500 at December 31. Finished goods inventory was $60,000 at January 1 and $45,600 at December

31.

Instructions

(a) Compute cost of goods manufactured.

(b) Compute cost of goods sold.

an incomplete cost of goods manufactured schedule is presented below 537400

An incomplete cost of goods manufactured schedule is presented below.

Work in process (1/1)

Direct materials

$210,000

Raw materials inventory (1/1)

$ ?

Add: Raw materials purchases

158,000

Total raw materials available for use

?

Less: Raw materials inventory (12/31)

22,500

Direct materials used

$190,000

Direct labor

?

Manufacturing overhead

Indirect labor

18,000

Factory depreciation

36,000

Factory utilities

68,000

Total overhead

122,000

Total manufacturing costs

?

Total cost of work in process

?

Less: Work in process (12/31)

81,000

Cost of goods manufactured

$530,000

Instructions

Complete the cost of goods manufactured schedule for Molina Manufacturing Company.

An incomplete cost of goods manufactured schedule is presented below.

Work in process (1/1)

Direct materials

$210,000

Raw materials inventory (1/1)

$ ?

Add: Raw materials purchases

158,000

Total raw materials available for use

?

Less: Raw materials inventory (12/31)

22,500

Direct materials used

$190,000

Direct labor

?

Manufacturing overhead

Indirect labor

18,000

Factory depreciation

36,000

Factory utilities

68,000

Total overhead

122,000

Total manufacturing costs

?

Total cost of work in process

?

Less: Work in process (12/31)

81,000

Cost of goods manufactured

$530,000

Instructions

Complete the cost of goods manufactured schedule for Molina Manufacturing Company.

manufacturing cost data for copa company are presented below 537401

Manufacturing cost data for Copa Company are presented below.

Case A

Case B

Case C

Direct materials used

(a)

$68,400

$130,000

Direct labor

$57,000

86,000

(g)

Manufacturing overhead

46,500

81,600

102,000

Total manufacturing costs

195,650

(d)

253,700

Work in process 1/1/12

(b)

16,500

(h)

Total cost of work in process

221,500

(e)

337,000

Work in process 12/31/12

(c)

11,000

70,000

Cost of goods manufactured

185,275

(f)

(i)

Instructions

Indicate the missing amount for each letter (a) through (i).

incomplete manufacturing cost data for colaw company for 2012 are presented as follo 537402

Incomplete manufacturing cost data for Colaw Company for 2012 are presented as follows for four different situations.

Total

Cost of

Direct

Direct

Manufac-

Manufac-

Work in

Work in

Goods

Materials

Labor

turing

turing

Process

Process

Manufac-

Used

Used

Overhead

Costs

1-Jan

31-Dec

tured

(1) $127,000

$140,000

$87,000

(a)

$33,000

(b)

$360,000

(2) (c)

200,000

132,000

$450,000

(d)

$40,000

470,000

(3) 80,000

100,000

(e)

255,000

60,000

80,000

(f)

(4) 70,000

(g)

75,000

288,000

45,000

(h)

270,000

Instructions

(a) Indicate the missing amount for each letter.

(b) Prepare a condensed cost of goods manufactured schedule for situation (1) for the year ended December 31, 2012.

cepeda corporation has the following cost records for june 2012 537403

Cepeda Corporation has the following cost records for June 2012.

Indirect factory labor

$4,500

Factory utilities

$400

Direct materials used

20,000

Depreciation, factory equipment

1,400

Work in process, 6/1/12

3,000

Direct labor

40,000

Work in process, 6/30/12

3,800

Maintenance, factory equipment

1,800

Finished goods, 6/1/12

5,000

Indirect materials

2,200

Finished goods, 6/30/12

7,500

Factory manager”s salary

3,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare a cost of goods manufactured schedule for June 2012.

(b) Prepare an income statement through gross profit for June 2012 assuming net sales are $92,100.

joyce tombert the bookkeeper for marks consulting a political consulting firm 537404

Joyce Tombert, the bookkeeper for Marks Consulting, a political consulting firm, has recently completed a managerial accounting course at her local college. One of the topics covered in the course was the cost of goods manufactured schedule. Joyce wondered if such a schedule could be prepared for her firm. She realized that, as a service oriented company, it would have no Work in Process inventory to consider. Listed below are the costs her firm incurred for the month ended August 31, 2012.

Supplies used on consulting contracts

$1,200

Supplies used in the administrative offices

1,500

Depreciation on equipment used for contract work

900

Depreciation used on administrative office equipment

1,050

Salaries of professionals working on contracts

15,600

Salaries of administrative office personnel

7,700

Janitorial services for professional offices

400

Janitorial services for administrative offices

500

Insurance on contract operations

800

Insurance on administrative operations

900

Utilities for contract operations

1,400

Utilities for administrative offices

1,300

the following information is available for aikman company 537405

The following information is available for Aikman Company.

1-Jan-12

2012

31-Dec-12

Raw materials inventory

$21,000

$30,000

Work in process inventory

13,500

17,200

Finished goods inventory

27,000

21,000

Materials purchased

$150,000

Direct labor

220,000

Manufacturing overhead

180,000

Sales

910,000

Instructions

(a) Compute cost of goods manufactured.

(b) Prepare an income statement through gross profit.

(c) Show the presentation of the ending inventories on the December 31, 2012, balance sheet.

(d) How would the income statement and balance sheet of a merchandising company be different from Aikman”s financial statements?

chambers manufacturing company produces blankets from its accounting records 537406

Chambers Manufacturing Company produces blankets. From its accounting records, it prepares the following schedule and financial statements on a yearly basis.

(a) Cost of goods manufactured schedule.

(b) Income statement.

(c) Balance sheet.

The following items are found in its ledger and accompanying data.

1. Direct labor

9. Factory maintenance salaries

2. Raw materials inventory, 1/1

10. Cost of goods manufactured

3. Work in process inventory, 12/31

11. Depreciation on delivery equipment

4. Finished goods inventory, 1/1

12. Cost of goods available for sale

5. Indirect labor

13. Direct materials used

6. Depreciation on factory machinery

14. Heat and electricity for factory

7. Work in process, 1/1

15. Repairs to roof of factory building

8. Finished goods inventory, 12/31

16. Cost of raw materials purchases

Instructions

List the items (1)–(16). For each item, indicate by using the appropriate letter or letters, the schedule and/or financial statement(s) in which the item will appear.

an analysis of the accounts of roberts manufacturing reveals the following manufactu 537407

An analysis of the accounts of Roberts Manufacturing reveals the following manufacturing cost data for the month ended June 30, 2012.

Inventories

Beginning

Ending

Raw materials

$9,000

$13,100

Work in process

5,000

7,000

Finished goods

9,000

8,000

Costs incurred: Raw materials purchases $54,000, direct labor $47,000, manufacturing overhead $19,900. The specific overhead costs were: indirect labor $5,500, factory insurance $4,000, machinery depreciation $4,000, machinery repairs $1,800, factory utilities $3,100, miscellaneous factory costs $1,500. Assume that all raw materials used were direct materials.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the cost of goods manufactured schedule for the month ended June 30, 2012.

(b) Show the presentation of the ending inventories on the June 30, 2012, balance sheet.

buhler motor company manufactures automobiles during september 2012 537408

Buhler Motor Company manufactures automobiles. During September 2012, the company purchased 5,000 head lamps at a cost of $10 per lamp. Buhler withdrew 4,650 lamps from the warehouse during the month. Fifty of these lamps were used to replace the head lamps in autos used by traveling sales staff. The remaining 4,600 lamps were put in autos manufactured during the month. Of the autos put into production during September 2012, 90% were completed and transferred to the company”s storage lot. Of the cars completed during the month, 70% were sold by September 30.

Instructions

(a) Determine the cost of head lamps that would appear in each of the following accounts at September 30, 2012: Raw Materials, Work in Process, Finished Goods, Cost of Goods Sold, and Selling Expenses.

(b) Write a short memo to the chief accountant, indicating whether and where each of the accounts in (a) would appear on the income statement or on the balance sheet at September 30, 2012.

the following is a list of terms related to managerial accounting practices 537409

The following is a list of terms related to managerial accounting practices.

1. Activity-based costing.

2. Just-in-time inventory.

3. Balanced scorecard.

4. Value chain.

Instructions

Match each of the terms with the statement below that best describes the term.

(a) ____ A performance-measurement technique that attempts to consider and evaluate all aspects of performance using financial and nonfinancial measures in an integrated fashion.

(b) ____ The group of activities associated with providing a product or service.

(c) ____ An approach used to reduce the cost associated with handling and holding inventory by reducing the amount of inventory on hand.

(d) ____ A method used to allocate overhead to products based on each product”s use of the activities that cause the incurrence of the overhead cost.

lott company specializes in manufacturing a unique model of bicycle helmet 537411

Lott Company specializes in manufacturing a unique model of bicycle helmet. The model is well accepted by consumers, and the company has enough orders to keep the factory production at 10,000 helmets per month (80% of its full capacity). Lott”s monthly manufacturing cost and other expense data are as follows

Rent on factory equipment

$9,000

Insurance on factory building

1,500

Raw materials (plastics, polystyrene, etc.)

75,000

Utility costs for factory

900

Supplies for general office

300

Wages for assembly line workers

53,000

Depreciation on office equipment

800

Miscellaneous materials (glue, thread, etc.)

1,100

Factory manager”s salary

5,700

Property taxes on factory building

400

Advertising for helmets

14,000

Sales commissions

10,000

Depreciation on factory building

1,500

Instructions

(a) Prepare an answer sheet with the following column headings.

Product Costs

Cost
Item

Direct
Materials

Direct
Labor

Manufacturing
Overhead

Period
Costs

enter each cost item on your answer sheet placing the dollar amount under the approp 537412

Bjerg Company specializes in manufacturing a unique model of bicycle helmet. The model is well accepted by consumers, and the company has enough orders to keep the factory production at 10,000 helmets per month (80% of its full capacity). Bjerg’s monthly manufacturing cost and other expense data are as follows.

Rent on factory equipment

7,000

Insurance on factory building

1,500

Raw materials (plastics, polystyrene, etc.)

75,000

Utility costs for factory

900

Supplies for general office

300

Wages for assembly line workers

43,000

Depreciation on office equipment

800

Miscellaneous materials (glue, thread, etc.)

1,100

Factory manager’s salary

5,700

Property taxes on factory building

400

Advertising for helmets

14,000

Sales commissions

7,000

Depreciation on factory building

1,500

Instructions
(a) Prepare an answer sheet with the following column headings. Enter each cost item on your answer sheet, placing the dollar amount under the appropriate headings. Total the dollar amounts in each of the columns.
(b) Compute the cost to produce one helmet

indicate whether each of the following costs of an automobile manufacturer 537380

Indicate whether each of the following costs of an automobile manufacturer would be classified as direct materials, direct labor, or manufacturing overhead.

(a) ____Windshield.

(e) ____Factory machinery lubricants.

(b) ____Engine.

(f) ____Tires.

(c) ____Wages of assembly line worker.

(g) ____Steering wheel.

(d) ____Depreciation of factory machinery.

(h) ____Salary of painting supervisor.

indicate whether the following statements are true or false 537388

Indicate whether the following statements are true or false.

1. Managerial accountants explain and report manufacturing and nonmanufacturing costs, determine cost behaviors, and perform cost-volume-profit analysis, but are not involved in the budget process.

2. Financial accounting reports pertain to subunits of the business and are very detailed.

3. Managerial accounting reports must follow GAAP and are audited by CPAs.

4. Managers” activities and responsibilities can be classified into three broad functions: planning, directing, and controlling.

5. As a result of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (SOX), top managers must certify that the company maintains an adequate system of internal control.

6. Management accountants follow a code of ethics developed by the Institute of Management Accountants.

a music company has these costs 537389

A music company has these costs:

Advertising

Paper inserts for CD cases

Blank CDs

CD plastic cases

Depreciation of CD image

Salaries of sales representatives

burner

Salaries of factory maintenance employees

Salary of factory manager

Salaries of employees who burn music onto CDs

Factory supplies used

Classify each cost as a period or a product cost. Within the product cost category, indicate if the cost is part of direct materials (DM), direct labor (DL), or manufacturing overhead (MO).

the following information is available for fishel manufacturing company 537390

The following information is available for Fishel Manufacturing Company.

1-Apr

30-Apr

Raw material inventory

$10,000

$14,000

Work in process inventory

5,000

3,500

Materials purchased in April

$98,000

Direct labor in April

80,000

Manufacturing overhead in April

180,000

Prepare the cost of goods manufactured schedule for the month of April.

proprietorship attributes applying the entity concept and preparing financial statem 536669

Proprietorship attributes, applying the entity concept, and preparing financial statements

Sandy White is a realtor. She organized her business as a proprietorship, Sandy White, Realtor, by investing $27,000 cash.

The business gave capital to her. Consider the following facts at

May 31, 2012:

a. The business owes $62,000 on a note payable for land that the business acquired for a total price of $80,000.

b. The business spent $26,000 for a Minko Banker real estate franchise, which entitles the business to represent itself as a Minko Banker office. This franchise is a business asset.

c. White owes $70,000 on a personal mortgage for her personal residence, which she acquired in 2012 for a total price of $130,000.

d. White has $4,000 in her personal bank account, and the business has $13,000 in its bank account.

e. White owes $3,000 on a personal charge account with Chico”s.

f. The office acquired business furniture for $20,000 on May 25. Of this

amount, the business owes $5,000 on account at May 31.

g. Office supplies on hand at the real estate office total $1,100.

Requirements

1. White was concerned about taxes. Which propriertorship feature limits White”s business taxes?

2. Prepare the balance sheet of the real estate business of Sandy White, Realtor at May 31, 2012.

3. Identify the personal items that would not be reported on the business records.

applying the entity concept using the accounting equation for transaction analysis a 536670

Applying the entity concept, using the accounting equation for transaction analysis, and preparing financial statements

Alex Shore practiced accounting with a partnership for five years. Recently he opened his own accounting firm, which he operates as a proprietorship. The name of the new entity is Alex Shore, CPA. Shore experienced the following events during the organizing phase of the new business and its first month of operations. Some of the events were personal and did not affect the business.

Feb

4

Shore received $27,000 cash from former accounting partners.*

5

Deposited $50,000 in a new business bank account titled Alex Shore,CPA. The business gave capital to Shore.

6

Paid $100 cash for letterhead stationery for the new office.

7

Purchased office furniture for the office. The business will pay the account payable, $9,700, within three months.

10

Shore sold personal investment in Amazing.com stock, which he had owned for several years, receiving $50,000 cash.*

11

Shore deposited the $50,000 cash from sale of the Amazing.com stock in his personal bank account.*

12

A representative of a large company telephoned Shore and told him of the company”s intention to transfer its accounting business to Shore.

18

Finished tax hearings on behalf of a client and submitted a bill for accounting services, $17,000. Shore expected to collect from this client within two weeks.

25

Paid office rent, $1,500.

28

Shore withdrew cash of $1,000.

Requirements

1. Analyze the effects of the events on the accounting equation of the proprietorship of Alex Shore, CPA. Use a format similar to Exhibit 1-6.

2. As of February 28, compute Alex Shore”s

a. total assets.

b. total liabilities.

c. total owner”s equity.

d. net income or net loss for February.

alterri mechanical was recently formed as a proprietorship the balance of each item 536672

Using the accounting equation for transaction analysis

Alterri Mechanical was recently formed as a proprietorship. The balance of each item in the company”s accounting equation is shown for November 1 and for each of the following business days:

Cash

Accounts receivable

Supplies

Land

Accounts payable

Alterri, capital

Nov 1

$3,000

$7,300

$ 1,100

$12,000

$4,300

$19,100

4

6,000

7,300

1,100

12,000

4,300

22,100

9

3,000

7,300

1,100

15,000

4,300

22,100

13

3,000

7,300

1,300

15,000

4,500

22,100

16

1,300

7,300

1,300

15,000

2,800

22,100

19

2,200

6,400

1,300

15,000

2,800

22,100

22

10,200

6,400

1,300

15,000

2,800

30,100

25

9,700

6,400

1,300

15,000

2,300

30,100

27

9,100

6,400

1,900

15,000

2,300

30,100

30

3,600

6,400

1,900

15,000

2,300

24,600

Requirement

1. A single transaction took place on each day. Briefly describe the transaction that most likely occurred on each day, beginning with November 4. Indicate which accounts were increased or decreased and by what amounts. Assume that no revenue or expense transactions occurred during the month.

missy crone owns and operates a public relations firm called top 40 the following am 536673

Using the accounting equation for transaction analysis

Missy Crone owns and operates a public relations firm called Top 40. The following amounts summarize her business on August 31, 2012:

Assets

= Liabilities

+ Owner”s equity

Date

Cash

+ Accounts receiveable

+ Supplies

+ Land

= Accounts payable

+Crone, capital

Bal

2,100

+ 2000

+ 0

+ 10,000

= 6,000

+ 81,00

During September 2012, the business completed the following transactions:

a. Gave capital to Crone and received cash of $10,000.

b. Performed service for a client and received cash of $1,000.

c. Paid off the beginning balance of accounts payable.

d. Purchased supplies from OfficeMax on account, $700.

e. Collected cash from a customer on account, $500.

f. Received cash of $1,900 and gave capital to owner.

g. Consulted for a new band and billed the client for services rendered, $5,800.

h. Recorded the following business expenses for the month:

1. Paid office rent, $900.

2. Paid advertising, $400.

i. Returned supplies to OfficeMax for $80 from item d, which was the cost of the supplies.

j. Crone withdrew cash of $2,700.

Requirement

1. Analyze the effects of the preceding transactions on the accounting equation of

Top 40. Adapt the format to that of Exhibit 1-6.

preparing financial statements and evaluating business performance 536674

Preparing financial statements and evaluating business performance

Presented here are the accounts of Quick and EZ Delivery for the year ended December 31, 2012.

Land

$ 7,000

Owner investment, 2012

$ 32,000

Note payable

30,000

Accounts payable

14,000

Property tax expense

2,900

Accounts receivable

1,700

Trott, drawing

32,000

Advertising expense

17,000

Rent expense

13,000

Building

137,900

Salary expense

69,000

Cash

6,000

Salary payable

500

Equipment

17,000

Service revenue

192,000

Insurance expense

2,000

Supplies

8,000

Interest expense

6,000

Trott, capital, 12/31/2011

51,000

Requirements

1. Prepare Quick and EZ Delivery”s income statement.

2. Prepare the statement of owner”s equity.

3. Prepare the balance sheet.

4. Answer these questions about the company:

a. Was the result of operations for the year a profit or a loss? How much?

b. How much in total economic resources does the company have as it moves into the new year?

c. How much does the company owe to creditors?

d. What is the dollar amount of the owner”s equity in the business at the end of the year?

photo gallery works weddings and prom type parties the balance of leibovitz capital 536675

Preparing financial statements

Photo Gallery works weddings and prom-type parties. The balance of Leibovitz, capital was $17,000 at December 31, 2011. At December 31, 2012, the business”s accounting records show these balances:

Insurance expense

$ 9,000

Accounts receivable

$ 6,000

Cash

26,000

Note payable

14,000

Accounts payable

4,000

Leibovitz, capital, Dec 31, 2012

?

Advertising expense

2,000

Salary expense

21,000

Service revenue

78,000

Equipment

70,000

Leibovitz, drawing

14,000

Owner investment, 2012

35,000

Requirement

1. Prepare the following financial statements for Photo Gallery for the year ended December 31, 2012:

a. Income statement

b. Statement of owner”s equity

c.Balance sheet

the bookkeeper of outdoor life landscaping prepared the company s balance sheet whil 536676

Preparing financial statements and evaluating business performance

The bookkeeper of Outdoor Life Landscaping prepared the company”s balance sheet while the accountant was ill. The balance sheet contains numerous errors. In particular, the bookkeeper knew that the balance sheet should balance, so he plugged in the owner”s equity amount needed to achieve this balance. The owner”s equity is incorrect. All other amounts are right, but some are out of place.

OUTDOOR LIFE LANDSCAPING

Balance Sheet

Month Ended July 31, 2012

Assets

Liabilities

Cash

$ 5,000

Accounts receivable

$ 2,300

Office supplies

800

Kamp, drawing

8,000

Land

28,400

Service revenue

39,200

Salary expense

3,500

Property tax expense

2,000

Office furniture

5,200

Accounts payable

2,800

Note payable

26,400

Rent expense

700

Owner”s Equity

Kamp, capital

15,700

Total assets

$ 70,000

Total liabilities

$ 70,000

Requirements

1. Prepare a corrected balance sheet.

2. Consider the original balance sheet as presented and the corrected balance sheet you prepared for requirement 1. Did total assets as presented in your corrected balance sheet increase, decrease, or stay the same from the original balance sheet? Why?

the dapper dons partnership was formed ten years ago as a general partnership to 536693

The Dapper-Dons Partnership was formed ten years ago as a general partnership to custom tailor men’s clothing. Dapper-Dons is located at 123 Flamingo Drive in City, ST, 54321. Bob Dapper manages the business and has 40% capital and profits interest. His address is 709 Brumby Way, City, ST, 54321. The partnership values its inventory using the cost method and did not change the method used during the current year. The partnership uses the accrual method of accounting. Because of its simplicity, the partnership is not subject to the partnership audit procedures.

Document Preview:

? ? OMB No. 1545-0099 U.S. Return of Partnership Income Form 1065 For calendar year 2012, or tax year beginning , 2012, ending , 20 . Department of the Treasury ? 2012 Information about Form 1065 and its separate instructions is at www.irs.gov/form1065. Internal Revenue Service A Principal business activity D Employer identification number Name of partnership E Date business started B Principal product or service Number, street, and room or suite no. If a P.O. box, see the instructions. Print or type. City or town, state, and ZIP code C Business code number F Total assets (see the instructions) $ G Check applicable boxes: (1) Initial return (2) Final return (3) Name change (4) Address change (5) Amended return (6) Technical termination – also check (1) or (2) ? Other (specify) H Check accounting method: (1) Cash (2) Accrual (3) ? I Number of Schedules K-1. Attach one for each person who was a partner at any time during the tax year J Check if Schedules C and M-3 are attached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caution. Include only trade or business income and expenses on lines 1a through 22 below. See the instructions for more information. 1a Gross receipts or sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1a b Returns and allowances . . . . . . . . . . . . 1b c Balance. Subtract line 1b from line 1a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1c 2 Cost of goods sold (attach Form 1125-A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3 Gross profit. Subtract line 2 from line 1c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4 Ordinary income (loss) from other partnerships, estates, and trusts (attach statement) . . 4 5 Net farm profit (loss) (attach Schedule F (Form 1040)) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 6 Net gain (loss) from Form 4797, Part II, line 17 (attach Form 4797) . . . . . . . . 6 7 Other income (loss) (attach statement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 8 Total income (loss). Combine lines 3 through 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 9…

prepare the 20xx statement of cost of goods manufactured 536721

Module 10 Assignment:
The following information was available for Hamilton Industries for the year 20XX:
Inventories 1-Jan 31-Dec
Materials $85,000 $105,000
Work in process 120,000 105,000
Finished goods 125,000 110,000
Advertising expense $75,000
Depreciation expense-office equipment 25,000
Depreciation expense-factory equipment 16,000
Direct Labor 205,000
Heat, light, and power-factory 6,500
Indirect labor 26,000
Materials purchased 135,000
Office salaries expense 85,000
Property taxes-factory 4,500
Property taxes-headquarters 15,000
Rent expense-factory 7,500
Sales 950,000
Sales salaries expense 150,000
Supplies-factory 3,500
Miscellaneous cost-factory 4,500
Requirements:
1 Prepare the 20XX statement of cost of goods manufactured.
Hamilton Industries
Statement of Cost of Goods Manufactured
For the Year ended December 31, 20XX
2 Prepare the 20XX income statement.
Hamilton Industries
Income Statement
For the Year ended December 31, 20XX

Attachments:

bulls ltd has a december 31 fiscal year end and the controller of the company is cur 536833

Bulls Ltd. has a December 31 fiscal year-end, and the controller of the company is currently completing the financial statements of the company in order to present them at the next board meeting. He completed most of the work, but did not get around to finishing the cash flow statement. He gives you the following financial information in order for you to help him with the preparation of the cash flows.

Balance sheet

2010

2009

Cash

£ 38,500

£ 8,000

Accounts receivable, net

20,000

29,500

Merchandise inventory

37,000

38,000

Prepaid Insurance

9,500

15,000

Land

54,500

40,600

Equipment, at cost

104,500

90,700

Less: Accumulated amortisation

(30,500)

(15,500)

Patent

49,000

53,200

Total assets

£ 282,500

£ 259,500

Accounts payable

£ 58,500

£ 42,000

Income taxes payable

16,500

11,500

Advertising payable

5,000

Dividends payable

40,000

10,000

Notes payable

40,000

83,000

Share capital

93,000

78,500

Retained earnings

29,500

34,500

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

£ 282,500

£ 259,500

Sales

£ 1,090,000

Cost of goods sold

672,000

Gross profit

418,000

Operating expense

Salaries expense

195,000

Advertising expense

35,000

Rent expense

67,500

Insurance expense

34,500

Amortisation expense

25,000

Total operating expenses

357,000

Income from operations

61,000

Interest expense

2,500

Gain on sale of equipment

7,500

Income before income taxes

66,000

Income tax expense

4,000

Net income

£ 62,000

Additional information:

1.Bulls Ltd. purchased equipment of £36,300 in cash during the year.

2.Bulls Ltd. sold equipment for cash during the year.

3.No patent has been purchased nor sold in the year.

4.Accounts payable relates solely to transactions with suppliers for inventory.

Complete the following:

1.Prepare a complete cash flow statement using the indirect method for the 2010 fiscal year.

2. Compute the following amounts:

1. Cash collected from clients during the year

2.Cash paid for advertising expense

3. Cash paid to suppliers for inventory

Attachments:

taxation 536940

2. 2. Student receives a $6,000 scholarship for college. Is it considered income in each of the following cases? Justify your answers. a. It is for tuition only . b. It is for books and supplies. c. It is used for the student meal plan and transportation. 1. 1. Are the following includable in the employee’s gross income? Cite relevant tax code and where it would appear on the 1040. a. Employee charges the cost of materials for a presentation at work on her personal credit card and gets reimbursed by her employer. b.

Document Preview:

????2. 2. Student receives a $6,000 scholarship for college. Is it considered income in each of the following cases? Justify your answers. a. It is for tuition only . b. It is for books and supplies. c. It is used for the student meal plan and transportation.??1. 1. Are the following includable in the employee’s gross income? Cite relevant tax code and where it would appear on the 1040. a. Employee charges the cost of materials for a presentation at work on her personal credit card and gets reimbursed by her employer. b. Employee of Big Burger chain gets a discount in all Big Burger stores across the country. c. Employer provides a dinner to employees who work late on Friday night. d. Employer gives employee a $50 gift certificate each month to encourage eating lunch at a nearby healthy eatery instead of fast food. 3. 3. JJ got married on December 31, 2012. His new wife has a dependent child. A) What filing status is most advantageous for him in 2012? B) His new wife wants to file as married filing separately, because she thinks they will get extra deductions. Is this true? Provide proof. 4. 4. Susan Trader buys 300 shares of Metlife stock and 500 shares of GE on December 31, 2009. She then buys 300 shares of WaMu stock on January 4, 2010. She sells of her stock on March 11, 2012. She ends up with an $8,000 gain from Metlife, a $10,000 loss from GE, and a $5,000 loss from WaMu. How much loss can she take against her ordinary income in 2012? What is the amount and character of the loss that she carries forward into the next year? 5. 5. President Obama has asked that you drop everything in order to advise him on his new tax policy. He is trying to raise tax revenue through progressive measures. He is looking for you to come up with some ideas based on what you have learned during this course. Are there deductions he should modify or do away with? Is there a fair way for him to raise the income tax? Where should he look for other sources of revenue? Would you…

Attachments:

the financial statements of zetar plcare presented in appendix c 537331

The financial statements of Zetar plcare presented in Appendix C. The company”s complete annual report, including the notes to its financial statements.

Instructions

Use the company”s annual report to answer the following questions.

(a) The company”s income statement reports a loss on discontinued operations. What business did the company discontinue, and why did it choose to discontinue the business?

(b) For the year ended April 30, 2009, what amount did the company lose on the operation of the discontinued business, and what amount did it lose on disposal?

(c) What was the total recorded value of the net assets at the date of disposal, and what was the amount of costs incurred to dispose of the business?

direct materials are a 537335

Direct materials are a:

Product

Manufacturing

Period

Cost

Overhead

Cost

(a)

Yes

Yes

No

(b)

Yes

No

No

(c)

Yes

Yes

Yes

(d)

No

No

No

selected financial statement data from texas telecom inc for years 5 and 9 are repro 536488

Selected financial statement data from Texas Telecom, Inc., for Years 5 and 9 are reproduced

below ($ millions):

Year 5

Year 9

Income Statement Data

Revenues

$542

$979

Operating income

35

68

Interest expense

7

0

Pretax income

28

68

Income taxes

14

34

Net income

14

34

Balance Sheet Data

Long-term operating assets

$ 52

$ 63

Working capital

123

157

Total liabilities .

50

0

Total shareholders” equity

125

220

Required:

a. Calculate return on common equity and disaggregate ROCE for Years 5 and 9 using end-of-year values for computations requiring an average (assume fixed assets and working capital are operating and a 50% tax rate).

b. Comment on Texas Telecom”s use of financial leverage.

its gross margin and components for the past two years are 536489

Johnson Corporation sells primarily two products: (A) consumer cleaners and (B) industrial purifiers.

Its gross margin and components for the past two years are:

Year 7

Year 6

Sales revenue

Product A

$60,000

$35,000

Product B

30,000

45,000

Total

90,000

80,000

Deduct cost of goods sold

Product A

50,000

28,000

Product B

19,500

27,000

Total

69,500

55,000

Gross margin

$20,500

$25,000

In Year 6, the selling price of A is $5 per unit, while in Year 7 it is $6 per unit. Product B sells for $50 per unit in both years. Security analysts and the business press expressed surprise at Johnson”s 12.5% increase in sales and $4,500 decrease in gross margin for Year 7.

Required:

Prepare an analysis statement of the change in gross margin for Year 7 versus Year 6. Discuss and show the effects of changes in quantities, prices, costs, and product mix on gross margin.

accounts payable turnover 536492

Reebok

Year 5

Year 4

Year 3

Year 2

Year 1

Average collection period

49.96

46.98

49.22

53.58

58.86

Inventory turnover

5.71

5.06

5.01

4.40

3.76

Average inventory days outstanding

63.95

72.10

72.88

82.88

97.17

Long-term operating asset turnover

13.67

12.62

12.31

10.25

9.03

Accounts payable turnover

13.33

13.16

12.66

10.92

9.99

Average payable days outstanding

27.37

27.74

28.83

33.43

36.54

Required:

a. Describe and interpret how the recent five-year trend in the components of ROCE determine the ROCE for both Nike and Reebok.

b. Recommend a “buy” on one of these companies based on your analysis. Support your recommendation with reference to your analysis in (a).

the following data are excerpted from the annual report of lands 536493

The following data are excerpted from the annual report of Lands” End:

For the period ended

Year 9

Year 8

Year 7

Year 6

Year 5

Net sales

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

Cost of sales

55.0

53.4

54.5

57.0

57.6

Gross profit

45.0

46.6

45.5

43.0

42.4

Selling, general, and administrative

39.7

38.8

37.9

38.0

36.0

Other expenses

3.0

2.7

3.0

2.0

2.8

Net income

2.3%

5.1%

4.6%

3.0%

3.6%

Required:

a. Discuss three factors that determine the level of sales and the level of gross profit as a percentage of sales in the context of the operations of Lands” End.

b. Interpret the gross profit percentage (45% in fiscal Year 9) in simple terms and in the context of Lands” Ends operations.

c. Catalog mailing costs constitute a large percentage of the selling, general, and administrative costs for Lands” End. These costs have risen steadily as a percent of sales (only 32.4% in fiscal Year 4). Discuss drivers (determinants) of total catalog mailing costs and indicate ways that Lands” End can control these costs. With each suggestion, indicate how the level of sales might be affected.

wal mart and sears prior to its merger with kmart two large retailers in the u s off 536494

Wal-Mart and Sears (prior to its merger with Kmart), two large retailers in the U.S., offer an interesting study in contrasts. Wal-Mart has steadily grown to become the world”s largest retail company and probably the most successful story in the history of retailing, Sears, on the other hand, had a long and checkered past. In the early 1990s the company almost went out of business. It subsequently reinvented itself, made a comeback (although somewhat bumpier than its investors and creditors would have liked) and, finally, merged with Kmart. The table below provides some comparative information on the two companies for 1999 (the financial statements are available in Exhibits I and II).

Market

Total

Net

Earnings

Dividend

P/E

P/B

$ Billions

Cap

Revenue

Assets

Equity

Income

Growth*

ROE

Payout

Ratio

Ratio

Sears

$ 11.21

$ 41.07

$36.95

$ 6.84

$1.45

5.5%

22.5%

24%

7.73

1.64

Wal-Mart

$244.02

$166.81

$70.349

$25.83

$5.38

17.5%

22.9%

16%

45.35

9.45

The differences between the two companies are striking, especially with respect to market valuation. While Wal-Mart”s assets were twice that of Sears, its market capitalization at that time was more than 20 times that of Sears! The P/E and P/B ratios shed further light on this issue: the P/E and P/B ratios for Wal-Mart are almost six times as large as those of Sears! This differential valuation is more surprising because Wal-Mart and Sears appeared to be equally profitable: in that year their ROEs were comparable at 22.5% and 22.9%, respectively. Part of the higher market valuation of Wal-Mart could be attributable to its superior growth: Wal- Mart”s earnings grew at a compounded 17.5% per annum during the 1990s compared to 5.5% for Sears over a comparable period. However, earnings growth may not be the entire story. A more detailed analysis of the profitability of the two companies is called for, and it is important to analyze how each company generates this return.

Required:

1. Rearrange the income statement and the balance sheet of the two companies for 1999 and 1998 in the operating/ nonoperating format described in the text (for example, compute NOA, NFO and SE for the balance sheet, and compute NOPAT, NFE and NI for the income statement.)

2. Provide a breakdown of the ROEs of the two companies for 1999, showing the financial and operating leverages described in the text and their effects (you may use closing balance sheet data for computation of the return ratios). What does this analysis tell you about the inherent riskiness of the two companies?

3. Analyze the profit margin and asset turnover ratios of Sears and Wal-Mart by using line item information from the financial statements.

4. Sears”s low return-on-assets ratios and high leverage could be partly attributable to its credit card operations—in effect, Sears is partly a financial institution. Exhibit III provides select financial information about Sears” credit card and other businesses obtained from segment information in notes to its financial statements.

Using this information, analyze the relative returns on Sears”s retailing and financing businesses and its impact on the overall risk-return profile of the company.

5. Summarize your conclusions for the difference between the market capitalization for Sears and Wal-Mart using the analysis you performed in parts 1 through 4.

you work for lavalier corporation during the past several years you have been workin 536597

You work for Lavalier Corporation. During the past several years, you have been working with the company to develop new communication technologies. Based primarily on your efforts, the company has acquired several valuable patents. The company has decided that the most attractive way of commercializing these patents is to set up a new company and provide you with a substantial equity stake in the business. Lavalier company lawyers have created a U.S. ‘‘C” corporation (the standard U.S. corporate structure) named Lavalier Communications, Inc. (LCI). Late in 20X0, the new company created a board of directors from senior officers in Lavalier Corporation and several independent (outside) directors. On January 2, 20X1, the board of directors met and named you president and chief operating officer (COO) of the new company. The board also named the corporate treasurer of Lavalier Corporation as the chairman and chief executive officer (CEO). The board of directors authorized 5 million shares of common stock ($1 par value). On January 2, 20X1, Lavalier transferred $5 million to a newly established bank account at First National Bank in return for 1 million shares of common stock (par value $1 per share).

following is a list of all the balance sheet accounts that have been used in the que 536606

Following is a list of all the balance sheet accounts that have been used in the questions in this book. Next to each account is the sum of all the debits to that account and the sum of all credits to that account. Note that these totals reflect all the debits and credits to each account in all chapters of the text, not just the previous two chapters.

Use the information to construct a balance sheet for LCI.

Account

Debits

Credits

CASH

$6,490,001

$5,433,450

SECURITY DEPOSITS

4,000

0

ADVANCES TO SUPPLIERS

250,000

250,000

ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE

932,500

641,000

ALLOWANCE FOR

25,564

59,029

UNCOLLECTIBLES

FINISHED GOODS INVENTORY

650,000

645,000

PREPAID RENT

4,000

4,000

INVESTMENT IN BONDS

2,000,000

0

EQUIPMENT

45,000

0

ACCUMULATED DEPRECIATION

0

11,250

PATENTS

2,000,000

200,000

ACCOUNTS PAYABLE

215,450

315,450

PAYROLL TAXES PAYABLE

120,000

120,000

COMMON STOCK

0

1,000,000

PAID-IN CAPITAL IN EXCESS OF PAR

0

4,000,000

following is a list of all the income statement accounts that have been used in the 536613

Following is a list of all the income statement accounts that have been used in the questions in this book. Next to each account is the sum of all the debits to that account and the sum of all credits to that account. Note that these totals reflect all the debits and credits to each account in all chapters of the text, not just the previous three chapters.

Use the information to construct an income statement for LCI.

Account

Debits

Credits

SALES REVENUE

$ 0

1,697,125

INTEREST REVENUE

0

131,126

COST OF GOODS SOLD

645,000

0

SALARY EXPENSE

480,000

0

COMMISSION EXPENSE

70,450

0

PAYROLL TAX EXPENSE

120,000

0

RENT EXPENSE

44,000

0

UNCOLLECTIBLE

80,215

0

ACCOUNT EXPENSE

DEPRECIATION

11,250

0

EXPENSE—EQUIPMENT

AMORTIZATION

200,000

0

EXPENSE—PATENTS

PATENT LICENSE EXPENSE

$120,000

0

revisit the june 22 transaction described in question 4 3 now two additional provisi 536614

Revisit the June 22 transaction described in Question 4.3. Now, two additional provisions have been added—a commission and an allowance for nonpayment. You ship 3,500 NCDs on June 22 to OEM Communications for a gross price of $26 per unit to be paid within 30 days. A commission of 20 percent is payable to Lavalier Sales and Marketing (Channel Islands). Based on the prior experience of Lavalier Corporation, you predict that 3 percent of sales will be uncollectible. 5.2. Revisit the July 18 transaction described in Question 4.5. Now, the July 18 transaction must include the additional information provided in Question 5.1. You receive payment in full on July 18 for the June sales to OEM Communications. You pay the sales commission to Lavalier Sales and Marketing (Channel Islands) and keep the balance of the cash in your demand deposit account.

produce a statement of cash flows for lavalier communications inc using the direct m 536625

Produce a statement of cash flows for Lavalier Communications, Inc. using the direct method and the account totals from the trial balance below.

General Journal

Account

Debits

Credits

CASH

$6,490,001

5,433,450

SECURITY DEPOSITS

4,000

0

ADVANCES TO SUPPLIERS

250,000

250,000

ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE

932,500

641,000

ALLOWANCE FOR UNCOLLECTIBLES

25,564

59,029

FINISHED GOODS INVENTORY

650,000

645,000

PREPAID RENT

4,000

4,000

INVESTMENT IN BONDS

2,000,000

0

EQUIPMENT

45,000

0

ACCUMULATED DEPRECIATION

0

11,250

PATENTS

2,000,000

200,000

ACCOUNTS PAYABLE

215,450

315,450

PAYROLL TAXES PAYABLE

120,000

120,000

COMMON STOCK

0

1,000,000

PAID-IN CAPITAL IN EXCESS OF PAR

0

4,000,000

SALES REVENUE

0

1,697,125

INTEREST REVENUE

$ 0

$ 131,126

COST OF GOODS SOLD

645,000

0

SALARY EXPENSE

480,000

0

COMMISSION EXPENSE

70,450

0

PAYROLL TAX EXPENSE

120,000

0

RENT EXPENSE

44,000

0

UNCOLLECTIBLE ACCOUNT EXPENSE

80,215

0

DEPRECIATION EXPENSE—EQUIPMENT

11,250

0

AMORTIZATION EXPENSE—PATENTS

200,000

0

PATENT LICENSE EXPENSE

120,000 $

0

michael mcnamee is the proprietor of a property management company near the campus o 536644

Applying accounting concepts and principles

Michael McNamee is the proprietor of a property management company near the campus of Pensacola State College. The business has cash of $8,000 and furniture that cost $9,000 and has a market value of $13,000. Debts include accounts payable of $6,000. Michael”s personal home is valued at $400,000 and his personal bank account has a balance of $1,200.

Requirements

1. Consider the accounting principles discussed in the chapter and define the principle that best matches the situation:

a. Michael”s personal assets are not recorded on the property management company”s balance sheet.

b. Michael records furniture at its cost of $9,000, not its market value of $13,000.

c. Michael does not make adjustments for inflation.

d. The account payable of $6,000 is documented by a statement from the furniture company showing the business still owes $6,000 on the furniture. Michael”s friend thinks he should only owe about $5,000. The account payable is recorded at $6,000.

2. How much equity is in the business?

characteristics of a proprietorship accounting concepts and using the accounting equ 536647

Characteristics of a proprietorship, accounting concepts, and using the accounting equation

Select financial information for three companies follows:

Assets

Liabilities

Owner”s Equity

New Rock Gas

$

$24,000

$50,000

DJ Video Rentals

75,000

?

32,000

Corner Grocery

100,000

53,000

?

Requirements

1. Compute the missing amount in the accounting equation for each entity.

2. List the main characteristics of a proprietorship.

3. Which accounting concept tells us that the previous three proprietorships will continue to exist in the future?

great city builders balance sheet data at may 31 2012 and june 30 2012 follow 536649

Using the accounting equation to analyze business transactions

Great City Builders balance sheet data at May 31, 2012, and June 30, 2012, follow:

May 31, 2012

June 30, 2012

Total assets

$177,000

$213,000

Total liabilities

122,000

144,000

6

Requirement

1. Following are three situations about owner”s investments and drawings of the

business during June. For each situation, compute the amount of net income or

net loss during June 2012.

a. The owner invested $6,000 in the business and made no withdrawals.

b. The owner made no investments. The owner withdrew cash $10,000.

c. The company owner made investments of $18,000 and withdrew cash of $20,000.

using the accounting equation to analyze transactions 536651

Using the accounting equation to analyze transactions

Requirement

1. Indicate the effects of the following business transactions on the accounting equation of a Viviani Video store. Transaction (a) is answered as a guide.

a. Received cash of $8,000 and gave capital.

Answer: Increase asset (Cash)

Increase capital (Viviani, capital)

b. Earned video rental revenue on account, $1,800.

c. Purchased office furniture on account, $400.

d. Received cash on account, $600.

e. Paid cash on account, $100.

f. Sold land for $15,000, which was the cost of the land.

g. Rented videos and received cash of $300.

h. Paid monthly office rent of $900.

i. Paid $200 cash to purchase supplies that will be used in the future.

caren smith opened a medical practice during july the first month of operation the b 536652

Using the accounting equation to analyze transactions

Caren Smith opened a medical practice. During July, the first month of operation, the business, titled Caren Smith, M.D., experienced the following events:

Jul 6

Smith invested $55,000 in the business by opening a bank account in the name of C. Smith, M.D. The business gave capital to Smith.

9

Paid $46,000 cash for land.

12

Purchased medical supplies for $1,800 on account.

15

Officially opened for business.

15–31

During the rest of the month, Smith treated patients and earned service revenue of $8,000, receiving cash.

29

Paid cash expenses: employees” salaries, $1,600; office rent, $900; utilities, $100.

30

Returned supplies purchased on the 12th for the cost of those supplies, $700.

31

Paid $1,100 on account.

Requirement

1. Analyze the effects of these events on the accounting equation of the medical practice of Caren Smith, M.D. Use a format similar to that of Exhibit 1-6, with headings for Cash; Medical supplies; Land; Accounts payable; and Smith, capital.

using the accounting equation to analyze transactions and calculate net income or ne 536653

Using the accounting equation to analyze transactions and calculate net income or net loss

The analysis of the first eight transactions of All-in-one Accounting Service follows. The owner made only one investment and there were no owner drawings.

Cash

+ Accounts receivable

+ Equipment

= Accounts payable

+ Larrison capital

1

+ 31,000

+ 31,000

2

+ 3,800

+ 3,800

3

+ 13,400

+ 13,400

4

+ 190

– 190

5

– 410

+ 410

6

– 8,000

– 8,000

7

+ 790

+ 790

8

– 1,500

– 1,500

Requirements

1. Describe each transaction.

2. If these transactions fully describe the operations of All-in-one Accounting Service during the month, what was the amount of net income or net loss?

shane s roasted peanuts supplies snack foods the business experienced the following 536657

Analyzing business transactions

Shane”s Roasted Peanuts supplies snack foods. The business experienced the following events.

a. Shane”s Roasted Peanuts received cash from the owner and gave capital to Shane.

b. Cash purchase of land for a building site.

c. Paid cash on accounts payable.

d. Purchased equipment; signed a note payable.

e. Performed service for a customer on account.

f. Employees worked for the week but will be paid next Tuesday.

g. Received cash from a customer on account receivable.

h. Borrowed money from the bank.

i. Owner withdrew cash.

j. Incurred utility expense on account.

Requirement

1. State whether each event (1) increased, (2) decreased, or (3) had no effect on the total assets of the business. Identify any specific asset affected.

proprietorship attributes applying the entity concept and preparing financial statem 536661

/p>

Proprietorship attributes, applying the entity concept, and preparing financial statements

Andrea Scarlett is a realtor. She organized her business as a proprietorship, Andrea Scarlett, Realtor, by investing $19,000 cash. The business gave capital to her. Consider Scarlett, Realtor, by investing $19,000 cash. The business gave capital to her. Consider the following facts at September 30, 2012.

a. The business owes $61,000 on a note payable for land that the business acquired for a total price of $83,000.

b. The business spent $23,000 for a Zinka Banker real estate franchise, which entitles the business to represent itself as a Zinka Banker office. This franchise is a business asset.

c. Scarlett owes $80,000 on a personal mortgage for her personal residence, which she acquired in 2012 for a total price of $160,000.

d. Scarlett has $5,000 in her personal bank account, and the business has $9,000 in its bank account.

e. Scarlett owes $4,000 on a personal charge account with Chico”s.

f. The office acquired business furniture for $15,000 on September 25. Of this amount, the business owes $2,000 on account at September 30.

g. Office supplies on hand at the real estate office total $1,300.

Requirements

1. Scarlett was concerned about taxes. Which proprietorship feature limits Scarlett”s business taxes?

2. Prepare the balance sheet of the real estate business of Andrea Scarlett, Realtor, at September 30, 2012.

3. Identify the personal items that would not be reported on the business records.

matilda crone owns and operates a public relations firm called dance fever the follo 536664

Using the accounting equation for transaction analysis

Matilda Crone owns and operates a public relations firm called Dance Fever. The following amounts summarize her business on August 31, 2012:

Assets

= Liabilities

+ Owner”s equity

Date

Cash

+ Accounts receiveable

+ Supplies

+ Land

=Accounts payable

+ Crone,capital

Bal

2,300

1,800

0

14,000

8,000

10,100

During September 2012, the business completed the following transactions:

a. Gave capital to Crone and received cash of $13,000.

b. Performed service for a client and received cash of $900.

c. Paid off the beginning balance of accounts payable.

d. Purchased supplies from OfficeMax on account, $600.

e. Collected cash from a customer on account, $700.

f. Received cash of $1,600 and gave capital to owner.

g. Consulted for a new band and billed the client for services rendered, $5,500.

h. Recorded the following business expenses for the month:

1. Paid office rent, $1,200.

2. Paid advertising, $600.

i. Returned supplies to OfficeMax for $110 from item d, which was the cost of the supplies.

j. Crone withdrew cash of $2,000.

Requirement

1. Analyze the effects of the preceding transactions on the accounting equation of

Dance Fever. Adapt the format to that of Exhibit 1-6.

accounting vocabulary financial statement users accounting profession types of busin 536668

Accounting vocabulary, financial statement users, accounting profession, types of business organizations, proprietorship characteristics, and accounting concepts

Consider the following terms and definitions:

TERMS:

DEFINITIONS:

1. Proprietorship

A. Feature that enables a corporation to raise more money than proprietorships and partnerships

2. Faithful representation

B. Holds that fair market value should not be used over actual costs

3. Partnership

C. Stands for Financial Accounting Standards Board

4. Stock

D. Owner is referred to as a proprietor

5. Limited liability

E. Asserts that data are complete, neutral, and free from material error

6. Limited Liability Company

F. Revenues of $70,000 and expenses of $85,000

7. Cost principle

G. Has unlimited liability

8. FASB

H. Represents ownership in a corporation

9. Net loss of $15,000

I. Type of entity that is designed to limit personal liability exposure

10. Creditors

J. Person or business lending money

Requirement

1. Match the terms with their correct definitions.

expenses paid in cash 18 000 including 4 000 of interest and 6 000 in taxes 536446

Year 1

Year 2

Accounts payable

$ 19,000

$ 12,000

Bonds payable

10,000

30,000

Common stock

50,000

61,000

Retained earnings

21,000

28,000

Treasury stock

(11,500)

Total liabilities and equity

100,000

$119,500

Additional data for the period January 1, Year 2, through December 31, Year 2, are:

1. Sales on account, $70,000.

2. Purchases on account, $40,000.

3. Depreciation, $5,000.

4. Expenses paid in cash, $18,000 (including $4,000 of interest and $6,000 in taxes).

5. Decrease in inventory, $2,000.

6. Sales of fixed assets for $6,000 cash; cost $21,000 and two-thirds depreciated (loss or gain is included in income).

7. Purchase of fixed assets for cash, $4,000.

8. Fixed assets are exchanged for bonds payable of $30,000.

9. Sale of investments for $9,000 cash.

10. Purchase of treasury stock for cash, $11,500.

11. Retire bonds payable by issuing common stock, $10,000.

12. Collections on accounts receivable, $65,000.

13. Sold unissued common stock for cash, $1,000.

Required:

a. Prepare a statement of cash flows (indirect method) for the year ended December 31, Year 2.

b. Prepare a side-by-side comparative statement contrasting two bases of reporting: (1) net income and (2) cash flows from operations.

c. Which of the two financial reports in (b) better reflects profitability? Explain.

dax corporation s genetically engineered flowers have rapidly gained market acceptan 536447

Dax Corporation”s genetically engineered flowers have rapidly gained market acceptance and shipments to customers have increased dramatically. The company is preparing for significant increases in production. Management notes that despite increasing profits the cash balance has declined, and it is forced to nearly double its debt financing in the current year. You are hired to advise management as to specific causes of the cash deficiency and how to remedy the situation. You are given the following balance sheets of Dax Corporation for Years 1 and 2 ($ thousands):

DAX CORPORATION

Balance Sheets

December 31, Year 2 and Year 1

($ thousands)

Year 2

Year 1

Assets

$ 500

$ 640

860

550

Cash

935

790

Accounts receivable, net

25

Inventories

2,320

$1,980

Prepaid expenses

Total current assets

1,440

Patents

140

150

Less accumulated amortization

(10)

130

$3,570

Plant and equipment

2,650

2,050

$1,950

Less accumulated depreciation

(600)

170

(510)

Other assets

200

$4,670

175

Less accumulated depreciation

(30)

(25)

Total assets

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts payable

$630

$ 600

Deferred income tax

57

45

Other current liabilities

85

78

Total current liabilities

772

723

Long-term debt

1,650

850

Common stock, $1 par

2,000

1,800

Retained earnings

248

197

Total liabilities and equity

$4,670

$3,570

In addition, the following information is available:

1. Net income for Year 2 is $160,000 and for Year 1 it is $130,000.

2. Cash dividends paid during Year 2 are $109,000 and during Year 1 they are $100,000.

3. Depreciation expense charged to income during Year 2 is $95,000, and the provision for bad debts (expense) is $40,000. Expenses include cash payments of $28,000 in interest costs and $70,000 in income taxes.

4. During Year 2 the company purchases patents for $140,000 in cash. Amortization of patents during the year amounts to $10,000.

5. Deferred income tax for Year 2 amounts to $12,000 and for Year 1 it amounts to $15,000.

Required:

a. Prepare a statement of cash flows (indirect method) for Year 2.

b. Explain the discrepancy between net income and cash flows from operations.

c. Describe options available to management to remedy the cash deficiency.

an ability to visualize quickly the effect of a transaction on the cash resources of 536449

An ability to visualize quickly the effect of a transaction on the cash resources of a company is a useful analytical skill. This visualization requires an understanding of the economics underlying transactions and how they are accounted for. Expressing transactions in entry form can help one understand business activities.

Required:

A schematic statement of cash flows is reproduced below. The titles of lines in the schematic are given labels (letters). Several business activities are listed below the schematic. For each of the activities listed, identify the lines affected and by what amount. Each activity is separate and unrelated to another. The company closes its books once each year on December 31. Do not consider subsequent activities. Use the labels (letters) shown below. Do not indicate the effect on any line not given a label. If a transaction has no effect, write none. In indicating effects for lines labeled Y and C, use a [1] to indicate an increase and a


to indicate a decrease. (Hint: Every activity with an effect, affects at least two lines—equal debits and credits. An analytical entry can aid in arriving at a solution.)

Schematic Statement of Cash Flows

SOURCES OF CASH

(Y)

Net income

(Y)

YA)

Additions and add backs of expenses and losses not using cash

(YA)

YS)

Subtractions for revenues and gains not generating cash

(YS)

Changes in current operating assets and liabilities

CC)

Add credit changes

(CC)

DC)

Deduct debit changes

(DC)

NC)

Add (deduct) changes in noncurrent operating accounts

(NC)

Cash flow from operations Y YA YS CC DC or NC

DE)

Proceeds of debt and equity issues

(DE)

(IL)

Increase in non-operating current liabilities

(IL)

AD)

Proceeds of long-term assets dispositions

(AD)

OS)

Other sources of cash

(OS)

Total sources of cash

USES OF CASH

(ID)

Income distributions

(ID)

(R)

Retirements of debt and equity

(R)

(DL)

Decreases in non-operating current liabilities

(DL)

(AA)

Long-term assets acquisitions

(AA)

OU)

Other uses of cash

(OU)

Total uses of cash

(C)

Increase (decrease) in cash

(C)

SCHEDULE OF NONCASH INVESTING AND FINANCING ACTIVITIES

(NDE)

Issue of debt or equity

(NDE)

(NCR)

Other noncash-generating credits

(NCR)

(NAA)

Acquisitions of assets

(NAA)

(NDR)

Other noncash-requiring debts

(NDR)

Examples:

a. Sales of $10,000 are made on credit.

b. Cash dividends of $4,000 are paid.

c. Entered into long-term capital lease obligation (present value $60,000).

Answers in the Form [Line, Amount]:

a. [DC, $10,000], [+ Y, $10,000]

b. [ID, $4,000], [- C, $4,000]

c. [NAA, $60,000], [NDE, $60,000]

Business activities:

a. Provision for bad debts of $11,000 for the year is included in selling expenses.

b. Depreciation of $16,000 is charged to cost of goods sold.

c. Company acquires a building by issuance of a long-term mortgage note for $100,000.

d. Treasury stock with a cost of $7,000 is retired and canceled.

e. The company has outstanding 50,000 shares of common stock with par value of $1. The company declares a

20 percent stock dividend at the end of the year when the stock is selling for $16 a share.

f. Inventory costing $12,000 is destroyed by fire. The insurance company pays only $10,000 toward this loss, although the market value of the inventory is $15,000.

g. Inventories originally costing $25,000 are used by production departments in producing finished goods that are sold for $35,000 in cash and $5,000 in accounts receivable.

h. Accounts receivable of $8,000 are written off. There is an allowance for doubtful accounts balance of $5,000 prior to the write off.

i. Long-lived assets are acquired for $100,000 cash on January 1. The company decides to depreciate $20,000 each year.

j. A machine costing $15,000 with accumulated depreciation of $6,000 is sold for $8,000 cash.

while on assignment you discover that you have misplaced the balance sheet of bird c 536450

While on assignment you discover that you have misplaced the balance sheet of Bird Corporation as of January 1, Year 1. However, you do have the following data on Bird Corporation:

BIRD CORPORATION

Post-closing Trial Balance

December 31, Year 1

Debit balances

Cash

$100,000

Accounts receivable

120,000

Inventory

130,000

Property, plant, and equipment

550,000

Other noncurrent investments

200,000

Total

$1,100,000

Credit balances

Accounts payable

$100,000

Current portion of long-term debt

80,000

Accumulated depreciation

270,000

Long-term debt

200,000

Common stock

300,000

Retained earnings

150,000

Total

$1,100,000

BIRD CORPORATION

Statement of Cash Flows

For Year Ended December 31, Year 1

Cash flows from operations

Net income

$150,000

Add (deduct) adjustment to cash basis

Depreciation

$ 85,000

Loss on sale of equipment

5,000

Gain on sale of noncurrent investments

(50,000)

Increase in accounts receivable

(30,000)

Increase in inventories

(20,000)

Increase in accounts payable

40,000

30000

Cash from operations

180000

Cash flows from investing activities

Additions to property and equipment

(150,000)

Sale of equipment

10,000

Sale of investments

95,000

Cash used for investing activities

(45000)

Cash flows from financing activities

Issuance of common stock

10000

Additions to long-term debt

15000

Decrease in current portion of long-term debt

(30000)

(15,000)

Cash dividends

(80,000)

Cash used for financing activities

(85,000)

Net increase in cash

$50,000

Required:

Using the available data and information, prepare the balance sheet of Bird Corporation as of January 1, Year 1. T-accounts can be helpful in reconstructing the individual accounts. (Note: Equipment sold had accumulated depreciation of $50,000.)

indicate whether the following independent transactions increase 1 decrease 536451

Indicate whether the following independent transactions increase ([1]), decrease (


), or do not affect (NE) the current ratio, the amount of working capital, and cash from operations. Also indicate the amounts of any effects. The company presently has a current ratio of 2 to 1 along with current liabilities of $160,000.

Current Ratio Effect

Working Capital

Cash from Operations

Effect $

Effect $

a. Paid accrued wages of $1,000.

b. Purchased $20,000 worth of material on account.

c. Received judgment notice from the court that the

company must pay $70,000 damages for patent

infringement within six months.

d. Collected $8,000 of accounts receivable.

e. Purchased land for factory for $100,000 cash.

f. Repaid currently due bank note payable of $10,000.

g. Received currently due note receivable of $15,000 from

customer as consideration for sale of land.

h. Received cash of $90,000 from stockholders as

donated capital.

i. Purchased machine costing $50,000; $15,000 down

and the balance to be paid in seven equal annual

installments.

j. Retired bonds maturing five years hence at par of

$50,000. Bonds have unamortized premium of $2,000.

k. Declared dividends of $10,000 payable after year-end.

l. Paid the dividends in k in cash.

m. Declared a 5% stock dividend.

n. Paid the stock dividend in m.

o. Signed a long-term purchase contract of $100,000 to

commence a year from now.

p. Borrowed $40,000 cash for one year.

q. Paid accounts payable of $20,000.

r. Purchase a patent for $20,000.

s. Wrote off $15,000 of current marketable securities that

became worthless.

t. $8,500 of organization expenses were written off.

u. Recorded depreciation expense of $70,000.

v. Sold $28,000 of merchandise on account.

w. Sold a building for $90,000 that had a book value of

$45,000.

x. Sold a machine at cost for $5,000; received $2,500

down and the balance receivable in six months.

y. Recorded income tax expense of $80,000, half of which

is deferred (long term).

your banker confides to you after looking at a number of financial statements that s 536452

Your banker confides to you after looking at a number of financial statements that she is confused about the difference between two operating measures, net income and cash from operations.

Required:

a. Explain the purpose and significance of these two operating measures.

b. Several financial transactions or events follow. For each transaction or event, indicate whether it yields an increase (+), decrease (-), or no effect (NE) on each of the two measures.

EFFECT OF TRANSACTION/EVENT ON:

Net Income

Cash from Operations

1. Sales of marketable securities for cash at more than their carrying value.

2. Sale of merchandise with deferred payments

(one-half within one year and one-half after one year).

3. Reclassify noncurrent receivable as current receivable.

4. Payment of current portion of long-term debt.

5. Collection of an account receivable.

6. Recording the cost of goods sold.

7. Purchase of inventories on account (credit terms).

8. Accrual of sales commissions (to be paid at a later date).

9. Payment of accounts payable (resulting from purchase of

inventory).

10. Provision for depreciation on a sales office.

11. Borrowing cash from a bank on a 90-day note payable.

12. Accrual of interest on a bank loan.

13. Sale of partially depreciated equipment for cash at less than

its

Book value.

14. Flood damage to merchandise inventories (no insurance

coverage).

15. Declaration and payment of a cash dividend on preferred stock.

16. Sale of merchandise on 90-day credit terms.

17. Provision for uncollectible accounts receivable.

18. Write-off of an uncollectible receivable.

19. Provision for income tax expense (to be paid the following

month).

20. Provision for deferred income taxes (set up because

depreciation

for tax reporting exceeded depreciation for financial reporting).

21. Purchase of a machine (fixed asset) for cash.

22. Payment of accrued salary expense to employees.

following the acquisition of kraft during year 8 the philip morris companies release 536453

Following the acquisition of Kraft during Year 8, the Philip Morris Companies released its Year 8 financial statements. The Year 8 financial statements and other data are reproduced on the next page.

PHILIP MORRIS COMPANIES, INC.

Balance Sheets ($ millions)

December 31, Year 8 and Year 7

Year 8

Year 7

Assets

Cash and cash equivalents

$ 168

$ 90

Accounts receivable

2,222

2,065

Inventories

5,384

4,154

Current assets

7,774

6,309

Property, plant, and equipment, net

8,648

6,582

Goodwill, net

15,071

4,052

Investments.

3,260

3,665

Total assets

$34,753

$20,608

Liabilities and Stockholders” Equity

Short-term debt

$ 1,259

$ 1,440

Accounts payable

1,777

791

Accrued liabilities

3,848

2,277

Income taxes payable

1,089

727

Dividends payable

260

213

Current liabilities

8,233

5,448

Long-term debt

17,122

6,293

Deferred income taxes

1,719

2,044

Stockholders” equity

7,679

6,823

Total liabilities and stockholders” equity

$34,753

$20,608

PHILIP MORRIS COMPANIES, INC.

Income Statement ($ millions)

For Year Ending December 31, Year 8

Sales

$ 31,742

Cost of goods sold

(12,156)

Selling and administrative expenses

(14,410)

Depreciation expense

(654)

Goodwill amortization

(125)

Interest expense

(670)

Pretax income

3,727

Income tax expense

(1,390)

Net income

$ 2,337

PHILIP MORRIS PURCHASE OF KRAFT

Allocation of Purchase Price ($ millions)

Accounts receivable

$ 758

Inventories

1,232

Property, plant, and equipment

1,740

Goodwill

10,361

Short-term debt

(700)

Accounts payable

(578)

Accrued liabilities.

(530)

Long-term debt

(900)

Purchase price (net of cash acquired)

$11,383

Required:

a. Prepare a statement of cash flows (indirect method) for Philip Morris. (Hint: Acquisition of Kraft requires you to remove the assets acquired and liabilities incurred as a result of that acquisition from the balance sheet before computing changes used in preparing the statement of cash flows. Philip Morris pays $11.383 billion for Kraft, net of cash acquired—see the Allocation of Purchase Price table.)

b. Calculate cash flows from operations using the direct method for Philip Morris.

c. Based on your answer to a, compute Philip Morris”s free cash flow for Year 8. Discuss how free cash flow impacts the company”s future earnings and financial condition.

refer to the financial statements of zeta corporation reproduced in assignment case 536454

Refer to the financial statements of ZETA Corporation reproduced in assignment Case.

Required:

a. Prepare a schedule computing cash flows from operations using the direct method. Include revenues and expenses of discontinued operations. Include a list of important assumptions and weaknesses as a note to your cash statement. Support all amounts shown. (Hint: Discontinued operations cannot be separated from continuing operations, but unadjusted income and expense of discontinued operations can be.)

b. ZETA”s statement of cash flows reports income taxes paid in Year 6 of $2,600. Verify this amount independently.

c. Reconcile the change in “accounts payable and accruals” reported in the statement of cash flows with the number derived from the balance sheet. Explain the reason(s) for any difference. (Hint: Refer to notes 3 and 4.)

fit corporation s return on net operating assets rnoa is 10 and its tax rate is 40 536469

FIT Corporation”s return on net operating assets (RNOA) is 10% and its tax rate is 40%. Its net operating assets ($4 million) are financed entirely by common shareholders” equity. Management is considering its options to finance an expansion costing $2 million. It expects return on net operating assets to remain unchanged. There are two alternatives to finance the expansion:

1. Issue $1 million bonds with 12% coupon, and $1 million common stock.

2. Issue $2 million bonds with 12% coupon.

Required:

a. Determine net operating income after tax (NOPAT) and net income for each alternative.

b. Compute return on common shareholders” equity for each alternative (use ending equity).

c. Calculate the assets-to-equity ratio for each alternative.

d. Compute return on net operating assets and explain how the level of leverage interacts with it in helping determine which alternative management should pursue.

which of the following situations best correspond with a ratio of sales to average n 536475

1. Which of the following situations best correspond with a ratio of “sales to average net tangible assets” exceeding the industry norm? (Choose one answer.)

a. A company expanding plant and equipment during the past three years.

b. A company inefficiently using its assets.

c. A company with a large proportion of aged plant and equipment.

d. A company using straight-line depreciation.

2. A measure of asset utilization (turnover) is (choose one answer):

a. Sales divided by average long-term operating assets.

b. Return on net operating assets.

c. Return on common equity.

d. NOPAT divided by sales.

c. Return on common equity.

d. NOPAT divided by sales.

3. Return on net operating assets depends on the (choose one answer):

a. Interest rates and pretax profits.

c. After-tax operating profit margin and NOA turnover.

b. Debt to equity ratio.

d. Sales and total assets.

return on net operating assets is a function of both profit margin and net operating 536476

Return on net operating assets is a function of both profit margin and net operating asset turnover.

Required:

How do you believe that knowledge of operating profit margin and operating asset turnover would contribute to analysis of the reported return on net operating assets for the following companies (that is, if the business reported high return on net operating assets, is it more likely that operating profit margin is especially high or that operating asset turnover is especially high or both)? Make your assessments relative to industry norms.

a. BMW

d. Target

f. McDonald”s

b. Ford

e. Wal-Mart

g. Amazon.com

c. Sak”s Fifth Avenue

two auto dealers legend auto sales and reliable auto sales compete in the same area 536477

Two auto dealers, Legend Auto Sales and Reliable Auto Sales, compete in the same area. Both purchase autos for $10,000 each and sell them for $12,000 each. Both maintain 10 cars on the lot at all times. A local basketball legend owns Legend Auto Sales. As a result, Legend sells 100 cars each year, while Reliable sells only 50 cars each year. The dealerships have no other revenues or expenses.

Required:

The town banker has denied Reliable Auto Sales a loan because its return on net operating assets is inferior to its rival. The owner of Reliable Auto Sales has engaged you to help explain why its return on net operating assets is inferior to that of Legend Auto Sales. Please prepare a memorandum for Reliable Auto Sales explaining the problem. Present quantitative support for your conclusions.

a machine that produces hockey pucks costs 20 500 and produces 10 pucks per hour 536478

A machine that produces hockey pucks costs $20,500 and produces 10 pucks per hour. Two similar companies purchase the machine and begin producing and selling pucks. The first company, Northern Sales is located in International Falls, Minnesota. The second company, Southern Sales is located in Huntsville, Alabama. Northern Sales operates the machine 20 hours per day to meet customer demand. Southern sales operates the machine 10 hours per day to meet customer demand. Sales data for the first month of operations are:

Northern

Southern

Property, plant, and equipment

$20,500

$20,500

Accumulated depreciation—Property, plant, and equipment

$500

$500

Pucks sold

6,000 pucks

3,000 pucks

Sales

$12,000

$6,000

Required:

Calculate the property, plant, and equipment turnover ratio (sales divided by average PPE) for both Northern Sales and Southern Sales. Explain how this ratio impacts the return on net operating assets of each company (assume the profit margin for each company is the same and that there has been no change in PPE).

financial objectives provide total shareholder returns dividends plus share price ap 536480

Quaker Oats, in its annual report discloses the following:

Financial Objectives: Provide total shareholder returns (dividends plus share price appreciation) that exceed both the cost of equity and the S&P 500 stock index over time. Quaker”s total return to shareholders for Year 11 was 34%. That compares quite favorably to our cost of equity for the year, which was about 12%, and to the total return of the S&P 500 stock index, which was 7%. Driving this strong performance, real earnings from continuing operations grew 7.4% over the last five years, return on equity rose to 24.1%. [Quaker Oats” stock price at the beginning and end of Year 11 was $48 and $62, respectively, and the Year 11 dividends are $1.56 per share.] The Benchmark for Investment We use our cost of capital as a benchmark, or hurdle rate, to ensure that all projects undertaken promise a suitable rate of return. The cost of capital is used as the discount rate in determining whether a project will provide an economic return on its investment. We estimate a project”s potential cash flows and discount these cash flows back to present value. This amount is compared with the initial investment costs to determine whether incremental value is created. Our cost of capital is calculated using the approximate market value weightings of debt and equity used to finance the Company. Cost of equity


Cost of debt


Cost of capital When Quaker is consistently able to generate and reinvest cash flows in projects whose returns exceed our cost of capital, economic value is created. As the stock market evaluates the Company”s ability to generate value, this value is reflected in stock price appreciation. The cost of equity. The cost of equity is a measure of the minimum return Quaker must earn to properly compensate investors for the risk of ownership of our stock. This cost is a combination of a “risk-free” rate and an “equity risk premium.” The risk-free rate (the U.S. Treasury Bond rate) is the sum of the expected rate of inflation and a “real” return of 2 to 3%. For Year 11, the risk-free rate was approximately 8.4%. Investors in Quaker stock expect the return of a risk-free security plus a “risk premium” of about 3.6% to compensate them for assuming the risks in Quaker stock. The risk in holding Quaker stock is inherent in the fact that returns depend on the future profitability of the Company. Quaker”s cost of equity was approximately 12%. The cost of debt. The cost of debt is simply our after-tax, long-term debt rate, which was around 6.4%.

Required:

a. Quaker reports the “return to shareholders” to be 34%.

(1) How is this return computed (provide calculations)?

(2) How is this return different from return on common equity?

b. Explain how Quaker Oats arrives at a 3.6% “risk premium” needed by common shareholders as compensation for assuming the risks of Quaker Oats” stock.

c. Explain how Quaker Oats determines the 6.4% cost of debt.

zear company produces an electronic processor and sells it wholesale to manufacturin 536481

Zear Company produces an electronic processor and sells it wholesale to manufacturing and retail outlets at $10 each. In Zear”s Year 8 fiscal period, it sold 500,000 processors. Fixed costs for Year 8 total $1,500,000, including interest costs on its 7.5% debentures. Variable costs are $4 per processor for materials. Zear employs about 20 hourly paid plant employees, each earning $35,000 in Year 8. Zear is currently confronting labor negotiations. The plant employees are requesting substantial increases in hourly wages. Zear forecasts a 6% increase in fixed costs and no change in either the processor”s price or in material costs for the processors. Zear also forecasts a 10% growth in sales volume for Year 9. To meet the necessary increase in production due to sales demand, Zear recently hired two additional hourly plant employees. The condensed balance sheet for Zear at the end of fiscal Year 8 follows (the tax rate is 50%):

Assets

Liabilities and equity

Current assets

Current liabilities

$2,000,000

Cash

$ 700,000

Long-term 71/2% debenture

2,000,000

Receivables

1,000,000

6% preferred stock, 10,000

Other

800,000

shares, $100 par value

1,000,000

Total current assets

2,500,000

Common stock

1,800,000

Fixed assets (net)

5,500,000

Retained earnings

1,200,000

Total assets

$8,000,000

Total liabilities and equity

$8,000,000

Required:

a. Compute Zear”s return on invested capital for Year 8 where invested capital is:

(1) Net operating assets at end of Year 8 (assume all assets and current liabilities are operating).

(2) Common equity capital at end of Year 8.

b. Calculate the maximum annual wage increase Zear can pay each plant employee and show a 10% return on net

operating assets.

disaggregate merck s roce into operating rnoa and non operating components 536483

Balance Sheet Data

Current assets

$4,850

Fixed assets, net

2,400

Total assets

7,250

Current liabilities

3,290

Long-term debt

100

Shareholders” equity

3,860

Total liabilities & shareholders” equity

7,250

Required:

a. Calculate return on common equity for Year 9 using year-end amounts and assuming no preferred dividends.

b. Disaggregate Merck”s ROCE into operating (RNOA) and non-operating components. Comment on Merck”s use of leverage. (Assume all assets and current liabilities are operating and a 35% tax rate.)

selected financial statement data from texas telecom inc for years 5 and 9 are repro 536485

Selected financial statement data from Texas Telecom, Inc., for Years 5 and 9 are reproduced

below ($ millions):

Year 5

Year 9

Income Statement Data

Revenues

$542

$979

Operating income

35

68

Interest expense

7

0

Pretax income

28

68

Income taxes

14

34

Net income

Balance Sheet Data

Long-term operating assets

$ 52

$ 63

Working capital

123

157

Total liabilities

50

0

Total shareholders” equity

125

220

Required:

a. Calculate return on common equity and disaggregate ROCE for Years 5 and 9 using end-of-year values for computations requiring an average (assume fixed assets and working capital are operating and a 50% tax rate).

b. Comment on Texas Telecom”s use of financial leverage.

johnson corporation sells primarily two products 536486

Johnson Corporation sells primarily two products: (A) consumer cleaners and (B) industrial purifiers.

Its gross margin and components for the past two years are:

Year 7

Year 6

Sales revenue

Product A

$60,000

$35,000

Product B

30,000

45,000

Total

90,000

80,000

Deduct cost of goods sold

Product A

50,000

28,000

Product B

19,500

27,000

Total

69,500

55,000

Gross margin

$20,500

$25,000

In Year 6, the selling price of A is $5 per unit, while in Year 7 it is $6 per unit. Product B sells for $50 per unit in both years. Security analysts and the business press expressed surprise at Johnson”s 12.5% increase in sales and $4,500 decrease in gross margin for Year 7.

Required:

Prepare an analysis statement of the change in gross margin for Year 7 versus Year 6. Discuss and show the effects of changes in quantities, prices, costs, and product mix on gross margin.

comparative income statements of spyres manufacturing company for years 9 and 8 are 536487

Comparative income statements of Spyres Manufacturing Company for Years 9 and 8 are reproduced

below:

Year 9

Year 8

Net sale

$600,000

$500,000

Cost of goods sold

490,000

430,000

Gross margin

110,000

70,000

Operating expenses

101,000

51,000

Income before taxes

9,000

19,000

Income taxes

2,400

5,000

Net income

$ 6,600

$ 14,000

Required:

a. Prepare common size statements showing the percent of each item to net sales for both Year 8 and Year 9.

Include a column reporting the percentage increase or decrease for Year 9 relative to Year 8 (round numbers to

the tenth of 1%).

b. Interpret the trend shown in your percentage calculations of a. What areas identified from this analysis should

be a matter of managerial concern?

nordstrom inc operates department stores in numerous states 535507

Nordstrom, Inc. operates department stores in numerous states. Selected financial statement data (in millions) for 2009 are presented below.

End of Year

Beginning of Year

Cash and cash equivalents

$ 795

$ 72

Receivables (net)

2,035

1,942

Merchandise inventory

898

900

Other current assets

326

303

Total current assets

$4,054

$3,217

Total current liabilities

$2,014

$1,601

For the year, net credit sales were $8,258 million, cost of goods sold was $5,328 million, and cash from operations was $1,251 million.

Instructions

Compute the current ratio, current cash debt coverage ratio, receivables turnover ratio, average collection period, inventory turnover ratio, and days in inventory at the end of the current year.

hendi company has these comparative balance sheet data 535509

Hendi Company has these comparative balance sheet data:

HENDI COMPANY
Balance Sheets
December 31

2012

2011

Cash

$ 15,000

$ 30,000

Receivables (net)

70,000

60,000

Inventories

60,000

50,000

Plant assets (net)

200,000

180,000

$345,000

$320,000

Accounts payable

$ 50,000

$ 60,000

Mortgage payable (15%)

100,000

100,000

Common stock, $10 par

140,000

120,000

Retained earnings

55,000

40,000

$345,000

$320,000

Additional information for 2012:

1. Net income was $25,000.

2. Sales on account were $375,000. Sales returns and allowances amounted to $25,000.

3. Cost of goods sold was $198,000.

4. Net cash provided by operating activities was $48,000.

5. Capital expenditures were $25,000, and cash dividends were $10,000.

Instructions

Compute the following ratios at December 31, 2012.

(a) Current. (e) Days in inventory.

(b) Receivables turnover. (f ) Cash debt coverage.

(c) Average collection period. (g) Current cash debt coverage.

(d) Inventory turnover. (h) Free cash flow.

selected comparative statement data for the giant bookseller barnes noble are presen 535510

Selected comparative statement data for the giant bookseller Barnes & Noble are presented here. All balance sheet data are as of the end of the fiscal year (in millions).

2008

2007

Net sales

$5,121.8

$5,286.7

Cost of goods sold

3,540.6

3,679.8

Net income

75.9

135.8

Accounts receivable

81.0

107.1

Inventory

1,203.5

1,358.2

Total assets

2,993.9

3,249.8

Total common stockholders” equity

921.6

1,074.7

Instructions

Compute the following ratios for 2008.

(a) Profit margin.

(b) Asset turnover.

(c) Return on assets.

(d) Return on common stockholders” equity.

(e) Gross profit rate.

here is the income statement for bachus inc 535511

Here is the income statement for Bachus, Inc.

BACHUS, INC.
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2012

Sales

$400,000

Cost of goods sold

230,000

Gross profit

170,000

Expenses (including $16,000 interest and $24,000 income taxes)

98,000

Net income

$ 72,000

Additional information:

1. Common stock outstanding January 1, 2012, was 32,000 shares, and 40,000 shares were outstanding at December 31, 2012.

2. The market price of Bachus, Inc., stock was $14 in 2012.

3. Cash dividends of $21,000 were paid, $5,000 of which were to preferred stockholders.

Instructions

Compute the following measures for 2012.

(a) Earnings per share. (c) Payout ratio.

(b) Price-earnings ratio. (d) Times interest earned ratio.

here are comparative statement data for silver company and gold company 535513

Here are comparative statement data for Silver Company and Gold Company, two competitors. All balance sheet data are as of December 31, 2012, and December 31, 2011.

Silver Company

Gold Company

2012

2011

2012

2011

Net sales

$1,849,000

$546,000

Cost of goods sold

1,063,200

289,000

Operating expenses

240,000

82,000

Interest expense

6,800

3,600

Income tax expense

62,000

28,000

Current assets

325,975

$312,410

83,336

$ 79,467

Plant assets (net)

526,800

500,000

139,728

125,812

Current liabilities

66,325

75,815

35,348

30,281

Long-term liabilities

113,990

90,000

29,620

25,000

Common stock, $10 par

500,000

500,000

120,000

120,000

Retained earnings

172,460

146,595

38,096

29,998

Instructions

(a) Prepare a vertical analysis of the 2012 income statement data for Silver Company and Gold Company.

(b) Comment on the relative profitability of the companies by computing the 2012 return on assets and the return on common stockholders’ equity ratios for both companies

the comparative statements of lucille company are presented here 535514

The comparative statements of Lucille Company are presented here.

LUCILLE COMPANY
Income Statements
the Years Ended December 31

2012

2011

Net sales

$1,890,540

$1,750,500

Cost of goods sold

1,058,540

1,006,000

Gross profit

832,000

744,500

Selling and administrative expenses

500,000

479,000

Income from operations

332,000

265,500

Other expenses and losses

Interest expense

22,000

20,000

Income before income taxes

310,000

245,500

Income tax expense

92,000

73,000

Net income

$ 218,000

$ 172,500

LUCILLE COMPANY
Balance Sheets
December 31

Assets

2012

2011

Current assets

Cash

$ 60,100

$ 64,200

Short-term investments

74,000

50,000

Accounts receivable

117,800

102,800

Inventory

126,000

115,500

Total current assets

377,900

332,500

Plant assets (net)

649,000

520,300

Total assets

$1,026,900

$852,800

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Current liabilities

Accounts payable

$ 160,000

$145,400

Income taxes payable

43,500

42,000

Total current liabilities

203,500

187,400

Bonds payable

220,000

200,000

Total liabilities

423,500

387,400

Stockholders’ equity

Common stock ($5 par)

290,000

300,000

Retained earnings

313,400

165,400

Total stockholders’ equity

603,400

465,400

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

1,026,900

$852,800

All sales were on account. Net cash provided by operating activities for 2012 was $220,000. Capital expenditures were $136,000, and cash dividends were $70,000.

Instructions

Compute the following ratios for 2012.

(a) Earnings per share. (h) Days in inventory.

(b) Return on common stockholders’ equity. (i) Times interest earned.

(c) Return on assets. (j) Asset turnover.

(d) Current ratio. (k) Debt to total assets.

(e) Receivables turnover. (l) Current cash debt coverage.

(f ) Average collection period. (m) Cash debt coverage.

(g) Inventory turnover. (n) Free cash flow.

your parents are considering investing in tootsie roll industries common stock 535515

Your parents are considering investing in Tootsie Roll Industries common stock. They ask you, as an accounting expert, to make an analysis of the company for them. Fortunately, excerpts from a recent annual report of Tootsie Roll are presented in Appendix A of this textbook.

Instructions

(a) Make a 5-year trend analysis, using 2005 as the base year, of (1) net sales and (2) net earnings. Comment on the significance of the trend results.

(b) Compute for 2009 and 2008 the (1) debt to total assets ratio and (2) times interest earned ratio. (See Note 6 for interest expense.) How would you evaluate Tootsie Roll”s long-term solvency?

(c) Compute for 2009 and 2008 the (1) profit margin ratio, (2) asset turnover ratio, (3) return on assets ratio, and (4) return on common stockholders” equity ratio. How would you evaluate Tootsie Roll”s profitability? Total assets at December 31, 2007, were $812,725,000, and total stockholders” equity at December 31, 2007, was $638,230,000.

(d) What information outside the annual report may also be useful to your parents in making a decision about Tootsie Roll?

the april 21 2008 issue of the wall street journal online included an article by dav 535516

The April 21, 2008, issue of the Wall Street Journal Onlineincluded an article by David Reilly entitled “A Way Charges Stay off Bottom Line.”

Instructions

Read the article and answer the following questions.

(a) According to the article, how do companies avoid reporting losses on certain types of investment securities in net income?

(b) At what point would these losses be reported in net income?

(c) At the time of the article, what was the total estimated amount of unrealized losses that companies in the Standard and Poor”s 500 Stock Index were reporting in equity?

(d) Does the article suggest that these companies are violating accounting standards?

(e) What are the implications of this accounting practice for investors?

you are a loan officer for great plains bank of davenport david miller 535517

You are a loan officer for Great Plains Bank of Davenport. David Miller, president of D. Miller Corporation, has just left your office. He is interested in an 8-year loan to expand the company”s operations. The borrowed funds would be used to purchase new equipment. As evidence of the company”s debt-worthiness, Miller provided you with the following facts.

2012

2011

Current ratio

3.1

2.1

Asset turnover ratio

2.8

2.2

Cash debt coverage ratio

.1

.2

Net income

Up 32%

Down 8%

Earnings per share

$3.30

$2.50

ellen toth president of rf industries wishes to issue a press release 535518

Ellen Toth, president of RF Industries, wishes to issue a press release to bolster her company”s image and maybe even its stock price, which has been gradually falling. As controller, you have been asked to provide a list of 20 financial ratios and other operating statistics for RF Industries” first-quarter financials and operations. Two days after you provide the data requested, Marian Lyons, the public relations director of RF, asks you to prove the accuracy of the financial and operating data contained in the press release written by the president and edited by Marian. In the news release, the president highlights the sales increase of 25% over last year”s first quarter and the positive change in the current ratio from 1.5:1 last year to 3:1 this year. She also emphasizes that production was up 50% over the prior year”s first quarter. You note that the release contains only positive or improved ratios and none of the negative or deteriorated ratios. For instance, no mention is made that the debt to total assets ratio has increased from 35% to 55%, that inventories are up 89%, and that although the current ratio improved, the current cash debt coverage ratio fell from .15 to .05. Nor is there any mention that the reported profit for the quarter would have been a loss had not the estimated lives of RF plant and machinery been increased by 30%. Marian emphasized, “The Pres wants this release by early

this afternoon.”

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) Is there anything unethical in the president”s actions?

(c) Should you as controller remain silent? Does Marian have any responsibility?

parmalane reports the following information 535522

Parmalane reports the following information:

Sales

$500,000

Cost of goods sold

200,000

Operating expense

40,000

Unrealized loss on available-for-sale securities

10,000

Parmalane should report the following under the two-statement approach using IFRS:

(a) net income of $260,000 and comprehensive income of $270,000.

(b) net income of $270,000 and comprehensive income of $260,000.

(c) other comprehensive income of $10,000 and comprehensive income of $270,000.

(d) other comprehensive loss of $10,000 and comprehensive income of 250,000.

assume the same information for chen company as in ifrs13 1 prepare the income state 535525

The financial statements of Zetar plc are presented in Appendix C. The company”s complete annual report, including the notes to its financial statements, is available at www.zetarplc.com.

Instructions

Use the company”s annual report to answer the following questions.

(a) The company”s income statement reports a loss on discontinued operations. What business did the company discontinue, and why did it choose to discontinue the business?

(b) For the year ended April 30, 2009, what amount did the company lose on the operation of the discontinued business, and what amount did it lose on disposal?

(c) What was the total recorded value of the net assets at the date of disposal, and what was the amount of costs incurred to dispose of the business?

the following data are taken from the records of saro corporation and subsidiaries f 536434

The following data are taken from the records of Saro Corporation and subsidiaries for Year 1:

Net income

$10,000

Depreciation, depletion, and amortization

8,000

Disposals of property, plant, and equipment (book value) for cash

1,000

Deferred income taxes for Year 1 (noncurrent)

400

Undistributed earnings of unconsolidated affiliates

200

Amortization of discount on bonds payable

50

Amortization of premium on bonds payable

60

Decrease in noncurrent assets

1,500

Cash proceeds from exercise of stock options

300

Increase in accounts receivable

900

Increase in accounts payable

1,200

Decrease in inventories

850

Increase in dividends payable

300

Decrease in notes payable to banks

400

Required:

a. Determine the amount of cash flows from operations for Year 1 (use the indirect format).

b. For the following items, explain their meaning and implications, if any, in adjusting net income to arrive at cash flows from operations.

(1) Issuance of treasury stock as employee compensation.

(2) Capitalization of interest incurred.

(3) Amount charged to pension expense differing from the amount funded.

the balance sheets of barrier corporation as of december 31 year 2 and year 1 and it 536435

The balance sheets of Barrier Corporation as of December 31, Year 2, and Year 1, and its statement of income and retained earnings for the year ended December 31, Year 2, follow

BARRIER CORPORATION

Balance Sheets

December 31, Year 2 and Year 1

Year 2

Year 1

Increase (decrease)

Assets

Cash

$ 275,000

$ 180,000

$ 95,000

Accounts receivable

295,000

305,000

(10,000)

Inventories

549,000

431,000

118,000

Investment in Ort Inc., at equity

73,000

60,000

13,000

Land

350,000

200,000

150,000

Plant and equipment

624,000

606,000

18,000

Accumulated depreciation

(139,000)

(107,000)

(32,000)

Goodwill

16,000

20,000

(4,000)

Total assets

$2,043000

$1,695,000

$348,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable

$ 604,000

$ 563,000

41000

Accrued expenses

150,000

150000

Bonds payable

160,000

210,000

(50000)

Deferred income taxes

41,000

30,000

11000

Common stock, par $10

430,000

400,000

30000

Additional paid-in capital

226,000

175,000

51000

Retained earnings

432,000

334,000

98000

Treasury stock, at cost

(17,000)

17000

Total liabilities and equity

$2,043,000

$1,695,000

$348000

BARRIER CORPORATION

Statement of Income and Retained Earnings

For Year Ended December 31, Year 2

Net sales

$1,937,000

Undistributed income from Ort Inc.

13,000

Total net revenue

1,950,000

Cost of sales

(1,150,000)

Gross income

800,000

Depreciation expense

$32,000

Amortization of goodwill

4,000

Other expenses (including income taxes

623,000

(659,000)

Net income

$ 141,000

Retained earnings, January 1, Year 2

334,000

475,000

Cash dividends paid

(43,000)

Retained earnings, December 31, Year 2

$ 432,000

Additional information:

• Capital stock is issued to provide additional cash.

• All accounts receivable and payable relate to operations.

• Accounts payable relate only to items included in cost of sales.

• There are no noncash transactions.

Required:

Determine the following amounts:

a. Cash collected from sales during Year 2.

b. Cash payments on accounts payable during Year 2.

c. Cash receipts during Year 2 not provided by operations.

d. Cash payments for noncurrent assets purchased during Year 2.

indicate if each transaction and event is 1 a source of cash 2 a use of cash and or 536436

Indicate if each transaction and event is (1) a source of cash, (2) a use of cash, and/or (3) an adjustment leading to a source or use of cash (assume an indirect format). List also its placement in the statement of cash flows: operations (O), financing (F), investing (I), noncash significant (NCS), noncash non-significant (NCN), or no effect (NE).

Example

Transaction or Event

Source

Use

Adjustment

Category in Statement of Cash Flows

Cash dividend received

X

0

a. Increase in accounts receivable.

b. Pay bank note.

c. Issue common stock.

d. Sell marketable securities.

e. Retire bonds.

f. Declare stock dividend.

g. Purchase equipment.

h. Convert bonds to preferred stock.

i. Pay dividend.

j. Increase in accounts payable.

indicate if each transaction and event is 1 a source of cash 2 a use of cash and or 536437

Indicate if each transaction and event is (1) a source of cash, (2) a use of cash, and/or (3) an adjustment leading to a source or use of cash (assume an indirect format). List also its placement in the statement of cash flows: operations (O), financing (F), investing (I), noncash significant (NCS), noncash non-significant (NCN), or no effect (NE).

Example

Transaction or Event

Source

Use

Adjustment

Category in Statement of Cash Flows

Issue bonds for cash

X

F

a. Decrease in inventory.

b. Paid current portion of long-term debt.

c. Retire treasury stock.

d. Purchase marketable securities (noncurrent).

e. Issue bonds for property.

f. Declare stock dividend.

g. Sell equipment for cash.

h. Convert bonds to preferred stock.

i. Purchase inventory on credit.

j. Decrease in accounts payable from return of merchandise.

during a meeting of the management committee of edsel corporation a number of propos 536438

During a meeting of the management committee of Edsel Corporation, a number of proposals are made to alleviate its weak cash position and improve income. Evaluate and comment on both the immediate and long-term effects of the following proposals on the measures indicated. Indicate increase ([1]), decrease (), or no effect (NE).

EFFECT ON

Proposal

Net Income

Cash from Operations

Cash Position

1. Substitute stock dividends for cash dividends.

2. Delay needed capital expenditures.

3. Reduce repair and maintenance outlays.

4. Increase the provision for depreciation:

a. For GAAP books only.

b. For tax only.

c. For both GAAP books and tax.

5. Require earlier payment from clients.

6. Delay payment to suppliers and pass up cash discounts.

7. Borrow money short term.

8. Switch from sum-of-the-years”-digits to straight-line depreciation for books only.

9. Pressure dealers to buy more.

10. Reduce funding of pension plan to the minimum legal

level.

11. Reduce inventories by implementing a just-in-time

inventory system.

12. Sell trading securities that have declined by $1,000

in the current period but are still valued at $3,000 above

cost.

13. Reissue treasury shares.

refer to the financial statements of campbel soup company required 536440

Refer to the financial statements of Campbel Soup Company Required:

a. How much cash does Campbell Soup collect from customers during Year 10? (Hint: Use the statement of cash flows to derive the beginning balance of receivables.)

b. How much is paid in cash dividends on common stock during Year 11?

c. How much is the total cost of goods and services produced and otherwise generated in Year 11? Consider all inventories.

d. How much is the deferred tax provision for Year 11? What effect did it have on current liabilities?

e. What effect does Year 11 depreciation expense have on cash from operations?

f. Why are the “Divestitures & restructuring” provisions in the statement of cash flows for Year 10 added back to net income in arriving at cash from operations?

g. What does the adjustment “Effect of exchange rate changes on cash” represent?

h. Note 1 to the financial statements discusses the accounting for disposal of property. Where is the adjustment for any gain or loss reported in the statement of cash flows?

i. Compute free cash flows for all years shown.

j. Campbell is an established manufacturer. How would you expect the free cash flows of a start-up competitor in this industry to differ from Campbell?

k. If Campbell launched a new product line in Year 12, how would you expect the three sections of the statement of cash flows to be affected?

convert campbell s statement of cash flows for year 11 to show cash flows from opera 536443

Refer to Campbell Soup Company”s statement of cash flows Required:

Convert Campbell”s statement of cash flows for Year 11 to show cash flows from operations

(CFO) using the direct method. For purposes of this problem only, assume the following:

a. Net change in other current assets and current liabilities of $30.6 consists of:

Decrease in prepaid expenses

$(25.3)

Decrease in accounts payable

42.8

Increase in taxes payable

(21.3)

Increase in accruals and payrolls

(26.8)

$(30.6)

b. Campbell disposed of a division in Year 11 reporting revenues of $7.5 million and an after-tax loss of $5.3 million. The loss is included in expenses. The CFO presentation should include revenues and expenses of the discontinued operations in Year 11.

a colleague who is aware of your understanding of financial statements asks for help 536445

A colleague who is aware of your understanding of financial statements asks for help in analyzing the transactions and events of Zett Corporation. The following data are provided:

ZETT CORPORATION

Balance Sheets

December 31, Year 1 and Year 2

Year 1

Year 2

Cash

$ 34,000

$ 34,500

Accounts receivable, net

12,000

17,000

Inventory

16,000

14,000

Investments (long term)

6,000

Fixed assets

80,000

93,000

Accumulated depreciation

(48,000)

(39,000)

Total assets

$100,000

$119,500

the financial statements of tootsie roll industries are presented in appendix a 535423

The financial statements of Tootsie Roll Industries are presented in Appendix A.

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) What was the amount of net cash provided by operating activities for 2009? For 2008?

(b) What was the amount of increase or decrease in cash and cash equivalents for the year ended December 31, 2009?

(c) Which method of computing net cash provided by operating activities does Tootsie Roll use?

(d) From your analysis of the 2009 statement of cash flows, was the change in accounts receivable a decrease or an increase? Was the change in inventories a decrease or an increase? Was the change in accounts payable a decrease or an increase?

(e) What was the net cash used by investing activities for 2009?

(f) What was the amount of interest paid in 2009? What was the amount of income taxes paid in 2009?

the march 4 2010 edition of the wall street journal online contains an article 535425

The March 4, 2010, edition of the Wall Street Journal Onlinecontains an article by Jeffrey McCracken and Tom McGinty entitled “With Fistfuls of Cash, Firms on Hunt.”

Instructions

Read the article and answer the following questions.

(a) How much cash did the nonfinancial (that is, nonbank-like) firms in the Standard and Poor”s 500 have at the end of 2009? How big an increase in cash did this represent over the prior year?

(b) What reasons are given in the article for why companies might not want to keep hoarding cash?

(c) What steps did Alcoa take to try to increase the company”s cash? Were these efforts successful?

(d) Often, companies issue shares of stock to acquire other companies. This represents a significant noncash transaction. At the time the article was written, why were many companies using cash rather than stock to acquire other companies? (e) In addition to acquisitions, what other steps can companies take to reduce their cash balances?

the incredible growth of amazon com has put fear into the hearts of traditional reta 535426

The incredible growth of Amazon.com has put fear into the hearts of traditional retailers. Its stock price has soared to amazing levels. However, in 2001 many investors were very concerned about whether Amazon would survive since it had never earned a profit, and it was burning through cash. Some investors sold, but others decided to hold on to their investment in the company”s stock. The following information is taken from the 2001 and 2004 financial statements of Amazon.com.

($ in millions)

2001

2004

Current assets

$1,207.9

$2,539.4

Total assets

1,637.5

3,248.5

Current liabilities

921.4

1,620.4

Total liabilities

3,077.5

5,096.1

Cash provided by operations

(119.8)

566.6

Capital expenditures

50.3

89.1

Dividends paid

0

0

Net income (loss)

(567.3)

588.5

Average current liabilities

948.2

1,436.6

Average total liabilities

3,090.0

4,773.4

Instructions

(a) Calculate the current ratio and current cash debt coverage ratio for Amazon.com for 2001 and 2004, and discuss its comparative liquidity.

(b) Calculate the cash debt coverage ratio and the debt to total assets ratio for Amazon.com for 2001 and 2004, and discuss its comparative solvency.

(c) Amazon.com has avoided purchasing large warehouses. Instead, it has used those of others. In order to increase customer satisfaction Amazon may have to build its own warehouses. Calculate free cash flow for Amazon.com for 2001 and 2004, and discuss its ability to purchase warehouses and to finance expansion from internally generated cash. (d) Based on your findings in parts (a) through (c), can you conclude whether or not Amazon.com”s amazing stock price is justified?

bob soakup and clare karr are examining the following statement of cash flows for ba 535427

Bob Soakup and Clare Karr are examining the following statement of cash flows for Baldwin Company for the year ended January 31, 2012.

BALDWIN COMPANY
Statement of Cash Flows
For the Year Ended January 31, 2012

Sources of cash

From sales of merchandise

$385,000

From sale of capital stock

405,000

From sale of investment (purchased below)

80,000

From depreciation

55,000

From issuance of note for truck

20,000

From interest on investments

6,000

Total sources of cash

951,000

Uses of cash

For purchase of fixtures and equipment

320,000

For merchandise purchased for resale

258,000

For operating expenses (including depreciation)

170,000

For purchase of investment

75,000

For purchase of truck by issuance of note

20,000

For purchase of treasury stock

10,000

For interest on note payable

3,000

Total uses of cash

856,000

Net increase in cash

$ 95,000

Bob claims that Baldwin”s statement of cash flows is an excellent portrayal of a superb first year with cash increasing $95,000. Clare replies that it was not a superb first year. Rather, she says, the year was an operating failure, that the statement is presented incorrectly, and that $95,000 is not the actual increase in cash. The cash balance at the beginning of the year was $140,000.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Using the data provided, prepare a statement of cash flows in proper form using the indirect method. The only noncash items in the income statement are depreciation and the gain from the sale of the investment.

(b) With whom do you agree, Bob or Clare? Explain your position.

riverside automotive corp is a medium sized wholesaler of automotive parts 535429

Riverside Automotive Corp. is a medium-sized wholesaler of automotive parts. It has 10 stockholders who have been paid a total of $1 million in cash dividends for 8 consecutive years. The board”s policy requires that, for this dividend to be declared, net cash provided by operating activities as reported in Riverside Automotive”s current year”s statement of cash flows must exceed $1 million. President and CEO Carl Stewart”s job is secure so long as he produces annual operating cash flows to support the usual dividend. At the end of the current year, controller Mark Heger presents president Carl Stewart with some disappointing news: The net cash provided by operating activities is calculated by the indirect method to be only $970,000. The president says to Mark, “We must get that amount above $1 million. Isn”t there some way to increase operating cash flow by another $30,000?” Mark answers, “These figures were prepared by my assistant. I”ll go back to my office and see what I can do.” The president replies, “I know you won”t let me down, Mark.” Upon close scrutiny of the statement of cash flows, Mark concludes that he can get the operating cash flows above $1 million by reclassifying a $60,000, 2-year note payable listed in the financing activities section as “Proceeds from bank loan—$60,000.” He will report the note instead as “Increase in payables—$60,000” and treat it as an adjustment of net income in the operating activities section. He returns to the president, saying, “You can tell the board to declare their usual dividend. Our net cash flow provided by operating activities is $1,030,000.” “Good man, Mark! I knew I could count on you,” exults the president.

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) Was there anything unethical about the president”s actions? Was there anything unethical about the controller”s actions?

(c) Are the board members or anyone else likely to discover the misclassification?

in this chapter you learned that companies prepare a statement of cash flows in orde 535430

In this chapter, you learned that companies prepare a statement of cash flows in order to keep track of their sources and uses of cash and to help them plan for their future cash needs. Planning for your own short- and long-term cash needs is every bit as important as it is for a company.

Instructions

Read the article “Financial ‘Uh-oh”? No Problem,” at www.fool.com/savings/shortterm/02.htm, and answer the following questions.

(a) Describe the three factors that determine how much money you should set aside for shortterm needs.

(b) How many months of living expenses does the article suggest to set aside?

(c) Estimate how much you should set aside based upon your current situation. Are you closer to Cliff”s scenario or to Prudence”s?

the financial statements of zetar plc are presented in appendix c 535440

The financial statements of Zetar plc are presented in Appendix C. The company”s complete annual report, including the notes to its financial statements, is available at www.zetarplc.com.

Instructions

Use the company”s annual report to answer the following questions.

(a) In which section (operating, investing, or financing) does Zetar report interest paid?

(b) Explain why the amount that Zetar reports for cash and cash equivalents in its statement of cash flows is negative.

(c) If Zetar reported under GAAP rather than IFRS, how would its treatment of bank overdrafts differ?

(d) Zetar”s statement of cash flows reports negative “net movement in working capital” in 2009 of £2,469 (in thousands). According to the statement of cash flows, what were the components of this “net movement”?

plano corporation reported net income 24 000 net sales 400 000 535451

Plano Corporation reported net income $24,000; net sales $400,000; and average assets $600,000 for 2012. What is the 2012 profit margin ratio?

(a) 6%.

(b) 12%.

(c) 40%.

(d) 200%.

Use the following financial statement information as of the end of each year to answer Self-Test Questions 12–16.

2012

2011

Inventory

$ 54,000

$ 48,000

Current assets

81,000

106,000

Total assets

382,000

326,000

Current liabilities

27,000

36,000

Total liabilities

102,000

88,000

Common stockholders” equity

240,000

198,000

Net sales

784,000

697,000

Cost of goods sold

306,000

277,000

Net income

134,000

90,000

Tax expense

22,000

18,000

Interest expense

12,000

12,000

Dividends paid to

preferred stockholders

4,000

4000

Dividends paid to common

10000

stockholders

15,000

vertical analysis common size percentages for vallejo company s sales cost of goods 535488

Vertical analysis (common-size) percentages for Vallejo Company”s sales, cost of goods sold, and expenses are listed here.

Vertical Analysis

2012

2011

2010

Sales

100.0%

100.0%

100.0%

Cost of goods sold

60.5

62.9

64.8

Expenses

26.0

26.6

27.5

Did Vallejo”s net income as a percent of sales increase, decrease, or remain unchanged over the 3-year period? Provide numerical support for your answer.

horizontal analysis trend analysis percentages for spartan company s sales cost of g 535489

Horizontal analysis (trend analysis) percentages for Spartan Company”s sales, cost of goods sold, and expenses are listed here.

Horizontal Analysis

2012

2011

2010

Sales

96.2%

104.8%

100.0%

Cost of goods sold

101.0

98.0

100.0

Expenses

105.6

95.4

100.0

Explain whether Spartan”s net income increased, decreased, or remained unchanged over the 3-year period.

these selected condensed data are taken from recent balance sheets of bob evans farm 535490

These selected condensed data are taken from recent balance sheets of Bob Evans Farms (in thousands).

2009

2008

Cash

$ 13,606

$ 7,669

Accounts receivable

23,045

19,951

Inventories

31,087

31,345

Other current assets

12,522

11,909

Total current assets

$ 80,260

$ 70,874

Total current liabilities

$245,805

$326,203

Compute the current ratio for each year and comment on your results.

the following data are taken from the financial statements of caprice company 535491

The following data are taken from the financial statements of Caprice Company.

2012

2011

Accounts receivable (net), end of year

$ 550,000

$ 540,000

Net sales on account

4,300,000

4,000,000

Terms for all sales are 1/10, n/45.

Compute for each year (a) the receivables turnover ratio and (b) the average collection period. What conclusions about the management of accounts receivable can be drawn from these data? At the end of 2010, accounts receivable was $520,000.

the following data were taken from the income statements of merlot company 535492

The following data were taken from the income statements of Merlot Company.

2012

2011

Sales revenue

$6,420,000

$6,240,000

Beginning inventory

960,000

840,000

Purchases

4,840,000

4,661,000

Ending inventory

1,020,000

960,000

Compute for each year (a) the inventory turnover ratio and (b) days in inventory. What conclusions concerning the management of the inventory can be drawn from these data?

selected data taken from a recent year s financial statements of trading card compan 535495

Selected data taken from a recent year”s financial statements of trading card company Topps Company, Inc. are as follows (in millions).

Net sales

$326.7

Current liabilities, beginning of year

41.1

Current liabilities, end of year

62.4

Net cash provided by operating activities

10.4

Total liabilities, beginning of year

65.2

Total liabilities, end of year

73.2

Capital expenditures

3.7

Cash dividends

6.2

Compute these ratios: (a) current cash debt coverage ratio, (b) cash debt coverage ratio, and (c) free cash flow. Provide a brief interpretation of your results.

match each of the following terms with the phrase that best describes it 535499

Match each of the following terms with the phrase that best describes it.

Quality of earnings

Pro forma income

Current ratio

Discontinued operations

Horizontal analysis

Comprehensive income

1. A measure used to evaluate a company”s liquidity.

2. Usually excludes items that a company thinks are unusual or non-recurring.

3. Indicates the level of full and transparent information provided to users of the financial statements.

4. The disposal of a significant segment of a business.

5. Determines increases or decreases in a series of financial statement data.

6. Includes all changes in stockholders” equity during a period except those resulting from investments by stockholders and distributions to stockholders.

here is financial information for pauletti inc 535502

Here is financial information for Pauletti Inc.

December 31, 2012

December 31, 2011

Current assets

$106,000

$ 90,000

Plant assets (net)

400,000

350,000

Current liabilities

99,000

65,000

Long-term liabilities

122,000

90,000

Common stock, $1 par

130,000

115,000

Retained earnings

155,000

170,000

Instructions

Prepare a schedule showing a horizontal analysis for 2012, using 2011 as the base year.

operating data for gladow corporation are presented below 535503

Operating data for Gladow Corporation are presented below.

2012

2011

Sales

$800,000

$600,000

Cost of goods sold

520,000

408,000

Selling expenses

120,000

72,000

Administrative expenses

60,000

48,000

Income tax expense

30,000

24,000

Net income

70,000

48,000

Instructions

Prepare a schedule showing a vertical analysis for 2012 and 2011.

here is financial information for pauletti inc 535504

Here is financial information for Pauletti Inc.

December 31, 2012

December 31, 2011

Current assets

$106,000

$ 90,000

Plant assets (net)

400,000

350,000

Current liabilities

99,000

65,000

Long-term liabilities

122,000

90,000

Common stock, $1 par

130,000

115,000

Retained earnings

155,000

170,000

Instructions

Prepare a schedule showing a horizontal analysis for 2012, using 2011 as the base year.

the comparative balance sheets of nike inc are presented here 535505

The comparative balance sheets of Nike, Inc. are presented here.

NIKE, INC.
Comparative Balance Sheets
May 31
($ in millions)

2009

2008

Assets

$ 9,734

$ 8,839

Current assets

1,958

1,891

Property, plant, and equipment (net)

1,558

1,713

Other assets

$13,250

$12,443

Total assets

Liabilities and Stockholders” Equity

Current liabilities

$ 3,277

$ 3,322

Long-term liabilities

1,280

1,296

Stockholders” equity

8,693

7,825

Total liabilities and stockholders” equity

$13,250

$12,443

Instructions

(a) Prepare a horizontal analysis of the balance sheet data for Nike, using 2008 as a base. (Show the amount of increase or decrease as well.)

(b) Prepare a vertical analysis of the balance sheet data for Nike for 2009.

here are the comparative income statements of blevins corporation 535506

Here are the comparative income statements of Blevins Corporation.

BLEVINS CORPORATION
Comparative Income Statements
For the Years Ended December 31

2012

2011

Net sales

$598,000

$500,000

Cost of goods sold

477,000

420,000

Gross profit

$121,000

$ 80,000

Operating expenses

80,000

44,000

Net income

$ 41,000

$ 36,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare a horizontal analysis of the income statement data for Blevins Corporation, using 2011 as a base. (Show the amounts of increase or decrease.)

(b) Prepare a vertical analysis of the income statement data for Blevins Corporation for both years.

the three accounts shown below appear in the general ledger of jurena corp during 20 535391

The three accounts shown below appear in the general ledger of Jurena Corp. during 2012.

Equipment

Date

Debit

Credit

Balance

Jan. 1

Balance

160,000

July 31

Purchase of equipment

70,000

230,000

Sept. 2

Cost of equipment constructed

53,000

283,000

Nov. 10

Cost of equipment sold

49,000

234,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

Date

Debit

Credit

Balance

Jan. 1

Balance

71,000

Nov. 10

Accumulated depreciation on equipment sold

16000

55,000

Dec. 31

Depreciation for year

28000

83,000

Retained Earnings

Date

Debit

Credit

Balance

Jan. 1

Balance

105,000

Aug. 23

Dividends (cash)

14000

91,000

Dec. 31

Net income

72000

163,000

Instructions

From the postings in the accounts, indicate how the information is reported on a statement of cash flows using the indirect method. The loss on sale of equipment was $8,000. (Hint:Cost of equipment constructed is reported in the investing activities section as a decrease in cash of $53,000.)

shown below and on the next page are comparative balance sheets for padgett company 535392

Shown below and on the next page are comparative balance sheets for Padgett Company.

PADGETT COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31

Assets

2012

2011

Cash

$ 68,000

$ 22,000

Accounts receivable

88,000

76,000

Inventory

167,000

189,000

Land

80,000

100,000

Equipment

260,000

200,000

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

(66,000)

(32,000)

Total

$597,000

$555,000

Liabilities and Stockholders” Equity

2012

2011

Accounts payable

$ 39,000

$ 43,000

Bonds payable

150,000

200,000

Common stock ($1 par)

216,000

174,000

Retained earnings

192,000

138,000

Total

$597,000

$555,000

Additional information:

1. Net income for 2012 was $93,000.

2. Depreciation expense was $34,000.

3. Cash dividends of $39,000 were declared and paid.

4. Bonds payable amounting to $50,000 were redeemed for cash $50,000.

5. Common stock was issued for $42,000 cash.

6. No equipment was sold during 2012.

7. Land was sold for its book value.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2012 using the indirect method.

(b) Compute these cash-based ratios:

(1) Current cash debt coverage.

(2) Cash debt coverage.

presented below is 2009 information for pepsico inc and the coca cola company 535393

Presented below is 2009 information for PepsiCo, Inc. and The Coca-Cola Company.

($ in millions)

PepsiCo

Coca-Cola

Cash provided by operations

$ 6,796

$ 8,186

Average current liabilities

8,772

13,355

Average total liabilities

22,909

21,491

Net income

5,979

6,906

Sales

43,232

30,990

Capital expenditures

2,128

1,993

Dividends paid

2,732

3,800

Instructions

Using the cash-based measures presented in this chapter, compare the (a) liquidity and (b) solvency of the two companies.

the 2012 accounting records of pape transport reveal these transactions and events 535397

The 2012 accounting records of Pape Transport reveal these transactions and events.

Payment of interest

$ 10,000

Payment of salaries and wages

$ 53,000

Cash sales

48,000

Depreciation expense

16,000

Receipt of dividend revenue

18,000

Proceeds from sale of vehicles

812,000

Payment of income taxes

12,000

Purchase of equipment for cash

22,000

Net income

38,000

Loss on sale of vehicles

3,000

Payment for merchandise

97,000

Payment of dividends

14,000

Payment for land

74,000

Payment of operating expenses

28,000

Collection of accounts receivable

195,000

Instructions

Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section using the direct method.

the following information is available for washington mills corp for 2012 535398

The following information is available for Washington Mills Corp. for 2012.

Cash used to purchase treasury stock

$ 48,100

Cash dividends paid

21,800

Cash paid for interest

22,400

Net income

464,300

Sales

802,000

Cash paid for taxes

99,000

Cash received from customers

566,100

Cash received from sale of building (at book value)

197,600

Cash paid for operating expenses

77,000

Beginning cash balance

11,000

Cash paid for goods and services

279,100

Cash received from issuing common stock

355,000

Cash paid to redeem bonds at maturity

200,000

Cash paid to purchase equipment

113,200

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows using the direct method.

the following information is taken from the 2012 general ledger of mathias company 535399

The following information is taken from the 2012 general ledger of Mathias Company.

Rent

Rent expense

$ 30,000

Prepaid rent, January 1

5,900

Prepaid rent, December 31

7,400

Salaries

Salaries expense

$ 54,000

Salaries payable, January 1

2,000

Salaries payable, December 31

8,000

Sales

Revenue from sales

$160,000

Accounts receivable, January 1

16,000

Accounts receivable, December 31

7,000

Instructions

In each case, compute the amount that should be reported in the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows under the direct method.

you are provided with the following transactions that took place during a recent fis 535400

You are provided with the following transactions that took place during a recent fiscal year.

Transaction

Where Reported
on Statement

Cash Inflow,
Outflow, or
No Effect?

(a) Recorded depreciation expense on the plant assets.

(b) Recorded and paid interest expense.

(c) Recorded cash proceeds from a sale of plant assets.

(d) Acquired land by issuing common stock.

(e) Paid a cash dividend to preferred stockholders.

(f) Distributed a stock dividend to common stockholders.

(g) Recorded cash sales.

(h) Recorded sales on account.

(i) Purchased inventory for cash.

(j) Purchased inventory on account.

Instructions

Complete the table, indicating whether each item (1) should be reported as an operating (O) activity, investing (I) activity, financing (F) activity, or as a noncash (NC) transaction reported in a separate schedule, and (2) represents a cash inflow or cash outflow or has no cash flow effect. Assume use of the indirect approach.

the following account balances relate to the stockholders equity accounts of patil c 535401

The following account balances relate to the stockholders” equity accounts of Patil Corp. at year-end.

2012

2011

Common stock, 10,500 and 10,000 shares, respectively, for 2012 and 2011

$160,800

$140,000

Preferred stock, 5,000 shares

125,000

125,000

Retained earnings

300,000

270,000

A small stock dividend was declared and issued in 2012. The market value of the shares was $8,800. Cash dividends were $20,000 in both 2012 and 2011. The common stock has no par or stated value.

Instructions

(a) What was the amount of net income reported by Patil Corp. in 2012?

(b) Determine the amounts of any cash inflows or outflows related to the common stock and dividend accounts in 2012.

(c) Indicate where each of the cash inflows or outflows identified in (b) would be classified on the statement of cash flows.

the income statement of mazor company is presented here 535402

The income statement of Mazor Company is presented here.

MAZOR COMPANY
Income Statement
For the Year Ended November 30, 2012

Sales

$7,600,000

Cost of goods sold

Beginning inventory

$1,900,000

Purchases

4,400,000

Goods available for sale

6,300,000

Ending inventory

1,600,000

Total cost of goods sold

4,700,000

Gross profit

2,900,000

Operating expenses

Selling expenses

450,000

Administrative expenses

700,000

1,150,000

Net income

$1,750,000

Additional information:

1. Accounts receivable decreased $380,000 during the year, and inventory decreased $300,000.

2. Prepaid expenses increased $150,000 during the year.

3. Accounts payable to suppliers of merchandise decreased $350,000 during the year.

4. Accrued expenses payable decreased $100,000 during the year.

5. Administrative expenses include depreciation expense of $110,000.

Instructions

Prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows for the year ended November 30, 2012, for Mazor Company, using the indirect method.

retzlaff company s income statement contained the condensed information below 535404

Retzlaff Company”s income statement contained the condensed information below.

RETZLAFF COMPANY
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2012

Revenues

$970,000

Operating expenses, excluding depreciation

$614,000

Depreciation expense

55,000

Loss on sale of equipment

16,000

685,000

Income before income taxes

285,000

Income tax expense

56,000

Net income

$229,000

Retzlaff”s balance sheet contained the comparative data at December 31.

2012

2011

Accounts receivable

$70,000

$60,000

Accounts payable

41,000

32,000

Income taxes payable

13,000

7,000

Accounts payable pertain to operating expenses.

Instructions

Prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

presented below are the financial statements of helwany company 535406

Presented below are the financial statements of Helwany Company.

HELWANY COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31

Assets

2012

2011

Cash

$ 35,000

$ 20,000

Accounts receivable

20,000

14,000

Inventory

28,000

20,000

Property, plant, and equipment

60,000

78,000

Accumulated depreciation

(32,000)

(24,000)

Total

$111,000

$108,000

Liabilities and Stockholders” Equity

Accounts payable

$ 19,000

$ 15,000

Income taxes payable

7,000

8,000

Bonds payable

17,000

33,000

Common stock

18,000

14,000

Retained earnings

50,000

38,000

Total

$111,000

$108,000

HELWANY COMPANY
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2012

Sales

$242,000

Cost of goods sold

175,000

Gross profit

67,000

Selling expenses

$18,000

Administrative expenses

6,000

24,000

Income from operations

43,000

Interest expense

3,000

Income before income taxes

40,000

Income tax expense

8,000

Net income

$ 32,000

Additional data:

1. Depreciation expense was $17,500.

2. Dividends declared and paid were $20,000.

3. During the year equipment was sold for $8,500 cash. This equipment cost $18,000 originally and had accumulated depreciation of $9,500 at the time of sale.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

(b) Compute these cash-based measures:

(1) Current cash debt coverage ratio.

(2) Cash debt coverage ratio.

(3) Free cash flow.

condensed financial data of lemere inc follow 535408

Condensed financial data of Lemere Inc. follow.

LEMERE INC.
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31

Assets

2012

2011

Cash

$ 80,800

$ 48,400

Accounts receivable

87,800

38,000

Inventory

112,500

102,850

Prepaid expenses

28,400

26,000

Long-term investments

138,000

109,000

Plant assets

285,000

242,500

Accumulated depreciation

(50,000)

(52,000)

Total

$682,500

$514,750

Liabilities and Stockholders” Equity

Accounts payable

$102,000

$ 67,300

Accrued expenses payable

16,500

21,000

Bonds payable

110,000

146,000

Common stock

220,000

175,000

Retained earnings

234,000

105,450

Total

$682,500

$514,750

LEMERE INC.
Income Statement Data
For the Year Ended December 31, 2012

Sales

$388,460

Less:

Cost of goods sold

$135,460

Operating expenses, excluding

depreciation

12,410

Depreciation expense

46,500

Income taxes

27,280

Interest expense

4,730

Loss on sale of plant assets

7,500

233,880

Net income

$154,580

Additional information:

1. New plant assets costing $100,000 were purchased for cash during the year.

2. Old plant assets having an original cost of $57,500 and accumulated depreciation of $48,500 were sold for $1,500 cash.

3. Bonds payable matured and were paid off at face value for cash.

4. A cash dividend of $26,030 was declared and paid during the year.

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

the comparative balance sheets for vanco company as of december 31 are presented bel 535410

The comparative balance sheets for Vanco Company as of December 31 are presented below.

VANCO COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31

Assets

2012

2011

Cash

$ 68,000

$ 45,000

Accounts receivable

50,000

58,000

Inventory

151,450

142,000

Prepaid expenses

15,280

21,000

Land

145,000

130,000

Equipment

225,000

155,000

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

(45,000)

(35,000)

Buildings

200,000

200,000

Accumulated depreciation—buildings

(60,000)

(40,000)

Total

$749,730

$676,000

Liabilities and Stockholders” Equity

Accounts payable

$ 44,730

$ 36,000

Bonds payable

300,000

300,000

Common stock, $1 par

200,000

160,000

Retained earnings

205,000

180,000

Total

$749,730

$676,000

Additional information:

1. Operating expenses include depreciation expense of $42,000.

2. Land was sold for cash at book value.

3. Cash dividends of $12,000 were paid.

4. Net income for 2012 was $37,000.

5. Equipment was purchased for $92,000 cash. In addition, equipment costing $22,000 with a book value of $10,000 was sold for $8,000 cash.

6. 40,000 shares of $1 par value common stock were issued in exchange for land with a fair value of $40,000.

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2012, using the indirect method.

you are provided with the following transactions that took place during the year 535411

You are provided with the following transactions that took place during the year.

Transactions

Free Cash
Flow
($125,000)

CurrentCash
Debt Coverage
Ratio
(0.5 times)

Cash Debt
Coverage Ratio
(0.3 times)

(a) Recorded credit sales $2,500.

(b) Collected $1,900 owed by customers.

(c) Paid amount owed to suppliers $2,750.

(d) Recorded sales returns of $500 and credited the customer”s account.

(e) Purchased new equipment $5,000; signed a long-term note payable

for the cost of the equipment.

(f ) Purchased a patent and paid $65,000 cash for the asset.

Instructions

For each transaction listed above, indicate whether it will increase (I), decrease (D), or have no effect (NE) on the ratios.

you are provided with the following transactions that took place during a recent fis 535412

You are provided with the following transactions that took place during a recent fiscal year.

Transactions

Where Reported
on Statement

Cash Inflow,
Outflow, or
No Effect?

(a) Recorded depreciation expense on the plant assets.

(b) Incurred a loss on disposal of plant assets.

(c) Acquired a building by paying cash.

(d) Made principal repayments on a mortgage.

(e) Issued common stock.

(f ) Purchased shares of another company to be held as a long-term equity

investment.

(g) Paid dividends to common stockholders.

(h) Sold inventory on credit. The company uses a perpetual inventory system.

(i) Purchased inventory on credit.

(j) Paid wages to employees.

Instructions

Complete the table indicating whether each item (1) should be reported as an operating

(O) activity, investing (I) activity, financing (F) activity, or as a noncash (NC) transaction reported in a separate schedule, and (2) represents a cash inflow or cash outflow or has no cash flow effect. Assume use of the indirect approach.

the following selected account balances relate to the plant asset accounts of karas 535413

The following selected account balances relate to the plant asset accounts of Karas Inc. at year-end.

2012

2011

Accumulated depreciation—buildings

$337,500

$300,000

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

144,000

96,000

Buildings

750,000

750,000

Depreciation expense

99,500

85,500

Equipment

300,000

240,000

Land

100,000

70,000

Loss on sale of plant assets

6,000

0

Additional information:

1. Karas purchased $85,000 of equipment and $30,000 of land for cash in 2012.

2. Karas also sold equipment in 2012.

3. Depreciation expense in 2012 was $37,500 on building and $62,000 on equipment.

Instructions

(a) Determine the amounts of any cash inflows or outflows related to the plant asset accounts in 2012.

(b) Indicate where each of the cash inflows or outflows identified in (a) would be classified on the statement of cash flows.

the income statement of hauser company is presented on the next page additional info 535414

The income statement of Hauser Company is presented on the next page. Additional information:

1. Accounts receivable decreased $290,000 during the year, and inventory increased $140,000.

2. Prepaid expenses increased $175,000 during the year.

3. Accounts payable to merchandise suppliers increased $63,000 during the year.

4. Accrued expenses payable increased $145,000 during the year.

HAUSER COMPANY
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2012

Sales

$5,200,000

Cost of goods sold

Beginning inventory

$1,780,000

Purchases

3,430,000

Goods available for sale

5,210,000

Ending inventory

1,920,000

Total cost of goods sold

3,290,000

Gross profit

1,910,000

Operating expenses

Selling expenses

420,000

Administrative expense

525,000

Depreciation expense

105,000

Amortization expense

15,000

1,065,000

Net income

$ 845,000

Instructions

Prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2012, for Hauser Company, using the indirect method.

the income statement of zamora inc reported the following condensed information 535416

The income statement of Zamora Inc. reported the following condensed information.

ZAMORA INC.
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2012

Revenues

$560,000

Operating expenses

400,000

Income from operations

160,000

Income tax expense

47,000

Net income

$113,000

Zamora”s balance sheet contained these comparative data at December 31.

2012

2011

Accounts receivable

$60,000

$75,000

Accounts payable

35,000

48,000

Income taxes payable

14,000

6,000

Zamora has no depreciable assets. Accounts payable pertain to operating expenses.

Instructions

Prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

shown on the next page are the financial statements of klemmer company 535418

Shown on the next page are the financial statements of Klemmer Company.

KLEMMER COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31

Assets

2012

2011

Cash

$ 25,000

$ 33,000

Accounts receivable

23,000

14,000

Inventory

41,000

25,000

Property, plant, and equipment

$ 73,000

$ 78,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

(27,000)

46,000

(24,000)

54,000

Total

$135,000

$126,000

Liabilities and Stockholders” Equity

Accounts payable

$ 23,000

$ 46,000

Income taxes payable

26,000

23,000

Bonds payable

20,000

10,000

Common stock

25,000

25,000

Retained earnings

41,000

22,000

Total

$135,000

$126,000

KLEMMER COMPANY
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2012

Sales

$295,000

Cost of goods sold

194,000

Gross profit

101,000

Selling expenses

$28,000

Administrative expenses

9,000

37,000

Income from operations

64,000

Interest expense

7,000

Income before income taxes

57,000

Income tax expense

13,000

Net income

$ 44,000

Additional data:

1. Depreciation expense was $6,000.

2. Dividends of $25,000 were declared and paid.

3. During the year, equipment was sold for $10,000 cash. This equipment cost $13,000 originally and had accumulated depreciation of $3,000 at the time of sale.

4. Additional equipment was purchased for $8,000 cash.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

(b) Compute these cash-based measures:

(1) Current cash debt coverage ratio.

(2) Cash debt coverage ratio.

(3) Free cash flow.

condensed financial data of cadet company are shown below 535420

Condensed financial data of Cadet Company are shown below.

CADET COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31

Assets

2012

2011

Cash

$ 78,700

$ 33,400

Accounts receivable

72,970

37,000

Inventory

121,900

102,650

Long-term investments

89,500

107,000

Plant assets

320,000

205,000

Accumulated depreciation

(49,500)

(40,000)

Total

$633,570

$445,050

Liabilities and Stockholders” Equity

Accounts payable

$ 57,700

$ 48,280

Accrued expenses payable

15,100

18,830

Bonds payable

140,000

70,000

Common stock

250,000

200,000

Retained earnings

170,770

107,940

Total

$633,570

$445,050

CADET COMPANY
Income Statement Data
For the Year Ended December 31, 2012

Sales

$294,500

Gain on sale of plant assets

3,000

297,500

Less:

Cost of goods sold

$104,460

Operating expenses, excluding

depreciation expense

14,670

Depreciation expense

35,500

Income taxes

32,100

Interest expense

2,940

189,670

Net income

$107,830

Additional information:

1. New plant assets costing $151,000 were purchased for cash during the year.

2. Investments were sold at cost.

3. Plant assets costing $36,000 and accumulated depreciation of $26,000 were sold for $13,000.

4. A cash dividend of $45,000 was declared and paid during the year.

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

melvina corporation has been authorized to issue 20 000 shares of 100 par value 535297

Melvina Corporation has been authorized to issue 20,000 shares of $100 par value, 7%, noncumulative preferred stock and 1,000,000 shares of no-par common stock. The corporation assigned a $5 stated value to the common stock. At December 31, 2012, the ledger contained the following balances pertaining to stockholders” equity.

Preferred Stock

$ 150,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value—Preferred Stock

20,000

Common Stock

2,000,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Stated Value—Common Stock

1,520,000

Treasury Stock—Common (4,000 shares)

36,000

Retained Earnings

82,000

The preferred stock was issued for $170,000 cash. All common stock issued was for cash. In November 4,000 shares of common stock were purchased for the treasury at a per share cost of $9. No dividends were declared in 2012.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries for the following.

(1) Issuance of preferred stock for cash.

(2) Issuance of common stock for cash.

(3) Purchase of common treasury stock for cash.

(b) Prepare the stockholders” equity section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2012.

on january 1 2012 neville inc had these stockholders equity balances 535298

On January 1, 2012, Neville Inc. had these stockholders” equity balances.

Common Stock, $1 par (2,000,000 shares authorized,

600,000 shares issued and outstanding)

$ 600,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value

1,500,000

Retained Earnings

700,000

During 2012, the following transactions and events occurred.

1. Issued 50,000 shares of $1 par value common stock for $3 per share.

2. Issued 60,000 shares of common stock for cash at $4 per share.

3. Purchased 20,000 shares of common stock for the treasury at $3.80 per share.

4. Declared and paid a cash dividend of $207,000.

5. Earned net income of $410,000.

Instructions

Prepare the stockholders” equity section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2012.

on january 1 2012 cornell corporation had these stockholders equity accounts 535300

On January 1, 2012, Cornell Corporation had these stockholders” equity accounts.

Common Stock ($10 par value, 70,000 shares issued and outstanding)

$700,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value

500,000

Retained Earnings

620,000

During the year, the following transactions occurred.

Jan. 15 Declared a $0.50 cash dividend per share to stockholders of record on

January 31, payable February 15.

Feb. 15 Paid the dividend declared in January.

Apr. 15 Declared a 10% stock dividend to stockholders of record on April 30, distributable May 15. On April 15, the market price of the stock was $14 per share.

May 15 Issued the shares for the stock dividend.

Dec. 1 Declared a $0.60 per share cash dividend to stockholders of record on

December 15, payable January 10, 2013.

31 Determined that net income for the year was $400,000.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions. (Include entries to close net income and dividends to Retained Earnings.)

(b) Enter the beginning balances and post the entries to the stockholders” equity T accounts.

(Note: Open additional stockholders” equity accounts as needed.)

(c) Prepare the stockholders” equity section of the balance sheet at December 31.

(d) Calculate the payout ratio and return on common stockholders” equity ratio.

hennes corporation was organized on january 1 2012 it is authorized to issue 535301

Hennes Corporation was organized on January 1, 2012. It is authorized to issue 10,000 shares of 8%, $100 par value preferred stock and 500,000 shares of no-par common stock with a stated value of $2 per share. The following stock transactions were completed during the first year.

Jan. 10 Issued 40,000 shares of common stock for cash at $3.60 per share.

Mar. 1 Issued 5,000 shares of preferred stock for cash at $102 per share.

May 1 Issued 90,000 shares of common stock for cash at $4 per share.

Sept. 1 Issued 10,000 shares of common stock for cash at $4.40 per share.

Nov. 1 Issued 4,000 shares of preferred stock for cash at $103 per share.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions.

(b) Post to the stockholders” equity accounts. (Use T accounts.)

(c) Prepare the paid-in capital section of stockholders” equity at December 31, 2012.

the stockholders equity accounts o f nardin corporation on january 1 2012 were as fo 535302

The stockholders” equity accounts o f Nardin Corporation on January 1, 2012, were as follows.

Preferred Stock (9%, $50 par cumulative, 10,000 shares authorized)

$ 200,000

Common Stock ($1 stated value, 2,000,000 shares authorized)

1,000,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value—Preferred Stock

16,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Stated Value—Common Stock

1,400,000

Retained Earnings

1,716,000

Treasury Stock—Common (8,000 shares)

20,000

During 2012 the corporation had these transactions and events pertaining to its stockholders” equity.

Feb. 1 Issued 20,000 shares of common stock for $60,000.

Nov. 10 Purchased 4,000 shares of common stock for the treasury at a cost of $16,000.

Nov. 15 Declared a 9% cash dividend on preferred stock, payable December 15.

Dec. 1 Declared a $0.30 per share cash dividend to stockholders of record on

December 15, payable December 31, 2012.

Dec. 15 Paid the dividend declared on November 15.

31 Determined that net income for the year was $408,000. The market price of the common stock on this date was $5 per share. Paid the dividend declared on December 1.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions. (Include entries to close net income and dividends to Retained Earnings.)

(b) Enter the beginning balances in the accounts, and post the journal entries to the stockholders” equity accounts. (Use T accounts.)

(c) Prepare the stockholders” equity section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2012.

(d) Calculate the payout ratio, earnings per share, and return on common stockholders” equity ratio. (Hint: Use the common shares outstanding on January 1 and December 31 to determine average shares outstanding.)

the post closing trial balance of flicka corporation at december 31 2012 535304

The post-closing trial balance of Flicka Corporation at December 31, 2012, contains these stockholders” equity accounts.

Preferred Stock (6,000 shares issued)

$ 300,000

Common Stock (350,000 shares issued)

3,500,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value—Preferred Stock

250,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value—Common Stock

520,000

Retained Earnings

805,000

A review of the accounting records reveals this information:

1. Preferred stock is $50 par, 10%, and cumulative; 6,000 shares have been outstanding since January 1, 2011.

2. Authorized stock is 20,000 shares of preferred and 500,000 shares of common with a $10 par value.

3. The January 1, 2012, balance in Retained Earnings was $660,000.

4. On July 1, 20,000 shares of common stock were sold for cash at $16 per share.

5. A cash dividend of $380,000 was declared and properly allocated to preferred and common stock on October 1. No dividends were paid to preferred stockholders in 2011.

6. Net income for the year was $525,000.

7. On December 31, 2012, the directors authorized disclosure of a $150,000 restriction of retained earnings for plant expansion. (Use Note X.)

Instructions

(a) Reproduce the retained earnings account for the year.

(b) Prepare the stockholders” equity section of the balance sheet at December 31.

the following stockholders equity accounts arranged alphabetically 535305

The following stockholders” equity accounts, arranged alphabetically, are in the ledger of Charlotte Corporation at December 31, 2012.

Common Stock ($2 stated value, 1,800,000 shares authorized)

$2,600,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value—Preferred Stock

158,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Stated Value—Common Stock

1,950,000

Preferred Stock (8%, $50 par, noncumulative, 50,000 shares

authorized)

900,000

Retained Earnings

1,958,000

Treasury Stock—Common (20,000 shares)

80,000

Instructions

Prepare the stockholders” equity section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2012.

on january 1 2012 gabriel inc had these stockholder equity balances 535306

On January 1, 2012, Gabriel Inc. had these stockholder equity balances.

Common Stock, $1 par (1,000,000 shares authorized;

500,000 shares issued and outstanding)

$ 500,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value

1,000,000

Retained Earnings

600,000

During 2012, the following transactions and events occurred.

1. Issued 70,000 shares of $1 par common stock for $245,000.

2. Issued 40,000 common shares for cash at $4 per share.

3. Purchased 18,000 shares of common stock for the treasury at $4 per share.

4. Declared and paid a cash dividend of $296,000.

5. Reported net income of $510,000.

Instructions

Prepare the stockholders” equity section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2012.

on january 1 2012 jason corporation had these stockholders equity accounts 535308

On January 1, 2012, Jason Corporation had these stockholders” equity accounts.

Common Stock ($20 par value, 80,000 shares issued and outstanding)

$1,600,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value

240,000

Retained Earnings

750,000

During the year, the following transactions occurred.

Feb. 1 Declared a $0.50 cash dividend per share to stockholders of record on February 15, payable March 1.

Mar. 1 Paid the dividend declared in February.

July 1 Declared a 15% stock dividend to stockholders of record on July 15, distributable

July 31. On July 1, the market price of the stock was $25 per share.

31 Issued the shares for the stock dividend.

Dec. 1 Declared a $1 per share dividend to stockholders of record on December

15, payable January 5, 2013.

31 Determined that net income for the year was $500,000. The market price of the common stock on this date was $32.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions. (Include entries to close net income and dividends to Retained Earnings.)

(b) Enter the beginning balances and post the entries to the stockholders” equity T accounts.

(Note: Open additional stockholders” equity accounts as needed.)

(c) Prepare the stockholders” equity section of the balance sheet at December 31.

(d) Calculate the payout ratio and return on common stockholders” equity ratio.

the stockholders equity section of tootsie roll industries balance sheet is shown in 535309

The stockholders” equity section of Tootsie Roll Industries” balance sheet is shown in the Consolidated Statement of Financial Position in Appendix A. You will also find data relative to this problem on other pages of Appendix A. (Note that Tootsie Roll has two classes of common stock. To answer the following questions, add the two classes of stock together.)

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) What is the par or stated value per share of Tootsie Roll”s common stock?

(b) What percentage of Tootsie Roll”s authorized common stock was issued at December 31, 2009? (Round to the nearest full percent.)

(c) How many shares of common stock were outstanding at December 31, 2008, and at December 31, 2009?

(d) Calculate the payout ratio, earnings per share, and return on common stockholders” equity ratio for 2009.

the financial statements of the hershey company are presented in appendix b 535310

The financial statements of The Hershey Company are presented in Appendix B, following the financial statements for Tootsie Roll in Appendix A.

Instructions

(a) Based on the information in these financial statements, compute the 2009 return on common stockholders” equity, debt to total assets ratio, and return on assets ratio for each company.

(b) What conclusions concerning the companies” profitability can be drawn from these ratios? Which company relies more on debt to boost its return to common shareholders?

(c) Compute the payout ratio for each company. Which pays out a higher percentage of its earnings?

The financial statements of The Hershey Company are presented in Appendix B, following the financial statements for Tootsie Roll in Appendix A.

Instructions

(a) Based on the information in these financial statements, compute the 2009 return on common stockholders” equity, debt to total assets ratio, and return on assets ratio for each company.

(b) What conclusions concerning the companies” profitability can be drawn from these ratios? Which company relies more on debt to boost its return to common shareholders?

(c) Compute the payout ratio for each company. Which pays out a higher percentage of its earnings?

during a recent period the fast food chain wendy s international purchased many trea 535312

During a recent period, the fast-food chain Wendy”s International purchased many treasury shares. This caused the number of shares outstanding to fall from 124 million to 105 million. The following information was drawn from the company”s financial statements (in millions).

Host Marriott

Marriott International

Sales

$1,501

$8,415

Net income

(25)

200

Total assets

3,822

3,207

Total liabilities

3,112

2,440

Common stockholders” equity

710

767

Information for the

Information for the

Year after Purchase

Year before Purchase

of Treasury Stock

of Treasury Stock

Net income

$ 193.6

$ 123.4

Total assets

2,076.0

1,837.9

Average total assets

2,016.9

1,889.8

Total common stockholders” equity

1,029.8

1,068.1

Average common stockholders” equity

1,078.0

1,126.2

Total liabilities

1,046.3

769.9

Average total liabilities

939.0

763.7

Interest expense

30.2

19.8

Income taxes

113.7

84.3

Cash provided by operations

305.2

233.8

Cash dividends paid on common stock

26.8

31.0

Preferred stock dividends

0

0

Average number of common shares outstanding

109.7

119.9

Instructions

Use the information provided to answer the following questions.

(a) Compute earnings per share, return on common stockholders” equity, and return on assets for both years. Discuss the change in the company”s profitability over this period.

(b) Compute the dividend payout ratio. Also compute the average cash dividend paid per share of common stock (dividends paid divided by the average number of common shares outstanding). Discuss any change in these ratios during this period and the implications for the company”s dividend policy.

(c) Compute the debt to total assets ratio and interest coverage ratio. Discuss the change in the company”s solvency.

(d) Based on your findings in (a) and (c), discuss to what extent any change in the return on common stockholders” equity was the result of increased reliance on debt.

(e) Does it appear that the purchase of treasury stock and the shift toward more reliance on debt were wise strategic moves?

the following data are available for bill mack corporation 535337

The following data are available for Bill Mack Corporation.

Net income

$200,000

Depreciation expense

40,000

Dividends paid

60,000

Gain on sale of land

10,000

Decrease in accounts receivable

20,000

Decrease in accounts payable

30,000

Net cash provided by operating activities is:

(a) $160,000.

(b) $220,000.

(c) $240,000.

(d) $280,000.

the following are data concerning cash received or paid from various transactions fo 535338

The following are data concerning cash received or paid from various transactions for Orange Peels Corporation.

Sale of land

$100,000

Sale of equipment

50,000

Issuance of common stock

70,000

Purchase of equipment

30,000

Payment of cash dividends

60,000

Net cash provided by investing activities is:

(a) $120,000.

(b) $130,000.

(c) $150,000.

(d) $190,000.

the following t account is a summary of the cash account of holmes company 535369

The following T account is a summary of the cash account of Holmes Company.

Cash (Summary Form)

Balance, Jan. 1

8,000

Receipts from customers

364,000

Payments for goods

200,000

Dividends on stock investments

6,000

Payments for operating expenses

140,000

Proceeds from sale of equipment

36,000

Interest paid

10,000

Proceeds from issuance of

Taxes paid

8,000

bonds payable

300,000

Dividends paid

40,000

Balance, Dec. 31

316,000

What amount of net cash provided (used) by financing activities should be reported in the statement of cash flows?

barnish corporation issued the following statement of cash flows for 2012 535384

Barnish Corporation issued the following statement of cash flows for 2012.

BARNISH CORPORATION
Statement of Cash Flows—Indirect Method
For the Year Ended December 31, 2012

Cash flows from operating activities

Net income

$59,000

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash

provided by operating activities:

Depreciation expense

$ 9,100

Decrease in accounts receivable

9,500

Increase in inventory

(5,000)

Decrease in accounts payable

(2,200)

Loss on sale of equipment

3,300

14,700

Net cash provided by operating activities

73,700

Cash flows from investing activities

Sale of investments

3,100

Purchase of equipment

(24,200)

Net cash used by investing activities

(21,100)

Cash flows from financing activities

Issuance of stock

20,000

Payment on long-term note payable

(10,000)

Payment for dividends

(13,000)

Net cash used by financing activities

(3,000)

Net increase in cash

49,600

Cash at beginning of year

13,000

Cash at end of year

$62,600

(a) Compute free cash flow for Barnish Corporation.

(b) Explain why free cash flow often provides better information than “Net cash provided by operating activities.”

strawn corporation had these transactions during 2012 535385

Strawn Corporation had these transactions during 2012.

(a) Purchased a machine for $30,000, giving a long-term note in exchange.

(b) Issued $50,000 par value common stock for cash.

(c) Issued $200,000 par value common stock upon conversion of bonds having a face value of $200,000.

(d) Declared and paid a cash dividend of $13,000.

(e) Sold a long-term investment with a cost of $15,000 for $15,000 cash.

(f) Collected $16,000 of accounts receivable.

(g) Paid $18,000 on accounts payable.

Instructions

Analyze the transactions and indicate whether each transaction resulted in a cash flow from operating activities, investing activities, financing activities, or noncash investing and financing activities

an analysis of comparative balance sheets the current year s income statement 535386

An analysis of comparative balance sheets, the current year”s income statement, and the general ledger accounts of Gygi Corp. uncovered the following items. Assume all items involve cash unless there is information to the contrary.

(a)

Payment of interest on notes payable.

(h)

Issuance of capital stock.

(b)

Exchange of land for patent.

(i)

Amortization of patent.

(c)

Sale of building at book value.

(j)

Issuance of bonds for land.

(d)

Payment of dividends.

(k)

Purchase of land.

(e)

Depreciation.

(l)

Receipt of dividends on investment in stock.

(f

Conversion of bonds into common stock.

(m)

Loss on sale of land.

(g)

Receipt of interest on notes receivable.

(n)

Retirement of bonds.

Instructions

Indicate how each item should be classified in the statement of cash flows using these four major classifications: operating activity (indirect method), investing activity, financing activity, and significant noncash investing and financing activity.

the current sections of putzier inc s balance sheets at december 31 2011 and 2012 535389

The current sections of Putzier Inc.”s balance sheets at December 31, 2011 and 2012, are presented here. Putzier”s net income for 2012 was $153,000. Depreciation expense was $27,000.

2012

2011

Current assets

Cash

$105,000

$ 99,000

Accounts receivable

80,000

89,000

Inventory

168,000

172,000

Prepaid expenses

27,000

22,000

Total current assets

$380,000

$382,000

Current liabilities

Accrued expenses payable

$ 15,000

$ 5,000

Accounts payable

85,000

92,000

Total current liabilities

$100,000

$ 97,000

Instructions

Prepare the net cash provided by operating activities section of the company”s statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2012, using the indirect method.

the following information is available for oscar corporation for the year ended dece 535390

The following information is available for Oscar Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2012.

Beginning cash balance

$ 45,000

Accounts payable decrease

3,700

Depreciation expense

162,000

Accounts receivable increase

8,200

Inventory increase

11,000

Net income

284,100

Cash received for sale of land at book value

35,000

Cash dividends paid

12,000

Income taxes payable increase

4,700

Cash used to purchase building

289,000

Cash used to purchase treasury stock

26,000

Cash received from issuing bonds

200,000

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

p10 12b daisy corporation purchased a new piece of equipment to be used in its new 535197

*P10-12B Daisy Corporation purchased a new piece of equipment to be used in its new facility. The $450,000 piece of equipment was purchased with a $50,000 down payment and with cash received through the issuance of a $400,000, 6%, 5-year mortgage note payable issued on October 1, 2012. The terms provide for quarterly installment payments of $23,298 on December 31, March 31, June 30, and September 30.

Instructions

(Round all computations to the nearest dollar.)

(a) Prepare an installment payments schedule for the first five payments of the notes payable.

(b) Prepare the journal entry related to the notes payable for December 31, 2012.

(c) Show the balance sheet presentation for these obligations for December 31, 2012.

(Hint: Be sure to distinguish between the current and long-term portions of the note.)

p10 13b scott robertson has just approached a venture capitalist for financing for 535198

*P10-13B Scott Robertson has just approached a venture capitalist for financing for his sailing school. The venture capitalist is willing to loan Scott $90,000 at a high-risk annual interest rate of 18%. The loan is payable over 2 years in monthly installments of $4,493. Each payment includes principal and interest, calculated using the effective interest method for amortizing debt. Scott receives the loan on May 1, 2012, which is the first day of his fiscal year. Scott makes the first payment on May 31, 2012.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an amortization schedule for the period from May 1, 2012, to August 31, 2012. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar.

(b) Prepare all journal entries for Scott Robertson for the period beginning May 1, 2012, and ending July 31, 2012. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar.

byp10 2 the financial statements of the hershey company are presented in appendix b 535201

BYP10-2 The financial statements of The Hershey Company are presented in Appendix B, following the financial statements for Tootsie Roll Industries in Appendix A.

Instructions

(a) Based on the information contained in these financial statements, compute the current ratio for 2009 for each company. What conclusions concerning the companies” liquidity can be drawn from these ratios?

(b) Based on the information contained in these financial statements, compute the following 2009 ratios for each company.

(1) Debt to total assets.

(2) Times interest earned. (Hershey”s total interest expense for 2009 was $91,336,000. See Tootsie Roll”s Note 10 for its interest expense.)

What conclusions about the companies” long-run solvency can be drawn from the ratios?

byp10 3 the september 1 2009 edition of cfo com contains an article by marie leone a 535202

BYP10-3 The September 1, 2009, edition of CFO.com contains an article by Marie Leone and Tim Reason entitled “Dirty Secrets.” You can access this article at www.cfo.com/article.cfm/ 14292477?f=singlepage.

Instructions

Read the article and answer the following questions.

(a) Summarize the accounting for contingent items that is provided in this textbook.

(b) The authors of the article suggest that many companies are basically accounting for contingencies on a cash basis. Is this consistent with the approach you described in part (a)?

(c) The article suggests that many companies report one set of liability estimates to insurers and a different (lower) set of numbers in their financial statements. How is this possible, and what are the implications for investors?

(d) How do international accounting standards differ in terms of the amounts reported in these types of situations?

byp10 4 hechinger co and home depot are two home improvement retailers 535203

BYP10-4 Hechinger Co. and Home Depot are two home improvement retailers. Compared to Hechinger, founded in the early 1900s, Home Depot is a relative newcomer. But, in recent years, while Home Depot was reporting large increases in net income, Hechinger was reporting increasingly large net losses. Finally, largely due to competition from Home Depot, Hechinger was forced to file for bankruptcy. Here are financial data for both companies (in millions).

Hechinger

Home Depot

Cash

$ 21

$ 62

Receivables

0

469

Total current assets

1,153

4,933

Beginning total assets

1,668

11,229

Ending total assets

1,577

13,465

Beginning current liabilities

935

2,456

Ending current liabilities

938

2,857

Beginning total liabilities

1,392

4,015

Ending total liabilities

1,339

4,716

Interest expense

67

37

Income tax expense

3

1,040

Cash provided (used) by operations

(257)

1,917

Net income

(93)

1,614

Net sales

3,444

30,219

Instructions

Using the data provided, perform the following analysis.

(a) Calculate working capital and the current ratio for each company. Discuss their relative liquidity.

(b) Calculate the debt to total assets ratio and times interest earned for each company. Discuss their relative solvency.

(c) Calculate the return on assets ratio and profit margin ratio for each company. Comment on their relative profitability.

(d) The notes to Home Depot’s financial statements indicate that it leases many of its facilities using operating leases. If these assets had instead been purchased with debt, assets and liabilities would have increased by approximately $2,347 million. Calculate the company’s debt to total assets ratio employing this adjustment. Discuss the implications.

byp10 6 on january 1 2010 gitzel corporation issued 3 000 000 of 5 year 8 bonds at 9 535204

BYP10-6 On January 1, 2010, Gitzel Corporation issued $3,000,000 of 5-year, 8% bonds at 97. The bonds pay interest annually on January 1. By January 1, 2012, the market rate of interest for bonds of risk similar to those of Gitzel Corporation had risen. As a result, the market value of these bonds was $2,500,000 on January 1, 2012—below their carrying value of $2,946,000. Jon Kanter, president of the company, suggests repurchasing all of these bonds in the open market at the $2,500,000 price. But to do so the company will have to issue $2,500,000 (face value) of new 10-year, 12% bonds at par. The president asks you, as controller, “What is the feasibility of my proposed repurchase plan?”

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Prepare the journal entry to retire the 5-year bonds on January 1, 2012. Prepare the journal entry to issue the new 10-year bonds.

(b) Prepare a short memo to the president in response to his request for advice. List the economic factors that you believe should be considered for his repurchase proposal.

byp10 8 the july 1998 issue of inc magazine includes an article by jeffrey l 535206

BYP10-8 The July 1998 issue of Inc. magazine includes an article by Jeffrey L. Seglin entitled “Would You Lie to Save Your Company?” It recounts the following true situation: “A Chief Executive Officer (CEO) of a $20-million company that repairs aircraft engines received notice from a number of its customers that engines that it had recently repaired had failed, and that the company”s parts were to blame. The CEO had not yet determined whether his company”s parts were, in fact, the cause of the problem. The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) had been notified and was investigating the matter.

What complicated the situation was that the company was in the midst of its year-end audit. As part of the audit, the CEO was required to sign a letter saying that he was not aware of any significant outstanding circumstances that could negatively impact the company—in accounting terms, of any contingent liabilities. The auditor was not aware of the customer complaints or the

FAA investigation. The company relied heavily on short-term loans from eight banks. The CEO feared that if these lenders learned of the situation, they would pull their loans. The loss of these loans would force the company into bankruptcy, leaving hundreds of people without jobs. Prior to this problem, the company had a stellar performance record.”

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) What are the CEO”s possible courses of action? What are the potential results of each course of action? (Take into account the two alternative outcomes: the FAA determines the company

(1) was not at fault, and (2) was at fault.)

(c) What would you do, and why?

(d) Suppose the CEO decides to conceal the situation, and that during the next year the company is found to be at fault and is forced into bankruptcy. What losses are incurred by the stakeholders in this situation? Do you think the CEO should suffer legal consequences if he decides to conceal the situation?

byp10 9 during the summer of 2002 the financial press reported that citigroup was be 535207

BYP10-9 During the summer of 2002, the financial press reported that Citigroup was being investigated for allegations that it had arranged transactions for Enron so as to intentionally misrepresent the nature of the transactions and consequently achieve favorable balance sheet treatment. Essentially, the deals were structured to make it appear that money was coming into Enron

from trading activities, rather than from loans.

A July 23, 2002, the New York Times article by Richard Oppel and Kurt Eichenwald entitled “Citigroup Said to Mold Deal to Help Enron Skirt Rules” suggested that Citigroup intentionally kept certain parts of a secret oral agreement out of the written record for fear that it would change the accounting treatment. Critics contend that this had the effect of significantly understating Enron”s liabilities, thus misleading investors and creditors. Citigroup maintains that, as a lender, it has no obligation to ensure that its clients account for transactions properly. The proper accounting, Citigroup insists, is the responsibility of the client and its auditor.

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) Do you think that a lender, in general, in arranging so called “structured financing” has a responsibility to ensure that its clients account for the financing in an appropriate fashion, or is this the responsibility of the client and its auditor?

(c) What effect did the fact that the written record did not disclose all characteristics of the transaction probably have on the auditor”s ability to evaluate the accounting treatment of this transaction?

(d) The New York Times article noted that in one presentation made to sell this kind of deal to Enron and other energy companies, Citigroup stated that using such an arrangement “eliminates the need for capital markets disclosure, keeping structure mechanics private.” Why might a company wish to conceal the terms of a financing arrangement from the capital markets (investors and creditors)? Is this appropriate? Do you think it is ethical for a lender to market deals in this way?

(e) Why was this deal more potentially harmful to shareholders than other off-balance-sheet transactions (for example, lease financing)?

byp10 10 for most u s families medical costs are substantial and rising 535208

BYP10-10 For most U.S. families, medical costs are substantial and rising. But will medical costs be your most substantial expense over your lifetime? Not likely. Will it be housing or food? Again, not likely. The answer: Taxes are likely to be your biggest expense. On average, Americans work 74 days to afford their federal taxes. Companies, too, have large tax burdens. They look very hard at tax issues in deciding where to build their plants and where to locate their administrative headquarters.

Instructions

(a) Determine what your state income taxes are if your taxable income is $60,000 and you file as a single taxpayer in the state in which you live.

(b) Assume that you own a home worth $200,000 in your community and the tax rate is 2.1%. Compute the property taxes you would pay.

(c) Assume that the total gasoline bill for your automobile is $1,200 a year (300 gallons at $4 per gallon). What are the amounts of state and federal taxes that you pay on the $1,200?

(d) Assume that your purchases for the year total $9,000. Of this amount, $5,000 was for food and prescription drugs. What is the amount of sales tax you would pay on these purchases?

(Note that many states do not have a sales tax for food or prescription drug purchases. Does yours?).

(e) Determine what your Social Security taxes are if your income is $60,000.

(f ) Determine what your federal income taxes are if your taxable income is $60,000 and you file as a single taxpayer.

(g) Determine your total taxes paid based on the above calculations, and determine the percentage of income that you would pay in taxes based on the following formula: Total taxes paid _ Total income.

ifrs10 5 many multinational companies find it beneficial to have their shares listed 535218

IFRS10–5 Many multinational companies find it beneficial to have their shares listed on stock exchanges in foreign countries. In order to do this, they must comply with the securities laws of those countries. Some of these laws relate to the form of financial disclosure the company must provide, including disclosures related to contingent liabilities. This exercise investigates the Tokyo Stock Exchange, the largest stock exchange in Japan. Address: www.tse.or.jp/english/, or go to www.wiley.com/college/kimmel

Steps

1. Choose About TSE.

2. Choose History of TSE. Answer questions (a) and (b).

3. Choose Listed Company information.

4. Choose Disclosure. Answer questions (c) and (d).

5. Answer the following questions.

(a) When was the first stock exchange opened in Japan? How many exchanges does Japan have today?

(b) What event caused trading to stop for a period of time in Japan?

(c) What are four examples of decisions by corporations that must be disclosed at the time of their occurrence?

(d) What are four examples of “occurrence of material fact” that must be disclosed at the time of their occurrence?

ifrs10 6 the financial statements of zetar plc are presented in appendix c 535219

IFRS10–6 The financial statements of Zetar plc are presented in Appendix C. The company”s complete annual report, including the notes to its financial statements, is available at www.zetarplc.com.

Instructions

Use the company”s annual report to answer the following questions.

(a) According to the notes to the financial statements, what types of transactions do trade payables relate to? What was the average amount of time it took the company to pay its payables?

(b) Note 2 (B) discusses provisions that the company records for certain types of activities. What do the provisions relate to, what are the estimates based on, and what could cause those estimates to change in subsequent periods?

(c) What was the average interest rate paid on bank loans and overdrafts?

the stockholders equity section of traylor corporation s balance sheet at december 3 535280

The stockholders” equity section of Traylor Corporation”s balance sheet at December 31 is presented here.

TRAYLOR CORPORATION
Balance Sheet (partial)

Stockholders” equity

Paid-in capital

Preferred stock, cumulative, 10,000 shares authorized,

6,000 shares issued and outstanding

$ 600,000

Common stock, no par, 750,000 shares authorized,

580,000 shares issued

2,900,000

Total paid-in capital

3,500,000

Retained earnings

1,158,000

Total paid-in capital and retained earnings

4,658,000

Less: Treasury stock (6,000 common shares)

(32,000)

Total stockholders” equity

$4,626,000

Instructions

From a review of the stockholders” equity section, answer the following questions.

(a) How many shares of common stock are outstanding?

(b) Assuming there is a stated value, what is the stated value of the common stock?

(c) What is the par value of the preferred stock?

(d) If the annual dividend on preferred stock is $36,000, what is the dividend rate on preferred stock?

(e) If dividends of $72,000 were in arrears on preferred stock, what would be the balance reported for retained earnings?

the following stockholders equity accounts arranged alphabetically are in the ledger 535285

The following stockholders” equity accounts, arranged alphabetically, are in the ledger of Patel Corporation at December 31, 2012.

Common Stock ($2 stated value)

$1,600,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value—Preferred Stock

45,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Stated Value—Common Stock

1,050,000

Preferred Stock (8%, $100 par, noncumulative)

600,000

Retained Earnings

1,334,000

Treasury Stock—Common (12,000 shares)

72,000

Instructions

Prepare the stockholders” equity section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2012.

the following accounts appear in the ledger of sather inc after the books are closed 535286

The following accounts appear in the ledger of Sather Inc. after the books are closed at December 31, 2012.

Common Stock (no-par, $1 stated value, 400,000 shares

authorized, 250,000 shares issued)

$ 250,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Stated Value—Common Stock

1,200,000

Preferred Stock ($50 par value, 8%, 40,000 shares authorized,

14,000 shares issued)

700,000

Retained Earnings

920,000

Treasury Stock (9,000 common shares)

64,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value—Preferred Stock

24,000

Instructions

Prepare the stockholders” equity section at December 31, assuming $100,000 of retained earnings is restricted for plant expansion. (Use Note R.)

the following financial information is available for thompson corporation 535287

The following financial information is available for Thompson Corporation.

(in millions)

2012

2011

Average common stockholders” equity

$2,532

$2,591

Dividends declared for common stockholders

298

611

Dividends declared for preferred stockholders

40

40

Net income

504

555

Instructions

Calculate the payout ratio and return on common stockholders” equity ratio for 2012 and 2011. Comment on your findings.

the following financial information is available for walgreen company 535288

The following financial information is available for Walgreen Company.

(in millions)

2009

2008

Average common stockholders” equity

$13,622.5

$11,986.5

Dividends declared for common stockholders

471

394

Dividends declared for preferred stockholders

0

0

Net income

2,006

2,157

Instructions

Calculate the payout ratio and return on common stockholders” equity ratio for 2009 and 2008. Comment on your findings.

songbird airlines is considering these two alternatives for financing the purchase o 535290

Songbird Airlines is considering these two alternatives for financing the purchase of a fleet of airplanes:

1. Issue 50,000 shares of common stock at $40 per share. (Cash dividends have not been paid nor is the payment of any contemplated.)

2. Issue 12%, 10-year bonds at face value for $2,000,000. It is estimated that the company will earn $800,000 before interest and taxes as a result of this purchase. The company has an estimated tax rate of 30% and has 90,000 shares of common stock outstanding prior to the new financing.

Instructions

Determine the effect on net income and earnings per share for (a) issuing stock and (b) issuing bonds. Assume the new shares or new bonds will be outstanding for the entire year.

randolph company has 1 000 000 in assets and 1 000 000 in stockholders 535291

Randolph Company has $1,000,000 in assets and $1,000,000 in stockholders” equity, with 40,000 shares outstanding the entire year. It has a return on assets ratio of 10%. In the past year, it had net income of $100,000. On January 1, 2012, it issued $400,000 in debt at 4% and immediately repurchased 20,000 shares for $400,000. Management expected that, had it not issued the debt, it would have again had net income of $100,000.

Instructions

(a) Determine the company”s net income and earnings per share for 2011 and 2012. (Ignore taxes in your computations.)

(b) Compute the company”s return on common stockholders” equity for 2011 and 2012.

(c) Compute the company”s debt to total assets ratio for 2011 and 2012.

(d) Discuss the impact that the borrowing had on the company”s profitability and solvency. Was it a good idea to borrow the money to buy the treasury stock?

whitten corporation was organized on january 1 2012 it is authorized to issue 20 000 535293

Whitten Corporation was organized on January 1, 2012. It is authorized to issue 20,000 shares of 6%, $50 par value preferred stock and 500,000 shares of no-par common stock with a stated value of $1 per share. The following stock transactions were completed during the first year.

Jan. 10 Issued 70,000 shares of common stock for cash at $4 per share.

Mar. 1 Issued 12,000 shares of preferred stock for cash at $53 per share.

May 1 Issued 120,000 shares of common stock for cash at $6 per share.

Sept. 1 Issued 5,000 shares of common stock for cash at $5 per share.

Nov. 1 Issued 3,000 shares of preferred stock for cash at $56 per share.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions.

(b) Post to the stockholders” equity accounts. (Use T accounts.)

(c) Prepare the paid-in capital portion of the stockholders” equity section at December 31, 2012.

the stockholders equity accounts of omega corporation on january 1 2012 were as foll 535294

The stockholders” equity accounts of Omega Corporation on January 1, 2012, were as follows.

Preferred Stock (7%, $100 par noncumulative, 5,000 shares authorized)

$ 300,000

Common Stock ($4 stated value, 300,000 shares authorized)

1,000,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value—Preferred Stock

15,000

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Stated Value—Common Stock

480,000

Retained Earnings

688,000

Treasury Stock—Common (5,000 shares)

40,000

During 2012, the corporation had the following transactions and events pertaining to its stockholders” equity.

Feb. 1 Issued 5,000 shares of common stock for $30,000.

Mar. 20 Purchased 1,000 additional shares of common treasury stock at $7 per share.

Oct. 1 Declared a 7% cash dividend on preferred stock, payable November 1.

Nov. 1 Paid the dividend declared on October 1.

Dec. 1 Declared a $0.50 per share cash dividend to common stockholders of record on December 15, payable December 31, 2012.

31 Determined that net income for the year was $280,000. Paid the dividend declared on December 1.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions. (Include entries to close net income and dividends to Retained Earnings.)

(b) Enter the beginning balances in the accounts and post the journal entries to the stockholders” equity accounts. (Use T accounts.)

(c) Prepare the stockholders” equity section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2012.

(d) Calculate the payout ratio, earnings per share, and return on common stockholders” equity ratio. (Note: Use the common shares outstanding on January 1 and December 31 to determine the average shares outstanding.)

amsterdam ltd and berlin ltd are both engaged in retailing but they seem to take a d 535130

Amsterdam Ltd and Berlin Ltd are both engaged in retailing, but they seem to take a different approach to it according to the following information:

Ratio

Amsterdam Ltd

Berlin Ltd

Return on capital employed (ROCE)

20%

17%

Return on ordinary shareholders” funds (ROSF)

30%

18%

Average settlement period for trade receivables

63 days

21 days

Average settlement period for trade payables

50 days

45 days

Gross profit margin

40%

15%

Operating profit margin

10%

10%

Average inventories turnover period

52 days

25 days

Required :

Describe what this information indicates about the differences in approach between the two businesses. If one of them prides itself on personal service and one of them on competitive prices, which do you think is which and why?

conday and co ltd has been in operation for three years and produces antique reprodu 535131

Conday and Co. Ltd has been in operation for three years and produces antique reproduction furniture for the export market. The most recent set of financial statements for the business is as follows:

Statement of financial position as at 30 November

£000

ASSETS

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment (cost less depreciation)

Land and buildings

228

Plant and machinery

762

990

Current assets

Inventories

600

Trade receivables

820

1,420

Total assets

2,410

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

Equity

Ordinary shares of £1 each

700

Retained earnings

365

1,065

Non-current liabilities

Borrowings – 9% loan notes (Note 1)

200

Current liabilities

Trade payables

665

Taxation

48

Short-term borrowings (all bank overdraft)

432

1,145

Total equity and liabilities

2,410

Income statement for the year ended 30 November

£000

Revenue

2,600

Cost of sales

(1,620)

Gross profit

980

Selling and distribution expenses (Note 2)

(408)

Administration expenses

(194)

Operating profit

378

Finance expenses

(58)

Profit before taxation

320

Taxation

(95)

Profit for the year

225

Notes:

1 The loan notes are secured on the land and buildings.

2 Selling and distribution expenses include £170,000 in respect of bad debts.

3 A dividend of £160,000 was paid on the ordinary shares during the year.

4 The directors have invited an investor to take up a new issue of ordinary shares in the business at £6.40 each making a total investment of £200,000. The directors wish to use the funds to finance a programmed of further expansion.

Required :

(a) Analise the financial position and performance of the business and comment on any features that you consider to be significant.

(b) State, with reasons, whether or not the investor should invest in the business on the terms outlined.

the directors of helena beauty products ltd have been presented with the following a 535132

The directors of Helena Beauty Products Ltd have been presented with the following abridged financial statements:

Helena Beauty Products Ltd Income statement for the year ended 30 September

2009

2010

£000

£000

£000

£000

Sales revenue

3,600

3,840

Cost of sales

Opening inventories

320

400

Purchases

2,240

2,350

2,560

2,750

Closing inventories

(400)

(2,160)

(500)

(2,250)

Gross profit

1,440

1,590

Expenses

(1,360)

(1,500)

Profit

80

90

Statement of financial position as at 30 September

2009

2010

£000

£000

ASSETS

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment

1,900

1,800

Current assets

Inventories

400

500

Trade receivables

750

960

Cash at bank

8

4

1,158

1,464

3,058

3,324

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES
Equity

£1 ordinary shares

1,650

1,766

Reserves

1,018

1,108

2,668

2,874

Current liabilities

390

450

Total equity and liabilities

3,058

3,324

Required:

Using six ratios, comment on the profitability (three ratios) and efficiency (three ratios) of the business as revealed by the statements shown above.

on january 1 2012 the ledger of kindt company contained these liability accounts 535174

On January 1, 2012, the ledger of Kindt Company contained these liability accounts.

Accounts Payable

$42,500

Sales Taxes Payable

6,600

Unearned Service Revenue

19,000

During January, the following selected transactions occurred.

Jan. 1 Borrowed $18,000 in cash from Premier Bank on a 4-month, 5%, $18,000 note.

Jan. 5 Sold merchandise for cash totaling $6,254, which includes 6% sales taxes.

Jan. 12 Provided services for customers who had made advance payments of $10,000. (Credit Service Revenue.)

Jan. 14 Paid state treasurer”s department for sales taxes collected in December 2011, $6,600.

Jan. 20 Sold 500 units of a new product on credit at $48 per unit, plus 6% sales tax.

During January, the company”s employees earned wages of $70,000. Withholdings related to these wages were $5,355 for Social Security (FICA), $5,000 for federal income tax, and $1,500 for state income tax. The company owed no money related to these earnings for federal or state unemployment tax. Assume that wages earned during January will be paid during February. No entry had been recorded for wages or payroll tax expense as of January 31.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the January transactions.

(b) Journalize the adjusting entries at January 31 for the outstanding note payable and for wages expense and payroll tax expense.

(c) Prepare the current liabilities section of the balance sheet at January 31, 2012. Assume no change in Accounts Payable.

the following section is taken from paynter balance sheet at december 31 2011 535176

The following section is taken from Paynter balance sheet at December 31, 2011.

Current liabilities

Interest payable

$ 40,000

Long-term liabilities

Bonds payable (8%, due January 1, 2015)

500,000

Interest is payable annually on January 1. The bonds are callable on any annual interest date.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the payment of the bond interest on January 1, 2012.

(b) Assume that on January 1, 2012, after paying interest, Paynter calls bonds having a face value of $200,000. The call price is 103. Record the redemption of the bonds.

(c) Prepare the adjusting entry on December 31, 2012, to accrue the interest on the remaining bonds.

on october 1 2011 huber corp issued 700 000 5 10 year bonds at face value 535177

On October 1, 2011, Huber Corp. issued $700,000, 5%, 10-year bonds at face value. The bonds were dated October 1, 2011, and pay interest annually on October 1. Financial statements are prepared annually on December 31.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entry to record the issuance of the bonds.

(b) Prepare the adjusting entry to record the accrual of interest on December 31, 2011.

(c) Show the balance sheet presentation of bonds payable and bond interest payable on December 31, 2011.

(d) Prepare the journal entry to record the payment of interest on October 1, 2012.

(e) Prepare the adjusting entry to record the accrual of interest on December 31, 2012.

(f ) Assume that on January 1, 2013, Huber pays the accrued bond interest and calls the bonds. The call price is 104. Record the payment of interest and redemption of the bonds.

you have been presented with selected information taken from the financial statement 535179

You have been presented with selected information taken from the financial statements of Southwest Airlines Co., shown on the next page.

SOUTHWEST AIRLINES CO.
Balance Sheet (partial)
December 31
(in millions)

2008

2007

Total current assets

$ 2,893

$ 4,443

Noncurrent assets

11,415

12,329

Total assets

$14,308

$16,772

Current liabilities

$ 2,806

$ 4,836

Long-term liabilities

6,549

4,995

Total liabilities

9,355

9,831

Shareholders” equity

4,953

6,941

Total liabilities and shareholders” equity

$14,308

$16,772

Other information:

Net income (loss)

2008

2007

Income tax expense

$ 178

$ 645

Interest expense

100

413

Cash provided by operations

130

119

Capital expenditures

(1,521)

2,845

Cash dividends

923

1,331

13

14

Note 8. Leases

The majority of the Company”s terminal operations space, as well as 82 aircraft, were under operating leases at December 31, 2008. Future minimum lease payments under noncancelable operating leases are as follows: 2009, $376,000; 2010, $324,000; 2011, $249,000; 2012, $208,000; 2013, $152,000; after 2013, $728,000.

Instructions

(a) Calculate each of the following ratios for 2008 and 2007.

(1) Current ratio.

(2) Free cash flow.

(3) Debt to total assets.

(4) Times interest earned ratio.

(b) Comment on the trend in ratios.

(c) Read the company”s note on leases. If the operating leases had instead been accounted for like a purchase, assets and liabilities would increase by approximately $1,600 million. Recalculate the debt to total assets ratio for 2008 in light of this information, and discuss the implictions for analysis

the following information is taken from lima corp s balance sheet at december 31 201 535180

The following information is taken from Lima Corp.”s balance sheet at December 31, 2011.

Current liabilities

Interest payable

Long-term liabilities

$ 96,000

Bonds payable (4%, due January 1, 2022)

$2,400,000

Less: Discount on bonds payable

24,000

2,376,000

Interest is payable annually on January 1. The bonds are callable on any annual interest date. Lima uses straight-line amortization for any bond premium or discount. From December 31, 2011, the bonds will be outstanding for an additional 10 years (120 months).

Instructions

(Round all computations to the nearest dollar.)

(a) Journalize the payment of bond interest on January 1, 2012.

(b) Prepare the entry to amortize bond discount and to accrue the interest on December 31, 2012.

(c) Assume on January 1, 2013, after paying interest, that Lima Corp. calls bonds having a face value of $400,000. The call price is 102. Record the redemption of the bonds.

(d) Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2013, to amortize bond discount and to accrue interest on the remaining bonds.

wong corporation sold 2 000 000 7 5 year bonds on january 1 2012 535181

Wong Corporation sold $2,000,000, 7%, 5-year bonds on January 1, 2012. The bonds were dated January 1, 2012, and pay interest on January 1. Wong Corporation uses the straight-line method to amortize bond premium or discount.

Instructions

(a) Prepare all the necessary journal entries to record the issuance of the bonds and bond interest expense for 2012, assuming that the bonds sold at 102.

(b) Prepare journal entries as in part (a) assuming that the bonds sold at 97.

(c) Show the balance sheet presentation for the bond issue at December 31, 2012, using

(1) the 102 selling price, and then (2) the 97 selling price.

Trinh Co. sold $3,000,000, 8%, 10-year bonds on January 1, 2012. The bonds were dated January 1, 2012, and pay interest on January 1. The company uses straightline amortization on bond premiums and discounts. Financial statements are prepared annually.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record the issuance of the bonds assuming they sold at:

(1) 103.

(2) 98.

(b) Prepare amortization tables for both assumed sales for the first three interest payments.

(c) Prepare the journal entries to record interest expense for 2012 under both of the bond issuances assumed in part (a).

(d) Show the long-term liabilities balance sheet presentation for both of the bond issuances assumed in part (a) at December 31, 2012.

p10 10a on january 1 2012 ross corporation issued 1 800 000 face valu 535182

*P10-10A On January 1, 2012, Ross Corporation issued $1,800,000 face value, 5%, 10- year bonds at $1,667,518. This price resulted in an effective-interest rate of 6% on the bonds. Ross uses the effective-interest method to amortize bond premium or discount. The bonds pay annual interest January 1.

Instructions

(Round all computations to the nearest dollar.)

(a) Prepare the journal entry to record the issuance of the bonds on January 1, 2012.

(b) Prepare an amortization table through December 31, 2014 (three interest periods) for this bond issue.

(c) Prepare the journal entry to record the accrual of interest and the amortization of the discount on December 31, 2012.

(d) Prepare the journal entry to record the payment of interest on January 1, 2013.

(e) Prepare the journal entry to record the accrual of interest and the amortization of the discount on December 31, 2013.

p10 12a durango purchased a new piece of equipment to be used in its new facility 535184

*P10-12A Durango purchased a new piece of equipment to be used in its new facility. The $370,000 piece of equipment was purchased with a $50,000 down payment and with cash received through the issuance of a $320,000, 8%, 3-year mortgage note payable issued on October 1, 2012. The terms provide for quarterly installment payments of $30,259 on December 31, March 31, June 30, and September 30.

Instructions

(Round all computations to the nearest dollar.)

(a) Prepare an installment payments schedule for the first five payments of the notes payable.

(b) Prepare the journal entry related to the notes payable for December 31, 2012.

(c) Show the balance sheet presentation for this obligation for December 31, 2012. (Hint: Be sure to distinguish between the current and long-term portions of the note.)

p10 13a beryl forman has just approached a venture capitalist for financing for her 535185

*P10-13A Beryl Forman has just approached a venture capitalist for financing for her new business venture, the development of a local ski hill. On July 1, 2011, Beryl was loaned $150,000 at an annual interest rate of 7%. The loan is repayable over 5 years in annual installments of $36,584, principal and interest, due each June 30. The first payment is due June 30, 2012. Beryl uses the effective-interest method for amortizing debt. Her ski hill company”s year-end will be June 30.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an amortization schedule for the 5 years, 2011–2016. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar.

(b) Prepare all journal entries for Beryl Forman for the first 2 fiscal years ended June 30, 2012, and June 30, 2013. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar.

(c) Show the balance sheet presentation of the note payable as of June 30, 2013. (Hint: Be sure to distinguish between the current and long-term portions of the note.)

p10 1b on january 1 2012 the ledger of fleming company contained the following liabi 535186

P10-1B On January 1, 2012, the ledger of Fleming Company contained the following liability accounts.

Accounts Payable

$52,000

Sales Taxes Payable

8,200

Unearned Service Revenue

11,000

During January, the following selected transactions occurred.

Jan. 1 Borrowed $18,000 from TriCounty Bank on a 3-month, 7%, $18,000 note.

Jan. 5 Sold merchandise for cash totaling $18,480, which includes 5% sales taxes.

Jan. 12 Provided services for customers who had made advance payments of $8,000. (Credit Service Revenue.)

Jan. 14 Paid state revenue department for sales taxes collected in December 2011 ($8,200).

Jan. 20 Sold 500 units of a new product on credit at $50 per unit, plus 5% sales tax.

During January, the company”s employees earned wages of $54,000. Withholdings related to these wages were $4,131 for Social Security (FICA), $3,900 for federal income tax, and $1,200 for state income tax. The company owed no money related to these earnings for federal or state unemployment tax. Assume that wages earned during January will be paid during February. No entry had been recorded for wages or payroll tax expense as of January 31.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the January transactions.

(b) Journalize the adjusting entries at January 31 for the outstanding notes payable and for wages expense and payroll tax expense.

(c) Prepare the current liabilities section of the balance sheet at January 31, 2012. Assume no change in accounts payable.

p10 2b majestic mountain bikes markets mountain bike tours to clients vacationing in 535187

P10-2B Majestic Mountain Bikes markets mountain-bike tours to clients vacationing in various locations in the mountains of Colorado. In preparation for the upcoming summer biking season, Majestic entered into the following transactions related to notes payable.

Mar. 1 Purchased Puma bikes for use as rentals by issuing a $9,000, 3-month, 6% note payable that is due June 1.

Mar. 31 Recorded accrued interest for the Puma note.

Apr. 1 Issued a $45,000 9-month note for the purchase of mountain property on which to build bike trails. The note bears 8% interest and is due January 1.

Apr. 30 Recorded accrued interest for the Puma note and the land note.

May 1 Issued a 4-month note to Jackson State Bank for $12,000 at 6%. The funds will be used for working capital for the beginning of the season; the note is due September 1.

May 31 Recorded accrued interest for all three notes.

June 1 Paid principal and interest on the Puma note.

June 30 Recorded accrued interest for the land note and the Jackson State Bank note.

Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries for the transactions noted above.

(b) Post the above entries to the Notes Payable, Interest Payable, and Interest Expense accounts. (Use T accounts.)

(c) Assuming that Majestic”s year-end is June 30, show the balance sheet presentation of notes payable and interest payable at that date.

(d) How much interest expense relating to notes payable did Majestic incur during the year?

p10 4b on april 1 2011 cmv corp issued 600 000 8 5 year bonds at face value 535189

P10-4B On April 1, 2011, CMV Corp. issued $600,000, 8%, 5-year bonds at face value. The bonds were dated April 1, 2011, and pay interest annually on April 1. Financial statements are prepared annually on December 31.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entry to record the issuance of the bonds.

(b) Prepare the adjusting entry to record the accrual of interest on December 31, 2011.

(c) Show the balance sheet presentation of bonds payable and bond interest payable on December 31, 2011.

(d) Prepare the journal entry to record the payment of interest on April 1, 2012.

(e) Prepare the adjusting entry to record the accrual of interest on December 31, 2012.

(f ) Assume that on January 1, 2013, CMV pays the accrued bond interest and calls the bonds. The call price is 103. Record the payment of interest and redemption of the bonds.

p10 6b the following selected information was taken from the financial statements of 535191

P10-6B The following selected information was taken from the financial statements of Krispy Kreme Doughnuts, Inc.

KRISPY KREME DOUGHNUTS, INC.

Balance Sheet (partial)

(in thousands)

Jan. 31, 2010

Feb. 1, 2009

Total current assets

$ 59,223

$ 75,806

Capital assets and other long-term assets

106,053

119,120

$165,276

$194,926

Current liabilities

$ 37,673

$ 39,616

Long-term liabilities

64,836

97,555

Total liabilities

102,509

137,171

Shareholders” equity

62,767

57,755

Total liabilities and shareholders” equity

$165,276

$194,926

Other information:

2010

2009

Interest expense

$ 10,685

$ 10,679

Tax expense (benefit)

575

(503)

Net loss

(157)

(4,061)

Cash provided by operations

19,827

16,593

Capital expenditures

7,967

4,694

Cash dividends

-0-

-0-

Note 10. Leases

The Company leases equipment and facilities under both capital and operating leases. The approximate future minimum lease payments under non-cancelable (operating) leases as of January 31, 2010, are set forth in the following table:

Amount

Fiscal Year Ending in

in thousands)

2011

$ 8,866

2012

7,972

2013

6,769

2014

5,830

2015

5,420

Thereafter

56,667

$91,524

Rent expense, net of rental income, totaled $9.6 million in fiscal 2010, $11.8 million in fiscal 2009 and $14.8 million in fiscal 2008.

Instructions

(a) Calculate each of the following ratios for 2010 and 2009.

(1) Current ratio.

(2) Free cash flow.

(3) Debt to total assets ratio.

(b) Comment on Krispy Kreme”s liquidity and solvency.

(c) Read the company”s note on leases (Note 10). If the operating leases had instead been accounted for like a purchase, assets and liabilities would have increased by approximately $68,000,000. Recalculate the debt to total assets ratio for 2010 and discuss the implications for analysis.

p10 7b the following section is taken from centralia oil company s balance sheet at 535192

*P10-7B The following section is taken from Centralia Oil Company”s balance sheet at December 31, 2011.

Current liabilities

Interest payable

$ 216,000

Long-term liabilities

Bonds payable (6%, due January 1, 2022)

$3,600,000

Add: Premium on bonds payable

280,000

3,880,000

Interest is payable annually on January 1. The bonds are callable on any annual interest date. Centralia uses straight-line amortization for any bond premium or discount. From December 31, 2011, the bonds will be outstanding for an additional 10 years (120 months).

Instructions

(Round all computations to the nearest dollar.)

(a) Journalize the payment of bond interest on January 1, 2012.

(b) Prepare the entry to amortize bond premium and to accrue interest due on December 31, 2012.

(c) Assume on January 1, 2013, after paying interest, that Centralia Company calls bonds having a face value of $1,800,000. The call price is 102. Record the redemption of the bonds.

(d) Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2013, to amortize bond premium and to accrue interest on the remaining bonds.

p10 9b marini corporation sold 2 600 000 9 20 year bonds on december 31 2011 535194

*P10-9B Marini Corporation sold $2,600,000, 9%, 20-year bonds on December 31, 2011. The bonds were dated December 31, 2011, and pay interest on December 31. The company uses straight-line amortization for premiums and discounts. Financial statements are prepared annually.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entry to record the issuance of the bonds assuming they sold at:

(1) 98.

(2) 104.

(b) Prepare amortization tables for both of the assumed sales for the first three interest payments.

(c) Prepare the journal entries to record interest expense for the first two interest payments under both of the bond issuances assumed in part (a).

(d) Show the long-term liabilities balance sheet presentation for both of the bond issuances assumed in part (a) at December 31, 2012.

p10 10b on january 1 2012 pedraza corporation issued 1 000 000 face value 535195

*P10-10B On January 1, 2012, Pedraza Corporation issued $1,000,000 face value, 6%, 10-year bonds at $1,077,217. This price resulted in an effective-interest rate of 5% on the bonds. Pedraza uses the effective-interest method to amortize bond premium or discount. The bonds pay annual interest January 1.

Instructions

(Round all computations to the nearest dollar.)

(a) Prepare the journal entry to record the issuance of the bonds on January 1, 2012.

(b) Prepare an amortization table through December 31, 2014 (three interest periods) for this bond issue.

(c) Prepare the journal entry to record the accrual of interest and the amortization of the premium on December 31, 2012.

(d) Prepare the journal entry to record the payment of interest on January 1, 2013.

(e) Prepare the journal entry to record the accrual of interest and the amortization of the premium on December 31, 2013.

p10 11b on january 1 2012 witzling company issued 4 000 000 face value 535196

*P10-11B On January 1, 2012, Witzling Company issued $4,000,000 face value, 8%, 15-year bonds at $3,391,514. This price resulted in an effective-interest rate of 10% on the bonds. Witzling uses the effective-interest method to amortize bond premium or discount. The bonds pay annual interest January 1.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record the following transactions.

(1) The issuance of the bonds on January 1, 2012.

(2) The accrual of interest and the amortization of the discount on December 31, 2012.

(3) The payment of interest on January 1, 2013.

(4) The accrual of interest and the amortization of the discount on December 31, 2013.

(b) Show the proper long-term liabilities balance sheet presentation for the liability for bonds payable at December 31, 2013.

(c) Provide the answers to the following questions in narrative form.

(1) What amount of interest expense is reported for 2013?

(2) Would the bond interest expense reported in 2013 be the same as, greater than, or less than the amount that would be reported if the straight-line method of amortization were used?

(3) Determine the total cost of borrowing over the life of the bond.

(4) Would the total bond interest expense be greater than, the same as, or less than the total interest expense that would be reported if the straight-line method of amortization were used?

forest plc acquired 80 of the ordinary shares of bulwell plc some years ago at acqui 535058

Forest plc acquired 80% of the ordinary shares of Bulwell plc some years ago. At acquisition, the fair values of the assets of Bulwell plc were the same as their carrying value. Bulwell plc manufacture plant and equipment.

On 1 January 20X3, Bulwell sold an item of plant & equipment to Forest plc for $2 million. Forest plc depreciate plant and equipment at 10% per annum on cost, and charge this expense to cost of sales. Bulwell plc made a gross profit of 30% on the sale of the plant and equipment to Forest plc.

The income statements of Forest and Bulwell for the year ended 31 December 20X3 are:

Forest

Bulwell

$000

$000

Revenue

21,300

8,600

Cost of sales

14,900

6,020

Gross profit

6,400

2,580

Other operating expenses

3,700

1,750

Profit before tax

2,700

830

Taxation

820

250

Profit after tax

1,880

580

Required:

Prepare an income statement for the Forest plc group for the year ended 31 December 20X3.

the following is an extract from the notes to the 1999 consolidated financial statem 535059

The following is an extract from the notes to the 1999 consolidated financial statements of the Chugoku Electric Power Company, Incorporated.

Equity method

Investments in four (three in 1998) affiliated companies (20% to 50% owned) are accounted for by the equity method and, accordingly, are stated at cost adjusted for equity in undistributed earnings and losses from the date of acquisition.

(a) What is another name for most companies which are 20% to 50% owned?

(b) What is meant by the word ‘equity” in the above statement?

(c) What are the entries in the statement of comprehensive income under the equity method of accounting?

(d) What are the differences between the equity method and consolidation?

the following are the financial statements of the parent company swish plc a subsidi 535065

The following are the financial statements of the parent company Swish plc, a subsidiary company Broom and an associate company Handle.

Statements of financial position as at 31 December 20X3

Swish
£

Broom
£

Handle
£

ASSETS

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment at cost

320,000

180,000

100,000

Depreciation

200,000

70,000

21,000

120,000

110,000

79,000

Investment in Broom

140,000

Investment in Handle

40,000

Current assets

Inventories

120,000

60,000

36,000

Trade receivables

130,000

70,000

36,000

Current account – Broom

15,000

Current account – Handle

3,000

Bank

24,000

7,000

6,000

Total current assets

292,000

137,000

78,000

Total assets

592,000

247,000

157,000

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

£1 ordinary shares

250,000

60,000

50,000

General reserve

30,000

20,000

12,000

Retained earnings

150,000

120,000

50,000

430,000

200,000

112,000

Current liabilities

Trade payables

132,000

25,000

34,000

Taxation payable

30,000

7,000

8,000

Current account – Swish

15,000

3,000

Total equity and liabilities

592,000

247,000

157,000

Statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X3

£

£

£

Sales

300,000

160,000

100,000

Cost of sales

90,000

80,000

40,000

Gross profit

210,000

80,000

60,000

Expenses

95,000

50,000

40,000

Dividends paid (shown in equity)

40,000

10,000

8,000

Dividends received from Broom and Handle

11,000

NIL

10,000

Profit before tax

126,000

30,000

30,000

Income tax expense

30,000

7,000

8,000

Profit for the period

96,000

23,000

22,000

Dividend paid (shown in equity)

40,000

10,000

8,000

Swish acquired 90% of the shares in Broom on 1 January 20X1 when the balance on the retained earnings of Broom was £60,000 and the balance on the general reserve of Broom was £16,000. Swish also acquired 25% of the shares in Handle on 1 January 20X2 when the balance on Handle’s accumulated retained profits was £30,000 and the general reserve £8,000.

During the year Swish sold Broom goods for £16,000, which included a mark-up of one-third. 80% of these goods were still in inventor y at the end of the year. Non-controlling interests are measured using method 1.

Required:

(a) Prepare a consolidated statement of comprehensive income, including the associated company Handle’s results, for the year ended 31 December 20X3.

(b) Prepare a consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 December 20X3. The group policy is to measure non-controlling interests using method 1.

set out below are the financial statements of ant co its subsidiary bug co and an as 535066

Set out below are the financial statements of Ant Co., its subsidiary Bug Co. and an associated company Nit Co. for the accounting year-end 31 December 20X9.

Statements of financial position as at 31 December 20X9

Ant

Bug

Nit

$

$

$

ASSETS

Non-cur rent assets

Property, plant and equipment at cost

240,000

135,000

75,000

Depreciation

150,000

52,500

15,750

90,000

82,500

59,250

Investment in Bug

90,000

Investment in Nit

30,000

Current assets

Inventories

105,000

45,000

27,000

Trade receivables

98,250

52,500

27,000

Current account – Bug

11,250

Current account – Nit

2,250

Bank

17,250

5,250

4,500

Total current assets

234,000

102,750

58,500

Total assets

444,000

185,250

117,750

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

$1 ordinary shares

187,500

45,000

37,500

General reserve

22,500

15,000

9,000

Retained earnings

112,500

90,000

37,500

322,500

150,000

84,000

Current liabilities

Trade payables

99,000

18,750

25,500

Taxation payable

22,500

5,250

6,000

Current account – Ant

11,250

2,250

Total equity and liabilities

444,000

185,250

117,750

Statements of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X9

$

$

$

Sales

225,000

120,000

75,000

Cost of sales

67,500

60,000

30,000

Gross profit

157,500

60,000

45,000

Expenses

70,500

37,500

30,000

Dividends received

7,500

NIL

7,500

Profit before tax

94,500

22,500

22,500

Taxation

22,500

5,250

6,000

Profit for the year

72,000

17,250

16,500

Dividends paid in year

30,000

7,500

6,000

Ant Co. acquired 80% of the shares in Bug Co. on 1 January 20X7 when the balance on the retained earnings of Bug Co. was $45,000 and the balance on the general reserve of Bug Co. was $12,000. The fair value of the non-controlling interest in Bug on 1 January 20X7 was £21,000. Group policy is to measure non-controlling interests using method 2. Ant Co. also acquired 25% of the shares in Nit Co. on 1 January 20X8 when the balance on Nit’s retained earnings was $22,500 and the general reserve $6,000.

During the year Ant Co. sold Bug Co. goods for $12,000, which included a mark-up of one-third. 90% of these goods were still in inventor y at the end of the year.

Required:

(a) Prepare a consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the year ending 31/12/20X9, including the associated company Nit’s results.

(b) Prepare a consolidated statement of financial position at 31/12/20X9, including the associated company.

alpha has owned 75 of the equity shares of beta since the incorporation of beta 535067

Alpha has owned 75% of the equity shares of Beta since the incorporation of Beta. Therefore, Alpha has prepared consolidated financial statements for some years. On 1 July 20X6 Alpha purchased 40% of the equity shares of Gamma. The statements of comprehensive income and summarized statements of changes in equity of the three entities for the year ended 30 September 20X6 are given below:

Alpha

Beta

Gamma

$”000

$”000

$”000

Revenue (Note 1)

150,000

100,000)

96,000

Cost of sales

(110,000)

(78,000)

(66,000)

Gross profit

40,000

22,000

30,000

Distribution costs

(7,000)

(6,000)

(6,000)

Administrative expenses

(8,000)

(7,000)

(7,200)

Profit from operations

25,000

9,000

16,800

Investment income (Note 2)

6,450

Nil

Nil

Finance cost

(5,000)

(3,000)

(4,200)

Profit before tax

26,450

6,000

12,600

Income tax expense

(7,000)

(1,800)

(3,600)

Net profit for the period

19,450

4,200

9,000

Summarized statements of changes in equity

Balance at 1 October 20X5

122,000

91,000

82,000

Net profit for the period

19,450

4,200

9,000

Dividends paid on 31 July 20X6

(6,500)

(3,000)

(5,000)

Balance at 30 September 20X6

134,950

92,200

86,000

Notes to the financial statements Note 1– Inter-company sales

Alpha sells products to Beta and Gamma, making a profit of 25% on the cost of the products sold. All the sales to Gamma took place in the post-acquisition period. Details of the purchases of the products by Beta and Gamma, together with the amounts included in opening and closing inventories in respect of the products, are given below:

Purchased in

Included in

Included in closing

year

opening inventor y

inventor y

$”000

$”000

$”000

Beta

20,000

2,000

3,000

Gamma

10,000

Nil

1,500

There were no other inter-company sales between Alpha, Beta or Gamma during the period

Note 2 – Investment income

Alpha”s investment income includes dividends received from Beta and Gamma and interest receivable from Beta. The dividend received from Gamma has been credited to the statement of comprehensive income of Alpha without time apportionment. The interest receivable is in respect of a loan of $20 million to Beta at a fixed rate of interest of 6% per annum. The loan has been outstanding for the whole of the year ended 30 September 20X6.

Note 3 – Details of acquisitions by Alpha

Entity

Date of

Fair value adjustment

acquisition

at date of acquisition

$”000

Beta

1 July 20X5

Nil

Gamma

1 June 20X6

6,400

There has been no impairment of the goodwill arising on the acquisition of Beta or of the investment in Gamma since the dates of acquisition of either entit

The fair value adjustment has the effect of increasing the fair value of property, plant and equipment above the carrying value in the individual financial statements of Gamma. Group policy is to depreciate property, plant and equipment on a monthly basis over its estimated useful economic life. The estimated life of the property, plant and equipment of Gamma that was subject to the fair value adjustment is five years, with depreciation charged against cost of sales.

Note 4 – other information

? The purchase of shares in Gamma entitled Alpha to appoint a representative to the board of directors of Gamma. This meant that Alpha was potentially able to participate in, and significantly influence, the policy decisions of Gamma.

? No other investor is able to control the operating and financial policies of Gamma, but on one occasion since 1 July 20X6 Gamma made a policy decision with which Alpha did not fully agree.

? Alpha has not entered into a contractual relationship with any other investor to exercise joint control over the operating and financial policies of Gamma.

? All equity shares in Beta carry one vote at general meetings.

? The policy of Alpha regarding the treatment of equity investments in its consolidated financial statements is as follows:

– Subsidiaries are fully consolidated.

– Joint ventures are proportionally consolidated.

– Associates are equity accounted.

– Other investments are treated as available for sale financial assets.

Your assistant has been reading the working papers for the consolidated financial statements of Alpha for previous years. He has noticed that Beta has been consolidated as a subsidiary and has expressed the view that this must be because Alpha owns more than 50% of its shares. He has further stated that Gamma should be treated as an available-for-sale financial asset since Alpha is unable to control its operating and financial policies.

Required:

(a) Prepare the consolidated statement of comprehensive income and consolidated statement of changes in equity of Alpha for the year ended 30 September 20X6. Notes to the consolidated statement of comprehensive income are not required. Ignore deferred tax.

(b) Assess the observations of your assistant regarding the appropriate method of consolidating Beta and Gamma. Your assessment need NOT include an explanation of the detailed mechanics of consolidation. You should refer to the provisions of international financial reporting standards where you consider they will assist your explanation.

the statements of comprehensive income for continent plc island ltd and river ltd fo 535069

The statements of comprehensive income for Continent plc, Island Ltd and River Ltd for the year ended 31 December 20X9 were as follows:

Continent plc

Island Ltd

River Ltd

B

B

B

Revenue

825,000

220,000

82,500

Cost of sales

(616,000)

(55,000)

(8,250)

Gross profit

209,000

165,000

74,250

Administration costs

(33,495)

(18,700)

(3,850)

Distribution costs

(11,000)

(14,300)

(2,750)

Dividends receivable from Island and River

4,620

Profit before tax

169,125

132,000

67,650

Income tax

(55,000)

(33,000)

(11,000)

Profit after tax

114,125

99,000

56,650

Continent plc acquired 80% of Island Ltd for A27,500 on 1 January 20X3, when Island Lid”s retained earnings were A22,000 and share capital was A5,500. During the year, Island Ltd sold goods costing A2,750 to Continent plc for A3,850. At the year end, 10% of these goods were still in Continent plc”s inventor y.

Continent plc acquired 40% of River Ltd for A100,000 on 1 January 20X5, when River Ltd”s share capital and reserves totaled A41,250 (share capital consisted of 11,000 50c shares). During the year River Ltd sold goods costing A1,650 to Continent plc for A2,200. At the yearend, 50% of these goods were still in Continent plc”s inventor y.

Goodwill in Island Ltd had suffered impairment charges in previous years totaling A2,200 and Goodwill in River Ltd impairment charges totaling A7,700. Impairment has continued during 2009 reducing the Goodwill in Island by A550 and the Goodwill in River by A3,850. Continent plc includes in its revenue management fees of A5,500 charged to Island Ltd and A2,750 charged to River Ltd. Both companies treat the charge as an administration cost.

Non-controlling interests are measured using method 1.

Required:

Prepare Continent plc”s consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X9.

the statements of comprehensive income for highway plc road ltd and lane ltd for the 535070

The statements of comprehensive income for Highway plc, Road Ltd and Lane Ltd for the year ended 31 December 20X9 were as follows:

Highway plc

Road Ltd

Lane Ltd

$

$

$

Revenue

184,000

152,000

80,000

Cost of sales

(48,000)

(24,000)

(16,000)

Gross profit

136,000

128,000

64,000

Administration costs

(13,680)

(11,200)

(20,800)

Distribution costs

(11,200)

(17,600)

(8,000)

Dividends receivable from Road

2,480

Profit before tax

113,600

99,200

35,200

Income tax

(32,000)

(8,000)

(4,800)

Profit for the period

81,600

91,200

30,400

Highway plc acquired 80% of Road Ltd for $160,000 on 1.1.20X6 when Road Ltd”s share capital was $64,000 and reserves were $16,000. Highway plc acquired 30% of Lane Ltd for $40,000 on 1.1.20X7 when Lane Ltd”s share capital was $8,000 and reserves were $8,000.

Goodwill of Road Ltd had suffered impairment charges of $14,400 in previous years and $4,800 was to be charged in the current year. Goodwill of Lane Ltd had suffered impairment charges of $3,520 in previous years and $1,760 was to be charged in the current year.

During the year Road Ltd sold goods to Highway plc for $8,000. These goods had cost Road Ltd $1,600. 50% were still in Highway”s inventor y at the year end.

During the year Lane Ltd sold goods to Highway plc for $6,400. These goods had cost Lane Ltd $3,200. 50% were still in Highway”s inventor y at the year end.

Highway”s revenue included management fees of 5% of Road and Lane”s turnover. Both of those companies have treated the charge as an administration cost. Non-controlling interests are measured using method 1.

Required:

Prepare Highway”s consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31.12.20X9.

the following are the financial statements of the parent company alpha plc a subsidi 535071

The following are the financial statements of the parent company Alpha plc, a subsidiary company Beta and an associate company Gamma.

Statements of financial position as at 31 December 20X9

Alpha

Beta

Gamma

ASSETS

£

£

£

Non-current assets

Land at cost

540,000

256,500

202,500

Investment in Beta

216,000

Investment in Gamma

156,600

Current assets

Inventories

162,000

54,000

135,000

Trade receivables

108,000

72,900

91,800

Dividend receivable from Beta

12,420

Current account – Beta

10,800

Current account – Gamma

13,500

Cash

237,600

62,100

67,500

Total current assets

544,320

189,000

294,300

Total assets

1,456,920

445,500

496,800

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

£1 shares

540,000

67,500

27,000

Retained earnings

769,500

329,400

391,500

1,309,500

396,900

418,500

Current liabilities

Trade payables

93,420

24,300

59,400

Dividends payable

54,000

13,500

5,400

Current account – Alpha

10,800

13,500

Total equity and liabilities

1,456,920

445,500

496,800

On 1 January 20X5 Alpha plc acquired 80% of Beta plc for £216,000 when Beta plc’s share capital and reserves were £81,000, and 30% of Gamma Ltd for £156,600 when Gamma Ltd’s share capital and reserves were £40,500. The fair value of the land at the date of acquisition was £337,500 in Beta plc and £270,000 in Gamma Ltd. Both companies have kept land at cost in their statement of financial position. All other assets are recorded at fair value. There have been no further share issues or purchases of land since the date of acquisition.

At the year end, Alpha plc has inventor y acquired from Beta plc and Gamma Ltd. Beta plc had invoiced the inventor y to Alpha plc for £54,000 – the cost to Beta plc had been £40,500 and Gamma Ltd had invoiced Alpha plc for £13,500 – the cost to Gamma Ltd had been £8,100. Goodwill has been impaired by £52,650. The whole of the impairment relates to Beta.

Non-controlling interests are measured using method 1.

Required:

Prepare Alpha plc’s consolidated statement of financial position as at 31.12.20X9.

the following are the statements of financial position of garden plc its subsidiary 535072

The following are the statements of financial position of Garden plc, its subsidiary Rose Ltd and its associate Petal Ltd:

Statements of financial position as at 31 December 20X9

Garden

Rose

Petal

ASSETS

£

£

£

Non-current assets

Land at cost

240,000

84,000

Land at valuation

180,000

Investment in Rose

300,000

Investment in Petal

72,000

Investments

18,000

Current assets

Inventories

15,000

99,000

5,400

Trade receivables

33,000

98,400

1,200

Current account – Rose

18,000

Current account – Petal

2,400

Cash

6,600

67,200

300

Total current assets

75,000

264,600

6,900

Total assets

705,000

444,600

90,900

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

£1 shares

300,000

120,000

30,000

Revaluation reserve

90,000

Retained earnings

270,000

216,000

57,600

570,000

426,000

87,600

Current liabilities

Trade payables

135,000

3,600

900

Current account – Garden

15,000

2,400

Total equity and liabilities

705,000

444,600

90,900

On 1 January 20X3 Garden plc acquired 75% of Rose Ltd for £300,000 when Rose’s share capital and reserves were £252,000. At the date of acquisition, the net book value of Rose’s non-current assets were £90,000. Rose immediately included the revaluation in its statement of financial position.

On 1 January 20X5 Garden acquired 20% of Petal Ltd for £72,000 when the fair value of Petal’s net assets were £42,000. Goodwill has been impaired in Rose by £77,700 and in Petal by £31,800. At the year end, Garden plc has inventor y acquired from Rose and Petal. Rose had invoiced the inventor y to Garden for £6,000 – the cost to Rose had been £1,200 – and Petal had invoiced Garden for £3,000 – the cost to Petal had been £1,800.

Non-controlling interests are measured using method 1.

Required:

Prepare Garden plc’s consolidated statement of financial position as at 31.12.20X9.

on 1 january 20×0 walpole ltd acquired 90 of the ordinary shares of a french subsidi 535075

On 1 January 20X0 Walpole Ltd acquired 90% of the ordinary shares of a French subsidiary Paris SA. At that date the balance on the retained earnings of Paris SA was A10,000. The non-controlling interest in Paris was measured using method 1. No shares have been issued by Paris since acquisition. The summarized statements of comprehensive income and statements of financial position of Walpole Ltd and Paris SA at 31 December 20X2 were as follows:

Statements of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X2

Walpole Ltd

Paris SA

£000

B000

Sales

317,200

200,000

Opening inventories

50,000

22,000

Purchases

180,000

90,000

Closing inventories

60,000

12,000

Cost of sales

170,000

100,000

Gross profit

147,200

100,000

Dividend received from Paris SA

1,800

NIL

Depreciation

30,000

30,000

Other expenses

15,000

7,000

Interest paid

6,000

3,000

Total expenses

51,000

40,000

Profit before taxation

98,000

60,000

Taxation

21,000

15,000

Profit after taxation

77,000

45,000

Dividend paid

20,000

10,000

Statement of financial position as at 31 December 20X2

£000

B000

Non-current assets

94,950

150,000

Investment in Paris SA

41,050

Current assets:

Inventories

60,000

12,000

Trade receivables

59,600

40,000

Paris SA

2,400

Cash

11,000

11,000

Total current assets

133,000

63,000

Current liabilities:

Trade payables

45,000

18,000

Walpole Ltd

12,000

Taxation

21,000

15,000

Total current liabilities

66,000

45,000

Debentures

40,000

10,000

Total assets less liabilities

163,000

158,000

Share capital

80,000

60,000

Share premium

6,000

20,000

Revaluation reserve

10,000

12,000

Retained earnings

67,000

66,000

163,000

158,000

At 1 January 20X0

£1 = A2

Average for the year ending 31 December 20X2

£1 = A4

At 31 December 20X1/1 January 20X2

£1 = A3

At 31 December 20X2

£1 = A5

The following information is also available:

(i) The revaluation reserve in Paris SA arose from the revaluation of non-current assets on 11/1/20X2.

(ii) No impairment of goodwill has occurred since acquisition.

(iii) Exchange rates were as follows:

Required:

Assuming that the functional currency of Paris SA is the euro, prepare the consolidated accounts for the Walpole group at 31 December 20X2.

assume that the company paid the maximum legal dividend each year under normal circu 535102

Iqbal Ltd started trading on 1 January 2006. During the first five years of trading, the following occurred:

Year ended
31 December

Trading
profit/(loss)
£

Profit/(loss) on sale of
non-current assets
£

Upward revaluation of
non-current assets
£

2006

(15,000)

2007

8,000

10,000

2008

15,000

5,000

2009

20,000

(6,000)

2010

22,000

Required :

Assume that the company paid the maximum legal dividend each year. Under normal rcumstances, how much would each year”s dividend be?

presented below is a draft set of simplified financial statements for pear limited f 535103

Presented below is a draft set of simplified financial statements for Pear Limited for the year ended 30 September 2010.

£000

Revenue

1,456

Cost of sales

(768)

Gross profit

688

Salaries

(220)

Depreciation

(249)

Other operating costs

(131)

Operating profit

88

Interest payable

(15)

Profit before taxation

73

Taxation at 30%

(22)

Profit for the year

51

Statement of financial position as at 30 September 2010

£000

ASSETS

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment

Cost

1,570

Depreciation

(690)

880

Current assets

Inventories

207

Trade receivables

182

Cash at bank

21

410

Total assets

1,290

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

Equity

Share capital

300

Share premium account

300

Retained earnings at beginning of year

104

Profit for year

51

755

Non-current liabilities

Borrowings (10% loan notes repayable 2014)

Current liabilities

88

Trade parables

20

Other parables

22

Taxation

105

Borrowings (bank overdraft)

235

Total equity and liabilities

1,290

The following information is available:

1 Depreciation has not been charged on office equipment with a carrying amount of £100,000.

This class of assets is depreciated at 12 per cent a year using the reducing-balance method.

2 A new machine was purchased, on credit, for £30,000 and delivered on 29 September 2010 but has not been included in the financial statements. (Ignore depreciation.)

3 A sales invoice to the value of £18,000 for September 2010 has been omitted from the financial statements. (The cost of sales figure is stated correctly.)

4 A dividend of £25,000 had been approved by the shareholders before 30 September 2010, but was unpaid at that date. This is not reflected in the financial statements.

5 The interest payable on the loan notes for the second half-year was not paid until 1 October 2010 and has not been included in the financial statements.

6 An allowance for trade receivables is to be made at the level of 2 per cent of trade receivables.

7 An invoice for electricity to the value of £2,000 for the quarter ended 30 September 2010 arrived on 4 October and has not been included in the financial statements.

8 The charge for taxation will have to be amended to take account of the above information.

Make the simplifying assumption that tax is payable shortly after the end of the year, at the rate of 30 per cent of the profit before tax.

Required :

Prepare a revised set of financial statements for the year ended 30 September 2010 incorporating

the additional information in 1 to 8 above. (Work to the nearest £1,000.)

thor plc has the following events occur between the end of the reporting period and 535110

Thor plc has the following events occur between the end of the reporting period and the date the financial statements were authorised for issue:

1 The discovery that, during the reporting period, an employee had defrauded the business of £120,000.

2 The bankruptcy of a customer who owes the business £280,000. This sum was outstanding at the end of the reporting period.

3 A fire occurring after the reporting period that destroyed a large factory owned by Thor plc.

4 An increase in the value of land held by Thor plc by £10 million resulted from a change in the planning laws, which occurred after the end of the reporting period.

According to IAS 10 (Events after the Reporting Period), how should each of these events be

treated?

you have overheard the following statements 535112

You have overheard the following statements:

(a) ‘The role of independent auditors is to prepare the financial statements of the company.”

(b) ‘International Accounting Standards (IASs) apply to all companies, but Stock Exchange listed companies must also adhere to International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs).”

(c) ‘All listed companies in European Union states must follow IASs and IFRSs.”

(d) ‘According to IAS 1, companies” financial statements must show an “accurate representation” of what they purport to show.”

(e) ‘IAS 1 leaves it to individual companies to decide the format that they use in the statement of financial position.”

(f ) ‘The statement of changes in equity deals with unrealised profits and gains, for example an upward revaluation of a non-current asset.”

(g) ‘If a majority of the shareholders of a listed company agree, the company need not produce a full set of financial statements, but can just produce summary financial statements.” Critically comment on each of these statements.

the following information was extracted from the financial statements of i ching boo 535113

The following information was extracted from the financial statements of I. Ching (Booksellers) plc for the year to 31 December 2009:

£m

Finance charges

40

Cost of sales

460

Distribution expenses

110

Revenue

943

Administrative expenses

212

Other expenses

25

Gain on revaluation of property, plant and equipment

20

Loss on foreign currency translations on foreign operations

15

Tax on profit for the year

24

Tax on other components of comprehensive income

1

Prepare a statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 2009 that is set out in accordance with the requirements of IAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements.

manet plc had the following share capital and reserves as at 1 january 2009 535114

Manet plc had the following share capital and reserves as at 1 January 2009:

£m

Share capital (£0.25 ordinary shares)

250

Share premium account

50

Revaluation reserve

120

Currency translation reserve

15

Retained earnings

380

Total equity

815

During the year to 31 December 2009, the company revalued property, plant and equipment upwards by £30 million and made a loss on foreign exchange translation of foreign operations of £5 million. The company made a profit for the year from normal operations of £160 million and the dividend was £80 million.

Prepare a statement of changes in equity in accordance with the requirements of IAS 1 Presentation of Financial statements.

the following information has been taken from the financial statements of juno plc f 535121

The following information has been taken from the financial statements of Juno plc for last year and the year before last:

Year before last

Last year

£m

£m

Operating profit

156

187

Depreciation charged in arriving at operating profit

47

55

Inventories held at end of year

27

31

Trade receivables at end of year

24

23

Trade payables at end of year

15

17

Required :

What is the figure for cash generated from the operations for Juno plc for last year?

torrent plc s income statement for the year ended 31 december 2010 and the statement 535122

Torrent plc”s income statement for the year ended 31 December 2010 and the statements of financial position as at 31 December 2009 and 2010 are as follows:

Income statement for the year ended 31 December 2010

£m

Revenue

623

Cost of sales

(353)

Gross profit

270

Distribution expenses

(71)

Administrative expenses

(30)

Rental income

27

Operating profit

196

Interest payable

(26)

Profit before taxation

170

Taxation

(36)

Profit for the year

134

Statements of financial position as at 31 December 2009 and 2010

2009

2010

£m

£m

ASSETS

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment

Land and buildings

310

310

Plant and machinery

325

314

635

624

Current assets

Inventories

41

35

Trade receivables

139

145

180

180

Total assets

815

804

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

Equity

Called-up ordinary share capital

200

300

Share premium account

40

Revaluation reserve

69

9

Retained earnings

123

197

432

506

Non-current liabilities

Borrowings – loan notes

Current liabilities

Borrowings (all bank overdraft)

56

89

Trade payables

54

41

Taxation

23

18

133

148

Total equity and liabilities

815

804

During 2010, the business spent £67 million on additional plant and machinery. There were no other non-current asset acquisitions or disposals.

There was no share issue for cash during the year. The interest payable expense was equal in amount to the cash outflow. A dividend of £60 million was paid.

Required :

Prepare the statement of cash flows for Torrent plc for the year ended 31 December 2010.

chen plc s income statements for the years ended 31 december 2009 and 2010 and the s 535123

Chen plc”s income statements for the years ended 31 December 2009 and 2010 and the statements of financial position as at 31 December 2009 and 2010 are as follows:

Income statements for the years ended 31 December 2009 and 2010

2009

2010

£m

£m

Revenue

207

153

Cost of sales

(101)

(76)

Gross profit

106

77

Distribution expenses

(22)

(20)

Administrative expenses

(20)

(28)

Operating profit

64

29

Interest payable

(4)

(4)

Profit before taxation

60

25

Taxation

(16)

(6)

Profit for the year

44

19

Statements of financial position as at 31 December 2009 and 2010

2009

2010

£m

£m

ASSETS

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment

Land and buildings

110

130

Plant and machinery

62

56

172

186

Current assets

Inventories

24

25

Trade receivables

26

25

Cash at bank and in hand

19

69

50

Total assets

241

236

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

Equity

Called-up ordinary share capital

100

100

Retained earnings

56

57

156

157

Non-current liabilities

Borrowings – loan notes (10%)

40

40

Current liabilities

Borrowings (all bank overdraft)

2

Trade payables

37

34

Taxation

8

3

45

39

Total equity and liabilities

241

236

Included in ‘cost of sales”, ‘distribution expenses” and ‘administrative expenses”, depreciation was as follows:

2009

2010

£m

£m

Land and buildings

6

10

Plant and machinery

10

12

There were no non-current asset disposals in either year. The amount of cash paid for interest equaled the expense in both years. Dividends were paid totaling £18 million in each year.

Required :

Prepare a statement of cash flows for the business for 2010.

the following are the financial statements for nailsea plc for the years ended 30 ju 535124

The following are the financial statements for Nailsea plc for the years ended 30 June 2009 and 2010:

Income statement for years ended 30 June

2009

2010

£m

£m

Revenue

1,230

2,280

Operating expenses

(722)

(1,618)

Depreciation

(270)

(320)

Operating profit

238

342

Interest payable

(27)

Profit before taxation

238

315

Taxation

(110)

(140)

Profit for the year

128

175

Statements of financial position as at 30 June

2009

2010

£m

£m

ASSETS

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment (at carrying amount)

Land and buildings

1,500

1,900

Plant and machinery

810

740

2,310

2,640

Current assets

Inventories

275

450

Trade receivables

100

250

Bank

118

375

818

Total assets

2,685

3,458

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

Equity

Share capital (fully paid £1 shares)

1,400

1,600

Share premium account

200

300

Retained profits

828

958

2,428

2,858

Non-current liabilities

Borrowings – 9% loan notes (repayable 2011)

300

Current liabilities

Borrowings (all bank overdraft)

32

Trade payables

170

230

Taxation

55

70

257

300

Total equity and liabilities

2,685

3,458

There were no disposals of non-current assets in either year. Dividends were paid in 2009 and 2010 of £40 million and £45 million, respectively.

Required :

Prepare a statement of cash flows for Nailsea plc for the year ended 30 June 2010.

the financial statements of zetar plc are presented in appendix c 534608

The financial statements of Zetar plc are presented in Appendix C.

Instructions

Use the company”s annual report, available at www.zetarplc.com, to answer the following questions.

(a) According to the notes to the financial statements, what method or methods does the company use to depreciate “plant and equipment?” What rate does it use to depreciate plant and equipment?

(b) According to the notes to the financial statements, how often is goodwill tested for impairment?

(c) Using the notes to the financial statements, as well as information from the statement of cash flows, prepare the journal entry to record the disposal of property, plant and equipment during 2009. (Round your amounts to the nearest thousand.)

presented here are liability items for azarian inc at december 31 2012 534667

Presented here are liability items for Azarian Inc. at December 31, 2012. Prepare the liabilities section of Azarian”s balance sheet.

Accounts payable

$157,000

FICA taxes payable

$ 7,800

Notes payable

20,000

(due May 1, 2013)

Interest payable

40,000

Bonds payable (due 2016)

900,000

Notes payable (due 2014)

80,000

Unearned

sales revenue

240,000

Income taxes payable

3,500

Discount on bonds payable

41,000

Sales taxes payable

1,700

the 2009 adidas financial statements contain the following selected data in millions 534668

The 2009 adidas financial statements contain the following selected data (in millions).

Current assets

$4,485

Interest expense

$169

Total assets

8,875

Income taxes

113

Current liabilities

2,836

Net income

245

Total liabilities

5,099

Cash

775

Compute the following values and provide a brief interpretation of each.

(a) Working capital.

(b) Current ratio.

(c) Debt to total assets ratio.

(d) Times interest earned ratio.

presented below is the partial bond discount amortization schedule for syam corp 534672

Presented below is the partial bond discount amortization schedule for Syam Corp., which uses the effective-interest method of amortization.

Interest

Bond

Interest

Interest to

Expense to

Discount

Unamortized

Carrying

Periods

Be Paid

Be Recorded

Amortization

Discount

Value

Issue date

$38,609

$961,391

1

$45,000

$48,070

$3,070

35,539

964,461

2

45,000

48,223

3,223

32,316

967,684

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entry to record the payment of interest and the discount amortization at the end of period 1.

(b) Explain why interest expense is greater than interest paid.

(c) Explain why interest expense will increase each period.

sprague company ltd publishes a monthly sports magazine 534685

Sprague Company Ltd. publishes a monthly sports magazine, Fishing Preview. Subscriptions to the magazine cost $28 per year. During November 2012, Sprague sells 6,300 subscriptions for cash, beginning with the December issue. Sprague prepares financial statements quarterly and recognizes subscription revenue earned at the end of the quarter. The company uses the accounts Unearned Sales Revenue and Sales Revenue. The company has a December 31 year-end.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the entry in November for the receipt of the subscriptions.

(b) Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2012, to record subscription revenue earned in December 2012.

(c) Prepare the adjusting entry at March 31, 2013, to record subscription revenue earned in the first quarter of 2013.

pedrick inc reports the following liabilities in thousands on its january 31 2012 534691

Pedrick, Inc. reports the following liabilities (in thousands) on its January 31, 2012, balance sheet and notes to the financial statements.

Accounts payable

$4,263.9

Mortgage payable

$6,746.7

Accrued pension liability

1,115.2

Operating leases

1,641.7

Unearned sales revenue

1,058.1

Notes payable (due in 2015)

335.6

Bonds payable

1,961.2

Salaries and wages payable

858.1

Current portion of

Notes payable (due in 2013)

2,563.6

mortgage payable

1,992.2

Unused operating line of credit

3,337.6

Income taxes payable

265.2

Warranty liability—current

1,417.3

Instructions

(a) Identify which of the above liabilities are likely current and which are likely longterm. Say if an item fits in neither category. Explain the reasoning for your selection.

(b) Prepare the liabilities section of Pedrick”s balance sheet as at January 31, 2012.

mcdonald s 2009 financial statements contain the following selected data in millions 534692

McDonald”s 2009 financial statements contain the following selected data (in millions).

Current assets

$ 3,416.3

Interest expense

$ 473.2

Total assets

30,224.9

Income taxes

1,936.0

Current liabilities

2,988.7

Net income

4,551.0

Total liabilities

16,191.0

Instructions

(a) Compute the following values and provide a brief interpretation of each.

(1) Working capital

(2) Current ratio.

(3) Debt to total assets ratio.

(4) Times interest earned ratio.

(b) The notes to McDonald”s financial statements show that subsequent to 2009 the company will have future minimum lease payments under operating leases of $10,717.5 million. If these assets had been purchased with debt, assets and liabilities would rise by approximately $8,800 million. Recompute the debt to total assets ratio after adjusting for this. Discuss your result.

3m company reported the following financial data for 2009 and 2008 in millions 534693

3M Company reported the following financial data for 2009 and 2008 (in millions).

3M COMPANY

Balance Sheet (partial)

Current assets

2009

2008

Cash and cash equivalents

$ 3,040

$1,849

$1,849

Accounts receivable, net

3,250

3,195

3,195

Inventories

2,639

3,013

3,013

Other current assets

1,866

1,541

1,541

Total current assets

$10,795

$9,598

$9,598

Current liabilities

$ 4,897

$5,839

$5,839

Instructions

(a) Calculate the current ratio for 3M for 2009 and 2008.

(b) Suppose that at the end of 2009, 3M management used $300 million cash to pay off $300 million of accounts payable. How would its current ratio change?

sportique boutique reported the following financial data for 2012 and 2011 534694

Sportique Boutique reported the following financial data for 2012 and 2011.

SPORTIQUE BOUTIQUE
Balance Sheet (partial)
September 30 (in thousands)

2012

2011

Current assets

Cash and short-term deposits

$2,574

$1,021

Accounts receivable

2,147

1,575

Inventories

1,201

1,010

Other current assets

322

192

Total current assets

$6,244

$3,798

Current liabilities

$4,503

$2,619

Instructions

(a) Calculate the current ratio for Sportique Boutique for 2012 and 2011.

(b) Suppose that at the end of 2012, Sportique Boutique used $1.5 million cash to pay off $1.5 million of accounts payable. How would its current ratio change?

(c) At September 30, Sportique Boutique has an undrawn operating line of credit of $12.5 million. Would this affect any assessment that you might make of Sportique Boutique”s short-term liquidity? Explain.

ham plc acquired 100 of the common shares of burg plc on 1 january 20×0 and gained c 535035

Ham plc acquired 100% of the common shares of Burg plc on 1 January 20X0 and gained control. At that date the statements of financial position of the two companies were as follows:

Ham £000

Burg £000

ASSETS

Non-cur rent assets

Property, plant and equipment

250

100

Investment in Burg

90

Current assets

100

70

Total assets

440

170

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

Capital and reser ves

£1 shares

200

100

Retained ear nings

160

10

360

110

Current liabilities

80

60

Total equity and liabilities

440

170

Notes:

1 The fair value is the same as the book value.

2 £15,000 of the negative goodwill arises because the net assets have been acquired at below their fair value and the remainder covers expected losses of £3,000 in the year ended 31/12/20X0 and £2,000 in the following year.

Required:

(a) Prepare a consolidated statement of financial position for Ham plc as at 1 January 20X0.

(b) Explain how the negative goodwill will be treated.

set out below is the summarised statement of financial position of berlin plc at 1 j 535036

Set out below is the summarised statement of financial position of Berlin plc at 1 January 20X0.

£000

ASSETS

Non-cur rent assets

250

Property, plant and equipment

150

Current assets

400

Total assets

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

Capital and reser ves

Share capital (£5 shares)

200

Retained ear nings

80

280

Current liabilities

120

Total equity and liabilities

400

On 1/1/20X0 Berlin acquired 100% of the shares of Hanover for £100,000 and gained control.

Required: Prepare the statement of financial position of Berlin immediately after the acquisition if:

(a) Berlin acquired the shares for cash.

(b) Berlin issued 10,000 common shares of £5 (market value £10.).

bleu plc acquired 80 of the common shares of verte plc on 1 january 20×0 and gained 535037

Bleu plc acquired 80% of the common shares of Verte plc on 1 January 20X0 and gained control. At that date the statements of financial position of the two companies were as follows:

Bleu £m

Verte £m

ASSETS

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment

150

120

Investment in Verte

210

Current assets

108

105

Total assets

468

225

Bleu £m

Verte £m

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

Capital and reserves

Share capital

300

120

Retained earnings

78

60

378

180

Current liabilities

90

45

Total equity and liabilities

468

225

Note: The fair values are the same as the book values.

Required: Prepare a consolidated statement of financial position for Bleu plc as at 1 January 20X0.

Non-controlling interests are measured using method 1.

base plc acquired 60 of the common shares of ball plc on 1 january 20×0 and gained c 535038

Base plc acquired 60% of the common shares of Ball plc on 1 January 20X0 and gained control. At that date the statements of financial position of the two companies were as follows:

Base

Ball

£000

£000

ASSETS

Non-cur rent assets

Property, plant and equipment

250

100

Investment in Ball

90

Current assets

100

70

Total assets

440

170

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

Capital and reserves

Share capital

200

80

Share premium

20

Retained earnings

160

10

360

110

Current liabilities

80

60

Total equity and liabilities

440

170

Note:

The fair value of the property, plant and equipment in Ball at 1/1/20X0 was £120,000. The fair value of the non-controlling interest in Ball at 1/1/20X0 was £55,000. The ‘fair value method” should be used to measure the non-controlling interest.

Required: Prepare a consolidated statement of financial position for Base as at 1 January 20X0.

the statements of financial position of parkway plc for 20×7 and 20×8 are given belo 535043

The statements of financial position of Parkway plc for 20X7 and 20X8 are given below, together with the income statement for the year ended 30 June 20X8.

Statement of financial position

20X8

20X7

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

Non-current assets

Cost

Depn

NBV

Cost

Depn

NBV

Freehold land

60000

60000

60000

60000

Buildings

40000

8000

32000

40000

7200

32800

Plant and machiner y

30000

16000

14000

30000

10000

20000

Vehicles

40000

20000

20000

40000

12000

28000

170000

44000

126000

170000

29200

140800

Cur rent assets

Inventor y

80000

70000

Trade receivables

60000

40000

Short-term investments

50000

Cash at bank and in hand

5000

5000

195000

115000

Current liabilities

Trade payables

90000

60000

Bank overdraft

50000

45000

Taxation

28000

15000

Dividends

15000

10000

183000

130000

Net current assets

12000

(15000)

138000

125800

Financed by

Ordinary share capital

80,000

80,000

Share premium

10,000

10,000

Retained profits

28,000

15,800

118,000

105,800

Long-term loans

20,000

20,000

138,000

125,800

Statement of comprehensive income of Parkway plc
for the year ended 30 June 20X8

£000

Sales

738,000

Cost of sales

620,000

Gross profit

118,000

Notes

1 The freehold land and buildings were purchased on 1 July 20X0. The company policy is to depreciate buildings over 50 years and to provide no depreciation on land.

2 Depreciation on plant and machiner y and motor vehicles is provided at the rate of 20% per annum on a straight-line basis.

3 Depreciation on buildings and plant and equipment has been included in administration expenses, while that on motor vehicles is included in distribution expenses.

4 The directors of Parkway plc have provided you with the following information relating to price rises:

RPI

Inventor y

Land

Buildings

Plant

Vehicles

1 July 20X0

100

60

70

50

90

120

1 July 20X7

170

140

290

145

135

180

30 June 20X8

190

180

310

175

165

175

Average for year ending 30 June 20X8

180

160

300

163

145

177

Required:

(a) Making and stating any assumptions that are necessary, and giving reasons for those assumptions, calculate the monetary working capital adjustment for Parkway plc.

(b) Critically evaluate the usefulness of the monetary working capital adjustment.

rouge plc acquired 100 of the common shares of noir plc on 1 januar y 20×0 and gaine 535044

Rouge plc acquired 100% of the common shares of Noir plc on 1 Januar y 20X0 and gained control. At that date the statements of financial position of the two companies were as follows:

Rouge £ million

Noir £ million

ASSETS

Non-cur rent assets

Property, plant and equipment

100

60

Investment in Noir

132

Current assets

80

70

Total assets

312

130

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

Ordinary y £1 shares

200

60

Retained earnings

52

40

252

100

Current liabilities

60

30

Total equity and liabilities

312

130

Note: The fair values are the same as the book values.

Required: Prepare a consolidated statement of financial position for Rouge plc as at 1 January 20X0.

morn ltd acquired 90 of the shares in eve ltd on 1 january 20×1 for 90 000 when eve 535052

Morn Ltd acquired 90% of the shares in Eve Ltd on 1 January 20X1 for £90,000 when Eve Ltd”s accumulated profits were £50,000. On 10 January 20X1 Morn Ltd received a dividend of £10,800 from Eve Ltd out of the profits for the year ended 31/12/20X0. On 31/12/20X1 Morn increased its non-current assets by £30,000 on revaluation. The summarized statements of comprehensive income for the year ended 31/12/20X1 were as follows:

Morn

Eve

£

£

Gross profit

360,000

180,000

Expenses

120,000

110,000

240,000

70,000

Dividends received from Eve Ltd

10,800

Profit before tax

250,800

70,000

Income tax expense

69,000

18,000

Profit for the period

181,800

52,000

There were no inter-company transactions, other than the dividend. There was no goodwill.

Required:

Prepare a consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X1.

river plc acquired 90 of the common shares and 10 of the 5 bonds in pool ltd on 31 m 535053

River plc acquired 90% of the common shares and 10% of the 5% bonds in Pool Ltd on 31 March 20X1. All income and expenses are deemed to accrue evenly through the year. On 31 January 20X1 River sold Pool goods for £6,000 plus a markup of one-third. 75% of these goods were still in stock at the end of the year. There was a goodwill impairment loss of £4,000. On 31/12/20X1 River increased its non-current assets by £15,000 on revaluation. Non-controlling interests are measured using method 1. Set out below are the individual statements of comprehensive income of River and Pool:

Statements of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X1

River

Pool

£

£

Net turnover

100,000

60,000

Cost of sales

30,000

30,000

Gross profit

70,000

30,000

Expenses

20,541

15,000

Interest payable on 5% bonds

5,000

Interest receivable on Pool Ltd bonds

500

49,959

10,000

Dividends received

2,160

NIL

Profit before tax

52,119

10,000

Income tax expense

7,002

3,000

Profit for the period

45,117

7,000

Required:

Prepare a consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X1.

the statements of financial position of mars plc and jupiter plc at 31 december 20×2 535054

The statements of financial position of Mars plc and Jupiter plc at 31 December 20X2 are as follows:

$

$

Sales

200,000

120,000

Cost of sales

60,000

60,000

Gross profit

140,000

60,000

Expenses

59,082

40,000

Dividends received

3,750

NIL

Profit before tax

84,668

20,000

Income tax expense

14,004

6,000

70,664

14,000

Surplus on revaluation

25,000

Total comprehensive income

95,664

14,000

Red Ltd acquired 75% of the shares in Pink Ltd on 1 January 20X0 when Pink Ltd”s retained earnings were $30,000 and the balance on Pink”s general reser ve was $8,000. The fair value of the non-controlling interest at the date was £32,000. Non-controlling interests are to be measured using method 2.

On 31 December 20X2 Red revalued its non-current assets. The revaluation surplus of £25,000 was credited to the revaluation reserve.

During the year Pink sold Red goods for $9,000 plus a mark-up of one-third. Half of these goods were still in inventor y at the end of the year. Goodwill suffered an impairment loss of 20%.

Required:

Prepare a consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31/12/20X2 and a statement of financial position as at that date.

lpha has owned 80 of the equity shares of beta since the incorporation of beta on 1 535055

lpha has owned 80% of the equity shares of Beta since the incorporation of Beta. On 1 July 20X6 Alpha purchased 60% of the equity shares of Gamma. The stateents of comprehensive income and summarized statements of changes in equity of the three entities for the year ended 31 March 20X7 are given below:

Statement of comprehensive income

Alpha

Beta

Gamma

$”000

$”000

$”000

Revenue (Note 1)

180,000

120,000

106,000

Cost of sales

(90,000)

60,000)

(54,000)

Gross profit

90,000

60,000

52,000

Distribution costs

(9,000)

(8,000)

(8,000)

Administrative expenses

(10,000)

(9,000)

(8,000)

Investment income (Note 2)

26,450

Nil

Nil

Finance cost

(10,000)

(8,000)

(5,000)

Profit before tax

87,450

35,000

31,000

Income tax expense

(21,800)

(8,800)

(7,800)

Net profit for the period

65,650

26,200

23,200

Summarized statements of changes in equity

Balance at 1 April 20X6

152,000

111,000

102,000

Net profit for the period

65,650

26,200

23,200

Dividends paid on 31 January 20X7

(30,000)

(13,000)

(15,000)

Revaluation of non-current assets – 20,000 –

Balance at 31 March 20X7

187,650

144,200

110,200

Notes to the financial statements

Note 1 – Inter-company sales

Alpha sells products to Beta and Gamma, making a profit of 30% on the cost of the products sold. All the sales to Gamma took place in the post-acquisition period. Details of the purchases of the products by Beta and Gamma, together with the amounts included in opening and closing inventories in respect of the products, are given below:

Purchased in

Included in opening

Included in closing

year

inventor y

inventor y

$”000

$”000

$”000

Beta

20,000

2,600

3,640

Gamma

10,000

Nil

1,950

Note 2 – Investment income

Alpha”s investment income includes dividends received from Beta and Gamma and interest receivable from Beta. The dividend received from Gamma has been credited to the statement of comprehensive income of Alpha without time apportionment. The interest receivable is in respect of a loan of $60 million to Beta at a fixed rate of interest of 6% per annum. The loan has been outstanding for the whole of the year ended 31 March 20X7.

Note 3 – Details of acquisition of shares in Gamma

On 1 July 20X6 Alpha purchased 15 million of Gamma”s issued equity shares by a share exchange. Alpha issued 4 new equity shares for every 3 shares acquired in Gamma. The market value of the shares in Alpha and Gamma at 1 July 20X6 was $5 and $5.50 respectively. The non-controlling interest in Gamma is measured using method 1.

The fair values of the net assets of Gamma closely approximated to their carrying values in Gamma”s financial statements with the exception of the following items:

(i) A property that had a carrying value of $20 million at the date of acquisition had a market value of $30 million. $16 million of this amount was attributable to the building, which had an estimated useful future economic life of 40 years at 1 July 20X6. In the year ended 31 March 20X7 Gamma had charged depreciation of $200,000 in its own financial statements in respect of this property.

(ii) Plant and equipment that had a carrying value of $6 million at the date of acquisition and a market value of $8 million. The estimated useful future economic life of the plant at 1 July 20X6 was 4 years. None of this plant and equipment had been sold or scrapped prior to 31 March 20X7.

(iii) Inventor y that had a carrying value of $3 million at the date of acquisition had a fair value of $3.5 million. This entire inventory had been sold by Gamma prior to 31 March 20X7.

Note 4 – Other information

(i) Gamma charges depreciation and impairment of assets to cost of sales.

(ii) On 31 March 20X7 the directors of Alpha computed the recoverable amount of Gamma as a single cash-generating unit. They concluded that the recoverable amount was $150 million.

(iii) When the directors of Beta and Gamma prepared the individual financial statements of these companies no impairment of any assets of either company was found to be necessary.

(iv) On 31 March 20X7 Beta revalued its non-current assets. This resulted in a surplus of £20,000 which was credited to Beta”s revaluation reserve.

Required:

Prepare the consolidated statement of comprehensive income and consolidated statement of changes in equity of Alpha for the year ended 31 March 20X7. Notes to the consolidated statement of comprehensive income are not required. Ignore deferred tax.

hyson plc acquired 75 of the shares in green plc on 1 january 20×0 for 6 million whe 535057

Hyson plc acquired 75% of the shares in Green plc on 1 January 20X0 for £6 million when Green plc”s accumulated profits were £4.5 million. At acquisition, the fair value of Green”s non-current assets were £1.2 million in excess of their carrying value. The remaining life of these non-current assets is six years.

The summarized statements of comprehensive income for the year ended 31.12.X0 were as follows:

Hyson

Green

£000

£000

Revenue

23,500

6,400

Cost of sales

16,400

4,700

Gross profit

7,100

1,700

Expenses

4,650

1,240

Profit before tax

2,450

460

Income tax expense

740

140

Profit for the period

1,710

320

There were no inter-company transactions. Depreciation of non-current assets is charged to cost of sales.

Required:

Prepare a consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X0.

phelan corporation and keevin corporation two companies of roughly the same size are 534574

Phelan Corporation and Keevin Corporation, two companies of roughly the same size, are both involved in the manufacture of shoe-tracing devices. Each company depreciates its plant assets using the straight-line approach. An investigation of their financial statements reveals the information shown below.

Phelan Corp.

Keevin Corp.

Net income

$ 240,000

$ 300,000

Sales

1,150,000

1,200,000

Total assets (average)

3,200,000

3,000,000

Plant assets (average)

2,400,000

1,800,000

Intangible assets (goodwill)

300,000

0

Instructions

(a) For each company, calculate these values:

(1) Return on assets ratio.

(2) Profit margin.

(3) Asset turnover ratio.

(b) Based on your calculations in part (a), comment on the relative effectiveness of the two companies in using their assets to generate sales. What factors complicate your ability to compare the two companies?

in recent years walz company has purchased three machines 534575

In recent years, Walz Company has purchased three machines. Because of frequent employee turnover in the accounting department, a different accountant was in charge of selecting the depreciation method for each machine, and various methods have been used. Information concerning the machines is summarized in the table below.

Salvage

Useful Life

Machine

Acquired

Cost

Value

(in years)

Depreciation Method

1

Jan. 1, 2010

$96,000

$12,000

8

Straight-line

2

July 1, 2011

85,000

10,000

5

Declining-balance

3

Nov. 1, 2011

66,000

6,000

6

Units-of-activity

For the declining-balance method, Walz Company uses the double-declining rate. For the units-of-activity method, total machine hours are expected to be 30,000. Actual hours of use in the first 3 years were: 2011, 800; 2012, 4,500; and 2013, 6,000.

Instructions

(a) Compute the amount of accumulated depreciation on each machine at December 31, 2013.

(b) If machine 2 was purchased on April 1 instead of July 1, what would be the depreciation expense for this machine in 2011? In 2012?

rogers corporation purchased machinery on january 1 2012 at a cost of 250 000 534576

Rogers Corporation purchased machinery on January 1, 2012, at a cost of $250,000. The estimated useful life of the machinery is 4 years, with an estimated salvage value at the end of that period of $30,000. The company is considering different depreciation methods that could be used for financial reporting purposes.

Instructions

(a) Prepare separate depreciation schedules for the machinery using the straight-line method, and the declining-balance method using double the straight-line rate. Round to the nearest dollar.

(b) Which method would result in the higher reported 2012 income? In the highest total reported income over the 4-year period?

(c) Which method would result in the lower reported 2012 income? In the lowest total reported income over the 4-year period?

franz company was organized on january 1 during the first year of operations the fol 534577

Franz Company was organized on January 1. During the first year of operations, the following plant asset expenditures and receipts were recorded in random order.

Debits

Cost of real estate purchased as a plant site (land $190,000 and

building $80,000)

$ 270,000

Accrued real estate taxes paid at time of purchase of real estate

6,000

Cost of demolishing building to make land suitable for

construction of new building

32,000

Cost of filling and grading the land

6,700

Excavation costs for new building

21,900

Architect”s fees on building plans

44,000

Full payment to building contractor

629,500

Cost of parking lots and driveways

36,000

Real estate taxes paid for the current year on land

7,300

1,053,400

Credits

10. Proceeds for salvage of demolished building

$ 12,700

Instructions

Analyze the transactions using the table column headings provided here. Enter the number of each transaction in the Item column, and enter the amounts in the appropriate columns. For amounts in the Other Accounts column, also indicate the account titles.

Item

Land

Buildings

Other Accounts

at december 31 2011 craig corporation reported these plant assets 534578

At December 31, 2011, Craig Corporation reported these plant assets.

Land

$ 4,000,000

Buildings

$28,800,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation—buildings

11,520,000

17,280,000

Equipment

48,000,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation—equipment

5,000,000

43,000,000

Total plant assets

$64,280,000

During 2012, the following selected cash transactions occurred.

Apr. 1 Purchased land for $2,600,000.

May 1 Sold equipment that cost $750,000 when purchased on January 1, 2007. The equipment was sold for $367,000.

June 1 Sold land purchased on June 1, 2000, for $1,800,000. The land cost $800,000.

Sept. 1 Purchased equipment for $840,000.

Dec. 31 Retired fully depreciated equipment that cost $470,000 when purchased on December 31, 2002. No salvage value was received.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions. (Hint:You may wish to set up T accounts, post beginning balances, and then post 2012 transactions.) Craig uses straight-line depreciation for buildings and equipment. The buildings are estimated to have a 40-year life and no salvage value; the equipment is estimated to have a 10-year useful life and no salvage value. Update depreciation on assets disposed of at the time of sale or retirement.

(b) Record adjusting entries for depreciation for 2012. (Note:The only assets that are fully depreciated are those that were retired on December 31.)

(c) Prepare the plant assets section of Craig”s balance sheet at December 31, 2012.

here are selected transactions for halverson corporation for 2012 534579

Here are selected transactions for Halverson Corporation for 2012.

Jan. 1 Retired a piece of machinery that was purchased on January 1, 2002. The machine cost $47,000 and had a useful life of 10 years with no salvage value.

Mar. 31 Sold a computer that was purchased on January 1, 2009. The computer cost $43,400 and had a useful life of 7 years with no salvage value. The computer was sold for $25,000.

Dec. 31 Discarded a delivery truck that was purchased on January 1, 2009. The truck cost $30,000 and was depreciated based on a 6-year useful life with a $3,000 salvage value.

Instructions

Journalize all entries required on the above dates, including entries to update depreciation on assets disposed of, where applicable. Halverson Corporation uses straight-line depreciation.

the intangible assets section of the balance sheet for vincent company at december 3 534580

The intangible assets section of the balance sheet for Vincent Company at December 31, 2012, is presented here.

Patents ($70,000 cost less $7,000 amortization)

$63,000

Copyrights ($48,000 cost less $18,000 amortization)

30,000

Total

$93,000

The patent was acquired in January 2012 and has a useful life of 10 years. The copyright was acquired in January 2010 and also has a useful life of 8 years. The following cash transactions may have affected intangible assets during 2013.

Jan. 2 Paid $36,000 legal costs to successfully defend the patent against infringement by another company.

Jan.–June Developed a new product, incurring $220,000 in research and development costs. A patent was granted for the product on July 1, and its useful life is equal to its legal life. Legal and other costs for the patent were $18,000.

Sept. 1 Paid $110,000 to an extremely large defensive lineman to appear in commercials advertising the company”s products. The commercials will air in September and October.

Oct. 1 Acquired a copyright for $120,000. The copyright has a useful life and legal life of 50 years.

Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.

(b) Prepare journal entries to record the 2013 amortization expense.

(c) Prepare the intangible assets section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2013.

(d) Prepare the note to the financial statements on Vincent Company”s intangible assets as of December 31, 2013.

due to rapid employee turnover in the accounting department 534581

Due to rapid employee turnover in the accounting department, the following transactions involving intangible assets were improperly recorded by the Demeyer Company in 2012.

1. Demeyer developed a new manufacturing process, incurring research and development costs of $150,000. The company also purchased a patent for $96,000. In early January, Demeyer capitalized $246,000 as the cost of the patents. Patent amortization

expense of $24,600 was recorded based on a 10-year useful life.

2. On July 1, 2012, Demeyer purchased a small company and as a result acquired goodwill of $40,000. Demeyer recorded a half-year”s amortization in 2012, based on a 40-year life ($500 amortization). The goodwill has an indefinite life.

Instructions

Prepare all journal entries necessary to correct any errors made during 2012. Assume the books have not yet been closed for 2012.

culver corporation and kiltie corporation two corporations of roughly the same size 534582

Culver Corporation and Kiltie Corporation, two corporations of roughly the same size, are both involved in the manufacture of umbrellas. Each company depreciates its plant assets using the straight-line approach. An investigation of their financial statements reveals the following information.

Culver Corp.

Kiltie Corp.

Net income

$ 780,000

$ 900,000

Sales

2,400,000

2,500,000

Total assets (average)

3,000,000

2,700,000

Plant assets (average)

1,400,000

1,200,000

Intangible assets (goodwill)

480,000

0

Instructions

(a) For each company, calculate these values:

(1) Return on assets ratio.

(2) Profit margin.

(3) Asset turnover ratio.

(b) Based on your calculations in part (a), comment on the relative effectiveness of the two companies in using their assets to generate sales. What factors complicate your ability to compare the two companies?

in recent years harper transportation purchased three used buses because of frequent 534583

In recent years, Harper Transportation purchased three used buses. Because of frequent employee turnover in the accounting department, a different accountant selected the depreciation method for each bus, and various methods have been used. Information concerning the buses is summarized in the table below.

Salvage

Useful Life

Bus

Acquired

Cost

Value

(in years)

Depreciation Method

1

Jan. 1, 2011

$ 96,000

$ 6,000

5

Straight-line

2

Jan. 1, 2011

135,000

10,000

4

Declining-balance

3

Jan. 1, 2011

100,000

4,000

5

Units-of-activity

For the declining-balance method, Harper Transportation uses the double-declining rate. For the units-of-activity method, total miles are expected to be 160,000. Actual miles of use in the first 3 years were: 2011, 29,000; 2012, 34,000; and 2013, 35,000.

Instructions

(a) Compute the amount of accumulated depreciation on each bus at December 31, 2013.

(b) If Bus 2 was purchased on March 1 instead of January 1, what would be the depreciation expense for this bus in 2011? In 2012?

kiram corporation purchased machinery on january 1 2012 at a cost of 350 000 534584

Kiram Corporation purchased machinery on January 1, 2012, at a cost of $350,000. The estimated useful life of the machinery is 5 years, with an estimated salvage value at the end of that period of $20,000. The company is considering different depreciation methods that could be used for financial reporting purposes.

Instructions

(a) Prepare separate depreciation schedules for the machinery using the straight-line method, and the declining-balance method using double the straight-line rate.

(b) Which method would result in the higher reported 2012 income? In the higher total reported income over the 5-year period?

(c) Which method would result in the lower reported 2012 income? In the lower total reported income over the 5-year period

paulson corporation s unadjusted trial balance at december 534585

Paulson Corporation”s unadjusted trial balance at December 1, 2012, is presented below.

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 22,000

Accounts Receivable

36,800

Notes Receivable

10,000

Interest Receivable

–0–

Inventory

36,200

Prepaid Insurance

3,600

Land

20,000

Buildings

150,000

Equipment

60,000

Patent

9,000

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

$ 500

Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings

50,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

24,000

Accounts Payable

27,300

Salaries and Wages Payable

–0–

Notes Payable (due April 30, 2013)

11,000

Interest Payable

–0–

Notes Payable (due in 2018)

35,000

Common Stock

50,000

Retained Earnings

63,600

Dividends

12,000

Sales Revenue

900,000

Interest Revenue

–0–

Gain on Disposal of Plant Assets

–0–

Bad Debts Expense

–0–

Cost of Goods Sold

630,000

Depreciation Expense

–0–

Insurance Expense

–0–

Interest Expense

–0–

Other Operating Expenses

61,800

Amortization Expense

–0–

Salaries and Wages Expense

110,000

Total

$ 1,161,400

$1,161,400

The following transactions occurred during December.

Dec. 2 Paulson purchased equipment for $16,000, plus sales taxes of $800 (all paid in cash).

2 Paulson sold for $3,500 equipment which originally cost $5,000. Accumulated depreciation on this equipment at January 1, 2012, was $1,800; 2012 depreciation prior to the sale of equipment was $450.

15 Paulson sold for $5,000 on account inventory that cost $3,500.

23 Salaries and wages of $6,600 were paid.

Adjustment data:

1. Paulson estimates that uncollectible accounts receivable at year-end are $4,000.

2. The note receivable is a one-year, 8% note dated April 1, 2012. No interest has been recorded.

3. The balance in prepaid insurance represents payment of a $3,600, 6-month premium on September 1, 2012.

4. The building is being depreciated using the straight-line method over 30 years. The salvage value is $30,000.

5. The equipment owned prior to this year is being depreciated using the straight-line method over 5 years. The salvage value is 10% of cost.

6. The equipment purchased on December 2, 2012, is being depreciated using the straight-line method over 5 years, with a salvage value of $1,800.

7. The patent was acquired on January 1, 2012, and has a useful life of 9 years from that date.

8. Unpaid salaries at December 31, 2012, total $2,200.

9. Both the short-term and long-term notes payable are dated January 1, 2012, and carry a 10% interest rate. All interest is payable in the next 12 months.

10. Income tax expense was $15,000. It was unpaid at December 31.

Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries for the transactions listed above and adjusting entries.

(b) Prepare an adjusted trial balance at December 31, 2012.

(c) Prepare a 2012 income statement and a 2012 retained earnings statement.

(d) Prepare a December 31, 2012, balance sheet.

refer to the financial statements and the notes to consolidated financial statements 534588

Refer to the financial statements and the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements of Tootsie Roll Industries in Appendix A.

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) What were the total cost and book value of property, plant, and equipment at December 31, 2009?

(b) What method or methods of depreciation are used by Tootsie Roll for financial reporting purposes?

(c) What was the amount of depreciation and amortization expense for each of the 3 years 2007–2009? (Hint:Use the statement of cash flows.)

(d) Using the statement of cash flows, what are the amounts of property, plant, and equipment purchased (capital expenditures) in 2009 and 2008?

(e) Explain how Tootsie Roll accounted for its intangible assets in 2009.

the september 9 2007 issue of the new york times includes an article by denise carus 534590

The September 9, 2007, issue of the New York Timesincludes an article by Denise Caruso entitled “When Balance Sheets Collide with the New Economy.”

Instructions

Read the article and answer the following questions.

(a) What are some examples of “valuable assets” that the article says currently do not have a home on the balance sheet?

(b) What examples does the company give of the value of reputation and how it can affect a stock price?

(c) What justification does the article give for having companies report on their environmental and social responsibility, and their strategy for dealing with disasters?

(d) Are any initiatives currently being used that try to account for intangible assets that do not currently show up on the balance sheet?

bob evans farms inc operates 714 restaurants in 31 states and produces fresh and ful 534591

Bob Evans Farms, Inc. operates 714 restaurants in 31 states and produces fresh and fully cooked sausage products, fresh salads, and related products distributed to grocery stores in the Midwest, Southwest, and Southeast. For a recent 3-year period, Bob Evans Farms reported the following selected income statement data (in millions of dollars).

2009

2008

2007

Sales

$1,750.5

$1,737.0

$1,654.5

Cost of goods sold

537.1

517.4

482.1

Net income

62.9*

64.9

60.5

Total assets

1,147.6

1,207.0

1,197.9

*In 2009, the company wrote off $68.0 million of goodwill and reported a net loss of $5.1 million. Since no similar write-offs occurred in 2007 or 2008, we are using income before the write-off as net income.

Instructions

(a) Compute the percentage change in sales and in net income from 2007 to 2009.

(b) What contribution, if any, did the company”s gross profit rate make to the change in earnings from 2007 to 2009?

(c) What was Bob Evans”s profit margin ratio in each of the 3 years? Comment on any trend in this percentage.

(d) The chief executive officer”s letter stated that the company slowed its expansion, opening

1 new restaurant in 2009 and 2 in 2008, compared to 10 openings in 2007. What effect would you expect this change, along with the write-off of goodwill in 2009, to have on return on assets? Calculate the company”s return on assets for 2008 and 2009 to support your answer.

purpose use an annual report to identify a company s plant assets and the depreciati 534592

Purpose: Use an annual report to identify a company”s plant assets and the depreciation method used. Address: www.annualreports.com, or go to www.wiley.com/college/kimmel

Steps

1. Select a particular company.

2. Search by company name.

3. Follow instructions below.

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) What is the name of the company?

(b) What is the Internet address of the annual report?

(c) At fiscal year-end, what is the net amount of its plant assets?

(d) What is the accumulated depreciation?

(e) Which method of depreciation does the company use?

delzer furniture corp is nationally recognized for making high quality products 534593

Delzer Furniture Corp. is nationally recognized for making high-quality products. Management is concerned that it is not fully exploiting its brand power. Delzer”s production managers are also concerned because their plants are not operating at anywhere near full capacity. Management is currently considering a proposal to offer a new line of affordable furniture.

Those in favor of the proposal (including the vice president of production) believe that, by offering these new products, the company could attract a clientele that it is not currently servicing. Also, it could operate its plants at full capacity, thus taking better advantage of its assets.

The vice president of marketing, however, believes that the lower-priced (and lower-margin) product would have a negative impact on the sales of existing products. The vice president believes that $10,000,000 of the sales of the new product will be from customers that would have purchased the more expensive product but switched to the lower-margin product because it was available.

(This is often referred to as cannibalization of existing sales.) Top management feels, however, that even with cannibalization, the company”s sales will increase and the company will be better off. The following data are available.

Current

Proposed Results

Proposed Results

(in thousands)

Results

without Cannibalization

with Cannibalization

Sales

$45,000

$60,000

$50,000

Net income

$12,000

$13,500

$12,000

Average total assets

$100,000

$100,000

$100,000

Instructions

(a) Compute Delzer”s return on assets ratio, profit margin ratio, and asset turnover ratio, both with and without the new product line.

(b) Discuss the implications that your findings in part (a) have for Delzer”s decision.

(c) Are there any other options that Delzer should consider? What impact would each of these have on the above ratios?

the chapter presented some concerns regarding the current accounting standards for r 534594

The chapter presented some concerns regarding the current accounting standards for research and development expenditures.

Instructions

Assume that you are either (a) the president of a company that is very dependent on ongoing research and development, writing a memo to the FASB complaining about the current accounting standards regarding research and development, or (b) the FASB member defending the current standards regarding research and development. Your memo should address the following questions.

1. By requiring expensing of R&D, do you think companies will spend less on R&D? Why or why not? What are the possible implications for the competitiveness of U.S. companies?

2. If a company makes a commitment to spend money for R&D, it must believe it has future benefits. Shouldn”t these costs therefore be capitalized just like the purchase of any long-lived asset that you believe will have future benefits?

clean air anti pollution company is suffering declining sales of its principal produ 534595

Clean Air Anti-Pollution Company is suffering declining sales of its principal product, nonbiodegradable plastic cartons. The president, Dixon Nuber, instructs his controller, Gavin Wood, to lengthen asset lives to reduce depreciation expense. A processing line of automated plastic extruding equipment, purchased for $3.5 million in January 2011, was originally estimated to have a useful life of 8 years and a salvage value of $400,000. Depreciation has been recorded for 2 years on that basis. Dixon wants the estimated life changed to 12 years total and the straight-line method continued. Gavin is hesitant to make the change, believing it is unethical to increase net income in this manner. Dixon says, “Hey, the life is only an estimate, and I”ve heard that our competition uses a 12-year life on their production equipment.”

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) Is the proposed change in asset life unethical, or is it simply a good business practice by an astute president?

(c) What is the effect of Dixon”s proposed change on income before taxes in the year of change?

a company s tradename is a very important asset to the company as it creates immedia 534596

A company”s tradename is a very important asset to the company, as it creates immediate product identification. Companies invest substantial sums to ensure that their product is well-known to the consumer. Test your knowledge of who owns some famous brands and their impact on the financial statements.

Instructions

(a) Provide an answer to the five multiple-choice questions below.

(1) Which company owns both Taco Bell and Pizza Hut?

(a) McDonald”s.

(b) CKE.

(c) Yum Brands.

(d) Wendy”s.

(2) Dairy Queen belongs to:

(a) Breyer.

(b) Berkshire Hathaway.

(c) GE.

(d) The Coca-Cola Company.

(3) Phillip Morris, the cigarette maker, is owned by:

(a) Altria.

(b) GE.

(c) Boeing.

(d) ExxonMobil.

(4) AOL, a major Internet provider, belongs to:

(a) Microsoft.

(b) Cisco.

(c) NBC.

(d) Time Warner.

(5) ESPN, the sports broadcasting network, is owned by:

(a) Procter & Gamble.

(b) Altria.

(b) How do you think the value of these brands is reported on the appropriate company”s balance sheet?

(c) Walt Disney.

(d) The Coca-Cola Company.

your perspective

sue and sam ristic own club fab from its inception club fab has sold merchandise on 534476

Sue and Sam Ristic own Club Fab. From its inception, Club Fab has sold merchandise on either a cash or credit basis, but no credit cards have been accepted. During the past several months, the Ristics have begun to question their credit-sales policies. First, they have lost some sales because of their refusal to accept credit cards. Second, representatives of two metropolitan banks have convinced them to accept their national credit cards. One bank, City National Bank, has stated that (1) its credit card fee is 4% and (2) it pays the retailer 96 cents on each $1 of sales within 3 days of receiving the credit card billings.

The Ristics decide that they should determine the cost of carrying their own credit sales. From the accounting records of the past 3 years, they accumulate these data:

2012

2011

2010

Net credit sales

$500,000

$600,000

$400,000

Collection agency fees for slow-paying customers

2,900

2,600

1,600

Salary of part-time accounts receivable clerk

4,400

4,400

4,400

Credit and collection expenses as a percentage of net credit sales are as follows: uncollectible accounts 1.6%, billing and mailing costs .5%, and credit investigation fee on new customers .2%.

Sue and Sam also determine that the average accounts receivable balance outstanding during the year is 5% of net credit sales. The Ristics estimate that they could earn an average of 10% annually on cash invested in other business opportunities.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Prepare a tabulation for each year showing total credit and collection expenses in dollars and as a percentage of net credit sales.

(b) Determine the net credit and collection expenses in dollars and as a percentage of sales after considering the revenue not earned from other investment opportunities. (Note:The income lost on the cash held by the bank for 3 days is considered to be immaterial.)

(c) Discuss both the financial and nonfinancial factors that are relevant to the decision.

stropes corporation is a recently formed business selling the world s best doormat t 534477

Stropes Corporation is a recently formed business selling the “World”s Best Doormat.” The corporation is selling doormats faster than Stropes can make them. It has been selling the product on a credit basis, telling customers to “pay when they can.” Oddly, even though sales are tremendous, the company is having trouble paying its bills.

Instructions

Write a memo to the president of Stropes Corporation discussing these questions:

(a) What steps should be taken to improve the company”s ability to pay its bills?

(b) What accounting steps should be taken to measure its success in improving collections and in recording its collection success?

(c) If the corporation is still unable to pay its bills, what additional steps can be taken with its receivables to ease its liquidity problems?

as its year end approaches it appears that lopez corporation s net income will incre 534478

As its year-end approaches, it appears that Lopez Corporation”s net income will increase 10% this year. The president of Lopez Corporation, nervous that the stockholders might expect the company to sustain this 10% growth rate in net income in future years, suggests that the controller increase the allowance for doubtful accounts to 4% of receivables in order to lower this year”s net income. The president thinks that the lower net income, which reflects a 6% growth rate, will be a more sustainable rate of growth for Lopez Corporation in future years. The controller of Lopez Corporation believes that the company”s yearly allowance for doubtful accounts should be 2% of receivables.

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this case?

(b) Does the president”s request pose an ethical dilemma for the controller?

(c) Should the controller be concerned with Lopez Corporation”s growth rate in estimating the allowance? Explain your answer.

credit card usage in the united states is substantial many startup companies use cre 534479

Credit card usage in the United States is substantial. Many startup companies use credit cards as a way to help meet short-term financial needs. The most common forms of debt for startups are use of credit cards and loans from relatives.

Suppose that you start up Brothers Sandwich Shop. You invested your savings of $20,000 and borrowed $70,000 from your relatives. Although sales in the first few months are good, you see that you may not have sufficient cash to pay expenses and maintain your inventory at acceptable levels, at least in the short term. You decide you may need to use one or more credit cards to fund the possible cash shortfall.

Instructions

(a) Go to the Internet and find two sources that provide insight into how to compare credit card terms.

(b) Develop a list, in descending order of importance, as to what features are most important to you in selecting a credit card for your business.

(c) Examine the features of your present credit card. (If you do not have a credit card, select a likely one online for this exercise.) Given your analysis above, what are the three major disadvantages of your present credit card?

the financial statements of zetar plc are presented in appendix c 534487

The financial statements of Zetar plc are presented in Appendix C. The company”s complete annual report, including the notes to its financial statements, is available at www.zetarplc.com.

Instructions

Use the company”s annual report to answer the following questions.

(a) According to the Operational Review of Financial Performance, what was one reason why the balance in receivables increased relative to the previous year?

(b) According to the notes to the financial statements, how are loans and receivables defined?

(c) In the notes to the financial statements, the company reports a “one off item” related to receivables. Explain what this item was.

(d) Using information in the notes to the financial statements, determine what percentage the provision for impairment of receivables was as a percentage of total trade receivables for 2009 and 2008. How did the ratio change from 2008 to 2009, and what does this suggest about the company”s receivables?

corrieten company purchased equipment and incurred these costs 534488

Corrieten Company purchased equipment and incurred these costs:

Cash price

$24,000

Sales taxes

1,200

Insurance during transit

200

Installation and testing

400

Total costs

$25,800

What amount should be recorded as the cost of the equipment?

(a) $24,000.

(b) $25,200.

(c) $25,400.

(d) $25,800.

hidden lakes company purchased a delivery truck the total cash payment was 30 020 in 534545

Hidden Lakes Company purchased a delivery truck. The total cash payment was $30,020, including the following items.

Negotiated purchase price

$24,000

Installation of special shelving

1,100

Painting and lettering

900

Motor vehicle license

180

Annual insurance policy

2,400

Sales tax

1,440

Total paid

$30,020

Explain how each of these costs would be accounted for.

match the statement with the term most directly associated with it 534549

Match the statement with the term most directly associated with it.

Goodwill

Amortization

Intangible assets

Franchise

Research and development costs

1. _______ Rights, privileges, and competitive advantages that result from the ownership of long-lived assets that do not possess physical substance.

2. _______ The allocation of the cost of an intangible asset to expense in a rational and systematic manner.

3. _______ A right to sell certain products or services, or use certain trademarks or trade names within a designated geographic area.

4. _______ Costs incurred by a company that often lead to patents or new products. These costs must be expensed as incurred

5. _______ The excess of the cost of a company over the fair value of the net assets required.

ramona company incurred the following costs 534551

Ramona Company incurred the following costs.

1

Sales tax on factory machinery purchased

$ 5,000

2

Painting of and lettering on truck immediately upon purchase

700

3

Installation and testing of factory machinery

2,000

4

Real estate broker”s commission on land purchased

3,500

5

Insurance premium paid for first year”s insurance on new truck

880

6

Cost of landscaping on property purchased

7,200

7

Cost of paving parking lot for new building constructed

17,900

8

Cost of clearing, draining, and filling land

13,300

9

Architect”s fees on self-constructed building

10,000

Instructions

Indicate to which account Ramona would debit each of the costs.

belinda lorenz has prepared the following list of statements about depreciation 534553

Belinda Lorenz has prepared the following list of statements about depreciation.

1. Depreciation is a process of asset valuation, not cost allocation.

2. Depreciation provides for the proper matching of expenses with revenues.

3. The book value of a plant asset should approximate its fair value.

4. Depreciation applies to three classes of plant assets: land, buildings, and equipment.

5. Depreciation does not apply to a building because its usefulness and revenue producing ability generally remain intact over time.

6. The revenue-producing ability of a depreciable asset will decline due to wear and tear and to obsolescence.

7. Recognizing depreciation on an asset results in an accumulation of cash for replacement of the asset.

8. The balance in accumulated depreciation represents the total cost that has been charged to expense.

9. Depreciation expense and accumulated depreciation are reported on the income statement.

10. Four factors affect the computation of depreciation: cost, useful life, salvage value, and residual value.

Instructions

Identify each statement as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.

here are selected 2012 transactions of eghan corporation 534557

Here are selected 2012 transactions of Eghan Corporation.

Jan. 1

Retired a piece of machinery that was purchased on January 1, 2002. The machine cost $62,000 and had a useful life of 10 years with no salvage value.

June, 30

Sold a computer that was purchased on January 1, 2010. The computer cost $36,000 and had a useful life of 3 years with no salvage value. The computer was sold for $5,000 cash.

Dec, 31

Sold a delivery truck for $9,000 cash. The truck cost $25,000 when it was purchased on January 1, 2009, and was depreciated based on a 5-year useful life with a $4,000 salvage value.

Instructions

Journalize all entries required on the above dates, including entries to update depreciation on assets disposed of, where applicable. Eghan Corporation uses straight-line depreciation.

the following situations are independent of one another 534558

The following situations are independent of one another.

1. An accounting student recently employed by a small company doesn”t understand why the company is only depreciating its buildings and equipment, but not its land. The student prepared journal entries to depreciate all the company”s property, plant, and equipment for the current year-end.

2. The same student also thinks the company”s amortization policy on its intangible assets is wrong. The company is currently amortizing its patents but not its goodwill. The student fixed that for the current year-end by adding goodwill to her adjusting entry for amortization. She told a fellow employee that she felt she had improved the consistency of the company”s accounting policies by making these changes.

3. The same company has a building still in use that has a zero book value but a substantial fair value. The student felt that this practice didn”t benefit the company”s users—especially the bank—and wrote the building up to its fair value. After all, she reasoned, you can write down assets if fair values are lower. Writing them up if fair value is higher is yet another example of the improved consistency that she has brought to the company”s accounting practices.

Instructions

Explain whether or not the accounting treatment in each of the above situations is in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. Explain what accounting principle or assumption, if any, has been violated and what the appropriate accounting treatment should be.

mangrich international is considering a significant expansion to its product line 534560

Mangrich International is considering a significant expansion to its product line. The sales force is excited about the opportunities that the new products will bring. The new products are a significant step up in quality above the company”s current offerings, but offer a complementary fit to its existing product line. Michael Powell, senior production department manager, is very excited about the high-tech new equipment that will have to be acquired to produce the new products. Linda Huang, the company”s CFO, has provided the following projections based on results with and without the new products.

Without New Products

With New Products

Sales

$10,000,000

$16,000,000

Net income

$500,000

$960,000

Average total assets

$5,000,000

$12,000,000

Instructions

(a) Compute the company”s return on assets ratio, profit margin ratio, and asset turnover ratio, both with and without the new product line.

(b) Discuss the implications that your findings in part (a) have for the company”s decision.

these are selected 2012 transactions for jendusa corporation 534562

These are selected 2012 transactions for Jendusa Corporation:

Jan.

Purchased a copyright for $120,000. The copyright has a useful life of
6 years and a remaining legal life of 30 years.

Mar.

Purchased a patent with an estimated useful life of 4 years and a legal
life of 20 years for $54,000.

Sept.

Purchased a small company and recorded goodwill of $150,000. Its useful
life is indefinite.

Instructions

Prepare all adjusting entries at December 31 to record amortization required by the events.

kopke company organized in 2012 has these transactions related to intangible assets 534563

Kopke Company, organized in 2012, has these transactions related to intangible assets in that year:

Jan. 2

Purchased a patent (5-year life) $280,000.

Apr. 1

Goodwill acquired as a result of purchased business (indefinite life)
$360,000.

July, 1

Acquired a 9-year franchise; expiration date July 1, 2021, $540,000.

Sept. 1

Research and development costs $185,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the necessary entries to record these transactions related to intangibles. All costs incurred were for cash.

(b) Make the entries as of December 31, 2012, recording any necessary amortization.

(c) Indicate what the balances should be on December 31, 2012.

irina company was organized on january 1 during the first year of operations 534569

Irina Company was organized on January 1. During the first year of operations, the following plant asset expenditures and receipts were recorded in random order.

Debits

1

Cost of real estate purchased as a plant site (land $255,000 and

building $25,000)

$ 280,000

2

Installation cost of fences around property

6,800

3

Cost of demolishing building to make land suitable for

construction of new building

31,000

4

Excavation costs for new building

23,000

5

Accrued real estate taxes paid at time of purchase of real estate

3,170

6

Cost of parking lots and driveways

29,000

7

Architect”s fees on building plans

33,000

8

Real estate taxes paid for the current year on land

6,400

9

Full payment to building contractor

6,40,000

$1,052,370

Credits

10

Proceeds from salvage of demolished building

$ 12,000

Instructions

Analyze the transactions using the following table column headings. Enter the number of each transaction in the Item column, and enter the amounts in the appropriate columns. For amounts in the Other Accounts column, also indicate the account title.

Item

Land

Buildings

Other Accounts

at december 31 2012 rivera corporation reported the following plant assets 534570

At December 31, 2012, Rivera Corporation reported the following plant assets.

Land

Buildings

$26,500,000

$ 3,000,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation—buildings

11,925,000

14,575,000

Equipment

40,000,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation—equipment

5,000,000

35,000,000

Total plant assets

$52,575,000

During 2013, the following selected cash transactions occurred.

Apr. 1 Purchased land for $2,200,000.

May 1 Sold equipment that cost $600,000 when purchased on January 1, 2006. The equipment was sold for $170,000.

June 1 Sold land for $1,600,000. The land cost $1,000,000.

July 1 Purchased equipment for $1,100,000.

Dec. 31 Retired equipment that cost $700,000 when purchased on December

Dec. 31, 2003. No salvage value was received.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions. (Hint:You may wish to set up T accounts, post beginning balances, and then post 2013 transactions.) Rivera uses straight-line depreciation for buildings and equipment. The buildings are estimated to have a 40-year useful life and no salvage value; the equipment is estimated to have a 10-year useful life and no salvage value. Update depreciation on assets disposed of at the time of sale or retirement.

(b) Record adjusting entries for depreciation for 2013.

(c) Prepare the plant assets section of Rivera”s balance sheet at December 31, 2013.

presented here are selected transactions for snow company for 2012 534571

Presented here are selected transactions for Snow Company for 2012.

Jan. 1 Retired a piece of machinery that was purchased on January 1, 2002. The machine cost $71,000 on that date and had a useful life of 10 years with no salvage value.

June 30 Sold a computer that was purchased on January 1, 2009. The computer cost $30,000 and had a useful life of 5 years with no salvage value. The computer was sold for $12,000.

Dec. 31 Discarded a delivery truck that was purchased on January 1, 2007. The truck cost $33,400 and was depreciated based on an 8-year useful life with a $3,000 salvage value.

Instructions

Journalize all entries required on the above dates, including entries to update depreciation, where applicable, on assets disposed of. Snow Company uses straight-line depreciation. (Assume depreciation is up to date as of December 31, 2011.)

the intangible assets section of cepeda corporation s balance sheet at december 31 2 534572

The intangible assets section of Cepeda Corporation”s balance sheet at December 31, 2012, is presented here.

Patents ($60,000 cost less $6,000 amortization)

$54,000

Copyrights ($36,000 cost less $25,200 amortization)

10,800

Total

$64,800

The patent was acquired in January 2012 and has a useful life of 10 years. The copyright was acquired in January 2006 and also has a useful life of 10 years. The following cash transactions may have affected intangible assets during 2013.

Jan. 2 Paid $46,800 legal costs to successfully defend the patent against infringement by another company.

Jan.–June Developed a new product, incurring $230,000 in research and development costs. A patent was granted for the product on July 1, and its useful life is equal to its legal life. Legal and other costs for the patent were $20,000.

Sept. 1 Paid $40,000 to a quarterback to appear in commercials advertising the company”s products. The commercials will air in September and October.

Oct. 1 Acquired a copyright for $200,000. The copyright has a useful life and legal life of 50 years.

Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.

(b) Prepare journal entries to record the 2013 amortization expense for intangible assets.

(c) Prepare the intangible assets section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2013.

(d) Prepare the note to the financial statements on Cepeda Corporation”s intangible assets as of December 31, 2013.

due to rapid employee turnover in the accounting department the following transactio 534573

Due to rapid employee turnover in the accounting department, the following transactions involving intangible assets were improperly recorded by Neitzke Corporation in 2012.

1. Neitzke developed a new manufacturing process, incurring research and development costs of $160,000. The company also purchased a patent for $40,000. In early January, Neitzke capitalized $200,000 as the cost of the patents. Patent amortization expense of $10,000 was recorded based on a 20-year useful life.

2. On July 1, 2012, Neitzke purchased a small company and as a result acquired goodwill of $80,000. Neitzke recorded a half-year”s amortization in 2012, based on a 20-year life ($2,000 amortization). The goodwill has an indefinite life.

Instructions

Prepare all journal entries necessary to correct any errors made during 2012. Assume the books have not yet been closed for 2012.

the august 31 2009 issue of the wall street journal includes an article by serena ng 534474

The August 31, 2009, issue of the Wall Street Journalincludes an article by Serena Ng and Cari Tuna entitled “Big Firms Are Quick to Collect, Slow to Pay.”

Instructions

Read the article and answer the following questions.

(a) How many days did InBev tell its suppliers that it was going to take to pay? How many days did it take previously?

(b) What steps did General Electric take to free up cash? How much cash did it free up?

(c) On average, how many days did companies with more than $5 billion take to pay suppliers, and how many days did they take to collect from their customers? How did this compare to companies with less than $500 million in sales?

(d) Are there any risks involved with being too tough in negotiating delayed payment terms with suppliers?

the information below is from the 2008 financial statements and accompanying notes o 534475

The information below is from the 2008 financial statements and accompanying notes of The Scotts Company, a major manufacturer of lawn-care products.

(in millions)

2008

2007

Accounts receivable

$ 270.4

$ 259.7

Allowance for uncollectible accounts

10.6

11.4

Sales

2,981.8

2,871.8

Total current assets

1,044.9

999.3

Purpose: To learn more about factoring from websites that provide factoring services. Address:www.ccapital.net, or go to www.wiley.com/college/kimmel

Instructions

Go to the website, click on Invoice Factoring, and answer the following questions.

(a) What are some of the benefits of factoring?

(b) What is the range of the percentages of the typical discount rate?

(c) If a company factors its receivables, what percentage of the value of the receivables can it expect to receive from the factor in the form of cash, and how quickly will it receive the cash?

kidvid a maker of electronic games for kids has just completed its first year of ope 534451

KidVid, a maker of electronic games for kids, has just completed its first year of operations. The company”s sales growth was explosive. To encourage large national stores to carry its products, KidVid offered 180-day financing—meaning its largest customers do not pay for nearly 6 months. Because KidVid is a new company, its components suppliers insist on being paid cash on delivery. Also, it had to pay up front for 2 years of insurance. At the end of the year, KidVid owed employees for one full month of salaries, but due to a cash shortfall, it promised to pay them the first week of next year.

Instructions

(a) Explain how cash and accrual accounting would differ for each of the events listed above and describe the proper accrual accounting.

(b) Assume that at the end of the year KidVid reported a favorable net income, yet the company”s management is concerned because the company is very short of cash. Explain how KidVid could have positive net income and yet run out of cash.

sellmore com uses the allowance method of accounting for bad debts the company produ 534453

Sellmore.com uses the allowance method of accounting for bad debts. The company produced the following aging of the accounts receivable at year-end.

Number of Days Outstanding

Total

0–30

31–60

61–90

91–120

Over 120

Accounts receivable

$377,000

$222,000

$90,000

$38,000

$15,000

$12,000

% uncollectible

1%

4%

5%

8%

10%

Estimated bad debts

Instructions

(a) Calculate the total estimated bad debts based on the above information.

(b) Prepare the year-end adjusting journal entry to record the bad debts using the aged uncollectible accounts receivable determined in (a). Assume the unadjusted balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a $4,000 debit.

(c) Of the above accounts, $5,000 is determined to be specifically uncollectible. Prepare the journal entry to write off the uncollectible account.

(d) The company collects $5,000 subsequently on a specific account that had previously been determined to be uncollectible in (c). Prepare the journal entry(ies) necessary to restore the account and record the cash collection.

(e) Comment on how your answers to (a)–(d) would change if Sellmore.com used 3% of total accounts receivable, rather than aging the accounts receivable. What are the advantages to the company of aging the accounts receivable rather than applying a percentage to total accounts receivable?

at december 31 2011 ihrke imports reported this information on its balance sheet 534454

At December 31, 2011, Ihrke Imports reported this information on its balance sheet.

Accounts receivable

$600,000

Less: Allowance for doubtful accounts

37,000

During 2012, the company had the following transactions related to receivables.

1

Sales on account

$2,500,000

2

Sales returns and allowances

50,000

3

Collections of accounts receivable

2,200,000

4

Write-offs of accounts receivable deemed uncollectible

41,000

5

Recovery of bad debts previously written off as uncollectible

15,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record each of these five transactions. Assume that no cash discounts were taken on the collections of accounts receivable. (Omit cost of goods sold entries.)

(b) Enter the January 1, 2012, balances in Accounts Receivable and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, post the entries to the two accounts (use T accounts), and determine the balances.

(c) Prepare the journal entry to record bad debts expense for 2012, assuming that aging the accounts receivable indicates that estimated bad debts are $46,000.

(d) Compute the receivables turnover ratio and average collection period.

presented below is an aging schedule for gille company 534455

Presented below is an aging schedule for Gille Company.

Customer

Total

Not Yet
Due

Number of Days Past Due

1–30

31–60

61–90

Over 90

Aneesh

$ 24,000

9,000

$15,000

Bird

30,000

$ 30,000

Cope

50,000

5,000

5,000

$40,000

DeSpears

38,000

$38,000

Others

120,000

72,000

35,000

13,000

$262,000

$107,000

$49,000

$28,000

$40,000

$38,000

Estimated percentage uncollectible

3%

7%

12%

24%

60%

Total estimated bad debts

$ 42,400

$ 3,210

$ 3,430

$ 3,360

$ 9,600

$22,800

At December 31, 2011, the unadjusted balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a credit of $8,000.

Instructions

(a) Journalize and post the adjusting entry for bad debts at December 31, 2011. (Use T accounts.)

(b) Journalize and post to the allowance account these 2012 events and transactions:

1. March 1, a $600 customer balance originating in 2011 is judged uncollectible.

2. May 1, a check for $600 is received from the customer whose account was written off as uncollectible on March 1.

(c) Journalize the adjusting entry for bad debts at December 31, 2012, assuming that the unadjusted balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a debit of $1,400 and the aging schedule indicates that total estimated bad debts will be $36,700.

here is information related to shashko company for 2012 534456

Here is information related to Shashko Company for 2012.

Total credit sales

$1,500,000

Accounts receivable at December 31

840,000

Bad debts written off

37,000

Instructions

(a) What amount of bad debts expense will Shashko Company report if it uses the direct write-off method of accounting for bad debts?

(b) Assume that Shashko Company decides to estimate its bad debts expense based on 4% of accounts receivable. What amount of bad debts expense will the company record if Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $3,000?

(c) Assume the same facts as in part (b), except that there is a $1,000 debit balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. What amount of bad debts expense will Shashko record?

(d) What is a weakness of the direct write-off method of reporting bad debts expense?

at december 31 2012 the trial balance of oliker company contained the following amou 534457

At December 31, 2012, the trial balance of Oliker Company contained the following amounts before adjustment.

Debits

Credits

Accounts Receivable

$180,000

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

$ 1,500

Sales Revenue

875,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2012, to record bad debts expense, assuming that the aging schedule indicates that $10,200 of accounts receivable will be uncollectible.

(b) Repeat part (a), assuming that instead of a credit balance there is a $1,500 debit balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.

(c) During the next month, January 2013, a $2,100 account receivable is written off as uncollectible. Prepare the journal entry to record the write-off.

(d) Repeat part (c), assuming that Oliker Company uses the direct write-off method instead of the allowance method in accounting for uncollectible accounts receivable.

(e) What are the advantages of using the allowance method in accounting for uncollectible accounts as compared to the direct write-off method?

on january 1 2012 sather company had accounts receivable of 54 200 and allowance for 534458

On January 1, 2012, Sather Company had Accounts Receivable of $54,200 and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts of $3,700. Sather Company prepares financial statements annually. During the year, the following selected transactions occurred.

Jan. 5 Sold $4,000 of merchandise to Noel Company, terms n/30.

Feb. 2 Accepted a $4,000, 4-month, 9% promissory note from Noel Company for balance due.

Feb. 12 Sold $12,000 of merchandise to Lima Company and accepted Lima”s $12,000, 2-month, 10% note for the balance due.

Feb. 26 Sold $5,200 of merchandise to Hubbard Co., terms n/10.

Apr. 5 Accepted a $5,200, 3-month, 8% note from Hubbard Co. for balance due.

Apr. 12 Collected Lima Company note in full.

June. 2 Collected Noel Company note in full.

June. 15 Sold $2,000 of merchandise to Matthews Inc. and accepted a $2,000, 6-month, 12% note for the amount due.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions. (Omit cost of goods sold entries.)

the president of screven enterprises asks if you could indicate the impact certain t 534459

The president of Screven Enterprises asks if you could indicate the impact certain transactions have on the following ratios.

Transaction

Current
Ratio
(2: 1)

Receivables
Turnover
(10 )

Average
Collection
Period
(36.5 days)

1. Received $5,000 on cash sale.
The cost of the goods sold was
$2,600.

2. Recorded bad debts expense of $500
using allowance method.

3. Wrote off a $100 account receivable
as uncollectible (Uses allowance
method.)

4. Recorded $2,500 sales on account.
The cost of the goods sold was
$1,500.

Instructions

Complete the table, indicating whether each transaction will increase (I), decrease (D), or have no effect (NE) on the specific ratios provided for Screven Enterprises.

jander company closes its books on july 31 on june 30 the notes receivable account b 534460

Jander Company closes its books on July 31. On June 30, the Notes Receivable account balance is $23,800. Notes Receivable include the following.

Date

Maker

Face Value

Term

Maturity Date

Interest Rate

April 21

Allen Inc.

$ 6,000

90 days

July 20

8%

May 25

Garnham Co.

7,800

60 days

July 24

10%

June 30

ERV Corp.

10,000

6 months

December 31

6%

During July, the following transactions were completed.

July. 5 Made sales of $4,500 on Jander credit cards.

July.14 Made sales of $600 on Visa credit cards. The credit card service charge is 3%.

July. 20 Received payment in full from Allen Inc. on the amount due.

July. 24 Received payment in full from Garnham Co. on the amount due.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the July transactions and the July 31 adjusting entry for accrued interest receivable. (Interest is computed using 360 days; omit cost of goods sold entries.)

(b) Enter the balances at July 1 in the receivable accounts and post the entries to all of the receivable accounts. (Use T accounts.)

(c) Show the balance sheet presentation of the receivable accounts at July 31.

presented here is basic financial information in millions from the 2009 annual repor 534461

Presented here is basic financial information (in millions) from the 2009 annual reports of Nike and Adidas.

Nike

Adidas

Sales

$19,176.1

$10,381

Allowance for doubtful accounts, beginning

78.4

119

Allowance for doubtful accounts, ending

110.8

124

Accounts receivable balance (gross), beginning

2,873.7

1,743

Accounts receivable balance (gross), ending

2,994.7

1,553

Instructions

Calculate the receivables turnover ratio and average collection period for both companies. Comment on the difference in their collection experiences.

the following represents selected information taken from a company s aging schedule 534462

The following represents selected information taken from a company”s aging schedule to estimate uncollectible accounts receivable at year-end.

Total

Number of Days Outstanding

0–30

31–60

61–90

91–120

Over 120

Accounts receivable

$285,000

$107,000

$60,000

$50,000

$38,000

$30,000

% uncollectible

2%

5%

7.5%

10%

14%

Estimated bad debts

Instructions

(a) Calculate the total estimated bad debts based on the above information.

(b) Prepare the year-end adjusting journal entry to record the bad debts using the allowance method and the aged uncollectible accounts receivable determined in (a). Assume the unadjusted balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts account is a $7,000 credit.

(c) Of the above accounts, $2,600 is determined to be specifically uncollectible. Prepare the journal entry to write off the uncollectible accounts.

(d) The company subsequently collects $1,200 on a specific account that had previously been determined to be uncollectible in (c). Prepare the journal entry(ies) necessary to restore the account and record the cash collection.

(e) Explain how establishing an allowance account satisfies the expense recognition principle.

at december 31 2011 littman company reported this information on its balance sheet 534463

At December 31, 2011, Littman Company reported this information on its balance sheet.

Accounts receivable

$960,000

Less: Allowance for doubtful accounts

78,000

During 2012, the company had the following transactions related to receivables.

1.

Sales on account

$3,600,000

2.

Sales returns and allowances

50,000

3.

Collections of accounts receivable

3,100,000

4.

Write-offs of accounts receivable deemed uncollectible

92,000

5.

Recovery of bad debts previously written off as uncollectible

28,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record each of these five transactions. Assume that no cash discounts were taken on the collections of accounts receivable. (Omit cost of goods sold entries.)

(b) Enter the January 1, 2012, balances in Accounts Receivable and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, post the entries to the two accounts (use T accounts), and determine the balances.

(c) Prepare the journal entry to record bad debts expense for 2012, assuming that aging the accounts receivable indicates that expected bad debts are $109,000.

(d) Compute the receivables turnover ratio and average collection period.

presented here is an aging schedule for zander company 534464

Presented here is an aging schedule for Zander Company.

Customer

Total

Not Yet
Due

Number of Days Past Due

1–30

31–60

61–90

Over 90

Amy

$ 22,000

$12,000

$10,000

Bergin

40,000

$ 40,000

Curt

65,000

14,000

6,000

$45,000

David

28,000

$28,000

Others

126,000

96,000

16,000

14,000

$281,000

$150,000

$34,000

$24,000

$45,000

$28,000

Estimated percentage uncollectible

4%

9%

15%

25%

50%

Total estimated bad debts

$ 37,910

$ 6,000

$ 3,060

$ 3,600

$11,250

$14,000

At December 31, 2011, the unadjusted balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a credit of $11,700.

Instructions

(a) Journalize and post the adjusting entry for bad debts at December 31, 2011. (Use T accounts.)

(b) Journalize and post to the allowance account these 2012 events and transactions:

1. March 31, a $500 customer balance originating in 2011 is judged uncollectible.

2. May 31, a check for $500 is received from the customer whose account was written off as uncollectible on March 31.

(c) Journalize the adjusting entry for bad debts on December 31, 2012, assuming that the unadjusted balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a debit of $800 and the aging schedule indicates that total estimated bad debts will be $35,300.

here is information related to vansen company for 2012 534465

Here is information related to Vansen Company for 2012.

Total credit sales

$2,000,000

Accounts receivable at December 31

400,000

Bad debts written off

15,000

Instructions

(a) What amount of bad debts expense will Vansen Company report if it uses the direct write-off method of accounting for bad debts?

(b) Assume that Vansen Company decides to estimate its bad debts expense based on 4% of accounts receivable. What amount of bad debts expense will the company record if it has an Allowance for Doubtful Accounts credit balance of $3,700?

(c) Assume the same facts as in part (b), except that there is a $2,000 debit balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. What amount of bad debts expense will Vansen record?

(d) What is the weakness of the direct write-off method of reporting bad debts expense?

at december 31 2012 the trial balance of seidl company contained the following amoun 534466

At December 31, 2012, the trial balance of Seidl Company contained the following amounts before adjustment.

Debits

Credits

Accounts Receivable

$500,000

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

$ 4,800

Sales Revenue

2,400,000

Instructions

(a) Based on the information given, which method of accounting for bad debts is Seidl Company using—the direct write-off method or the allowance method? How can you tell?

(b) Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2012, for bad debts expense assuming that the aging schedule indicates that $26,000 of accounts receivable will be uncollectible.

(c) Repeat part (b), assuming that instead of a credit balance there is a $4,800 debit balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.

(d) During the next month, January 2013, a $5,000 account receivable is written off as uncollectible. Prepare the journal entry to record the write-off.

(e) Repeat part (d), assuming that Seidl uses the direct write-off method instead of the allowance method in accounting for uncollectible accounts receivable.

(f ) What type of account is the allowance for doubtful accounts? How does it affect how accounts receivable is reported on the balance sheet at the end of the accounting period?

the president of felder enterprises ltd emma felder is considering the impact that c 534468

The president of Felder Enterprises Ltd., Emma Felder, is considering the impact that certain transactions have on the company”s receivables turnover and average collection period ratios. Prior to the transactions on the next page, Felder”s receivables turnover was 6 times, and its average collection period was 61 days.

Transaction

Current
Ratio
(2: 1)

Receivables
Turnover
(6X )

Average
Collection
Period
(61 days)

1. Recorded sales on account $100,000.

2. Collected $25,000 owed by customers.

3. Wrote off a $2,500 account from a customer as
uncollectible. (Uses allowance method.)

4. Recorded sales returns of $1,800 and credited the
customers” accounts.

5. Recorded bad debts expense for the year $7,900,
using the allowance method.

Instructions

(a) Complete the table, indicating whether each transaction will increase (I), decrease (D), or have no effect (NE) on the ratios.

(b) Emma was reading through the financial statements for some publicly traded companies and noticed that they had recorded an expense related to the sale of receivables. She would like you to explain why companies sell their receivables.

brockman company closes its books on october 31 on september 30 the notes receivable 534469

Brockman Company closes its books on October 31. On September 30, the Notes Receivable account balance is $18,800. Notes Receivable include the following.

Date

Maker

Face Value

Term

Maturity Date

Interest Rate

Aug. 16

Stuhmer Inc.

$6,000

60 days

Oct. 15

9%

Aug. 25

Moberg Co.

3,000

2 months

Oct. 25

7%

Sept. 30

Earnest Corp.

9,800

6 months

Mar. 30

6%

Interest is computed using a 360-day year. During October, the following transactions were completed.

Oct. 7 Made sales of $4,600 on Brockman credit cards.

Oct. 12 Made sales of $600 on Visa credit cards. The credit card service charge is 3%.

Oct. 15 Received payment in full from Stuhmer Inc. on the amount due.

Oct. 25 Received payment in full from Moberg Co. on amount due.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the October transactions and the October 31 adjusting entry for accrued interest receivable. (Interest is computed using 360 days; omit cost of goods sold entries.)

(b) Enter the balances at October 1 in the receivable accounts and post the entries to all of the receivable accounts. (Use T accounts.)

(c) Show the balance sheet presentation of the receivable accounts at October 31.

porter corporation s balance sheet at december 31 2011 is presented below 534471

Porter Corporation”s balance sheet at December 31, 2011, is presented below.

PORTER CORPORATION
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2011

Cash

$13,100

Accounts payable

$ 8,750

Accounts receivable

19,780

Common stock

20,000

Allowance for doubtful accounts

(800)

Retained earnings

12,730

Inventory

9,400

$41,480

$41,480

During January 2012, the following transactions occurred. Porter uses the perpetual inventory method.

Jan. 1 Porter accepted a 4-month, 8% note from Anderko Company in payment of Anderko”s $1,200 account.

Jan. 3 Porter wrote off as uncollectible the accounts of Elrich Corporation ($450) and Rios Company ($280).

Jan. 8 Porter purchased $17,200 of inventory on account.

Jan. 11 Porter sold for $25,000 on account inventory that cost $17,500.

Jan. 15 Porter sold inventory that cost $700 to Fred Berman for $1,000.

Berman charged this amount on his Visa First Bank card. The service fee charged Porter by First Bank is 3%.

Jan. 17 Porter collected $22,900 from customers on account.

Jan. 21 Porter paid $16,300 on accounts payable.

Jan. 24 Porter received payment in full ($280) from Rios Company on the account written off on January 3.

Jan. 27 Porter purchased advertising supplies for $1,400 cash.

Jan. 31 Porter paid other operating expenses, $3,218.

Adjustment data:

1. Interest is recorded for the month on the note from January 1.

2. Bad debts are expected to be 6% of the January 31, 2012, accounts receivable.

3. A count of advertising supplies on January 31, 2012, reveals that $560 remains unused.

4. The income tax rate is 30%. (Hint:Prepare the income statement up to “Income before taxes” and multiply by 30% to compute the amount; round to whole dollars.)

Instructions

(You may want to set up T accounts to determine ending balances.)

(a) Prepare journal entries for the transactions listed above and adjusting entries.

(Include entries for cost of goods sold using the perpetual system.)

(b) Prepare an adjusted trial balance at January 31, 2012.

(c) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the month ending January 31, 2012, and a classified balance sheet as of January 31, 2012.

joy tiede opened tiede company a veterinary business in neosho wisconsin on august 1 534354

Joy Tiede opened Tiede Company, a veterinary business in Neosho, Wisconsin, on August 1, 2012. On August 31, the balance sheet showed: Cash $9,000; Accounts Receivable $1,700; Supplies $600; Equipment $5,000; Accounts Payable $3,600; Common Stock $12,000; and Retained Earnings $700. During September, the following transactions occurred.

Sept. 2 Paid $3,400 cash for accounts payable due.

5 Received $1,200 from customers in payment of accounts receivable.

8 Purchased additional office equipment for $5,100, paying $1,000 in cash and the balance on account.

13 Earned revenue of $10,600, of which $2,300 is paid in cash and the balance is due in October.

17 Paid a $600 cash dividend.

22 Paid salaries $900, rent for September $1,100, and advertising expense $250.

26 Incurred utility expenses for the month on account $220.

30 Received $5,000 from Hilldale Bank on a 6-month note payable.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the September transactions beginning with August 31 balances. The column headings should be: Cash _ Accounts Receivable _ Supplies _ Equipment _ Notes Payable _ Accounts Payable _ Common Stock _ Retained Earnings _ Revenues _ Expenses _ Dividends. Include margin explanations for any changes in Retained Earnings.

(b) Prepare an income statement for September, a retained earnings statement for September, and a classified balance sheet at September 30, 2012.

rv oasis was started on april 1 by taras dankert these selected events and transacti 534355

RV Oasis was started on April 1 by Taras Dankert. These selected events and transactions occurred during April.

Apr. 1 Stockholders invested $70,000 cash in the business in exchange for common stock.

4 Purchased land costing $50,000 for cash.

8 Purchased advertising in local newspaper for $1,200 on account.

11 Paid salaries to employees $2,700.

12 Hired park manager at a salary of $3,600 per month, effective May 1.

13 Paid $7,200 for a 1-year insurance policy.

17 Paid $600 cash dividends.

20 Received $6,000 in cash from customers for admission fees.

25 Sold 100 coupon books for $90 each. Each book contains ten coupons that entitle the holder to one admission to the park. (Hint: The revenue is not earned until the coupons are used.)

30 Received $7,900 in cash from customers for admission fees.

30 Paid $400 of the balance owed for the advertising purchased on account on April 8.

The company uses the following accounts: Cash, Prepaid Insurance, Land, Accounts Payable, Unearned Service Revenue, Common Stock, Dividends, Service Revenue, Advertising Expense, and Salaries and Wages Expense.

Instructions

Journalize the April transactions, including explanations. (Note: RV Oasis records admission revenue as service revenue.)

troy ridgell incorporated ridgell consulting an accounting practice on may 1 2012 534356

Troy Ridgell incorporated Ridgell Consulting, an accounting practice, on May 1, 2012. During the first month of operations, these events and transactions occurred.

May 1 Stockholders invested $40,000 cash in exchange for common stock of the corporation.

2 Hired a secretary-receptionist at a salary of $2,000 per month.

3 Purchased $800 of supplies on account from Fleming Supply Company.

7 Paid office rent of $1,400 for the month.

11 Completed a tax assignment and billed client $1,500 for services provided.

12 Received $4,200 advance on a management consulting engagement.

17 Received cash of $3,300 for services completed for Goodman Co.

31 Paid secretary-receptionist $2,000 salary for the month.

31 Paid 50% of balance due Fleming Supply Company.

The company uses the following chart of accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Accounts Payable, Unearned Service Revenue, Common Stock, Service Revenue, Salaries and Wages Expense, and Rent Expense.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions, including explanations.

(b) Post to the ledger T accounts.

(c) Prepare a trial balance on May 31, 2012.

the trial balance of kinnear dry cleaners on june 30 is given here 534357

The trial balance of Kinnear Dry Cleaners on June 30 is given here.

KINNEAR DRY CLEANERS
Trial Balance
June 30, 2012

Debit

Credit

Cash

$12,532

Accounts Receivable

10,536

Supplies

3,592

Equipment

25,950

Accounts Payable

$15,800

Unearned Service Revenue

1,810

Common Stock

35,000

$52,610

$52,610

The July transactions were as follows.

July 8 Received $5,189 in cash on June 30 accounts receivable.

9 Paid employee salaries $2,100.

11 Received $7,320 in cash for services provided.

14 Paid creditors $9,810 of accounts payable.

17 Purchased supplies on account $720.

22 Billed customers for services provided $4,700.

30 Paid employee salaries $3,114, utilities $1,767, and repairs $386.

31 Paid $400 cash dividend.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a general ledger using T accounts. Enter the opening balances in the ledger accounts as of July 1. Provision should be made for the following additional accounts: Dividends, Service Revenue, Maintenance and Repairs Expense, Salaries and Wages Expense, and Utilities Expense.

(b) Journalize the transactions, including explanations.

(c) Post to the ledger accounts.

(d) Prepare a trial balance on July 31, 2012.

this trial balance of lagerstrom company does not balance 534358

This trial balance of Lagerstrom Company does not balance.

LAGERSTROM COMPANY
Trial Balance
May 31, 2012

Debit

Credit

Cash

$6,340

Accounts Receivable

$2,750

Prepaid Insurance

700

Equipment

8,000

Accounts Payable

4100

Income Taxes Payable

850

Common Stock

5,700

Retained Earnings

6,000

Service Revenue

7,690

Salaries and Wages Expense

4,200

Advertising Expense

1100

Income Tax Expense

900

$28,680

$19,650

Your review of the ledger reveals that each account has a normal balance. You also discover the following errors.

1. The totals of the debit sides of Prepaid Insurance, Accounts Payable, and Income Tax Expense were each understated $100.

2. Transposition errors were made in Accounts Receivable and Service Revenue. Based on postings made, the correct balances were $2,570 and $7,960, respectively.

3. A debit posting to Salaries and Wages Expense of $500 was omitted.

4. A $600 cash dividend was debited to Common Stock for $600 and credited to Cash for $600.

5. A $350 purchase of supplies on account was debited to Equipment for $350 and credited to Cash for $350.

6. A cash payment of $490 for advertising was debited to Advertising Expense for $49 and credited to Cash for $49.

7. A collection from a customer for $240 was debited to Cash for $240 and credited to Accounts Payable for $240.

Instructions

Prepare the correct trial balance, assuming all accounts have normal balances. (Note:The chart of accounts also includes the following: Dividends and Supplies.)

riviera theater inc was recently formed all facilities were completed on march 31 534359

Riviera Theater Inc. was recently formed. All facilities were completed on March 31. On April 1, the ledger showed: Cash $6,300; Land $10,000; Buildings (concession stand, projection room, ticket booth, and screen) $8,000; Equipment $6,000; Accounts Payable $2,300; Mortgage Payable $8,000; and Common Stock $20,000. During April, the following events and transactions occurred.

Apr. 2 Paid film rental fee of $800 on first movie.

3 Ordered two additional films at $750 each.

9 Received $4,700 cash from admissions.

10 Paid $2,000 of mortgage payable and $1,200 of accounts payable.

11 Hired M. Gavin to operate the concession stand. Gavin agrees to pay Riviera Theater 17% of gross receipts, payable monthly.

12 Paid advertising expenses $410.

20 Received one of the films ordered on April 3 and was billed $750. The film will be shown in April.

25 Received $3,000 cash from customers for admissions.

29 Paid salaries $1,900.

30 Received statement from M. Gavin showing gross receipts of $2,000 and the balance due to Riviera Theater of $340 for April. Gavin paid half of the balance due and will remit the remainder on May 5.

30 Prepaid $1,200 rental fee on special film to be run in May.

In addition to the accounts identified above, the chart of accounts shows: Accounts Receivable, Prepaid Rent, Service Revenue, Sales Revenue, Advertising Expense, Rent Expense, Salaries and Wages Expense.

Instructions

(a) Enter the beginning balances in the ledger T accounts as of April 1.

(b) Journalize the April transactions, including explanations. (Note:Riviera records admission revenue as service revenue, concession revenue as sales revenue, and film rental expense as rent expense.)

(c) Post the April journal entries to the ledger T accounts.

(d) Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2012.

a first year co op student working for solutions com recorded the transactions for t 534360

A first year co-op student working for Solutions.com recorded the transactions for the month. He wasn”t exactly sure how to journalize and post, but he did the best he could. He had a few questions, however, about the following transactions.

1. Cash received from a customer on account was recorded as a debit to Cash of $360 and a credit to Accounts Receivable of $630, instead of $360.

2. A service provided for cash was posted as a debit to Cash of $2,000 and a credit to Service Revenue of $2,000.

3. A debit of $880 for services provided on account was neither recorded nor posted. The credit was recorded correctly.

4. The debit to record $1,000 of cash dividends was posted to the Salaries and Wages Expense account.

5. The purchase, on account, of a computer that cost $2,500 was recorded as a debit to Supplies and a credit to Accounts Payable.

6. A cash payment of $495 for salaries was recorded as a debit to Dividends and a credit to Cash.

7. Payment of month”s rent was debited to Rent Expense and credited to Cash, $850.

8. Issue of $5,000 of common shares was credited to the Common Stock account, but no debit was recorded.

Instructions

(a) Indicate which of the above transactions are correct, and which are incorrect.

(b) For each error identified in (a), indicate (1) whether the trial balance will balance;

(2) the amount of the difference if the trial balance will not balance; and (3) the trial balance column that will have the larger total. Consider each error separately. Use the following form, in which transaction 1 is given as an example.

(1)

(2)

(3)

Error

In Balance

Difference

Larger Column

1

No

$270

Credit

in november 2011 after having incorporated cookie creations inc natalie begins opera 534361

In November 2011, after having incorporated Cookie Creations Inc., Natalie begins operations. She has decided not to pursue the offer to supply cookies to Biscuits. Instead, she will focus on offering cooking classes. The following events occur.

Nov. 8 Natalie cashes in her U.S. Savings Bonds and receives $520, which she deposits in her personal bank account.

8 Natalie opens a bank account for Cookie Creations Inc.

8 Natalie purchases $500 of Cookie Creations” common stock.

11 Cookie Creations purchases paper and other office supplies for $95. (Use Supplies.)

14 Cookie Creations pays $125 to purchase baking supplies, such as flour, sugar, butter, and chocolate chips. (Use Supplies.)

15 Natalie starts to gather some baking equipment to take with her when teaching the cookie classes. She has an excellent top-of-the-line food processor and mixer that originally cost her $550. Natalie decides to start using it only in her new business. She estimates that the equipment is currently worth $300, and she transfers the equipment into the business in exchange for additional common stock.

16 The company needs more cash to sustain its operations. Natalie”s grandmother lends the company $2,000 cash, in exchange for a two-year, 9% note payable. Interest and the principal are repayable at maturity.

17 Cookie Creations pays $900 for additional baking equipment.

18 Natalie schedules her first class for November 29. She will receive $100 on the date of the class.

25 Natalie books a second class for December 5 for $150. She receives a $60 cash down payment, in advance.

29 Natalie teaches her first class, booked on November 18, and collects the $100 cash.

30 Natalie”s brother develops a website for Cookie Creations Inc. that the company will use for advertising. He charges the company $600 for his work, payable at the end of December. (Because the website is expected to have a useful life of two years before upgrades are needed, it should be treated as an asset called Website.)

30 Cookie Creations pays $1,200 for a one-year insurance policy.

30 Natalie teaches a group of elementary school students how to make Santa Claus cookies. At the end of the class, Natalie leaves an invoice for $300 with the school principal. The principal says that he will pass it along to the business office and it will be paid some time in December.

30 Natalie receives a $50 invoice for use of her cell phone. She uses the cell phone exclusively for Cookie Creations Inc. business. The invoice is for services provided in November, and payment is due on December 15.

Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries to record the November transactions.

(b) Post the journal entries to the general ledger accounts.

(c) Prepare a trial balance at November 30, 2011.

the financial statements of tootsie roll in appendix a at the back of this book cont 534362

The financial statements of Tootsie Roll in Appendix A at the back of this book contain the following selected accounts, all in thousands of dollars.

Common Stock

$24,862

Accounts Payable

9,140

Accounts Receivable

37,512

Selling, Marketing, and Administrative Expenses

103,755

Prepaid Expenses

8,562

Net Property, Plant, and Equipment

220,721

Net Product Sales

495,592

Instructions

(a) What is the increase and decrease side for each account? What is the normal balance for each account?

(b) Identify the probable other account in the transaction and the effect on that account when:

(1) Accounts Receivable is decreased.

(2) Accounts Payable is decreased.

(3) Prepaid Expenses is increased.

(c) Identify the other account(s) that ordinarily would be involved when:

(1) Interest Expense is increased.

(2) Property, Plant, and Equipment is increased.

the financial statements of the hershey company appear in appendix b following the f 534363

The financial statements of The Hershey Company appear in Appendix B, following the financial statements for Tootsie Roll in Appendix A.

Instructions

(a) Based on the information contained in these financial statements, determine the normal balance for:

Tootsie Roll Industries

The Hershey Company

(1) Accounts Receivable

(1) Inventories

(2) Net Property, Plant, and Equipment

(2) Provision for Income

(3) Accounts Payable

(3) Accrued Liabilities

(4) Retained Earnings

(4) Common Stock

(5) Net Product Sales

(5) Interest Expense

(b) Identify the other account ordinarily involved when:

(1) Accounts Receivable is increased.

(2) Notes Payable is decreased.

(3) Machinery is increased.

(4) Interest Revenue is increased.

chieftain international inc is an oil and natural gas exploration and production com 534365

Chieftain International, Inc., is an oil and natural gas exploration and production company. A recent balance sheet reported $208 million in assets with only $4.6 million in liabilities, all of which were short-term accounts payable. During the year, Chieftain expanded its holdings of oil and gas rights, drilled 37 new wells, and invested in expensive 3-D seismic technology. The company generated $19 million cash from operating activities and paid no dividends. It had a cash balance of $102 million at the end of the year.

Instructions

(a) Name at least two advantages to Chieftain from having no long-term debt. Can you think of disadvantages?

(b) What are some of the advantages to Chieftain from having this large a cash balance? What is a disadvantage?

(c) Why do you suppose Chieftain has the $4.6 million balance in accounts payable, since it appears that it could have made all its purchases for cash?

courtney delacey is the assistant chief accountant at bit company a manufacturer of 534366

Courtney Delacey is the assistant chief accountant at BIT Company, a manufacturer of computer chips and cellular phones. The company presently has total sales of $20 million. It is the end of the first quarter and Courtney is hurriedly trying to prepare a general ledger trial balance so that quarterly financial statements can be prepared and released to management and the regulatory agencies. The total credits on the trial balance exceed the debits by $1,000.

In order to meet the 4 P.M. deadline, Courtney decides to force the debits and credits into balance by adding the amount of the difference to the Equipment account. She chose Equipment because it is one of the larger account balances; percentage-wise it will be the least misstated. Courtney plugs the difference! She believes that the difference is quite small and will not affect anyone”s decisions. She wishes that she had another few days to find the error but realizes that the financial statements are already late.

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) What ethical issues are involved?

(c) What are Courtney”s alternatives?

in their annual reports to stockholders companies must report or disclose informatio 534368

In their annual reports to stockholders, companies must report or disclose information about all liabilities, including potential liabilities related to environmental clean-up. There are many situations in which you will be asked to provide personal financial information about your assets, liabilities, revenue, and expenses. Sometimes you will face difficult decisions regarding what to disclose and how to disclose it.

Instructions

Suppose that you are putting together a loan application to purchase a home. Based on your income and assets, you qualify for the mortgage loan, but just barely. How would you address each of the following situations in reporting your financial position for the loan application? Provide responses for each of the following questions.

(a) You signed a guarantee for a bank loan that a friend took out for $20,000. If your friend doesn”t pay, you will have to pay. Your friend has made all of the payments so far, and it appears he will be able to pay in the future.

(b) You were involved in an auto accident in which you were at fault. There is the possibility that you may have to pay as much as $50,000 as part of a settlement. The issue will not be resolved before the bank processes your mortgage request.

(c) The company at which you work isn”t doing very well, and it has recently laid off employees. You are still employed, but it is quite possible that you will lose your job in the next few months.

the trial balance shows supplies 1 350 and supplies expense 0 534380

The trial balance shows Supplies $1,350 and Supplies Expense $0. If $600 of supplies are on hand at the end of the period, the adjusting entry is:

(a)

Supplies

600

Supplies Expense

600

(b)

Supplies

750

Supplies Expense

750

(c )

Supplies Expense

750

Supplies

750

(d)

Supplies Expense

600

Supplies

600

queenan company computes depreciation on delivery equipment at 1 000 for the month o 534383

Queenan Company computes depreciation on delivery equipment at $1,000 for the month of June. The adjusting entry to record this depreciation is as follows:

(a)

Depreciation Expense

1000

Accumulated Depreciation—

Queenan Company

1000

(b)

Depreciation Expense

1000

Equipment

1000

(c )

Depreciation Expense

1000

Accumulated Depreciation—

Equipment

1000

1000

(d)

Equipment Expense

Accumulated Depreciation—

Equipment

1000

colleen mooney earned a salary of 400 for the last week of september she will be pai 534385

Colleen Mooney earned a salary of $400 for the last week of September. She will be paid on October 1. The adjusting entry for Colleen”s employer at September 30 is:

(a)

No entry is required.

(b)

Salaries and Wages Expense

400

Salaries and Wages Payable

400

(c )

Salaries and Wages Expense

400

Cash

400

(d)

Salaries and Wages Payable

400

Cash

400

transactions that affect earnings do not necessarily affect cash identify the effect 534425

Transactions that affect earnings do not necessarily affect cash. Identify the effect, if any, that each of the following transactions would have upon cash and net income. The first transaction has been completed as an example.

Net

Cash

Income

$100

$0

(a) Purchased $100 of supplies for cash. _$100 $ 0

(b) Recorded an adjusting entry to record use of $20 of the above supplies.

(c) Made sales of $1,300, all on account.

(d) Received $800 from customers in payment of their accounts.

(e) Purchased equipment for cash, $2,500.

(f) Recorded depreciation of building for period used, $600.

the following independent situations require professional judgment for determining w 534446

The following independent situations require professional judgment for determining when to recognize revenue from the transactions.

(a) Southwest Airlines sells you an advance-purchase airline ticket in September for your flight home at Christmas.

(b) Ultimate Electronics sells you a home theatre on a “no money down and full payment in three months” promotional deal.

(c) The Toronto Blue Jays sell season tickets online to games in the Skydome. Fans can purchase the tickets at any time, although the season doesn”t officially begin until April. The major league baseball season runs from April through October.

(d) You borrow money in August from RBC Financial Group. The loan and the interest are repayable in full in November.

(e) In August, you order a sweater from Sears using its online catalog. The sweater arrives in September, and you charge it to your Sears credit card. You receive and pay the Sears bill in October.

Instructions

Identify when revenue should be recognized in each of the above situations.

these are the assumptions principles and constraints discussed in this and previous 534447

These are the assumptions, principles, and constraints discussed in this and previous chapters.

Economic entity assumption.

6. Materiality constraint.

Expense recognition principle.

7. Full disclosure principle.

Monetary unit assumption.

8. Going concern assumption.

Periodicity assumption.

9. Revenue recognition principle.

Cost principle.

10. Cost constraint.

Instructions

Identify by number the accounting assumption, principle, or constraint that describes each situation below. Do not use a number more than once.

_____ (a) Is the rationale for why plant assets are not reported at liquidation value. (Do not use the cost principle.)

_____ (b) Indicates that personal and business record-keeping should be separately maintained.

_____ (c) Ensures that all relevant financial information is reported.

_____ (d) Assumes that the dollar is the “measuring stick” used to report on financial performance.

_____ (e) Requires that accounting standards be followed for all significant items.

_____ (f) Separates financial information into time periods for reporting purposes.

_____ (g) Requires recognition of expenses in the same period as related revenues.

_____ (h) Indicates that fair value changes subsequent to purchase are not recorded in the accounts.

your examination of the records of a company that follows the cash basis of accounti 534449

Your examination of the records of a company that follows the cash basis of accounting

tells you that the company”s reported cash basis earnings in 2012 are $33,640. If this firm had followed accrual basis accounting practices, it would have reported the following year-end balances.

2012

2011

Accounts receivable

$3,400

$2,800

Supplies on hand

1,300

1,460

Unpaid wages owed

2,000

2,400

Other unpaid amounts

1,400

1,100

Instructions

Determine the company”s net earnings on an accrual basis for 2012. Show all your calculations in an orderly fashion.

during 2012 its first year of operations as a delivery service underwood corp entere 534328

During 2012, its first year of operations as a delivery service, Underwood Corp. entered into the following transactions.

1. Issued shares of common stock to investors in exchange for $100,000 in cash.

2. Borrowed $45,000 by issuing bonds.

3. Purchased delivery trucks for $60,000 cash.

4. Received $16,000 from customers for services provided.

5. Purchased supplies for $4,700 on account.

6. Paid rent of $5,200.

7. Performed services on account for $10,000.

8. Paid salaries of $28,000.

9. Paid a dividend of $11,000 to shareholders.

Instructions

Using the following tabular analysis, show the effect of each transaction on the accounting equation. Put explanations for changes to Stockholders” Equity in the right-hand margin.Use Illustration 3-3 (page 110) as a model.

Assets

=

Liabilities

+Stockholders” Equity

Cash

+

Accounts
Receivable

+

Supplies

+

Equipment

=

Accounts
Payable

+

Bonds
Payable

+

Common
Stock

+

Revenues

Retained Earnings
Expenses

Dividends

this information relates to plunkett real estate agency 534330

This information relates to Plunkett Real Estate Agency.

Oct. 1 Stockholders invest $30,000 in exchange for common stock of the corporation.

2 Hires an administrative assistant at an annual salary of $36,000.

3 Buys office furniture for $3,800, on account.

6 Sells a house and lot for M.E. Petty; commissions due from Petty, $10,800 (not paid by Petty at this time).

10 Receives cash of $140 as commission for acting as rental agent renting an apartment.

27 Pays $700 on account for the office furniture purchased on October 3.

30 Pays the administrative assistant $3,000 in salary for October.

Instructions

Prepare the debit–credit analysis for each transaction, as illustrated on pages 121–126.

selected transactions for charlotte corporation during its first month in business a 534334

Selected transactions for Charlotte Corporation during its first month in business are presented below.

Sept. 1 Issued common stock in exchange for $20,000 cash received from investors.

5 Purchased equipment for $9,000, paying $3,000 in cash and the balance on account.

25 Paid $4,000 cash on balance owed for equipment.

30 Paid $500 cash dividend.

Charlotte”s chart of accounts shows: Cash, Equipment, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, and Dividends.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the September transactions. The column headings should be: Cash _ Equipment _ Accounts Payable _ Stockholders” Equity. For transactions affecting stockholders” equity, provide explanations in the right margin, as shown on page 110.

(b) Journalize the transactions. Do not provide explanations.

(c) Post the transactions to T accounts.

the t accounts on the next page summarize the ledger of mcgregor gardening company i 534335

The T accounts on the next page summarize the ledger of McGregor Gardening Company, Inc. at the end of the first month of operations.

Cash

Unearned Service Revenue

Apr.

1

15,000

Apr.

15

800

Apr.

30

900

12

700

25

3,500

29

800

30

900

Accounts Receivable

Common Stock

Apr.

7

3400

Apr.

29

800

Apr.

1

15000

Supplies

Service Revenue

Apr.

4

5200

Apr.

7

3400

12

700

Accounts Payable

Salaries and Wages Expense

Apr.

25

3500

Apr.

4

5200

Apr.

15

800

Instructions

(a) Prepare in the order they occurred the journal entries (including explanations) that resulted in the amounts posted to the accounts.

(b) Prepare a trial balance at April 30, 2012. (Hint:Compute ending balances of T accounts first.)

selected transactions from the journal of galaxy inc during its first month of opera 534336

Selected transactions from the journal of Galaxy Inc. during its first month of operations are presented here.

Date

Account Titles

Debit

Credit

Aug. 1

Cash

8,000

Common Stock

8,000

10

Cash

1,700

Service Revenue

1,700

12

Equipment

6200

Cash

1200

Notes Payable

5000

25

Accounts Receivable

3400

Service Revenue

3400

31

Cash

600

Accounts Receivable

600

Instructions

(a) Post the transactions to T accounts.

(b) Prepare a trial balance at August 31, 2012.

here is the ledger for stampfer co 534337

Here is the ledger for Stampfer Co.

Cash

Common Stock

Oct.

1

7,000

Oct.

4

400

Oct.

1

7,000

10

980

12

1,500

25

2,000

10

8,000

15

250

20

700

30

300

25

2,000

31

500

Accounts Receivable

Dividends

Oct.

6

800

Oct.

20

700

Oct.

30

300

20

920

Supplies

Service Revenue

Oct.

4

400

Oct.

31

180

Oct.

6

800

10

980

20

920

Equipment

Salaries and Wages Expense

Oct.

3

3000

Oct.

31

500

Notes Payable

Supplies Expense

Oct.

10

8000

Oct.

31

180

Accounts Payable

Rent Expense

Oct.

12

1500

Oct.

3

3000

Oct.

15

250

Instructions

(a) Reproduce the journal entries for only the transactions that occurred on October 1,10, and 20, and provide explanations for each.

(b) Prepare a trial balance at October 31, 2012. (Hint:Compute ending balances of T accounts first.)

the bookkeeper for bullwinkle corporation made these errors in journalizing and post 534338

The bookkeeper for Bullwinkle Corporation made these errors in journalizing and posting.

1. A credit posting of $400 to Accounts Receivable was omitted.

2. A debit posting of $750 for Prepaid Insurance was debited to Insurance Expense.

3. A collection on account of $100 was journalized and posted as a debit to Cash $100 and a credit to Accounts Payable $100.

4. A credit posting of $300 to Property Taxes Payable was made twice.

5. A cash purchase of supplies for $250 was journalized and posted as a debit to Supplies $25 and a credit to Cash $25.

6. A debit of $395 to Advertising Expense was posted as $359.

Instructions

For each error, indicate (a) whether the trial balance will balance; if the trial balance will not balance, indicate (b) the amount of the difference, and (c) the trial balance column that will have the larger total. Consider each error separately. Use the following form, in

which error 1 is given as an example.

(a)

(b)

(c)

Error

In Balance

Difference

Larger Column

1

No

$400

Debit

the accounts in the ledger of roshek delivery service contain the following balances 534339

The accounts in the ledger of Roshek Delivery Service contain the following balances on July 31, 2012.

Accounts Receivable

13,400

Prepaid Insurance

$2,200

Accounts Payable

8,400

Service Revenue

15,500

Cash

?

Dividends

700

Equipment

59,360

Common Stock

40,000

Maintenance and

Salaries and Wages Expense

7,428

Repairs Expense

1,958

Salaries and Wages Payable

820

Insurance Expense

900

Retained Earnings

5,200

Notes Payable (due 2015)

28,450

(July 1, 2012)

Instructions

(a) Prepare a trial balance with the accounts arranged as illustrated in the chapter, and fill in the missing amount for Cash.

(b) Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a classified balance sheet for the month of July 2012.

the following accounts in alphabetical order were selected from recent financial sta 534340

The following accounts, in alphabetical order, were selected from recent financial statements of Krispy Kreme Doughnuts, Inc.

Accounts payable

Interest income

Accounts receivable

Inventories

Common stock

Prepaid expenses

Depreciation expense

Property and equipment

Interest expense

Revenues

Instructions

For each account, indicate (a) whether the normal balance is a debit or a credit, and (b) the financial statement—balance sheet or income statement—where the account should be presented.

on april 1 vagabond travel agency inc was established these transactions were comple 534343

On April 1, Vagabond Travel Agency Inc. was established. These transactions were completed during the month.

1. Stockholders invested $30,000 cash in the company in exchange for common stock.

2. Paid $900 cash for April office rent.

3. Purchased office equipment for $3,400 cash.

4. Purchased $200 of advertising in the Chicago Tribune, on account.

5. Paid $500 cash for office supplies.

6. Earned $12,000 for services provided: Cash of $3,000 is received from customers, and the balance of $9,000 is billed to customers on account.

7. Paid $400 cash dividends.

8. Paid Chicago Tribuneamount due in transaction (4).

9. Paid employees” salaries $1,800.

10. Received $9,000 in cash from customers billed previously in transaction (6).

Instructions

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the transactions using these column headings: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Equipment, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, and

Retained Earnings (with separate columns for Revenues, Expenses, and Dividends). Include margin explanations for any changes in Retained Earnings.

(b) From an analysis of the Retained Earnings columns, compute the net income or net loss for April.

susan taylor started her own consulting firm taylor made consulting inc on may 1 201 534344

Susan Taylor started her own consulting firm, Taylor Made Consulting Inc., on May 1, 2012. The following transactions occurred during the month of May.

May 1 Stockholders invested $15,000 cash in the business in exchange for common stock.

2 Paid $600 for office rent for the month.

3 Purchased $500 of supplies on account.

5 Paid $150 to advertise in the County News.

9 Received $1,400 cash for services provided.

12 Paid $200 cash dividend.

15 Performed $4,200 of services on account.

17 Paid $2,500 for employee salaries.

20 Paid for the supplies purchased on account on May 3.

23 Received a cash payment of $1,200 for services provided on account on May 15.

26 Borrowed $5,000 from the bank on a note payable.

29 Purchased office equipment for $2,000 paying $200 in cash and the balance on account.

30 Paid $180 for utilities.

Instructions

(a) Show the effects of the previous transactions on the accounting equation using the following format. Assume the note payable is to be repaid within the year.

Assets

=

Liabilities

+Stockholders” Equity

Date

Cash

+

Accounts
Receivable

+

Supplies

+

Equipment

=

Notes
Payable

+

Accounts
Payable

+

Common
Stock

+

Revenues

Retained Earnings
Expenses

Dividends

Include margin explanations for any changes in Retained Earnings.

(b) Prepare an income statement for the month of May 2012.

(c) Prepare a classified balance sheet at May 31, 2012.

robin klann created a corporation providing legal services robin klann inc on july 1 534345

Robin Klann created a corporation providing legal services, Robin Klann Inc., on July 1, 2012. On July 31 the balance sheet showed: Cash $4,000; Accounts Receivable $2,500; Supplies $500; Equipment $5,000; Accounts Payable $4,200; Common Stock $6,200; and Retained Earnings $1,600. During August the following transactions occurred.

Aug. 1 Collected $1,100 of accounts receivable due from customers.

4 Paid $2,700 cash for accounts payable due.

9 Earned revenue of $5,400, of which $3,600 is collected in cash and the balance is due in September.

15 Purchased additional office equipment for $4,000, paying $700 in cash and the balance on account.

19 Paid salaries $1,400, rent for August $700, and advertising expenses $350.

23 Paid a cash dividend of $700.

26 Received $5,000 from Standard Federal Bank; the money was borrowed on a 4-month note payable.

31 Incurred utility expenses for the month on account $380.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the August transactions beginning with July 31 balances. The column heading should be: Cash _ Accounts Receivable _ Supplies _ Equipment _ Notes Payable _ Accounts Payable _ Common Stock _ Retained

Earnings _ Revenues _ Expenses _ Dividends. Include margin explanations for any changes in Retained Earnings.

(b) Prepare an income statement for August, a retained earnings statement for August, and a classified balance sheet at August 31.

clear view miniature golf and driving range inc was opened on march 1 by roger princ 534346

Clear View Miniature Golf and Driving Range Inc. was opened on March 1 by Roger Prince. These selected events and transactions occurred during March.

Mar. 1 Stockholders invested $50,000 cash in the business in exchange for common stock of the corporation.

3 Purchased Arnie”s Golf Land for $38,000 cash. The price consists of land $23,000, building $9,000, and equipment $6,000. (Record this in a single entry.)

5 Advertised the opening of the driving range and miniature golf course, paying advertising expenses of $1,200 cash.

6 Paid cash $2,400 for a 1-year insurance policy.

10 Purchased golf clubs and other equipment for $5,500 from Golden Bear Company, payable in 30 days.

18 Received golf fees of $1,600 in cash from customers for golf fees earned.

19 Sold 100 coupon books for $25 each in cash. Each book contains ten coupons that enable the holder to play one round of miniature golf or to hit one bucket of golf balls. (Hint:The revenue is not earned until the customers use the coupons.)

25 Paid a $500 cash dividend.

30 Paid salaries of $800.

30 Paid Golden Bear Company in full for equipment purchased on March 10.

31 Received $900 in cash from customers for golf fees earned.

The company uses these accounts: Cash, Prepaid Insurance, Land, Buildings, Equipment, Accounts Payable, Unearned Service Revenue, Common Stock, Retained Earnings, Dividends, Service Revenue, Advertising Expense, and Salaries and Wages Expense.

Instructions

Journalize the March transactions, including explanations. Clear View records golf fees as service revenue.

towne architects incorporated as licensed architects on april 1 2012 during the firs 534347

Towne Architects incorporated as licensed architects on April 1, 2012. During the first month of the operation of the business, these events and transactions occurred:

Apr. 1 Stockholders invested $18,000 cash in exchange for common stock of the corporation.

1 Hired a secretary-receptionist at a salary of $375 per week, payable monthly.

2 Paid office rent for the month $900.

3 Purchased architectural supplies on account from Spring Green Company $1,300.

10 Completed blueprints on a carport and billed client $1,900 for services.

11 Received $700 cash advance from J. Madison to design a new home.

20 Received $2,800 cash for services completed and delivered to M. Svetlana.

30 Paid secretary-receptionist for the month $1,500.

30 Paid $300 to Spring Green Company for accounts payable due.

The company uses these accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Accounts Payable, Unearned Service Revenue, Common Stock, Service Revenue, Salaries and Wages Expense, and Rent Expense.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions, including explanations.

(b) Post to the ledger T accounts.

(c) Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2012.

this is the trial balance of mimosa company on september 30 534348

This is the trial balance of Mimosa Company on September 30.

MIMOSA COMPANY
Trial Balance
September 30, 2012

Debit

Credit

Cash

$8,200

Accounts Receivable

2,600

Supplies

2,100

Equipment

8,000

Accounts Payable

$4,800

Unearned Service Revenue

1,100

Common Stock

15,000

$20,900

$20,900

The October transactions were as follows.

Oct. 5 Received $1,300 in cash from customers for accounts receivable due.

10 Billed customers for services performed $5,100.

15 Paid employee salaries $1,200.

17 Performed $600 of services for customers who paid in advance in August.

20 Paid $1,900 to creditors for accounts payable due.

29 Paid a $300 cash dividend.

31 Paid utilities $400.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a general ledger using T accounts. Enter the opening balances in the ledger accounts as of October 1. Provision should be made for these additional accounts: Dividends, Service Revenue, Salaries and Wages Expense, and Utilities Expense.

(b) Journalize the transactions, including explanations.

(c) Post to the ledger accounts.

(d) Prepare a trial balance on October 31, 2012.

this trial balance of michels co does not balance 534349

This trial balance of Michels Co. does not balance.

MICHELS CO.
Trial Balance
June 30, 2012

Debit

Credit

Cash

$3,090

Accounts Receivable

3,190

Supplies

800

Equipment

3,000

Accounts Payable

$3,686

Unearned Service Revenue

1200

Common Stock

9,000

Dividends

800

Service Revenue

3480

Salaries and Wages Expense

3,600

Utilities Expense

910

$13,500

$19,256

Each of the listed accounts has a normal balance per the general ledger. An examination of the ledger and journal reveals the following errors:

1. Cash received from a customer on account was debited for $780, and Accounts Receivable was credited for the same amount. The actual collection was for $870.

2. The purchase of a printer on account for $340 was recorded as a debit to Supplies for $340 and a credit to Accounts Payable for $340.

3. Services were performed on account for a client for $900. Accounts Receivable was debited for $90 and Service Revenue was credited for $900.

4. A debit posting to Salaries and Wages Expense of $700 was omitted.

5. A payment on account for $206 was credited to Cash for $206 and credited to Accounts Payable for $260.

6. Payment of a $600 cash dividend to Michels” stockholders was debited to Salaries and Wages Expense for $600 and credited to Cash for $600.

Instructions

Prepare the correct trial balance. (Hint:All accounts have normal balances.)

the scifi theater inc was recently formed it began operations in march 2012 534350

The SciFi Theater Inc. was recently formed. It began operations in March 2012. The SciFi is unique in that it will show only triple features of sequential theme movies. On March 1, the ledger of The SciFi showed: Cash $16,000; Land $38,000; Buildings (concession

stand, projection room, ticket booth, and screen) $22,000; Equipment $16,000; Accounts Payable $12,000; and Common Stock $80,000. During the month of March the following events and transactions occurred.

Mar. 2 Rented the three Star Wars movies (Star Wars®, The Empire Strikes Back, and The Return of the Jedi) to be shown for the first

three weeks of March. The film rental was $10,000; $2,000 was paid in cash and $8,000 will be paid on March 10.

3 Ordered the first three Star Trekmovies to be shown the last 10 days of March. It will cost $500 per night.

9 Received $9,900 cash from admissions.

10 Paid balance due on Star Warsmovies rental and $2,900 on March 1 accounts payable.

11 Hired J. Carne to operate the concession stand. Carne agrees to pay The SciFi Theater 15% of gross receipts, payable monthly.

12 Paid advertising expenses $500.

20 Received $8,300 cash from customers for admissions.

20 Received the Star Trekmovies and paid rental fee of $5,000.

31 Paid salaries of $3,800.

31 Received statement from J. Carne showing gross receipts from concessions of $10,000 and the balance due to The SciFi of

$1,500 for March. Carne paid half the balance due and will remit the remainder on April 5.

31 Received $20,000 cash from customers for admissions. In addition to the accounts identified above, the chart of accounts includes: Accounts Receivable, Service Revenue, Sales Revenue, Advertising Expense, Rent Expense, and Salaries and Wages Expense.

Instructions

(a) Using T accounts, enter the beginning balances to the ledger.

(b) Journalize the March transactions, including explanations. SciFi records admission

revenue as service revenue, concession revenue as sales revenue, and film rental expense

as rent expense.

(c) Post the March journal entries to the ledger.

(d) Prepare a trial balance on March 31, 2012.

the bookkeeper for fred kelley s dance studio made the following errors in journaliz 534351

The bookkeeper for Fred Kelley”s dance studio made the following errors in journalizing and posting.

1. A credit to Supplies of $600 was omitted.

2. A debit posting of $300 to Accounts Payable was inadvertently debited to Accounts Receivable.

3. A purchase of supplies on account of $450 was debited to Supplies for $540 and credited to Accounts Payable for $540.

4. A credit posting of $680 to Interest Payable was posted twice.

5. A debit posting to Income Taxes Payable for $250 and a credit posting to Cash for $250 were made twice.

6. A debit posting for $1,200 of Dividends was inadvertently posted to Salaries and Wages Expense instead.

7. A credit to Service Revenue for $450 was inadvertently posted as a debit to Service Revenue.

8. A credit to Accounts Receivable of $250 was credited to Accounts Payable.

Instructions

For each error, indicate (a) whether the trial balance will balance; (b) the amount of the difference if the trial balance will not balance; and (c) the trial balance column that will have the larger total. Consider each error separately. Use the following form, in which error 1 is given as an example.

(a)

(b)

(c)

Error

In Balance

Difference

Larger Column

1

No

$600

Debit

new dawn window washing inc was started on may 1 here is a summary of the may transa 534352

New Dawn Window Washing Inc. was started on May 1. Here is a summary of the May transactions.

1. Stockholders invested $20,000 cash in the company in exchange for common stock.

2. Purchased equipment for $9,000 cash.

3. Paid $700 cash for May office rent.

4. Paid $300 cash for supplies.

5. Purchased $750 of advertising in the Beacon Newson account.

6. Received $7,200 in cash from customers for service.

7. Paid a $500 cash dividend.

8. Paid part-time employee salaries $1,700.

9. Paid utility bills $140.

10. Provided service on account to customers $1,000.

11. Collected cash of $650 for services billed in transaction (10).

Instructions

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the transactions using these column headings: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Equipment, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, and Retained Earnings (with separate columns for Revenues, Expenses, and Dividends). Revenue is called Service Revenue. Include margin explanations for any changes in Retained Earnings.

(b) From an analysis of the Retained Earnings columns, compute the net income or net loss for May.

samuel aldrich started his own delivery service aldrich service inc on june 1 2012 t 534353

Samuel Aldrich started his own delivery service, Aldrich Service Inc., on June 1, 2012. The following transactions occurred during the month of June.

June 1 Stockholders invested $15,000 cash in the business in exchange for common stock.

2 Purchased a used van for deliveries for $15,000. Samuel paid $2,000 cash and signed a note payable for the remaining balance.

3 Paid $600 for office rent for the month.

5 Performed $2,400 of services on account.

9 Paid $300 in cash dividends.

12 Purchased supplies for $240 on account.

15 Received a cash payment of $750 for services provided on June 5.

17 Received a bill for $200 to cover advertisements in Tri-State News.

20 Received a cash payment of $1,500 for services provided.

23 Made a cash payment of $500 on the note payable.

26 Paid $180 for utilities.

29 Paid for the supplies purchased on account on June 12.

30 Paid $750 for employee salaries.

Instructions

(a) Show the effects of the previous transactions on the accounting equation using the following format. Assume the note payable is to be repaid within the year.

Assets

=

Liabilities

+Stockholders” Equity

Date

Cash

+

Accounts
Receivable

+

Supplies

+

Equipment

=

Notes
Payable

+

Accounts
Payable

+

Common
Stock

+

Revenues

Retained Earnings
Expenses

Dividends

Include margin explanations for any changes in Retained Earnings.

(b) Prepare an income statement for the month of June.

(c) Prepare a classified balance sheet at June 30, 2012.

during its first year of operations ketter company had credit sales of 3 000 000 534022

During its first year of operations, Ketter Company had credit sales of $3,000,000, of which $400,000 remained uncollected at year-end. The credit manager estimates that $18,000 of these receivables will become uncollectible.

(a) Prepare the journal entry to record the estimated uncollectibles. (Assume an unadjusted balance of zero in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.)

(b) Prepare the current assets section of the balance sheet for Ketter Company, assuming that in addition to the receivables it has cash of $90,000, merchandise inventory of $180,000, and supplies of $13,000.

(c) Calculate the receivables turnover ratio and average collection period. Assume that average net receivables were $300,000. Explain what these measures tell us.

at the beginning of the current period engseth corp had balances in accounts receiva 534032

At the beginning of the current period, Engseth Corp. had balances in Accounts Receivable of $200,000 and in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts of $9,000 (credit). During the period, it had net credit sales of $800,000 and collections of $763,000. It wrote off as uncollectible accounts receivable of $7,300. However, a $3,100 account previously written off as uncollectible was recovered before the end of the current period. Uncollectible accounts are estimated to total $25,000 at the end of the period. (Omit cost of goods sold entries.)

Instructions

(a) Prepare the entries to record sales and collections during the period.

(b) Prepare the entry to record the write-off of uncollectible accounts during the period.

(c) Prepare the entries to record the recovery of the uncollectible account during the period.

(d) Prepare the entry to record bad debts expense for the period.

(e) Determine the ending balances in Accounts Receivable and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.

(f ) What is the net realizable value of the receivables at the end of the period?

the ledger of montgomery company at the end of the current year shows accounts recei 534033

The ledger of Montgomery Company at the end of the current year shows Accounts Receivable $78,000; Credit Sales $810,000; and Sales Returns and Allowances $40,000.

Instructions

(a) If Montgomery uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectible accounts, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming Montgomery determines that Baruth”s $900 balance is uncollectible.

(b) If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $1,100 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be 10% of accounts receivable.

(c) If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a debit balance of $500 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be 8% of accounts receivable.

parry company has accounts receivable of 95 400 at march 31 2012 an analysis of the 534034

Parry Company has accounts receivable of $95,400 at March 31, 2012. An analysis of the accounts shows these amounts.

Balance, March 31

Month of Sale

2012

2011

March

$65,000

$75,000

February

12,900

8,000

December and January

10,100

2,400

November and October

7,400

1,100

$95,400

$86,500

Credit terms are 2/10, n/30. At March 31, 2012, there is a $2,100 credit balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts prior to adjustment. The company uses the percentage of receivables basis for estimating uncollectible accounts. The company”s estimates of bad debts are as shown below.

Estimated Percentage

Age of Accounts

Uncollectible

Current

2%

1–30 days past due

5

31–90 days past due

30

Over 90 days past due

50

Instructions

(a) Determine the total estimated uncollectibles.

(b) Prepare the adjusting entry at March 31, 2012, to record bad debts expense.

(c) Discuss the implications of the changes in the aging schedule from 2011 to 2012.

gwynne supply co has the following transactions related to notes receivable during t 534036

Gwynne Supply Co. has the following transactions related to notes receivable during the last 2 months of the year.

Nov.

1

Loaned $60,000 cash to B. Akey on a 1-year, 7% note.

Dec.

11

Sold goods to R. P. Mayrl, Inc., receiving a $3,600, 90-day, 8% note.

16

Received a $12,000, 6-month, 9% note to settle an open account from M. Colvin.

31

Accrued interest revenue on all notes receivable.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions for Gwynne Supply Co. (Omit cost of goods sold entries.)

these transactions took place for renda co 534037

These transactions took place for Renda Co.

2011

May, 1

Received a $5,000, 1-year, 6% note in exchange for an outstanding account receivable from S. Dorsey.

Dec., 31

Accrued interest revenue on the S. Dorsey note.

2012

May, 1

Received principal plus interest on the S. Dorsey note. (No interest has been accrued since December 31, 2011.)

Instructions

Record the transactions in the general journal.

the following is a list of activities that companies perform in relation to their re 534039

The following is a list of activities that companies perform in relation to their receivables.

1. Selling receivables to a factor.

2. Reviewing company ratings in The Dun and Bradstreet Reference Book of American Business.

3. Collecting information on competitors” payment period policies.

4. Preparing monthly accounts receivable aging schedule and investigating problem accounts.

5. Calculating the receivables turnover ratio and average collection period.

Instructions

Match each of the activities listed above with a purpose of the activity listed below.

(a) Determine to whom to extend credit.

(b) Establish a payment period.

(c) Monitor collections.

(d) Evaluate the liquidity of receivables.

(e) Accelerate cash receipts from receivables when necessary.

the following information was taken from the 2009 financial statements of fedex corp 534040

The following information was taken from the 2009 financial statements of FedEx Corporation, a major global transportation/delivery company.

(in millions)

2009

2008

Accounts receivable (gross)

$3,587

4,517

Accounts receivable (net)

3,391

4,359

Allowance for doubtful accounts

196

158

Sales

35,497

37,953

Total current assets

7,116

7,244

Instructions

Answer each of the following questions.

(a) Calculate the receivables turnover ratio and the average collection period for 2009 for FedEx.

(b) Is accounts receivable a material component of the company”s total current assets?

(c) Evaluate the balance in FedEx”s allowance for doubtful accounts.

the following ratios are available for tym inc 534041

The following ratios are available for Tym Inc.

Current ratio

2012

2011

Receivables turnover

1.3:1

1.5:1

Inventory turnover

12 times

10 times

11 times

9 times

Instructions

(a) Is Tym”s short-term liquidity improving or deteriorating in 2012? Be specific in your answer, referring to relevant ratios.

(b) Do changes in turnover ratios affect profitability? Explain.

(c) Identify any steps Tym might have taken, or might wish to take, to improve its management of its receivables and inventory turnover.

during 2012 gavin corp entered into the following transactions 534311

During 2012, Gavin Corp. entered into the following transactions.

1. Borrowed $60,000 by issuing bonds.

2. Paid $9,000 cash dividend to stockholders.

3. Received $13,000 cash from a previously billed customer for services provided.

4. Purchased supplies on account for $3,100.

Using the following tabular analysis, show the effect of each transaction on the accounting equation. Put explanations for changes to Stockholders” Equity in the right-hand margin. For Retained Earnings, use separate columns for Revenues, Expenses, and Dividends if necessary. Use Illustration 3-3 (page 110) as a model.

Assets

= Liabilities

+ Stockholders” Equity

Cash

Accounts
+Receivable

+Supplies

Accounts
=Payable

Bonds
+Payable

Common
+Stock

Retained
+Earnings

during 2012 newberry company entered into the following transactions 534312

During 2012, Newberry Company entered into the following transactions.

1. Purchased equipment for $286,176 cash.

2. Issued common stock to investors for $137,590 cash.

3. Purchased inventory of $68,480 on account.

Using the following tabular analysis, show the effect of each transaction on the accounting equation. Put explanations for changes to Stockholders” Equity in the right-hand margin. For Retained Earnings, use separate columns for Revenues, Expenses, and Dividends if necessary. Use Illustration 3-3 (page 110) as a model.

Assets

= Liabilities

+ Stockholders” Equity

Cash

+Inventory

+Equipment

Accounts
=Payable

Common
+Stock

Common
+Stock

Retained
+Earnings

an inexperienced bookkeeper prepared the following trial balance that does not balan 534321

An inexperienced bookkeeper prepared the following trial balance that does not balance. Prepare a correct trial balance, assuming all account balances are normal.

PELICAN COMPANY
Trial Balance
December 31, 2012

Debit

Credit

Cash

$20,800

Prepaid Insurance

$ 3,500

Accounts Payable

2,500

Unearned Service Revenue

1,800

Common Stock

10,000

Retained Earnings

6,600

Dividends

5,000

Service Revenue

25,600

Salaries and Wages Expense

14,600

Rent Expense

2,600

$37,200

$55,800

phil eubanks recorded the following transactions during the month of april 534325

Phil Eubanks recorded the following transactions during the month of April.

Apr. 3

Cash

3400

Service Revenue

3400

16

Rent Expense

500

Cash

500

20

Salaries and Wages Expense

300

Cash

300

Post these entries to the Cash account of the general ledger to determine the ending balance in cash. The beginning balance in cash on April 1 was $1,900.

selected transactions for arnett advertising company inc are listed here 534326

Selected transactions for Arnett Advertising Company, Inc., are listed here.

1. Issued common stock to investors in exchange for cash received from investors.

2. Paid monthly rent.

3. Received cash from customers when service was provided.

4. Billed customers for services performed.

5. Paid dividend to stockholders.

6. Incurred advertising expense on account.

7. Received cash from customers billed in (4).

8. Purchased additional equipment for cash.

9. Purchased equipment on account.

Instructions

Describe the effect of each transaction on assets, liabilities, and stockholders” equity. For example, the first answer is:

(1) Increase in assets and increase in stockholders” equity.

delmont company entered into these transactions during may 2012 534327

Delmont Company entered into these transactions during May 2012.

1. Purchased computers for office use for $30,000 from Dell on account.

2. Paid $4,000 cash for May rent on storage space.

3. Received $12,000 cash from customers for contracts billed in April.

4. Provided computer services to Lawton Construction Company for $5,000 cash.

5. Paid Southern States Power Co. $8,000 cash for energy usage in May.

6. Stockholders invested an additional $40,000 in the business in exchange for common stock of the company.

7. Paid Dell for the computers purchased in (1).

8. Incurred advertising expense for May of $1,300 on account.

Instructions

Using the following tabular analysis, show the effect of each transaction on the accounting equation. Put explanations for changes to Stockholders” Equity in the right-hand margin. Use Illustration 3-3 (page 110) as a model.

Assets

=

Liabilities

+

+Stockholders” Equity

Cash

+

Accounts
Receivable

+

Equipment

=

Accounts
Payable

+

Common
Stock

+

Revenues

Retained Earnings
Expenses

Dividends

a new accountant at netzloff inc is trying to identify which of the amounts shown on 533939

A new accountant at Netzloff Inc. is trying to identify which of the amounts shown on page 377 should be reported as the current asset “Cash and cash equivalents” in the year-end balance sheet, as of April 30, 2012.

1. $60 of currency and coin in a locked box used for incidental cash transactions.

2. A $10,000 U.S. Treasury bill, due May 31, 2012.

3. $260 of April-dated checks that Netzloff has received from customers but not yet deposited.

4. An $85 check received from a customer in payment of its April account, but postdated to May 1.

5. $2,500 in the company”s checking account.

6. $4,800 in its savings account.

7. $75 of prepaid postage in its postage meter.

8. A $25 IOU from the company receptionist.

Instructions

(a) What balance should Netzloff report as its “Cash and cash equivalents” balance at April 30, 2012?

(b) In what account(s) and in what financial statement(s) should the items not included in “Cash and cash equivalents” be reported?

amster lasca and vang three law students who have joined together to open a law prac 533940

Amster, Lasca, and Vang, three law students who have joined together to open a law practice, are struggling to manage their cash flow. They haven”t yet built up sufficient clientele and revenues to support their legal practice”s ongoing costs. Initial costs, such as advertising, renovations to their premises, and the like, all result in outgoing cash flow at a time when little is coming in. Amster, Lasca, and Vang haven”t had time to establish a billing system since most of their clients” cases haven”t yet reached the courts, and the lawyers didn”t think it would be right to bill them until “results were achieved.”

Unfortunately, Amster, Lasca, and Vang”s suppliers don”t feel the same way. Their suppliers expect them to pay their accounts payable within a few days of receiving their bills. So far, there hasn”t even been enough money to pay the three lawyers, and they are not sure how long they can keep practicing law without getting some money into their pockets.

Instructions

Can you provide any suggestions for Amster, Lasca, and Vang to improve their cash management practices?

merrick company expects to have a cash balance of 46 000 on january 1 2012 533941

Merrick Company expects to have a cash balance of $46,000 on January 1, 2012. These are the relevant monthly budget data for the first two months of 2012.

1. Collections from customers: January $71,000, February $146,000

2. Payments to suppliers: January $40,000, February $75,000

3. Wages: January $30,000, February $40,000. Wages are paid in the month they are incurred.

4. Administrative expenses: January $21,000, February $24,000. These costs include depreciation of $1,000 per month. All other costs are paid as incurred.

5. Selling expenses: January $15,000, February $20,000. These costs are exclusive of depreciation. They are paid as incurred.

6. Sales of short-term investments in January are expected to realize $12,000 in cash. Merrick has a line of credit at a local bank that enables it to borrow up to $25,000. The company wants to maintain a minimum monthly cash balance of $20,000.

Instructions

Prepare a cash budget for January and February.

during october central light company experiences the following transactions in estab 533942

During October, Central Light Company experiences the following transactions in establishing a petty cash fund.

Oct. 1 A petty cash fund is established with a check for $150 issued to the petty cash custodian.

31 A check was written to reimburse the fund and increase the fund to $200. A count of the petty cash fund disclosed the following items:

Currency

$59.00

Coins

0.7

Expenditure receipts (vouchers):

Supplies

$26.10

Telephone, Internet, and fax

16.4

Postage

39.7

Freight-out

6.8

Instructions

Journalize the entries in October that pertain to the petty cash fund.

paik company maintains a petty cash fund for small expenditures these transactions o 533943

Paik Company maintains a petty cash fund for small expenditures. These transactions occurred during the month of August.

Aug. 1 Established the petty cash fund by writing a check on Westown Bank for $200.

15 Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $175. On this date, the fund consisted of $25 in cash and these petty cash receipts: freight-out $74.40, entertainment expense $36, postage expense $33.70 and miscellaneous expense $27.50.

16 Increased the amount of the petty cash fund to $400 by writing a check for $200.

31 Replenished the petty cash fund by writing a check for $283. On this date, the fund consisted of $117 in cash and these petty cash receipts: postage expense $145, entertainment expense $90.60, and freight-out $46.40.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the petty cash transactions.

(b) Post to the Petty Cash account.

(c) What internal control features exist in a petty cash fund?

classic theater is in the greenbelt mall a cashier s booth is located near the entra 533944

Classic Theater is in the Greenbelt Mall. A cashier”s booth is located near the entrance to the theater. Two cashiers are employed. One works from 1:00 to 5:00 P.M., the other from 5:00 to 9:00 P.M. Each cashier is bonded. The cashiers receive cash from customers and operate a machine that ejects serially numbered tickets. The rolls of tickets are inserted and locked into the machine by the theater manager at the beginning of each cashier”s shift.

After purchasing a ticket, the customer takes the ticket to a doorperson stationed at the entrance of the theater lobby some 60 feet from the cashier”s booth. The doorperson tears the ticket in half, admits the customer, and returns the ticket stub to the customer. The other half of the ticket is dropped into a locked box by the doorperson.

At the end of each cashier”s shift, the theater manager removes the ticket rolls from the machine and makes a cash count. The cash count sheet is initialed by the cashier. At the end of the day, the manager deposits the receipts in total in a bank night deposit vault located in the mall. In addition, the manager sends copies of the deposit slip and the initialed cash count sheets to the theater company treasurer for verification and to the company”s accounting department. Receipts from the first shift are stored in a safe located in the manager”s office.

Instructions

(a) Identify the internal control principles and their application to the cash receipts transactions of Classic Theater.

(b) If the doorperson and cashier decided to collaborate to misappropriate cash, what actions might they take?

nature hill middle school wants to raise money for a new sound system for its audito 533945

Nature Hill Middle School wants to raise money for a new sound system for its auditorium. The primary fund-raising event is a dance at which the famous disc jockey Jay Dee will play classic and not-so-classic dance tunes. Barry Cameron, the music and

theater instructor, has been given the responsibility for coordinating the fund-raising efforts. This is Barry”s first experience with fund-raising. He decides to put the eighth-grade choir in charge of the event; he will be a relatively passive observer.

Barry had 500 unnumbered tickets printed for the dance. He left the tickets in a box on his desk and told the choir students to take as many tickets as they thought they could sell for $5 each. In order to ensure that no extra tickets would be floating around, he told them to dispose of any unsold tickets. When the students received payment for the tickets, they were to bring the cash back to Barry, and he would put it in a locked box in his desk drawer.

Some of the students were responsible for decorating the gymnasium for the dance. Barry gave each of them a key to the money box and told them that if they took money out to purchase materials, they should put a note in the box saying how much they took and what it was used for. After two weeks, the money box appeared to be getting full, so Barry asked Robin Herbert to count the money, prepare a deposit slip, and deposit the money in a bank account Barry had opened.

The day of the dance, Barry wrote a check from the account to pay Jay Dee. The DJ said, however, that he accepted only cash and did not give receipts. So Barry took $200 out of the cash box and gave it to Jay. At the dance, Barry had Amy Kuether working at the entrance to the gymnasium, collecting tickets from students and selling tickets to those who had not pre-purchased them. Barry estimated that 400 students attended the dance.

The following day, Barry closed out the bank account, which had $250 in it, and gave that amount plus the $180 in the cash box to Principal Skinner. Principal Skinner seemed surprised that, after generating roughly $2,000 in sales, the dance netted only $430 in cash. Barry did not know how to respond.

Instructions

Identify as many internal control weaknesses as you can in this scenario, and suggest how each could be addressed.

on july 31 2012 fraiser company had a cash balance per books of 6 140 533946

On July 31, 2012, Fraiser Company had a cash balance per books of $6,140. The statement from Nashota State Bank on that date showed a balance of $7,690.80. A comparison of the bank statement with the Cash account revealed the following facts.

1. The bank service charge for July was $25.

2. The bank collected a note receivable of $1,500 for Fraiser Company on July 15, plus $30 of interest. The bank made a $10 charge for the collection. Fraiser has not accrued any interest on the note.

3. The July 31 receipts of $1,193.30 were not included in the bank deposits for July. These receipts were deposited by the company in a night deposit vault on July 31.

4. Company check No. 2480 issued to T. Crain, a creditor, for $384 that cleared the bank in July was incorrectly entered in the cash payments journal on July 10 for $348.

5. Checks outstanding on July 31 totaled $1,860.10.

6. On July 31, the bank statement showed an NSF charge of $575 for a check received by the company from K. Fonner, a customer, on account.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the bank reconciliation as of July 31.

(b) Prepare the necessary adjusting entries at July 31.

the bank portion of the bank reconciliation for horsman company at october 31 2012 i 533947

The bank portion of the bank reconciliation for Horsman Company at October 31, 2012, is shown here and on the next page.

HORSMAN COMPANY
Bank Reconciliation
October 31, 2012

Cash balance per bank

$12,367.90

Add: Deposits in transit

1,530.20

13,898.10

Less: Outstanding checks

Check Number

Check Amount

2451

$1,260.40

2470

684.2

2471

844.5

2472

426.8

2474

1,050.00

Adjusted cash balance per bank

4,265.90

$9,632.20

The adjusted cash balance per bank agreed with the cash balance per books at October 31. The November bank statement showed the following checks and deposits.

Bank Statement

Checks

Deposits

Date

Number

Amount

Date

Amount

1-Nov

2470

$684.20

1-Nov

$1,530.20

2-Nov

2471

844.5

4-Nov

1,211.60

5-Nov

2474

1,050.00

8-Nov

990.1

4-Nov

2475

1,640.70

13-Nov

2,575.00

8-Nov

2476

2,830.00

18-Nov

1,472.70

10-Nov

2477

600

21-Nov

2,945.00

15-Nov

2479

1,750.00

25-Nov

2,567.30

18-Nov

2480

1,330.00

28-Nov

1,650.00

27-Nov

2481

695.4

30-Nov

1,186.00

30-Nov

2483

575.5

Total

$16,127.90

29-Nov

2486

940

Total

$12,940.30

The cash records per books for November showed the following.

Cash Payments Journal

Cash Receipts
Journal

Date

Number

Amount

Date

Number

Amount

Date

Amount

1-Nov

2475

$1,640.70

20-Nov

2483.00

$575.50

3-Nov

$1,211.60

2-Nov

2476

2,830.00

22-Nov

2484.00

829.50

7-Nov

990.1

2-Nov

2477

600.00

23-Nov

2485.00

974.8

12-Nov

2,575.00

4-Nov

2478

538.20

24-Nov

2486.00

940.00

17-Nov

1,472.70

8-Nov

2479

1,705.00

29-Nov

2487.00

398.00

20-Nov

2,954.00

10-Nov

2480

1,330.00

30-Nov

2488.00

800.00

24-Nov

2,567.30

15-Nov

2481

695.40

Total

$14469.1

27-Nov

1,650.00

18-Nov

2482

612.00

29-Nov

1,186.00

30-Nov

1,304.00

Total

$15,910.70

The bank statement contained two bank memoranda:

1. A credit of $2,242 for the collection of a $2,100 note for Horsman Company plus interest of $157 and less a collection fee of $15. Horsman Company has not accrued any interest on the note.

2. A debit for the printing of additional company checks $85. At November 30, the cash balance per books was $11,073.80 and the cash balance per bank statement was $17,712.50. The bank did not make any errors, but Horsman

Company made two errors.

Instructions

(a) Using the four steps in the reconciliation procedure described on pages 354–355, prepare a bank reconciliation at November 30, 2012.

(b) Prepare the adjusting entries based on the reconciliation. (Note:The correction of any errors pertaining to recording checks should be made to Accounts Payable. The correction of any errors relating to recording cash receipts should be made to Accounts Receivable.)

grossfeld company of omaha nebraska provides liquid fertilizer and herbicides to reg 533948

Grossfeld Company of Omaha, Nebraska, provides liquid fertilizer and herbicides to regional farmers. On July 31, 2012, the company”s Cash account per its general ledger showed a balance of $5,876.70.

The bank statement from Tri-State Bank on that date showed the following balance.

TRI-STATE BANK

Checks and Debits

Deposits and Credits

Daily Balance

XXX

XXX

7-31 7,043.80

A comparison of the details on the bank statement with the details in the Cash account revealed the following facts.

1. The bank service charge for July was $32.

2. The bank collected a note receivable of $900 for Grossfeld Company on July 15, plus $48 of interest. The bank made an $18 charge for the collection. Grossfeld has not accrued any interest on the note.

3. The July 31 receipts of $1,339 were not included in the bank deposits for July. These receipts were deposited by the company in a night deposit vault on July 31.

4. Company check No. 2480 issued to S. Tully, a creditor, for $471 that cleared the bank in July was incorrectly entered in the cash payments journal on July 10 for $417.

5. Checks outstanding on July 31 totaled $2,480.10.

6. On July 31, the bank statement showed an NSF charge of $818 for a check received by the company from L. Weare, a customer, on account.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the bank reconciliation as of July 31, 2012.

(b) Prepare the necessary adjusting entries at July 31, 2012.

pincus co expects to have a cash balance of 26 000 on january 1 2012 relevant monthl 533949

Pincus Co. expects to have a cash balance of $26,000 on January 1, 2012. Relevant monthly budget data for the first two months of 2012 are as follows.

Collections from customers: January $70,000; February $147,000.

Payments to suppliers: January $45,000; February $69,000.

Salaries: January $38,000; February $40,000. Salaries are paid in the month they are incurred.

Selling and administrative expenses: January $27,000; February $32,000. These costs are exclusive of depreciation and are paid as incurred.

Sales of short-term investments in January are expected to realize $7,000 in cash.

Pincus has a line of credit at a local bank that enables it to borrow up to $45,000.

The company wants to maintain a minimum monthly cash balance of $25,000. Any excess cash above the $25,000 minimum is used to pay off the line of credit.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a cash budget for January and February.

(b) Explain how a cash budget contributes to effective management.

vaux inc prepares monthly cash budgets shown on page 387 are relevant data from oper 533950

Vaux Inc. prepares monthly cash budgets. Shown on page 387 are relevant data from operating budgets for 2012.

January

February

Sales

$330,000

$400,000

Purchases

110,000

130,000

Salaries

80,000

95,000

Selling and administrative expenses

132,000

150,000

All sales and purchases are on account. Collections and disbursement data are given below. All other items above are paid in the month incurred. Depreciation has been excluded from selling and administrative expenses.

Other data.

1. Collections from customers: January $293,000; February $358,000.

2. Payments for purchases: January $98,000; February $118,000.

3. Other receipts: January: collection of December 31, 2011, interest receivable $2,000; February: proceeds from sale of short term investments $5,000

4. Other disbursements: February payment of $20,000 for land The company”s cash balance on January 1, 2012, is expected to be $58,000. The company wants to maintain a minimum cash balance of $40,000.

Instructions

Prepare a cash budget for January and February.

on december 1 2012 bluemound company had the following account balances 533952

On December 1, 2012, Bluemound Company had the following account balances.

Debits

Credits

Cash

$18,200

Accumulated Depreciation—

Notes Receivable

2,200

Equipment

$3,000

Accounts Receivable

7,500

Accounts Payable

6,100

Inventory

16,000

Common Stock

20,000

Prepaid Insurance

1,600

Retained Earnings

44,400

Equipment

28,000

$73,500

$73,500

During December, the company completed the following transactions.

Dec. 7 Received $3,600 cash from customers in payment of account (no discount allowed).

12 Purchased merchandise on account from Klump Co. $12,000, terms 1/10, n/30.

17 Sold merchandise on account $15,000, terms 2/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $10,000.

19 Paid salaries $2,500.

22 Paid Klump Co. in full, less discount.

26 Received collections in full, less discounts, from customers billed on December 17.

Adjustment data:

1. Depreciation $200 per month.

2. Insurance expired $400.

3. Income tax expense was $425. It was unpaid at December 31.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the December transactions. (Assume a perpetual inventory system.)

(b) Enter the December 1 balances in the ledger T accounts and post the December transactions. Use Cost of Goods Sold, Depreciation Expense, Insurance Expense, Salaries and Wages Expense, Sales Revenue, Sales Discounts, Income Taxes Payable, and Income Tax Expense.

(c) The statement from Jackson County Bank on December 31 showed a balance of $21,994. A comparison of the bank statement with the Cash account revealed the following facts.

1. The bank collected a note receivable of $2,200 for Bluemound Company on December 15.

2. The December 31 receipts of $2,736 were not included in the bank deposits for December. The company deposited these receipts in a night deposit vault on December 31.

3. Checks outstanding on December 31 totaled $1,210.

4. On December 31, the bank statement showed a NSF charge of $800 for a check received by the company from L. Shur, a Prepare a bank reconciliation as of December 31 based on the available information.

(Hint:The cash balance per books is $22,120. This can be proven by finding the balance in the Cash account from parts (a) and (b).)

(d) Journalize the adjusting entries resulting from the bank reconciliation and adjustment data.

(e) Post the adjusting entries to the ledger T accounts.

(f ) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

(g) Prepare an income statement for December and a classified balance sheet at December 31. customer, on account.

the financial statements of tootsie roll are presented in appendix a of this book 533955

The financial statements of Tootsie Roll are presented in Appendix A of this book, together with an auditor”s report—Report of Independent Auditors.

Instructions

Using the financial statements and reports, answer these questions about Tootsie Roll”s internal controls and cash.

(a) What comments, if any, are made about cash in the “Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm”?

(b) What data about cash and cash equivalents are shown in the consolidated balance sheet (statement of financial position)?

(c) What activities are identified in the consolidated statement of cash flows as being responsible for the changes in cash during 2009?

(d) How are cash equivalents defined in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements?

(e) Read the section of the report titled “Management”s Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting.” Summarize the statements made in that section of the report.

the international accounting firm ernst and young performed a global survey 533958

The international accounting firm Ernst and Young performed a global survey. The results of that survey are summarized in a report titled “Fraud Risk in Emerging Markets.” You can find this report at: http://www.ey.com/Global/assets.nsf/International/FIDS_-_9th_Global_Fraud_Survey_2006/ $file/EY_Fraud_Survey_June2006.pdf,or do an Internet search for “9th Global Fraud Survey— Fraud Risk in Emerging Markets.”

Instructions

Read the Executive Summary section, and then skim the remainder of the report to answer the following questions.

(a) What did survey respondents consider to be the top three factors to prevent fraud?

(b) What type of fraud poses the greatest threat in developed markets? What type of fraud poses the greatest threat in emerging markets?

(c) In what three regions are anti-fraud measures most likely to be considered when deciding whether to begin doing business in that region

the financial accounting standards board fasb is a private organization established 533959

The Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) is a private organization established to improve accounting standards and financial reporting. The FASB conducts extensive research before issuing a “Statement of Financial Accounting Standards,” which represents an authoritative expression of generally accepted accounting principles.

Address: www.fasb.org , or go to www.wiley.com/college/kimmel

Steps

Choose About FASB.

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) What is the mission of the FASB?

(b) How are topics added to the FASB technical agenda? (Hint:See Project Plans in Our Rules of Procedure.)

(c) What characteristics make the FASB”s procedures an “open” decision-making process? (Hint:See Due Process in Our Rules of Procedure.)

alternative distributor corp a distributor of groceries and related products is head 533961

Alternative Distributor Corp., a distributor of groceries and related products, is headquartered in Medford, Massachusetts. During a recent audit, Alternative Distributor Corp. was advised that existing internal controls necessary for the company to develop reliable financial statements were inadequate. The audit report stated that the current system of accounting for sales, receivables, and cash receipts constituted a material weakness. Among other items, the report focused on nontimely deposit of cash receipts, exposing Alternative Distributor to potential loss or misappropriation, excessive past due accounts receivable due to lack of collection efforts, disregard of advantages offered by vendors for prompt payment of invoices, absence of appropriate segregation of duties by personnel consistent with appropriate control objectives, inadequate procedures for applying accounting principles, lack of qualified management personnel, lack of supervision by an outside board of directors, and overall poor recordkeeping.

Instructions

(a) Identify the principles of internal control violated by Alternative Distributor Corporation.

(b) Explain why managers of various functional areas in the company should be concerned about internal controls.

banks charge fees for bounced checks that is checks that exceed the balance in the a 533963

Banks charge fees for “bounced” checks—that is, checks that exceed the balance in the account. It has been estimated that processing bounced checks costs a bank roughly $1.50 per check. Thus, the profit margin on bounced checks is very high. Recognizing this, some banks have started to process checks from largest to smallest. By doing this, they maximize the number of checks that bounce if a customer overdraws an account. For example, NationsBank (now Bank of America) projected a $14 million increase in fee revenue as a result of processing largest checks first. In response to criticism, banks have responded that their customers prefer to have large checks processed first, because those tend to be the most important. At the other extreme, some banks will cover their customers” bounced checks, effectively extending them an interest-free loan while their account is overdrawn.

Instructions

Answer each of the following questions.

(a) William Preston had a balance of $1,500 in his checking account at First National Bank on a day when the bank received the following five checks for processing against his account.

Check Number

Amount

Check Number

Amount

3150

$35

3165

$550

3162

400

3166

1,510

3169

180

Assuming a $30 fee assessed by the bank for each bounced check, how much fee revenue would the bank generate if it processed checks (1) from largest to smallest, (2) from smallest to largest, and (3) in order of check number?

(b) Do you think that processing checks from largest to smallest is an ethical business practice?

(c) In addition to ethical issues, what other issues must a bank consider in deciding whether to process checks from largest to smallest?

(d) If you were managing a bank, what policy would you adopt on bounced checks?

an analysis and aging of the accounts receivable of raja company at december 31 reve 533980

An analysis and aging of the accounts receivable of Raja Company at December 31 reveal these data:

Accounts receivable

$800,000

Allowance for doubtful

accounts per books before

adjustment (credit)

50000

Amounts expected to become

uncollectible

65000

What is the cash realizable value of the accounts receivable at December 31, after adjustment?

(a) $685,000.

(b) $750,000.

(c) $800,000.

(d) $735,000.

schleis co holds murphy inc s 10 000 120 day 9 note the entry made by schleis co 533983

Schleis Co. holds Murphy Inc.”s $10,000, 120-day, 9% note. The entry made by Schleis Co. when the note is collected, assuming no interest has previously been accrued, is:

(a)

Cash

10300

Notes Receivable

10300

(b)

Cash

10000

Notes Receivable

10000

( c)

Accounts Receivable

10300

Notes Receivable

10000

Interest Revenue

300

(d)

Cash

10300

1000

Notes Receivable

10000

Interest Revenue

300

the following information is available for the automotive division of ford motor com 533844

The following information is available for the automotive division of Ford Motor Company for 2009. The company uses the LIFO inventory method.

(in millions)

2009

Beginning inventory

$6,988

Ending inventory

5,450

LIFO reserve

798

Current assets

40,560

Current liabilities

37,037

Cost of goods sold

100,016

Sales revenue

105,893

Instructions

(a) Calculate the inventory turnover ratio and days in inventory.

(b) Calculate the current ratio based on LIFO inventory.

(c) After adjusting for the LIFO reserve, calculate the current ratio.

(d) Comment on any difference between parts (b) and (c).

morse inc is a retail company that uses the perpetual inventory method all sales ret 533845

Morse Inc. is a retail company that uses the perpetual inventory method. All sales returns from customers result in the goods being returned to inventory. (Assume that the inventory is not damaged.) Assume that there are no credit transactions; all amounts are settled in cash. You have the following information for Morse Inc. for the month of January 2012.

Unit Cost or

Date

Description

Quantity

Selling Price

Jan-01

Beginning inventory

40

$13

Jan-05

Purchase

90

16

Jan-08

Sale

75

25

Jan-10

Sale return

10

25

Jan-15

Purchase

30

18

Jan-16

Purchase return

5

18

Jan-20

Sale

80

25

Jan-25

Purchase

20

21

Instructions

(a) For each of the following cost flow assumptions, calculate (i) cost of goods sold, (ii) ending inventory, and (iii) gross profit.

(1) LIFO. (Assume sales returns had a cost of $16 and purchase returns had a cost of $18.)

(2) FIFO. (Assume sales returns had a cost of $16 and purchase returns had a cost of $18.)

(3) Moving-average. (Round cost per unit to three decimal places.)

(b) Compare results for the three cost flow assumptions.

dollar saver center began operations on july 1 it uses a perpetual inventory system 533846

Dollar Saver Center began operations on July 1. It uses a perpetual inventory system. During July, the company had the following purchases and sales.

Purchases

Date

Units

Unit Cost

Sales Units

Jul-01

7

$47

Jul-06

3

Jul-11

5

$50

Jul-14

4

Jul-21

3

$54

Jul-27

2

Instructions

(a) Determine the ending inventory under a perpetual inventory system using (1) FIFO, (2) moving-average, and (3) LIFO. (Note:For moving-average, round cost per unit to three decimal places.)

(b) Which costing method produces the highest ending inventory valuation?

on december 1 2012 ruggiero company had the account balances shown below 533847

On December 1, 2012, Ruggiero Company had the account balances shown below.

Debits

Credits

Cash

$4,800

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

$1,500

Accounts Receivable

3,900

Accounts Payable

3,000

Inventory

1,800*

Common Stock

10,000

Equipment

21,000

Retained Earnings

17,000

$31,500

$31,500

The following transactions occurred during December.

Dec. 3 Purchased 4,000 units of inventory on account at a cost of $0.72 per unit.

5 Sold 4,400 units of inventory on account for $0.90 per unit. (It sold 3,000 of the $0.60 units and 1,400 of the $0.72.)

7 Granted the December 5 customer $180 credit for 200 units of inventory returned costing $150. These units were returned to inventory.

17 Purchased 2,200 units of inventory for cash at $0.80 each.

22 Sold 2,000 units of inventory on account for $0.95 per unit. (It sold 2,000 of the $0.72 units.)

Adjustment data:

1. Accrued salaries payable $400.

2. Depreciation $200 per month.

3. Income tax expense was $215, to be paid next year.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the December transactions and adjusting entries, assuming Ruggiero uses the perpetual inventory method.

(b) Enter the December 1 balances in the ledger T accounts and post the December transactions. In addition to the accounts mentioned above, use the following additional accounts: Cost of Goods Sold, Depreciation Expense, Salaries and Wages Expense, Salaries and Wages Payable, Sales Revenue, Sales Returns and Allowances, Income Tax Expense, and Income Taxes Payable.

(c) Prepare an adjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2012.

(d) Prepare an income statement for December 2012 and a classified balance sheet at December 31, 2012.

(e) Compute ending inventory and cost of goods sold under FIFO, assuming Ruggiero Company uses the periodic inventory system.

(f ) Compute ending inventory and cost of goods sold under LIFO, assuming Ruggiero Company uses the periodic inventory system.

the notes that accompany a company s financial statements provide informative detail 533848

The notes that accompany a company”s financial statements provide informative details that would clutter the amounts and descriptions presented in the statements. Refer to the financial statements of Tootsie Roll and the accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements in Appendix A.

Instructions

Answer the following questions. (Give the amounts in thousands of dollars, as shown in Tootsie Roll”s annual report.)

(a) What did Tootsie Roll report for the amount of inventories in its Consolidated Balance Sheet at December 31, 2009? At December 31, 2008?

(b) Compute the dollar amount of change and the percentage change in inventories between 2008 and 2009. Compute inventory as a percentage of current assets for 2009.

(c) What are the (product) cost of goods sold reported by Tootsie Roll for 2009, 2008, and 2007? Compute the ratio of (product) cost of goods sold to net (product) sales in 2009.

the following information is from the 2009 annual report of american greetings corpo 533851

The following information is from the 2009 annual report of American Greetings Corporation (all dollars in thousands).

Feb. 28,
2009

Feb. 29,
2008

Inventories

Finished goods

$232,893

$244,379

Work in process

7,068

10,516

Raw materials and supplies

49,937

43,861

289,898

298,756

Less: LIFO reserve

86,025

82,085

Total (as reported)

$203,873

$216,671

Cost of goods sold

$809,956

$780,771

Current assets (as reported)

$561,395

$669,340

Current liabilities

$343,405

$432,321

The following information comes from the notes to the company”s financial statements.

Finished products, work in process, and raw material inventories are carried at the lower of- cost-or-market. The last-in, first-out (LIFO) cost method is used for approximately 75% of the domestic inventories in 2009 and approximately 70% in 2008. The foreign subsidiaries principally use the first-in, first-out method. Display material and factory supplies are carried at average-cost.

Instructions

(a) Define each of the following: finished goods, work in process, and raw materials.

(b) What might be a possible explanation for why the company uses FIFO for its nondomestic inventories?

(c) Calculate the company”s inventory turnover ratio and days in inventory for 2008 and 2009. (2007 inventory was $182,618.) Discuss the implications of any change in the ratios.

(d) What percentage of total inventory does the 2009 LIFO reserve represent? If the company used FIFO in 2009, what would be the value of its inventory? Do you consider this difference a “material” amount from the perspective of an analyst? Which value accurately represents the value of the company”s inventory?

(e) Calculate the company”s 2009 current ratio with the numbers as reported, then recalculate after adjusting for the LIFO reserve.

crescent electronics has enjoyed tremendous sales growth during the last 10 years ho 533852

Crescent Electronics has enjoyed tremendous sales growth during the last 10 years. However, even though sales have steadily increased, the company”s CEO, Anne Healy, is concerned about certain aspects of its performance. She has called a meeting with the corporate controller and the vice presidents of finance, operations, sales, and marketing to discuss the company”s performance. Anne begins the meeting by making the following observations:

We have been forced to take significant write-downs on inventory during each of the last three years because of obsolescence. In addition, inventory storage costs have soared. We rent four additional warehouses to store our increasingly diverse inventory. Five years ago inventory represented only 20% of the value of our total assets. It now exceeds 35%. Yet, even with all of this inventory, “stock outs” (measured by complaints by customers that the desired product is not available) have increased by 40% during the last three years. And worse yet, it seems that we constantly must discount merchandise that we have too much of.

Anne asks the group to review the following data and make suggestions as to how the company”s performance might be improved.

(in millions)

2012

2011

2010

2009

Inventory

Raw materials

$242

$198

$155

$128

Work in process

116

77

49

33

Finished goods

567

482

398

257

Total inventory

$925

$757

$602

$418

Current assets

$1,800

$1,423

$1,183

$841

Total assets

$2,643

$2,523

$2,408

$2,090

Current liabilities

$600

$590

$525

$420

Sales revenue

$9,428

$8,674

$7,536

$6,840

Cost of goods sold

$6,328

$5,474

$4,445

$3,557

Net income

$754

$987

$979

$958

Instructions

Using the information provided, answer the following questions.

(a) Compute the current ratio, gross profit rate, profit margin ratio, inventory turnover ratio, and days in inventory for 2010, 2011, and 2012.

(b) Discuss the trends and potential causes of the changes in the ratios in part (a).

(c) Discuss potential remedies to any problems discussed in part (b).

(d) What concerns might be raised by some members of management with regard to your suggestions in part (c)?

in a discussion of dramatic increases in coffee bean prices a wall street journal ar 533853

In a discussion of dramatic increases in coffee bean prices, a Wall Street Journalarticle noted the following fact about Starbucks.

Before this year”s bean-price hike, Starbucks added several defenses that analysts say could help it maintain earnings and revenue. The company last year began accounting for its coffee-bean purchases by taking the average price of all beans in inventory.

Source: Aaron Lucchetti, “Crowded Coffee Market May Keep a Lid on Starbucks After Price Rise Hurt Stock,” Wall Street Journal(June 4, 1997), p. C1. Prior to this change the company was using FIFO.

Instructions

Your client, the CEO of Supreme Coffee, Inc., read this article and sent you an e-mail message requesting that you explain why Starbucks might have taken this action. Your response should explain what impact this change in accounting method has on earnings, why the company might want to do this, and any possible disadvantages of such a change.

yelich wholesale corp uses the lifo cost flow method in the current year profit at y 533855

Yelich Wholesale Corp. uses the LIFO cost flow method. In the current year, profit at Yelich is running unusually high. The corporate tax rate is also high this year, but it is scheduled to decline significantly next year. In an effort to lower the current year”s net income and to take advantage of the changing income tax rate, the president of Yelich Wholesale instructs the plant accountant to recommend to the purchasing department a large purchase of inventory for delivery 3 days before the end of the year. The price of the inventory to be purchased has doubled during the year, and the purchase will represent a major portion of the ending inventory value.

Instructions

(a) What is the effect of this transaction on this year”s and next year”s income statement and income tax expense? Why?

(b) If Yelich Wholesale had been using the FIFO method of inventory costing, would the president give the same directive?

(c) Should the plant accountant order the inventory purchase to lower income? What are the ethical implications of this order?

franklin company has the following four items in its ending inventory as of december 533865

Franklin Company has the following four items in its ending inventory as of December 31, 2012. The company uses the lower-of-cost-or-net realizable value approach for inventory valuation following IFRS.

Item No.

Cost

Net Realizable Value

AB

$1,700

$1,400

TRX

2,200

2,300

NWA

7,800

7,100

SGH

3,000

3,700

Compute the lower-of-cost-or-net realizable value.

coggins inc owns the following assets at the balance sheet date 533895

Coggins Inc. owns the following assets at the balance sheet date.

Cash in bank—savings account

$ 8,000

Cash on hand

1,100

Cash refund due from the IRS

1,000

Checking account balance

12,000

Postdated checks

500

What amount should be reported as Cash in the balance sheet?

bank employees use a system known as the maker checker system an employee will recor 533928

Bank employees use a system known as the “maker-checker” system. An employee will record an entry in the appropriate journal, and then a supervisor will verify and approve the entry. These days, as all of a bank”s accounts are computerized, the employee first enters a batch of entries into the computer, and then the entries are posted automatically to the general ledger account after the supervisor approves them on the system.

Access to the computer system is password-protected and task-specific, which means that the computer system will not allow the employee to approve a transaction or the supervisor to record a transaction.

Instructions

Identify the principles of internal control inherent in the “maker-checker” procedure used by banks

the following control procedures are used in danner company for over thecounter cash 533930

The following control procedures are used in Danner Company for over-thecounter cash receipts.

1. Cashiers are experienced; thus, they are not bonded.

2. All over-the-counter receipts are registered by three clerks who share a cash register with a single cash drawer.

3. To minimize the risk of robbery, cash in excess of $100 is stored in an unlocked attaché case in the stock room until it is deposited in the bank.

4. At the end of each day the total receipts are counted by the cashier on duty and reconciled to the cash register total.

5. The company accountant makes the bank deposit and then records the day”s receipts.

Instructions

(a) For each procedure, explain the weakness in internal control and identify the control principle that is violated.

(b) For each weakness, suggest a change in the procedure that will result in good internal control.

the following control procedures are used in katja s boutique shoppe for cash disbur 533931

The following control procedures are used in Katja”s Boutique Shoppe for cash disbursements.

1. Each week, Katja leaves 100 company checks in an unmarked envelope on a shelf behind the cash register.

2. The store manager personally approves all payments before signing and issuing checks.

3. The company checks are unnumbered.

4. After payment, bills are “filed” in a paid invoice folder.

5. The company accountant prepares the bank reconciliation and reports any discrepancies to the owner.

Instructions

(a) For each procedure, explain the weakness in internal control and identify the internal control principle that is violated.

(b) For each weakness, suggest a change in the procedure that will result in good internal control.

at reyes company checks are not prenumbered because both the purchasing agent and th 533932

At Reyes Company, checks are not prenumbered because both the purchasing agent and the treasurer are authorized to issue checks. Each signer has access to unissued checks kept in an unlocked file cabinet. The purchasing agent pays all bills pertaining to goods purchased for resale. Prior to payment, the purchasing agent determines that the goods have been received and verifies the mathematical accuracy of the vendor”s invoice. After payment, the invoice is filed by vendor and the purchasing agent records the payment in the cash disbursements journal. The treasurer pays all other bills following approval by authorized employees. After payment, the treasurer stamps all bills “paid,” files them by payment date, and records the checks in the cash disbursements journal. Reyes Company maintains one checking account that is reconciled by the treasurer.

Instructions

(a) List the weaknesses in internal control over cash disbursements.

(b) Identify improvements for correcting these weaknesses.

tasha orin is unable to reconcile the bank balance at january 31 tasha s reconciliat 533933

Tasha Orin is unable to reconcile the bank balance at January 31. Tasha”s reconciliation is shown here.

Cash balance per bank

$3,677.20

Add: NSF check

450

Less: Bank service charge

28

Adjusted balance per bank

$4,099.20

Cash balance per books

$3,975.20

Less: Deposits in transit

590

Add: Outstanding checks

770

Adjusted balance per books

$4,155.20

Instructions

(a) What is the proper adjusted cash balance per bank?

(b) What is the proper adjusted cash balance per books?

(c) Prepare the adjusting journal entries necessary to determine the adjusted cash balance per books.

at april 30 the bank reconciliation of silvestre company shows three outstanding che 533934

At April 30, the bank reconciliation of Silvestre Company shows three outstanding checks: No. 254 $650, No. 255 $700, and No. 257 $410. The May bank statement and the May cash payments journal are given here.

Bank Statement
Checks Paid

Date

Check No.

Amount

05-Apr

254

$650

05-Feb

257

410

May-17

258

159

05-Dec

259

275

May-20

260

925

May-29

263

480

May-30

262

750

Cash Payments Journal
Checks Issued

Date

Check No.

Amount

05-Feb

258

$159

05-May

259

275

05-Oct

260

925

May-15

261

500

May-22

262

750

May-24

263

480

May-29

264

360

Instructions

Using step 2 in the reconciliation procedure (see page 354), list the outstanding checks at May 31.

this information relates to the cash account in the ledger of hawkins company 533936

This information relates to the Cash account in the ledger of Hawkins Company.

Balance September 1—$16,400;

Cash deposited—$64,000

Balance September 30—$17,600;

Checks written—$62,800

The September bank statement shows a balance of $16,500 at September 30 and the following

memoranda.

Credits

Debits

Collection of $1,800 note plus interest $30

$1,830

NSF check: H. Juno

$560

Interest earned on checking account

45

Safety deposit box rent

60

At September 30, deposits in transit were $4,738 and outstanding checks totaled $2,383.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the bank reconciliation at September 30, 2012.

(b) Prepare the adjusting entries at September 30, assuming (1) the NSF check was from a customer on account, and (2) no interest had been accrued on the note.

the cash records of arora company show the following 533937

The cash records of Arora Company show the following.

For July:

1. The June 30 bank reconciliation indicated that deposits in transit total $580. During July, the general ledger account Cash shows deposits of $16,900, but the bank statement indicates that only $15,600 in deposits were received during the month.

2. The June 30 bank reconciliation also reported outstanding checks of $940. During the month of July, Arora Company books show that $17,500 of checks were issued, yet the bank statement showed that $16,400 of checks cleared the bank in July.

For September:

3. In September, deposits per bank statement totaled $25,900, deposits per books were $26,400, and deposits in transit at September 30 were $2,200.

4. In September, cash disbursements per books were $23,500, checks clearing the bank were $24,000, and outstanding checks at September 30 were $2,100. There were no bank debit or credit memoranda, and no errors were made by either the bank or Arora Company.

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) In situation 1, what were the deposits in transit at July 31?

(b) In situation 2, what were the outstanding checks at July 31?

(c) In situation 3, what were the deposits in transit at August 31?

(d) In situation 4, what were the outstanding checks at August 31?

mazor inc s bank statement from hometown bank at august 31 2012 gives the following 533938

Mazor Inc.”s bank statement from Hometown Bank at August 31, 2012, gives the following information.

Balance, August 1

$18,400

Bank debit memorandum:

August deposits

71,000

Safety deposit box fee

$25

Checks cleared in August

68,678

Service charge

50

Bank credit memorandum:

Balance, August 31

20,692

Interest earned

45

A summary of the Cash account in the ledger for August shows the following: balance, August

1, $18,700; receipts $74,000; disbursements $73,570; and balance, August 31, $19,130. Analysis reveals that the only reconciling items on the July 31 bank reconciliation were a deposit in transit for $4,800 and outstanding checks of $4,500. In addition, you determine that there was an error involving a company check drawn in August: A check for $400 to a creditor on account that cleared the bank in August was journalized and posted for $40.

Instructions

(a) Determine deposits in transit.

(b) Determine outstanding checks. (Hint: You need to correct disbursements for the check error.)

(c) Prepare a bank reconciliation at August 31.

(d) Journalize the adjusting entry(ies) to be made by Mazor Inc. at August 31.

kuchin company reports the following for the month of june 533820

Kuchin Company reports the following for the month of June.

Date

Explanation

Units

Unit Cost

Total Cost

Jun-01

Inventory

120

$5

$600

12

Purchase

370

6

2,220

23

Purchase

500

7

3,500

30

Inventory

240

Instructions

(a) Compute the cost of the ending inventory and the cost of goods sold under (1) FIFO,

(2) LIFO, and (3) average-cost.

(b) Which costing method gives the highest ending inventory? The highest cost of goods sold? Why?

(c) How do the average-cost values for ending inventory and cost of goods sold relate to ending inventory and cost of goods sold for FIFO and LIFO?

(d) Explain why the average cost is not $6.

the following comparative information is available for prasad company for 2012 533821

The following comparative information is available for Prasad Company for 2012.

LIFO

FIFO

Sales revenue

$86,000

$86,000

Cost of goods sold

38,000

29,000

Operating expenses

(including depreciation)

27,000

27,000

Depreciation

10,000

10,000

Cash paid for inventory purchases

32,000

32,000

Instructions

(a) Determine net income under each approach. Assume a 30% tax rate.

(b) Determine net cash provided by operating activities under each approach. Assume that all sales were on a cash basis and that income taxes and operating expenses, other than depreciation, were on a cash basis.

(c) Calculate the quality of earnings ratio under each approach and explain your findings.

laib camera shop inc uses the lower of cost or market basis for its inventory 533822

Laib Camera Shop Inc. uses the lower-of-cost-or-market basis for its inventory. The following data are available at December 31.

Market

Units

Cost/Unit

Value/Unit

Cameras

Minolta

5

$170

$158

Canon

7

145

152

Light Meters

Vivitar

12

125

114

Kodak

10

120

135

Instructions

What amount should be reported on Laib Camera Shop”s financial statements, assuming the lower-of-cost-or-market rule is applied?

this information is available for pepsico inc for 2007 2008 and 2009 533823

This information is available for PepsiCo, Inc. for 2007, 2008, and 2009.

(in millions)

2007

2008

2009

Beginning inventory

$1,926

$2,290

$2,522

Ending inventory

2,290

2,522

2,618

Cost of goods sold

18,038

20,351

20,099

Sales revenue

39,474

43,251

43,232

Instructions

Calculate the inventory turnover ratio, days in inventory, and gross profit rate for PepsiCo., Inc. for 2007, 2008, and 2009. Comment on any trends.

deere company is a global manufacturer and distributor of agricultural construction 533824

Deere & Company is a global manufacturer and distributor of agricultural, construction, and forestry equipment. It reported the following information in its 2009 annual report.

(in millions)

2009

2008

Inventories (LIFO)

$2,397

3,042

Current assets

30,857

Current liabilities

12,753

LIFO reserve

1,367

Cost of goods sold

16,255

Instructions

(a) Compute Deere”s inventory turnover ratio and days in inventory for 2009.

(b) Compute Deere”s current ratio using the 2009 data as presented, and then again after adjusting for the LIFO reserve.

(c) Comment on how ignoring the LIFO reserve might affect your evaluation of Deere”s liquidity.

information about sunburst is presented in e6 4 additional data regarding the compan 533826

Information about Sunburst is presented in E6-4. Additional data regarding the company”s sales of Xpert snowboards are provided below. Assume that Sunburst uses a perpetual inventory system.

Date

Units

Sept. 5

Sale

8

Sept. 16

Sale

48

Sept. 29

Sale

60

Totals

116

Instructions

Compute ending inventory at September 30 using FIFO, LIFO, and moving-average. (Note:For moving-average, round unit cost to three decimal places.)

brooks hardware reported cost of goods sold as follows 533827

Brooks Hardware reported cost of goods sold as follows.

2012

2011

Beginning inventory

$30,000

$20,000

Cost of goods purchased

175,000

164,000

Cost of goods available for sale

205,000

184,000

Less: Ending inventory

37,000

30,000

Cost of goods sold

$168,000

$154,000

Brooks made two errors:

1. 2011 ending inventory was overstated by $2,000.

2. 2012 ending inventory was understated by $5,000.

Instructions

Compute the correct cost of goods sold for each year.

sprague company reported these income statement data for a 2 year period 533828

Sprague Company reported these income statement data for a 2-year period.

2012

2011

Sales revenue

$250,000

$210,000

Beginning inventory

40,000

32,000

Cost of goods purchased

202,000

173,000

Cost of goods available for sale

242,000

205,000

Less: Ending inventory

55,000

40,000

Cost of goods sold

187,000

165,000

Gross profit

$63,000

$45,000

Sprague Company uses a periodic inventory system. The inventories at January 1, 2011, and December 31, 2012, are correct. However, the ending inventory at December 31, 2011, is overstated by $8,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare correct income statement data for the 2 years.

(b) What is the cumulative effect of the inventory error on total gross profit for the 2 years?

(c) Explain in a letter to the president of Sprague Company what has happened—that is, the nature of the error and its effect on the financial statements.

kirk limited is trying to determine the value of its ending inventory as of february 533829

Kirk Limited is trying to determine the value of its ending inventory as of February 28, 2012, the company”s year-end. The accountant counted everything that was in the warehouse, as of February 28, which resulted in an ending inventory valuation of $48,000. However, she didn”t know how to treat the following transactions so she didn”t record them.

(a) On February 26, Kirk shipped to a customer goods costing $800. The goods were shipped FOB shipping point, and the receiving report indicates that the customer received the goods on March 2.

(b) On February 26, Seller Inc. shipped goods to Kirk FOB destination. The invoice price was $350 plus $25 for freight. The receiving report indicates that the goods were received by Kirk on March 2.

(c) Kirk had $500 of inventory at a customer”s warehouse “on approval.” The customer was going to let Kirk know whether it wanted the merchandise by the end of the week, March 4.

(d) Kirk also had $400 of inventory at a Balena craft shop, on consignment from Kirk.

(e) On February 26, Kirk ordered goods costing $750. The goods were shipped FOB shipping point on February 27. Kirk received the goods on March 1.

(f) On February 28, Kirk packaged goods and had them ready for shipping to a customer FOB destination. The invoice price was $350 plus $25 for freight; the cost of the items was $280. The receiving report indicates that the goods were received by the customer on March 2.

(g) Kirk had damaged goods set aside in the warehouse because they are no longer saleable. These goods originally cost $400 and, originally, Kirk expected to sell these items for $600.

Instructions

For each of the above transactions, specify whether the item in question should be included in ending inventory, and if so, at what amount. For each item that is not included in ending inventory, indicate who owns it and what account, if any, it should have been recorded in.

remsen company inc had a beginning inventory of 100 units of product mln at a cost o 533831

Remsen Company Inc. had a beginning inventory of 100 units of Product MLN at a cost of $8 per unit. During the year, purchases were:

Feb. 20

600 units at $ 9

Aug. 12

400 units at $11

May-05

500 units at $10

Dec. 8

100 units at $12

Remsen Company uses a periodic inventory system. Sales totalled 1,500 units.

Instructions

(a) Determine the cost of goods available for sale.

(b) Determine the ending inventory and the cost of goods sold under each of the assumed cost flow methods (FIFO, LIFO, and average-cost). Prove the accuracy of the cost of goods sold under the FIFO and LIFO methods. (Round average unit cost to three decimal places.)

(c) Which cost flow method results in the lowest inventory amount for the balance sheet? The lowest cost of goods sold for the income statement?

you have the following information for mcbride inc for the month ended october 31 20 533833

You have the following information for McBride Inc. for the month ended October 31, 2012. McBride uses a periodic method for inventory.

Unit Cost or

Date

Description

Units

Selling Price

Oct. 1

Beginning inventory

60

$24

Oct. 9

Purchase

120

26

Oct. 11

Sale

100

35

Oct. 17

Purchase

100

27

Oct. 22

Sale

60

40

Oct. 25

Purchase

70

29

Oct. 29

Sale

110

40

Instructions

(a) Calculate (i) ending inventory, (ii) cost of goods sold, (iii) gross profit, and (iv) gross profit rate under each of the following methods.

(1) LIFO.

(2) FIFO.

(3) Average-cost. (Round cost per unit to three decimal places.)

(b) Compare results for the three cost flow assumptions.

you have the following information for prospector gems prospector uses the periodic 533834

You have the following information for Prospector Gems. Prospector uses the periodic method of accounting for its inventory transactions. Prospector only carries one brand and size of diamonds—all are identical. Each batch of diamonds purchased is carefully coded and marked with its purchase cost.

March 1 Beginning inventory 150 diamonds at a cost of $310 per diamond.

March 3 Purchased 200 diamonds at a cost of $350 each.

March 5 Sold 180 diamonds for $600 each.

March 10 Purchased 330 diamonds at a cost of $375 each.

March 25 Sold 390 diamonds for $650 each.

Instructions

(a) Assume that Prospector Gems uses the specific identification cost flow method.

(1) Demonstrate how Prospector could maximize its gross profit for the month by specifically selecting which diamonds to sell on March 5 and March 25.

(2) Demonstrate how Prospector could minimize its gross profit for the month by selecting which diamonds to sell on March 5 and March 25.

(b) Assume that Prospector uses the FIFO cost flow assumption. Calculate cost of goods sold. How much gross profit would Prospector report under this cost flow assumption?

(c) Assume that Prospector uses the LIFO cost flow assumption. Calculate cost of goods sold. How much gross profit would the company report under this cost flow assumption?

(d) Which cost flow method should Prospector Gems select? Explain.

singer inc is a retailer operating in edmonton alberta singer uses the perpetual inv 533836

Singer Inc. is a retailer operating in Edmonton, Alberta. Singer uses the perpetual inventory method. All sales returns from customers result in the goods being returned to inventory. (Assume that the inventory is not damaged.) Assume that there are no credit transactions; all amounts are settled in cash. You are provided with the following information for Singer Inc. for the month of January 2012.

Unit Cost or

Date

Description

Quantity

Selling Price

Dec. 31

Ending inventory

160

$20

Jan. 2

Purchase

100

22

Jan. 6

Sale

180

40

Jan. 9

Sale return

10

40

Jan. 9

Purchase

75

24

Jan. 10

Purchase return

15

24

Jan. 10

Sale

50

45

Jan. 23

Purchase

100

25

Jan. 30

Sale

130

48

Instructions

(a) For each of the following cost flow assumptions, calculate (i) cost of goods sold, (ii) ending inventory, and (iii) gross profit.

(1) LIFO. (Assume sales returns had a cost of $20 and purchase returns had a cost of $24.)

(2) FIFO. (Assume sales returns had a cost of $20 and purchase returns had a cost of $24.)

(3) Moving-average. (Round cost per unit to three decimal places.)

(b) Compare results for the three cost flow assumptions.

premier center began operations on july 1 it uses a perpetual inventory system durin 533837

Premier Center began operations on July 1. It uses a perpetual inventory system. During July, the company had the following purchases and sales.

Date

Units

Unit Cost

Sales Units

Jul-01

7

$62

Jul-06

5

Jul-11

3

$66

Jul-14

3

Jul-21

4

$71

Jul-27

3

Instructions

(a) Determine the ending inventory under a perpetual inventory system using (1) FIFO, (2) moving-average (round unit cost to three decimal places), and (3) LIFO.

(b) Which costing method produces the highest ending inventory valuation?

equitz limited is trying to determine the value of its ending inventory as of februa 533838

Equitz Limited is trying to determine the value of its ending inventory as of February 28, 2012, the company”s year-end. The following transactions occurred, and the accountant asked your help in determining whether they should be recorded or not.

(a) On February 26, Equitz shipped goods costing $800 to a customer and charged the customer $1,000. The goods were shipped with terms FOB destination and the receiving report indicates that the customer received the goods on March 2.

(b) On February 26, Seller Inc. shipped goods to Equitz under terms FOB shipping point. The invoice price was $300 plus $25 for freight. The receiving report indicates that the goods were received by Equitz on March 2.

(c) Equitz had $500 of inventory isolated in the warehouse. The inventory is designated for a customer who has requested that the goods be shipped on March 10.

(d) Also included in Equitz”s warehouse is $400 of inventory that Meredith Producers shipped to Equitz on consignment.

(e) On February 26, Equitz issued a purchase order to acquire goods costing $750. The goods were shipped with terms FOB destination on February 27. Equitz received the goods on March 2.

(f) On February 26, Equitz shipped goods to a customer under terms FOB shipping point. The invoice price was $350 plus $25 for freight; the cost of the items was $260. The receiving report indicates that the goods were received by the customer on March 2.

Instructions

For each of the above transactions, specify whether the item in question should be included in ending inventory, and if so, at what amount.

savage distribution markets cds of the performing artist little sister at the beginn 533839

Savage Distribution markets CDs of the performing artist Little Sister. At the beginning of October, Savage had in beginning inventory 1,200 Sister”s CDs with a unit cost of $5. During October, Savage made the following purchases of Sister”s CDs.

Oct. 3

4,000 @ $6

Oct. 19

2,500 @ $8

Oct. 9

3,000 @ $7

Oct. 25

2,000 @ $9

During October 9,400 units were sold. Savage uses a periodic inventory system.

Instructions

(a) Determine the cost of goods available for sale.

(b) Determine (1) the ending inventory and (2) the cost of goods sold under each of the assumed cost flow methods (FIFO, LIFO, and average-cost). Prove the accuracy of the cost of goods sold under the FIFO and LIFO methods. (Round cost per unit to three decimal places.)

(c) Which cost flow method results in (1) the highest inventory amount for the balance sheet and (2) the highest cost of goods sold for the income statement?

trattner company had a beginning inventory on january 1 of 100 units of product sxl 533840

Trattner Company had a beginning inventory on January 1 of 100 units of Product SXL at a cost of $20 per unit. During the year, purchases were:

Mar. 15

300 units at $23

Sept. 4

290 units at $28

Jul-20

250 units at $25

Dec. 2

130 units at $30

Trattner Company sold 800 units, and it uses a periodic inventory system.

Instructions

(a) Determine the cost of goods available for sale.

(b) Determine the ending inventory and the cost of goods sold under each of the assumed cost flow methods (FIFO, LIFO, and average-cost). Prove the accuracy of the cost of goods sold under each method. (Round cost per unit to three decimal places.)

(c) Which cost flow method results in the highest inventory amount for the balance sheet? The highest cost of goods sold for the income statement?

the management of howland is reevaluating the appropriateness of using its present i 533841

The management of Howland is reevaluating the appropriateness of using its present inventory cost flow method, which is average-cost. The company requests your help in determining the results of operations for 2012 if either the FIFO or the LIFO method had been used. For 2012, the accounting records show these data:

Inventories

Purchases and Sales

Beginning (10,000 units)

$22,500

Total net sales (220,000 units)

$862,000

Ending (20,000 units)

Total cost of goods purchased (230,000 units)

567,500

Purchases were made quarterly as follows.

Quarter

Units

Unit Cost

Total Cost

1

60,000

$2.30

$138,000

2

50,000

2.4

120,000

3

50,000

2.55

127,500

4

70,000

2.6

182,000

230,000

$567,500

Operating expenses were $147,000, and the company”s income tax rate is 32%.

Instructions

(a) Prepare comparative condensed income statements for 2012 under FIFO and LIFO. (Show computations of ending inventory.)

(b) Answer the following questions for management in business-letter form.

(1) Which cost flow method (FIFO or LIFO) produces the inventory amount that most closely approximates the amount that would have to be paid to replace the inventory? Why?

(2) Which cost flow method (FIFO or LIFO) produces the net income amount that is a more likely indicator of next period”s net income? Why?

(3) Which cost flow method (FIFO or LIFO) is more likely to approximate the actual physical flow of goods? Why?

(4) How much more cash will be available for management under LIFO than under FIFO? Why?

(5) Will gross profit under the average-cost method be higher or lower than FIFO? Than LIFO? (Note:It is not necessary to quantify your answer.)

you have the following information for wirth inc for the month ended june 30 2012 wi 533842

You have the following information for Wirth Inc. for the month ended June 30, 2012. Wirth uses the periodic method for inventory.

Unit Cost or

Date

Description

Quantity

Selling Price

Jun-01

Beginning inventory

25

$60

Jun-04

Purchase

85

63

Jun-10

Sale

60

90

Jun-11

Sale return

5

90

Jun-18

Purchase

35

66

Jun-18

Purchase return

15

66

Jun-25

Sale

55

95

Jun-28

Purchase

20

70

Instructions

(a) Calculate (i) ending inventory, (ii) cost of goods sold, (iii) gross profit, and (iv) gross profit rate under each of the following methods.

(1) LIFO.

(2) FIFO.

(3) Average-cost. (Round cost per unit to three decimal places.)

(b) Compare results for the three cost flow assumptions.

you have the following information for gas saver plus gas saver plus uses the period 533843

You have the following information for Gas Saver Plus. Gas Saver Plus uses the periodic method of accounting for its inventory transactions.

March 1 Beginning inventory 1,500 litres at a cost of 40¢ per litre.

March 3 Purchased 2,200 litres at a cost of 45¢ per litre.

March 5 Sold 1,800 litres for 60¢ per litre.

March 10 Purchased 3,500 litres at a cost of 49¢ per litre.

March 20 Purchased 2,000 litres at a cost of 52¢ per litre.

March 30 Sold 5,000 litres for 70¢ per litre.

Instructions

(a) Prepare partial income statements through gross profit, and calculate the value of ending inventory that would be reported on the balance sheet, under each of the cost flow assumptions on the next page.

(1) Specific identification method assuming:

(i) the March 5 sale consisted of 800 litres from the March 1 beginning inventory and 1,000 litres from the March 3 purchase; and

(ii) the March 30 sale consisted of the following number of units sold from each purchase: 400 litres from March 1; 500 litres from March 3; 2,600 litres from March 10; 1,500 litres from March 20.

(2) FIFO.

(3) LIFO.

(b) How can companies use a cost flow method to justify price increases? Which cost flow method would best support an argument to increase prices?

holiday warehouse distributes suitcases to retail stores and extends credit terms 533592

Holiday Warehouse distributes suitcases to retail stores and extends credit terms of 1/10, n/30 to all of its customers. During the month of July, the following merchandising transactions occurred.

July 1 Purchased suitcases on account for $2,700 from Satchel Manufacturers, terms 2/15, n/30.

3 Sold suitcases on account to Triptik for $2,900. The cost of the merchandise sold was $1,800.

9 Paid Satchel Manufacturers in full.

12 Received payment in full from Triptik.

17 Sold suitcases on account to Pass Port for $2,000. The cost of the merchandise sold was $1,200.

18 Purchased suitcases on account for $2,200 (including freight) from Steamer Manufacturers, terms 1/10, n/30.

20 Received $300 credit for suitcases returned to Steamer Manufacturers.

21 Received payment in full from Pass Port.

22 Sold suitcases on account to Carry On for $3,120. The cost of the merchandise sold was $1,800.

30 Paid Steamer Manufacturers in full.

31 Granted Carry On $310 credit for suitcases returned costing $170.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions for the month of July for Holiday Warehouse, using a perpetual inventory system.

at the beginning of the current season the ledger of highland tennis shop showed cas 533593

At the beginning of the current season, the ledger of Highland Tennis Shop showed Cash $2,500; Inventory $1,700; and Common Stock $4,200. The following transactions were completed during April.

Apr. 4 Purchased racquets and balls from Harris Co. $980, terms 2/10, n/30.

6 Paid freight on Harris Co. purchase $60.

8 Sold merchandise to members $750, terms n/30. The merchandise sold cost $480.

10 Received credit of $130 from Harris Co. for damaged racquets that were returned.

11 Purchased tennis shoes from Happy Feet for cash $300.

13 Paid Harris Co. in full.

14 Purchased tennis shirts and shorts from Rivera Sportswear $1,300, terms 3/10, n/60.

15 Received cash refund of $50 from Happy Feet for damaged merchandise that was returned.

17 Paid freight on Rivera Sportswear purchase $60.

18 Sold merchandise to members $660, terms n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $440.

20 Received $500 in cash from members in settlement of their accounts.

21 Paid Rivera Sportswear in full.

27 Granted an allowance of $30 to members for tennis clothing that did not fit properly.

30 Received cash payments on account from members $550.

The chart of accounts for the tennis shop includes Cash, Accounts Receivable, Inventory, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, Sales Revenue, Sales Returns and Allowances, and Cost of Goods Sold.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the April transactions using a perpetual inventory system.

(b) Using T accounts, enter the beginning balances in the ledger accounts and post the April transactions.

(c) Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2012.

(d) Prepare an income statement through gross profit.

parkland department store is located near the lyndale shopping mall at the end of th 533594

Parkland Department Store is located near the Lyndale Shopping Mall. At the end of the company”s fiscal year on December 31, 2012, the following accounts appeared in its adjusted trial balance.

Accounts Payable

$ 73,300

Accounts Receivable

45,500

Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings

52,500

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

42,600

Buildings

190,000

Cash

28,000

Common Stock

140,000

Cost of Goods Sold

412,000

Depreciation Expense

23,400

Dividends

15,000

Equipment

100,000

Gain on Disposal of Plant Assets

4,300

Income Tax Expense

15,000

Insurance Expense

8,400

Interest Expense

7,000

Interest Payable

2,000

Inventory

43,000

Mortgage Payable

62,500

Prepaid Insurance

2,400

Maintenance and Repairs Expense

$ 6,200

Retained Earnings

19,200

Salaries and Wages Expense

111,000

Sales Revenue

626,000

Salaries and Wages Payable

3,500

Sales Returns and Allowances

8,000

Utilities Expense

11,000

Additional data: $20,000 of the mortgage payable is due for payment next year.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a multiple-step income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a classified balance sheet.

(b) Calculate the profit margin ratio and the gross profit rate.

(c) The vice president of marketing and the director of human resources have developed a proposal whereby the company would compensate the sales force on a strictly commission basis. Given the increased incentive, they expect net sales to increase by 25%. As a result, they estimate that gross profit will increase by $50,500 and expenses by $27,800. Compute the expected new net income. (Hint: You do not need to prepare an income statement.) Then, compute the revised profit margin ratio and gross profit rate. Comment on the effect that this plan would have on net income and the ratios, and evaluate the merit of this proposal.

a part time bookkeeper prepared this income statement for kritek company for the yea 533595

A part-time bookkeeper prepared this income statement for Kritek Company for the year ending December 31, 2012.

KRITEK COMPANY
Income Statement
December 31, 2012

Revenues

Sales revenue

$720,000

Less: Freight-out

$14,000

Sales discounts

11,300

25,300

Net sales

694,700

Other revenues (net)

1,300

Total revenues

696,000

Expenses

Cost of goods sold

460,000

Selling expenses

103,000

Administrative expenses

54,000

Dividends

12,000

Total expenses

629,000

Net income

$ 67,000

As an experienced, knowledgeable accountant, you review the statement and determine the following facts.

1. Sales include $12,000 of deposits from customers for future sales orders.

2. Other revenues contain two items: interest expense $4,000 and interest revenue $5,300.

3. Selling expenses consist of sales salaries and wages $82,500, advertising $13,000, and depreciation on store equipment $7,500.

4. Administrative expenses consist of office salaries $23,000; utilities expense $9,500; rent expense $14,500; and insurance expense $7,000. Insurance expense includes $1,200 of insurance applicable to 2013.

Instructions

Prepare a correct detailed multiple-step income statement. Assume a tax rate of 25%.

the trial balance of runway fashion center contained the accounts on the next page a 533596

The trial balance of Runway Fashion Center contained the accounts on the next page at November 30, the end of the company”s fiscal year.

RUNWAY FASHION CENTER
Trial Balance
November 30, 2012

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 37,700

Accounts Receivable

33,700

Inventory

43,000

Supplies

8,800

Equipment

143,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

$ 41,000

Notes Payable

62,000

Accounts Payable

17,800

Common Stock

80,000

Retained Earnings

30,000

Dividends

12,000

Sales Revenue

757,200

Sales Returns and Allowances

6,200

Cost of Goods Sold

505,400

Salaries and Wages Expense

110,000

Advertising Expense

26,400

Utilities Expense

14,000

Maintenance and Repairs Expense

12,100

Freight-out

11,700

Rent Expense

24,000

$988,000

$988,000

Adjustment data:

1. Store supplies on hand total $3,100.

2. Depreciation is $14,000 on the store equipment and $6,000 on the delivery equipment.

3. Interest of $4,400 is accrued on notes payable at November 30.

4. Income tax due and unpaid at November 30 is $3,000. Other data: $24,000 of notes payable are due for payment next year.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the adjusting entries.

(b) Prepare T accounts for all accounts used in part (a). Enter the trial balance amounts into the T accounts and post the adjusting entries.

(c) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

(d) Prepare a multiple-step income statement and a retained earnings statement for the year, and a classified balance sheet at November 30, 2012.

at the end of ehlinger department store s fiscal year on december 31 2012 533597

At the end of Ehlinger Department Store”s fiscal year on December 31, 2012, these accounts appeared in its adjusted trial balance.

Freight-in

$ 7,200

Inventory (beginning)

40,500

Purchases

456,000

Purchase Discounts

12,000

Purchase Returns and Allowances

6,400

Sales Revenue

702,000

Sales Returns and Allowances

8,000

Additional facts:

1. Merchandise inventory on December 31, 2012, is $58,300.

2. Note that Ehlinger Department Store uses a periodic system.

Instructions

Prepare an income statement through gross profit for the year ended December 31, 2012.

sandra mclellan operates a clothing retail operation she purchases all merchandise i 533598

Sandra McLellan operates a clothing retail operation. She purchases all merchandise inventory on credit and uses a periodic inventory system. The Accounts Payable account is used for recording inventory purchases only; all other current liabilities are accrued in separate accounts. You are provided with the following selected information for the fiscal years 2010, 2011, 2012, and 2013.

2010

2011

2012

2013

Inventory (ending)

$16,000

$ 11,300

$ 16,400

$ 12,200

Accounts payable (ending)

17,000

Sales revenue

229,700

227,600

222,000

Purchases of merchandise

inventory on account

146,900

155,700

139,200

Cash payments to suppliers

135,900

159,000

127,000

Instructions

(a) Calculate cost of goods sold for each of the 2011, 2012, and 2013 fiscal years.

(b) Calculate the gross profit for each of the 2011, 2012, and 2013 fiscal years.

(c) Calculate the ending balance of accounts payable for each of the 2011, 2012, and 2013 fiscal years.

(d) The vice presidents of sales, marketing, production, and finance are discussing the company”s results with the CEO. They note that sales declined in fiscal 2013. They wonder whether that means that profitability, as measured by the gross profit rate, necessarily also declined. Explain, calculating the gross profit rate for each fiscal year to help support your answer.

at the beginning of the current season the ledger of highland tennis shop showed cas 533599

At the beginning of the current season, the ledger of Highland Tennis Shop showed Cash $2,500; Inventory $1,700; and Common Stock $4,200. The following transactions were completed during April.

Apr. 4 Purchased racquets and balls from Harris Co. $980, terms 2/10, n/30.

6 Paid freight on Harris Co. purchase $60.

8 Sold merchandise to members $750, terms n/30.

10 Received credit of $130 from Harris Co. for damaged racquets that were returned.

11 Purchased tennis shoes from Happy Feet for cash $300.

13 Paid Harris Co. in full.

14 Purchased tennis shirts and shorts from Rivera Sportswear $1,300, terms 3/10, n/60.

15 Received cash refund of $50 from Happy Feet for damaged merchandise that was returned.

17 Paid freight on Rivera Sportswear purchase $60.

18 Sold merchandise to members $660, terms n/30.

20 Received $500 in cash from members in settlement of their accounts.

21 Paid Rivera Sportswear in full.

27 Granted an allowance of $30 to members for tennis clothing that did not fit properly.

30 Received cash payments on account from members $550.

The chart of accounts for the tennis shop includes Cash, Accounts Receivable, Inventory, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, Sales Revenue, Sales Returns and Allowances, Purchases, Purchase Returns and Allowances, Purchase Discounts, and Freight-in.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the April transactions using a periodic inventory system.

(b) Using T accounts, enter the beginning balances in the ledger accounts and post the April transactions.

(c) Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2012.

(d) Prepare an income statement through Gross Profit, assuming merchandise inventory on hand at April 30 is $3,244.

on december 1 2012 shiras distributing company had the following account balances 533600

On December 1, 2012, Shiras Distributing Company had the following account balances.

Debits

Credits

Cash

$ 7,200

Accumulated Depreciation—

Accounts Receivable

4,600

Equipment

$ 2,200

Inventory

12,000

Accounts Payable

4,500

Supplies

1,200

Salaries and Wages Payable

1,000

Equipment

22,000

Common Stock

15,000

$47,000

Retained Earnings

24,300

$47,000

During December, the company completed the following summary transactions.

Dec. 6 Paid $1,600 for salaries due employees, of which $600 is for December and $1,000 is for November salaries payable.

8 Received $1,900 cash from customers in payment of account (no discount allowed).

10 Sold merchandise for cash $6,300. The cost of the merchandise sold was $4,100.

13 Purchased merchandise on account from Gong Co. $9,000, terms 2/10, n/30.

15 Purchased supplies for cash $2,000.

18 Sold merchandise on account $12,000, terms 3/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $8,000.

20 Paid salaries $1,800.

23 Paid Gong Co. in full, less discount.

27 Received collections in full, less discounts, from customers billed on December 18.

Adjustment data:

1. Accrued salaries payable $800.

2. Depreciation $200 per month.

3. Supplies on hand $1,500.

4. Income tax due and unpaid at December 31 is $200.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the December transactions using a perpetual inventory system.

(b) Enter the December 1 balances in the ledger T accounts and post the December transactions. Use Cost of Goods Sold, Depreciation Expense, Salaries and Wages Expense, Sales Revenue, Sales Discounts, Supplies Expense, Income Tax Expense, and Income Taxes Payable.

(c) Journalize and post adjusting entries.

(d) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

(e) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for December and a classified balance sheet at December 31.

the financial statements of the hershey company appear in appendix b 533602

The financial statements of The Hershey Company appear in Appendix B, following the financial statements for Tootsie Roll in Appendix A.

Instructions

(a) Based on the information contained in these financial statements, determine the following values for each company.

(1) Profit margin ratio for 2009. (For Tootsie Roll, use “Total Revenue.”)

(2) Gross profit for 2009. (For Tootsie Roll, use “Product” amounts.)

(3) Gross profit rate for 2009. (For Tootsie Roll, use “Product” amounts.)

(4) Operating income for 2009.

(5) Percentage change in operating income from 2009 to 2008.

(b) What conclusions concerning the relative profitability of the two companies can be drawn from these data?

recently it was announced that two giant french retailers carrefour sa and promodes 533604

Recently, it was announced that two giant French retailers, Carrefour SA and Promodes SA, would merge. A headline in the Wall Street Journal blared, “French Retailers Create New Wall-Mart Rival.” While Wal-Mart”s total sales would still exceed those of the combined company, Wall- Mart”s international sales are far less than those of the combined company. This is a serious concern for Wal-Mart, since its primary opportunity for future growth lies outside of the United States. Below are basic financial data for the combined corporation (in euros) and Wal-Mart (in U.S. dollars). Even though their results are presented in different currencies, by employing ratios we can make some basic comparisons.

Carrefour

Wal-Mart

(in millions)

(in millions)

Sales

€ 70,486

$256,329

Cost of goods sold

54,630

198,747

Net income

1,738

9,054

Total assets

39,063

104,912

Current assets

14,521

34,421

Current liabilities

13,660

37,418

Total liabilities

29,434

61,289

Instructions

Compare the two companies by answering the following.

(a) Calculate the gross profit rate for each of the companies, and discuss their relative abilities to control cost of goods sold.

(b) Calculate the profit margin ratio, and discuss the companies” relative profitability.

(c) Calculate the current ratio and debt to total assets ratios for the two companies, and discuss their relative liquidity and solvency.

(d) What concerns might you have in relying on this comparison?

in the annual report to make decisions it is important to keep abreast of financial 533605

In the annual report to make decisions. It is important to keep abreast of financial news. This activity demonstrates how to search for financial news on the Web. Address:http://biz.yahoo.com/i, or go to www.wiley.com/college/kimmel

Steps

1. Type in either Wal-Mart, Target Corp., or Kmart.

2. Choose News.

3. Select an article that sounds interesting to you and that would be relevant to an investor in these companies.

Instructions

(a) What was the source of the article (e.g., Reuters, Businesswire, Prnewswire)?

(b) Assume that you are a personal financial planner and that one of your clients owns stock in the company. Write a brief memo to your client summarizing the article and explaining the implications of the article for their investment.

the following situation is presented in chronological order 533607

The following situation is presented in chronological order.

1. Finley decides to buy a surfboard.

2. He calls Surfing USA Co. to inquire about their surfboards.

3. Two days later he requests Surfing USA Co. to make him a surfboard.

4. Three days later Surfing USA Co. sends him a purchase order to fill out.

5. He sends back the purchase order.

6. Surfing USA Co. receives the completed purchase order.

7. Surfing USA Co. completes the surfboard.

8. Finley picks up the surfboard.

9. Surfing USA Co. bills Finley.

10. Surfing USA Co. receives payment from Finley.

Instructions

In a memo to the president of Surfing USA Co., answer the following questions.

(a) When should Surfing USA Co. record the sale?

(b) Suppose that with his purchase order, Finley is required to make a down payment. Would that change your answer to part (a)?

margie anunson was just hired as the assistant treasurer of northshore stores a spec 533608

Margie Anunson was just hired as the assistant treasurer of Northshore Stores, a specialty chain store company that has nine retail stores concentrated in one metropolitan area. Among other things, the payment of all invoices is centralized in one of the departments Margie will manage. Her primary responsibility is to maintain the company”s high credit rating by paying all bills when due and to take advantage of all cash discounts.

Michael Hauer, the former assistant treasurer, who has been promoted to treasurer, is training Margie in her new duties. He instructs Margie that she is to continue the practice of preparing all checks “net of discount” and dating the checks the last day of the discount period. “But,” Michael continues, “we always hold the checks at least 4 days beyond the discount period before mailing them. That way we get another 4 days of interest on our money. Most of our creditors need our business and don”t complain. And, if they scream about our missing the discount period, we blame it on the mail room or the post office. We”ve only lost one discount out of every hundred we take that way. I think everybody does it. By the way, welcome to our team!”

Instructions

(a) What are the ethical considerations in this case?

(b) What stakeholders are harmed or benefited?

(c) Should Margie continue the practice started by Michael? Does she have any choice?

early in 2012 aragon company switched to a just in time inventory system its sales a 533813

Early in 2012, Aragon Company switched to a just-in-time inventory system. Its sales and inventory amounts for 2011 and 2012 are shown below.

2011

2012

Sales revenue

$3,120,000

$3,713,000

Cost of goods sold

1,200,000

1,425,000

Beginning inventory

170,000

210,000

Ending inventory

210,000

90,000

Determine the inventory turnover and days in inventory for 2011 and 2012. Discuss the changes in the amount of inventory, the inventory turnover and days in inventory, and the amount of sales across the two years.

jerry karron an auditor with joshi cpas is performing a review of duncan company s i 533815

Jerry Karron, an auditor with Joshi CPAs, is performing a review of Duncan Company”s Inventory account. Duncan did not have a good year, and top management is under pressure to boost reported income. According to its records, the inventory balance at year-end was $740,000. However, the following information was not considered when determining that amount.

1. Included in the company”s count were goods with a cost of $228,000 that the company is holding on consignment. The goods belong to Arnold Corporation.

2. The physical count did not include goods purchased by Duncan with a cost of $40,000 that were shipped FOB shipping point on December 28 and did not arrive at Duncan”s warehouse until January 3.

3. Included in the Inventory account was $17,000 of office supplies that were stored in the warehouse and were to be used by the company”s supervisors and managers during the coming year.

4. The company received an order on December 29 that was boxed and was sitting on the loading dock awaiting pick-up on December 31. The shipper picked up the goods on January 1 and delivered them on January 6. The shipping terms were FOB shipping point. The goods had a selling price of $40,000 and a cost of $29,000. The goods were not included in the count because they were sitting on the dock.

5. On December 29, Duncan shipped goods with a selling price of $80,000 and a cost of $50,000 to Siebring Sales Corporation FOB shipping point. The goods arrived on January 3. Siebring Sales had only ordered goods with a selling price of $10,000 and a cost of $6,000. However, a sales manager at Duncan had authorized the shipment and said that if Siebring wanted to ship the goods back next week, it could.

6. Included in the count was $50,000 of goods that were parts for a machine that the company no longer made. Given the high-tech nature of Duncan”s products, it was unlikely that these obsolete parts had any other use. However, management would prefer to keep them on the books at cost, “since that is what we paid for them, after all.”

Instructions

Prepare a schedule to determine the correct inventory amount. Provide explanations for each item above, stating why you did or did not make an adjustment for each item.

trinh inc had the following inventory situations to consider at january 31 its year 533816

Trinh Inc. had the following inventory situations to consider at January 31, its year-end.

(a) Goods held on consignment for Mail Boxes Corp. since December 12.

(b) Goods shipped on consignment to Reddy Holdings Inc. on January 5.

(c) Goods shipped to a customer, FOB destination, on January 29 that are still in transit.

(d) Goods shipped to a customer, FOB shipping point, on January 29 that are still in transit.

(e) Goods purchased FOB destination from a supplier on January 25, that are still in transit.

(f) Goods purchased FOB shipping point from a supplier on January 25, that are still in transit.

(g) Office supplies on hand at January 31.

Instructions

Identify which of the preceding items should be included in inventory. If the item should not be included in inventory, state in what account, if any, it should have been recorded.

sunburst sells a snowboard xpert that is popular with snowboard enthusiasts below 533817

Sunburst sells a snowboard, Xpert, that is popular with snowboard enthusiasts. Below is information relating to Sunburst”s purchases of Xpert snowboards during September. During the same month, 116 Xpert snowboards were sold. Sunburst uses a periodic inventory system.

Date

Explanation

Units

Unit Cost

Total Cost

Sept. 1

Inventory

12

$100

$1,200

Sept. 12

Purchases

45

103

4,635

Sept. 19

Purchases

20

104

2,080

Sept. 26

Purchases

50

105

5,250

Totals

127

$13,165

Instructions

(a) Compute the ending inventory at September 30 using the FIFO and LIFO methods. Prove the amount allocated to cost of goods sold under each method.

(b) For both FIFO and LIFO, calculate the sum of ending inventory and cost of goods sold. What do you notice about the answers you found for each method?

klumb inc uses a periodic inventory system its records show the following for the mo 533818

Klumb Inc. uses a periodic inventory system. Its records show the following for the month of May, in which 74 units were sold.

Date

Explanation

Units

Unit Cost

Total Cost

May-01

Inventory

30

$9

$270

15

Purchase

25

10

250

24

Purchase

38

11

418

Total

93

$938

Instructions

Calculate the ending inventory at May 31 using the (a) FIFO, (b) average-cost, and (c) LIFO methods. (For average-cost, round the average unit cost to three decimal places.) Prove the amount allocated to cost of goods sold under each method.

on december 1 loprice electronics has three dvd players left in stock all are identi 533819

On December 1, LoPrice Electronics has three DVD players left in stock. All are identical, all are priced to sell at $85. One of the three DVD players left in stock, with serial #1012, was purchased on June 1 at a cost of $52. Another, with serial #1045, was purchased on November 1 for $48. The last player, serial #1056, was purchased on November 30 for $40.

Instructions

(a) Calculate the cost of goods sold using the FIFO periodic inventory method, assuming that two of the three players were sold by the end of December, LoPrice Electronics” year-end.

(b) If LoPrice Electronics used the specific identification method instead of the FIFO method, how might it alter its earnings by “selectively choosing” which particular players to sell to the two customers? What would LoPrice”s cost of goods sold be if the company wished to minimize earnings? Maximize earnings?

(c) Which inventory method, FIFO or specific identification, do you recommend that LoPrice use? Explain why.

crystal lake corporation s accounting records show the following at yearend december 533569

Crystal Lake Corporation”s accounting records show the following at yearend December 31, 2012:

Purchase Discounts

$5,900

Beginning Inventory

$31,720

Freight-in

8,400

Ending Inventory

27,950

Freight-out

11,100

Purchase Returns

3,600

Purchases

162,500

Assuming that Crystal Lake Corporation uses the periodic system, compute (a) cost of goods purchased and (b) cost of goods sold.

this information relates to percy co 533570

This information relates to Percy Co.

1. On April 5, purchased merchandise from Lyman Company for $28,000, terms 2/10, n/30.

2. On April 6, paid freight costs of $700 on merchandise purchased from Lyman.

3. On April 7, purchased equipment on account for $30,000.

4. On April 8, returned some of April 5 merchandise to Lyman Company, which cost $3,600.

5. On April 15, paid the amount due to Lyman Company in full.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record the transactions listed above on the books of Percy Co. Percy Co. uses a perpetual inventory system.

(b) Assume that Percy Co. paid the balance due to Lyman Company on May 4 instead of April 15. Prepare the journal entry to record this payment.

assume that on september 1 office depot had an inventory that included a variety of 533571

Assume that on September 1, Office Depot had an inventory that included a variety of calculators. The company uses a perpetual inventory system. During September, these transactions occurred.

Sept. 6 Purchased calculators from Abacus Co. at a total cost of $1,650, terms n/30.

9 Paid freight of $50 on calculators purchased from Abacus Co.

10 Returned calculators to Abacus Co. for $66 credit because they did not meet specifications.

12 Sold calculators costing $520 for $690 to Union Book Store, terms n/30.

14 Granted credit of $45 to Union Book Store for the return of one calculator that was not ordered. The calculator cost $34.

20 Sold calculators costing $570 for $760 to Commons Card Shop, terms n/30.

Instructions

Journalize the September transactions.

the following transactions are for masland company 533572

The following transactions are for Masland Company.

1. On December 3, Masland Company sold $500,000 of merchandise to Parker Co., terms 1/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $330,000.

2. On December 8, Parker Co. was granted an allowance of $25,000 for merchandise purchased on December 3.

3. On December 13, Masland Company received the balance due from Parker Co.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record these transactions on the books of Masland Company. Masland uses a perpetual inventory system.

(b) Assume that Masland Company received the balance due from Parker Co. on January 2 of the following year instead of December 13. Prepare the journal entry to record the receipt of payment on January 2.

financial information is presented here for two companies 533575

Financial information is presented here for two companies.

Indig

Perez

Company

Company

Sales revenue

90,000

?

Sales returns

?

$5,000

Net sales

84,000

100,000

Cost of goods sold

58,000

?

Gross profit

?

40,000

Operating expenses

14,380

?

Net income

?

17,000

Instructions

(a) Fill in the missing amounts. Show all computations.

(b) Calculate the profit margin ratio and the gross profit rate for each company.

(c) Discuss your findings in part (b).

in its income statement for the year ended december 31 2012 misra company reported t 533576

In its income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012, Misra Company reported the following condensed data.

Administrative expenses

$465,000

Loss on disposal of

Cost of goods sold

987,000

plant assets

83,500

Interest expense

71,000

Net sales

2,050,000

Interest revenue

65,000

Income tax expense

25,000

Selling expenses

420,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare a multiple-step income statement.

(b) Calculate the profit margin ratio and gross profit rate.

(c) In 2011, Misra had a profit margin ratio of 5%. Is the decline in 2012 a cause for concern? (Ignore income tax effects.)

in its income statement for the year ended june 30 2009 the clorox company reported 533577

In its income statement for the year ended June 30, 2009, The Clorox Company reported the following condensed data (dollars in millions).

Selling and

Research and

administrative expenses

715

development expense

114

Net sales

5,450

Income tax expense

274

Interest expense

161

Other expense

46

Advertising expense

499

Cost of goods sold

3,104

Instructions

(a) Prepare a multiple-step income statement.

(b) Calculate the gross profit rate and the profit margin ratio and explain what each means.

(c) Assume the marketing department has presented a plan to increase advertising expenses by $340 million. It expects this plan to result in an increase in both net sales and cost of goods sold of 25%. Redo parts (a) and (b) and discuss whether this plan has merit. (Assume a tax rate of 34%, and round all amounts to whole dollars.)

below is a series of cost of goods sold sections for companies a f l and v 533579

Below is a series of cost of goods sold sections for companies A, F, L, and V.

A

F

L

V

Beginning inventory

250

$120

$700

$ ( j)

Purchases

1,500

1,080

(g)

43,590

Purchase returns and allowances

80

(d)

290

(k)

Net purchases

(a)

1,040

7,410

42,290

Freight-in

130

(e)

(h)

2,240

Cost of goods purchased

(b)

1,230

8,050

(l)

Cost of goods available for sale

1,800

1,350

(i)

49,530

Ending inventory

310

(f )

1,150

6,230

Cost of goods sold

(c)

1,230

7,600

43,300

Instructions

Fill in the lettered blanks to complete the cost of goods sold sections.

this information relates to edyburn co 533581

This information relates to Edyburn Co.

1. On April 5, purchased merchandise from Hansen Company for $27,000, terms 2/10, n/30.

2. On April 6, paid freight costs of $1,200 on merchandise purchased from Hansen Company.

3. On April 7, purchased equipment on account for $30,000.

4. On April 8, returned some of the April 5 merchandise to Hansen Company, which cost $3,600.

5. On April 15, paid the amount due to Hansen Company in full.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record these transactions on the books of Edyburn Co. using a periodic inventory system.

(b) Assume that Edyburn Co. paid the balance due to Hansen Company on May 4 instead of April 15. Prepare the journal entry to record this payment.

janssen hardware store completed the following merchandising transactions in the mon 533582

Janssen Hardware Store completed the following merchandising transactions in the month of May. At the beginning of May, Janssen”s ledger showed Cash of $8,000 and Common Stock of $8,000.

May 1 Purchased merchandise on account from Vanco Wholesale Supply for $8,000, terms 1/10, n/30.

2 Sold merchandise on account for $4,400, terms 2/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $3,300.

5 Received credit from Vanco Wholesale Supply for merchandise returned $200.

9 Received collections in full, less discounts, from customers billed on May 2.

10 Paid Vanco Wholesale Supply in full, less discount.

11 Purchased supplies for cash $900.

12 Purchased merchandise for cash $3,100.

15 Received $230 refund for return of poor-quality merchandise from supplier on cash purchase.

17 Purchased merchandise from Strickler Distributors for $2,500, terms 2/10, n/30.

19 Paid freight on May 17 purchase $250.

24 Sold merchandise for cash $5,500. The cost of the merchandise sold was $4,100.

25 Purchased merchandise from Fasteners Inc. for $800, terms 3/10, n/30.

27 Paid Strickler Distributors in full, less discount.

29 Made refunds to cash customers for returned merchandise $124. The returned merchandise had cost $90.

31 Sold merchandise on account for $1,280, terms n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $830.

Janssen Hardware”s chart of accounts includes Cash, Accounts Receivable, Inventory, Supplies, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, Sales Revenue, Sales Returns and Allowances, Sales Discounts, and Cost of Goods Sold.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions using a perpetual inventory system.

(b) Post the transactions to T accounts. Be sure to enter the beginning cash and common stock balances.

(c) Prepare an income statement through gross profit for the month of May 2012.

(d) Calculate the profit margin ratio and the gross profit rate. (Assume operating expenses were $1,400.)

hayes warehouse distributes hardback books to retail stores and extends credit terms 533583

Hayes Warehouse distributes hardback books to retail stores and extends credit terms of 2/10, n/30 to all of its customers. During the month of June, the following merchandising transactions occurred.

June 1 Purchased books on account for $1,040 (including freight) from Brooks Publishers, terms 2/10, n/30.

3 Sold books on account to the Mission Viejo bookstore for $1,200. The cost of the merchandise sold was $720.

6 Received $40 credit for books returned to Brooks Publishers.

9 Paid Brooks Publishers in full.

15 Received payment in full from the Mission Viejo bookstore.

17 Sold books on account to Book Nook for $1,200. The cost of the merchandise sold was $730.

20 Purchased books on account for $720 from Cook Book Publishers, terms 1/15, n/30.

24 Received payment in full from Book Nook.

26 Paid Cook Book Publishers in full.

28 Sold books on account to New Town Bookstore for $1,300. The cost of the merchandise sold was $780.

30 Granted New Town Bookstore $130 credit for books returned costing $80.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions for the month of June for Hayes Warehouse, using a perpetual inventory system.

at the beginning of the current season on april 1 the ledger of thousand oaks pro sh 533584

At the beginning of the current season on April 1, the ledger of Thousand Oaks Pro Shop showed Cash $2,500; Inventory $3,500; and Common Stock $6,000. The following transactions were completed during April 2012.

Apr. 5 Purchased golf bags, clubs, and balls on account from Ryder Co. $1,500, terms 3/10, n/60.

7 Paid freight on Ryder purchase $80.

9 Received credit from Ryder Co. for merchandise returned $200.

10 Sold merchandise on account to members $1,340, terms n/30. The merchandise sold had a cost of $820.

12 Purchased golf shoes, sweaters, and other accessories on account from Birdie Sportswear $830, terms 1/10, n/30.

14 Paid Ryder Co. in full.

17 Received credit from Birdie Sportswear for merchandise returned $30.

20 Made sales on account to members $810, terms n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $550.

21 Paid Birdie Sportswear in full.

27 Granted an allowance to members for clothing that did not fit properly $80.

30 Received payments on account from members $1,220.

The chart of accounts for the pro shop includes Cash, Accounts Receivable, Inventory, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, Sales Revenue, Sales Returns and Allowances, and Cost of Goods Sold.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the April transactions using a perpetual inventory system.

(b) Using T accounts, enter the beginning balances in the ledger accounts and post the April transactions.

(c) Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2012.

(d) Prepare an income statement through gross profit.

chapman department store is located in midtown metropolis during the past several ye 533585

Chapman Department Store is located in midtown Metropolis. During the past several years, net income has been declining because suburban shopping centers have been attracting business away from city areas. At the end of the company”s fiscal year on November 30, 2012, these accounts appeared in its adjusted trial balance.

Accounts Payable

$26,800

Accounts Receivable

17,200

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

68,000

Cash

8,000

Common Stock

35,000

Cost of Goods Sold

614,300

Freight-out

6,200

Equipment

$157,000

Depreciation Expense

13,500

Dividends

12,000

Gain on Disposal of Plant Assets

2,000

Income Tax Expense

10,000

Insurance Expense

9,000

Interest Expense

5,000

Inventory

26,200

Notes Payable

43,500

Prepaid Insurance

6,000

Advertising Expense

33,500

Rent Expense

34,000

Retained Earnings

14,200

Salaries and Wages Expense

117,000

Sales Revenue

904,000

Salaries and Wages Payable

6,000

Sales Returns and Allowances

20,000

Utilities Expense

10,600

Additional data: Notes payable are due in 2016.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a multiple-step income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a classified balance sheet.

(b) Calculate the profit margin ratio and the gross profit rate.

(c) The vice president of marketing and the director of human resources have developed a proposal whereby the company would compensate the sales force on a strictly commission basis. Given the increased incentive, they expect net sales to increase by 15%.

As a result, they estimate that gross profit will increase by $40,443 and expenses by $58,600. Compute the expected new net income. (Hint: You do not need to prepare an income statement.) Then, compute the revised profit margin ratio and gross profit rate. Comment on the effect that this plan would have on net income and on the ratios, and evaluate the merit of this proposal. (Ignore income tax effects.)

an inexperienced accountant prepared this condensed income statement for mcdowell co 533586

An inexperienced accountant prepared this condensed income statement for McDowell Company, a retail firm that has been in business for a number of years.

MCDOWELL COMPANY
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2012

Revenues

Net sales

$850,000

Other revenues

22,000

872,000

Cost of goods sold

555,000

Gross profit

317,000

Operating expenses

Selling expenses

109,000

Administrative expenses

103,000

212,000

Net earnings

$105,000

As an experienced, knowledgeable accountant, you review the statement and determine the following facts.

1. Net sales consist of sales $911,000, less freight-out expense on merchandise sold $33,000, and sales returns and allowances $28,000.

2. Other revenues consist of sales discounts $18,000 and rent revenue $8,000.

3. Selling expenses consist of salespersons” salaries $80,000; depreciation on equipment $10,000; advertising $15,000; and sales commissions $6,000. The commissions represent commissions paid. At December 31, $3,000 of commissions have been earned

by salespersons but have not been paid. All compensation should be recorded as Salaries and Wages Expense.

4. Administrative expenses consist of office salaries $47,000; dividends $18,000; utilities $12,000; interest expense $2,000; and rent expense $24,000, which includes prepayments totaling $6,000 for the first quarter of 2013.

Instructions

Prepare a correct detailed multiple-step income statement. Assume a 25% tax rate.

the trial balance of dealer s choice wholesale company contained the accounts shown 533587

The trial balance of Dealer”s Choice Wholesale Company contained the accounts shown at December 31, the end of the company”s fiscal year.

DEALER”S CHOICE WHOLESALE COMPANY
Trial Balance
December 31, 2012

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 31,400

Accounts Receivable

37,600

Inventory

70,000

Land

92,000

Buildings

200,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings

$ 60,000

Equipment

83,500

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

40,500

Notes Payable

54,700

Accounts Payable

17,500

Common Stock

160,000

Retained Earnings

67,200

Dividends

10000

Sales Revenue

922100

Sales Discounts

6,000

Cost of Goods Sold

709,900

Salaries and Wages Expense

51,300

Utilities Expense

11,400

Maintenance and Repairs Expense

8,900

Advertising Expense

5,200

Insurance Expense

4,800

$1,322,000

$1,322,000

Adjustment data:

1. Depreciation is $8,000 on buildings and $7,000 on equipment. (Both are operating expenses.)

2. Interest of $4,500 is due and unpaid on notes payable at December 31.

3. Income tax due and unpaid at December 31 is $24,000.

Other data: $15,000 of the notes payable are payable next year.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the adjusting entries.

(b) Create T accounts for all accounts used in part (a). Enter the trial balance amounts into the T accounts and post the adjusting entries.

(c) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

(d) Prepare a multiple-step income statement and a retained earnings statement for the year, and a classified balance sheet at December 31, 2012.

at the end of snyder department store s fiscal year on november 30 2012 these accoun 533588

At the end of Snyder Department Store”s fiscal year on November 30, 2012, these accounts appeared in its adjusted trial balance.

Freight-in

$ 5,060

Inventory (beginning)

41,300

Purchases

613,000

Purchase Discounts

7,000

Purchase Returns and Allowances

6,760

Sales Revenue

902,000

Sales Returns and Allowances

20,000

Additional facts:

1. Merchandise inventory on November 30, 2012, is $36,200.

2. Note that Snyder Department Store uses a periodic system.

Instructions

Prepare an income statement through gross profit for the year ended November 30, 2012.

reza inc operates a retail operation that purchases and sells snowmobiles amongst ot 533589

Reza Inc. operates a retail operation that purchases and sells snowmobiles, amongst other outdoor products. The company purchases all merchandise inventory on credit and uses a periodic inventory system. The Accounts Payable account is used for recording inventory purchases only; all other current liabilities are accrued in separate accounts. You are provided with the following selected information for the fiscal years 2010 through 2013, inclusive.

2010

2011

2012

2013

Income Statement Data

Sales revenue

$96,890

$ (e)

$82,220

Cost of goods sold

(a)

28,060

26,490

Gross profit

67,800

59,620

(i)

Operating expenses

63,640

(f )

52,870

Net income

$ (b)

$ 3,510

$ ( j)

Balance Sheet Data

Inventory

$13,000

$ (c)

$14,700

$ (k)

Accounts payable

5,800

6,500

4,600

(l)

Additional Information

Purchases of merchandise

inventory on account

$25,890

$ (g)

$24,050

Cash payments to suppliers

(d)

(h)

24,650

Instructions

(a) Calculate the missing amounts.

(b) The vice presidents of sales, marketing, production, and finance are discussing the company’s results with the CEO. They note that sales declined over the 3-year fiscal period, 2011–2013. Does that mean that profitability necessarily also declined? Explain, computing the gross profit rate and the profit margin ratio for each fiscal year to help support your answer.

at the beginning of the current season on april 1 the ledger of thousand oaks pro sh 533590

At the beginning of the current season on April 1, the ledger of Thousand Oaks Pro Shop showed Cash $2,500; Inventory $3,500; and Common Stock $6,000. These transactions occurred during April 2012.

Apr. 5 Purchased golf bags, clubs, and balls on account from Ryder Co. $1,500, terms 3/10, n/60.

7 Paid freight on Ryder Co. purchases $80.

9 Received credit from Ryder Co. for merchandise returned $200.

10 Sold merchandise on account to members $1,340, terms n/30.

12 Purchased golf shoes, sweaters, and other accessories on account from Birdie Sportswear $830, terms 1/10, n/30.

14 Paid Ryder Co. in full.

17 Received credit from Birdie Sportswear for merchandise returned $30.

20 Made sales on account to members $810, terms n/30.

21 Paid Birdie Sportswear in full.

27 Granted credit to members for clothing that did not fit properly $80.

30 Received payments on account from members $1,220.

The chart of accounts for the pro shop includes Cash, Accounts Receivable, Inventory, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, Sales Revenue, Sales Returns and Allowances, Purchases, Purchase Returns and Allowances, Purchase Discounts, and Freight-in.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the April transactions using a periodic inventory system.

(b) Using T accounts, enter the beginning balances in the ledger accounts and post the April transactions.

(c) Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2012.

(d) Prepare an income statement through gross profit, assuming merchandise inventory on hand at April 30 is $4,263.

curtain distributing company completed these merchandising transactions in the month 533591

Curtain Distributing Company completed these merchandising transactions in the month of April. At the beginning of April, the ledger of Curtain showed Cash of $9,000 and Common Stock of $9,000.

Apr. 2 Purchased merchandise on account from Luebke Supply Co. $8,700, terms 2/10, n/30.

4 Sold merchandise on account $6,000, terms 2/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $3,700.

5 Paid $200 freight on April 4 sale.

6 Received credit from Luebke Supply Co. for merchandise returned $400.

11 Paid Luebke Supply Co. in full, less discount.

13 Received collections in full, less discounts, from customers billed on April 4.

14 Purchased merchandise for cash $4,700.

16 Received refund from supplier for returned merchandise on cash purchase of April 14, $500.

18 Purchased merchandise from Cascade Distributors $5,500, terms 2/10, n/30.

20 Paid freight on April 18 purchase $180.

23 Sold merchandise for cash $8,300. The cost of the merchandise sold was $5,580.

26 Purchased merchandise for cash $2,300.

27 Paid Cascade Distributors in full, less discount.

29 Made refunds to cash customers for returned merchandise $180. The returned merchandise had a cost of $120.

30 Sold merchandise on account $3,980, terms n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $2,500.

Curtain Distributing Company”s chart of accounts includes Cash, Accounts Receivable, Inventory, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, Sales Revenue, Sales Returns and Allowances, Sales Discounts, Cost of Goods Sold, and Freight-out.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions.

(b) Post the transactions to T accounts. Be sure to enter the beginning cash and common stock balances.

(c) Prepare the income statement through gross profit for the month of April 2012.

(d) Calculate the profit margin ratio and the gross profit rate. (Assume operating expenses were $2,050.)

the trial balances shown on page 208 are before and after adjustment for amit 533476

The trial balances shown on page 208 are before and after adjustment for Amit Company at the end of its fiscal year.

AMIT COMPANY
Trial Balance
August 31, 2012

Before
Adjustment

After
Adjustment

Dr.

Cr.

Dr.

Cr.

Cash

$10900

$10900

Accounts Receivable

8800

9400

Supplies

2500

500

Prepaid Insurance

4000

2500

Equipment

16000

16000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

$3600

$4800

Accounts Payable

5800

5800

Salaries and Wages Payable

0

1100

Unearned Rent Revenue

1800

800

Common Stock

10000

10000

Retained Earnings

5500

5500

Dividends

2800

2800

Service Revenue

34000

34600

Rent Revenue

12100

13100

Salaries and Wages Expense

17000

18100

Supplies Expense

0

2000

Rent Expense

10800

10800

Insurance Expense

0

1500

Depreciation Expense

0

1200

$72800

$72800

$75700

$75700

Instructions

Prepare the adjusting entries that were made.

the following selected data are taken from the comparative financial statements of s 533478

The following selected data are taken from the comparative financial statements of Superior Curling Club. The club prepares its financial statements using the accrual basis of accounting.

September 30

2012

2011

Accounts receivable for member dues

$ 15,000

$ 19,000

Unearned sales revenue

20,000

23,000

Service revenue (from member dues)

151,000

$135,000

Dues are billed to members based upon their use of the club”s facilities. Unearned sales revenues arise from the sale of tickets to events, such as the Skins Game.

Instructions

(Hint:You will find it helpful to use T accounts to analyze the following data. You must analyze these data sequentially, as missing information must first be deduced before moving on. Post your journal entries as you progress, rather than waiting until

the end.)

(a) Prepare journal entries for each of the following events that took place during 2012.

1. Dues receivable from members from 2011 were all collected during 2012.

2. Unearned sales revenue at the end of 2011 was all earned during 2012.

3. Additional tickets were sold for $44,000 cash during 2012; a portion of these were used by the purchasers during the year. The entire balance remaining in Unearned Sales Revenue relates to the upcoming Skins Game in 2012.

4. Dues for the 2011–2012 fiscal year were billed to members.

5. Dues receivable for 2012 (i.e., those billed in item (4) above) were partially collected.

(b) Determine the amount of cash received by the Club from the above transactions during the year ended September 30, 2012.

gil vogel started his own consulting firm vogel consulting on june 1 2012 533479

Gil Vogel started his own consulting firm, Vogel Consulting, on June 1, 2012. The trial balance at June 30 is as follows.

VOGEL CONSULTING
Trial Balance
June 30, 2012

Debit

Credit

Cash

6,850

Accounts Receivable

7,000

Prepaid Insurance

2,880

Supplies

2,000

Equipment

15,000

Accounts Payable

$ 4,230

Unearned Service Revenue

5,200

Common Stock

22,000

Service Revenue

8,300

Salaries and Wages Expense

4,000

Rent Expense

2,000

$39,730

$39,730

In addition to those accounts listed on the trial balance, the chart of accounts for Vogel also contains the following accounts: Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment, Utilities Payable, Salaries and Wages Payable, Depreciation Expense, Insurance Expense, Utilities Expense, and Supplies Expense.

Other data:

1. Supplies on hand at June 30 total $720.

2. A utility bill for $180 has not been recorded and will not be paid until next month.

3. The insurance policy is for a year.

4. $4,100 of unearned service revenue has been earned at the end of the month.

5. Salaries of $1,250 are accrued at June 30.

6. The equipment has a 5-year life with no salvage value and is being depreciated at $250 per month for 60 months.

7. Invoices representing $3,900 of services performed during the month have not been recorded as of June 30.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the adjusting entries for the month of June.

(b) Post the adjusting entries to the ledger accounts. Enter the totals from the trial balance as beginning account balances. Use T accounts.

(c) Prepare an adjusted trial balance at June 30, 2012.

the vang hotel opened for business on may 1 2012 here is its trial balance before 533480

The Vang Hotel opened for business on May 1, 2012. Here is its trial balance before adjustment on May 31

VANG HOTEL
Trial Balance
May 31, 2012

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 2,500

Prepaid Insurance

1,800

Supplies

2,600

Land

15,000

Buildings

70,000

Equipment

16,800

Accounts Payable

$ 4,700

Unearned Rent Revenue

3,300

Mortgage Payable

36,000

Common Stock

60,000

Rent Revenue

9,000

Salaries and Wages Expense

3,000

Utilities Expense

800

Advertising Expense

500

$113,000

$113,000

Other data:

1. Insurance expires at the rate of $450 per month.

2. A count of supplies shows $1,050 of unused supplies on May 31.

3. Annual depreciation is $3,600 on the building and $3,000 on equipment.

4. The mortgage interest rate is 6%. (The mortgage was taken out on May 1.)

5. Unearned rent of $2,500 has been earned.

6. Salaries of $900 are accrued and unpaid at May 31.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the adjusting entries on May 31.

(b) Prepare a ledger using T accounts. Enter the trial balance amounts and post the adjusting entries.

(c) Prepare an adjusted trial balance on May 31.

(d) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the month of May and a classified balance sheet at May 31.

(e) Identify which accounts should be closed on May 31.

rolling hills golf inc was organized on july 1 2012 quarterly financial statements a 533481

Rolling Hills Golf Inc. was organized on July 1, 2012. Quarterly financial statements are prepared. The trial balance and adjusted trial balance on September 30 are shown here.

ROLLING HILLS GOLF INC.
Trial Balance
September 30, 2012

Unadjusted

Adjusted

Dr.

Cr.

Dr.

Cr.

Cash

$ 6,700

$ 6,700

Accounts Receivable

400

1,000

Prepaid Rent

1,800

900

Supplies

1,200

180

Equipment

15,000

15,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

$ 350

Notes Payable

$ 5,000

5,000

Accounts Payable

1,070

1,070

Salaries and Wages Payable

600

Interest Payable

50

Unearned Rent Revenue

1,000

800

Common Stock

14,000

14,000

Retained Earnings

0

0

Dividends

600

600

Service Revenue

14,100

14,700

Rent Revenue

700

900

Salaries and Wages Expense

8,800

9,400

Rent Expense

900

1,800

Depreciation Expense

350

Supplies Expense

1,020

Utilities Expense

470

470

Interest Expense

50

$35,870

$35,870

$37,470

$37,470

Instructions

(a) Journalize the adjusting entries that were made.

(b) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the 3 months ending September 30 and a classified balance sheet at September 30.

(c) Identify which accounts should be closed on September 30.

(d) If the note bears interest at 12%, how many months has it been outstanding?

open road travel court was organized on july 1 2011 by tiffany lampkins 533483

Open Road Travel Court was organized on July 1, 2011, by Tiffany Lampkins. Tiffany is a good manager but a poor accountant. From the trial balance prepared by a part-time bookkeeper, Tiffany prepared the following income statement for her fourth quarter, which ended June 30, 2012.

OPEN ROAD TRAVEL COURT
Income Statement
For the Quarter Ended June 30, 2012

Revenues

Rent revenues

$212,000

Operating expenses

Advertising

$ 3,800

Salaries and wages

80,500

Utilities

900

Depreciation

2,700

Maintenance and repairs

4,300

Total operating expenses

92,200

Net income

$119,800

Tiffany suspected that something was wrong with the statement because net income had never exceeded $30,000 in any one quarter. Knowing that you are an experienced accountant, she asks you to review the income statement and other data. You first look at the trial balance. In addition to the account balances reported above in the income statement, the trial balance contains the following additional selected balances at June 30, 2012.

Supplies

$ 8,200

Prepaid Insurance

14,400

Note Payable

14,000

You then make inquiries and discover the following.

1. Travel court rental revenues include advanced rental payments received for summer occupancy, in the amount of $57,000.

2. There were $1,800 of supplies on hand at June 30.

3. Prepaid insurance resulted from the payment of a one-year policy on April 1, 2012.

4. The mail in July 2012 brought the following bills: advertising for the week of June 24, $110; repairs made June 18, $4,450; and utilities for the month of June, $215.

5. There are three employees who receive wages that total $300 per day. At June 30, four days” wages have been incurred but not paid.

6. The note payable is a 6% note dated May 1, 2012, and due on July 31, 2012.

7. Income tax of $13,400 for the quarter is due in July but has not yet been recorded.

Instructions

(a) Prepare any adjusting journal entries required at June 30, 2012.

(b) Prepare a correct income statement for the quarter ended June 30, 2012.

(c) Explain to Tiffany the generally accepted accounting principles that she did not recognize in preparing her income statement and their effect on her results.

on november 1 2012 the following were the account balances of tate equipment repair 533484

On November 1, 2012, the following were the account balances of Tate Equipment Repair.

Debits

Credits

Cash

$ 2,790

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

$ 500

Accounts Receivable

2,910

Accounts Payable

2,300

Supplies

1,120

Unearned Service Revenue

400

Equipment

10,000

Salaries and Wages Payable

620

Common Stock

10,000

Retained Earnings

3,000

$16,820

$16,820

During November, the following summary transactions were completed. Nov. 8 Paid $1,220 for salaries due employees, of which $600 is for November and $620 is for October salaries payable.

10 Received $1,800 cash from customers in payment of account.

12 Received $1,700 cash for services performed in November.

15 Purchased store equipment on account $3,600.

17 Purchased supplies on account $1,300.

20 Paid creditors $2,500 of accounts payable due.

22 Paid November rent $480.

25 Paid salaries $1,000.

27 Performed services on account and billed customers for services provided $900.

29 Received $750 from customers for services to be provided in the future. Adjustment data:

1. Supplies on hand are valued at $1,100.

2. Accrued salaries payable are $480.

3. Depreciation for the month is $250.

4. Unearned service revenue of $500 is earned.

Instructions

(a) Enter the November 1 balances in the ledger accounts. (Use T accounts.)

(b) Journalize the November transactions.

(c) Post to the ledger accounts. Use Service Revenue, Depreciation Expense, Supplies Expense, Salaries and Wages Expense, and Rent Expense.

(d) Prepare a trial balance at November 30.

(e) Journalize and post adjusting entries.

(f ) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

(g) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for November and a classified balance sheet at November 30.

dana la fontsee opened pro window washing inc on july 1 2012 during july the followi 533485

Dana La Fontsee opened Pro Window Washing Inc. on July 1, 2012. During July the following transactions were completed.

July 1 Issued 12,000 shares of common stock for $12,000 cash.

1 Purchased used truck for $8,000, paying $2,000 cash and the balance on account.

3 Purchased cleaning supplies for $900 on account.

5 Paid $1,800 cash on 1-year insurance policy effective July 1.

12 Billed customers $3,700 for cleaning services.

18 Paid $1,000 cash on amount owed on truck and $500 on amount owed on cleaning supplies.

20 Paid $2,000 cash for employee salaries.

21 Collected $1,600 cash from customers billed on July 12.

25 Billed customers $2,500 for cleaning services.

31 Paid $290 for maintenance of the truck during month.

31 Declared and paid $600 cash dividend.

The chart of accounts for Pro Window Washing contains the following accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Prepaid Insurance, Equipment, Accumulated Depreciation— Equipment, Accounts Payable, Salaries and Wages Payable, Common Stock, Retained Earnings, Dividends, Income Summary, Service Revenue, Maintenance and Repairs Expense, Supplies Expense, Depreciation Expense, Insurance Expense, Salaries and Wages Expense.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the July transactions.

(b) Post to the ledger accounts. (Use T accounts.)

(c) Prepare a trial balance at July 31.

(d) Journalize the following adjustments.

(1) Services provided but unbilled and uncollected at July 31 were $1,700.

(2) Depreciation on equipment for the month was $180.

(3) One-twelfth of the insurance expired.

(4) An inventory count shows $320 of cleaning supplies on hand at July 31.

(5) Accrued but unpaid employee salaries were $400.

(e) Post adjusting entries to the T accounts.

(f ) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

(g) Prepare the income statement and a retained earnings statement for July and a classified balance sheet at July 31.

(h) Journalize and post closing entries and complete the closing process.

(i) Prepare a post-closing trial balance at July 31.

pamela quinn started her own consulting firm quinn consulting on may 1 2012 533487

Pamela Quinn started her own consulting firm, Quinn Consulting, on May 1, 2012. The trial balance at May 31 is as shown below.

QUINN CONSULTING
Trial Balance
May 31, 2012

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 7,500

Accounts Receivable

3,000

Prepaid Insurance

3,600

Supplies

2,500

Equipment

12,000

Accounts Payable

$ 3,500

Unearned Service Revenue

4,000

Common Stock

19,100

Service Revenue

7,500

Salaries and Wages Expense

4,000

Rent Expense

1,500

$34,100

$34,100

In addition to those accounts listed on the trial balance, the chart of accounts for Quinn Consulting also contains the following accounts: Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment, Salaries and Wages Payable, Depreciation Expense, Insurance Expense, Utilities Expense, and Supplies Expense.

Other data:

1. $750 of supplies have been used during the month.

2. Utility costs incurred but not paid are $260.

3. The insurance policy is for 2 years.

4. $1,500 of the balance in the Unearned Service Revenue account remains unearned at the end of the month.

5. Assume May 31 is a Thursday and employees are paid on Fridays. Quinn Consulting has two employees that are paid $600 each for a 5-day work week.

6. The equipment has a 5-year life with no salvage value and is being depreciated at $200 per month for 60 months.

7. Invoices representing $1,980 of services performed during the month have not been recorded as of May 31.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the adjusting entries for the month of May.

(b) Post the adjusting entries to the ledger accounts. Enter the totals from the trial balance as beginning account balances. Use T accounts.

(c) Prepare an adjusted trial balance at May 31, 2012.

maquoketa valley resort opened for business on june 1 with eight air conditioned uni 533488

Maquoketa Valley Resort opened for business on June 1 with eight air-conditioned units. Its trial balance before adjustment on August 31 is presented here.

MAQUOKETA VALLEY RESORT
Trial Balance
August 31, 2012

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 24,600

Prepaid Insurance

5,400

Supplies

4,300

Land

40,000

Buildings

132,000

Equipment

36,000

Accounts Payable

$ 6,500

Unearned Rent Revenue

6,800

Mortgage Payable

120,000

Common Stock

100,000

Dividends

5000

Rent Revenue

80000

Salaries and Wages Expense

53,000

Utilities Expense

9,400

Maintenance and Repairs Expense

3,600

$313,300

$313,300

Other data:

1. Insurance expires at the rate of $450 per month.

2. A count of supplies on August 31 shows $700 of supplies on hand.

3. Annual depreciation is $6,600 on buildings and $4,000 on equipment.

4. Unearned rent of $5,000 was earned prior to August 31.

5. Salaries of $600 were unpaid at August 31.

6. Rentals of $1,600 were due from tenants at August 31. (Use Accounts Receivable.)

7. The mortgage interest rate is 9% per year. (The mortgage was taken out August 1.)

Instructions

(a) Journalize the adjusting entries on August 31 for the 3-month period June 1–August 31.

(b) Prepare a ledger using T accounts. Enter the trial balance amounts and post the adjusting entries.

(c) Prepare an adjusted trial balance on August 31.

(d) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the 3 months ended August 31 and a classified balance sheet as of August 31.

(e) Identify which accounts should be closed on August 31.

vedula advertising agency was founded by murali vedula in january 2007 533489

Vedula Advertising Agency was founded by Murali Vedula in January 2007. Presented here are both the adjusted and unadjusted trial balances as of December 31, 2012.

VEDULA ADVERTISING AGENCY
Trial Balance
December 31, 2012

Unadjusted

Adjusted

Dr.

Cr.

Dr.

Cr.

Cash

$ 11,000

$ 11,000

Accounts Receivable

16,000

19,500

Supplies

9,400

6,500

Prepaid Insurance

3,350

1,790

Equipment

60,000

60,000

Accumulated Depreciation—

Equipment

$ 25,000

$ 30,000

Notes Payable

8,000

8,000

Accounts Payable

2,000

2,000

Interest Payable

0

560

Unearned Service Revenue

5,000

3,100

Salaries and Wages Payable

0

820

Common Stock

20,000

20,000

Retained Earnings

5,500

5,500

Dividends

10000

10000

Service Revenue

57600

63000

Salaries and Wages Expense

9000

9,820

Insurance Expense

1,560

Interest Expense

560

Depreciation Expense

5,000

Supplies Expense

2,900

Rent Expense

4350

4,350

$123,100

$123,100

$132,980

$132,980

Instructions

(a) Journalize the annual adjusting entries that were made.

(b) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the year ended December 31, and a classified balance sheet at December 31.

(c) Identify which accounts should be closed on December 31.

(d) If the note has been outstanding 10 months, what is the annual interest rate on that note?

(e) If the company paid $10,500 in salaries in 2012, what was the balance in Salaries and Wages Payable on December 31, 2011?

a review of the ledger of felipe company at december 31 2012 produces the following 533490

A review of the ledger of Felipe Company at December 31, 2012, produces the following data pertaining to the preparation of annual adjusting entries.

1. Salaries and Wages Payable $0: There are eight salaried employees. Salaries are paid every Friday for the current week. Six employees receive a salary of $800 each per week, and two employees earn $600 each per week. Assume December 31 is a Tuesday. Employees do not work weekends. All employees worked the last 2 days of December.

2. Unearned Rent Revenue $300,000: The company began subleasing office space in its new building on November 1. Each tenant is required to make a $5,000 security dep osit that is not refundable until occupancy is terminated. At December 31 the company had the following rental contracts that are paid in full for the entire term of the lease.

Term

Monthly

Number

Date

(in months)

Rent

of Leases

Nov. 1

6

$4,000

5

Dec. 1

6

7,500

4

3. Prepaid Advertising $13,200: This balance consists of payments on two advertising contracts. The contracts provide for monthly advertising in two trade magazines. The terms of the contracts are as follows.

Number of

Magazine

Contract

Date

Amount

Issues

A650

May 1

$6,000

12

B974

Sept. 1

7,200

18

The first advertisement runs in the month in which the contract is signed.

4. Notes Payable $80,000: This balance consists of a note for 1 year at an annual interest rate of 8%, dated April 1, 2012.

Instructions

Prepare the adjusting entries at December 31, 2012. Show all computations.

the fly right travel agency was organized on january 1 2010 by joe kirkpatrick 533491

The Fly Right Travel Agency was organized on January 1, 2010, by Joe Kirkpatrick. Joe is a good manager but a poor accountant. From the trial balance prepared by a parttime bookkeeper, Joe prepared the following income statement for the quarter that ended March 31, 2012.

FLY RIGHT TRAVEL AGENCY
Income Statement
For the Quarter Ended March 31, 2012

Revenues

Service revenue

$50,000

Operating expenses

Advertising

$ 2,600

Depreciation

400

Income tax

1,500

Salaries and wages

11,000

Utilities

400

15,900

Net income

$34,100

Joe knew that something was wrong with the statement because net income had never exceeded $8,000 in any one quarter. Knowing that you are an experienced accountant, he asks you to review the income statement and other data. You first look at the trial balance. In addition to the account balances reported above in the income statement, the trial balance contains the following additional selected balances at March 31, 2012.

Supplies

$ 2,900

Prepaid insurance

3,360

Notes payable

12,000

You then make inquiries and discover the following:

1. Travel service revenue includes advance payments for cruises, $20,000.

2. There were $800 of supplies on hand at March 31.

3. Prepaid insurance resulted from the payment of a one-year policy on January 1, 2012.

4. The mail on April 1, 2012, brought the utility bill for the month of March”s heat, light, and power, $210.

5. There are two employees who receive salaries of $80 each per day. At March 31, four days” salaries have been incurred but not paid.

6. The note payable is a 6-month, 7% note dated January 1, 2012.

Instructions

(a) Prepare any adjusting journal entries required at March 31, 2012.

(b) Prepare a correct income statement for the quarter ended March 31, 2012.

(c) Explain to Joe the generally accepted accounting principles that he did not recognize in preparing his income statement and their effect on his results.

on september 1 2012 the following were the account balances of worthington equipment 533492

On September 1, 2012, the following were the account balances of Worthington Equipment Repair.

Debits

Credits

Cash

$4,880

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

$1,600

Accounts Receivable

3,420

Accounts Payable

3,100

Supplies

800

Unearned Service Revenue

400

Equipment

15,000

Salaries and Wages Payable

700

Common Stock

10,000

Retained Earnings

8,300

$24,100

$24,100

During September, the following summary transactions were completed. Sept. 8 Paid $1,100 for salaries due employees, of which $400 is for September and $700 is for August salaries payable.

10 Received $1,500 cash from customers in payment of account.

12 Received $3,400 cash for services performed in September.

15 Purchased store equipment on account $3,000.

Sept. 17 Purchased supplies on account $2,000.

20 Paid creditors $4,500 of accounts payable due.

22 Paid September rent $520.

25 Paid salaries $1,200.

27 Performed services on account and billed customers for services provided $2,040.

29 Received $650 from customers for services to be provided in the future. Adjustment data:

1. Supplies on hand $1,100.

2. Accrued salaries payable $400.

3. Depreciation $200 per month.

4. Unearned service revenue of $280 earned.

Instructions

(a) Enter the September 1 balances in the ledger T accounts.

(b) Journalize the September transactions.

(c) Post to the ledger T accounts. Use Service Revenue, Depreciation Expense, Supplies Expense, Salaries and Wages Expense, and Rent Expense.

(d) Prepare a trial balance at September 30.

(e) Journalize and post adjusting entries.

(f ) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

(g) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for September and a classified balance sheet at September 30.

the financial statements of tootsie roll are presented in appendix a at the end of t 533494

The financial statements of Tootsie Roll are presented in Appendix A at the end of this book.

Instructions

(a) Using the consolidated income statement and balance sheet, identify items that may result in adjusting entries for deferrals.

(b) Using the consolidated income statement, identify two items that may result in adjusting entries for accruals.

(c) What was the amount of depreciation expense for 2009 and 2008? (You will need to examine the notes to the financial statements or the statement of cash flows.) Where was accumulated depreciation reported?

(d) What was the cash paid for income taxes during 2009, reported at the bottom of the consolidated statement of cash flows? What was income tax expense (provision for income taxes) for 2009?

laser recording systems founded in 1981 produces disks for use in the home market 533497

Laser Recording Systems, founded in 1981, produces disks for use in the home market. The following is an excerpt from Laser Recording Systems” financial statements (all dollars in thousands).

LASER RECORDING SYSTEMS
Management Discussion

Accrued liabilities increased to $1,642 at January 31, from $138 at the end of the previous fiscal year. Compensation and related accruals increased $195 due primarily to increases in accruals for severance, vacation, commissions, and relocation expenses. Accrued professional services increased by $137 primarily as a result of legal expenses related to several outstanding contractual disputes. Other expenses increased $35, of which $18 was for interest payable

Instructions

(a) Can you tell from the discussion whether Laser Recording Systems has prepaid its legal expenses and is now making an adjustment to the asset account Prepaid Legal Expenses, or whether the company is handling the legal expense via an accrued expense adjustment?

(b) Identify each of the adjustments Laser Recording Systems is discussing as one of the four types of possible adjustments discussed in the chapter. How is net income ultimately affected by each of the adjustments?

(c) What journal entry did Laser Recording make to record the accrued interest?

council bluff park was organized on april 1 2011 by lori delzer lori is a good manag 533499

Council Bluff Park was organized on April 1, 2011, by Lori Delzer. Lori is a good manager but a poor accountant. From the trial balance prepared by a part-time bookkeeper, Lori prepared the following income statement for the quarter that ended March 31, 2012.

COUNCIL BLUFF PARK
Income Statement
For the Quarter Ended March 31, 2012

Debit

Credit

Revenues

Rental revenues

$83,000

Operating expenses

Advertising

$ 4,200

Wages

27,600

Utilities

1,500

Depreciation

800

Repairs

2,800

Total operating expenses

36,900

Net income

$46,100

Lori knew that something was wrong with the statement because net income had never exceeded $20,000 in any one quarter. Knowing that you are an experienced accountant, she asks you to review the income statement and other data. You first look at the trial balance. In addition to the account balances reported in the income statement, the ledger contains these selected balances at March 31, 2012.

Supplies $ 4,500

Prepaid Insurance 7,200

Notes Payable 20,000

You then make inquiries and discover the following.

1. Rental revenues include advanced rentals for summer-month occupancy, $21,000.

2. There were $600 of supplies on hand at March 31.

3. Prepaid insurance resulted from the payment of a 1-year policy on January 1, 2012.

4. The mail on April 1, 2012, brought the following bills: advertising for week of March 24, $110; repairs made March 10, $1,040; and utilities $240.

5. There are four employees who receive wages totaling $290 per day. At March 31, 3 days” wages have been incurred but not paid.

6. The note payable is a 3-month, 7% note dated January 1, 2012.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following.

(a) Prepare a correct income statement for the quarter ended March 31, 2012.

(b) Explain to Lori the generally accepted accounting principles that she did not follow in preparing her income statement and their effect on her results.

prism company is a pesticide manufacturer its sales declined greatly this year due t 533501

Prism Company is a pesticide manufacturer. Its sales declined greatly this year due to the passage of legislation outlawing the sale of several of Prism”s chemical pesticides. During the coming year, Prism will have environmentally safe and competitive replacement chemicals to replace these discontinued products. Sales in the next year are expected to greatly exceed those of any prior year. Therefore, the decline in this year”s sales and profits appears to be a one-year aberration. Even so, the company president believes that a large dip in the current year”s profits could cause a significant drop in the market price of Prism”s stock and make it a takeover target. To avoid this possibility, he urges Brad Ellis, controller, in making this period”s year-end adjusting entries to accrue every possible revenue and to defer as many expenses as possible. The president says to Brad, “We need the revenues this year, and next year we can easily absorb expenses deferred from this year. We can”t let our stock price be hammered down!” Brad didn”t get around to recording the adjusting entries until January 17, but she dated the entries December 31 as if they were recorded then. Brad also made every effort to comply with the president”s request.

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) What are the ethical considerations of the president”s request and Brad”s dating the adjusting entries December 31?

(c) Can Brad accrue revenues and defer expenses and still be ethical?

companies prepare balance sheets in order to know their financial position at a spec 533502

Companies prepare balance sheets in order to know their financial position at a specific point in time. This enables them to make a comparison to their position at previous points in time and gives them a basis for planning for the future. In order to evaluate yourfinancial position, you can prepare a personal balance sheet. Assume that you have compiled the following information regarding your finances. (Hint:Some of the items might not be used in your personal balance sheet.)

Amount owed on student loan balance (long-term)

$5,000

Balance in checking account

1,200

Certificate of deposit (6-month)

3,000

Annual earnings from part-time job

11,300

Automobile

7,000

Balance on automobile loan (current portion)

1,500

Balance on automobile loan (long-term portion)

4,000

Home computer

800

Amount owed to you by younger brother

300

Balance in money market account

1,800

Annual tuition

6,400

Video and stereo equipment

1,250

Balance owed on credit card (current portion)

150

Balance owed on credit card (long-term portion)

1,650

Instructions

Prepare a personal balance sheet using the format you have learned for a classified balance sheet

for a company. For the equity account, use M. Y. Own, Capital.

jane parker is going to set up a new business in bruges on 1 january 20×1 she estima 530156

Jane Parker is going to set up a new business in Bruges on 1 January 20X1. She estimates that her first

six months in business will be as follows:

(i) She will put A150,000 into the firm on 1 January 20X1.

(ii) On 1 January 20X1 she will buy machinery A30,000, motor vehicles A24,000 and premises A75,000, paying for them immediately.

(iii) All purchases will be effected on credit. She will buy A30,000 goods on 1 January and she will pay for these in Februar y. Other purchases will be: rest of January A48,000; February, March, April, May and June A60,000 each month. Other than the A30,000 worth bought in Januar y, all other purchases will be paid for two months after purchase, i.e. A48,000 in March.

(iv) Sales (all on credit) will be A60,000 for January and A75,000 for each month after that. Customers will pay for goods in the third month after purchase, i.e. A60,000 in April.

(v) Inventor y on 30 June 20X1 will be A30,000.

(vi) Wages and salaries will be A2,250 per month and will be paid on the last day of each month.

(vii) General expenses will be A750 per month, payable in the month following that in which they are incurred.

(viii) She will introduce new capital of A75,000 on 1 June 20X1. This will be paid into the business bank account immediately.

(ix) Insurance covering the 12 months of 20X1 of A26,400 will be paid for by cheque on 30 June 20X1.

Accounting and reporting on an accrual accounting basis • 35

(x) Local taxes will be paid as follows: for the three months to 31 March 20X1 by cheque on 28 Februar y 20X2, delay due to an oversight by Parker; for the 12 months ended 31 March 20X2 by cheque on 31 July 20X1. Local taxes are A8,000 per annum.

(xi) She will make drawings of A1,500 per month by cheque.

(xii) All receipts and payments are by cheque.

(xiii) Depreciate motor vehicles by 20% per annum and machinery by 10% per annum, using the

straight-line depreciation method.

(xiv) She has been informed by her bank manager that he is prepared to offer an overdraft facility of

A30,000 for the first year.

Required:

(a) Draft a cash budget (for the firm) month by month for the period January to June, showing clearly the amount of bank balance at the end of each month.

(b) Draft the projected statement of comprehensive income for the first six months” trading, and a statement of financial position as at 30 June 20X1.

(c) Advise Jane on the alternative courses of action that could be taken to cover any cash deficiency that exceeds the agreed overdraft limit.

in april 2000 the g4 1 group acknowledged that market exit value is generally regard 530169

In April 2000 the G4 + 1 Group acknowledged that market exit value is generally regarded as the basis for fair value measurement of financial instruments and was discussing the use of the deprival value model for the measurement of non-financial assets or liabilities, especially in cases in which the item is highly specialised and not easily transferable in the market in its current condition. The deprival value model would require that an asset or liability be measured at its replacement cost, net realisable value, or value in use, depending on the par ticular circumstances.

(a) Discuss reasons why financial and non-financial assets should be measured using different bases.

(b) Explain what is meant by ‘depending on the par ticular circumstances”.

the common stock of warner inc is currently selling at 125 per share 530634

The common stock of Warner Inc. is currently selling at $125per share. The directors wish to reduce the share price and increase share volume prior to a new issue. The per share par value is $8; book value is $71per share.6.09million shares are issued and outstanding.

Prepare the necessary journal entries assuming the following.
(If no entry is required, select “No Entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts.
Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

Document Preview:

The common stock of Warner Inc. is currently selling at $125 per share. The directors wish to reduce the share price and increase share volume prior to a new issue. The per share par value is $8; book value is $71 per share. 6.09 million shares are issued and outstanding.??Prepare the necessary journal entries assuming the following. (If no entry is required, select “No Entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.) (a)??The board votes a 2-for-1 stock split.??(b)??The board votes a 100% stock dividend.?? No.?Account Titles and Explanation?Debit?Credit??(a)??????????(b)???????????(To record the declaration.)???????????????(To record the distribution.)???? 2) On January 5, 2012, Phelps Corporation received a charter granting the right to issue 5,500 shares of $102 par value, 7% cumulative and nonparticipating preferred stock, and 54,500 shares of $11 par value common stock. It then completed these transactions. Jan. 11??Issued 21,960 shares of common stock at $17 per share.??Feb. 1??Issued to Sanchez Corp. 5,000 shares of preferred stock for the following assets: equipment with a fair value of $55,940; a factory building with a fair value of $173,800; and land with an appraised value of $333,300.??July 29??Purchased 1,980 shares of common stock at $20 per share. (Use cost method.)??Aug. 10??Sold the 1,980 treasury shares at $15 per share.??Dec. 31??Declared a $0.40 per share cash dividend on the common stock and declared the preferred dividend.??Dec. 31??Closed the Income Summary account. There was a $177,450 net income.???(a) Record the journal entries for the transactions listed above. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125. If no entry is required, select “No Entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually. Record entries in the order…

Attachments:

intermediate accounting 530718

On June 30, 2013, Georgia-Atlantic, Inc., leased a warehouse facility from IC Leasing Corporation. The lease agreement calls for Georgia-Atlantic to make semiannual lease payments of $562,907 over a three-year lease term, payable each June 30 and December 31, with the first payment at June 30, 2013. Georgia-Atlantic’s incremental borrowing rate is 10%, the same rate IC uses to calculate lease payment amounts. Depreciation is recorded on a straight-line basis at the end of each fiscal year. The fair value of the warehouse is $3 million.

Required:

1. Determine the present value of the lease payments at June 30, 2013 (to the nearest $000) that Georgia-Atlantic uses to record the leased asset and lease liability.

2. What pretax amounts related to the lease would Georgia-Atlantic report in its balance sheet at December 31, 2013?

3. What pretax amounts related to the lease would Georgia-Atlantic report in its income statement for the year ended December 31, 2013?

adria lopez created success systems on october 1 2013 the company has been successfu 531486

Adria Lopez created Success Systems on October 1, 2013. The company has been successful, and its list of customers has grown. To accommodate the growth, the accounting system is modified to set up separate accounts for each customer. The following chart of accounts includes the account number used for each account and any balance as of December 31, 2013. Adria Lopez decided to add a fourth digit with a decimal point to the 106 account number that had been used for the single Accounts Receivable account. This change allows the company to continue using the existing chart of accounts.

No. Account Title Debit Credit
101 Cash $ 48,382
106.1 Alex’s Engineering Co. 0
106.2 Wildcat Services 0
106.3 Easy Leasing 0
106.4 IFM Co. 3,100
106.5 Liu Corp. 0
106.6 Gomez Co. 2,758
106.7 Delta Co. 0
106.8 KC, Inc. 0
106.9 Dream, Inc. 0
119 Merchandise inventory 0
126 Computer supplies 650
128 Prepaid insurance 1,854
131 Prepaid rent 845
163 Office equipment 8,040
164 Accumulated depreciation—Office equipment $ 230
167 Computer equipment 20,400
168 Accumulated depreciation—Computer equipment 1,130
201 Accounts payable 1,280
210 Wages payable $ 900
236 Unearned computer services revenue 1,320
307 Common stock 64,000
318 Retained earnings 17,169
319 Dividends $ 0
403 Computer services revenue 0
413 Sales 0
414 Sales returns and allowances 0
415 Sales discounts 0
502 Cost of goods sold 0
612 Depreciation expense—Office equipment 0
613 Depreciation expense—Computer equipment 0
623 Wages expense 0
637 Insurance expense 0
640 Rent expense 0
652 Computer supplies expense 0
655 Advertising expense 0
676 Mileage expense 0
677 Miscellaneous expenses 0
684 Repairs expense—Computer 0

In response to requests from customers, A. Lopez will begin selling computer software. The company will extend credit terms of 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, to all customers who purchase this merchandise. However, no cash discount is available on consulting fees. Additional accounts (Nos. 119, 413, 414, 415, and 502) are added to its general ledger to accommodate the company’s new merchandising activities. Also, Success Systems does not use reversing entries and, therefore, all revenue and expense accounts have zero beginning balances as of January 1, 2014. Its transactions for January through March follow:

Jan. 4

The company paid cash to Lyn Addie for five days’ work at the rate of $225 per day. Four of the five days relate to wages payable that were accrued in the prior year.

5 Adria Lopez invested an additional $23,600 cash in the company in exchange for more common stock.
7

The company purchased $6,700 of merchandise from Kansas Corp. with terms of 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, invoice dated January 7.

9 The company received $2,758 cash from Gomez Co. as full payment on its account.
11

The company completed a five-day project for Alex’s Engineering Co. and billed it $5,430, which is the total price of $6,750 less the advance payment of $1,320.

13

The company sold merchandise with a retail value of $4,500 and a cost of $3,500 to Liu Corp., invoice dated January 13.

15

The company paid $650 cash for freight charges on the merchandise purchased on January 7.

16 The company received $4,080 cash from Delta Co. for computer services provided.
17

The company paid Kansas Corp. for the invoice dated January 7, net of the discount.

20

Liu Corp. returned $700 of defective merchandise from its invoice dated January 13. The returned merchandise, which had a $280 cost, is discarded. (The policy of Success Systems is to leave the cost of defective products in cost of goods sold.)

22

The company received the balance due from Liu Corp., net of both the discount and the credit for the returned merchandise.

24

The company returned defective merchandise to Kansas Corp. and accepted a credit against future purchases. The defective merchandise invoice cost, net of the discount, was $496.

26

The company purchased $9,600 of merchandise from Kansas Corp. with terms of 1/10, n/30, FOB destination, invoice dated January 26.

26

The company sold merchandise with a $4,510 cost for $5,850 on credit to KC, Inc., invoice dated January 26.

29

The company received a $496 credit memorandum from Kansas Corp. concerning the merchandise returned on January 24.

31 The company paid cash to Lyn Addie for 10 days’ work at $225 per day.
Feb. 1

The company paid $2,535 cash to Hillside Mall for another three months’ rent in advance.

3

The company paid Kansas Corp. for the balance due, net of the cash discount, less the $496 amount in the credit memorandum.

5

The company paid $440 cash to the local newspaper for an advertising insert in today’s paper.

11 The company received the balance due from Alex’s Engineering Co. for fees billed on January 11.
15 The company paid $4,710 cash for dividends.
23

The company sold merchandise with a $2,500 cost for $3,370 on credit to Delta Co., invoice dated February 23.

26 The company paid cash to Lyn Addie for eight days’ work at $225 per day.
27

The company reimbursed Adria Lopez for business automobile mileage (1,100 miles at $0.22 per mile).

Mar. 8

The company purchased $2,900 of computer supplies from Harris Office Products on credit, invoice dated March 8.

9

The company received the balance due from Delta Co. for merchandise sold on February 23.

11 The company paid $860 cash for minor repairs to the company’s computer.
16 The company received $5,440 cash from Dream, Inc., for computing services provided.
19

The company paid the full amount due to Harris Office Products, consisting of amounts created on December 15 (of $1,280) and March 8.

24 The company billed Easy Leasing for $9,127 of computing services provided.
25

The company sold merchandise with a $2,072 cost for $2,840 on credit to Wildcat Services, invoice dated March 25.

30

The company sold merchandise with a $1,098 cost for $2,320 on credit to IFM Company, invoice dated March 30.

31

The company reimbursed Adria Lopez for business automobile mileage (500 miles at $0.22 per mile).

The following additional facts are available for preparing adjustments on March 31 prior to financial statement preparation:

a. The March 31 amount of computer supplies still available totals $2,045.
b. Three more months have expired since the company purchased its annual insurance policy at a $2,472 cost for 12 months of coverage.
c. Lyn Addie has not been paid for seven days of work at the rate of $225 per day.
d. Three months have passed since any prepaid rent has been transferred to expense. The monthly rent expense is $845.
e. Depreciation on the computer equipment for January 1 through March 31 is $1,130.
f. Depreciation on the office equipment for January 1 through March 31 is $230.
g. The March 31 amount of merchandise inventory still available totals $664.

accounting system uses special journals 531488

Adria Lopez created Success Systems on October 1, 2013. The company has been successful, and its list of customers has grown. To accommodate the growth, the accounting system is modified to set up separate accounts for each customer. The following chart of accounts includes the account number used for each account and any balance as of December 31, 2013. Adria Lopez decided to add a fourth digit with a decimal point to the 106 account number that had been used for the single Accounts Receivable account. This change allows the company to continue using the existing chart of accounts.

No. Account Title Debit Credit
101 Cash $ 48,502
106.1 Alex’s Engineering Co. 0
106.2 Wildcat Services 0
106.3 Easy Leasing 0
106.4 IFM Co. 3,080
106.5 Liu Corp. 0
106.6 Gomez Co. 2,748
106.7 Delta Co. 0
106.8 KC, Inc. 0
106.9 Dream, Inc. 0
119 Merchandise inventory 0
126 Computer supplies 620
128 Prepaid insurance 1,935
131 Prepaid rent 915
163 Office equipment 8,090
164 Accumulated depreciation—Office equipment $ 280
167 Computer equipment 20,100
168 Accumulated depreciation—Computer equipment 1,220
201 Accounts payable 1,210
210 Wages payable $ 700
236 Unearned computer services revenue 1,380
307 Common stock 68,000
318 Retained earnings 13,200
319 Dividends $ 0
403 Computer services revenue 0
413 Sales 0
414 Sales returns and allowances 0
415 Sales discounts 0
502 Cost of goods sold 0
612 Depreciation expense—Office equipment 0
613 Depreciation expense—Computer equipment 0
623 Wages expense 0
637 Insurance expense 0
640 Rent expense 0
652 Computer supplies expense 0
655 Advertising expense 0
676 Mileage expense 0
677 Miscellaneous expenses 0
684 Repairs expense—Computer 0

In response to requests from customers, A. Lopez will begin selling computer software. The company will extend credit terms of 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, to all customers who purchase this merchandise. However, no cash discount is available on consulting fees. Additional accounts (Nos. 119, 413, 414, 415, and 502) are added to its general ledger to accommodate the company’s new merchandising activities. Also, Success Systems does not use reversing entries and, therefore, all revenue and expense accounts have zero beginning balances as of January 1, 2014. Its transactions for January through March follow:

Jan. 4

The company paid cash to Lyn Addie for five days’ work at the rate of $175 per day. Four of the five days relate to wages payable that were accrued in the prior year.

5 Adria Lopez invested an additional $23,100 cash in the company in exchange for more common stock.
7

The company purchased $7,200 of merchandise from Kansas Corp. with terms of 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, invoice dated January 7.

9 The company received $2,748 cash from Gomez Co. as full payment on its account.
11

The company completed a five-day project for Alex’s Engineering Co. and billed it $5,470, which is the total price of $6,850 less the advance payment of $1,380.

13

The company sold merchandise with a retail value of $4,000 and a cost of $3,480 to Liu Corp., invoice dated January 13.

15

The company paid $640 cash for freight charges on the merchandise purchased on January 7.

16 The company received $4,060 cash from Delta Co. for computer services provided.
17

The company paid Kansas Corp. for the invoice dated January 7, net of the discount.

20

Liu Corp. returned $700 of defective merchandise from its invoice dated January 13. The returned merchandise, which had a $270 cost, is discarded. (The policy of Success Systems is to leave the cost of defective products in cost of goods sold.)

22

The company received the balance due from Liu Corp., net of both the discount and the credit for the returned merchandise.

24

The company returned defective merchandise to Kansas Corp. and accepted a credit against future purchases. The defective merchandise invoice cost, net of the discount, was $486.

26

The company purchased $9,900 of merchandise from Kansas Corp. with terms of 1/10, n/30, FOB destination, invoice dated January 26.

26

The company sold merchandise with a $4,550 cost for $5,900 on credit to KC, Inc., invoice dated January 26.

29

The company received a $486 credit memorandum from Kansas Corp. concerning the merchandise returned on January 24.

31 The company paid cash to Lyn Addie for 10 days’ work at $175 per day.
Feb. 1

The company paid $2,745 cash to Hillside Mall for another three months’ rent in advance.

3

The company paid Kansas Corp. for the balance due, net of the cash discount, less the $486 amount in the credit memorandum.

5

The company paid $580 cash to the local newspaper for an advertising insert in today’s paper.

11 The company received the balance due from Alex’s Engineering Co. for fees billed on January 11.
15 The company paid $4,630 cash for dividends.
23

The company sold merchandise with a $2,480 cost for $3,340 on credit to Delta Co., invoice dated February 23.

26 The company paid cash to Lyn Addie for eight days’ work at $175 per day.
27

The company reimbursed Adria Lopez for business automobile mileage (800 miles at $0.21 per mile).

Mar. 8

The company purchased $2,880 of computer supplies from Harris Office Products on credit, invoice dated March 8.

9

The company received the balance due from Delta Co. for merchandise sold on February 23.

11 The company paid $910 cash for minor repairs to the company’s computer.
16 The company received $5,370 cash from Dream, Inc., for computing services provided.
19

The company paid the full amount due to Harris Office Products, consisting of amounts created on December 15 (of $1,210) and March 8.

24 The company billed Easy Leasing for $9,227 of computing services provided.
25

The company sold merchandise with a $2,102 cost for $2,830 on credit to Wildcat Services, invoice dated March 25.

30

The company sold merchandise with a $1,158 cost for $2,400 on credit to IFM Company, invoice dated March 30.

31

The company reimbursed Adria Lopez for business automobile mileage (300 miles at $0.21 per mile).

The following additional facts are available for preparing adjustments on March 31 prior to financial statement preparation:

a. The March 31 amount of computer supplies still available totals $2,015.
b. Three more months have expired since the company purchased its annual insurance policy at a $2,580 cost for 12 months of coverage.
c. Lyn Addie has not been paid for seven days of work at the rate of $175 per day.
d. Three months have passed since any prepaid rent has been transferred to expense. The monthly rent expense is $915.
e. Depreciation on the computer equipment for January 1 through March 31 is $1,220.
f. Depreciation on the office equipment for January 1 through March 31 is $280.
g. The March 31 amount of merchandise inventory still available totals $624.

accounting for formation splitting of income and liquidation 531609

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

20000 10000 5000 3000 50000 30000 10000 15000 25000 28000 7000 1 2 3 50000 4 127000 20000 6000 65000 40000 36000 5 6 Conway Asset Book value Market value Lawrence Book Value Cash Accounts receivable Note payable Inventory Equipmnet Accumulated Depreciation Accounts Payable Equipment Capital, Lawrence Conway Korman Net Income Capital, Conway Note Payable Capital,Korman The equipment is sold for $8,000 Debit Credit Requirements: Journalize the formation of the partnership. Accounts Journal Journalize Korman’s admission to the partnership. Half way through the first year of operations Conway and Lawrence admit Korman to the partnership. Korman buys a 1/2 share for $37,000 in cash. The net income for the first year of oprations was $50,000. After giving Conway a salary of $20,000, the rest of the net income is split evenly among the partners. Journalize the closing of the income summary accounts to the capital accounts. Prepare an income distribution worksheet. Income Distribution Complete the liquidating worksheet. Journalize each step of the closing. After 5 years of operation Conway, Korma, and Lawrence decide to dissolve their partnership. The following are the account balances before liquidation begins: Liquidation Conway and Lawrence form a partnership by combining the assets and liabilities of their respective sole proprietorships. The following are the assets and liabilities of each partner and their market values. Module 9 Assignment: ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

exercise 1 8 an analysis of the transactions made by mark kotsay amp co a certified 531619

Exercise 1-8

An analysis of the transactions made by Mark Kotsay & Co., a certified public accounting firm, for the month of August is shown below. The expenses were $651for rent, $4,100for salaries and wages, and $364for utilities.

Cash + Accounts
Receivable
+ Supplies + Equipment = Accounts
Payable
+ Owner’s
Capital
Owner’s
Drawings
+ Revenues Expenses
1. $14,683 $14,683
2. –3,337 $5,947 $2,610
3. –652 $652
4. 5,608 $3,295 $8,903
5. –1,625 –1,625
6. –2,728 –$2,728
7. –651 –$651
8. 436 –$436
9. –4,100 –4,100
10. 364 –364

(b) and (c)
Your answer is incorrect. Try again.

(1) Determine how much owner’s equity increased for the month.

Increase in owner’s equity $

(2) Compute the amount of net income for the month.

Net income $

my assignment 531621

ACC 590 SPRING 2014 SPECIAL TOPICS IN ACCOUNTING – INTERNAL AUDITING Case 2 Urton Anderson This case is to be complete individually and turned in during class on March 13. The case need not be typed as long as your handwriting is legible. Attached is a brief description of the internal audit function and the risk assessment methodology used by the internal audit function of a State Department of Highway and Public Transportation. G1 through G17 presents their definition of the audit universe. C1 through C9 presents the documentation of their risk assessment procedures.

Document Preview:

ACC 590 SPRING 2014 SPECIAL TOPICS IN ACCOUNTING – INTERNAL AUDITING Case 2 Urton Anderson This case is to be complete individually and turned in during class on March 13. The case need not be typed as long as your handwriting is legible. Attached is a brief description of the internal audit function and the risk assessment methodology used by the internal audit function of a State Department of Highway and Public Transportation. G1 through G17 presents their definition of the audit universe. C1 through C9 presents the documentation of their risk assessment procedures. You should review the attached documents and then answer the following questions. 1. How is the audit universe defined in the Department of Highway and Public Transportation model? What constitutes an auditable unit? Do they partition the organization into a single universe or multiple universes? What other approach might they take to defining the audit universe into auditable units? 2. Briefly describe the risk methodology? Do all risk factors have equal weight? What does this imply? 3. Prepare a risk assessment (i.e., calculate the risk score) for your project applying the State Department of Highway and Public Transportation methodology and the Virginia methodology (attached after the Dept. of Transportation’s). If you do not have the information necessary for some of the factors, make you best assessment based on what you do know (do not bother the client for this information unless you will need it for your other work). You can share factual information with others in your group, but each person should make their own assessment on each factor. For the projects etc. treat your project as an auditable unit within the agency or organization (UK, ViaMedia, Bluegrass Airport, etc.). For those of you doing an advisory rather than an assurance project, for this case threat it as if you were going to audit the area. If in doubt ask…

Attachments:

adria lopez created success systems on october 1 2013 the company has been successfu 531637

Adria Lopez created Success Systems on October 1, 2013. The company has been successful, and its list of customers has grown. To accommodate the growth, the accounting system is modified to set up separate accounts for each customer. The following chart of accounts includes the account number used for each account and any balance as of December 31, 2013. Adria Lopez decided to add a fourth digit with a decimal point to the 106 account number that had been used for the single Accounts Receivable account. This change allows the company to continue using the existing chart of accounts.

No. Account Title Debit Credit
101 Cash $ 48,382
106.1 Alex’s Engineering Co. 0
106.2 Wildcat Services 0
106.3 Easy Leasing 0
106.4 IFM Co. 3,100
106.5 Liu Corp. 0
106.6 Gomez Co. 2,758
106.7 Delta Co. 0
106.8 KC, Inc. 0
106.9 Dream, Inc. 0
119 Merchandise inventory 0
126 Computer supplies 650
128 Prepaid insurance 1,854
131 Prepaid rent 845
163 Office equipment 8,040
164 Accumulated depreciation—Office equipment $ 230
167 Computer equipment 20,400
168 Accumulated depreciation—Computer equipment 1,130
201 Accounts payable 1,280
210 Wages payable $ 900
236 Unearned computer services revenue 1,320
307 Common stock 64,000
318 Retained earnings 17,169
319 Dividends $ 0
403 Computer services revenue 0
413 Sales 0
414 Sales returns and allowances 0
415 Sales discounts 0
502 Cost of goods sold 0
612 Depreciation expense—Office equipment 0
613 Depreciation expense—Computer equipment 0
623 Wages expense 0
637 Insurance expense 0
640 Rent expense 0
652 Computer supplies expense 0
655 Advertising expense 0
676 Mileage expense 0
677 Miscellaneous expenses 0
684 Repairs expense—Computer 0

In response to requests from customers, A. Lopez will begin selling computer software. The company will extend credit terms of 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, to all customers who purchase this merchandise. However, no cash discount is available on consulting fees. Additional accounts (Nos. 119, 413, 414, 415, and 502) are added to its general ledger to accommodate the company’s new merchandising activities. Also, Success Systems does not use reversing entries and, therefore, all revenue and expense accounts have zero beginning balances as of January 1, 2014. Its transactions for January through March follow:

Jan. 4

The company paid cash to Lyn Addie for five days’ work at the rate of $225 per day. Four of the five days relate to wages payable that were accrued in the prior year.

5 Adria Lopez invested an additional $23,600 cash in the company in exchange for more common stock.
7

The company purchased $6,700 of merchandise from Kansas Corp. with terms of 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, invoice dated January 7.

9 The company received $2,758 cash from Gomez Co. as full payment on its account.
11

The company completed a five-day project for Alex’s Engineering Co. and billed it $5,430, which is the total price of $6,750 less the advance payment of $1,320.

13

The company sold merchandise with a retail value of $4,500 and a cost of $3,500 to Liu Corp., invoice dated January 13.

15

The company paid $650 cash for freight charges on the merchandise purchased on January 7.

16 The company received $4,080 cash from Delta Co. for computer services provided.
17

The company paid Kansas Corp. for the invoice dated January 7, net of the discount.

20

Liu Corp. returned $700 of defective merchandise from its invoice dated January 13. The returned merchandise, which had a $280 cost, is discarded. (The policy of Success Systems is to leave the cost of defective products in cost of goods sold.)

22

The company received the balance due from Liu Corp., net of both the discount and the credit for the returned merchandise.

24

The company returned defective merchandise to Kansas Corp. and accepted a credit against future purchases. The defective merchandise invoice cost, net of the discount, was $496.

26

The company purchased $9,600 of merchandise from Kansas Corp. with terms of 1/10, n/30, FOB destination, invoice dated January 26.

26

The company sold merchandise with a $4,510 cost for $5,850 on credit to KC, Inc., invoice dated January 26.

29

The company received a $496 credit memorandum from Kansas Corp. concerning the merchandise returned on January 24.

31 The company paid cash to Lyn Addie for 10 days’ work at $225 per day.
Feb. 1

The company paid $2,535 cash to Hillside Mall for another three months’ rent in advance.

3

The company paid Kansas Corp. for the balance due, net of the cash discount, less the $496 amount in the credit memorandum.

5

The company paid $440 cash to the local newspaper for an advertising insert in today’s paper.

11 The company received the balance due from Alex’s Engineering Co. for fees billed on January 11.
15 The company paid $4,710 cash for dividends.
23

The company sold merchandise with a $2,500 cost for $3,370 on credit to Delta Co., invoice dated February 23.

26 The company paid cash to Lyn Addie for eight days’ work at $225 per day.
27

The company reimbursed Adria Lopez for business automobile mileage (1,100 miles at $0.22 per mile).

Mar. 8

The company purchased $2,900 of computer supplies from Harris Office Products on credit, invoice dated March 8.

9

The company received the balance due from Delta Co. for merchandise sold on February 23.

11 The company paid $860 cash for minor repairs to the company’s computer.
16 The company received $5,440 cash from Dream, Inc., for computing services provided.
19

The company paid the full amount due to Harris Office Products, consisting of amounts created on December 15 (of $1,280) and March 8.

24 The company billed Easy Leasing for $9,127 of computing services provided.
25

The company sold merchandise with a $2,072 cost for $2,840 on credit to Wildcat Services, invoice dated March 25.

30

The company sold merchandise with a $1,098 cost for $2,320 on credit to IFM Company, invoice dated March 30.

31

The company reimbursed Adria Lopez for business automobile mileage (500 miles at $0.22 per mile).

The following additional facts are available for preparing adjustments on March 31 prior to financial statement preparation:

a. The March 31 amount of computer supplies still available totals $2,045.
b. Three more months have expired since the company purchased its annual insurance policy at a $2,472 cost for 12 months of coverage.
c. Lyn Addie has not been paid for seven days of work at the rate of $225 per day.
d. Three months have passed since any prepaid rent has been transferred to expense. The monthly rent expense is $845.
e. Depreciation on the computer equipment for January 1 through March 31 is $1,130.
f. Depreciation on the office equipment for January 1 through March 31 is $230.
g. The March 31 amount of merchandise inventory still available totals $664.

kohl industries is considering a new project that would require an investment 531765

Kohl Industries is considering a new project that would require an investment of $2,975,000 in equipment with a useful life of five years. At the end of the five years the project would terminate and the equipment would be sold for its salvage value of $300,000. The company’s discount rate is 14%. The project would provide net operating income each year as follows:

Sales $2,635,000
Variable expenses 1,100 000
Contribution margin 1,535,000
Fixed expenses:
Advertising, salaries, and other fixed costs: $635,000
Depreciation 435,000
Total fixed expenses 1,070,000
Net operating income $ 465,000

Required:

  1. What is the project’s present value?
  2. What is the present value of the equipment’s salvage value at the end of the five years?
  3. What is the project’s payback period?
  4. What is the project’s internal rate of return?
  5. If the company’s discount rate was 16% instead of 14%, what would the impact be on the following:
    1. Project’s net present value?
    2. Project’s payback period?
    3. Project’s internal rate of return?
  6. If the equipment’s salvage value was $500,000 instead of $300,000, what would the impact be on the following:
    1. Project’s net present value?
    2. Project’s payback period?
    3. Project’s internal rate of return?
  7. Assume a post audit showed that all estimates (including total sales) were exactly correct except for the variable expense ratio, which actually turned out to be 45%. What would the impact be on the following:
    1. Project’s net present value?
    2. Project’s payback period?
    3. Project’s internal rate of return?

Attachments:

breakeven analysis 531784

Prepare breakeven analysis and a C-V-P analysis planning future sales using the information below.
Breakeven Analysis and Planning Future Sales
Write Company has a maximum capacity of 200,000 units per year. Variable manufacturing costs are $12 per unit. Fixed overhead is $600,000 per year. Variable selling and administrative costs are $5 per unit, and fixed selling and administrative costs are $300,000 per year. The current sales price is $23 per unit.
Required

  1. What is the breakeven point in (a) sales units and (b) sales dollars?
  2. How many units must Write Company sell to earn a profit of $240,000 per year?
  3. A strike at one of the company’s major suppliers has caused a shortage of materials, so the current year’s production and sales are limited to 160,000 units. To partially offset the effect of the reduced sales on profit, management is planning to reduce fixed costs to $841,000. Variable cost per unit is the same as last year. The company has already sold 30,000 units at the regular selling price of $23 per unit.
    • a. What amount of fixed costs was covered by the total contribution margin of the first 30,000 units sold?
    • b. What contribution margin per unit will be needed on the remaining 130,000 units to cover the remaining fixed costs and to earn a profit of $210,000 this year?

mt horeb company a ski tuning and repair shop opened in november 2011 the company ca 533466

Mt. Horeb Company, a ski tuning and repair shop, opened in November 2011. The company carefully kept track of all its cash receipts and cash payments. The following information is available at the end of the ski season, April 30, 2012.

Cash

Cash

Receipts

Payments

Issue of common shares

$20,000

Payment for repair equipment

$9,200

Rent payments

1,225

Newspaper advertising payment

375

Utility bills payments

970

Part-time helper”s wages payments

2,600

Income tax payment

10,000

Cash receipts from ski and

snowboard repair services

32,150

Subtotals

52,150

24,370

Cash balance

27,780

Totals

$52,150

$52,150

You learn that the repair equipment has an estimated useful life of 4 years. The company rents space at a cost of $175 per month on a one-year lease. The lease contract requires payment of the first and last months” rent in advance, which was done. The part-time helper is owed $420 at April 30, 2012, for unpaid wages. At April 30, 2012, customers owe Mt. Horeb Company $420 for services they have received but have not yet paid for.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an accrual-basis income statement for the 6 months ended April 30, 2012.

(b) Prepare the April 30, 2012, classified balance sheet.

kidvid a maker of electronic games for kids has just completed its first year of ope 533467

KidVid, a maker of electronic games for kids, has just completed its first year of operations. The company”s sales growth was explosive. To encourage large national stores to carry its products, KidVid offered 180-day financing—meaning its largest customers do not pay for nearly 6 months. Because KidVid is a new company, its components suppliers insist on being paid cash on delivery. Also, it had to pay up front for 2 years of insurance. At the end of the year, KidVid owed employees for one full month of salaries, but due to a cash shortfall, it promised to pay them the first week of next year.

Instructions

(a) Explain how cash and accrual accounting would differ for each of the events listed above and describe the proper accrual accounting.

(b) Assume that at the end of the year KidVid reported a favorable net income, yet the company”s management is concerned because the company is very short of cash. Explain how KidVid could have positive net income and yet run out of cash.

the ledger of sagovic rental agency on march 31 of the current year includes the sel 533469

The ledger of Sagovic Rental Agency on March 31 of the current year includes the selected accounts on page 206 before adjusting entries have been prepared.

Debits

Credits

Prepaid Insurance

$3,600

Supplies

3,000

Equipment

25,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

$8,400

Notes Payable

20,000

Unearned Rent Revenue

12,400

Rent Revenue

60,000

Interest Expense

0

Salaries and Wages Expense

14,000

An analysis of the accounts shows the following.

1. The equipment depreciates $280 per month.

2. Half of the unearned rent revenue was earned during the quarter.

3. Interest of $400 is accrued on the notes payable.

4. Supplies on hand total $850.

5. Insurance expires at the rate of $400 per month.

Instructions

Prepare the adjusting entries at March 31, assuming that adjusting entries are made quarterly. Additional accounts are: Depreciation Expense, Insurance Expense, Interest Payable, and Supplies Expense.

the unadjusted trial balance for sierra corp is shown in illustration 4 4 page 168 i 533471

The unadjusted trial balance for Sierra Corp. is shown in Illustration 4-4 (page 168). In lieu of the adjusting entries shown in the text at October 31, assume the following adjustment data.

1. Supplies on hand at October 31 total $500.

2. Expired insurance for the month is $100.

3. Depreciation for the month is $75.

4. As of October 31, $800 of the previously recorded unearned revenue had been earned.

5. Services provided but unbilled (and no receivable has been recorded) at October 31 are $280.

6. Interest expense accrued at October 31 is $70.

7. Accrued salaries at October 31 are $1,400.

Instructions

Prepare the adjusting entries for the items above.

this is a partial adjusted trial balance of fenske company 533473

This is a partial adjusted trial balance of Fenske Company.

FENSKE COMPANY
Adjusted Trial Balance
January 31, 2012

Debit

Credit

Supplies

$700

Prepaid Insurance

1,560

Salaries and Wages Payable

$1,060

Unearned Service Revenue

750

Supplies Expense

950

Insurance Expense

520

Salaries and Wages Expense

1,800

Service Revenue

2,000

Instructions

Answer these questions, assuming the year begins January 1.

(a) If the amount in Supplies Expense is the January 31 adjusting entry, and $300 of supplies was purchased in January, what was the balance in Supplies on January 1?

(b) If the amount in Insurance Expense is the January 31 adjusting entry, and the original insurance premium was for 1 year, what was the total premium and when was the policy purchased?

(c) If $2,500 of salaries was paid in January, what was the balance in Salaries and Wages Payable at December 31, 2011?

(d) If $1,800 was received in January for services performed in January, what was the balance in Unearned Service Revenue at December 31, 2011?

partial adjusted trial balance for fenske company is given in e4 13 533474

This is a partial adjusted trial balance of Barone Company.

 

BARONE COMPANY
Adjusted Trial Balance
January 31, 2014

 
 

Debit

Credit

Supplies

$ 700

 

Prepaid Insurance

1,560

 

Salaries and Wages Payable

 

$1,060

Unearned Service Revenue

 

750

Supplies Expense

950

 

Insurance Expense

520

 

Salaries and Wages Expense

1,800

 

Service Revenue

 

4,000

Instructions

Answer these questions, assuming the year begins January 1.

(a) If the amount in Supplies Expense is the January 31 adjusting entry, and $300 of supplies was purchased in January, what was the balance in Supplies on January 1?

(b) If the amount in Insurance Expense is the January 31 adjusting entry, and the original insurance premium was for 1 year, what was the total premium and when was the policy purchased?

(c) If $2,500 of salaries was paid in January, what was the balance in Salaries and Wages Payable at December 31, 2013?

(d) If $1,800 was received in January for services performed in January, what was the balance in Unearned Service Revenue at December 31, 2013?

selected accounts of sandin company are shown here 533475

Selected accounts of Sandin Company are shown here.

Supplies Expense

Salaries and Wages Payable

31-Jul

750

31-Jul

1000

Salaries and Wages Expense

Accounts Receivable

15-Jul

1,000

31-Jul

500

31

1,000

Service Revenue

Unearned Service Revenue

14-Jul

3,800

31-Jul

900

1-Jul

Bal. 1,500

31

900

20

600

31

500

Supplies

1-Jul

Bal. 1,100

31-Jul

750

10

200

Instructions

After analyzing the accounts, journalize (a) the July transactions and (b) the adjusting entries that were made on July 31. (Hint:July transactions were for cash.)

refer to the course schedule within the syllabus for specific project deliverables a 529431

Project Details

Project Overview

Acorn Corporation was formed and began operations on January 1, 20XX. Use the corporation’s income statement for the year and balance sheet at year-end for this project. During the year, Acorn Corporation made timely estimated tax payments which total $4,000. If there is an overpayment on the tax return, they would like to apply the amount to next year’s estimated tax.

Refer to the Course Schedule within the Syllabus for specific project deliverables and due dates.

Deliverable

Using the information from Acorn Corporation’s income statement and balance sheet, complete Form 1120. In addition, include a 1-page narrative of tax planning options that the Acorn Corporation should consider. Are there areas in which the company could reduce its taxable income? Consider capital and non-capital (ordinary) income as well as deductible tax credits. What possibilities exist? In summary, describe the value of corporate tax accounting procedures and how they can influence tax planning strategies.

Grading Criteria

The Corporate Tax Return Grading Rubric will be used to evaluate your assignment. Refer to the rubric for important assignment details.

The Corporate Tax Return Grading Rubric: [Download .xls]

Resources

  • Course Textbook
  • Library Resources [view now]
  • IRS Website for Downloadable Forms

Project Outcomes

This assignment supports the following outcomes:

  • Explain tax planning options based on a review of a corporate income statement and balance sheet.
  • Determine corporate ordinary income and deductible tax credits.
  • Compute, prepare, and analyze tax reports for corporate shareholders.
  • Describe the value of corporate tax accounting procedures and how they can influence tax planning strategies.

Attachments:

probability proportion to size sampling 529480

You are the auditor for a company and need to review the company’s accounts receivable using probability proportional to size (PPS) sampling. In addition, the board of directors has requested that you and your team present an explanation of your PPS process at its next monthly meeting.

Individual Portion:

Use the following company data and thePPS Sampling Tables 1 & 2:

  • The recorded book value of these accounts is $3,460,000.
  • The company has a tolerable error of $63,460.
  • The anticipated error is $13,000.
  • The risk of incorrect acceptance is 5%.
  • The acceptable number of overstatements of misstatements is 2.

Use probability proportional to size (PPS) sampling to do the following:

A. Determine the reliability factor.

B. Determine the correct expansion factor.

C. Determine the sample size you should use.

D. Determine the sampling interval you should use.

E. The objective of using probability proportional to size sampling (PPS) to test account balances

F. Specifically, how you used PPS to test this company’s account balances

G. The purpose of the sample size and the sampling interval

acc cycle project 2 529545

Designer Fads Company, a local retail clothing store, was established April 1, 2014. The company issued 8,500 shares of $10 par value common stock (30,000 shares authorizes); acquired inventory, supplies, and fixtures; borrowed $ 25,000 on a five year 10 percent note ( interest payable each March 31); secured a one-year property insurance policy; and rented its store space for one year. The accountant for Designer Fads the complied the following trial balance as of April 1, 2014:

Designer Fads Company
Trial Balance
April 1, 2013

Cash—— $ 57,000
Inventory—- 38,000
supplies —— 4,100
Prepaid insurance—3,300
fixtures ——- 73,000
Accounts payable————————-29,850
note payable——————————-35,000
common stock —————————–87,000
contributed capital

in excess of par —————————–39,150
Rent exp—– 15,600
———- ———–
$191,000 $191,000

During the next three months, the accountants assembled the following data concerning Designer Fad’s activities during the quarter.
( Note: Whereas most data represent single transactions, some data have been accumulated).

Apr. 11 Paid salaries to salesclerks, $800.

Apr. 30 sold clothing totaling $29,000 ( $14,000 cash sales plus $15,000 on credit).

May 10 paid $20,000 of accounts payable balance

May 13 paid salaries to salesclerks $1,900

May 20 purchased additional clothing on account from Shirts to Skirts, Inc $31,000 ( debit purchases account.)

May 21 collected $4800 of credit sales from customers.

May 25 returned goods to Shirts to Skirts Inc because of poor quality and received credit for the goods $2000.

May 31 sold merchandise totaling $32,000 ($15,000 cash sales plus $17,000 credit sales).

June 2 paid utility bills for April and May totaling $800

June 3 paid balance due shirts and skirts Inc.

June 10 purchased clothing on account from stitches co. $30,340

June 10 paid freight charges on clothing from stitches co. $200.

June 10 paid salaries to salesclerks 2100.

June 15 paid $8,840 toward amount owed Stitches Co.

June 18 issued 1,500 additional shares of common stock for $17 per share.

June 20 collected $13,300 on account from customers.

june 21 Received a letter from creditor requesting payment for $6,000 balance due since April 1, 2014.

June 28 paid balance due Stitches Co.

June 30 sold merchandise totaling $41,000 ( $25,000 cash sales plus $16,000 credit sales).

June 30 declared a quarterly dividend of $.50 per share on stock outstanding on June 30, 2014.

Additional data gathered that are pertinent to adjusting entries for the quarter are:

a. Accrued salaries for salesclerks $2,400.
b. Depreciation on fixtures $2,800.
c. Uncollected accounts are estimated to be 3 percent of credit sales.

d. $2,300 of the cash sales recorded on June 30 were gift certificated redeemable between July 1 and August 15, 2014.
e. utility bills for services during June $4500
f. Supplies on hand June 30, 2014, $880
g. Income tax rate is 40 percent.

Note: Inventory on hand June 30, 2013, totaled $40,000

Required:On the basis of the data for Designer Fads Company:

a. Prepare entries in general journal form to record the transactions for the quarter ended June 30, 2014.

b. Set up T-accounts, and post the entries to the T-accounts. Indicate that an account has been posted by placing a check mark in the reference, or folio, column of the journal.

c. Prepare a trial balance, and enter it on a 10-column worksheet with columns for a trial balance, adjustments, and adjusted trial balance, an income statement, and a balance sheet.

d. complete the worksheet.

e. Prepare a quarterly income statement, a statement of retained earnings, and a balance sheet.

f. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. In the ledger accounts ( T-accounts), indicate the adjusting entries with an A.

g. Journalize and post the closing entries. In the ledger accounts ( T-accounts), indicate the closing entries with a C.

h. prepare a postclosing trial balance.

    a sew mstaurant purchased the wine dining the first month of up rations 529561

    P3.7 Two successive monthly income stat motor lodge are shown here. Present the income staleme live horizontal analysis format and comment on any significant

    Sales Revenue August Septsinber Room service S 11,300 S 9,000 Dining room 75.900 63,700 Bar-lounge 5.500 4.100 Coffee shop 53.400 48.700 Banquets 66.200 70.500 Total Sales Revenue $212.300 $196,000 Cost of sales 68,100) 1 63.900) Gross Margin $144,200 5132,100 Operating Expenses Wages and salaries S 75,800 S 71.100 Employee benefits 11.400 10.700 Linen and laundry 3.200 3.000 China, glassware. & tableware 5,300 4.900 Miscellaneous operating costs 4,900 4.700 Operating supplies 9.6(X) 8.800 Total Operating Expenses ( 110,200) i 103 1 Departmental Operating Income $ 34,000 $ 28.90°

    evens

    Sales revenue-food Sales revenue-beverages Total Sales Revenue

    Operating Expenses

    Cost of sales-food Cost of sales-beverage

    16.800

    19.900

    revenue departments with direct costs and average monthly : s given in ito following information:

    Departments

    Sales revenue Cost of sales Wages and salaries cost Other direct costs

    Dining

    s204,000 81,600 65.280 18.360

    The restaurant also has the following indi

    administrative and general expenses Marketing expenses Utilities expense Pmperty operation and maintenance Depreciation expense Insurance expense

    Banquets Beverages 110.000 592.000 41.800 29.440 c .200 12.880 800 1.840

    buted costs:

    512,000 10.00() 5,1:XX) 12.120 14.000 4.000

    a. Prepare a consolidated departmental contributory income siai, showing each of the three divisions side by side for comparison 1)• allocate indirect costs. b. Allocate the indirect costs to the divisions and prepare a departmeni.. income statement showing each of the three divisions side by side fo: comparison. Administrative, general. and marketing costs are allocated based on sales revenue. The remaining indirect costs are allocated based on square footage used by each division: Round all percentage calcu-lations to a whole percentage. Dining 2,400 sq. ft. Banquet 3,000. sq. ft. Beverage 600 sq. ft. c. Aft locating the indirect costs. would you consider closing any of Ihe dlInsions? Whitror why nor:

    3 A sew mstaurant purchased the wine dining the first month of up:rations:

    .NLarch 2: Purchased 12 each 750 ml bottles of M & B wine @ $12.50 each. NLarch 16: Purchased 24 each 750 ml bottles of M & B w ine 50 each.

    Attachments:

    prepare journal entries help please thank you 529577

    The Lahn Company produces and sells a single product. Standards have been established for the product as follows:

    Direct materials: 5 pounds @ $3.50 per pound = $17.50

    Direct labor: 3 hours @ $5.50 per hour = $16.50

    Actual cost and usage figures for the past month follow:

    Units Produced 750

    Direct Materials Used 4,000

    Direct Materials Purchased(4500 lbs) $14,400 lbs

    Direct Labor Cost(2,000 hrs) $11,200

    Prepare journal entries to record:

    A)The purchase of raw materials.

    (Click to select)Materials quantity varianceMaterials price varianceAccounts receivableAccounts payableRaw materials inventoryLabor rate varianceLabor efficiency varianceWork in process
    (Click to select)Materials price varianceLabor efficiency varianceLabor rate varianceAccounts receivableRaw materials inventoryWork in processAccounts payable
    (Click to select)Raw materials inventoryAccounts payableWork in processAccounts receivableMaterials price varianceLabor efficiency varianceLabor rate variance

    b.

    The usage of raw materials in production.

    (Click to select)Accounts payableLabor efficiency varianceMaterials quantity varianceLabor rate varianceMaterials price varianceAccounts receivableWork in process
    (Click to select)Labor efficiency varianceMaterials price varianceWork in processAccounts receivableAccounts payableLabor rate varianceMaterials quantity variance
    (Click to select)Accounts receivableAccounts payableMaterials price varianceLabor rate varianceWork in processMaterials quantity varianceRaw materials inventoryLabor efficiency variance

    c. The incurrence of direct labor cost.

    (Click to select)Accounts receivableLabor rate varianceLabor efficiency varianceMaterials price varianceWork in processRaw materials inventoryAccounts payable
    (Click to select)Raw materials inventoryLabor rate varianceAccounts payableLabor efficiency varianceWork in processAccounts receivableMaterials price variance
    (Click to select)Materials price varianceLabor rate varianceMaterials quantity varianceAccounts payableAccounts receivableAccrued wages payableLabor efficiency variance
    (Click to select)Materials quantity varianceLabor rate varianceAccrued wages payableAccounts payableMaterials price varianceLabor efficiency varianceAccounts receivable

    acc423 a dubois inc has 600 000 to invest the company is trying to decide between tw 529597

    Answer the following questions related to Dubois Inc.

    (a) Dubois Inc. has $600,000 to invest. The company is trying to decide between two alternative uses of the funds. One alternative provides $80,000 at the end of each year for 12 years, and the other is to receive a single lump-sum payment of $1,900,000 at the end of the 12 years. Which alternative should Dubois select? Assume the interest rate is constant over the entire investment.

    (b) Dubois Inc. has completed the purchase of new Dell computers. The fair value of the equipment is $824,150. The purchase agreement specifies an immediate down payment of $200,000 and semiannual payments of $76,952 beginning at the end of 6 months for 5 years. What is the interest rate, to the nearest percent, used in discounting this purchase transaction?

    (c) Dubois Inc. loans money to John Kruk Corporation in the amount of $800,000. Dubois accepts an 8% note due in 7 years with interest payable semiannually. After 2 years (and receipt of interest for 2 years), Dubois needs money and therefore sells the note to Chicago National Bank, which demands interest on the note of 10% compounded semiannually. What is the amount Dubois will receive on the sale of the note?

    (d) Dubois Inc. wishes to accumulate $1,300,000 by December 31, 2022, to retire bonds outstanding. The company deposits $200,000 on December 31, 2012, which will earn interest at 10% compounded quarterly, to help in the retirement of this debt. In addition, the company wants to know how much should be deposited at the end of each quarter for 10 years to ensure that $1,300,000 is available at the end of 2022. (The quarterly deposits will also earn at a rate of 10%, compounded quarterly.) (Round to even dollars)

    reynolds construction needs a piece of equipment that costs 200 530050

    Reynolds Construction needs a piece of equipment that costs $200. Reynolds can either lease the equipment or borrow $200 from a local bank and buy the equipment. If the equipment is leased, the lease would not have to be capitalized. Reynolds”s balance sheet prior to the acquisition of the equipment is as follows:

    Current assets

    $300

    Debt

    $400

    Net fixed assets

    500

    Equity

    400

    Total assets

    $800

    Total claims

    $800

    a. (1) What is Reynolds”s current debt ratio?

    (2) What would be the company”s debt ratio if it purchased the equipment?

    (3) What would be the debt ratio if the equipment were leased?

    b. Would the company”s financial risk be different under the leasing and purchasing alternatives?

    two companies energen and hastings corporation began operations with identical balan 530052

    Two companies, Energen and Hastings Corporation, began operations with identical balance sheets. A year later, both required additional fixed assets at a cost of $50,000. Energen obtained a 5-year, $50,000 loan at an 8% interest rate from its bank. Hastings,on the other hand, decided to lease the required $50,000 capacity for 5 years, and an 8% return was built into the lease. The balance sheet for each company, before the asset increases, follows:

    Current assets

    $25,000

    Debt

    $50,000

    Fixed assets

    125,000

    Equity

    100,000

    Total assets

    $150,000

    Total claims

    $150,000

    a. Show the balance sheets for both firms after the asset increases, and calculate each firm”s new debt ratio. (Assume that the lease is not capitalized.)

    b. Show how Hastings”s balance sheet would look immediately after the financing ifit capitalized the lease.

    big sky mining company must install 1 5 million of new machinery in its nevada mine 530053

    Big Sky Mining Company must install $1.5 million of new machinery in its Nevada mine. It can obtain a bank loan for 100% of the purchase price, or it can lease the machinery. Assume that the following facts apply.

    (1) The machinery falls into the MACRS 3-year class.

    (2) Under either the lease or the purchase, Big Sky must pay for insurance, propertytaxes, and maintenance.

    (3) The firm”s tax rate is 40%.

    (4) The loan would have an interest rate of 15%.

    (5) The lease terms call for $400,000 payments at the end of each of the next 4 years.

    (6) Big Sky Mining has no use for the machine beyond the expiration of the lease, and the machine has an estimated residual value of $250,000 at the end of the 4th year. What is the NAL of the lease?

    sadik industries must install 1 million of new machinery in its texas plant 530054

    Sadik Industries must install $1 million of new machinery in its Texas plant. It can obtain a bank loan for 100% of the required amount. Alternatively, a Texas investment banking firm that represents a group of investors believes it can arrange for a lease financing plan. Assume that the following facts apply.

    (1) The equipment falls in the MACRS 3-year class.

    (2) Estimated maintenance expenses are $50,000 per year.

    (3) The firm”s tax rate is 34%.

    (4) If the money is borrowed, the bank loan will be at a rate of 14%, amortized in three equal installments at the end of each year.

    (5) The tentative lease terms call for payments of $320,000 at the end of each year for 3 years. The lease is a guideline lease.

    (6) Under the proposed lease terms, the lessee must pay for insurance, property taxes, and maintenance.

    (7) Sadik must use the equipment if it is to continue in business, so it will almost certainly want to acquire the property at the end of the lease. If it does, then under the lease terms it can purchase the machinery at its fair market value at that time. The best estimate of this market value is $200,000, but it could be much higher or lower under certain circumstances. To assist management in making the proper lease-versus-buy decision, you are asked to answer the following questions.

    a. Assuming the lease can be arranged, should the firm lease or borrow and buy the equipment? Explain. (Hint: In this situation, the firm plans to use the asset beyond the term of the lease. Thus, the residual value becomes a cost to leasing in Year 3. The firm will depreciate the equipment it purchases under the purchase option starting in Year 3, using the MACRS 3-year class schedule. Depreciation will begin in the year in which the equipment is purchased, which is Year 3.)

    b. Consider the $200,000 estimated residual value. Is it appropriate to discount it at the same rate as the other cash flows? Are the other cash flows all equally risky? (Hint: Riskier cash flows are normally discounted at higher rates, but when the cash flows are costs rather than inflows, the normal procedure must be reversed.)

    start with the partial model in the file ch18 p06 build a model xls on the textbook 530055

    Start with the partial model in the file Ch18 P06 Build a Model.xls on the textbook”s Web site. As part of its overall plant modernization and cost reduction program, Western Fabrics”s management has decided to install a new automated weaving loom. In the capital budgeting analysis of this equipment, the IRR of the project was found to be 20% versus the project”s required return of 12%. The loom has an invoice price of $250,000, including delivery and installation charges. The funds needed could be borrowed from the bank through a 4-year amortized loan at a 10% interest rate, with payments to be made at the end of each year. In the event the loom is purchased, the manufacturer will contract to maintain and service it for a fee of $20,000 per year paid at the end of each year. The loom falls in the MACRS 5-year class, and Western”s marginal federal-plus-state tax rate is 40%. Aubey Automation Inc., maker of the loom, has offered to lease the loom to Western for $70,000 upon delivery and installation (at t = 0) plus four additional annual lease payments of $70,000 to be made at the end of Years 1 to 4. (Note that there are five lease payments in total.) The lease agreement includes maintenance and servicing. Actually, the loom has an expected life of 8 years, at which time its expected salvage value is zero; however, after 4 years its market value is expected to equal its book value of $42,500. Western plans to build an entirely new plant in 4 years, so it has no interest in either leasing or owning the proposed loom for more than that period.

    a. Should the loom be leased or purchased?

    b. The salvage value is clearly the most uncertain cash flow in the analysis. What effect would a salvage value risk adjustment have on the analysis? (Assume that the appropriate salvage value pre-tax discount rate is 15%.)

    c. Assuming that the after-tax cost of debt should be used to discount all anticipated cash flows, at what lease payment would the firm be indifferent to either leasing or buying?

    kim hotels is interested in developing a new hotel in seoul the company estimates th 530123

    Kim Hotels is interested in developing a new hotel in Seoul. The company estimates that the hotel would require an initial investment of $20 million. Kim expects the hotel will produce positive cash flows of $3 million a year at the end of each of the next 20 years. The project”s cost of capital is 13%.

    a. What is the project”s net present value?

    b. Kim expects the cash flows to be $3 million a year, but it recognizes that the cash flows could actually be much higher or lower, depending on whether the Korean government imposes a large hotel tax. One year from now, Kim will know whether the tax will be imposed. There is a 50% chance that the tax will be imposed, in which case the yearly cash flows will be only $2.2 million. At the same time, there is a 50% chance that the tax will not be imposed, in which case the yearly cash flows will be $3.8 million. Kim is deciding whether to proceed with the hotel today or to wait a year to find out whether the tax will be imposed. If Kim waits a year, the initial investment will remain at $20 million. Assume that all cash flows are discounted at 13%. Use decision-tree analysis to determine whether Kim should proceed with the project today or wait a year before deciding.

    the karns oil company is deciding whether to drill for oil on a tract of land the co 530124

    The Karns Oil Company is deciding whether to drill for oil on a tract of land the company owns. The company estimates the project would cost $8 million today. Karns estimates that, once drilled, the oil will generate positive net cash flows of $4 million a year at the end of each of the next 4 years. Although the company is fairly confident about its cash flow forecast, in 2 years it will have more information about the local geology and about the price of oil. Karns estimates that if it waits 2 years then the project would cost $9 million. Moreover, if it waits 2 years, then there is a 90% chance that the net cash flows would be $4.2 million a year for 4 years and a 10% chance that they would be $2.2 million a year for 4 years. Assume all cash flows are discounted at 10%.

    a. If the company chooses to drill today, what is the project”s net present value?

    b. Using decision-tree analysis, does it make sense to wait 2 years before deciding whether to drill?

    hart lumber is considering the purchase of a paper company which would require an in 530125

    Hart Lumber is considering the purchase of a paper company, which would require an initial investment of $300 million. Hart estimates that the paper company would provide net cash flows of $40 million at the end of each of the next 20 years. The cost of capital for the paper company is 13%.

    a. Should Hart purchase the paper company?

    b. Hart”s best guess is that cash flows will be $40 million a year, but it realizes that the cash flows are as likely to be $30 million a year as $50 million. One year from now, it will find out whether the cash flows will be $30 million or $50 million. In addition, Hart could sell the paper company at Year 3 for $280 million. Given this additional information, does decision-tree analysis indicate that it makes sense to purchase the paper company? Again, assume that all cash flows are discounted at 13%.

    utah enterprises is considering buying a vacant lot that sells for 1 2 million if th 530126

    Utah Enterprises is considering buying a vacant lot that sells for $1.2 million. If the property is purchased, the company”s plan is to spend another $5 million today (t = 0) to build a hotel on the property. The after-tax cash flows from the hotel will depend critically on whether the state imposes a tourism tax in this year”s legislative session. If the tax is imposed, the hotel is expected to produce after-tax cash inflows of $600,000 at the end of each of the next 15 years, versus $1,200,00 if the tax is not imposed. The project has a 12% cost of capital. Assume at the outset that the company does not have the option to delay the project. Use decision-tree analysis to answer the following questions.

    a. What is the project”s expected NPV if the tax is imposed?

    b. What is the project”s expected NPV if the tax is not imposed?

    c. Given that there is a 50% chance that the tax will be imposed, what is the project”s expected NPV if the company proceeds with it today?

    d. Although the company does not have an option to delay construction, it does have the option to abandon the project 1 year from now if the tax is imposed. If it abandons the project, it would sell the complete property 1 year from now at an expected price of $6 million. Once the project is abandoned, the company would no longer receive any cash inflows from it. If all cash flows are discounted at 12%, would the existence of this abandonment option affect the company”s decision to proceed with the project today?

    e. Assume there is no option to abandon or delay the project but that the company has an option to purchase an adjacent property in 1 year at a price of $1.5 million. If the tourism tax is imposed, then the net present value of developing this property (as of t = 1) is only $300,000 (so it wouldn”t make sense to purchase the property for $1.5 million). However, if the tax is not imposed, then the net present value of the future opportunities from developing the property would be $4 million (as of t = 1). Thus, under this scenario it would make sense to purchase the property for $1.5 million. Given that cash flows are discounted at 12% and that there”s a 50-50 chance the tax will be imposed, how much would the company pay today for the option to purchase this property 1 year from now for $1.5 million?

    fethe s funny hats is considering selling trademarked orange haired curly wigs for u 530127

    Fethe”s Funny Hats is considering selling trademarked, orange-haired curly wigs for University of Tennessee football games. The purchase cost for a 2-year franchise to sell the wigs is $20,000. If demand is good (40% probability), then the net cash flows will be $25,000 per year for 2 years. If demand is bad (60% probability), then the net cash flows will be $5,000 per year for 2 years. Fethe”s cost of capital is 10%.

    a. What is the expected NPV of the project?

    b. If Fethe makes the investment today, then it will have the option to renew the franchise fee for 2 more years at the end of Year 2 for an additional payment of $20,000. In this case, the cash flows that occurred in Years 1 and 2 will be repeated (so if demand was good in Years 1 and 2, it will continue to be good in Years 3 and 4). Write out the decision tree and use decision-tree analysis to calculate the expected NPV of this project, including the option to continue for an additional 2 years. Note: The franchise fee payment at the end of Year 2 is known, so it should be discounted at the risk-free rate, which is 6%.

    start with the partial model in the file ch25 p09 build a model xls on the textbook 530130

    Start with the partial model in the file Ch25 P09 Build a Model.xls on the textbook”s Web site. Bradford Services Inc. (BSI) is considering a project with a cost of $10 million and an expected life of 3 years. There is a 30% probability of good conditions, in which case the project will provide a cash flow of $9 million at the end of each of the next 3 years. There is a 40% probability of medium conditions, in which case the annual cash flows will be $4 million, and there is a 30% probability of bad conditions with a cash flow of -$1 million per year. BSI uses a 12% cost of capital to evaluate projects like this.

    a. Find the project”s expected present value, NPV, and the coefficient of variation of the present value.

    b. Now suppose that BSI can abandon the project at the end of the first year by selling it for $6 million. BSI will still receive the Year-1 cash flows, but will receive no cash flows in subsequent years.

    c. Now assume that the project cannot be shut down. However, expertise gained by taking it on would lead to an opportunity at the end of Year 3 to undertake a venture that would have the same cost as the original project, and the new project”s cash flows would follow whichever branch resulted for the original project. In other words, there would be a second $10 million cost at the end of Year 3 followed by cash flows of either $9 million, $4 million, or -$1 million for the subsequent 3 years. Use decision-tree analysis to estimate the value of the project, including the opportunity to implement the new project at Year 3. Assume that the $10 million cost at Year 3 is known with certainty and should be discounted at the risk-free rate of 6%.

    d. Now suppose the original project (no abandonment option or additional growth option) could be delayed a year. All the cash flows would remain unchanged, but information obtained during that year would tell the company exactly which set of demand conditions existed. Use decision-tree analysis to estimate the value of the project if it is delayed by 1 year. (Hint: Discount the $10 million cost at the risk-free rate of 6% because the cost is known with certainty.)

    e. Go back to part c. Instead of using decision-tree analysis, use the Black-Scholes model to estimate the value of the growth option. The risk-free rate is 6%, and the variance of the project”s rate of return is 22%.

    jane parker is going to set up a new business on 1 januar y 20×1 she estimates that 530153

    Jane Parker is going to set up a new business on 1 Januar y 20X1. She estimates that her first six months in business will be as follows:

    (i) She will put £150,000 into a bank account for the firm on 1 January 20X1.

    (ii) On 1 January 20X1 she will buy machinery £30,000, motor vehicles £24,000 and premises £75,000, paying for them immediately.

    (iii) All purchases will be effected on credit. She will buy £30,000 goods on 1 January and will pay for these in February. Other purchases will be: rest of January £48,000; February, March, April, May and June £60,000 each month. Other than the £30,000 worth bought in January, all other purchases will be paid for two months after purchase.

    (iv) Sales (all on credit) will be £60,000 for January and £75,000 for each month after. customers will pay for the goods in the four the month after purchase, i.e. £60,000 is received in May.

    (v) She will make drawings of £1,200 per month.

    (vi) Wages and salaries will be £2,250 per month and will be paid on the last day of each month.

    (vii) General expenses will be £750 per month, payable in the month following that in which they are incurred.

    (viii) Rates will be paid as follows: for the three months to 31 March 20X1 by cheque on 28 february 20X1; for the 12 months ended 31 March 20X2 by cheque on 31 July 20X1. Rates are £4,800 per annum.

    (ix) She will introduce new capital of £82,500 on 1 April 20X1.

    (x) Insurance covering the 12 months of 20X1 of £2,100 will be paid for by cheque on 30 June 20X1.

    (xi) All receipts and payments will be by cheque.

    (xii) Inventor y on 30 June 20X1 will be £30,000.

    (xiii) The net realizable value of the vehicles is £19,200, machinery £27,000 and premises £75,000.

    Required: Cash flow accounting

    (i) Draft a cash budget (includes bank) month by month for the period January to june, showing clearly the amount of bank balance or overdraft at the end of each month.

    (ii) Draft an operating cash flow statement for the six-month period.

    (iii) Assuming that Jane Parker sought your advice as to whether she should actually set up in business, state what further information you would require.

    mr norman set up a new business on 1 januar y 20×8 he invested 50 000 in the new bus 530154

    Mr Norman set up a new business on 1 Januar y 20X8. He invested £50,000 in the new business on that date. The following information is available.

    1 Gross profit was 20% of sales. Monthly sales were as follows:

    Month

    Sales £

    Month

    Sales £

    Januar y

    15,000

    May

    40,000

    Februar y

    20,000

    June

    45,000

    March

    35,000

    July

    50,000

    April

    40,000

    2 50% of sales were for cash. Credit customers (50% of sales) pay in month following sale.

    3 The supplier allowed one month”s credit.

    4 Monthly payments were made for rent and rates £2,200 and wages £600.

    5 On 1 Januar y 20X8 the following payments were made: £80,000 for a five-year lease of business premises and £3,500 for insurances on the premises for the year. The realizable value of the lease was estimated to be £76,000 on 30 June 20X8 and £70,000 on 31 December 20X8.

    6 Staff sales commission of 2% of sales was paid in the month following the sale.

    Required:

    (a) A purchases budget for each of the first six months.

    (b) A cash flow statement for the first six months.

    (c) A statement of operating cash flows and financial position as at 30 June 20X8.

    (d) Write a brief letter to the bank supporting a request for an overdraft.

    fred and sally own a profitable business that deals in windsur fing equipment 530155

    Fred and Sally own a profitable business that deals in windsur fing equipment. They are the only UK agents to impor t ‘Dr yline” sails from Germany, and in addition to this they sell a variety of boards and miscellaneous equipment that they buy from other dealers in the UK.

    Two years ago they diversified into custom-made boards built to individual customer requirements, each of which was supplied with a ‘Dr yline” sail. In order to build the boards, they have had to take over larger premises, which consist of a shop front with a workshop at the rear, and employ two members of staff to help.

    Demand is seasonal and Fred and Sally find that there is insufficient work during the winter months to pay rent for the increased accommodation and also wages to the extra two members of staff. The four of them could spend October to March in Lanzarote as windsur f instructors and close the UK operation down in this period. If they did, however, they would lose the ‘Dr yline” agency, as Dr yline insists on a retail outlet in the UK for 12 months of the year. Dr yline sails constitute 40% of their turnover and carry a 50% mark-up. Trading has been static and the patter n is expected to continue as follows for 1 April 20X5 to31 March 20X6: Sales of boards and equipment (non-custom-built) with Dr yline agency: 1 April–30 September£120,000; of this 30% was paid by credit card, which involved one month”s delay in receiving cash and 4% deduction at source.Sixty custom-built boards 1 April–30 September £60,000; of this 15% of the sales price was for the sail (a ‘Dr yline” 6 m2 sail costs Fred and Sally £100; the average price for a sail of the same size and quality is £150 (cost to them)).

    Purchasers of custom-built boards take an average of two months to pay and none pays by credit card.

    Sales 1 October–31 March of boards and equipment (non-custom-built) £12,000, 30% by credit card as above.

    Six custom-built boards were sold for a total of £6,000 and customers took an unexplainable average of three months to pay in the winter.

    Purchases were made monthly and paid for two months in arrears.

    The average mark-up on goods for resale excluding ‘Dr yline” sails was 25%. If they lose the agency, they expect that they will continue to sell the same number of sails, but at their average mark-up of 25%. The variable material cost of each custom-made board (excluding the sail) was £500. Other costs were:

    Wages to employees £6,000 p.a. each (gross including insurance).

    Rent for premises £6,000 p.a. (six-monthly renewable lease) payable on the first day of each month.

    Other miscellaneous costs:

    1 April–30 September £3,000

    1 October–31 March £900.

    Bank balance on 1 April was £100.

    Salary earnable over whole period in Lanzarote:

    Fred and Sally £1,500 each _ living accommodation

    Two employees £1,500 each _ living accommodation All costs and income accruing evenly over time.

    Required:

    (i) Prepare a cash budget for 1 April 20X5 to 31 March 20X6 assuming that:

    (a) Fred and Sally close the business in the winter months.

    (b) They stay open all year.

    (ii) What additional information would you require before you advised Fred and Sally of the best

    course of action to take?

    the abc company manufactures widgets it competes and plans to 526282

    The ABC Company manufactures widgets. It competes and plans to grow by selling high-quality widgets at low prices and by delivering them to customers quickly. There are many other companies in the industry producing similar widgets. ABC believes it needs to continuously improve its manufacturing and delivery processes and that having satisfied employees are both critical to its long-term success.

    a) Based on this information, what type of strategy do you believe ABC is pursuing?
    Be sure to back-up your claim with specific evidence.

    b)
    List, describe, and justify eight metrics (2 in each of the Balanced Scorecard perspectives) that you believe ABC should include in its Balanced Scorecard.

    c) ABC calculates the following figures:

    2013 operating income $1,850,000
    2014 operating income $2,013,000
    Growth component $85,000
    Price-recovery component ($72,000)
    Productivity component $150,000

    In addition, the market for widgets did not grow in 2014, input process did not change in 2014, and ABC reduced its selling price in 2014.

    Based on this information, do you believe ABC’s increase in operating income in 2014 is consistent with the strategy you identified in part a?
    Be sure to justify your answer with specific information.

    Question #2

    Consider the following quality cost report:

    Year 1 Year 2 Year 3
    Prevention $1,850 $1750 $1,625
    Appraisal $2,250 $2,300 $2,300
    Internal failure $2,300 $2,500 $2,700
    External failure $2,500 $2,700 $3,000
    Total quality costs $8,900 $9,250 $9,625
    Total revenues $135,000 $145,000 $152,000

    Do you believe this firm’s quality initiatives have been successful?
    Be sure to justify your opinion with specific information from the quality report.

    Attachments:

    presented below is an amortization schedule related to spangler 526387

    Presented below is an amortization schedule related to Spangler Company’s 5-year, $100,000 bond with a 7% interest rate and a 5% yield, purchased on December 31, 2010, for $108,660.

    ?

    The following schedule presents a comparison of the amortized cost and fair value of the bonds at year-end.

    ?

    Instructions

    (a) Prepare the journal entry to record the purchase of these bonds on December 31, 2010, assuming the bonds are classified as held-to-maturity securities.

    (b) Prepare the journal entry(ies) related to the held-to-maturity bonds for 2011.

    (c) Prepare the journal entry(ies) related to the held-to-maturity bonds for 2013.

    (d) Prepare the journal entry(ies) to record the purchase of these bonds, assuming they are classified as available-for-sale.

    (e) Prepare the journal entry(ies) related to the available-for-sale bonds for 2011.

    (f) Prepare the journal entry(ies) related to the available-for-sale bonds for2013.

    harris company produces a single product last year harris manufactured 17 000 units 526395

    When you have completed your exam and reviewed your answers, click Submit Exam. Answers will not be recorded until you

    hit Submit Exam. If you need to exit before completing the exam, click Cancel Exam.

    Questions 1 to 20: Select the best answer to each question. Note that a question and its answers may be split across a page

    break, so be sure that you have seen the entire question and all the answers before choosing an answer.

    1. A cost driver is

    A. the largest single category of cost in a company.

    B. a fixed cost that can’t be avoided.

    C. a factor that causes variations in a cost.

    D. an indirect cost that’s essential to the business.

    2. Use the following information to answer this question.

    Harris Company produces a single product. Last year, Harris manufactured 17,000 units and sold 13,000

    units. Production costs for the year were as follows:

    Document Preview:

    Student ID: 21535917 Exam: 061682RR – COSTS AND DECISION MAKING When you have completed your exam and reviewed your answers, click Submit Exam. Answers will not be recorded until you hit Submit Exam. If you need to exit before completing the exam, click Cancel Exam. Questions 1 to 20: Select the best answer to each question. Note that a question and its answers may be split across a page break, so be sure that you have seen the entire question and all the answers before choosing an answer.   1. A cost driver is A. the largest single category of cost in a company. B. a fixed cost that can’t be avoided. C. a factor that causes variations in a cost. D. an indirect cost that’s essential to the business.   2. Use the following information to answer this question. Harris Company produces a single product. Last year, Harris manufactured 17,000 units and sold 13,000 units. Production costs for the year were as follows: Production Cost Data Direct materials $153,000 Direct labor $110,500 Variable manufacturing overhead $204,000 Fixed manufacturing overhead $255,000 Sales were $780,000 for the year, variable selling and administrative expenses were $88,400, and fixed selling and administrative expenses were $170,000. There was no beginning inventory. Assume that direct labor is a variable cost. Under variable costing, the company’s net operating income for the year would be _______ than under absorption costing. A. $60,000 lower B. $60,000 higher C. $108,000 lower D. $108,000 higher   3. Use the following information to answer this question. Callaham Corporation is a wholesaler that sells a single product. Management has provided the following cost data for two levels of monthly sales volume. The company sells the product for $115.80 per unit.   Sales volume (units)4,000 5,000 Cost of sales $338,000 $422,500 Selling and administrative costs $89,600 $106,000 The best estimate of the total contribution margin when 4,300 units are sold is A. $64,070. B….

    Attachments:

    cole laboratories makes and sells a lawn fertilizer called fastgro t 526402

    Cole Laboratories makes and sells a lawn fertilizer called Fastgro. The company has developed standard costs for one bag of Fastgro as follows: Standard Standard Cost Quantity per bag Direct material 20 pounds $8.00 Direct labor 0.1 hours $1.10 Variable overhead 0.1 hours $0.40 The company had no beginning inventories of any kind on January 1. Variable overhead is applied to production on the basis of standard direct-labor hours. During January, the company recorded the following activity: • Production of Fastgro: 4,000 bags • Direct materials purchased: 85,000 pounds at a cost of $32,300 • Direct-labor worked: 390 hours at a cost of $4,875 • Variable overhead incurred: $1,475 • Inventory of direct materials on January 31: 3,000 pounds 1. The materials quantity variance for January is A. $300 F. B. $800 U. C. $300 U. D. $750 F. 2. There are various budgets within the master budget. One of these budgets is the production budget. Which of the following best describes the production budget? A. It details the required direct-labor hours. B. It summarizes the costs of producing units for the budget period. C. It details the required raw materials purchases. D. It’s calculated based on the sales budget and the desired ending inventory. 3. A company’s average operating assets are $220,000, and its net operating income is $44,000. The company invested in a new project, increasing average assets to $250,000 and increasing its net operating income to $49,550. What is the project’s residual income if the required rate of return is 20%? A. $450 B. ($450) C. $600 D. ($600) 4. Coles Company, Inc. makes and sells a single product, Product R. Three yards of Material K are needed to make one unit of Product R. Budgeted production of Product R for the next five months is as follows: The company wants to maintain monthly ending inventories of Material K equal to 20% of the following month’s production needs. On July 31, this requirement wasn’t met because only 2,500 yards of Material K were on hand. The cost of Material K is $0.85 per yard. The company wants to prepare a Direct Materials Purchase Budget for the rest of the year. The total cost of Material K to be purchased in August is August 14,000 units September 14,500 units October 15,500 units November 12,600 units December 11,900 units A. $42,300. B. $48,200. C. $33,840. D. $40,970. 5. Lyons Company consists of two divisions, A and B. Lyons Company reported a contribution margin of $50,000 for Division A and had a contribution margin ratio of 30% in Division B, when sales in Division B were $200,000. Net operating income for the company was $25,000, and traceable fixed expenses were $40,000. Lyons Company’s common fixed expenses were A. $85,000. B. $45,000. C. $70,000. D. $40,000. 6. Super Drive is a computer hard-drive manufacturer. The company’s balance sheet for the fiscal year ended on November 30 appears below: Super Drive, Inc. Statement of Financial Position For the year ended November 30 Assets: Cash $52,000 Accounts receivable 150,000 Inventory 315,000 Property, plant, and equipment 1,000,000 Total Assets $1,517,000 Liabilities and stockholders’ equity: Accounts payable $175,000 Common stock 900,000 Retained earnings 442,000 Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $1,517,000 Additional information regarding Super Drive’s operations appears below: • Sales are budgeted at $520,000 for December and $500,000 for January. • Collections are expected to be 60% in the month of sale and 40% in the month following sale. There are no bad debts. • 80% of the disk-drive components are purchased in the month prior to the month of the sale, and 20% are purchased in the month of the sale. Purchased components comprise 40% of the cost of goods sold. • Payment for components purchased is made in the month following the purchase. • Assume that the cost of goods sold is 80% of sales. The budgeted cash collections for the upcoming December should be A. $520,000. B. $462,000. C. $402,000. D. $208,000. 7. Last year, the House of Orange had sales of $826,650, net operating income of $81,000, and operating assets of $84,000 at the beginning of the year and $90,000 at the end of the year. What was the company’s turnover rounded to the nearest tenth? A. 10.2 B. 9.2 C. 9.8 D. 9.5 Use the following information to answer this question. Moorhouse Clinic uses client visits as its measure of activity. During December, the clinic budgeted for 3,700 client visits, but its actual level of activity was 3,690 client visits. The clinic has provided the following data concerning the formulas used in its budgeting and its actual results for December: Data used in budgeting: Fixed element Variable element per month per client-visit Revenue ____-____ $25.10 Personnel expenses $27,100 $7.10 Medical supplies 1,500 4.50 Occupancy expenses 6,000 1.00 Administrative expenses 3,000 0.10 Total expenses $37,600 $12.70 Actual results for December: Revenue $96,299 Personnel expenses $51,009 Medical supplies $17,425 Occupancy expenses $9,240 Administrative expenses $3,239 8. The activity variance for personnel expenses in December would be closest to A. $2,361 U. B. $2,361 F. C. $71 F. D. $71 U. Use the following information to answer this question. Moorhouse Clinic uses client visits as its measure of activity. During December, the clinic budgeted for 3,700 client visits, but its actual level of activity was 3,690 client visits. The clinic has provided the following data concerning the formulas used in its budgeting and its actual results for December: Data used in budgeting: Fixed element Variable element per month per client-visit Revenue ____-____ $25.10 Personnel expenses $27,100 $7.10 Medical supplies 1,500 4.50 Occupancy expenses 6,000 1.00 Administrative expenses 3,000 0.10 Total expenses $37,600 $12.70 Actual results for December: Revenue $96,299 Personnel expenses $51,009 Medical supplies $17,425 Occupancy expenses $9,240 Administrative expenses $3,239 9. The revenue variance for December would be closest to A. $3,680 F. B. $3,429 F. C. $3,429 U. D. $3,680 U

    Attachments:

    intel 1 what are the maturities on intel s long term debt 526407

    Module 1

    1) What are the maturities on Intel’s Long-term debt?

    2) What are Intel’s projected obligations on Long-Term Debt and Payments due by period?

    3) What is the par or stated value of Intel’s preference shares?

    4) What is the par or stated value of Intel’s ordinary shares?

    5) What percentage of Intel’s authorized ordinary shares was issued at Dec 29, 2012?

    6) How many ordinary shares were outstanding at Dec 29, 2012, and Dec 31, 2011?

    Module 2

    Under Intel’s equity-based compensation plan, share options are granted annually to key managers and directors.

    1) How many options were granted and exercisable in 2011 and 2012 under the plan?

    2) What number of diluted weighted-average shares outstanding was used by Intel in computing

    earnings per share for 2011 and 2012? What were Intel’s diluted earnings per share in 2011 and

    2012?

    3) What other equity-based compensation plans does Intel have?

    4) What investments does Intel report in 2012?

    6) How does Intel determine fair value?

    7) How does Intel use derivative financial instruments?

    Module 3

    1) What amounts relative to income taxes does Intel report in its:

    a. 2012 income statement?

    b. 29 Dec 2012 balance sheet?

    c. 2012 statement of cash flows?

    2) Intel’s provision for income taxes in 2011 and 2012 was computed at what effective tax rates?

    3) How much of Intel’s 2012 total provision for income taxes was current tax expense, and how much was deferred tax expense?

    4) What did Intel report as the significant components (the details) of its 29 December, 2012 deferred tax assets and liabilities?

    Module 4

    1) What kind of pension plan does Intel provide its employees?

    2) What was Intel’s pension expense for 2011 and 2012?

    3) What is the impact of Intel’s pension plans on its 2011 and 2012 consolidated balance sheets?

    4) What information does Intel provide on the target allocation of its pension assets? How do the

    allocations relate to the expected returns on these assets?

    Module 5

    1) What types of leases are used by Intel?

    2) What amount of operating leases was reported by Intel for various years?

    Module 6

    1) Were there changes in accounting policies reported by Intel during the two years covered by its income statements (2011–2012)? If so, describe the nature of the change and the year of change.

    2) What types of estimates did Intel discuss in 2012?

    Module 7

    1) Which method of computing net cash provided by operating activities does Intel use? What were the amounts of net cash provided by operating activities for the years 2011 and 2012?

    2) What was the most significant item in the cash flows used for investing activities section in 2012?

    3) What was the most significant item in the cash flows used for financing activities section in 2012?

    4) Where is “deferred income taxes” reported in Intel’s statement of cash flows? Why does it appear in that section of the statement of cash flows?

    5) Where is depreciation reported in Intel’s statement of cash flows? Why is depreciation added to net income in the statement of cash flows?

    Module 8

    1) What specific items does Intel discuss in its Note 2—Summary of Significant Accounting Policies?

    (List the headings only.)

    2) For what segments did Intel report segmented information? Which segment is the largest? Who is Intel’s largest customer?

    Attachments:

    multiple choice answers only 526436

    Student ID: 21535917

    Exam: 061684RR – THE IMPACT OF MANAGEMENT

    When you have completed your exam and reviewed your answers, click Submit Exam. Answers will not be recorded until you

    hit Submit Exam. If you need to exit before completing the exam, click Cancel Exam.

    Questions 1 to 20: Select the best answer to each question. Note that a question and its answers may be split across a page

    break, so be sure that you have seen the entire question and all the answers before choosing an answer.

    1. Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Purvell Company has just acquired a new machine. Data on the

    machine follow:

    The company uses straight-line depreciation and a $5,000 salvage value. (The company considers salvage

    value in making depreciation deductions.) Assume cash flows occur uniformly throughout a year.

    The simple rate of return would be closest to

    Purchase cost $50,000

    Annual cost savings $15,000

    Life of the machine 8 years

    A. 18.75%.

    B. 12.5%.

    C. 17.5%.

    D. 30.0%.

    Use the following information to answer this question.

    The most recent balance sheet and income statement of Teramoto Corporation appear below:

    Comparative Balance Sheet

    Ending

    Balance

    Beginning

    Balance

    Assets:

    Cash and cash equivalents

    Accounts receivable

    Inventory

    Plant and equipment

    Less accumulated depreciation

    Total assets

    $43

    53

    73

    582

    301

    $450

    $35

    59

    69

    490

    286

    $367

    Liabilities and stockholders’ equity

    Accounts payable

    Wages payable

    Taxes payable

    Bonds payable

    Deferred taxes

    Common stock

    Retained earnings

    Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

    $57

    21

    15

    21

    20

    55

    261

    $450

    $48

    18

    13

    20

    21

    50

    197

    $367

    Income Statement

    Sales

    Cost of good sold

    Gross margin

    Selling and administrative expense

    Net operating income

    Income taxes

    Net income

    $893

    587

    306

    189

    117

    35

    $82

    2. The net cash provided by (used by) operations for the year was

    A. $117.

    B. $112.

    C. $30.

    D. $52.

    3. Cridwell Company’s selling and administrative expenses for last year totaled $210,000. During the year,

    the company’s prepaid expense account balance increased by $18,000, and accrued liabilities increased by

    $12,000. Depreciation charges for the year were $24,000. Based on this information, selling and

    administrative expenses adjusted to a cash basis under the direct method on the statement of cash flows

    would be

    A. $192,000.

    B. $240,000.

    C. $180,000.

    D. $228,000.

    4. Products A, B, and C are produced from a single raw material input. The raw material costs $90,000,

    from which 5,000 units of A, 10,000 units of B, and 15,000 units of C can be produced each period.

    Product A can be sold at the split-off point for $2 per unit, or it can be processed further at a cost of

    $12,500 and then sold for $5 per unit. Product A should be

    A. sold at the split-off point, since further processing will result in a loss of $2,500 each period.

    B. processed further, since this will increase profits by $12,500 each period.

    C. processed further, since this will increase profits by $2,500 each period.

    D. sold at the split-off point, since further processing would result in a loss of $0.50 per unit.

    Use the following information to answer this question.

    The most recent balance sheet and income statement of Teramoto Corporation appear below:

    Comparative Balance Sheet

    Ending

    Balance

    Beginning

    Balance

    Assets:

    Cash and cash equivalents

    Accounts receivable

    Inventory

    Plant and equipment

    Less accumulated depreciation

    $43

    53

    73

    582

    301

    $35

    59

    69

    490

    286

    Total assets $450 $367

    Liabilities and stockholders’ equity

    Accounts payable

    Wages payable

    Taxes payable

    Bonds payable

    Deferred taxes

    Common stock

    Retained earnings

    Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

    $57

    21

    15

    21

    20

    55

    261

    $450

    $48

    18

    13

    20

    21

    50

    197

    $367

    Income Statement

    Sales

    Cost of good sold

    Gross margin

    Selling and administrative expense

    Net operating income

    Income taxes

    Net income

    $893

    587

    306

    189

    117

    35

    $82

    5. The net cash provided by (used by) financing activities for the year was

    A. ($18).

    B. $5.

    C. $1.

    D. ($12).

    6. Brittman Corporation makes three products that use the current constraint-a particular type of machine.

    Data concerning those products appear below:

    Assume that sufficient constraint time is available to satisfy demand for all but the least profitable product.

    Up to how much should the company be willing to pay to acquire more of the constrained resource?

    IP NI YD

    Selling price per unit $183.57 $207.74 $348.15

    Variable cost per unit $144.42 $155.04 $269.50

    Minutes on the constraint 2.90 3.40 5.50

    A. $15.50 per minute

    B. $39.15 per unit

    C. $78.65 per unit

    D. $13.50 per minute

    Use the following information to answer this question.

    Financial statements for Larkins Company appear below:

    Larkins Company

    Statement of Financial Position

    December 31, Year 2 and Year 1

    (dollars in thousands)

    Dividends during Year 2 totaled $135 thousand, of which $12 thousand were preferred dividends. The

    market price of a share of common stock on December 31, Year 2 was $150.

    Year 2 Year 1

    Current assets:

    Cash and marketable securities

    Accounts receivable, net

    Inventory

    Prepaid expenses

    Total current assets

    Noncurrent assets:

    Plant & equipment, net

    $180

    210

    130

    50

    570

    1,540

    $180

    180

    120

    50

    530

    1,480

    Total assets $2,110 $2,010

    Current liabilities:

    Accounts payable

    Accrued liabilities

    Notes payable, short term

    Total current liabilities

    Noncurrent liabilities:

    Bonds payable

    Total liabilities

    Stockholders’ equity:

    Preferred stock, $20 par, 10%

    Common stock, $10 par

    Additional paid-in capital–common stock

    Retained earnings

    Total stockholders’ equity

    Total liabilities & stockholders’ equity

    $100

    60

    90

    250

    480

    730

    120

    180

    240

    840

    1,380

    $2,110

    $130

    60

    120

    310

    500

    810

    120

    180

    240

    660

    1,200

    $2,010

    Larkins Company

    Income Statement

    For the Year Ended December 31, Year 2

    (dollars in thousands)

    Sales (all on account)

    Cost of goods sold

    Gross margin

    Selling and administrative expense

    Net operating income

    Interest expense

    Net income before taxes

    Income taxes (30%)

    Net income

    $2,760

    1,930

    830

    330

    500

    50

    450

    135

    $315

    7. Larkins Company’s dividend yield ratio on December 31, Year 2 was closest to:

    A. 4.1%.

    B. 2.1%.

    C. 4.6%.

    D. 5.0%.

    Use the following information to answer this question.

    Financial statements for Larkins Company appear below:

    Larkins Company

    Statement of Financial Position

    December 31, Year 2 and Year 1

    (dollars in thousands)

    Year 2 Year 1

    Current assets:

    Cash and marketable securities

    Accounts receivable, net

    Inventory

    Prepaid expenses

    Total current assets

    Noncurrent assets:

    Plant & equipment, net

    $180

    210

    130

    50

    570

    1,540

    $180

    180

    120

    50

    530

    1,480

    Total assets $2,110 $2,010

    Current liabilities:

    Accounts payable

    Accrued liabilities

    Notes payable, short term

    Total current liabilities

    Noncurrent liabilities:

    Bonds payable

    Total liabilities

    Stockholders’ equity:

    Preferred stock, $20 par, 10%

    Common stock, $10 par

    Additional paid-in capital–common stock

    Retained earnings

    Total stockholders’ equity

    Total liabilities & stockholders’ equity

    $100

    60

    90

    250

    480

    730

    120

    180

    240

    840

    1,380

    $2,110

    $130

    60

    120

    310

    500

    810

    120

    180

    240

    660

    1,200

    $2,010

    Larkins Company

    Income Statement

    For the Year Ended December 31, Year 2

    (dollars in thousands)

    Sales (all on account)

    Cost of goods sold

    Gross margin

    Selling and administrative expense

    Net operating income

    Interest expense

    Net income before taxes

    Income taxes (30%)

    Net income

    $2,760

    1,930

    830

    330

    500

    50

    450

    135

    $315

    Dividends during Year 2 totaled $135 thousand, of which $12 thousand were preferred dividends. The

    market price of a share of common stock on December 31, Year 2 was $150.

    8. Larkins Company’s earnings per share of common stock for Year 2 was closest to:

    A. $16.83.

    B. $25.00.

    C. $17.50.

    D. $7.21.

    9. An increase in the market price of a company’s common stock will immediately affect its

    A. debt-to-equity ratio.

    B. dividend payout ratio.

    C. dividend yield ratio.

    D. earnings per share of common stock.

    Use the following information to answer this question.

    Financial statements for Larkins Company appear below:

    Larkins Company

    Statement of Financial Position

    December 31, Year 2 and Year 1

    (dollars in thousands)

    Year 2 Year 1

    Current assets:

    Cash and marketable securities

    Accounts receivable, net

    Inventory

    Prepaid expenses

    Total current assets

    Noncurrent assets:

    Plant & equipment, net

    $180

    210

    130

    50

    570

    1,540

    $180

    180

    120

    50

    530

    1,480

    Total assets $2,110 $2,010

    Current liabilities:

    Accounts payable

    Accrued liabilities

    Notes payable, short term

    Total current liabilities

    Noncurrent liabilities:

    Bonds payable

    Total liabilities

    Stockholders’ equity:

    Preferred stock, $20 par, 10%

    Common stock, $10 par

    Additional paid-in capital–common stock

    Retained earnings

    Total stockholders’ equity

    $100

    60

    90

    250

    480

    730

    120

    180

    240

    840

    1,380

    $130

    60

    120

    310

    500

    810

    120

    180

    240

    660

    1,200

    Dividends during Year 2 totaled $135 thousand, of which $12 thousand were preferred dividends. The

    market price of a share of common stock on December 31, Year 2 was $150.

    Total liabilities & stockholders’ equity $2,110 $2,010

    Larkins Company

    Income Statement

    For the Year Ended December 31, Year 2

    (dollars in thousands)

    Sales (all on account)

    Cost of goods sold

    Gross margin

    Selling and administrative expense

    Net operating income

    Interest expense

    Net income before taxes

    Income taxes (30%)

    Net income

    $2,760

    1,930

    830

    330

    500

    50

    450

    135

    $315

    10. Larkins Company’s book value per share at the end of Year 2 was closest to:

    A. $10.00.

    B. $23.33.

    C. $70.00.

    D. $76.67.

    11. The net present value method assumes that the project’s cash flows are reinvested at the

    A. discount rate used in the net present value calculation.

    B. internal rate of return.

    C. simple rate of return.

    D. payback rate of return.

    12. VIM Company purchased $100,000 in inventory from its suppliers on credit terms. The company’s

    acid-test ratio would most likely

    A. decrease.

    B. be impossible to determine without more information.

    C. increase.

    D. be unchanged.

    13. A company’s current ratio and acid-test ratios are both greater than 1. If obsolete inventory is written

    off, this would

    A. increase net working capital.

    B. increase the acid-test ratio.

    C. decrease the acid-test ratio.

    D. decrease the current ratio.

    Use the following information to answer this question.

    Financial statements for Larkins Company appear below:

    Larkins Company

    Statement of Financial Position

    December 31, Year 2 and Year 1

    (dollars in thousands)

    Dividends during Year 2 totaled $135 thousand, of which $12 thousand were preferred dividends. The

    market price of a share of common stock on December 31, Year 2 was $150.

    Year 2 Year 1

    Current assets:

    Cash and marketable securities

    Accounts receivable, net

    Inventory

    Prepaid expenses

    Total current assets

    Noncurrent assets:

    Plant & equipment, net

    $180

    210

    130

    50

    570

    1,540

    $180

    180

    120

    50

    530

    1,480

    Total assets $2,110 $2,010

    Current liabilities:

    Accounts payable

    Accrued liabilities

    Notes payable, short term

    Total current liabilities

    Noncurrent liabilities:

    Bonds payable

    Total liabilities

    Stockholders’ equity:

    Preferred stock, $20 par, 10%

    Common stock, $10 par

    Additional paid-in capital–common stock

    Retained earnings

    Total stockholders’ equity

    Total liabilities & stockholders’ equity

    $100

    60

    90

    250

    480

    730

    120

    180

    240

    840

    1,380

    $2,110

    $130

    60

    120

    310

    500

    810

    120

    180

    240

    660

    1,200

    $2,010

    Larkins Company

    Income Statement

    For the Year Ended December 31, Year 2

    (dollars in thousands)

    Sales (all on account)

    Cost of goods sold

    Gross margin

    Selling and administrative expense

    Net operating income

    Interest expense

    Net income before taxes

    Income taxes (30%)

    Net income

    $2,760

    1,930

    830

    330

    500

    50

    450

    135

    $315

    14. Larkins Company’s return on total assets for Year 2 was closest to:

    A. 13.6%.

    B. 17.0%.

    C. 15.3%.

    D. 16.0%.

    15. Degner Inc. has some material that originally cost $19,500. The material has a scrap value of $13,300

    as is, but if reworked at a cost of $2,100, it could be sold for $14,000. What would be the incremental

    effect on the company’s overall profit of reworking and selling the material rather than selling it as is as

    scrap?

    A. -$1,400

    B. -$20,900

    C. -$7,600

    D. $11,900

    16. Which of the following would be considered a “use” of cash for the purpose of constructing a statement

    of cash flows?

    A. Amortizing a patent

    B. Issuing long-term debt

    C. Selling the company’s own common stock to investors

    D. Purchasing equipment

    17. Kava Inc. manufactures industrial components. One of its products, which is used in the construction

    of industrial air conditioners, is known as K65. Data concerning this product are given below:

    The above per unit data are based on annual production of 4,000 units of the component. Direct labor can

    be considered to be a variable cost. (Source: CMA, adapted)

    The company has received a special, one-time-only order for 500 units of component K65. There would

    be no variable selling expense on this special order, and the total fixed manufacturing overhead and fixed

    selling and administrative expenses of the company wouldn’t be affected by the order. Assuming that Kava

    has excess capacity and can fill the order without cutting back on the production of any product, what is

    the minimum price per unit on the special order below which the company shouldn’t go?

    Per Unit

    Selling price $180

    Direct materials $29

    Direct labor $5

    Variable manufacturing overhead $4

    Fixed manufacturing overhead $21

    Variable selling expense $2

    Fixed selling and administrative expense $17

    A. $78

    B. $180

    C. $38

    D. $59

    Use the following information to answer this question.

    The most recent balance sheet and income statement of Teramoto Corporation appear below:

    Comparative Balance Sheet

    Ending

    Balance

    Beginning

    Balance

    Assets:

    Cash and cash equivalents

    Accounts receivable

    Inventory

    Plant and equipment

    Less accumulated depreciation

    Total assets

    $43

    53

    73

    582

    301

    $450

    $35

    59

    69

    490

    286

    $367

    Liabilities and stockholders’ equity

    Accounts payable

    Wages payable

    Taxes payable

    Bonds payable

    Deferred taxes

    Common stock

    Retained earnings

    Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

    $57

    21

    15

    21

    20

    55

    261

    $450

    $48

    18

    13

    20

    21

    50

    197

    $367

    Income Statement

    Sales

    Cost of good sold

    Gross margin

    Selling and administrative expense

    Net operating income

    Income taxes

    Net income

    $893

    587

    306

    189

    117

    35

    $82

    18. The net cash provided by (used by) investing activities for the year was

    A. ($77).

    B. $77.

    C. $92.

    D. ($92).

    19. The Clemson Company reported the following results last year for the manufacture and sale of one of

    its products known as a Tam.

    Sales (6,500 Tams at $130 each) $845,000

    Variable cost of sales 390,000

    Variable distribution costs 65,000

    Fixed advertising expense 275,000

    Salary of product line manager 25,000

    Fixed manufacturing overhead 145,000

    Net operating loss $(55,000)

    End of exam

    Clemson Company is trying to determine whether to discontinue the manufacture and sale of Tams. The

    operating results reported above for last year are expected to continue in the foreseeable future if the

    product isn’t dropped. The fixed manufacturing overhead represents the costs of production facilities and

    equipment that the Tam product shares with other products produced by Clemson. If the Tam product

    were dropped, there would be no change in the fixed manufacturing costs of the company.

    Assume that discontinuing the manufacture and sale of Tams will have no effect on the sale of other

    product lines. If the company discontinues the Tam product line, the change in annual operating income (or

    loss) should be a

    A. $65,000 decrease.

    B. $90,000 decrease.

    C. $70,000 increase.

    D. $55,000 decrease.

    20. (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) The following data pertain to an investment:

    The net present value of the proposed investment is

    Cost of the investment $18,955

    Life of the project 5 years

    Annual cost savings $5,000

    Estimated salvage value $1,000

    Discount rate 10%

    A. $0.

    B. $3,355.

    C. $621.

    D. $(3,430).

    Attachments:

    the work in process inventory account of a manufacturing company 526439

    The work-in-process inventory account of a manufacturing company shows a balance of $3,000 at the end of an accounting period. The job-cost sheets of the two incom-plete jobs show charges of $500 and $300 for direct materials, and charges of $400 and $600 for direct labor. From this information, it appears that the company is using a predetermined overhead rate as a percentage of direct labor costs. What percentage is the rate?

    2. The break-even point in dollar sales for Rice Company is S480,000 and the company’s contribution margin ratio is 40 percent. If Rice Company desires a profit of $84,000, how much would sales have to total?

    3. Williams Company’s direct labor cost is 25 percent of its conversion cost. If the manufacturing overhead for the last period was $45,000 and the direct material cost was $25,000, how much is the direct labor cost?

    Attachments:

    1a predetermined manufacturing overhead rate 40 000 units of mono relay x 75 per uni 526455

    1a. predetermined manufacturing overhead rate:

    40,000 units of Mono relay x.75 per unit = 30,000

    10,000 units of Bi relay x 1.00 per units =10,000

    Total direct labor hours required =40,000 hours

    Predetermined manufactured overhear rate = $1,000,000 / 40,000 = $25.00 per DLH

    1b. Unit product cost of each product:

    Mono relayBi-relay

    Direct materials$35.00$48.00

    Direct labor$9.00$12.00

    $25.00 x .75$28.75

    $25.00 x 1.00$25.00

    ________________________________

    Unit product cost$62.75$85.00

    —————————————————–

    ——————————————————

    2. Activity rate: estimated overhead cost / total expected activity= activity rate.

    Activity cost poolEst. overhead costExpected activityActivity rate

    Maintaining parts

    Inventory$180,000225 part types$800 per part type

    Processing Purchase

    Orders$90,0001.000 orders $90 per order

    Quality control $230,0005,750 test$40 per test

    Machine related$500,00010,000 MH$50 per MH

    3A. Determine total amount of manufacturing overhead cost that would be applied to each product using the activity-based costing system. After these totals have been computed, determine the amount of manufacturing overhead cost per unit of each product.

    Mono –RelayBi- Relay

    Expected ActivityAmountExpected activity Amount

    Maintinig parts Inv.75$60.000150$120,000

    @$800

    ProcessingPurchase 800$72,000200$18.000

    Orders @$90

    Quality Control @2,500$100,0003.250$130,000

    $40

    Machine related4.000$200.0006.000$300,000

    @50

    Total manufacturing

    Overhead cost $432.000$568,000

    Units produced 40,00010,000

    Manufacturing Overhead

    Per Unit$10.80$56.80

    3B.Compute the unit product cost of each product.

    Mono-RelayBi-relay

    Direct Materials$35 $48

    Direct labor$9$12

    Manufacturing overhead$10.80$56.80

    Unit Product Cost$54.80 $116.80

    ——————————————————

    ——————————————————

    4. Identify factors that may account for the company’s declining profits?

    accounting inventory problems 526467

    I need help with the problems that I attached. thank you

    Document Preview:

    1. Specific identification method. Boston Galleries uses the specific identification method for inventory valuation. Inventory information for several oil paintings follows. Painting? Cost??1/2 Beginning inventory ?Woods ?$21,000 ??4/19 Purchase ?Sunset ?21,800 ??6/7 Purchase ?Earth ?31,200 ??12/16 Purchase ?Moon ?4,000 ?? Woods and Moon were sold during the year for a total of $35,000. Determine the firm’s cost of goods sold. $21,000+$4,000= $25,000 gross profit. $35,000-$25,000=$10,000 ending inventory. $21,800+$31,200=$53,000 2. Inventory valuation methods: basic computations. The January beginning inven?tory of the White Company consisted of 300 units costing $40 each. During the first quarter, the company purchased two batches of goods: 700 Units at $44 on February 21 and 800 units at $50 on March 28. Sales during the first quarter were 1,400 units at $75 per unit. The White Company uses a periodic inventory system. Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods. FIFO? LIFO ?Weighted Average?????? Goods available for sale ? $ ?$ ?$ ??Ending inventory, March 31 ??Cost of goods sold ?? 3. Perpetual inventory system: journal entries. At the beginning of 20X3, Beehler Company implemented a computerized perpetual inventory system. The first transactions that occurred during 20X3 follow: 1/2/20X3 Purchases on account: 500 units @ $6 = $3,000 1/15/20X3 Sales on account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550 1/20/20X3 Purchases on Account: 200 units @ 5 = $1,000 1/25/20X3 Sales on Account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550 The company president examined the computer-generated journal entries for these transactions and was confused by the absence of a Purchases account. a. Duplicate the journal entries that would have appeared on the computer printout under FIFO & LIFO b. Calculate…

    Attachments:

    a i s 526488

    Accountants can use data flow diagrams (DFDs) to depict the physical flows of data through an AIS (like document flowcharts), or the logical flow of data through an AIS (like system flowcharts). Like document or system flowcharts, their main objective is to document data flows in an orderly, graphic, and easily-understood format. But DFDs use fewer symbols than either document or system flowcharts, and do not require columns (like document flowcharts).

    • Discuss how a document flowchart assists each of the following individuals:
      • A systems analyst.
      • A systems designer.
      • A computer programmer.
      • An auditor.
      • A data security expert.
    • Flowcharting is both an art and a science. Guidelines can be used to make better flowcharts. What are these guidelines for document, system, and data flow diagram flowcharts?
    • What are the four symbols used in data flow diagrams? What does each mean?
    • Discuss why data flow diagrams are developed in a hierarchy? What are the names of some levels in the hierarchy?

    comprehensive 2year worksheet 526911

    (Comprehensive 2-Year Worksheet) Hobbs Co. has the following defined-benefit pension plan balances on January 1, 2012.

    Projected benefit obligation $4,600,000

    Fair value of plan assets 4,600,000

    The interest (settlement) rate applicable to the plan is 10%. On January 1, 2013, the company amends its pension agreement so that prior service costs of $600,000 are created. Other data related to the pension plan are:

    Service cost : 2012- 150,000 2013-170,000

    prior service cost amortization : 2012- 0 2013-90,000

    contributions funding to the plan : 2012-200,000 2013-184,658

    benefits paid : 2012-220,000 2013-280,000

    actual return on plan assets : 2012-252,000 2013-350,000

    expected rate of return on assets : 2012- 6% 2013- 8%

    (a) Prepare a pension worksheet for the pension plan in 2012.

    (b) Prepare any journal entries related to the pension plan that would be needed at December 31, 2012.

    (c) Prepare a pension worksheet for 2013 and any journal entries related to the pension plan as of December 31, 2013.

    (d) Indicate the pension-related amounts reported in the 2013 financial statements

    how many pomegranates would farm fresh need to sell annually to justify joining the 526968

    • Name: ____________________________
      AC5250 Managerial Accounting
      Final Problem Set #2
      Gordon W. Tuttle
      Below are the problems which you must answer. The point values are noted next to each problem. This is due to me by the end of the day on Saturday March 8th.
      Problem 1 (24 points)
      Break-Even Analysis and Profit Planning
      The Farm Fresh Food Market is a merchandiser of organic food items. The company is considering the possibility of selling pomegranates that would sell for $0.50 each. Pomegranates can be acquired in unlimited quantities for $0.30 each. There are no additional variable costs associated with acquiring and selling pomegranates since labor is on a salaried basis. However, in order to acquire pomegranates at this price, Farm Fresh must pay $4,000 per year for membership in an International co-op.
      Required:
      a. How many pomegranates would Farm Fresh need to sell annually to justify joining the co-op (break-even)?
      b. What would be the total revenue at the breakeven point?
      c. How many pomegranates would the company need to sell to earn a profit of $6,000?
      Problem 2 (24 points)
      Matthew is considering several possible investment alternatives:
      Option A: Matthew could receive $10,000 today.
      Option B: Matthew could receive $3,000 at the end of each of the next four years.
      Option C: Matthew could receive $15,000 five years from now.
      Required:
      1. Calculate the net present value for each option assuming that Matthew can earn 6 percent on any investment funds.
      2. Which option results in the greatest financial benefit to Matthew?
      3. If Matthew earns 8 percent, will that change your answer to # 2 above? Please explain.
      Problem 3 (24 points)
      Cash Budgeting
      Landis Company has the following sales forecasts for the selected three-month period in
      the current year:
      Month Sales
      April $12,000
      May 7,000
      June 8,000
      Seventy percent of sales are collected in the month of the sale, and the remaining balance is collected in the following month.
      Accounts Receivable balance (April 1) $10,000
      Cash balance (April 1) 5,000
      Minimum cash balance is $5,000. Cash can be borrowed in $1,000 increments from the local bank (assume no interest charges). Calculate the expected cash balance at the end of April, assuming that cash is received only from customers and that $20,000 is paid out during April?
      Problem 4: Essay (14 points)
      Do you agree or disagree with the following statement? “Budgeting is an unnecessary burden on many managers and employees. It takes time away from important day to day activities.” Please explain.
      Problem 5: Essay (14 points)
      What are the expected benefits of the implementation of an effective system of internal controls for an organization?

    Attachments:

    the lee company uses a job order costing system the following data were recorded for 528263

    Use the following information to answer this question. The Lee Company uses a job-order costing system. The following data were recorded for June: Overhead is charged to production at 80% of direct materials cost. Jobs 235, 237, and 238 were completed during June and transferred to finished goods. Jobs 235 and 238 have been delivered to customers. Added During June—- Job Number June 1 Work in Process Inventory Direct Materials Direct Labor 235 $2,500 $600 $400 236 $1,500 $800 $1,000 237 $1,000 $1,200 $1,750 238 $800 $1,500 $2,250 2. Lee Company’s work-in-process inventory balance on June 30 was A. $9,450. B. $4,100. C. $3,940. D. $3,300. 3. The Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 contains all of the following provisions except which one? A. Both the CEO and CFO must certify in writing that their company’s financial statements and accompanying disclosures fairly represent the results of operations. B. Severe penalties are established for altering or destroying documents that may eventually be used in an official proceeding. C. A CFO must be a CPA or CMA. D. The audit committee of the board of directors of a company must hire, compensate, and terminate the public accounting firm that audits the company’s financial reports. 4. When would the direct method and the step-down method of service department cost allocation result in identical allocations being made to the operating departments? A. The only time is when there is just one service department. B. That can happen only if there’s an equal amount of service departments and operating departments. C. The only time is when all costs in the service departments are fixed costs. D. That can happen if there is only one service department or, if the company has more than one service department, if all the costs in those departments are fixed costs. 5. Which of the following is not one of the five steps in the lean-thinking model discussed in the text? A. Identify the business process that delivers value. B. Organize work arrangements around the flow of the business process. C. Create a pull system that responds to customer orders. D. Automate the business process.

    Attachments:

    accounting system uses special journals 528310

    Adria Lopez created Success Systems on October 1, 2013. The company has been successful, and its list of customers has grown. To accommodate the growth, the accounting system is modified to set up separate accounts for each customer. The following chart of accounts includes the account number used for each account and any balance as of December 31, 2013. Adria Lopez decided to add a fourth digit with a decimal point to the 106 account number that had been used for the single Accounts Receivable account. This change allows the company to continue using the existing chart of accounts.

    No. Account Title Debit Credit
    101 Cash $ 48,502
    106.1 Alex’s Engineering Co. 0
    106.2 Wildcat Services 0
    106.3 Easy Leasing 0
    106.4 IFM Co. 3,080
    106.5 Liu Corp. 0
    106.6 Gomez Co. 2,748
    106.7 Delta Co. 0
    106.8 KC, Inc. 0
    106.9 Dream, Inc. 0
    119 Merchandise inventory 0
    126 Computer supplies 620
    128 Prepaid insurance 1,935
    131 Prepaid rent 915
    163 Office equipment 8,090
    164 Accumulated depreciation—Office equipment $ 280
    167 Computer equipment 20,100
    168 Accumulated depreciation—Computer equipment 1,220
    201 Accounts payable 1,210
    210 Wages payable $ 700
    236 Unearned computer services revenue 1,380
    307 Common stock 68,000
    318 Retained earnings 13,200
    319 Dividends $ 0
    403 Computer services revenue 0
    413 Sales 0
    414 Sales returns and allowances 0
    415 Sales discounts 0
    502 Cost of goods sold 0
    612 Depreciation expense—Office equipment 0
    613 Depreciation expense—Computer equipment 0
    623 Wages expense 0
    637 Insurance expense 0
    640 Rent expense 0
    652 Computer supplies expense 0
    655 Advertising expense 0
    676 Mileage expense 0
    677 Miscellaneous expenses 0
    684 Repairs expense—Computer 0

    In response to requests from customers, A. Lopez will begin selling computer software. The company will extend credit terms of 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, to all customers who purchase this merchandise. However, no cash discount is available on consulting fees. Additional accounts (Nos. 119, 413, 414, 415, and 502) are added to its general ledger to accommodate the company’s new merchandising activities. Also, Success Systems does not use reversing entries and, therefore, all revenue and expense accounts have zero beginning balances as of January 1, 2014. Its transactions for January through March follow:

    Jan. 4

    The company paid cash to Lyn Addie for five days’ work at the rate of $175 per day. Four of the five days relate to wages payable that were accrued in the prior year.

    5 Adria Lopez invested an additional $23,100 cash in the company in exchange for more common stock.
    7

    The company purchased $7,200 of merchandise from Kansas Corp. with terms of 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, invoice dated January 7.

    9 The company received $2,748 cash from Gomez Co. as full payment on its account.
    11

    The company completed a five-day project for Alex’s Engineering Co. and billed it $5,470, which is the total price of $6,850 less the advance payment of $1,380.

    13

    The company sold merchandise with a retail value of $4,000 and a cost of $3,480 to Liu Corp., invoice dated January 13.

    15

    The company paid $640 cash for freight charges on the merchandise purchased on January 7.

    16 The company received $4,060 cash from Delta Co. for computer services provided.
    17

    The company paid Kansas Corp. for the invoice dated January 7, net of the discount.

    20

    Liu Corp. returned $700 of defective merchandise from its invoice dated January 13. The returned merchandise, which had a $270 cost, is discarded. (The policy of Success Systems is to leave the cost of defective products in cost of goods sold.)

    22

    The company received the balance due from Liu Corp., net of both the discount and the credit for the returned merchandise.

    24

    The company returned defective merchandise to Kansas Corp. and accepted a credit against future purchases. The defective merchandise invoice cost, net of the discount, was $486.

    26

    The company purchased $9,900 of merchandise from Kansas Corp. with terms of 1/10, n/30, FOB destination, invoice dated January 26.

    26

    The company sold merchandise with a $4,550 cost for $5,900 on credit to KC, Inc., invoice dated January 26.

    29

    The company received a $486 credit memorandum from Kansas Corp. concerning the merchandise returned on January 24.

    31 The company paid cash to Lyn Addie for 10 days’ work at $175 per day.
    Feb. 1

    The company paid $2,745 cash to Hillside Mall for another three months’ rent in advance.

    3

    The company paid Kansas Corp. for the balance due, net of the cash discount, less the $486 amount in the credit memorandum.

    5

    The company paid $580 cash to the local newspaper for an advertising insert in today’s paper.

    11 The company received the balance due from Alex’s Engineering Co. for fees billed on January 11.
    15 The company paid $4,630 cash for dividends.
    23

    The company sold merchandise with a $2,480 cost for $3,340 on credit to Delta Co., invoice dated February 23.

    26 The company paid cash to Lyn Addie for eight days’ work at $175 per day.
    27

    The company reimbursed Adria Lopez for business automobile mileage (800 miles at $0.21 per mile).

    Mar. 8

    The company purchased $2,880 of computer supplies from Harris Office Products on credit, invoice dated March 8.

    9

    The company received the balance due from Delta Co. for merchandise sold on February 23.

    11 The company paid $910 cash for minor repairs to the company’s computer.
    16 The company received $5,370 cash from Dream, Inc., for computing services provided.
    19

    The company paid the full amount due to Harris Office Products, consisting of amounts created on December 15 (of $1,210) and March 8.

    24 The company billed Easy Leasing for $9,227 of computing services provided.
    25

    The company sold merchandise with a $2,102 cost for $2,830 on credit to Wildcat Services, invoice dated March 25.

    30

    The company sold merchandise with a $1,158 cost for $2,400 on credit to IFM Company, invoice dated March 30.

    31

    The company reimbursed Adria Lopez for business automobile mileage (300 miles at $0.21 per mile).

    The following additional facts are available for preparing adjustments on March 31 prior to financial statement preparation:

    a. The March 31 amount of computer supplies still available totals $2,015.
    b. Three more months have expired since the company purchased its annual insurance policy at a $2,580 cost for 12 months of coverage.
    c. Lyn Addie has not been paid for seven days of work at the rate of $175 per day.
    d. Three months have passed since any prepaid rent has been transferred to expense. The monthly rent expense is $915.
    e. Depreciation on the computer equipment for January 1 through March 31 is $1,220.
    f. Depreciation on the office equipment for January 1 through March 31 is $280.
    g. The March 31 amount of merchandise inventory still available totals $624.

    case study database development due week 8 and worth 90 points read the following ar 528358

    Improve the quality of datasets, using the Software Development Life Cycle (SDLC) methodology. Include a thorough description of each activity per each phase. Recommend the actions that should be performed in order to optimize record selections and to improve database performance from a quantitative data quality assessment. Suggest three (3) maintenance plans and three (3) activities that could be performed in order to improve data quality. From the software development methodologies described in the article titled, “Process-centered Review of Object Oriented Software Development Methodologies,” complete the following. Evaluate which method would be efficient for planning proactive concurrency control methods and lock granularities. Assess how your selected method can be used to minimize the database security risks that may occur within a multiuser environment. Analyze how the verify method can be used to plan out system effectively and ensure that the number of transactions do not produce…

    Attachments:

    an investment offers 8 800 per year for 14 years with the first payment occurring 1 528385

    An investment offers $8,800 per year for 14 years, with the first payment occurring 1 year from now. Assume the required return is 12 percent.

    Requirement 1:

    What is the value of the investment today? (Enter rounded answer as directed, but do not use rounded numbers in intermediate calculations. Round your answer to 2 decimal places (e.g., 32.16).)

    Present value $

    Requirement 2:

    What would the value be if the payments occurred for 39 years? (Enter rounded answer as directed, but do not use rounded numbers in intermediate calculations. Round your answer to 2 decimal places (e.g., 32.16).)

    Present value $

    Requirement 3:

    What would the value be if the payments occurred for 74 years? (Enter rounded answer as directed, but do not use rounded numbers in intermediate calculations. Round your answer to 2 decimal places (e.g., 32.16).)

    Present value $

    Requirement 4:

    What would the value be if the payments occurred forever? (Enter rounded answer as directed, but do not use rounded numbers in intermediate calculations. Round your answer to 2 decimal places (e.g., 32.16).)

    Present value $

    you are saving to buy a 191 000 house there are two competing banks in your area 528390

    You are saving to buy a $191,000 house. There are two competing banks in your area, both offering certificates of deposit yielding 7.6 percent.

    Requirement 1:

    How long will it take your initial $108,000 investment to reach the desired level at First Bank, which pays simple interest? (Enter rounded answer as directed, but do not use rounded numbers in intermediate calculations. Round your answer to 2 decimal places(e.g., 32.16).)

    Number of years ?

    Requirement 2:

    How long will it take your initial $108,000 investment to reach the desired level at Second Bank, which compounds interest monthly? (Enter rounded answer as directed, but do not use rounded numbers in intermediate calculations. Round your answer to 2 decimal places (e.g., 32.16).)

    Number of years ?

    these are in excel frmt 528393

    A partnership business is a: private firm in which all owners have equal ownership and limited liabilities in the event of a bankruptcy. corporation in which the owners have limited liability for the corporation’s liabilities. firm listed in a stock exchange, in which no owner owns a majority of equity to control the firm. business with two or more owners that is not organized as a corporation. Rick Co. purchases 7,000 shares of its own $2 par value common stock for $160 per share.

    Document Preview:

    A partnership business is a: private firm in which all owners have equal ownership and limited liabilities in the event of a bankruptcy. corporation in which the owners have limited liability for the corporation’s liabilities. firm listed in a stock exchange, in which no owner owns a majority of equity to control the firm. business with two or more owners that is not organized as a corporation. Rick Co. purchases 7,000 shares of its own $2 par value common stock for $160 per share. Which of the following is the correct journal entry to record this transaction? Debit Cash $2,240,000, and credit Paid-In Capital in Excess of Par – Common $2,240,000. Debit Treasury Stock – Common $1,120,000 and credit Cash $1,120,000. Debit Common Stock – $2 Par Value $2,240,000 and credit Cash $2,240,000. Debit Cash $2,240,000 and credit Treasury Stock – Common $2,240,000. On the ________, cash dividends become a liability of a corporation. end of the fiscal year declaration date payment date date of record When a partner sells his interest to another party, the journal entry simply credits the withdrawing partner’s capital account and debits the new partner’s capital. True False Aries and Eros start a partnership firm with capital contributions of $40,000 and $60,000, respectively.  In the course of the year, Aries withdraws $5,000 from the business in order to meet his personal expenses.  Which of the following is the correct journal entry to close the relevant Withdrawals account at the end of the year? Aries, Withdrawals    $5,000 Eros, Capital                           $5,000 ? Aries, Withdrawals    $5,000 Cash                                        $5,000 ? No Entry ? Aries, Capital           $5,000 Aries, Withdrawals               $5,000 Bradley Corporation issued 10,000 shares of common stock on January 1, 2015.  The stock has a par value of $0.01 per share and was sold for cash at par.  Which of the following is the correct journal…

    Attachments:

    question lance limited manufactures a special component wkq 14 that is used in the m 521439

    Question

    Lance Limited manufactures a special component (WKQ 14) that is used in the making of calculators. As a step towards reducing uncertainty over the finance needs of the new business, the finance manager has asked you to prepare a cash budget for Lance Ltd for the eight (8) months period from 1 March 2014 till 31 October 2014.

    You have collected some raw data from the concerned department heads and tabulated them as follows:

    a) The following projected sales figures are given:

    Sales Forecast Month Estimated Sales Units

    March 260,000 April 250,000 May 270,000 June 280,000 July 300,000 August 290,000 September 310,000 October 270,000 November 280,000

    The estimated selling price per special component is $5.00.

    The collections for the above sales forecast are as follows:

    i. Collection from customers within the month of sale = 10% ( deemed to be cash sales) ii. Collection from customers following the month of sale = 50% iii. Collection from customers following the second month of sales = 30% iv. 10% of the sales are estimated to become irrecoverable.

    b) Direct materials are acquired one month prior to production and are paid the following month of purchase. One special component (WKQ 14) uses 2 units of direct materials. The company keeps stock of the direct materials, equal to 25% of the next month’s requirements.

    Balance of direct materials as at end of February 2014 amounts to 130,000 units of direct material at $0.30 per unit. There is no expected change in the direct material costs.

    c) The Direct Labour cost is paid in the month when such costs are incurred.

    The number of hours estimated are as follows: March April May June July August September October 130,000 135,000 140,000 148,000 152,000 154,000 150,000 148,000

    The company pays $2.50 per direct labour hour.

    d) Operating Expenses are estimated to be $332,000 per month and this is paid at the end of the month in which it is incurred. Included in the operating expenses are depreciation charges worth $16,000 per month.

    e) Income tax payments of $60,000 are due both in June and September 2014.

    f) Lance Ltd’s Cash on Hand at the end of February 2014 was $350,000

    Credit for this assignment will be given on the workings, formulas and calculations used to arrive at the financial values.

    Required:

    Prepare the following budgets: 1) Sales [4 marks] 2) Direct Materials Purchase Budget [8 marks] 3) Direct Labour Budget [4 marks] 4) A monthly cash budget for the 8-month period of March to 31 October 2014. [22 marks]

    Format and presentation [2 marks]

    Total 40 Marks

    financial reporting 523380

    Amos Excavating Inc. is purchasing a bulldozer. The equipment has a price of $104,000. The manufacturer has offered a payment plan that would allow Amos to make12 equal annual payments of $14,524, with the first payment due one year after the purchase.

    (a) How much total interest will Amos pay on this payment plan?
    (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $458,581.)

    Total interest $

    (b) Amos could borrow $104,000from its bank to finance the purchase at an annual rate of 8%. Should Amos borrow from the bank or use the manufacturer’s payment plan to pay for the equipment?

    Use Manufacturer’s Payment PlanBorrow from the Bank

    analyzing transactions and preparing financial statements given the following transa 516988

    Analyzing transactions and preparing financial statements. Given the following transactions(,L O 3)

    1. Aniseh Maximous opened Fresh Pastry Bakery by contributing $15,000 on April 1,2008, in exchange for common stock.

    2. Fresh Pastry borrowed $10,500 from the bank on April 1. The note is a l-year, l2% note, with both principal and interest to be repaid on March 31,2009.

    3. Aniseh paid $1,500 cash to rent equipment for the shop for the first month.

    4. Aniseh paid $655 cash for the utility bill for the lst month.

    5. Fresh Pastry was a hit and earned $7,500 in revenue the first month, all cash.

    6. Aniseh hired a friend to be the customer service specialist for the pastry shop and paid $475 cash in salary expense for the first month.

    7 . The business paid distributions to owners in the amount of $ 1 ,000 for the first month.

    8. At the end of the month, $105 of interest payable is due on the note from #2.

    Required

    a. Show how each transaction affects the accounting equation.

    b. Prepare the four basic financial statements for the month of April. (The balance sheet at April 30.)

    c. Give one additional piece of information related to the transactions that could be recorded in an information system for a purpose other than the financial statements.

    current ratio use the balance sheet you prepared in e2 88 to compute calorie counter 516990

    Current ratio. Use the balance sheet you prepared in E2-88 to compute Calorie Counter Food Stores” current ratio at December 31,2012. What does it indicate? (LO 5) E2-108. Current ratio. The following data was taken from the 2010 and 2009 financial statements of Kitten Caboodle Inc. Calculate the current ratio for each year. What happened to the company”s liquidity from 2009 to 2010? (LO 5)

    2010

    2009

    Current assets

    230,875

    256,294

    Total assets

    386,812

    363,170

    Current liabilities

    1 10,850

    107,895

    Total liabilities

    165,432

    167,670

    Totals hareholderse” quity

    220,750

    1 95,s00

    relationships between financial statement items use the following information for us 516991

    Relationships between financial statement items. Use the following information for USA Movers Inc. for the year ended June 30, 2009, to answer the following questions Assume that the shareholders made no new contributions to the company during the year. (LO 3)

    1. Revenues of the year ended June 30, 2009 = $350

    2. Net income for the year ended June 30, 2009 : $l 10

    3. Beginning balance (June 30, 2008, balance) in retained earnings : $140

    4. Ending balance (June 30, 2009, balance) in retained earnings : $200

    5. Total liabilities and shareholders” equity at June 30,2009 : $600

    6. Total liabilities at June 30, 2008 : $60

    7. Total liabilities at June 30. 2009 : $50

    Required

    a. What were the USA Movers” total expenses during the year ended June 30,2009?

    b. What was the amount of the dividends declared during the year ended June 30, 2009?

    c. What is the total that owners invested in the USA Movers as of June 30,2009?

    d. What were total assets on the company”s June 30, 2008, balance sheet?

    analyze transactions from the accounting equation prepare the four financial stateme 516992

    Analyze transactions from the accounting equation; prepare the four financial statements; and calculate the current ratio. The following accounting equation worksheet shows the transactions for Blairstone Consulting& Advising Inc. for the first month of business, April 2009. (LO 3, 5)

    Assets

    =

    Liabilities

    +

    Shareholders Equity

    Cash

    Accounts receivable

    Supplies

    Accounts payable

    Note payable(5-year)

    Contributed capital

    Retained earnings

    1

    $3000

    $3000

    Common stock

    2

    11000

    11000

    3

    15000

    15000

    4

    2500

    2500

    Revenue

    5

    10000

    10000

    Revenue

    6

    (8000)

    8000

    7

    1200

    (1200)

    8

    (3400)

    (3400)

    9

    (3100)

    (3100)

    Expense

    10

    (500)

    (500)

    Dividends

    Required

    a. Analyze each transaction in the accounting equation worksheet and describe the underlying exchange that resulted in each entry.

    b. Has the company been profitable this month? Explain.

    c. Prepare an income statement for the month ended April 30, 2009.

    d. Prepare a statement of shareholders’equity for the month ended April 30, 2009.

    e. Prepare a statement of cash flows for the month ended April 30, 2009.

    f. Prepare a balance sheet at April 30, 2009.

    g. Calculate the current ratio at April 30. What does this ratio measure?

    analyzing transactions and preparing financial statements kristin and jenny harrison 516993

    Analyzing transactions and preparing financial statements. Kristin and Jenny Harrison graduated from the Aveda Institute at the end of June in 2010. They decided to withdraw $80,000 each from their trust fund to open a day spa, “A Day In Your Dreams” Inc. in exchange for 5,000 shares of common stock. The firm signed a note with Uncle Damien for an additional $65,000. Kristin and Jenny formed A Day In Your Dreams Inc. on July 1, 2010. The business used available funds to purchase some land with a newly remodeled building for $215,000 and spa equipment for $20,000. The business also bought a computer system on account from DELL Inc. for $40,000, with payment due at the beginning of the following year. (LO 3, 5)

    · During the first year of business, A Day In Your Dreams earned $150,000 in service revenue, but collected only $125,000; the remaining $25,000 was due early the next year.

    · Salary expenses for the year were $35,000, of which $30,000 was paid in cash during the year; the remaining $5,000 was due the first day of the next year.

    · .The company paid operating expenses of $30,000 in cash during the year.

    · .The company sent a check during the last month of the year for $6,500 for interest expense due on the loan from Uncle Damien.

    · .The company invested $15,000 of cash in short-term investments at the end of the year.

    · . A Day In Your Dreams declared and paid dividends of $3,500 during the year.

    Required

    a. Show how each transaction affects the accounting equation.

    b. Prepare the four basic financial statements for the year ended June 30, 2011.

    (The balance sheet at June 30, 201 1.)

    c. Calculate the current ratio at June 30, 2011. What does this ratio measure?

    Discuss the implications of A Day In Your Dreams” current ratio.

    relationships between financial statement items use the following information for mu 516994

    Relationships between financial statement items. Use the following information for Multicultural Travel Inc. for the year ended December 31,2010, to answer the questions. Assume that the shareholders made no new contributions to the company during the year. (Lo 3)

    1. Revenues for the year ended December3 1, 2010 : $850

    2. Net income for the year ended December 31,2010: $370

    3. Beginning balance (December 31,2009, balance) in retained earnings : $280

    4. Ending balance (December 3I,2010, balance) in retained earnings = $360

    5. Total liabilities and shareholders equity at December3 1,2010 : $725

    6. Total liabilities at December 31, 2009 : $80

    7. Total liabilities at December 31. 2010 : $40

    Required

    a. What were Multicultural Travel”s total expenses during the year ended December 31,2010?

    b. What was paid to shareholders during the year ended December 3 1 , 2010?

    c. What is the total that owners invested in the Multicultural Travel as of December 31,2010?

    d. What were total assets on Multicultural Travel”s December3 1,2009, balance sheet?

    analyzing transactions international news herald inc entered into the following 516995

    Analyzing transactions. International News Herald Inc. entered into the following

    transactions during 2010: (LO 3)

    1. International News Herald Inc. started as a corporation with a $”7,250 cash contribution from the owners in exchange for common stock.

    2. Newspaper sales, all on account, amounted to $8,900.

    3. Cash collections of accounts receivable amounted to $4,750.

    4. On November 1, 2010, the company paid $3,000 in advance for an insurance policy that does not go into effect until 201 1.

    5. The company paid dividends of $400.

    Required

    Put each of the transactions in an accounting equation worksheet. Then, answer the following questions:

    a. What is the amount of net cash from financing activities for the year ended December 3I,2010?

    b. What amount of total assets would appear on the December3 1,2010, balance sheet?

    c. What amount of net income would appear on the income statement for the year ended December 3I, 20lO?

    d. What is the amount of retained earnings as of December 31,2010?

    identify errors using gaap prepare a classified balance sheet and calculate the curr 516996

    Identify errors using GAAP; prepare a classified balance sheet; and calculate the current ratio. An inexperienced accountant has put together a balance sheet for Art Objects Inc. The balances shown are at September 30,2009. (LO 1, 3, 5)

    Assets

    Liabilities and Equity

    Current assets:

    Current liabilities

    Prepaid insurance

    $30000

    Accounts receivable

    $2000

    Cash

    6000

    Other Long-term assets

    5000

    Land

    28000

    Salaries payable

    8000

    Other current assets

    5000

    Intangible assets

    35000

    Interest receivable

    2000

    Accounts payable

    4000

    Total current assets

    71000

    Total current liabilities

    54000

    Account payable

    42000

    Shareholder”s equity

    Building

    36000

    Retained earnings

    52000

    Equipment

    18000

    Common stock

    47000

    Intangible assets

    6000

    Short-term note

    20000

    Total non current assets

    102000

    Total shareholders equity

    119000

    Total assets

    $173000

    Total liabilities and equity

    $173000

    Required

    a. Identify the errors in the balance sheet.

    b. Using good form, prepare a corrected, classified balance sheet.

    c. Calculate the current ratio using the corrected amounts from the balance sheet prepared in b. What doest his ratio measure? Discuss the implications of Art Objects” current ratio.

    d. Explain why it is important to properly follow GAAP when preparing financial statements.

    analyzing transactions and preparing financial statements given the following trans 516997

    . Analyzing transactions and preparing financial statements. Given the following transactions(,L O 3)

    1. Leticia Shettles tarteda business,E xotic Travel Planners,b y contributing$ 5,000 on July 1, 2010, in exchange for common stock.

    2. The company borrowed $3,000 from the bank in July. The note is a l-yea4 l}Vo note, with both principal and interest to be repaid on June 30,2011.

    3. The company earned $1,085 in cash revenue during July.

    4. The company paid operating expenses of $725 for the month of July.

    5. The company made distributions to owners in the amount of $55 in July.

    6. At the end of July, $25 of interest payable is due on the note from #2.

    Required

    a. Show how each transaction affects the accounting equation.

    b. Prepare the four basic financial statements for the month of July (balance sheet at July 31).

    c. Give one additional piece of information related to the transactions that could be recorded in an information system for a purpose other than the financial statements.

    analyze transactions from the accounting equation prepare the four financial stateme 516998

    Analyze transactions from the accounting equation; prepare the four financial statements; and calculate the current ratio. The following accounting equation worksheet shows the transactions for Jackie Knight”s Furniture Repairs, a corporation, for the first month of business November2 007.( LO 4,5,1)

    Assets

    =

    Liabilities

    +

    Shareholders Equity

    Cash

    Accounts receivable

    Supplies

    Accounts payable

    Long-term payable

    Common stock

    Retained earnings

    1

    $2000

    $2000

    Common stock

    2

    4000

    4000

    3

    (5000)

    (5000)

    Operating Expense

    4

    1500

    1500

    Service

    Revenue

    5

    8000

    8000

    Service

    Revenue

    6

    4000

    4000

    7

    6000

    (6000)

    8

    (400)

    (400)

    9

    (3100)

    (3100)

    Salary

    Expense

    10

    (200)

    (200)

    Dividends

    Required

    a. Analyze each transaction in the accounting equation worksheet and describe the underlying exchange that resulted in each entry.

    b. Has the company been profitable this month? Explain.

    c. Prepare an income statement for the month ended November 30″2007.

    d. Prepare a statement f shareholders equity for the month ended ovember3 0,2007.

    e. Prepare a statement of cash flows for the month ended November 30,2001 .

    f. Prepare a balance sheet at November 30,2007 .

    g. Calculate the current ratio at November 30,2007. What does this ratio measure?

    analyzing transactions and preparing financial statements jackie chris and cindy sta 516999

    Analyzing transactions and preparing financial statements Jackie, Chris, and Cindy started their own consulting firm. They contributed $30,000 each in exchange for 3,000 shares of common stock and borrowed another$ 60,000b y signing a 1O-year note with Tallahassee Capital City Bank. They formed We Do It All Consulting Inc. on January I,2009. The business used available funds to purchase some land with an office building for $105,000 and office equipment and furniture for $25,000. The business also bought a computer system on account from Gateway Inc. for $21,500; payment was due at the beginning of the following year. (LO 3, 5) .

    · During the first year of business, We Do It A11 Consulting earned $185,000 in service revenue but had collected only $163,000; the remaining $22,000 was due early the next year.

    · Salary expenses for the year were $55,000, of which the company paid $45,000 in cash during the year; the remaining $10,000 was due the first day of the next year.

    · The company paid operating expenses of $27,500 in cash during the year.

    · Interest expense for the year was $3,500 but was not due until the note matured.

    · The company invested $ 18,000 of cash in a certificate of deposit at the end of the year.

    · we Do It All consulting declared and paid dividends of $4,800 during the year.

    Required

    a. Show how each transaction affects the accounting equation.

    b. Prepare the four basic financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2009. (The balance sheet at December 31,2009.)

    c. Calculate the current ratio at December 3l , 2009. What does this ratio measure? Discuss the implications of we Do It All consulting current ratio.

    the balance sheets for tootsie roll industries inc are shown here lo 3 5 517000

    The balance sheets for Tootsie Roll Industries Inc. are shown here.( Lo 3, 5)

    Assets

    31-Dec-05

    (in thousands)

    31-Dec-04

    Cash

    $91,336

    $56,989

    Investments

    54892

    32369

    Receivables

    33624

    37457

    Inventory

    55032

    58777

    Other current assets

    11712

    7101

    Net property plant & equipment

    178760

    178750

    Other noncurrent assets

    388340

    440310

    Total assets

    $813,696

    $811,753

    Liabilities

    Bank loan (short-term)

    32001

    6333

    Accounts payable

    17482

    19315

    Dividends payable

    4263

    3659

    Accrued liabilities

    44969

    44722

    Income taxes payable

    14941

    8288

    Total current liabilities

    113656

    82317

    Noncurrent Liabilities

    82635

    159257

    Total liabilities

    196291

    241574

    Contributed capital

    463108

    434047

    Retained earnings

    164236

    149055

    Other shareholders equity accounts net*

    (9939)

    (12923)

    617405

    570179

    Total liabilities and shareholders equity

    $813,696

    $811,753

    *This is an item you will learn about in a later chapter.

    Required

    a. What were the total current assets at December 31, 2004? 2005?

    b. How are the assets ordered on the balance sheet?

    c. What were the total current liabilities at December 31,2004? 2005?

    d. calculate the current ratio at December 31,2004 and December 31, 2005. what information do these numbers provide?

    selected information from the comparative balance sheets for sears holdings corporat 517001

    Selected information from the comparative balance sheets for Sears Holdings Corporation are presented here. Although some accounts are not listed, all of the current assets and current liabilities are given. (LO 3, 4,9)

    At January 28, 2006

    At January 26, 2005

    (dollars in millions)

    Cash

    $4440

    $3435

    Accounts receivable

    811

    646

    Inventory

    9068

    3281

    Other current assets

    888

    179

    Property, plant, and equipment

    9823

    315

    Accounts payable

    3458

    927

    Other current liabilities

    6892

    1154

    Long-term debt

    8612

    2101

    Total shareholder” equity

    11611

    4469

    Required

    a. Provide the following values at the end of each given financial year.

    1. Current assets

    2. Current liabilities

    3. Current ratio

    b. Based on your answers in part a, discuss the change in liquidity between the two years.

    a condensed statement of cash flows for apple computer inc for the year ended septem 517002

    A condensed statement of cash flows for Apple Computer Inc. for the year ended Septembe2r 4,2005, is shown here. Use it to answer the questions given after the statement. (L0 5)

    Apple Computer Inc.

    Statement of Cash Flows

    For the year ended September 24,2005

    (in millions)

    Cash and cash equivalents beginning of the year

    $2,969

    Cash generated by operating activities

    2535

    Investing cash flows:

    Purchase of short-term investments

    -11470

    Proceeds from maturities of short-term investments

    8609

    Purchase of property, plant, and equipment

    -260

    Other

    -21

    Cash generated by (used for) investing activities

    -2556

    Financing cash flows:

    Proceeds from issuance of common stock

    543

    Cash generated by (used for) financing activities

    543

    Increase(decrease)In cash and cash equivalents

    522

    Cash and cash equivalents end of the year

    $3,491

    Required

    a. Did Apple purchase any property, plant, or equipment during the year?

    b. If you were to examine Apple”s balance sheet at September 24, 2005, what would be the amount for cash and cash equivalents?

    c. Was cash generated from operations or used by operations? By what amount?

    d. Did Apple receive any new contributions from owners during the year? How can you tell?

    suppose a company had the following accounts and balances at year end 517025

    SE3-13. Calculate net income. (LO 1,4)

    Suppose a company had the following accounts and balances at year-end:

    Sales revenue

    $5,400

    Interest revenue

    $1,200

    Rent expense

    $1,240

    Other operating expenses

    $3,050

    Dividends

    $1,000

    Calculate net income by preparing the income statement for the year.

    royal company pays all salaried employees biweekly overtime pay however is paid in 517028

    E3-1 A. Account for salaries expense(.L O 1,2)

    Royal Company pays all salaried employees biweekly. Overtime pay, however, is paid in

    the next biweekly period. Royal accrues salary expense only at its December 31 year-end.

    Information about salaries earned in December 2007 is as follows:

    · Last payroll was paid on December 26,2007 , for the 2-week period ended December 26, 2001.

    · Overtime pay earned in the 2-week period ended December 26,2007 was $5,000.

    · Remaining workdays in 2007 were December 29, 30,31; no overtime was worked on these days.

    · The regular biweekly salaries total $90,000.

    Using a 5-day workweek, what will Royal Company”s balance sheet show as salaries

    payable on December 31,2007?

    show each of the following transactions in the accounting equation then tell whether 517033

    E3-9A. Analyze timing of revenue recognition. (LO I, 2, 3)

    Show each of the following transactions in the accounting equation. Then, tell whether or not the original transaction as given is one that results in the recognition of revenue or expenses.

    a. Dell Inc. paid its computer service Technicians $ 80,000 in salaries for the month ended January 31.

    b. Shell Oil used$ 5,000 worth of electricity in its head quarter building during March. Shell received the bill, but will not pay it until sometime in April.

    c. In2006, Chico”s, FAS had $22 million in catalogue sales. Assume all sales were recorded as credit sales.

    d. Home Depot collected$ 59 million in interest and investment in come during 2006. E3-10A. Account for rent expense(.L O 1, 3)

    BNP Company started the year with $3,000 of prepaid rent, $15,000 of cash, and $18,000 of common stock. During the year, BNP paid additional rent in advance amounting to $10,000.T he rent expense for the year was $12,000.W hat was the balance in prepaid

    rent on the year-end balance sheet?

    i only need the formula for step 4 downtown theater sales exploring excel ch 08 eoc 517790

    I only need the “formula for step #4” Downtown Theater Sales – Exploring Excel Ch 08 EOC Project. 4 Group the Week 1, Week 2, Week 3, and Week 4 worksheets together. In cell C11, insert a formula that will calculate Sunday’s Orchestra Front revenue, which is based on the number of seats sold and the price per seat. Modify the price per seat reference so that the column reference is absolute. Copy the formula to the range C11:G14.

    Document Preview:

    Downtown Theater Sales Project Description: You are an accounting assistant for Downtown Theater in San Diego. Your task is to analyze the weekly and monthly ticket sales by seating type for the fourth quarter of the year. To complete this project, you will create validation rules, locate and fix invalid data, enter and format data on grouped worksheets, create 3-D formulas, and insert hyperlinks. Additionally, you will use the Error Checking feature to locate and correct errors in the formulas. Instructions: For the purpose of grading the project you are required to perform the following tasks: Step?Instructions?Points Possible??1?Start Excel. Download, save, and open the Excel workbook named Exploring_e08_Grader_EOC.xlsx. Click OK to acknowledge the error.?0??2?On the Week 1 worksheet, create a validation rule for the range C3:G3 so that only whole numbers that are less than or equal to 86 are accepted. Create an input message using the text Orchestra Front as the title and Enter the number of tickets sold per day. (including the period) as the message. Create an error alert using the stop style. Title the error alert Invalid Entry and enter Please enter a whole number that is less than or equal to 86. (including the period) as the message.?8??3?Circle the invalid data on the Week 1 worksheet, and then change each invalid entry to the maximum number of applicable seats.?4??4?Group the Week 1, Week 2, Week 3, and Week 4 worksheets together. In cell C11, insert a formula that will calculate Sunday’s Orchestra Front revenue, which is based on the number of seats sold and the price per seat. Modify the price per seat reference so that the column reference is absolute. Copy the formula to the range C11:G14.?9??5?With the worksheets grouped together, in cell H11, insert a formula to calculate the weekly seating totals. Copy the formula down through cell H14.?9??6?With the worksheets still grouped together, in cell C15, insert a formula to calculate the total…

    Attachments:

    2013 taxation of individual and business entities appendix c corporate tax return pr 520453

    CORPORATE TAX RETURN PROBLEM 2

    Required:

    • Complete Blue Catering Service Inc.’s (BCS) 2011 Form 1120, Schedule D, and Schedule G (if applicable) using the information provided below.

    • Form 4562 for depreciation is not required. Include the amount of tax depreciation given in the problem on the appropriate line on the first page of Form 1120.

    • Assume that BCS does not owe any alternative minimum tax.

    • If any information is missing, use reasonable assumptions to fill in the gaps.

    • The forms, schedules, and instructions can be found at the IRS Web site (www.irs.gov). The instructions can be helpful in completing the forms.

    Facts:

    Cara Siler, Janna Funk, and Valerie Cloward each own one-third of the common stock of Blue Catering Services Inc. (BCS). BCS was incorporated on February 4, 2008. It has only one class of stock outstanding and operates as a C corporation for tax purposes. BCS caters all types of social events throughout southern California.

    • BCS is located at 540 Waverly Way, San Diego, CA 92101.

    • BCS’s Employer Identification Number is 38-4743474.

    Page C-17

    • BCS’s business activity is catering food and services. Its business activity code is 722300.

    • The shareholders also work as officers for the corporation as follows:

      • Cara is the chief executive officer and president (Social Security number 231-54-8976).

      • Janna is the executive vice president and chief operating officer (Social Security number 798-56-3241).

      • Valerie is the vice president of finance (BSocial Security number 879-21-4536).

    • All officers devote 100 percent of their time to the business and all officers are U.S. citizens.

    • BCS uses the accrual method of accounting and has a calendar year-end.

    • BCS made four equal estimated tax payments of $20,000 each. Its tax liability last year was $70,000. If it has overpaid its federal tax liability, BCS would like to receive a refund.

    • BCS paid a dividend of $30,000 to its shareholders on November 1. BCS had ample earnings and profits (E&P) to absorb the distribution.

    The following is BCS’s audited income statement for 2011:

    BCS

    Income Statement

    For year ending December 31, 2011

    Revenue from sales

    $1,800,000

    Sales returns and allowances

    (5,000)

    Cost of goods sold

    (350,000)

    Gross profit from operations

    $1,445,000

    ?Other income:

    Capital loss

    (15,000)

    Dividend income

    25,000

    Interest income (7,000 taxable)

    10,000

    Gross income

    $1,465,000

    ????Expenses:

    Compensation

    (950,000)

    Depreciation

    (10,000)

    Bad debt expense

    (15,000)

    Meals and entertainment

    (3,000)

    Maintenance

    (6,000)

    Property taxes

    (11,000)

    State income taxes

    (45,000)

    Other taxes

    (44,000)

    Rent

    (60,000)

    Interest

    (5,000)

    Advertising

    (52,000)

    Professional services

    (16,000)

    Employee benefits

    (32,000)

    Supplies

    (5,000)

    Other expenses

    (27,000)+

    6000

    Total expenses

    (1,281,000)

    Income before taxes

    184,000

    Federal income tax expense

    (62,000)

    Net income after taxes

    $?122,000

    Page C-18

    Notes:

    1. BCS’s inventory-related purchases during 2011 were $360,000. It values its inventory based on cost using the FIFO inventory cost flow method. Assume the rules of A?§263A do not apply to BCS.

    2. Of the $10,000 interest income, $1,250 was from a City of Irvine bond that was used to fund public activities (issued in 2005), $1,750 was from an Oceanside city bond used to fund private activities (issued in 2004), $1,000 was from a U.S. Treasury bond, and the remaining $6,000 was from a money market account.

    3. BCS’s dividend income came from Clever Cakes Inc. (CC). BCS owned 10,000 shares of the stock in Clever Cakes at the beginning of the year. This represented 10 percent of SSM outstanding stock.

    4. On October 1, 2011, BCS sold 1,000 shares of its CC stock for $25,000. It had originally purchased these shares on April 18, 2008, for $40,000. After the sale, BCS owned 9 percent of CC.

    5. BCS’s compensation is as follows:

      • Cara $150,000

      • Janna $140,000

      • Valerie $130,000

      • Other $530,000

    6. BCS wrote off $25,000 in accounts receivable as uncollectible during the year.

    7. BCS’s regular tax depreciation was $28,000. None of the depreciation should be claimed on Form 1125A.

    8. The $5,000 interest expense was from a business loan.

    9. Other expenses include $6,000 for premiums paid on term life insurance policies for which BCS is the beneficiary. The policies cover the lives of Cara, Janna, and Valerie.

    The following are BCS’s audited balance sheets as of January 1, 2011, and December 31, 2011.

    2011

    January 1

    December 31

    ????Assets

    Cash

    $?180,000

    $?205,000

    Accounts receivable

    560,000

    580,000

    Allowance for doubtful accounts

    (60,000)

    (50,000)

    Inventory

    140,000

    150,000

    U.S. government bonds12

    20,000

    20,000

    State and local bonds

    120,000

    120,000

    Investments in stock

    400,000

    360,000

    Fixed assets

    140,000

    160,000

    Accumulated depreciation

    (50,000)

    (60,000)+

    18,000

    Other assets

    20,000

    21,000

    Total assets

    $1,470,000

    $1,506,000

    ?Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity

    Accounts payable

    280,000

    240,000

    Other current liabilities

    20,000

    18,000

    Other liabilities

    40,000

    26,000

    Capital stock

    400,000

    400,000

    Retained earnings

    730,000

    822,000

    Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

    $1,470,000

    $1,506,000

    you will prepare three years of financial statements for the xxx company to include 510224

    You will prepare three years of financial statements for the XXX Company, to include:

    • Two-Statement Format of Comprehensive Income; See Illustration 4-19 in the textbook
    • Balance Sheet
    • Statement of Owners’ Equity

    You will do this twice, each time using a different set of accounting rules. Recall that items of Other Comprehensive Income are reported net of taxes, in the same manner as Extraordinary Items are reported; See Illustration 4-17 in the textbook for how Extraordinary Items are reported. Do not call the company XXX, but instead give it your name (e.g. Lisa Smith Company, Dalai Lama Company, Jorge Martinez Company).

    Problem Data: Deferred Revenue Recognition on a Rental Agreement

    On September 30 20×1, XXX Company rented to a tenant a small office space in its Dilapitated Visions Complex.

    The tenant is not obligated to continue the lease beyond Summer 20×2, but pays $25,000 cash upfront towards the $1,000 monthly rent (25 months’ rent received in advance).

    This is not a capital lease.

    Excluding income taxes and the income effects of this rental, XXX Company has (GAAP and Tax) income of $111,111 in 20×1, $222,222 in 20×2, and $333,333 in 20×3.

    The IRS requires rent to be included in taxable income in the year received

    The income tax rate is a flat 10% for all relevant years.

    At January 1, 20×1, the balance sheet showed Common Stock of $444,444, Retained Earnings of $555,555, and zero Accumulated OCI.

    The only change to Common Stock during these three years was an issuance of $88,888 of stock at par value in 20×2.

    Report Using Current US-GAAP

    Under current US-GAAP, the cash receipt is recorded as a liability (e.g. Unearned Revenue) and amortized to income at a rate of $1,000 per month. Prepare the statements, clearly labeling them as current GAAP.

    Reporting Using “FASB Fantasy GAAP”

    Suppose the FASB changed the appropriate accounting for the prepayment. The new rule says to recognize the cash receipt immediately in comprehensive income, and include it in Net Income only as earned (again, at $1,000 per month). Prepare the statements, clearly labeling them as FASB Fantasy GAAP.

    acc 400 week 5 individual assignment 512308

    The condensed financial statements of Westward Corporation for 2006 are presented below.

    Westward CorporationWestward Corporation

    Balance SheetIncome Statement

    December 31, 2006For the Year Ended December 31, 2006

    AssetsRevenues$2,000,000

    Current assetsExpenses

    Cash and temporaryCost of goods sold1,080,000

    investments$30,000Selling and administrative

    Accounts receivable70,000expenses495,000

    Inventories120,000Interest expense30,000

    Total current assets220,000Total expenses1,605,000

    Property, plant, andIncome before income taxes395,000

    equipment (net)780,000Income tax expense140,000

    Total assets$1,000,000Net income$255,000

    Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

    Current liabilities$80,000

    Long-term liabilities300,000

    Common stockholders’ equity620,000

    Total liabilities and

    stockholders’ equity$1,000,000

    Westward CorporationWestward Corporation

    Balance SheetIncome Statement

    December 31, 2005For the Year Ended December 31, 2005

    AssetsRevenues$2,500,000

    Current assetsExpenses

    Cash and temporaryCost of goods sold1,750,000

    investments$40,000Selling and administrative

    Accounts receivable90,000expenses500,000

    Inventories150,000Interest expense30,000

    Total current assets280,000Total expenses2,280,000

    Property, plant, andIncome before income taxes220,000

    equipment (net)800,000Income tax expense77,000

    Total assets$1,080,000Net income$143,000

    Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

    Current liabilities$140,000

    Long-term liabilities320,000

    Common stockholders’ equity620,000

    Total liabilities and

    stockholders’ equity$1,080,000

    Additional data as of December 31, 2004: Inventory = $100,000; Total assets = $900,000; Common stockholders’ equity = $540,000.

    Instructions

    1. Compute the following listed ratios for 2006 and 2005 showing supporting calculations.

    (a)Current ratio = ___________________________________________________________.

    (b)Debt to total assets = _____________________________________________________.

    (c)Times interest earned = ___________________________________________________.

    (d)Inventory turnover = ______________________________________________________.

    (e)Profit margin ratio = ______________________________________________________.

    (f)Return on common stockholders’ equity = ____________________________________.

    (g)Return on assets = _______________________________________________________.

    1. Perform horizontal and vertical analysis on Westward both income statement and balance sheet, show your results.
    2. Assess the financial performance of Westward, given the analysis tools used above.

    managerial accounting 513749

    Here is the adjusted assignment that’s needed:
    Problem 18-1A

    Telly Savalas owns the Bonita Barber Shop. He employs7barbers and pays each a base rate of $1,100per month. One of the barbers serves as the manager and receives an extra $500per month. In addition to the base rate, each barber also receives a commission of $5.70per haircut.
    Other costs are as follows.

    Advertising $220 per month
    Rent $940 per month
    Barber supplies $0.40 per haircut
    Utilities $175 per month plus $0.20per haircut
    Magazines $30 per month

    Telly currently charges $11.50per haircut.

    Determine the variable cost per haircut and the total monthly fixed costs.(Round variable costs to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.25.)

    Total variable cost per haircut $
    Total fixed $

    LINK TO TEXTLINK TO TEXT LINK TO VIDEO
    Compute the break-even point in units and dollars.(Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 1,225.)

    Break-even point haircuts
    Break-even point $

    LINK TO TEXT LINK TO VIDEO
    Determine net income, assuming2,340haircuts are given in a month.

    Net income $

    LINK TO TEXTLINK TO TEXT LINK TO VIDEO

    Exercise 18-9

    The Green Acres Inn is trying to determine its break-even point. The inn has 50 rooms that it rents at $75a night. Operating costs are as follows.

    Salaries $8,673 per month
    Utilities $1,859 per month
    Depreciation $1,239 per month
    Maintenance $619 per month
    Maid service $9 per room
    Other costs $36 per room

    Determine the inn’s break-even point in (1) number of rented rooms per month and (2) dollars.

    (1) Break-even point rooms
    (2) Break-even point $

    Exercise 18-11

    Kare Kars provides shuttle service between four hotels near a medical center and an international airport. Kare Kars uses two 10-passenger vans to offer 12 round trips per day. A recent month’s activity in the form of a cost-volume-profit income statement is shown below.

    Fare revenues (1,400fares) $35,000
    Variable costs
    Fuel $4,200
    Tolls and parking 2,100
    Maintenance 700 7,000
    Contribution margin 28,000
    Fixed costs
    Salaries 14,110
    Depreciation 1,328
    Insurance 1,162 16,600
    Net income $11,400

    (a)Calculate the break-even point in (1) dollars and (2) number of fares.


    (1) Break-even point $
    (2) Break-even point fares

    (b)Without calculations, determine the contribution margin at the break-even point.


    Contribution margin at the break-even point $

    LINK TO TEXT

    on january 1 of the current year anna and jason form an equal partnership anna contr 515904

    On January 1 of the current year, Anna and Jason form an equal partnership. Anna contributes $50,000 cash and a parcel of land (adjusted basis of $100,000; fair market value of $150,000) in exchange for her interest in the partnership. Jason contributes property (adjusted basis of $180,000; fair market value of $200,000) in exchange for his partnership interest. Which of the following statements is true concerning the income tax results of this partnership formation?

    A.Jason recognizes a $20,000 gain on his property transfer.

    B.Jason has a $200,000 tax basis for his partnership interest.

    C.Anna has a $150,000 tax basis for her partnership interest.

    D.The partnership has a $150,000 adjusted basis in the land contributed by Anna.

    E.None of the statements is true.

    which of the following would be currently taxable as ordinary income to the service 515917

    Which of the following would be currently taxable as ordinary income to the service partner if received in exchange for services performed for the partnership? (In all cases, assume the interest is not sold within two years after the time it is granted to the service partner.)

    A.A 10% interest in the capital of the partnership that will vest in 3 years.

    B.A 20% interest in the future profits of the partnership received in exchange for future services to be performed for the partnership.

    C.A 25% interest in the capital of the partnership where there are no restrictions on transferability of the interest.

    D.A 30% interest in ongoing profits of the partnership where the partnership is not a publicly-traded partnership and the income stream is not assured.

    E.All of the above.

    which of the following statements is not a requirement of the substantial economic e 515928

    Which of the following statements is not a requirement of the substantial economic effect test?

    A.Income, gains, losses, and deductions must be allocated to the partners in accordance with their capital contributions.

    B.An allocation of income must increase the partner’s capital account balance, and an allocation of deduction must decrease the partner’s capital account balance.

    C.A partner with a negative capital account balance must “restore” that capital account, generally by contributing cash to the partnership.

    D.On liquidation of the partner’s interest in the partnership, the partner must receive assets that have a fair market value equal to that partner’s (positive) capital account balance.

    E.All of the above statements are requirements of the substantial economic effect test.

    elements of the financial statements for each of the following items give the finan 516963

    . Elements of the financial statements. For each of the following items, give the financial statement on which it would appear. (Hint: some items will appear on more than one financial statement.()L O 3)

    Cash

    Common stock

    Sales revenue

    Accounts receivable

    Cost of goods sold

    Net cash from operations

    Equipment

    Retained earnings

    Long-term debt

    Net income

    gaap and the income statement one of your friends started a business in 2008 at the 516969

    GAAP and the income statement One of your friends started a business in 2008. At the end of the first year, December 31, 2008, he prepared the following income statement. Give three examples from the statement that indicate the statement was not prepared according to GAAP. (LO 1,3)

    Sale

    $2700

    Inventory purchase

    (1500)

    Rent for 2008 and 2009

    (975)

    Cash on hand

    8650

    Due from customers

    1400

    Net income

    $10275

    relevance and reliability your car has broken down so you have decided to look 516970

    Relevance and reliability. Your car has broken down, so you have decided to look

    for a replacement. You find an advertisement on the Internet for a used Lexus. When you

    contact the owner, this is what you find: (LO 2)

    1. The car is a 2005 model.

    2. The owner says he used the car only for driving to and from work.

    3. The odometer reading is 68,759 miles.

    4. The owner says that he had the oil changed every 3,000 to 5,000 miles since he bought the car new.

    5. The owner says this is the best car he has ever owned.

    6. The owner will provide a maintenance record prepared by a licensed mechanic. Evaluate each item from the preceding list in terms of its relevance to the decision about whether to buy this car. Then, evaluate each item with respect to its reliability. What additional documentation or supporting evidence would you want for your decision?

    elements of the financial statements the following accounts and balances were taken 516971

    Elements of the financial statements. The following accounts and balances were taken from the financial statements of Brand Names at a Discount Inc. For each item, identify the financial statement(s) on which the item would appear. Then, identify each balance sheet item as an asset, a liability, or a shareholders” equity account.( LO 3)

    Van

    $50,000

    Interest receivable

    32,500

    Cash

    78,000

    Short-term notes payable

    15,875

    Net cash from operating activities

    28,000

    Building

    3 1,853

    Common stock

    75,000

    Retained earnings

    100,000

    Net cash from investing activities

    40,000

    Interest payable

    650

    Long-term mortgage payable

    85,000

    Salaries payable

    1315

    Net cash from financing activities

    10,000

    net income and retained earnings marge s seafood market inc reported the following i 516972

    Net income and retained earnings. Marge”s Seafood Market Inc. reported the following (incomplete) information in its records for 2007: (LO 3)

    Net income

    $15000

    Sales

    105000

    Beginning balance-retained earnings

    30000

    Cost of goods sold

    60000

    Dividends paid

    2000

    a. If the sales revenue given is the only revenue for the year, what were the expenses for the year other than cost of goods sold?

    b. What does the beginning balance of $30,000 for retained earnings mean? Is this useful information for potential investors?

    c. What is the balance of retained earnings at the end of 2001?

    elements of the financial statements listed are elements of the financial statements 516973

    Elements of the financial statements Listed are elements of the financial statements discussed in this chapter. Match each element with the descriptions (use each as many times as necessary)(.L O 3)

    a. Assets

    b. Liabilities

    c. Shareholders” equity

    d. Revenues

    e. Expenses

    1

    Debts of the company

    2

    Economic resources with future benefit

    3

    Inflows of assets from delivering or producing goods or services

    4

    Things of value a company owns

    5

    The residual interest in the assets of an entity that remains after deducting its liabilities

    6

    The difference between what the company has and what the company owes

    7

    The owner”s interest in the company

    8

    Outflows or using up of assets from delivering or producing goods on servlces

    9

    Costs that have no future value

    10

    The amount the company owes

    11

    Sales

    classified balance sheet preparation the following items were taken from the decembe 516976

    Classified balance sheet preparation. The following items were taken from the December3 1.2011. financial statements of Health traners Inc. (All dollars are in millions.) Prepare a classified balance sheet as of December 31, 2011,(LO 3)

    Property and equipment

    $4776

    Accounts payable

    1560

    Common stock

    1980

    Other non current liabilities

    1200

    Long-term investment

    3218

    Retained earnings

    10348

    Short-term investment

    1689

    Other current assets

    554

    Cash

    1240

    Other non current assets

    2487

    Accounts receivable

    1200

    Current portion of long-term debt

    340

    Inventories

    1134

    Long-term debt

    870

    gaap and the balance sheet one of your friends started a business in 2008 at the end 516980

    GAAP and the balance sheet. One of your friends started a business in 2008. At the end of the first year, December 31, 2008, he prepared the following balance sheet. Give three examples from the statement that indicate the statement was not prepared according to GAAP. (LO 1,3)

    Assets

    Liabilities

    Cash

    $2,000

    Notes payable

    $ 1,ooo

    Revenues

    1000

    Expenses

    1,000

    Total assets

    $3,000

    Total liabilities

    2,000

    Common stock

    1,500

    Total liabilities & shareholders equity

    $3,500

    relevance and reliability you have decided to open a restaurant so you look around i 516981

    Relevance and reliability. You have decided to open a restaurant, so you look around in your area to see if an established restaurant is for sale. You find an advertisement in the newspaper for a local sandwich shop for sale. When you contact the owner, this is what you find: (LO 2)

    1. The restaurant has been open for 10 years.

    2, The owner says owning the sandwich shop is a lot of fun.

    3. The sandwich shop has increased profits each year, and the owner can provide financial records.

    4. The sandwich shop location is downtown.

    5. The owner says the building housing the restaurant has been remodeled and brought into compliance with all codes and regulations in the past year, and he can provide documentation.

    6. The owner says the red carpet is the most beautiful carpet ever made. Evaluate each item from the preceding list in terms of its relevance to the decision about whether to buy this restaurant. Then, evaluate each item with respect to its reliability. What additional documentation or supporting evidence would you want for your decision?

    elements of the financial statements the following accounts and balances were taken 516982

    Elements of the financial statements. The following accounts and balances were taken from the financial statements of Quality Products Inc. For each item, identify the financial statement(s) on which the item would appear. Then, identify each balance sheet item as an asset ,a liability, or a shareholders” equity account.( LO 3)

    Equipment

    $231,300

    Accounts receivable

    52,300

    Cash

    51,890

    Short-term notes payable

    23,200

    Net cash from investing activities

    89,300

    Land

    45,200

    Common stock

    100,000

    Retained earnings

    75,000

    Net cash from financial activities

    45,980

    Accounts payable

    32,100

    Long-term mortgage payable

    54,000

    Interest payable

    2,500

    Net cash from operating activities

    54,350

    net income and retained earnings manny s cuban bistro inc reported the following inc 516983

    Net income and retained earnings. Manny”s Cuban Bistro Inc. reported the following (incomplete) information in its records for 2009: (LO 3)

    Net income

    $17,850

    Sales

    75000

    Beginning balance-retained earnings

    20000

    Cost of goods sold

    40000

    Dividends paid

    3500

    a. If the sales revenue given is the only revenue for the year, what were the expenses for the year other than cost of goods sold?

    b. What does the beginning balance of $20,000 for retained earnings mean? Is this useful information for potential investors?

    c. What is the balance of retained earnings at the end of 2009?

    classified balance sheet preparation the following items were taken from the decembe 516984

    Classified balance sheet preparation. The following items were taken from the December 3I, 2012, financial statements of Calorie Counter Food Stores Inc. (Al1 dollars are in thousands).Prepare a classified balance sheet as of December3 1,2012. (LO 3)

    Land and building

    $5,800

    Accounts payable

    5073

    Common stock

    2104

    Other non current liabilities

    1311

    Long-term investments

    2200

    Retained earnings

    6450

    Short-term investments

    1370

    Other current assets

    656

    Cash

    1300

    Other non current assets

    2300

    Accounts receivable

    1140

    Current portion of long-term debt

    203

    Inventories

    1195

    Long-term debt

    820

    analyzing transactions results advertising inc entered into the following transactio 516986

    Analyzing transactions. Results Advertising Inc. entered into the following transactions during 2008: (LO 3)

    1. Results Advertising Inc. started as a corporation with a $6,500 cash contribution from the owners in exchange for common stock.

    2. Sales on account amounted to $4,100.

    3. Cash collections of accounts receivable amounted to $3,900.

    4. On October1 , 2008, the company paid $1,800i n advance for an insurance policy. The policy does not go into effect until 2009.

    Required

    Put each of the transactions in an accounting equation worksheet. Then, answer the following questions:

    a. What is the amount of cash flow from operating activities for 2008?

    b. What amount of total liabilities would appear on the Results Advertising December 31,2008, balance sheet?

    c. What is the amount of contributed capital as of December 31, 2008?

    d. What amount of net income would appear on the income statement for the year ended December 31, 2008?

    identify errors using gaap prepare a classified balance sheet and calculate the curr 516987

    Identify errors using GAAP; prepare a classified balance sheet; and calculate the current ratio. An inexperienced accountant has put together a balance sheet for Wings and

    Things Inc. The balances shown are at June 30,2011. (LO 1, 3, 5)

    Assets

    Liabilities and Equity

    Current assets:

    Current liabilities

    Cash

    $27000

    Prepaid insurance

    $2000

    Accounts receivable

    6000

    Interest receivable

    5000

    Land

    30000

    Salaries payable

    8000

    Supplies

    5000

    Intangible assets

    39000

    Operating expenses

    2000

    Accounts payable

    3000

    Total current assets

    70000

    Total current liabilities

    57000

    Salaries payable

    46000

    Shareholder”s equity

    Building

    36000

    Retained earnings

    40000

    Equipment

    13000

    Common stock

    62000

    Intangible assets

    6000

    Short-term note

    10000

    Total noncurrent assets

    101000

    Total shareholders equity

    112000

    Total assets

    $171000

    Total liabilities and equity

    $169000

    Required

    a. Identify the errors in the balance sheet.

    b. Using good form, prepare a corrected, classified balance sheet.

    c. Calculate the current ratio using the corrected amounts from the balance sheet prepared in b. What does this ratio measure? Discuss the implications of Wings and Things” current ratio.

    d. Explain why it is important to properly follow GAAP when preparing financial statements.

    a review of selected financial activities of visconti s 510195

    Current liabilities: entries and disclosure. A review of selected financial activities of Visconti s during 20XX disclosed the following:

    1-Dec: Borrowed $30,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3-month, 15% note payable.
    Interest and principal are due at maturity.
    10-Dec: Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to
    total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates
    that 3% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit (parts only).
    22-Dec: Purchased $20,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
    26-Dec: Borrowed $7,000 from First City Bank; signed a 15% note payable due in 60 days. (Assume 360 day year for interest)
    31-Dec: Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162
    31-Dec: Accrued three days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.

    Instructions
    a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
    b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest for each of the notes payable.

    Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:
    2-Aug: Borrowed $60,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 90-day, 12% note.
    20-Aug: Issued a $55,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $55,000 delivery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest r ate.
    10-Sep: Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued
    a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.
    11-Sep: Issued a $55,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account
    payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and carries a 14% interest rate.
    10-Oct: The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.
    11-Oct: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.
    30-Oct: Paid note to Bank of Kingsville.

    Instructions
    a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
    b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest. (Daily interest is calculated utilizing the 360 day method).
    c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of December 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.

    salt source inc s corporation tax return problem 510196

    S CORPORATION TAX RETURN PROBLEM Required: Using the information provided below, complete Salt Source Inc. s (SSI) latest Form 1120S. Also complete Kim Bentley s Schedule K-1. Form 4562 for depreciation is not required. Include the amount of tax depreciation given in the problem on the appropriate line on the first page of Form 1120S. If any information is missing, use reasonable assumptions to fill in the gaps. The forms, schedules, and instructions can be found at the IRS Web site (www.irs.gov). The instructions can be helpful in completing the forms. Facts: Salt Source Inc. (SSI) was formed as a corporation on January 5, 2008, by its two owners Kim Bentley and James Owens. SSI immediately elected to be taxed as an S corporation for federal income tax purposes. SSI sells salt to retailers throughout the Rocky Mountain region. Kim owns 70 percent of the SSI common stock (the only class of stock outstanding) and James owns 30 percent. SSI is located at 4200 West 400 North, Salt Lake City, UT 84116. SSI s Employer Identification Number is XXXXX SSI s business activity is wholesale sales. Itsbusiness activity code is 424990. Both shareholders work as employees of the corporation. Kim is the president of SSI (Social Security number XXX-XX-XXXX). Kim s address is 1842 East 8400 South, Sandy, UT 84094. James is the vice president of SSI (Social Security number XXX-XX-XXXX). James s address is 2002 East 8145 South, Sandy, UT 84094. SSI uses the accrual method of accounting and has a calendar year-end. C-18 Appendix C The following is SSI s 2011 income statement: SSI Income Statement For year ending December 31, 2011 Revenue from sales 980000 Sales returns and allowances (10000) Cost of goods sold (110000) Gross profit from operations 860000 Other income: Dividend income 15000 Interest income 5000 Gross income 880000 Expenses: Compensation ($600,000) Depreciation (10000) Bad debt expense (14000) Meals and entertainment (2000) Maintenance (8,000) Business interest (1000) Property taxes (7000) Charitable contributions (10000) Other taxes (30000) Rent (28000) Advertising (14000) Professional services (11000) Employee benefits (12000) Supplies (3,000) Other expenses (21000) Total expenses (771000) Net income 109000 Notes: 1. SSI s purchases during 2011 were $115,000. It values its inventory based on cost using the FIFO inventory cost flow method. Assume the rules of 263A do not apply to SSI. 2. Of the $5,000 interest income, $2,000 was from a West Jordan city bond used to fund public activities (issued in 2007) and $3,000 was from a money market account. 3. SSI s dividend income comes from publicly traded stocks that SSI has owned for two years. 4. SSI s compensation is as follows: Kim $120,000 James $80,000 Other $400,000. 5. SSI wrote off $6,000 in accounts receivable as uncollectible during the year. 6. SSI s regular tax depreciation was $17,000. AMT depreciation was $13,000, 7. SSI distributed $60,000 to its shareholders. 8. SSI is not required to compute the amount in its accumulated adjustments account. The following are SSI s book balance sheets as of January 1, 2011, and December 31, 2011. Assets Cash Jan1 90000 dec31 143000 Accounts receivable 300000 310000 Allowance for doubtful accounts (60000) (68000) Inventory 45,000 50000 State and local bonds 38000 38000 Investments in stock 82000 82000 Fixed assets 100000 100000 Accumulated depreciation (20000) (30000) Other assets 20000 21000 Total assets 595000 646000 Liabilities and Shareholders Equity Accounts payable 60000 55000 Other current liabilities 5000 8000 Other liabilities 10000 14000 Capital stock 200000 200000 Retained earnings 320000 369000 Total liabilities and shareholders equity 595000 646000

    scully corporation s comparative balance sheets are presented below 510197

    Scully Corporation s comparative balance sheets are presented below.

    SCULLY CORPORATION

    Balance Sheets

    December 31

    2011

    2010

    Cash

    $ 4,300

    $ 3,700

    Accounts receivable

    21,200

    23,400

    Inventory

    10,000

    7,000

    Land

    20,000

    26,000

    Building

    70,000

    70,000

    Accumulated depreciation

    (15,000)

    (10,000)

    Total

    $110,500.00

    $120,100.00

    Accounts payable

    $ 12,370

    $31,100

    Common stock

    75,000

    69,000

    Retained earnings

    23,130

    20,000

    Total

    $110,500.00

    $120,100.00

    Scully s 2011 income statement included net sales of $100,000, cost of goods sold $60,000, and net income of $15,000.

    Compute the following ratios for 2011:

    (a) Current ratio

    (b) Acid-test ratio

    (c) Receivables turnover

    (d) Inventory turnover

    (e) Profit margin

    (f) Asset turnover

    (g) Return on assets

    (h) Return on common stockholders equity

    (i) Debt to total assets ratio

    sherper s boards sells a snowboard xpert that is popular with snowboard enthusiasts 510199

    Sherper s Boards sells a snowboard, Xpert, that is popular with snowboard enthusiasts. Information relating to Sherper s purchases of Xpert snowboards during September is shown below. During the same month, 259 Xpert snowboards were sold. Sherper s uses a periodic inventory system.

    Date

    Explanation

    Units

    Unit Cost

    Total Cost

    Sept. 1

    Inventory

    49

    $97

    $4,753.00

    Sept. 12

    Purchases

    96

    103

    9,888

    Sept. 19

    Purchases

    43

    109

    4,687

    Sept. 26

    Purchases

    94

    112

    10,528

    Totals

    282

    $29,856

    (a) Compute the ending inventory at September 30 and cost of goods sold using the FIFO and LIFO methods.

    FIFO

    LIFO

    The ending inventory at September 30

    Cost of goods sold

    (b) For both FIFO and LIFO, calculate the sum of ending inventory and cost of goods sold.

    FIFO

    LIFO

    The sum of ending inventory and cost of goods sold

    st leo mba 560 module 4 quiz 510200

    St. Leo MBA 560 module 4 test

    1.Quayle Company has been sued by a customer who claims injury from use of Quayle s product. The company s lawyers and a consultant believe the likelihood of a judgment against Quayle is remote. What should Quayle do to account for this potential liability? (Points : 2)

    Recognize the liability and report it on the balance sheet.
    Provide disclosure in the footnotes to the financial statements.
    Report an allowance account on the balance sheet.
    Do nothing.

    2.How does the amortization of the principal balance affect the amount of interest expense recorded each succeeding year? (Points : 2)

    Has no effect on interest expense each succeeding year
    Increases the amount of interest expense each succeeding year
    Reduces the amount of interest expense each succeeding year
    The effect depends on the interest rate

    3.Borrowing by issuing a note payable is a(n): (Points : 2)

    asset source transaction.
    asset use transaction.
    asset exchange transaction.
    claims exchange transaction.

    4.A current asset is a(n): (Points : 2)

    asset that will be used in the operating activities of a business.
    asset generated by the operations of a business within the past year.
    asset that is expected to be used or converted to cash within one year or the operating
    cycle, whichever is longer.
    miscellaneous asset that is small in dollar amount.

    5.Applegate Company experienced an accounting event that affected its financial statements as indicated below:

    Assets

    =

    Liab.

    + Equity

    Rev.

    Exp.

    = Net Inc.

    Cash Flow

    NA

    +

    -F/A – OA

    Which of the following accounting events could have caused these effects on Knight’s statements? (Points : 2)

    Made a payment on a term loan
    Borrowed funds through a line of credit
    Paid interest on bonds
    Repaid principal on bonds at maturity

    6.Current liabilities include: (Points : 2)

    some notes payable.
    taxes payable.
    the current portion of some long-term liabilities.
    all of the above.

    7.Locke Company issued bonds payable. Which of the following choices accurately reflects how the issue would affect Locke’s financial statements?

    Row

    Assets

    =

    Liab.

    +

    Equity

    Rev.

    Exp.

    =

    Net Inc.

    Cash Flow

    One

    +

    =

    +

    +

    NA

    NA

    +

    =

    NA

    NA

    Two

    +

    =

    +

    +

    +

    NA

    NA

    =

    NA

    + FA

    Three

    +

    =

    NA

    +

    +

    NA

    NA

    =

    NA

    + OA

    Four

    +

    =

    +

    +

    NA

    NA

    NA

    =

    NA

    + FA

    (Points : 2)

    Row One
    Row Two
    Row Three
    Row Four

    8.The Halogen Corporation issued a 5-year note payable on January 1, 2010 for $2,500. The interest rate is 5% and the annual payment of $578, due each December 31, includes both interest and principal. Which of the following correctly shows the effects of the December 31, 2011, payment?

    Row

    Assets

    =

    Liabilities

    +

    Equity

    Revenue

    Expenses

    =

    Net Inc.

    Cash

    One

    (578)

    =

    (476)

    +

    (102)

    NA

    102

    =

    (102)

    (476)FA/(102)OA

    Two

    578

    =

    578

    +

    NA

    NA

    NA

    =

    NA

    578FA

    Three

    (578)

    =

    (578)

    +

    NA

    NA

    NA

    =

    NA

    (578)FA

    Four

    (578)

    =

    (476)

    +

    (50)

    NA

    50

    =

    (50)

    (476)FA/(50)OA

    (Points : 2)

    Row One
    Row Two
    Row Three
    Row Four

    9.Liquidity refers to a company s ability to: (Points : 2)

    sell inventory in a timely manner.
    generate profits from operations.
    repay liabilities in the long run.
    generate cash flows to pay current liabilities.

    10.On January 1, 2010, Hays Corporation arranged a $3,000 line of credit with the Barnett Bank. It agreed to accept the bank’s offer of 1% above the prime rate with interest payments on December 31 of each year. All borrowings and payments on principal are to take place on January 1 of each year. Hays began its loan transactions with Barnett Bank by borrowing $1,000 on January 1, 2010. On January 1, 2011, Hays borrowed an additional $1,000 from Barnett Bank, bringing the total amount borrowed to $2,000. On January 1, 2012, Hays paid $500 on the principal of the loan. On December 31, 2012, Hays records the 2012 interest payment. The prime rate for 2012 was 5%. Which of the following answers shows the effect of the 2012 interest payment on the financial statements?

    Row

    Assets

    =

    Liabilities

    +

    Equity

    Revenue

    Expenses

    =

    Net Inc.

    Cash

    One

    (75)

    =

    (75)

    +

    NA

    NA

    NA

    =

    NA

    (75) FA

    Two

    (75)

    =

    NA

    +

    (75)

    NA

    75

    =

    (75)

    (75) OA

    Three

    (90)

    =

    (90)

    +

    NA

    NA

    NA

    =

    NA

    (90) FA

    Four

    (90)

    =

    NA

    +

    (90)

    NA

    90

    =

    (90)

    (90) OA

    (Points : 2)

    Row One
    Row Two
    Row Three
    Row Four

    11.Flynn Company issued 2,000 shares of $10 par value common stock at a market price of $16. As a result of this accounting event, total paid-in capital would: (Points : 2)

    increase by $12,000.
    be unaffected by the event.
    increase by $32,000.
    increase by $20,000.

    12.The price-earnings ratio is the: (Points : 2)

    total average stockholder’s equity divided by the number of shares.
    interest rate on borrowed money divided by the current prime rate.
    price of a company’s products as compared to its net income.
    market price of a share of stock divided by the earnings per share.

    13.Reissuance of treasury stock for cash is what kind of transaction? (Points : 2)

    Asset source
    Asset use
    Asset exchange
    Claims exchange

    14.Which form of business organization is established as a separate legal entity from its owners? (Points : 2)

    Sole proprietorship
    Corporation
    Partnership
    None of the above

    15.The difference between the corporate form of business organization and other forms is most clearly shown in which of the following sections of the financial statements? (Points : 2)

    Equity section of the balance sheet
    Expenses section of the income statement
    Assets section of the balance sheet
    Operating activities section of the statement of cash flows

    16.Purchase of treasury stock for cash is what kind of transaction? (Points : 2)

    Asset source
    Asset use
    Asset exchange
    Claims exchange

    17.Which of the following would not be a reason for the market price of Bishop Corporation stock to decrease? (Points : 2)

    Bishop s net income for the current year was lower than last year.
    The general condition and future outlook of the economy are shaky.
    There has been a recent decrease in key interest rates.
    Investors expect Bishop s financial performance to decline in the future.

    18.The issuance of a stock dividend will: (Points : 2)

    not affect total equity.
    increase retained earnings.
    decrease total paid-in capital.
    decrease net income.

    19.Madison Company paid dividends of $3,000, $6,000, and $10,000 during 2008, 2009, and 2010 respectively. The company had 500 shares of preferred stock outstanding with a $10 per share cumulative dividend. The amount of dividends received by the common shareholders during 2010 would be: (Points : 2)

    $6,000
    $5,000
    $3,000
    $4,000

    20.What kind of transaction is the declaration of a stock dividend? (Points : 2)

    Asset source transaction
    Claims exchange transaction
    Asset use transaction
    Asset exchange transaction

    steve has just returned from salmon fishing 510201

    Steve has just returned from salmon fishing. He was lucky on this trip and brought home two salmon. Steve s wife, Wendy, disapproves of fishing, and to discourage Steve from further fishing trips, she has presented him with the following cost data. The cost per fishing trip is based on an average of 10 fishing trips per year.

    Cost per fishing trip:

    Depreciation on fishing boat* (annual depreciation of $2,000 10 trips)

    $

    200

    Boat storage fees (annual rental of $1,600 10 trips)

    160

    Expenditures on fishing gear, except for snagged lures
    (annual expenditures of $270 10 trips)

    27

    Snagged fishing lures

    7

    Fishing license (yearly license of $40 10 trips)

    4

    Fuel and upkeep on boat per trip

    20

    Junk food consumed during trip

    7



    Total cost per fishing trip

    $

    425





    Cost per salmon ($425 2 salmon)

    $

    212.50






    *The original cost of the boat was $20,000. It has an estimated useful life of 10 years, after which it will have no resale value. The boat does not wear out through use, but it does become less desirable for resale as it becomes older.(Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required.)

    1.

    Assuming that the salmon fishing trip Steve has just completed is typical, what costs are relevant to a decision as to whether he should go on another trip this year?

    Total relevant cost

    $

    2.

    Suppose that on Steve s next fishing trip he gets lucky and catches three salmon in the amount of time it took him to catch two salmon on his last trip. How much would the third salmon have cost him to catch?

    Cost of third salmon

    $

    Climate-Control, Inc., manufactures a variety of heating and air-conditioning units. The company is currently manufacturing all of its own component parts. An outside supplier has offered to sell a thermostat to Climate-Control for $35 per unit. To evaluate this offer, Climate-Control, Inc., has gathered the following information relating to its own cost of producing the thermostat internally:

    Per Unit

    14,100
    Units per year

    Direct materials

    $

    9

    $

    126,900

    Direct labor

    11

    155,100

    Variable manufacturing overhead

    2

    28,200

    Fixed manufacturing overhead, traceable

    10*

    141,000

    Fixed manufacturing overhead, common, but allocated

    13

    183,300





    Total cost

    $

    45

    $

    634,500










    *40% supervisory salaries; 60% depreciation of special equipment (no resale value).

    1a.

    Assuming that the company has no alternative use for the facilities now being used to produce the thermostat, compute the total cost of making and buying the parts.(Round your Fixed manufacturing overhead per unit rate to nearest dollar amount.)

    Make

    Buy

    Total relevant cost (14,100 units)

    $

    $


    1b.

    Should the outside supplier’s offer be accepted?

    Reject

    Accept

    2a.

    Suppose that if the thermostats were purchased, Climate-Control, Inc., could use the freed capacity to launch a new product. The segment margin of the new product would be $133,900 per year. Compute the total cost of making and buying the parts.(Round your Fixed manufacturing overhead per unit rate to nearest dollar amount.)

    Make

    Buy

    Total relevant cost (14,100 units)

    $

    $


    2b.

    Should Climate-Control, Inc., accept the offer to buy the thermostats from the outside supplier for $35 each?

    Accept

    Reject

    Miyamoto Jewelers is considering a special order for 13 handcrafted gold bracelets to be given as gifts to members of a wedding party. The normal selling price of a gold bracelet is $406 and its unit product cost is $263 as shown below:

    Direct materials

    $

    143

    Direct labor

    83

    Manufacturing overhead

    37



    Unit product cost

    $

    263






    Most of the manufacturing overhead is fixed and unaffected by variations in how much jewelry is produced in any given period. However, $10 of the overhead is variable with respect to the number of bracelets produced. The customer who is interested in the special bracelet order would like special filigree applied to the bracelets. This filigree would require additional materials costing $9 per bracelet and would also require acquisition of a special tool costing $455 that would have no other use once the special order is completed. This order would have no effect on the company s regular sales and the order could be fulfilled using the company s existing capacity without affecting any other order.

    a.

    What effect would accepting this order have on the company’s net operating income if a special price of $366 is offered per bracelet for this order(Input the amount as a positive value.)

    Net operating income (Click to select)increasesdecreases by

    $

    b.

    Should the special order be accepted at this price?

    Yes

    No

    Banner Company produces three products: A, B, and C. The selling price, variable costs, and contribution margin for one unit of each product follow:

    Product

    A

    B

    C

    Selling price

    $

    90

    $

    190

    $

    110












    Variable costs:

    Direct materials

    40.50

    150.70

    62.60

    Direct labor

    15.00

    9.00

    12.00

    Variable manufacturing overhead

    3.00

    1.80

    2.40












    Total variable cost

    58.50

    161.50

    77.00












    Contribution margin

    $

    31.50

    $

    28.50

    $

    33.00























    Contribution margin ratio

    35

    %

    15

    %

    30

    %
























    Due to a strike in the plant of one of its competitors, demand for the company s products far exceeds its capacity to produce. Management is trying to determine which product(s) to concentrate on next week in filling its backlog of orders. The direct labor rate is $6 per hour, and only 3,040 hours of labor time are available each week.

    1.

    Compute the amount of contribution margin that will be obtained per hour of labor time spent on each product.(Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places.)

    A

    B

    C

    Contribution margin per labor hour

    $

    $

    $


    2.

    Which orders would you recommend that the company work on next week the orders for product A, product B, or product C?

    Product B

    Product A

    Product C

    3.

    By paying overtime wages, more than 3,040 hours of direct labor time can be made available next week. Up to how much should the company be willing to pay per hour in overtime wages as long as there is unfilled demand for the three products(Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places.)

    Maximum amount

    $ per hour

    tco a below you will find selected information in millions from coca cola co s 2012 510204

    1. (TCO A) Below you will find selected information (in millions) from Coca-Cola Co. s 2012 Annual Report:
    Income Taxes Payable $471
    Short-term Investments and Marketable Securities 8,109
    Cash 8,442
    Other non-current Liabilities 10,449
    Common Stock 1,760
    Receivables 4,812
    Other Current Assets 2,973
    Long-term Investments 10,448
    Other Non-current Assets 3,585
    Property, Plant and Equipment 23,486
    Trademarks 6,527
    Other Intangible Assets 20,810
    Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 53
    Accumulated Depreciation 9,010
    Accounts Payable 8,680
    Short Term Notes Payable 17,874
    Prepaid Expenses 2,781
    Other Current Liabilities 796
    Long-Term Liabilities 14,736
    Paid-in-Capital in Excess of Par Value 11,379
    Retained Earnings 55,038
    Inventories 3,264
    Treasury Stock 35,009

    Other information taken from the Annual Report:

    Sales Revenue for 2012 $48,017
    Cost of Goods Sold for 2012 19,053
    Net Income for 2012 9,019
    Inventory Balance on 12/31/11 3,092
    Net Accounts Receivable Balance on 12/31/11 4,920
    Total Assets on 12/31/11 79,974
    Equity Balance on 12/31/11 31,921

    Required:
    1. Using the information provided prepare a Balance Sheet. Separate the current assets from non-current assets and provide a total for each. Also separate the current liabilities from the non-current liabilities and provide a total for each.
    2. Using the Balance Sheet from your answer above calculate; Current Ratio, Days in Inventory, Average Collection Period, Return on Assets Ratio, Debt to Total Assets and Return on common stockholders equity ratio. (Make sure to show all your work . (TCO B) The following selected data was retrieved from the Wal-Mart, Inc. financial statements for the year ending January 31, 2013:

    Accounts Payable $38,080
    Accounts Receivable 6,768
    Cash 7,781
    Common Stock 3,952
    Cost of Goods Sold 352,488
    Income Tax Expense 7,981
    Interest Expenses 2,064
    Membership Revenues 3,048
    Net Sales 466,114
    Operating, Selling and Administrative Expenses 88,873
    Retained Earnings 72,978
    Required:

    Using the information provided above:
    1. Prepare a multiple-step income statement
    2. Calculate the Profit Margin, and Gross profit rate for the company. Be sure to provide the formula you are using, show your calculations, and discuss your findings/results.
    (Points : 36)

    toy box inc is contemplating expanding their sales of their children s toys 510205

    Toy Box Inc. is contemplating expanding their sales of their children s toys. The have an opportunity to stock and sell the X toy that has been a big hit with children everywhere. They need to order the X toys from the manufacturer in a minimum order of 100 at a cost of $12 each. They could resell the X toy in their store for $22 each.

    Due to anticipated demand, Toy Box Inc. will need to hire an additional part-time cashier at $600 a month which will be classified as a fixed-cost attributable to the X toy. Also, they have offered a $1 sales commission per toy to their floor sales representative. They will also include a package of trading cards with every purchase of an X toy, which will cost them an additional $2 each.

    Required:
    To make the project worthwhile, Toy Box Inc. would require a $5,000 profit per month. What level of sales in units and in dollars would be required to reach this target profit? Show all computations.
    Assume that the venture is undertaken and an order is placed for 100 X toys. What would be Toy Box s break-even point in units and in sales dollars? Show computations and explain the reasoning behind your answer. You can ignore the fixed cost of $600 for this part.

    true false questions chapter 23 510208

    TRUE-FALSE QUESTIONS CHAPTER 23

    1. The decedent’s final income tax return is due four months after the date of death.

    2. A joint income tax return which includes a decedent may not be filed if the surviving spouse has remarried before the end of the tax year in which the decedent dies.

    3. The decedent’s medical expenses paid by the estate can be treated as paid at the time they are incurred and deducted on the decedent’s final income tax return as long as they are paid within two years of the decedent’s death.

    4. A decedent is allowed a full personal exemption on a final income tax return regardless of date of death.

    5. Income in respect of the decedent can only be included on the decedent’s final income tax return.

    6. All estates must file an estate income tax return regardless of gross income.

    7. The estate’s first income tax return must cover a period of 12 months.

    8. An estate is entitled to the standard deduction.

    9. Income distributed to beneficiaries by an estate will retain the same character on the beneficiaries’ income tax returns as it had on the estate’s income tax return.

    10. In determining what is income to a trust, federal laws always take precedence over laws of the state in which the trust is created.

    MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS CHAPTER 23

    11. Business losses or capital losses incurred by a decedent prior to death:

    a. Can be carried over to an estate’s income tax return.

    b. Can be deducted by estate beneficiaries on their income tax returns.

    c. End with the decedent’s final income tax return.

    d. Are not deductible on a decedent’s final income tax return.

    12. All valid tax deductions paid by a cash basis decedent before death:

    a. Can be deducted on the decedent’s final income tax return.

    b. Cannot be deducted on the decedent’s final income tax return

    c. Can be deducted by the decedent’s estate on its income tax return.

    d. Can be deducted by beneficiaries of the decedent’s estate.

    13. If named in a decedent’s will, a fiduciary of an estate would be called an:

    a. Administrator

    b. Executor

    c. Trustee

    d. Advisor

    14. Each estate must file an estate income tax return if the estate has the following income:

    a. $100

    b. $300

    c. $600

    d. $1,000

    15. Charitable contributions can be deducted on an estate’s income tax return but are limited to the following percentage of gross income:

    a. 30 percent

    b. 50 percent

    c. 80 percent

    d. No percentage limitation

    16. A trust created by a grantor during his own lifetime is called a:

    a. Grantor trust

    b. Inter vivos trust

    c. Testamentary trust

    d. Simple trust

    17. A simple trust is entitled to a personal exemption of:

    a. $100

    b. $300

    c. $600

    d. $1,000

    18. Charitable contributions cannot be made by a(n):

    a. Testamentary trust

    b. Inter vivos trust

    c. Complex trust

    d. Simple trust

    19. Trust throwback rules apply to:

    a. Grantor trusts

    b. Multiple trusts

    c. Accumulation distributions

    d. None of the above.

    20. Income distributions from an estate to estate beneficiaries are recognized as income by beneficiaries on their tax returns for the year in which the:

    a. Distribution is received.

    b. Estate’s tax year ends.

    c. Income distribution was earned by the estate.

    d. Income distribution was received by the estate.

    21. Charitable contributions can be deducted on an estate’s income tax return up to whatpercentage of income?

    a. 20 percent

    b. 30 percent

    c. 50 percent

    d. Unlimited percentage of income

    using the following information for bob s flowers for 200x and trial balance account 510209

    Using the following information for Bob s Flowers for 200x, and trial balance accounts and balances on the work sheet provided, complete the work sheet, prepare adjusting and closing journal entries, and (in good form) prepare a Income Statement, Statement of Retained Earnings and Balance Sheet.

    Expired insurance totals $8. Of the unearned revenue, all has been earned by the balance sheet date. Estimated depreciation of equipment is $6. Accrued wages equal $4. Unused supplies on hand are $4. Estimated income taxes are $2.
    Account Name

    Trial Balance Adjustments Adjusted Trial Balance Income Statement Balance Sheet

    Debit Credit Debit Credit Debit Credit Debit Credit Debit Credit

    Cash 30

    Account Receivable 20

    Prepaid Insurance 12

    Supplies 10

    Equipment 40

    Supplies expense
    Accumulated Depreciation, Equipment 6

    Account Payable 12

    Unearned Revenue 8

    Common Stock 64

    Dividends 2

    Service Revenue 48

    Wages Expense 24

    138 138

    vintage cellars manufactures a 1 000 bottle wine storage system that maintains optim 510210

    Vintage Cellars manufactures a 1,000-bottle wine storage system that maintains optimum temperature (55-57 F) and humidity (50-80%) for aging wines. The system has a backup battery for power failures and can store red and white wines at different temperatures. The following table depicts how average cost varies with the number of units manufactured and sold (per month):

    Required: Prepare a table that computes the total cost and marginal cost for each quantity between 1 and 10 units. What is the relation between average cost and marginal cost? What is the opportunity cost of producing one more unit if the company is currently producing and selling four units? Vintage Cellars sells the units for $9,000 each. This price does not vary with the number of units sold. How many units should Vintage manufacture and sell each month?

    wallace landscaping s total assets were 1 8 510211

    At year-end 2013, Wallace Landscaping s total assets were $1.8 million and its accounts payable were $440,000. Sales, which in 2013 were $2.6 million, are expected to increase by 30% in 2014. Total assets and accounts payable are proportional to sales, and that relationship will be maintained. Wallace typically uses no current liabilities other than accounts payable. Common stock amounted to $390,000 in 2013, and retained earnings were $280,000. Wallace has arranged to sell $160,000 of new common stock in 2014 to meet some of its financing needs. The remainder of its financing needs will be met by issuing new long-term debt at the end of 2014. (Because the debt is added at the end of the year, there will be no additional interest expense due to the new debt.) Its profit margin on sales is 6%, and 55% of earnings will be paid out as dividends.

    a. What was Wallace’s total long-term debt in 2013? Round your answer to the nearest dollar.

    What were Wallace’s total liabilities in 2013? Round your answer to the nearest dollar.

    b. How much new long-term debt financing will be needed in 2014? (Hint: AFN – New stock = New long-term debt.) Round your answer to the nearest dollar.

    week 4 joe s fly by night oil company ratio analysis 510212

    the following for Joe s Fly-By-Night Oil Company, whose financial statements are shown below:

    Joe s Fly-By-Night Oil Company

    NET INCOME $1,800

    Addition to retained earnings $1,200

    Total assets $40,000

    Prepare a ratio analysis for the fiscal year ended Dec 31, 2011. Organize your analysis per the following outline:

    (1) Liquidity

    – Current ratio

    – Quick ratio

    Comments on liquidity

    (2) Asset management

    – Total Asset turnover

    – Average collection period (ACP)

    Comments on asset management

    (3) Debt management

    – Debt ratio

    – Times interest earned

    Comments on debt management

    (4) Profitability

    – Net profit margin

    – Return on Assets (ROA)

    – Return on Equity (ROE)

    – Extended Du Pont equation

    Comments on profitability to include your comments on the sources of ROE

    revealed by the Du Pont equation

    (5) Market value ratios

    – PE ratio

    – Market to book ratio

    Comments on the market value ratios

    For the purposes of this exercise, assume the following data for Joe s Fly-By-Night Oil:

    Stock price on Dec 31, 2011 $50.00

    Number of common shares outstanding on Dec 31, 2011…1,000

    week 5 assignment 510213

    Week Five Exercise Assignment

    Financial Ratios

    1. Liquidity ratios.Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:

    Edison

    Stagg

    Thornton

    Cash

    $6,000

    $5,000

    $4,000

    Short-term investments

    3,000

    2,500

    2,000

    Accounts receivable

    2,000

    2,500

    3,000

    Inventory

    1,000

    2,500

    4,000

    Prepaid expenses

    800

    800

    800

    Accounts payable

    200

    200

    200

    Notes payable: short-term

    3,100

    3,100

    3,100

    Accrued payables

    300

    300

    300

    Long-term liabilities

    3,800

    3,800

    3,800

    1. Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?

    2. Computation and evaluation of activity ratios.The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:

    20X5

    20X4

    Net credit sales

    $832,000

    $760,000

    Cost of goods sold

    530,000

    400,000

    Cash, Dec. 31

    125,000

    110,000

    Average Accounts receivable

    205,000

    156,000

    Average Inventory

    70,000

    50,000

    Accounts payable, Dec. 31

    115,000

    108,000

    Instructions

    a. Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 20X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.

    3. Profitability ratios, trading on the equity.Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 20X7:

    Net sales

    $1,750,000

    Interest expense

    120,000

    Income tax expense

    80,000

    Preferred dividends

    25,000

    Net income

    130,000

    Average assets

    1,200,000

    Average common stockholders’ equity

    500,000

    1. Compute the profit margin on sales ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.
    2. Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly ex plain.

    4. Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

    20X2

    20X1

    Current Assets

    $86,000

    $80,000

    Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

    99,000

    90,000

    Intangibles

    25,000

    50,000

    Current Liabilities

    40,800

    48,000

    Long-Term Liabilities

    153,000

    160,000

    Stockholders Equity

    16,200

    12,000

    Net Sales

    500,000

    500,000

    Cost of Goods Sold

    322,500

    350,000

    Operating Expenses

    93,500

    85,000

    a. Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

    5.Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

    20X2

    20X1

    Current Assets

    $86,000

    $80,000

    Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

    99,000

    80,000

    Intangibles

    25,000

    50,000

    Current Liabilities

    40,800

    48,000

    Long-Term Liabilities

    153,000

    150,000

    Stockholders Equity

    16,200

    12,000

    Net Sales

    500,000

    500,000

    Cost of Goods Sold

    322,500

    350,000

    Operating Expenses

    93,500

    85,000

    a. Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

    6. Ratio computation.The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.

    LONE PINE COMPANY

    Comparative Balance Sheets

    December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)

    20X2

    20X1

    Assets

    Current Assets

    Cash and Short-Term Investments

    $400

    $600

    Accounts Receivable (net)

    3,000

    2,400

    Inventories

    3,000

    2,300

    Total Current Assets

    $6,400

    $5,300

    Property, Plant, and Equipment

    Land

    $1,700

    $500

    Buildings and Equipment (net)

    1,500

    1,000

    Total Property, Plant, and Equipment

    $3,200

    $1,500

    Total Assets

    $9,600

    $6,800

    Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

    Current Liabilities

    Accounts Payable

    $2,800

    $1,700

    Notes Payable

    1,100

    1,900

    Total Current Liabilities

    $3,900

    $3,600

    Long-Term Liabilities

    Bonds Payable

    4,100

    2,100

    Total Liabilities

    $8,000

    $5,700

    Stockholders Equity

    Common Stock

    $200

    $200

    Retained Earnings

    1,400

    900

    Total Stockholders Equity

    $1,600

    $1,100

    Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

    $9,600

    $6,800

    LONE PINE COMPANY

    Statement of Income and Retained Earnings

    For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)

    Net Sales*

    $36,000

    Less: Cost of Goods Sold

    $20,000

    Selling Expense

    6,000

    Administrative Expense

    4,000

    Interest Expense

    400

    Income Tax Expense

    2,000

    32,400

    Net Income

    $3,600

    Retained Earnings, Jan. 1

    900

    Ending Retained Earnings

    $4,500

    Cash Dividends Declared and Paid

    3,100

    Retained Earnings, Dec. 31

    $1,400

    *All sales are on account.

    Instructions

    Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calcu lations to two decimal places when necessary:

    a. Quick ratio

    b. Current ratio

    c. Inventory-turnover ratio

    d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio

    e. Return-on-assets ratio

    f. Net-profit-margin ratio

    g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity

    h. Debt-to-total assets

    i. Number of times that interest is earned

    week five exercise assignment with dq ashford this is for martin 510214

    Week Five Exercise Assignment

    Financial Ratios

    1. Liquidity ratios. Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:

    Edison

    Stagg

    Thornton

    Cash

    $6,000

    $5,000

    $4,000

    Short-term investments

    3,000

    2,500

    2,000

    Accounts receivable

    2,000

    2,500

    3,000

    Inventory

    1,000

    2,500

    4,000

    Prepaid expenses

    800

    800

    800

    Accounts payable

    200

    200

    200

    Notes payable: short-term

    3,100

    3,100

    3,100

    Accrued payables

    300

    300

    300

    Long-term liabilities

    3,800

    3,800

    3,800

    a. Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid Why?

    2. Computation and evaluation of activity ratios. The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:

    20X5

    20X4

    Net credit sales

    $832,000

    $760,000

    Cost of goods sold

    530,000

    400,000

    Cash, Dec. 31

    125,000

    110,000

    Average Accounts receivable

    205,000

    156,000

    Average Inventory

    70,000

    50,000

    Accounts payable, Dec. 31

    115,000

    108,000

    Instructions

    a. Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 20X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.

    3. Profitability ratios, trading on the equity. Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The company reported the following information for 20X7:

    Net sales

    $1,750,000

    Interest expense

    120,000

    Income tax expense

    80,000

    Preferred dividends

    25,000

    Net income

    130,000

    Average assets

    1,200,000

    Average common stockholders” equity

    500,000

    a. Compute the profit margin on sales ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.

    b. Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage Briefly explain.

    4. Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

    20X2

    20X1

    Current Assets

    $86,000

    $80,000

    Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

    99,000

    90,000

    Intangibles

    25,000

    50,000

    Current Liabilities

    40,800

    48,000

    Long-Term Liabilities

    153,000

    160,000

    Stockholders Equity

    16,200

    12,000

    Net Sales

    500,000

    500,000

    Cost of Goods Sold

    322,500

    350,000

    Operating Expenses

    93,500

    85,000

    a. Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

    5.Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

    20X2

    20X1

    Current Assets

    $86,000

    $80,000

    Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

    99,000

    80,000

    Intangibles

    25,000

    50,000

    Current Liabilities

    40,800

    48,000

    Long-Term Liabilities

    153,000

    150,000

    Stockholders Equity

    16,200

    12,000

    Net Sales

    500,000

    500,000

    Cost of Goods Sold

    322,500

    350,000

    Operating Expenses

    93,500

    85,000

    a. Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

    6. Ratio computation. The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.

    LONE PINE COMPANY

    Comparative Balance Sheets

    December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)

    20X2

    20X1

    Assets

    Current Assets

    Cash and Short-Term Investments

    $400

    $600

    Accounts Receivable (net)

    3,000

    2,400

    Inventories

    3,000

    2,300

    Total Current Assets

    $6,400

    $5,300

    Property, Plant, and Equipment

    Land

    $1,700

    $500

    Buildings and Equipment (net)

    1,500

    1,000

    Total Property, Plant, and Equipment

    $3,200

    $1,500

    Total Assets

    $9,600

    $6,800

    Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

    Current Liabilities

    Accounts Payable

    $2,800

    $1,700

    Notes Payable

    1,100

    1,900

    Total Current Liabilities

    $3,900

    $3,600

    Long-Term Liabilities

    Bonds Payable

    4,100

    2,100

    Total Liabilities

    $8,000

    $5,700

    Stockholders Equity

    Common Stock

    $200

    $200

    Retained Earnings

    1,400

    900

    Total Stockholders Equity

    $1,600

    $1,100

    Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

    $9,600

    $6,800

    LONE PINE COMPANY

    Statement of Income and Retained Earnings

    For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)

    Net Sales*

    $36,000

    Less: Cost of Goods Sold

    $20,000

    Selling Expense

    6,000

    Administrative Expense

    4,000

    Interest Expense

    400

    Income Tax Expense

    2,000

    32,400

    Net Income

    $3,600

    Retained Earnings, Jan. 1

    900

    Ending Retained Earnings

    $4,500

    Cash Dividends Declared and Paid

    3,100

    Retained Earnings, Dec. 31

    $1,400

    *All sales are on account.

    Instructions

    Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calculations to two decimal places when necessary:

    a. Quick ratio

    b. Current ratio

    c. Inventory-turnover ratio

    d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio

    e. Return-on-assets ratio

    f. Net-profit-margin ratio

    g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity

    h. Debt-to-total assets

    i. Number of times that interest is earned

    DQ”S

    1. Ratios 

      Ratios provide the users of financial statements with a great deal of information about the entity. Do ratios tell the whole story How could liquidity ratios be used by investors to determine whether or not to invest in a company 

      Guided Response:
      Let at least two of your peers know how debt service ratios can be used by a lender in determining whether or not to lend money to a company. 

    2. Profit Margin 

    Year Ending December 2012

    Year Ending December 2011

    Year Ending December 2010

    Revenues

    40,000

    35,000

    33,000

    Operating Expenses

    Salaries

    15,000

    10,000

    9,000

    Maintenance and Repairs

    6,000

    9,000

    10,000

    Rental Expense

    2,500

    2,500

    2,500

    Depreciation

    2,000

    2,000

    2,000

    Fuel

    4,000

    3,500

    2,500

    Total Operating Expenses

    29,500

    27,000

    26,000

    Operating Income

    10,500

    8,000

    7,000

    Sales and Administrative Expenses

    6,000

    4,000

    3,000

    Interest Expense

    2,500

    2,000

    1,000

    Net Income

    2,000

    2,000

    3,000

    Above is a comparative income statement for Cecil, Inc. for the years 2010, 2011, and 2012. Calculate the profit margin for each of these years. Comment on the profit margin trend.

     

    week two exercise assignment revenue and expenses 1 recognition of concepts ron carr 510215

    Week Two Exercise Assignment Revenue and Expenses

    1. Recognition of concepts. Ron Carroll operates a small company that books enter tainers for theaters, parties, conventions, and so forth. The company s fiscal year ends on June 30. Consider the following items and classify each as either (1) pre paid expense, (2) unearned revenue, (3) accrued expense, (4) accrued revenue, or (5) none of the foregoing. a. Amounts paid on June 30 for a 1-year insurance policy. b. Professional fees earned but not billed as of June 30. c. Repairs to the firm s copy machine, incurred and paid in June. d. An advance payment from a client for a performance next month at a convention. e. The payment in part (d) from the client s point of view. f. Interest owed on the company s bank loan, to be paid in early July. g. The bank loan payable in part (f). h. Office supplies on hand at year-end.

    2. Understanding the closing process. Examine the following list of accounts: Interest Payable Accumulated Depreciation: Equipment Alex Kenzy, Drawing Accounts Payable Service Revenue Cash Accounts Receivable Supplies Expense Interest Expense

    Which of the preceding accounts a. appear on a post-closing trial balance? b. are commonly known as temporary, or nominal, accounts? c. generate a debit to Income Summary in the closing process? d. are closed to the capital account in the closing process? 3. Adjusting entries and financial statements. The following information pertains to Fixation Enterprises: The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one third of this amount had been earned. Fixation provided $2,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31. Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,650. The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period. The company paid $18,000 on October 1 of the current year to Vantage Property Management. The payment was for 6 months rent of Fixation s headquarters, beginning on November 1. Fixation s accounting year ends on December 31.

    Instructions Analyze the five preceding cases individually and determine the following: a. The type of adjusting entry needed at year-end (Use the following codes: A, adjust ment of a prepaid expense; B, adjustment of an unearned revenue; C, adjustment to record an accrued expense; or D, adjustment to record an accrued revenue). b. The year-end journal entry to adjust the accounts. c. The income statement impact of each adjustment (e.g., increases total revenues by $500).

    4. Adjusting entries. You have been retained to examine the records of Kathy s Day Care Center as of December 31, 20X3, the close of the current reporting period. In the course of your examination, you discover the following: On January 1, 20X3, the Supplies account had a balance of $2,350. During the year, $5,520 worth of supplies was purchased, and a balance of $1,620 remained unused on December 31. Unrecorded interest owed to the center totaled $275 as of December 31. All clients pay tuition in advance, and their payments are credited to the Unearned Tuition Revenue account. The account was credited for $75,500 on August 31. With the exception of $15,500 all amounts were for the current semester ending on December 31. Depreciation on the school s van was $3,000 for the year. On August 1, the center began to pay rent in 6-month installments of $21,000. Kathy wrote a check to the owner of the building and recorded the check in Pre paid Rent, a new account. Two salaried employees earn $400 each for a 5-day week. The employees are paid every Friday, and December 31 falls on a Thursday. Kathy s Day Care paid insurance premiums as follows, each time debiting Pre paid Insurance:

    Date Paid Policy No. Length of Policy Amount Feb. 1, 20X2 1033MCM19 1 year $540 Jan. 1, 20X3 7952789HP 1 year 912 Aug. 1, 20X3 XQ943675ST 2 years 840 Instructions

    The center s accounts were last adjusted on December 31, 20X2. Prepare the adjusting entries necessary under the accrual basis of accounting.

    5. Bank reconciliation and entries. The following information was taken from the accounting records of Palmetto Company for the month of January: Balance per bank $6,150 Balance per company records $3,580 Bank service charge for January $20 Deposits in transit $940 Interest on note collected by bank $100 Note collected by bank $1,000 NSF check returned by the bank with the bank statement $650 Outstanding checks $3,080

    Instructions: a. Prepare Palmetto s January bank reconciliation. b. Prepare any necessary journal entries for Palmetto.

    6. Direct write-off method. Harrisburg Company, which began business in early 20X7, reported $40,000 of accounts receivable on the December 31, 20X7, balance sheet. Included in this amount was $550 for a sale made to Tom Mattingly in July. On January 4, 20X8, the company learned that Mattingly had filed for personal bankruptcy. Harrisburg uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectibles.

    a. Prepare the journal entry needed to write off Mattingly s account. b. Comment on the ability of the direct write-off method to value receivables on the year-end balance sheet.

    7. Allowance method: analysis of receivables. At a January 20X2 meeting, the presi dent of Sonic Sound directed the sales staff to move some product this year. The president noted that the credit evaluation department was being disbanded be cause it had restricted the company s growth. Credit decisions would now be made by the sales staff. By the end of the year, Sonic had generated significant gains in sales, and the president was very pleased. The following data were provided by the accounting department: 20X2 20X1 Sales $23,987,000 $8,423,000 Accounts Receivable, 12/31 12,444,000 1,056,000 Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, 12/31 ? 23,000 cr.

    The $12,444,000 receivables balance was aged as follows: Age of Receivable Amount Percentage of Accounts Expected to Be Collected Under 31 days $5,321,000 99% 31260 days 3,890,000 90 61290 days 1,067,000 80 Over 90 days 2,166,000 60

    Assume that no accounts were written off during 20X2. Instructions

    a. Estimate the amount of Uncollectible Accounts as of December 31, 20X2. b. What is the company s Uncollectible Accounts expense for 20X2? c. Compute the net realizable value of Accounts Receivable at the end of 20X1 and 20X2. d. Compute the net realizable value at the end of 20X1 and 20X2 as a percentage of respective year-end receivables balances. Analyze your findings and comment on the president s decision to close the credit evaluation department.

    which of eppele s seven principles is violated in each of the following independent 510217

    Which of Eppele s seven principles is violated in each of the following independent cases? Justify your responses. (Each case may violate more than one principle.)

    a. Amanda objected to her company s new approach to training because they had never used it before.

    b. Esther started a BPM project by looking for appropriate information technology tools.

    c. Eugene, an entry-level employee, implemented a new system for taking inventory.

    d. Jeff decided to change his company s purchasing process because the current process seemed too cumbersome.

    e. Minh told the consultants for a BPM project to prepare and submit reports as they felt appropriate.

    f. Molly told employees that all their concerns would be addressed at the end of the BPM project.

    g. Raul argued strongly that a proposed BPM project be managed by a consulting firm.

    write an essay of 500 700 words by addressing the following questions 510218

    • Explain at least 2 different kinds of health plans.
    • Choose 3 kinds of payments that may be rendered for services
      • Explain why it is important for the patients and the health of the organization to correctly use and apply insurance, including verification of benefits.
      • Explain why coding properly is important to your organization and the patient.
      • Explain what is found in CPT coding, ICD coding, and in the HCPCS.
      • Explain what an Explanation of Benefits (EOB) is.
      • Explain to the new employees of Kyosha Valley at least 2 other important insurance terms, such as the birthday rule, assignment of benefits, clean claims, coordination of benefits, balanced billing, and so on.

    yadier corporation s comparative balance sheets are presented below cash 4 260 3 960 510219

    Yadier Corporation s comparative balance sheets are presented below.

    Cash $ 4,260 $ 3,960
    Accounts receivable 22,190 23,910
    Inventory 10,200 6,640
    Land 19,830 26,090
    Buildings 70,090 70,090
    Accumulated depreciation buildings (15,130 ) (10,430 )
    Total $111,440 $120,260
    Accounts payable $ 12,480 $ 31,070
    Common stock 75,460 70,740
    Retained earnings 23,500 18,450
    Total $111,440 $120,260

    Yadier s 2014 income statement included net sales of $119,230, cost of goods sold of $59,480, and net income of $14,710.

    Compute the following ratios for 2014. (Round percentage answers to 1 decimal place, e.g. 1.6% and all other answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.64, or 1.64% .)
    Current ratio :1
    Acid-test ratio :1
    Accounts receivable turnover times
    Inventory turnover times
    Profit margin %
    Asset turnover times
    Return on assets %
    Return on common stockholders equity %
    Debt to total assets ratio %

    Accounting

    you have been retained to examine the records of mary s day care center as of decemb 510220

    You have been retained to examine the records of Mary s Day Care Center as of December 31, 20X3, the close of the current reporting period. In the course of your examination, you discover the following:

    On January 1, 20X3, the Supplies account had a balance of $1,350. During the year, $5,520 worth of supplies was purchased, and a balance of $1,620 remained unused on December 31.

    Unrecorded interest owed to the center totaled $275 as of December 31.

    All clients pay tuition in advance, and their payments are credited to the Unearned Tuition Revenue account. The account was credited for $65,500 on August 31. With the exception of $15,500 all amounts were for the current semester ending on December 31.

    Depreciation on the school s van was $3,000 for the year.

    On August 1, the center began to pay rent in 6-month installments of $24,000. Mary wrote a check to the owner of the building and recorded the check in Prepaid Rent, a new account.

    Two salaried employees earn $400 each for a 5-day week. The employees are paid every Friday, and December 31 falls on a Thursday.

    Mary s Day Care paid insurance premiums as follows, each time debiting Prepaid Insurance:

    Date Paid Policy No. Length of Policy Amount

    Feb. 1, 20X2 1033MCM19 1 year $540

    Jan. 1, 20X3 7952789HP 1 year 912

    Aug. 1, 20X3 XQ943675ST 2 years 840

    Instructions:

    The center s accounts were last adjusted on December 31, 20X2. Prepare the adjusting entries necessary under the accrual basis of accounting.

    managerial accounting 1b ch23 510165

    Managerial Accounting 1B

    Financial and Managerial Accounting

    Chapter 23

    Exercise 23-2 Scrap or rework L.O.A1

    A company must decide between scrapping or reworking units that do not pass inspection. The company has 15,000 defective units that cost $6.00 per unit to manufacture. The units can be sold as is for $2.50 each, or they can be reworked for $4.50 each and then sold for the full price of $9.00 each. If the units are sold as is, the company will also be able to build 15,000 replacement units at a cost of $6.00 each, and sell them at the full price of $9.00 each.

    1. What is the incremental income from selling the units as scrap (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Incremental income

    $

    2. What is the incremental income from reworking and selling the units (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Incremental income

    $

    (3)

    What must the company decide?

    The units should not be reworked

    re5-02-2012

    2.Exercise 23-4 Decision to accept additional business or not L.O. A1

    Feist Co. expects to sell 200,000 units of its product in the next period with the following results.

    Sales (200,000 units)

    $

    3,000,000

    Costs and expenses

    Direct materials

    400,000

    Direct labor

    800,000

    Overhead

    200,000

    Selling expenses

    300,000

    Administrative expenses

    514,000

    Total costs and expenses

    2,214,000

    Net income

    $

    786,000

    The company has an opportunity to sell 20,000 additional units at $12 per unit. The additional sales would not affect its current expected sales. Direct materials and labor costs per unit would be the same for the additional units as they are for the regular units. However, the additional volume would create the following incremental costs: (1) total overhead would increase by 15% and (2) administrative expenses would increase by $86,000.

    Calculate the combined total net income if the company accepts the offer to sell additional units at the reduced price of $12 per unit. (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Exercise 23-6 Make or buy decision L.O. A1

    Santos Company currently manufactures one of its crucial parts at a cost of $3.40 per unit. This cost is based on a normal production rate of 50,000 units per year. Variable costs are $1.50 per unit, fixed costs related to making this part are $50,000 per year, and allocated fixed costs are $45,000 per year. Allocated fixed costs are unavoidable whether the company makes or buys the part. Santos is considering buying the part from a supplier for a quoted price of $2.70 per unit guaranteed for a three-year period.

    Calculate the total incremental cost of making 50,000 units. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Total incremental cost

    Calculate the total incremental cost of buying 50,000 units. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Total incremental cost

    Should the company continue to manufacture the part, or should it buy the part from the outside supplier?

    Exercise 23-8 Sell or process decision L.O. A1

    Cantrell Company has already manufactured 20,000 units of Product A at a cost of $20 per unit. The 20,000 units can be sold at this stage for $500,000. Alternatively, the units can be further processed at a $300,000 total additional cost and be converted into 4,000 units of Product B and 8,000 units of Product C. Per unit selling price for Product B is $75 and for Product C is $50.

    Calculate the Incremental Net Income (or loss) if processed further. (Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Incremental net income (or loss)

    Indicate whether the 50,000 units of Product A should be processed further or not.

    5. Exercise 23-12 Sales mix determination and analysis L.O. A1

    Bethel Company owns a machine that can produce two specialized products. Production time for Product TLX is two units per hour and for Product MTV is five units per hour. The machine s capacity is 2,200 hours per year. Both products are sold to a single customer who has agreed to buy all of the company s output up to a maximum of 3,750 units of Product TLX and 2,000 units of Product MTV. Selling prices and variable costs per unit to produce the products follow.

    Product TLX

    Product MTV

    Selling price per unit

    $

    12.50

    $

    7.50

    Variable costs per unit

    3.75

    4.50

    Determine the company’s most profitable sales mix.

    Product TLX

    Product MTV

    Determine the contribution margin that results from that sales mix. (Do not round your cost per unit rate, round your intermediate and final answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Contribution margin

    Problem 23-6A Analysis of possible elimination of a department L.O. A1

    [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

    Home Decor Company s management is trying to decide whether to eliminate Department 200, which has produced losses or low profits for several years. The company s 2011 departmental income statement shows the following.

    HOME DECOR COMPANY

    Departmental Income Statements
    For Year Ended December 31, 2011

    Dept. 100

    Dept. 200

    Combined

    Sales

    $

    872,000

    $

    580,000

    $

    1,452,000

    Cost of goods sold

    524,000

    414,000

    938,000

    Gross profit

    348,000

    166,000

    514,000

    Operating expenses

    Direct expenses

    Advertising

    34,000

    24,000

    58,000

    Store supplies used

    8,000

    7,600

    15,600

    Depreciation Store equipment

    10,000

    6,600

    16,600

    Total direct expenses

    52,000

    38,200

    90,200

    Allocated expenses

    Sales salaries

    130,000

    78,000

    208,000

    Rent expense

    18,880

    9,440

    28,320

    Bad debts expense

    19,800

    16,200

    36,000

    Office salary

    37,440

    24,960

    62,400

    Insurance expense

    4,000

    2,200

    6,200

    Miscellaneous office expenses

    4,800

    3,200

    8,000

    Total allocated expenses

    214,920

    134,000

    348,920

    Total expenses

    266,920

    172,200

    439,120

    Net income (loss)

    $

    81,080

    $

    (6,200

    )

    $

    74,880

    In analyzing whether to eliminate Department 200, management considers the following:

    The company has one office worker who earns $1,200 per week, or $62,400 per year, and four sales clerks who each earn $1,000 per week, or $52,000 per year.

    The full salaries of two salesclerks are charged to Department 100. The full salary of one salesclerk is charged to Department 200. The salary of the fourth clerk, who works half-time in both departments, is divided evenly between the two departments.

    Eliminating Department 200 would avoid the sales salaries and the office salary currently allocated to it. However, management prefers another plan. Two salesclerks have indicated that they will be quitting soon. Management believes that their work can be done by the other two clerks if the one office worker works in sales half-time. Eliminating Department 200 will allow this shift of duties. If this change is implemented, half the office worker s salary would be reported as sales salaries and half would be reported as office salary.

    The store building is rented under a long-term lease that cannot be changed. Therefore, Department 100 will use the space and equipment currently used by Department 200.

    Closing Department 200 will eliminate its expenses for advertising, bad debts, and store supplies; 70% of the insurance expense allocated to it to cover its merchandise inventory; and 25% of the miscellaneous office expenses presently allocated to it.

    Problem 23-6A Part 1

    Required:

    Complete the three-column report that lists items and amounts for (a) the company s total expenses (including cost of goods sold) in column 1, (b) the expenses that would be eliminated by closing Department 200 in column 2, and (c) the expenses that will continue in column 3. (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    1. Problem 23-6A Part 2

    Complete the forecasted annual income statement for the company reflecting the elimination of Department 200 assuming that it will not affect Department 100 s sales and gross profit. The statement should reflect the reassignment of the office worker to one-half time as a salesclerk. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    managerial finance capital structure and leverage 510166

    1) If a firm utilizes debt financing, an X% decline in earnings before interest and taxes (EBIT) will result in a decline in earnings per share that is larger than X.

    True

    False

    2) Firm A has a higher degree of business risk than Firm B. Firm A can offset this by using less financial leverage. Therefore, the variability of both firms’ expected EBITs could actually be identical.

    True

    False

    3) It is possible that two firms could have identical financial and operating leverage, yet have different degrees of risk as measured by the variability of EPS.

    True

    False

    4) Which of the following events is likely to encourage a company to raise its target debt ratio, other things held constant?

    An increase in the corporate tax rate.

    An increase in the personal tax rate.

    An increase in the company s operating leverage.

    The Federal Reserve tightens interest rates in an effort to fight inflation.

    The company’s stock price hits a new high.

    5) The firm s target capital structure should be consistent with which of the following statements?

    Maximize the earnings per share (EPS).

    Minimize the cost of debt (rd).

    Obtain the highest possible bond rating.

    Minimize the cost of equity (rs).

    Minimize the weighted average cost of capital (WACC).

    6) Which of the following statements is CORRECT? As a firm increases the operating leverage used to produce a given quantity of output, this will

    normally lead to an increase in its fixed assets turnover ratio.

    normally lead to a decrease in its business risk.

    normally lead to a decrease in the standard deviation of its expected EBIT.

    normally lead to a decrease in the variability of its expected EPS.

    normally lead to a reduction in its fixed assets turnover ratio.

    7) Reynolds Resorts is currently 100% equity financed. The CFO is considering a recapitalization plan under which the firm would issue long-term debt with a yield of 9% and use the proceeds to repurchase common stock. The recapitalization would not change the company s total assets, nor would it affect the firm s basic earning power, which is currently 15%. The CFO believes that this recapitalization would reduce the WACC and increase stock price. Which of the following would also be likely to occur if the company goes ahead with the recapitalization plan?

    The company s net income would increase.

    The company s earnings per share would decline.

    The company s cost of equity would increase.

    The company s ROA would increase.

    The company s ROE would decline.

    8) Vu Enterprises expects to have the following data during the coming year. What is Vu’s expected ROE?

    Assets

    $200,000

    Interest rate

    8%

    D/A

    65%

    Tax rate

    40%

    EBIT

    $25,000

    12.51%

    13.14%

    13.80%

    14.49%

    15.21%

    9) Ang Enterprises has a levered beta of 1.10, its capital structure consists of 40% debt and 60% equity, and its tax rate is 40%. What would Ang’s beta be if it used no debt, i.e., what is its unlevered beta?

    0.64

    0.67

    0.71

    0.75

    0.79

    10) Firms HD and LD are identical except for their level of debt and the interest rates they pay on debt–HD has more debt and pays a higher interest rate on that debt. Based on the data given below, what is the difference between the two firms’ ROEs?

    Applicable to Both Firms

    Firm HD’s Data

    Firm LD’s Data

    Assets

    $200

    Debt ratio

    50%

    Debt ratio

    30%

    EBIT

    $40

    Interest rate

    12%

    Interest rate

    10%

    Tax rate

    35%

    2.18%

    2.29%

    2.41%

    2.54%

    2.66%

    11) Michaely Inc. is an all-equity firm with 200,000 shares outstanding. It has $2,000,000 of EBIT, which is expected to remain constant in the future. The company pays out all of its earnings, so earnings per share (EPS) equal dividends per shares (DPS). Its tax rate is 40%.

    The company is considering issuing $5,000,000 of 10.0% bonds and using the proceeds to repurchase stock. The risk-free rate is 6.5%, the market risk premium is 5.0%, and the beta is currently 0.90, but the CFO believes beta would rise to 1.10 if the recapitalization occurs.

    Assuming that the shares can be repurchased at the price that existed prior to the recapitalization, what would the price be following the recapitalization?

    $65.77

    $69.23

    $72.69

    $76.33

    $80.14

    12)

    The MM model is the same as the Miller model, but with zero corporate taxes.

    a. True

    b. False

    13)

    The major contribution of the Miller model is that it demonstrates that

    a. personal taxes increase the value of using corporate debt.

    b. personal taxes decrease the value of using corporate debt.

    c. financial distress and agency costs reduce the value of using corporate debt.

    d. equity costs increase with financial leverage.

    e. debt costs increase with financial leverage.

    14)

    Which of the following statements concerning capital structure theory is NOT CORRECT?

    a. The major contribution of Miller’s theory is that it demonstrates that personal taxes decrease the value of using corporate debt.

    b. Under MM with zero taxes, financial leverage has no effect on a firm s value.

    c. Under MM with corporate taxes, the value of a levered firm exceeds the value of the unlevered firm by the product of the tax rate times the market value dollar amount of debt.

    d. Under MM with corporate taxes, rs increases with leverage, and this increase exactly offsets the tax benefits of debt financing.

    e. Under MM with corporate taxes, the effect of business risk is automatically incorporated because rsL is a function of rsU.

    15)

    The Kimberly Corporation is a zero growth firm with an expected EBIT of $100,000 and a corporate tax rate of 30%. Kimberly uses $500,000 of 12.0% debt, and the cost of equity to an unlevered firm in the same risk class is 16.0%.

    [i]. What is the value of the firm according to MM with corporate taxes?

    a. $475,875

    b. $528,750

    c. $587,500

    d. $646,250

    e. $710,875

    [ii]. What is the firm’s cost of equity?

    a. 21.0%

    b. 23.3%

    c. 25.9%

    d. 28.8%

    e. 32.0%

    [iii]. Assume that the firm’s gain from leverage according to the Miller model is $126,667. If the effective personal tax rate on stock income is TS = 20%, what is the implied personal tax rate on debt income?

    a. 16.4%

    b. 18.2%

    c. 20.2%

    d. 22.5%

    e. 25.0%

    mazor inc s bank statement from hometown bank at august 31 2012 gives the following 510167

    Mazor Inc. s bank statement from Hometown Bank at August 31, 2012, gives the following information.

    Balance, August 1 $18,639 Bank debit memorandum: August deposits 71,239 Safety deposit box fee $ 95 Checks cleared in August 68,608 Service charge 120 Bank credit memorandum: Balance, August 31 21,170 Interest earned 115

    A summary of the Cash account in the ledger for August shows the following: balance, August 1, $18,939; receipts $74,239; disbursements $73,500; and balance, August 31, $19,678. Analysis reveals that the only reconciling items on the July 31 bank reconciliation were a deposit in transit for $4,870 and outstanding checks of $4,570. In addition, you determine that there was an error involving a company check drawn in August: A check for $490 to a creditor on account that cleared the bank in August was journalized and posted for $49.

    Determine the deposits in transit

    mba 560 unit 3 quiz 510168

    1.Bay Company began using the allowance method in 2010. On January 1, 2010, Bay had a $3,000 balance in the Accounts Receivable account and a zero balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts account. During 2010, Bay provided $25,000 of service on account. The company collected $21,000 cash from account receivable. Uncollectible accounts are estimated to be 2% of sales on account. The balance in Accounts Receivable as of December 31, 2010 was: (Points : 2)

    $7,000
    $4,000
    $8,000
    $500

    2.Bay Company began using the allowance method in 2010. On January 1, 2010, Bay had a $3,000 balance in the Accounts Receivable account and a zero balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts account. During 2010, Bay provided $25,000 of service on account. The company collected $21,000 cash from account receivable. Uncollectible accounts are estimated to be 2% of sales on account. The amount of uncollectible accounts expense to recognize on the 2010 income statement is: (Points : 2)

    $80
    $250
    $480
    $500

    3.Accounts receivable turnover is computed by dividing: (Points : 2)

    365 by accounts receivable.
    sales by accounts receivable.
    accounts receivable by net income.
    accounts receivable by sales.

    4.The amount of accounts receivable that is actually expected to be collected is known as: (Points : 2)

    net realizable value.
    uncollectible accounts expense.
    accounts receivable turnover.
    allowance for doubtful accounts.

    5.The net realizable value of accounts receivable is calculated: (Points : 2)

    Accounts Receivable + Uncollectible Accounts Expense.
    Accounts Receivable + Notes Receivable.
    Accounts Receivable Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.
    365/Accounts Receivable.

    6.Howard Company accepts a credit card as payment for $950 of services provided to a customer. The credit card company charges a 4% fee for its services. Select the answer that shows how the entry to record the service revenue would affect Barlett”s financial statements.

    Row

    Assets

    =

    +

    Equity

    =

    Net Inc.

    Cash Flow

    One

    912

    =

    NA

    +

    912

    950

    38

    =

    912

    NA

    Two

    912

    =

    38

    +

    874

    912

    NA

    =

    912

    NA

    Three

    912

    =

    NA

    +

    912

    912

    NA

    =

    912

    912 OA

    Four

    950

    =

    NA

    +

    950

    950

    NA

    =

    950

    950 OA

    Row One
    Row Two
    Row Three
    Row Four

    7.The practice of reporting the net realizable value of receivables in the financial statements is commonly called: (Points : 2)

    – the cash flow method of accounting for uncollectible accounts.
    – the direct write-off method of accounting for uncollectible accounts.
    – the allowance method of accounting for uncollectible accounts.
    – both A and B are correct.

    8.For a business, the advantage of offering credit to customers is that it: (Points : 2)

    – increases the amount of sales.
    – increases cash flow from financing activities.
    – decreases cost of goods sold.
    – decreases the amount of inventory the company needs to carry.

    9.On March 1, Zane Company purchased a new stamping machine with a list price of $24,000. The company paid cash for the machine; therefore, it was allowed a 3% discount. Other costs associated with the machine were: transportation costs, $1,270; sales tax paid, $1,680; installation costs, $450; routine maintenance during the first month of operation, $500. The cost recorded for the machine was: (Points : 2)

    $23,730
    $24,000
    $25,960
    $26,680

    10.On September 10, 2009, Barden Company sold a piece of equipment for $3,000. The equipment had an original cost of $17,000 and accumulated depreciation of $15,500 at the time of the sale. Which of the following correctly shows the effect of the sale on the 2009 financial statements?

    Row

    Assets

    =

    Liabilities

    +

    Equity

    Revenues or Gains

    Expenses or Losses

    =

    Net Inc.

    Cash

    One

    1,500

    NA

    1,500

    1,500

    NA

    1,500

    3,000 OA

    Two

    (1,500)

    NA

    (1,500)

    NA

    1,500

    (1,500)

    3,000 IA

    Three

    1,500

    NA

    1,500

    NA

    (1,500)

    1,500

    NA

    Four

    1,500

    NA

    1,500

    1,500

    NA

    1,500

    3,000 IA

    Row One
    Row Two
    Row Three
    Row Four

    11.Which of the following is an intangible asset with an identifiable useful life? (Points : 2)

    Copyrights
    Renewable franchises
    Goodwill
    Trademarks

    12.Which of the following measurements would not be affected by the choice of depreciation methods? (Points : 2)

    Debt to assets ratio
    Total assets
    The ratio of current assets to current liabilities
    Return on equity ratio

    13.Rouse Company owned an asset that had cost $32,000. The company sold the asset on January 1, 2009 for $8,000. Accumulated depreciation on the day of sale amounted to $26,000. Based on this information, the sale would result in a(n): (Points : 2)

    – $8,000 increase in total assets.
    – $6,000 cash inflow in the financing activities section of the cash flow statement.
    – $2,000 decrease in total assets.
    – $8,000 cash inflow in the investing activities section of the cash flow statement.

    14.The recognition of depletion expense acts to: (Points : 2)

    – decrease assets and equity and increase cash flow from operating expenses.
    – increase cash flow from operating activities and does not affect the amount of total assets.
    – increase assets, equity, and cash flow from operating activities.
    – decrease assets and equity, with no effect on cash flow.

    15.Parker Company purchased Eynon Corporation in 2004, recording $80,000 in goodwill at the time of purchase. In January, 2009, Parker decides that the value of the goodwill has declined substantially due to local economic and demographic changes. Parker estimates that the true value of the goodwill should only be $30,000. Which of the following shows the effect of this situation on the financial statements?

    Row

    Assets

    =

    Liabilities

    +

    Equity

    Revenue

    Expenses

    =

    Net Inc.

    Cash

    One

    =

    +

    +

    NA

    NA

    NA

    =

    NA

    NA

    Two

    =

    NA

    +

    NA

    +

    =

    NA

    – IA

    Three

    NA

    =

    NA

    +

    NA

    NA

    NA

    =

    NA

    NA

    Four

    =

    NA

    +

    NA

    +

    =

    NA

    Row One
    Row Two
    Row Three
    Row Four

    16.Which one of the following would not be classified as an intangible operational asset? (Points : 2)

    Patent
    Copyright
    Iron Ore Deposit
    Goodwill

    17.On January 1, 2008, Stetson Company paid $160,000 to obtain a patent. Stetson expected to use the patent for 5 years before it became technologically obsolete. Based on this information, the amount of amortization expense on the December 31, 2010 income statement and the book value of the patent on the December 31, 2010 balance sheet would be: (Points : 2)

    – $32,000 / $64,000
    – $32,000 / $96,000
    – $64,000 / $64,000
    – $64,000 / $96,000.

    18.Frye Company uses the LIFO cost flow method. They had no beginning inventory and Frye purchased 500 units of inventory that cost $4.00 each. At a later date, the company purchased an additional 600 units of inventory that cost $4.50 each. If Frye sold 800 units of the inventory, the amount of ending inventory appearing on the balance sheet would be: (Points : 2)

    – $1,400
    – $1,350
    – $1,200
    – $1,450

    19.The inventory records for Freer reflected the following:

    Jan 1

    Beginning Inventory

    300 units @ $2.10

    Jan 12

    First Purchase

    400 units @ $2.40

    Jan 21

    Second Purchase

    600 units @ $2.50

    Jan 31

    Sales

    800 units @ $5.00

    Assuming Freer uses a FIFO cost flow method, the ending inventory on January 31 is: (Points : 2)

    – $1,110
    – $980
    – $880
    – $1,250

    20.The inventory records for Freer reflected the following:

    Jan 1

    Beginning Inventory

    300 units @ $2.10

    Jan 12

    First Purchase

    400 units @ $2.40

    Jan 21

    Second Purchase

    600 units @ $2.50

    Jan 31

    Sales

    800 units @ $5.00

    Assuming that Freer uses a FIFO cost flow method, the cost of goods sold for January is: (Points : 2)

    – $1,590
    – $1,840
    – $1,740
    – $1,680

    mcgraw hill connect chapters 8 9 10 and 11 example here of chapter 8 here 510169

    Exercise 8-6 Petty cash fund accounting L.O. P2

    [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

    NetPerks Co. establishes a $200 petty cash fund on January 1. On January 8, the fund shows $28 in cash along with receipts for the following expenditures: postage, $64; transportation-in, $19; delivery expenses, $36; and miscellaneous expenses, $53. NetPerks uses the perpetual system in accounting for merchandise inventory.

    Exercise 8-6 Part 1

    1. Prepare journal entry to establish the fund on January 1. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Date

    General Journal

    Debit

    Credit

    Jan. 1

    2. Prepare journal entry to reimburse it on January 8. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Date

    General Journal

    Debit

    Credit

    Jan. 8

    Prepare journal entries to both reimburse the fund and increase it to $500 on January 8, assuming no entry in part 2. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Date

    General Journal

    Debit

    Credit

    Jan. 8

    Exercise 8-7 Bank reconciliation and adjusting entries L.O. P3

    A table for a monthly bank reconciliation dated September 30 is given below. For each item 1 through 12, indicate whether the item should be added to or deducted from the book or bank balance, or whether it should not appear on the reconciliation. (Select the answers in the appropriate cells and Leave no cells blank be certain to select “NA” in fields which are not applicable.)

    Bank Balance

    Book Balance

    Shown/Not Shown

    Bank service charge for September.

    Checks written and mailed to payees on October 2.

    Checks written by another depositor but charged against this company s account.

    Principal and interest on a note receivable to this company is collected by the bank but not yet recorded by the company.

    Special bank charge for collection of note in part 4 on this company”s behalf.

    Check written against the company”s account and cleared by the bank; erroneously not recorded by the company”s recordkeeper.

    Interest earned on the September cash balance in the bank.

    Night deposit made on September 30 after the bank closed.

    Checks outstanding on August 31 that cleared the bank in September.

    NSF check from customer is returned on September 25 but not yet recorded by this company.

    Checks written by the company and mailed to payees on September 30.

    Deposit made on September 5 and processed by the bank on September 6.

    Problem 8-2A Establish, reimburse, and adjust petty cash L.O. P2

    Shawnee Co. set up a petty cash fund for payments of small amounts. The following transactions involving the petty cash fund occurred in May (the last month of the company”s fiscal year).

    May

    1

    Prepared a company check for $250 to establish the petty cash fund.

    15

    Prepared a company check to replenish the fund for the following expenditures made since May1.

    1. Paid $78 for janitorial services.
    2. Paid $63.68 for miscellaneous expenses.
    3. Paid postage expenses of $43.50.
    4. Paid $57.15 to The County Gazette (the local newspaper) for an advertisement.
    5. Counted $11.15 remaining in the petty cash box.

    16

    Prepared a company check for $200 to increase the fund to $450.

    31

    The petty cashier reports that $293.39 cash remains in the fund. A company check is drawn to replenish the fund for the following expenditures made since May 15.

    1. Paid postage expenses of $48.36.
    2. Reimbursed the office manager for business mileage, $38.50.
    3. Paid $39.75 to deliver merchandise to a customer, terms FOB destination.

    31

    The company decides that the May 16 increase in the fund was too large. It reduces the fund by $50, leaving a total of $400.

    Required:

    Prepare journal entries to establish the fund on May 1, to replenish it on May 15 and on May 31, and to reflect any increase or decrease in the fund balance on May 16 and May 31. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Date

    General Journal

    Debit

    Credit

    May 1

    May 15

    May 16

    May 31

    May 31

    Problem 8-4A Prepare a bank reconciliation and record adjustments L.O. P3

    [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

    The following information is available to reconcile Clark Company s book balance of cash with its bank statement cash balance as of July 31, 2011.

    On July 31, the company s Cash account has a $26,193 debit balance, but its July bank statement shows a $28,020 cash balance.

    Check No. 3031 for $1,380 and Check No. 3040 for $552 were outstanding on the June 30 bank reconciliation. Check No. 3040 is listed with the July canceled checks, but Check No. 3031 is not. Also, Check No. 3065 for $336 and Check No. 3069 for $2,148, both written in July, are not among the canceled checks on the July 31 statement.

    In comparing the canceled checks on the bank statement with the entries in the accounting records, it is found that Check No. 3056 for July rent was correctly written and drawn for $1,250 but was erroneously entered in the accounting records as $1,230.

    A credit memorandum enclosed with the July bank statement indicates the bank collected $9,000 cash on a non-interest-bearing note for Clark, deducted a $45 collection fee, and credited the remainder to its account. Clark had not recorded this event before receiving the statement.

    A debit memorandum for $805 lists a $795 NSF check plus a $10 NSF charge. The check had been received from a customer, Jim Shaw. Clark has not yet recorded this check as NSF.

    Enclosed with the July statement is a $15 debit memorandum for bank services. It has not yet been recorded because no previous notification had been received.

    Clark s July 31 daily cash receipts of $10,152 were placed in the bank s night depository on that date, but do not appear on the July 31 bank statement.

    Problem 8-4A Part 1

    Required:

    Prepare the bank reconciliation for this company as of July 31, 2011. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    CLARK COMPANY
    Bank Reconciliation
    July 31, 2011

    Bank statement balance

    $

    Book balance

    $

    Add:

    Add:

    Deduct:

    Deduct:

    $

    $

    Adjusted bank balance

    $

    Adjusted book balance

    $

    Problem 8-4A Part 2

    Prepare the journal entries necessary to bring the company s book balance of cash into conformity with the reconciled cash balance as of July 31, 2011. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Date

    General Journal

    Debit

    Credit

    July 31

    Problem 8-5A Prepare a bank reconciliation and record adjustments L.O. P3

    [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

    Els Company most recently reconciled its bank statement and book balances of cash on August 31 and it reported two checks outstanding, No. 5888 for $1,038.05 and No. 5893 for $484.25. The following information is available for its September 30, 2011, reconciliation.

    From the September 30 Bank Statement

    PREVIOUS BALANCE

    TOTAL CHECKS AND DEBITS

    TOTAL DEPOSITS AND CREDITS

    CURRENT BALANCE

    16,800.45

    9,620.05

    11,182.85

    18,363.25

    CHECKS AND DEBITS

    DEPOSITS AND CREDITS

    DAILY BALANCE

    Date

    Amount

    Date

    Amount

    Date

    Amount

    09/03

    5888

    1,038.05

    09/05

    1,103.75

    08/31

    16,800.45

    09/04

    5902

    731.90

    09/12

    2,226.90

    09/03

    15,762.40

    09/07

    5901

    1824.25

    09/21

    4,093.00

    09/04

    15,030.50

    09/17

    588.25 NSF

    09/25

    2,351.70

    09/05

    16,134.25

    09/20

    5905

    937.00

    09/30

    22.50 IN

    09/07

    14,310.00

    09/22

    5903

    399.10

    09/30

    1,385.00 CM

    09/12

    16,536.90

    09/22

    5904

    2,080.00

    09/17

    15,948.65

    09/28

    5907

    213.85

    09/20

    15,011.65

    09/29

    5909

    1,807.65

    09/21

    19,104.65

    09/22

    16,625.55

    09/25

    18,977.25

    09/28

    18,763.40

    09/29

    16,955.75

    09/30

    18,363.25

    From Els Company s Accounting Records

    Cash Receipts Deposited

    Date

    Cash
    Debit

    Sept. 5

    1,103.75

    12

    2,226.90

    21

    4,093.00

    25

    2,351.70

    30

    1,582.75

    11,358.10

    Cash Disbursements

    Check No.

    Cash
    Credit

    5901

    1,824.25

    5902

    731.90

    5903

    399.10

    5904

    2,050.00

    5905

    937.00

    5906

    859.30

    5907

    213.85

    5908

    276.00

    5909

    1,807.65

    9,099.05

    Cash

    Acct. No. 101

    Date

    Explanation

    PR

    Debit

    Credit

    Balance

    Aug. 31

    Balance

    15,278.15

    Sept. 30

    Total receipts

    R12

    11,358.10

    26,636.25

    30

    Total disbursements

    D23

    9,099.05

    17,537.20

    Additional Information

    Check No. 5904 is correctly drawn for $2,080 to pay for computer equipment; however, the recordkeeper misread the amount and entered it in the accounting records with a debit to Computer Equipment and a credit to Cash of $2,050. The NSF check shown in the statement was originally received from a customer, S. Nilson, in payment of her account. Its return has not yet been recorded by the company. The credit memorandum is from the collection of a $1,400 note for Els Company by the bank. The bank deducted a $15 collection fee. The collection and fee are not yet recorded.

    Problem 8-5A Part 1

    Required:

    Prepare the September 30, 2011, bank reconciliation for this company. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    ELS COMPANY
    Bank Reconciliation
    September 30, 2011

    Bank statement balance

    $

    Book balance

    $

    Add:

    Add:

    $

    Deduct:

    Deduct:

    $

    Adjusted bank balance

    $

    Adjusted book balance

    $

    Problem 8-5A Part 2

    Prepare the journal entries to adjust the book balance of cash to the reconciled balance. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Date

    General Journal

    Debit

    Credit

    Sept. 30

    AND CHAPTER TEST EXAMPLE SUBMITTED AS DOC:

    PROBLEM #1 22 points

    Greenview Food Store developed the following information in recording its bank statement for the month of March 20XX.

    Balance per books on March 31 $ 829

    Balance per bank on March 31 $ 7,030

    1) Checks written in March but still outstanding, $5,200.

    2) Checks written in February but still outstanding, $1,200.

    3) Deposits of March 30 and 31 not yet recorded by bank, $3,100.

    4) NSF check of customer returned by bank, $400.

    5) Check #210 for $675 was correctly issued and paid by the bank but incorrectly entered in the cash payments journal as payment on account for $657, for payment to a creditor.

    6) Bank service charge for March was $31.

    7) A payment on account was incorrectly entered into the cash payments journal and posted to the accounts payable subsidiary ledger for $854 when check #318 was correctly prepared for $584. The check cleared the bank in March.

    8) The bank collected a note receivable for the company for $3,000 plus $80 interest.

    Instructions:

    a) Prepare a bank reconciliation for the Greenview Food Store for the month of March 31, 20XX.

    b) Journalize the adjusting entries for Greenview Food Store on March 31, 20XX.

    Bank Reconciliation:

    Journal Entries:

    General Journal

    Date

    Description

    Debit

    Credit

    PROBLEM #2 18 points

    Jenrob Company completed the following selected transactions during January 20XX.

    January 1 Established a petty cash fund of $500

    15 The cash sales for the day per the register tape were $3,018.

    The actual cash received from cash sales were $3,011.

    31 Petty cash on hand was $123. Replenished the petty cash fund for the following

    disbursements:

    Jan 2 Office supplies, $45

    10 Postage due on letter, $29 (Miscellaneous Expense)

    14 Office supplies, $56.

    17 Postage stamps, $42 (Office Supplies).

    20 Express charges on merchandise sold, $136 (Delivery Expense).

    22 Repair to desk, $63 (Miscellaneous Expense).

    30 Office supplies, $12.

    31 The cash sales for the day per the register tape were $2,812.

    The actual cash received from cash sales were $2,822.

    31 Decreased the petty cash fund by $100.

    General Journal

    Date

    Description

    Debit

    Credit

    What is the balance in the cash short/over account (DR or CR & $ amount)? Is it a revenue or an expense?

    Balance in Cash Short/Over? ______________________________

    Revenue or Expense? ____________________________________

    mcqs company shares 510170

    1.

    The stockholders of a corporation have unlimited liability.

    A.

    True

    B.

    False

    2.

    Which of these is not a major advantage of a corporation?

    A.

    Separate legal existence

    B.

    Continuous life

    C.

    Government regulations

    D.

    Transferable ownership rights

    3.

    Which one of the following is a major disadvantage of a corporation?

    A.

    Limited liability of stockholders

    B.

    Additional taxes

    C.

    Transferable ownership rights

    D.

    Limited life

    4.

    Which of the following is not a characteristic of a corporation?

    A.

    Separate legal existence

    B.

    Unlimited liability for stockholders

    C.

    Easy transfer of ownership interests

    D.

    Ability to acquire capital easily

    5.

    Which of the following is a disadvantage of the corporate business form?

    A.

    No income taxes

    B.

    Government regulation

    C.

    Continuous life

    D.

    Easy acquisition of capital

    6.

    Which of the following is not a stockholder’s right?

    A.

    The preemptive right

    B.

    The right to share in dividends

    C.

    The right to vote in the election for the board of directors

    D.

    The right to participate in management decisions

    7.

    Ernest, an individual, receives $100 from Vernon Corp. in dividends and is in the 28% tax bracket. Vernon Corp. already paid corporate taxes on the $100 at a 20% tax rate. How much in personal taxes will Ernest need to pay?

    A.

    $0

    B.

    $28

    C.

    $8

    D.

    $20

    8.

    The par value of corporate shares issued represents a corporation’s legal capital.

    A.

    True

    B.

    False

    9.

    Which of these statements is false?

    A.

    Ownership of common stock gives the owner a voting right.

    B.

    The stockholders’ equity section begins with paid-in capital amounts.

    C.

    The authorization of capital stock does not result in a formal accounting entry.

    D.

    Legal capital is intended to protect stockholders.

    10.

    If a corporation issues 1,000 shares of $3 par common stock for $7 a share, how much is the legal capital?

    A.

    $7,000

    B.

    $3,000

    C.

    $4,000

    D.

    $0

    11.

    Which of the following represents the amount per share of stock that must be retained in the business for the protection of corporate creditors?

    A.

    Legal capital

    B.

    Par value

    C.

    Market value

    D.

    Stated value

    12.

    Which of the following represents the maximum number of shares a corporation can issue?

    A.

    Outstanding shares

    B.

    Issued shares

    C.

    Authorized shares

    D.

    Treasury shares

    13.

    DT Inc. issued 3,000 shares of $5 par value common stock for $6 per share. Which of the following is one part of the journal entry to record the issuance?

    A.

    Debit to Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value for $3,000

    B.

    Debit to Cash for $15,000

    C.

    Credit to Common Stock for $15,000

    D.

    Credit to Common Stock for $18,000

    14.

    Wynola, Inc. issued 1,000 shares of common stock at $10 per share. If the stock has a par value of $4 per share, which of the following will be part of the journal entry to record the issuance?

    A.

    Credit to Common Stock for $4,000

    B.

    Debit to Cash for $4,000

    C.

    Credit to Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value for $10,000

    D.

    Debit to Retained Earnings for $6,000

    15.

    Harrison, Inc. issued 4,000 shares of common stock at $12 per share. If the stock has a par value of $0.50 per share, which of the following will be part of the journal entry to record the issuance?

    A.

    Credit to Common Stock for $2,000

    B.

    Debit to Cash for $4,000

    C.

    Credit to Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value for $48,000

    D.

    Debit to Retained Earnings for $46,000

    16.

    Harrison, Inc. issued 600 shares of common stock at $10 per share. If the stock was no-par value stock, which of the following will be part of the journal entry to record the issuance?

    A.

    Debit to Cash for $600

    B.

    Credit to Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par for $600

    C.

    Credit to Common Stock for $6,000

    D.

    Debit to Paid-in Capital $6,000

    17.

    The 13th Street Grill issued 10,000 of $1 par value common stock for $5 per share. Which of the following will be part of the journal entry to record the issuance?

    A.

    A debit of $10,000 to Common Stock

    B.

    A debit of $50,000 to Common Stock

    C.

    A credit of $10,000 to Common Stock

    D.

    A credit of $50,000 to Common Stock

    18.

    Dynatech issues 1,000 shares of $10 par value common stock at $12 per share. When the transaction is recorded, which accounts are credited?

    A.

    Common Stock $10,000 and Gain on Stock Sale $2,000

    B.

    Common Stock $12,000

    C.

    Common Stock $10,000 and Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value $2,000

    D.

    Common Stock $10,000 and Retained Earnings $2,000

    19.

    When treasury stock is purchased, the number of outstanding shares decreases.

    A.

    True

    B.

    False

    20.

    For what reason might a company acquire treasury stock?

    A.

    To reissue the shares to officers and employees under bonus and stock compensation plans

    B.

    To signal to the stock market that management believes the stock is overpriced

    C.

    To increase profit

    D.

    To increase the number of shares of stock outstanding

    21.

    Which one of the following decreases when a corporation purchases treasury stock?

    A.

    Authorized shares

    B.

    Issued shares

    C.

    Treasury shares

    D.

    Outstanding shares

    22.

    What method is normally used to account for treasury stock?

    A.

    Stated value method

    B.

    Legal value method

    C.

    Par value method

    D.

    Cost method

    23.

    If 1,000 shares of $5 par common stock are reacquired by a corporation for $12 a share, by how much will total stockholders’ equity be reduced?

    A.

    $5,000

    B.

    $12,000

    C.

    $0

    D.

    $7,000

    24.

    A corporation sold 1,000 shares of its $2.00 par value common stock for $10.00 per share and later repurchased 100 of those shares for $12.00 per share. Which of the following will be debited to record the repurchase of the 100 shares?

    A.

    Common Stock for $1,200

    B.

    Treasury Stock for $1,200

    C.

    Treasury Stock for $200

    D.

    Cash for $1,200

    25.

    Which of the following increases when a corporation purchases treasury stock?

    A.

    Number of shares authorized

    B.

    Number of shares issued

    C.

    Number of treasury shares

    D.

    Number of outstanding shares

    26.

    A cumulative dividend feature means that preferred stockholders must be paid only current-year dividends before common stockholders receive dividends.

    A.

    True

    B.

    False

    27.

    Dividends in arrears are reported as a current liability on the balance sheet.

    A.

    True

    B.

    False

    28.

    A corporation has cumulative preferred stock on which it pays dividends of $20,000 per year. The dividends are in arrears for two years. If the corporation plans to distribute $90,000 as dividends in the current year, how much will the common stockholders receive?

    A.

    $20,000

    B.

    $30,000

    C.

    $40,000

    D.

    $60,000

    29.

    Which one of the following statements is incorrect?

    A.

    Dividends cannot be paid on common stock while any dividend on preferred stock is in arrears.

    B.

    Dividends in arrears on preferred are not considered a liability.

    C.

    Dividends may be paid on common stock while dividends are in arrears on preferred stock.

    D.

    When preferred stock is noncumulative, any dividend passed in a year is lost forever.

    30.

    Which one of the following is nota right of preferred stockholders?

    A.

    Priority in relation to dividends

    B.

    Priority voting rights

    C.

    Priority to the assets in the event of liquidation

    D.

    Priority to dividends, assets and voting rights.

    31.

    Which of the following is a feature associated only with preferred stock?

    A.

    Dividend preference

    B.

    Preference to assets in the event of liquidation

    C.

    Cumulative dividends

    D.

    All of the answer choices are correct

    32.

    M-Bot Corporation has 10,000 shares of 8%, $100 par value, cumulative preferred stock outstanding at December 31, 2014. No dividends were declared in 2012 or 2013. If M-Bot wants to pay $375,000 of dividends in 2014, how much will common stockholders receive?

    A.

    $0

    B.

    $295,000

    C.

    $215,000

    D.

    $135,000

    33.

    How are dividends in arrears reported in the financial statements?

    A.

    As a liability

    B.

    As an expense

    C.

    In a footnote

    D.

    As an equity item

    midterm in acc 543 managerial accounting 510172

    1) An investment that costs $25,000 will produce annual cash flows of $5,000 for a period of 6 years. Further, the investment has an expected salvage value of $3,000. Given a desired rate of return of 12%, the investment will generate a (round your answer to the nearest whole dollar)
    A. negative net present value of $2,923

    B. positive net present value of $20,557

    C. positive net present value of $1,520

    D. negative net present value of $25,000

    2) Mountain Brook Company is considering two investment opportunities whose cash flows are provided below:

    Year

    Investment A
    Investment B

    Year 0

    ($15,000)

    ($9,000)

    Year 1

    5,000

    5,000

    Year 2

    5,000

    4,000

    Year 3

    5,000

    3,000

    Year 4

    4,000

    1,000

    The company”s hurdle rate is 12%. What is the present value index of Investment A?

    A. 1.00

    B. 0.97

    C. 1.12

    D. 1.01

    3) Britannia Company has two investment opportunities. A cash flow schedule for the investments is provided below:

    Year
    Investment A
    Investment B

    Year 0

    ($5,000)

    ($6,000)

    Year 1

    2,000

    3,000

    Year 2

    2,000

    2,000

    Year 3

    2,000

    2,000

    Year 4

    2,000

    1,000

    Assuming capital rationing is used, which of the following techniques would be most appropriate for choosing between Investment A and Investment B?

    A. Payback technique

    B. Present value index

    C. Net present value technique

    D. None of these techniques apply

    4) Which of the following statements concerning payback analysis is true?

    A. The payback method ignores the time value of money concept.

    B. The payback method and the unadjusted rate of return are different approaches that will consistently lead to the same conclusion.

    C. All of these are true.

    D. An investment with a longer payback is preferable to an investment with a shorter payback.

    5) Select the incorrect statement concerning the internal rate of return (IRR) method of evaluating capital projects.

    A. A project whose IRR is less than the cost of capital should be rejected.

    B. The higher the IRR the better.

    C. The internal rate of return is that rate that makes the present value of the initial outlay equal to zero.

    D. If a project has a positive net present value then its IRR will exceed the hurdle rate.

    6) The rate of return that equates the present value of cash inflows and outflows is the

    A. internal rate of return.

    B. minimum rate of return.

    C. none of these.

    D. desired rate of return

    7) An investment that costs $5,000 will produce annual cash flows of $2,000 for a period of 4 years. Given a desired rate of return of 10%, the investment will generate a present value index of

    A. 1.268.

    B. 0.789.

    C. 7.745.

    D. 2.500.

    8) An investment that cost $48,000 provided annual cash inflows of $9,000 per year for six years. The desired rate of return is 10%. The actual return from the investment was

    A. equal to the desired rate of return.

    B. less than the desired rate of return.

    C. the answer cannot be determined from the information provided.

    D. greater than the desired rate of return.

    9) Which of the following is the approximate internal rate of return for an investment that costs $45,880 and provides a $4,000 annuity for 20 years?

    A. 6%

    B. 5%

    C. 10%

    D. 8%

    10) Yoplait Company employs material handling employees who move materials between production divisions at a labor cost of $160,000 a year. It is estimated that these employees move 75,000 pounds of material per year. If 6,000 pounds are moved in March, how much of the material handling cost should be assigned to products made in March?

    A. $12,800

    B. $12,000

    C. $75,000

    D. $26,666

    11) Perrot Company has three divisions. For Perrot, a cost should be considered a direct cost if

    A. it can be allocated to a division using an volume-based cost driver.

    B. it meets certain guidelines imposed by generally accepted accounting principles.

    C. it is a fixed cost.

    D. it can be traced to a division in a cost-effective manner.

    12) Joint products A and B emerge from common processing that costs $80,000 and yields 5,000 units of Product A and 4,000 units of Product B. Product A can be sold for $100 per unit. Product B can be sold for $80 per unit. What amount of the joint costs will be assigned to Product A if joint costs are allocated on the basis of number of units produced?

    A. $48,780

    B. $35,556

    C. $44,444

    D. $31,220

    13) When a particular job is completed in a job order cost system, the general journal entry would include a

    A. debit to Finished Goods Inventory and a credit to the appropriate job order cost sheet.

    B. debit to Work in Process Inventory and a credit to Finished Goods Inventory.

    C. debit to Work in Process and a credit to Manufacturing Overhead.

    D. debit to Finished Goods Inventory and a credit to Work in Process Inventory.
    ) Moore Company uses process costing. The following information was available for October:

    Units

    Costs

    Work in process Oct. 1

    100

    $ 7,500

    Work in process Oct. 30

    200

    (A)

    Transferred in

    1,000

    $12,500

    Ending inventory is 50% complete. Based on the information given, (A) above would be what amount?

    A. $4,000

    B. $2,000

    C. $1,650

    D. $1,500

    15) The Ragan Corporation uses a process cost system. The company started March with 2,300 units in Work in Process Dept. A. During the month 4,000 units were started. At the end of the month there were 3,200 units in ending Work in Process Dept. A inventory that were 30% complete. The beginning work in process balance was $240,540 and total manufacturing cost for the period was $608,000. Based on this information, the amount of cost transferred from Work in Process Dept. A to Work in Process Dept. B was

    A. $254,562.

    B. $200,640.

    C. $647,900.

    D. $543,233.

    16) Brumlow Company has a contribution margin ratio of 25%. The company is considering a proposal that will increase sales by $100,000. What increase in profit can be expected assuming total fixed costs increase by $20,000?

    A. $20,000

    B. $15,000

    C. $25,000

    D. $5,000

    17) Select the incorrect break-even equation from the following:

    A. Total contribution margin = total variable costs

    B. Total revenue = total costs

    C. Total fixed costs / contribution margin ratio

    D. Total contribution margin = total fixed costs

    18) A product has a contribution margin of $6 per unit and selling price of $20 per unit. Fixed costs are $18,000. Assuming new technology doubles the unit contribution margin but increases total fixed costs by $15,000, what is the breakeven point in units?

    A. 2,750 units

    B. 5,500 units

    C. 4,000 units

    D. 1,250 units

    19) Which of the following items is not needed to prepare an inventory purchases budget for a merchandising business?

    A. Units in beginning inventory

    B. Desired units in ending inventory

    C. Expected unit selling price

    D. Expected unit sales

    20) Which of the following budgets or schedules uses data contained in the selling and administrative expense budget?

    A. Cash receipts schedule

    B. Sales budget

    C. Inventory purchases budget

    D. Cash payments schedule

    21) Select the incorrect statement about the master budget.

    A. The master budget usually includes operating budgets, capital budgets and pro forma financial statements.

    B. Preparing the master budget begins with the sales forecast.

    C. The budgeting process usually begins with preparing the operating budgets.

    D. The master budget is a group of detailed budgets and schedules representing the company”s operating and financial plans for the past accounting period.

    22) Huntsville Company reported a $4,000 unfavorable direct labor price variance and a $1,500 favorable direct labor usage variance. Select the incorrect statement from the following.

    A. It took the employees less time to produce the outputs than expected.

    B. It is possible that the supervisor attempted to use more highly skilled (and paid) employees than allowed for by the direct labor standards.

    C. The total direct labor variance is $2,500 unfavorable.

    D. The standard direct labor rate must have exceeded the actual direct labor rate.

    23) When would a variance be labeled as favorable?

    A. When standard costs are less than actual costs

    B. When actual costs are less than standard costs

    C. When expected sales are greater than actual sales

    D. When standard costs are equal to actual costs

    24) Gonzalez Company makes a product that is expected to use 1.2 pounds of material per unit of product. The material has a standard cost of $2 per pound. Gonzalez actually used 1.25 pounds of material per unit of product made in January. The actual cost of material was $1.95 per pound. Based on this information alone, the condition of the variances for the January production would be

    A. unfavorable for price and favorable for usage.

    B. favorable for price and favorable for usage.

    C. favorable for price and unfavorable for usage.

    D. unfavorable for price and unfavorable for usage.

    25) You are considering an investment in Delta Airlines stock and wish to assess the firm”s ability to generate earnings. All of the following ratios can be used to assess profitability except:

    A. Asset turnover

    B. Average days to collect receivables

    C. Return on investment

    D. Net margin

    26) You are considering an investment in Coca Cola Company stock and wish to assess the firm”s long-term debt-paying ability and its use of debt financing. All of the following ratios can be used to assess solvency expect:

    A. Net margin

    B. Debt to assets ratio

    C. Debt to equity ratio

    D. Number of times interest is earned

    27) You are considering an investment in IBM Company stock and wish to assess the firm”s short-term debt-paying ability. All of the following ratios are used to assess liquidity except:

    A. Inventory turnover

    B. Debt to equity ratio

    C. Quick ratio

    D. Accounts receivable turnover

    28) Sometimes employees will deliberately overstate the amount of materials and/or labor that should be required to complete a job. The difference between inflated and realistic standards is known as

    A. budget slack.

    B. cooking the books.

    C. lowballing.

    D. making the numbers.

    29) In monitoring process quality we might use which of the following statistics?

    A. Percentage deviation from tolerance centers

    B. Logarithmic control intervals

    C. k values for the sample mean

    D. Difference between the highest and lowest value in a sample

    E. Absolute values

    30) Which manager is usually held responsible for materials usage variances?

    A. purchasing agent

    B. marketing manager

    C. plant manager

    D. production supervisor

    montana matt s golf inc 510174

    Montana Matt s Golf Inc. was formed on July 1, 2011, when Matt Magilke purchased the Old Master Golf Company. Old Master provides video golf instruction at kiosks in shopping malls. Magilke plans to integrate the instructional business into his golf equipment and accessory stores. Magilke paid $767,500 cash for Old Master. At the time, Old Master s balance sheet reported assets of $658,800 and liabilities of $211,200 (thus owners equity was $447,600). The fair value of Old Master s assets is estimated to be $802,600. Included in the assets is the Old Master trade name with a fair value of $10,710 and a copyright on some instructional books with a fair value of $35,200. The trade name has a remaining life of 5 years and can be renewed at nominal cost indefinitely. The copyright has a remaining life of 40 years.

    (a)Prepare the intangible assets section of Montana Matt s Golf Inc. at December 31, 2011. How much amortization expense is included in Montana Matt s income for the year ended December 31, 2011?

    (b)Prepare the journal entry to record amortization expense for 2012. Prepare the intangible assets section of Montana Matt s Golf Inc. at December 31, 2012. (No impairments are required to be recorded in 2012.)(Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

    (c)At the end of 2013, Magilke is evaluating the results of the instructional business. Due to fierce competition from online and television (e.g., the Golf Channel), the Old Master reporting unit has been losing money. Its book value is now $509,300. The fair value of the Old Master reporting unit is $422,000. The implied value of goodwill is $88,800. Magilke has collected the following information related to the company s intangible assets.

    Intangible Asset

    Expected Cash Flows
    (undiscounted)

    Fair Values

    Trade names

    $9,420

    $3,400

    Copyrights

    42,190

    23,810

    Prepare the journal entries required, if any, to record impairments on Montana Matt s intangible assets. (Assume that any amortization for 2013 has been recorded.)(Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

    need help on accounting homework 510175

    Exercise 6-4 Income effects of inventory methods L.O. A1

    Park Company reported the following March purchases and sales data for its only product.

    Date

    Activities

    Units Acquired at Cost

    Units Sold at Retail

    1

    Beginning inventory

    150

    units

    @ $7.00

    =

    $

    1,050

    10

    Sales

    90

    units

    @$15

    20

    Purchase

    220

    units

    @ $6.00

    =

    1,320

    25

    Sales

    145

    units

    @$15

    30

    Purchase

    90

    units

    @ $5.00

    =

    450

    Totals

    460

    units

    $

    2,820

    235

    units

    Park uses a perpetual inventory system. For specific identification, ending inventory consists of 225 units, where 90 are from the March 30 purchase, 80 are from the March 20 purchase, and 55 are from beginning inventory.

    Complete comparative income statements for the month of March for Park Company for the four inventory methods. Assume expenses are $1,600, and that the applicable income tax rate is 30%.(Round per unit costs to three decimal places. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amounts. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    PARK COMPANY
    Income Statements
    For Month Ended March 31

    Specific
    Identification

    Weighted
    Average

    FIFO

    LIFO

    Sales

    $

    $

    $

    $

    Cost of goods sold

    Gross profit

    Expenses

    Income before taxes

    Income tax expense

    Net income

    $

    $

    $

    $

    Which method yields the highest net income?

    LIFO

    Weighted average

    FIFO

    Specific identification

    Does net income using weighted average fall between that using FIFO and LIFO?

    Yes

    No

    If costs were rising instead of falling, which method would yield the highest net income?

    LIFO

    Weighted average

    FIFO

    Specific identification

    Anthony Company uses a perpetual inventory system. It entered into the following purchases and sales transactions for March.

    Date

    Activities

    Units Acquired at Cost

    Units Sold at Retail

    1

    Beginning inventory

    50

    units

    @ $50/unit

    5

    Purchase

    200

    units

    @ $55/unit

    9

    Sales

    210

    units

    @ $85/unit

    18

    Purchase

    60

    units

    @ $60/unit

    25

    Purchase

    100

    units

    @ $62/unit

    29

    Sales

    80

    units

    @ $95/unit

    Totals

    410

    units

    290

    units

    Required:

    Compute cost of goods available for sale and the number of units available for sale. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Cost of goods available for sale

    $

    Number of units available for sale

    units

    Compute the number of units in ending inventory.

    Ending inventory

    units

    Compute the cost assigned to ending inventory using (a) FIFO, (b) LIFO, (c) weighted average, and(d)specific identification. For specific identification, the March 9 sale consisted of 40 units from beginning inventory and 170 units from the March 5 purchase; the March 29 sale consisted of 20 units from the March 18 purchase and 60 units from the March 25 purchase. (Due to rounding, the sum of Cost of Goods Sold and Ending inventory may not equal the Cost of Good available for sales. Round your weighted average cost to 3 decimal places. Round your final answers to nearest whole dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Ending
    Inventory

    (a)

    FIFO

    $

    (b)

    LIFO

    $

    (c)

    Weighted average

    $

    (d)

    Specific identification

    $

    Compute gross profit earned by the company for each of the four costing methods. (Round your per unit costs to 3 decimal places and inventory balances and final answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Gross profit

    FIFO

    $

    LIFO

    $

    Weighted average

    $

    Specific identification

    $

    Problem 6-4A Analysis of inventory errors L.O. A2

    Doubletree Company s financial statements show the following. The company recently discovered that in making physical counts of inventory, it had made the following errors: Inventory on December 31, 2010, is understated by $50,000, and inventory on December 31, 2011, is overstated by $20,000.

    For Year Ended December 31

    2010

    2011

    2012

    (a)

    Cost of goods sold

    $

    725,000

    $

    955,000

    $

    790,000

    (b)

    Net income

    268,000

    275,000

    250,000

    (c)

    Total current assets

    1,247,000

    1,360,000

    1,230,000

    (d)

    Total equity

    1,387,000

    1,580,000

    1,245,000

    Required:

    For each key financial statement figure (a), (b), (c), and (d) above prepare a table to show the adjustments necessary to correct the reported amounts. (Amounts to be deducted should be indicated with a minus sign. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    (a)

    Cost of goods sold:

    2010

    2011

    2012

    Reported amount

    $

    $

    $

    Adjustments for:

    12/31/2010 error

    12/31/2011 error

    Corrected amount

    $

    $

    $

    (b)

    Net income

    2010

    2011

    2012

    Reported amount

    $

    $

    $

    Adjustments for:

    12/31/2010 error

    12/31/2011 error

    Corrected amount

    $

    $

    $

    (c)

    Total current assets

    2010

    2011

    2012

    Reported amount

    $

    $

    $

    Adjustments for:

    12/31/2010 error

    12/31/2011 error

    Corrected amount

    $

    $

    $

    (d)

    Equity:

    2010

    2011

    2012

    Reported amount

    $

    $

    $

    Adjustments for:

    12/31/2010 error

    12/31/2011 error

    Corrected amount

    $

    $

    $

    What is the error in total net income for the combined three-year period resulting from the inventory errors(Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Input your answer as a positive value. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Error in total net income of three years

    $

    Problem 6-5AA Alternative cost flows-periodic L.O. P3

    [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

    Viper Company began year 2011 with 20,000 units of product in its January 1 inventory costing $15 each. It made successive purchases of its product in year 2011 as follows. The company uses a periodic inventory system. On December 31, 2011, a physical count reveals that 35,000 units of its product remain in inventory.

    7

    28,000 units @ $18 each

    25

    30,000 units @ $22 each

    1

    20,000 units @ $24 each

    10

    33,000 units @ $27 each

    eBook Linkreferences

    7. value:
    4.00 points

    Problem 6-5AA Part 1

    Required:

    Compute the number and total cost of the units available for sale in year 2011. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Number of units available for sale

    units

    Cost of the units available for sale

    $

    check my workreferences

    8. value:
    4.00 points

    Problem 6-5AA Part 2

    Compute the amounts assigned to the 2011 ending inventory and the cost of goods sold. (Input all amounts as positive values. Round per unit costs to 3 decimal places. Round your final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    (a) FIFO periodic

    Total cost of units available for sale

    $

    Less ending inventory on a FIFO basis

    Cost of units sold

    $

    (b) LIFO periodic

    Total cost of units available for sale

    $

    Less ending inventory on a LIFO basis

    Cost of units sold

    $

    (c) Weighted average periodic

    Total cost of units available for sale

    $

    Less ending inventory on a weighted average

    Cost of units sold

    $

    the owners have decided to go public and issue an ipo they issue 30 million shares 2 510176

    The owners have decided to go public and issue an IPO They issue 30 million shares ($2.00), of which the payment on application is to $0.80 per share (closes 18th April 2013), $0.50 four weeks after allocation (allocation is 13th May 2013) and the remaining amount to be paid on 30th July 2013 (the call will be made on 30th June). The IPO attracts requests for 30.4 million shares. In this case, it exceeds the allowable number of shares and the directors decide to apply the first-come, first-served approach and return the excess back to the unlucky applicants Required: You are to journalise the events (including dates and notations). You should assume that all monies were received on 18th April (applications). What other option did the directors have with the excess demand, returning the excess?

    p10 17a the general ledger of speedy ship at june 30 2012 the end of the company s f 510177

    The general Ledger of Speedy Ship at June 30, 2012, the end of the company s fiscal year, includes the following account balances before adjusting entries.

    Accounts payable ..$114,000

    Current portion of notes payable _______

    Interest payable _______

    Salary payable ._______

    Employee payroll taxes payable ..970

    Employer payroll taxes payable .._______

    Unearned rent revenue 6,900

    Long-term note payable 210,000

    The additional data needed to develop the adjusting entries at June 30 are as follows:

    a.) The long-term debt is payable in annual installments of $42,000, with the next installment due on July 31. On that date, Speedy Ship will also pay one year s interest at 8%. Interest was last paid on July 3 of the preceding year. Make the adjusting entry to shift the current installment of the long-term note payable to a current liability. Also accrue interest expense at year end.

    b.) Gross salaries for the last payroll of the fiscal year were $4,300.

    c.) Employer payroll taxes owed are $850

    d.) On February 1, the company collected one year s rent of $6,900 in advance.

    Requirements

    1. Using the four-column ledger format, open the listed accounts and insert the unadjusted June 30 balances.

    2. Journalize and post the June 30 adjusting entries to the accounts that you opened. Key adjusting entries by letters.

    3. Prepare the current liabilities section of the balance sheet at June 30, 2012

    p16 25a charlie 039 s pets succeeded so well that charlie decided to manufacture his 510178

    Charlie’s Pets succeeded so well that Charlie decided to manufacture his own brand of chewing bone Fido Treats. At the end of December 2012, his accounting records showed the following:

    Inventories: Beginning Ending

    Materials $ 13,400 $ 9,500

    Work in process 0 2,000

    Finished goods 0 5,300

    Other information:

    Direct material purchases $ 33,000

    Utilities for plant $ 1,600

    Plant janitorial services 800 Rent of plant 13,000

    Sales salaries expense 5,000 Customer service hotline expense 1,400

    Delivery expense 1,700 Direct labor 22,000

    Sales revenue 109,000

    Requirements:

    1.Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured for Fido Treats for the year ended December 31, 2012.

    2.Prepare an income statement for Fido Treats for the year ended December 31, 2012.

    3.How does the format of the income statement for Fido Treats differ from the income statement of a merchandiser?

    4.Fido Treats manufactured 18,075 units of its product in 2012. Compute the company’s unit product cost for the year.

    p4 5b lee choi opened choi s window washing inc on july 1 2008 during july the follo 510179

    Lee Choi opened Choi s Window Washing, Inc. on July 1, 2008. During July the following transactions were completed.

    July 1 Issued $12,000 of common stock for $12,000 cash.

    1 Purchased used truck for $6,000, paying $3,000 cash and the balance on account.

    3 Purchased cleaning supplies for $1,300 on account.

    5 Paid $2,400 cash on one-year insurance policy effective July 1.

    12 Billed customers $2,500 for cleaning services.

    18 Paid $1,000 cash on amount owed on truck and $800 on amount owed on cleaning supplies.

    20 Paid $1,200 cash for employee salaries.

    21 Collected $1,400 cash from customers billed on July 12.

    25 Billed customers $5,000 for cleaning services.

    31 Paid gas and oil for month on truck $200.

    31 Declared and paid $900 cash dividend.

    The chart of accounts for Choi s Window Washing contains the following accounts:

    No. 101 Cash, No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 128 Cleaning Supplies, No. 130 Prepaid Insurance, No. 157 Equipment, No. 158 Accumulated Depreciation Equipment, No. 201 Accounts Payable, No. 212 Salaries Payable, No. 311 Common Stock, No. 320 Retained Earnings, No. 332 Dividends, No. 350 Income Summary, No. 400 Service Revenue, No. 633 Gas & Oil Expense ,No. 634 Cleaning Supplies

    Expense, No. 711 Depreciation Expense, No. 722 Insurance Expense, and No. 726 Salaries Expense.

    Instructions

    (a) Journalize and post the July transactions. Use page J1 for the journal and the three-column

    form of account.

    (b) Prepare a trial balance at July 31 on a worksheet.

    (c) Enter the following adjustments on the worksheet and complete the worksheet.

    (1) Services provided but unbilled and uncollected at July 31 were $1,500.

    (2) Depreciation on equipment for the month was $300.

    (3) One-twelfth of the insurance expired.

    (4) An inventory count shows $400 of cleaning supplies on hand at July 31.

    (5) Accrued but unpaid employee salaries were $600.

    (d) Prepare the income statement and a retained earnings statement for July and a classified balance

    sheet at July 31.

    (e) Journalize and post adjusting entries. Use page J2 for the journal.

    (f) Journalize and post closing entries and complete the closing process. Use page J3 for the journal.

    (g) Prepare a post-closing trial balance at July 31.

    Check for answers:

    (b) Trial balance $22,000

    (c) Adjusted trial balance $24,400

    (d) Net income $5,600;

    Total assets $19,800

    (g) Post-closing trial balance $20,100

    p7 31a suppose that on june 1 rockin gyrations a disc jockey service creates a petty 510180

    Suppose that on June 1, Rockin Gyrations, a disc jockey service, creates a petty cash fund with an imprest balance of $500. During June, Michael Martell, fund custodian, signs the following petty cash tickets:

    Petty Cash Ticket Number Item Amount

    1 Postage for package received $ 20

    2 Decorations and refreshments for office party 25

    3 Two boxes of stationery 35

    4 Printer cartridges 15

    5 Dinner money for sales manager entertaining a customer 75

    On June 30, prior to replenishment, the fund contains these tickets plus cash of $325. The accounts affected by petty cash payments are Office supplies expense, Entertainment expense, and Postage expense.

    Requirements:

    1. On June 30, how much cash should this petty cash fund hold before it is replenished?

    2. Journalize all required entries to (a) create the fund and (b) replenish it. Include explanations.

    3. Make the entry on July 1 to increase the fund balance to $550. Include an explanation

    partnerships distributions sales and exchanges ch 20 510181

    Partnerships Distributions, Sales, and Exchanges
    TRUE-FALSE QUESTIONS CHAPTER 20
    1. Only a cash basis partnership is concerned with the problem of unrealized receivables.
    2. The inclusion of accounts receivable of an accrual basis partnership in the determination of its substantially appreciated inventory items reduces the chances of the partnership being affected by Section 751.
    3. A partner’s interest in a partnership is a capital asset.
    4. When a partner acquires an interest in a partnership by purchase, the basis of the underlying assets of the partnership must be adjusted to reflect the price the incoming partner paid for his interest.
    5. Where property for which a special basis adjustment was made because a partnership interest was purchased is distributed to a nonpurchasing partner, the basis adjustment carries over to the distributee partner.
    6. With respect to the allocation of a basis adjustment to partnership assets, the total fair market value of all of the assets is compared with the total adjusted basis of those same assets and the difference between the two amounts is allocated to each asset based upon its relative adjusted basis.
    7. A partner who receives a current property distribution (other than cash), made pro rata to all the partners, will not have to report a gain with respect to the distribution.
    8. As a general rule, property distributed to a partner, not in liquidation of an interest in the partnership, takes the same basis in the hands of the partner as it had in the hands of the partnership.
    9. If the partnership agreement is silent but the partners recognize that a retiring partner had created substantial goodwill for the partnership while a partner, the retiring partner may report as capital gain so much of the payments for the partnership interest as are designated as payment for goodwill.
    10. A partnership may elect to adjust the basis of its property merely because one partner sells an interest to another partner and there is no transfer of any partnership assets involved.
    MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS CHAPTER 20
    11. On April 1, George Hart, Jr. acquired a 25 percent interest in the Wilson, Hart, and Company partnership by gift from his father. The 25 percent partnership interest had been acquired by a $50,000 cash investment by Hart, Sr. 10 years ago. The fair market value of Hart, Sr.’s partnership interest was $60,000 at the time of the gift. Hart, Jr. sold the 25 percent interest for $85,000 on December 17. What type and amount of capital gain should Hart, Jr. report on his tax return?
    a. Long-term capital gain of $25,000
    b. Short-term capital gain of $25,000
    c. Long-term capital gain of $35,000
    d. Short-term capital gain of $35,000
    12. Ralph Elin contributed a plot of land to the partnership of Anduz and Elin. Elin’s adjusted basis for this land was $50,000, and its fair market value was $75,000. Under the partnership agreement, Elin’s capital account was credited with the full fair market value of the land. Anduz matched Elin’s contribution with a $75,000 cash contribution to the partnership. Thus, each partner’s capital account was credited with $75,000. Elin and Anduz share profits and losses equally. What is the adjusted basis of Elin’s interest in the partnership?
    a. $25,000
    b. $37,500
    c. $50,000
    d. $75,000
    13. On July 1, Clark Cootes acquired a 20 percent interest in the partnership of Davis & Denny, by contributing a parcel of land for which his basis was $8,000. At the date of the contribution, the land had a fair market value of $20,000 and was subject to a mortgage of $4,000. Responsibility for the mortgage was assumed by the partnership. Assuming there are no other partnership liabilities, the basis of Clark’s interest in the partnership is:
    a. $4,000
    b. $4,800
    c. $16,000
    d. $16,800
    14. For 20 years, Henry Humboldt has been a 25 percent partner in HIG, a calendar year, cash basis partnership. This year, HIG averaged ordinary partnership income of $20,000 each month. As of September 30, when Henry’s adjusted basis for his partnership interest, prior to consideration of the current year operations, was $40,000, he sold his interest to George for $90,000. Henry should include in his current year return as income from the partnership:
    a. $70,000 long-term capital gain
    b. $50,000 long-term capital gain
    c. $20,000 long-term capital gain and $50,000 ordinary income
    d. $5,000 long-term capital gain and $45,000 ordinary income
    e. $70,000 ordinary income
    15. John Albin is a retired partner of Brill & Crum, a personal service partnership. Albin has not rendered any services to Brill & Crum since his retirement over 10 years ago. Under the provisions of Albin’s retirement agreement, Brill & Crum is obligated to pay Albin 10 percent of the partnership’s net income each year. In compliance with this agreement, Brill & Crum paid Albin $25,000 this year. How should Albin treat this $25,000?
    a. Not taxable
    b. Ordinary income
    c. Short-term capital gain
    d. Long-term capital gain
    16. A partnership has no Section 751 assets. Assuming that the partnership has a Code Sec. 754 election in effect, the partnership would make all of the following adjustments except:
    a. Increase the basis of partnership property because of capital gain which a distributee partner recognizes in a current distribution.
    b. Decrease the basis of partnership property because of capital loss which a distributee partner recognizes in a liquidating distribution.
    c. Increase the basis of partnership property because the distributee partner’s basis for the partnership interest limits the basis assigned to partnership property received in a current distribution.
    d. Decrease the basis of partnership property because the amount of the distributee partner’s basis assigned to partnership property distributed in a liquidating distribution exceeds the partnership’s pre-distribution basis in the property.
    e. Decrease the basis of partnership property for the excess of the amount a purchasing partner pays for a partnership interest over the partner’s proportionate share of the partnership’s basis in its properties.
    17. Mark, Pete and Mickey are equal partners in the 2MP Partnership. At the beginning of the year, Mark’s basis in his partnership interest was $15,000, Pete’s basis was $10,000, and Mickey’s basis was $20,000. The partnership reported taxable income of $30,000 (allocated equally among the partners). At year-end, the partnership made a nonliquidating distribution of $25,000 cash to Pete. How much income or gain will Pete recognize on receipt of the distribution (assume the partnership has no hot assets)? Assume the partnership has no liabilities.
    a. zero
    b. $25,000
    c. $5,000
    d. $15,000
    e. none of the above
    18. Ellen is a 25 percent partner in Heartland Partners. Her tax basis in her partnership interest is $18,000. She received a non-liquidating distribution of land with a tax basis of $23,000 and a fair market value of $45,000. The partnership has no liabilities. What will be Ellen’s tax basis in the land received in the non-liquidating distribution?
    a. $18,000
    b. $23,000
    c. $45,000
    d. zero
    e. none of the above

    paul wisely final 510183

    Question 1

    Transactions for Mehta Company for the month of May are presented below.

    May

    1

    B.D. Mehta invests $3,091 cash in exchange for common stock of Mehta Company, a small welding corporation.

    3

    Buys equipment on account for $1,153.

    13

    Pays $659 to landlord for May rent.

    21

    Bills Noble Corp. $539 for welding work done.

    Prepare journal entries for each of these transactions.

    Question 2

    On July 1, 2012, Crowe Co. pays $18,673 to Zubin Insurance Co. for a 3-year insurance contract. Both companies have fiscal years ending December 31. For Crowe Co. journalize the entry on July 1 and the adjusting entry on December 31.(Round answers to zero decimal places, e.g. 2,555.)

    Question 3

    Dresser Company’s weekly payroll, paid on Fridays, totals $7,700. Employees work a 5-day week. Prepare Dresser’s adjusting entry on Wednesday, December 31, and the journal entry to record the $7,700 cash payment on Friday, January 2.(List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)

    Question 4

    Side Kicks has year-end account balances of Sales $886,140; Interest Revenue $15,570; Cost of Goods Sold $564,230; Operating Expenses $213,480; Income Tax Expense $37,660; and Dividends $21,348. Prepare the year-end closing entries.(List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)

    Question 5

    Financial information exhibits the characteristic of consistency when

    Question 6

    What is the relationship between the Securities and Exchange Commission and accounting standard setting in the United States?

    Question 7

    Starr Co. had sales revenue of $621,700 in 2012. Other items recorded during the year were:

    Cost of goods sold

    $330,000

    Wage expense

    129,300

    Income tax expense

    26,400

    Increase in value of company reputation

    15,100

    Other operating expenses

    12,500

    Unrealized gain on value of patents

    20,600

    Prepare a single-step income statement for Allen for 2012. Allen has 100,000 shares of stock outstanding.(List multiple entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2. Round earnings per share to 2 decimal places, e.g. 0.20. Enter all amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary.)

    Question 8

    Portman Corporation has retained earnings of $728,900 at January 1, 2012. Net income during 2012 was $1,897,010, and cash dividends declared and paid during 2012 totaled $77,690. Prepare a retained earnings statement for the year ended December 31, 2012. Assume an error was discovered: land costing $86,630 (net of tax) was charged to repairs expense in 2009.(Enter all amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary.)

    Question 9

    On January 1, 2012, Richards Inc. had cash and common stock of $62,700. At that date the company had no other asset, liability or equity balances. On January 2, 2012, it purchased for cash $21,030 of equity securities that it classified as available-for-sale. It received cash dividends of $4,200 net of tax during the year on these securities. In addition, it has an unrealized holding gain on these securities of $5,520 net of tax. Determine the following amounts for 2012: (a) net income; (b) comprehensive income; (c) other comprehensive income; and (d) accumulated other comprehensive income (end of 2012).

    Question 10

    (Comprehensive Income)

    Armstrong Corporation reported the following for 2012: net sales $1,286,800; cost of goods sold $763,800; selling and administrative expenses $331,100; and an unrealized holding gain on available-for-sale securities $23,000.

    Prepare a statement of comprehensive income, using the two-income statement format. Ignore income taxes and earnings per share.(Enter all amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary.)

    Question 11

    Guillen, Inc. began work on a $7,081,900 contract in 2012 to construct an office building. Guillen uses the completed-contract method. At December 31, 2012, the balances in certain accounts were construction in process $1,748,100; accounts receivable $255,100; and billings on construction in process $1,119,000. Indicate how these accounts would be reported in Guillen’s December 31, 2012, balance sheet.

    Question 12

    Lazaro, Inc. sells goods on the installment basis and uses the installment-sales method. Due to a customer default, Lazaro repossessed merchandise that was originally sold for $950, resulting in a gross profit rate of 40%. At the time of repossession, the uncollected balance is $550, and the fair value of the repossessed merchandise is $299. Prepare Lazaro’s entry to record the repossession.(List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)

    Question 13

    Harding Corporation has the following accounts included in its December 31, 2012, trial balance: Accounts Receivable $110,620; Inventories $293,520; Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $9,270; Patents $73,940; Prepaid Insurance $9,710; Accounts Payable $78,930; Cash $34,760. Prepare the current assets section of the balance sheet listing the accounts in proper sequence.

    Question 14

    Patrick Corporation’s adjusted trial balance contained the following asset accounts at December 31, 2012: Prepaid Rent $20,500; Goodwill $54,940; Franchise Fees Receivable $2,200; Franchises $46,280; Patents $32,380; Trademarks $13,490. Prepare the intangible assets section of the balance sheet.(List amounts from largest to smallest, e.g. 10, 5, 3, 2.)

    Question 15

    Hawthorn Corporation’s adjusted trial balance contained the following accounts at December 31, 2012: Retained Earnings $121,510; Common Stock $708,320; Bonds Payable $104,690; Additional Paid-in Capital $202,370; Goodwill $60,810; Accumulated Other Comprehensive Loss $151,950. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet.(List entries in order of stock preferred status. For negative numbers use either a negative sign preceding the number, e.g. -45 or parenthesis, e.g. (45).)

    Question 16

    Keyser Beverage Company reported the following items in the most recent year.

    Net income

    $45,500

    Dividends paid

    6,030

    Increase in accounts receivable

    11,770

    Increase in accounts payable

    7,510

    Purchase of equipment (capital expenditure)

    9,470

    Depreciation expense

    6,510

    Issue of notes payable

    20,990

    Compute net cash flow provided by operating activities and the net change in cash during the year.(List amounts from largest positive to smallest positive followed by most negative to least negative, e.g. 15, 14, 10, -17, -5, -1. For negative numbers use either a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -45 or parenthesis e.g. (45).)

    Question 17

    Linden Corporation is preparing its December 31, 2012, financial statements. Two events that occurred between December 31, 2012, and March 10, 2013, when the statements were issued, are described below.

    1. A liability, estimated at $162,910 at December 31, 2012, was settled on February 26, 2013, at $181,060.

    2. A flood loss of $79,500 occurred on March 1, 2013.

    What effect do these subsequent events have on 2012 net income?(If there is no impact select not change and 0 for the amount.)

    Question 18

    Roder Corporation has seven industry segments with total revenues as follows.

    Penley

    $1,743

    Cheng

    $581

    Konami

    1,992

    Takuhi

    498

    KSC

    664

    Molina

    2,075

    Red Moon

    747

    Based only on the total revenues test, which industry segments are reportable?

    Enter 1 if the segment is reportable. Enter 0 if the segment is not reportable.

    Question 19

    Operating profits and losses for the seven industry segments of Roder Corporation are:

    Penley

    $130

    Cheng

    $(30)

    Konami

    (60)

    Takuhi

    45

    KSC

    40

    Molina

    215

    Red Moon

    75

    Based only on the operating profit (loss) test, which industry segments are reportable?

    Enter 1 if the segment is reportable. Enter 0 if the segment is not reportable.

    Question 20

    Which of the following events will appear in the cash flows from financing activities section of the statement of cash flows?

    Question 21

    Heartland Company’s budgeted sales and budgeted cost of goods sold for the coming year are $140,520,000 and $34,749,000 respectively. Short-term interest rates are expected to average 10%. If Heartland can increase inventory turnover from its present level of 9 times a year to a level of 12 times per year, compute its expected cost savings for the coming year.

    Question 22

    The financial statement which summarizes operating, investing, and financing activities of an entity for a period of time is the

    Question 23

    Ames Company reported 2012 net income of $155,580. During 2012, accounts receivable increased by $15,020 and accounts payable increased by $9,900. Depreciation expense was $41,710. Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows.(List amounts from largest positive to smallest positive followed by most negative to least negative, e.g. 15, 14, 10, -17, -5, -1. For negative numbers use either a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -45 or parenthesis e.g. (45).)

    Question 24

    Martinez Corporation engaged in the following cash transactions during 2012.

    Sale of land and building

    $197,470

    Purchase of treasury stock

    41,520

    Purchase of land

    38,050

    Payment of cash dividend

    86,150

    Purchase of equipment

    56,870

    Issuance of common stock

    153,880

    Retirement of bonds

    100,610

    Compute the net cash provided (used) by investing activities.(List multiple entries from the largest positive to the smallest positive amount followed by the most negative to the least negative amount, e.g. 15, 14, 10, -17, -5, -1. For negative numbers use either a negative sign preceding the number, e.g. -45 or parenthesis, e.g. (45).)

    Question 25

    Martinez Corporation engaged in the following cash transactions during 2012.

    Sale of land and building

    $188,620

    Purchase of treasury stock

    46,180

    Purchase of land

    46,390

    Payment of cash dividend

    89,690

    Purchase of equipment

    58,090

    Issuance of common stock

    152,810

    Retirement of bonds

    101,810

    Determine Martinez’s free cash flow, assuming that it reported net cash provided by operating activities of $408,610. (List amounts from largest positive to smallest positive followed by most negative to least negative, e.g. 15, 14, 10, -17, -5, -1. For negative numbers use either a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -45 or parenthesis e.g. (45).)

    Question 26

    (Preparation of a Statement of Cash Flows)

    A comparative balance sheet for Orozco Corporation is presented below.

    December 31

    Assets

    2012

    2011

    Cash

    $63,005

    $22,000

    Accounts receivable

    84,797

    68,792

    Inventories

    182,797

    191,792

    Land

    73,797

    112,792

    Equipment

    267,203

    197,208

    Accumulated depreciation-equipment

    (71,797)

    (44,792)

    Total

    $599,802

    $547,792

    Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

    Accounts payable

    $36,797

    $49,792

    Bonds payable

    150,000

    200,000

    Common stock ($1 par)

    214,000

    164,000

    Retained earnings

    199,005

    134,000

    Total

    $599,802

    $547,792

    Additional information:

    1. Net income for 2012 was $110,594.

    2. Cash dividends of $45,589 were declared and paid.

    3. Bonds payable amounting to $50,000 were retired through issuance of common stock.

    (a)

    Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2012 for Orozco Corporation.(List multiple entries from the largest positive to the smallest positive amount followed by the most negative to the least negative amount, e.g. 15, 14, 10, -17, -5, -1. For negative numbers use either a negative sign preceding the number, e.g. -45 or parenthesis, e.g. (45).)

    4.

    (b)

    Determine Orozco Corporation’s current cash debt coverage ratio, cash debt coverage ratio, and free cash flow.(Round ratios to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.55. List multiple entries from the largest positive to the smallest positive amount followed by the most negative to the least negative amount, e.g. 15, 14, 10, -17, -5, -1. For negative numbers use either a negative sign preceding the number, e.g. -45 or parenthesis, e.g. (45).)

    Question 27

    Chris Spear invested $11,349 today in a fund that earns 8% compounded annually. To what amount will the investment grow in 3 years? To what amount would the investment grow in 3 years if the fund earns 8% annual interest compounded semiannually?(Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 12,250.25. Hint: Use tables in text.)

    Question 28

    Amy Monroe wants to create a fund today that will enable her to withdraw $32,450 per year for 8 years, with the first withdrawal to take place 5 years from today. If the fund earns 10% interest, how much must Amy invest today?(Round the answer to zero decimal places, e.g. 120,250. Hint: Use tables in text.)

    Question 29

    Zach Taylor is settling a $25,000 loan due today by making 6 equal annual payments of $5,909.41.

    What payments must Zach Taylor make to settle the loan at the interest rate of 11%, but with the 6 payments beginning on the day the loan is signed?(Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2,250.25. Hint: Use tables in text.)

    Question 30

    (Simple and Compound Interest Computations)

    Lyle O ‘Keefe invests $32,100 at 8% annual interest, leaving the money invested without withdrawing any of the interest for 9 years. At the end of the 9 years, Lyle withdrew the accumulated amount of money.

    (a)

    Compute the amount Lyle would withdraw assuming the investment earns simple interest.

    (b)

    Compute the amount Lyle would withdraw assuming the investment earns interest compounded annually.(Round to 2 decimal places, e.g. 25,250.25. Hint: Use tables in text.)

    (c)

    Compute the amount Lyle would withdraw assuming the investment earns interest compounded semiannually.(Round to 2 decimal places, e.g. 25,250.25. Hint: Use tables in text.)

    princeton fabrication inc produced and sold 1 200 units of the company s only produc 510187

    Princeton Fabrication, Inc., produced and sold 1,200 units of the company s only product in March. You have collected the following information from the accounting records:

    Sales price (per unit) ——————. $ 896

    Manufacturing costs:

    Fixed overhead (for the month) ——————– 100,800

    Direct labor (per unit)———- 70

    Direct materials (per unit) —————- 224

    Variable overhead (per unit) ————– 140

    Marketing and administrative costs:

    Fixed costs (for the month) ————- 134,400

    Variable costs (per unit) ————– 28

    Required

    a.) Compute:

    1. Variable manufacturing cost per unit.

    2. Full cost per unit.

    3. Variable cost per unit.

    4. Full absorption cost per unit.

    5. Prime cost per unit.

    6. Conversion cost per unit.

    7. Profit margin per unit.

    8. Contribution margin per unit.

    9. Gross margin per unit.

    b) If the number of units decreases from 1,200 to 800, which is within the relevant range, will the fixed manufacturing cost per unit increase, decrease, or remain the same? Explain.

    problem 4 15 brady products problem 4 17 bohemian links inc and case 4 20 durall com 510189

    PROBLEM 4 15

    Brady Products manufactures a silicone paste wax that goes through three processing departments

    Cracking, Blending, and Packing. All raw materials are introduced at the start of work in the Cracking

    Department. The Work in Process T-account for the Cracking Department for a recent month is

    given below:

    Work in Process Cracking Department

    Inventory, May 1 63,700 Completed and transferred

    Materials 397,600 to the Blending Department ?

    Conversion 187,600

    Inventory, May 31 ?

    The May 1 work in process inventory consisted of 35,000 pounds with $43,400 in materials cost

    and $20,300 in conversion cost. The May 1 work in process inventory was 100% complete with

    respect to materials and 80% complete with respect to conversion. During May, 280,000 pounds

    were started into production. The May 31 inventory consisted of 45,000 pounds that were 100%

    complete with respect to materials and 60% complete with respect to conversion. The company

    uses the weighted-average method to account for units and costs

    Required:

    1. Determine the equivalent units of production for May.

    2. Determine the costs per equivalent unit for May.

    3. Determine the cost of the units completed and transferred to the Blending Department during

    May.

    PROBLEM 4 17

    Bohemian Links Inc. produces sausages in three production departments Mixing, Casing and

    Curing, and Packaging. In the Mixing Department, meats are prepared and ground and then mixed

    with spices. The spiced meat mixture is then transferred to the Casing and Curing Department,

    where the mixture is force-fed into casings and then hung and cured in climate-controlled smoking

    chambers. In the Packaging Department, the cured sausages are sorted, packed, and labeled. The company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data for April for the

    Casing and Curing Department follow:

    Percent Completed

    Units Mixing Materials Conversion

    Work in process inventory, April 1 . . . . . . . . . 1 100% 60% 50%

    Work in process inventory, April 30 . . . . . . . . 1 100% 20% 10%

    Mixing Materials Conversion

    Work in process inventory, April 1 . . . . . . . . . $1,640 $26 $105

    Cost added during April . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $94,740 $8,402

    Mixing cost represents the costs of the spiced meat mixture transferred in from the Mixing Department.

    The spiced meat mixture is processed in the Casing and Curing Department in batches; each

    unit in the above table is a batch, and one batch of spiced meat mixture produces a set amount of

    sausages that are passed on to the Packaging Department. During April, 60 batches (i.e., units)

    were completed and transferred to the Packaging Department.

    Required:

    1. Determine the equivalent units for April for mixing, materials, and conversion. Do not round

    off your computations.

    2. Compute the costs per equivalent unit for April for mixing, materials, and conversion.

    3. Determine the total cost of ending work in process inventory and the total cost of units transferred

    to the Packaging Department in April.

    4, Prepare a cost reconciliation report for the Casing and Curing Department for April.

    CASE 4 20

    Durall Company manufactures a plastic gasket that is used in automobile engines. The gaskets go

    through three processing departments: Mixing, Forming, and Stamping. The company s accountant

    (who is very inexperienced) has prepared a summary of production and costs for the Forming

    Department for October as follows:

    Forming Department costs:

    Work in process inventory, October 1, 8,000 units:

    materials 100% complete; conversion 7 8 complete . . . . . . . . $ 22,420*

    Costs transferred in from the Mixing Department . . . . . . . . . . . 81,480

    Material added during October (added when processing

    is 50% complete in the Forming Department) . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,600

    Conversion costs added during October . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96,900

    Total departmental costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $228,400

    Forming Department costs assigned to:

    Units completed and transferred to the Stamping

    Department, 100,000 units at $2.284 each . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $228,400

    Work in process inventory, October 31, 5,000 units:

    conversion 2 5 complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

    Total departmental costs assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $228,400

    *Consists of cost transferred in, $8,820; materials cost, $3,400; and conversion costs,

    $10,200.

    After mulling over the data above, Durall s president commented, I can t understand what s

    happening here. Despite a concentrated effort at cost reduction, our unit cost actually went up in

    the Forming Department last month. With that kind of performance, year-end bonuses are out of

    the question for the people in that department.

    The company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing.

    Required:

    1. Prepare a report for the Forming Department for October showing how much cost should have

    been assigned to the units completed and transferred to the Stamping Department and to the

    ending work in process inventory.

    2. Explain to the president why the unit cost appearing on the report prepared by the accountant

    is so high.

    question 1 charles giles worked 46 hours during this pay week he is paid time and a 510191

    Question # 1: Charles Giles worked 46 hours during this pay week. He is paid time and a half for hours over 40 and his pay rate is $17.90/hour. What was his overtime premium pay for this workweek?

    Use the following information to answer Questions 2, 3 & 4:

    The totals from the first payroll of the year are shown below.

    Total Pay = $36, 195.10

    FICA/OASDI = $ 2,244.10

    FICA/HI = $ 524.83

    FIT W/H = $ 6,515.00

    State Tax W/H = $ 361.95

    Union Dues = $ 500.00

    Net Pay = $ 26,049.22

    Question # 2: Journalize the entry to record the payroll.

    Question # 3: Journalize the entry to record the employer s payroll taxes (assume a SUTA rate of 3.7%).

    Question # 4: Journalize the entry to deposit the FICA and FIT taxes.

    question 1 on a multiple step income statement income from operations is computed as 510193

    Question 1 On a multiple-step income statement, Income from Operations is computed as follows:

    net sales less cost of goods sold.

    cost of goods sold less total assets.

    operating expenses plus total assets.

    gross profit less total operating expenses.

    Question 2 The form of income statement that derives its name from the fact that the total of all expenses is deducted from the total of all revenues is called a:

    balance sheet.

    statement of cash flows.

    statement of shareholders equity.

    single-step income statement.

    Question 3 The following information was taken from Smith Corporation s accounting records:

    Operating Expenses$45,000

    Sales Returns and Allowances13,000

    Sales Discount6,000

    Sales150,000

    Costs of Goods Sold77,000

    What is Smith Corporation s gross profit?

    $61,000.

    $54,000.

    $76,000.

    $73,000.

    Question 4 Merchandising companies that sell to retailers are known as:

    brokers.

    corporations.

    wholesalers.

    service firms.

    Question 5 Assume a company uses the periodic inventory system and has a beginning merchandise inventory balance of $5,000, inventory purchases for the year of $75,000, and sales for the year of $125,000. What is the amount of the company s Cost of Goods Available for Sale for the year?

    $80,000.

    $125,000.

    $5,000.

    none of the above.

    Question 6 Which of the following items does not affect the merchandise inventory account under a perpetual system?

    A purchase of merchandise inventory.

    A return of merchandise inventory to the supplier

    Payment of freight costs for merchandise inventory shipped to a customer

    Payment of freight costs for merchandise inventory received from a supplier

    Question 7 Which of the following inventory costing methods depends upon an inventory count to determine cost of goods sold?

    Lower of Cost or Market

    Obsolescence

    Perpetual

    Periodic

    Question 8 The accountant at Kramer Company is figuring out the difference in income taxes the company will pay depending on the choice of either FIFO or LIFO as an inventory costing method. The tax rate is 30% and the FIFO method will result in income before taxes of $4,370. The LIFO method will result in income before taxes of $3,950. What is the difference in tax that would be paid between the two methods?

    $420

    $294

    $126

    Cannot be determined from the information provided.

    Question 9 The lower of cost or market basis of valuing inventories is an example of:

    voodoo economics.

    the cost principle.

    conservatism.

    all of the above.

    Question 10 The use of the LIFO inventory costing method every year complies with the accounting principle of:

    conservatism.

    consistency.

    profits.

    efficiency.

    Question 11 Which of the following statements is correct with respect to inventories?

    The FIFO method assumes that the costs of the earliest goods acquired are the last to be sold.

    It is generally good business management to sell the most recently acquired goods first.

    Under FIFO, the ending inventory is based on the latest units purchased.

    Under FIFO, the ending inventory is based on the oldest units purchased.

    Question 12 If goods in transit are shipped FOB destination:

    the seller has legal title to the goods until they are delivered.

    the buyer has legal title to the goods until they are delivered.

    the transportation company has legal title to the goods while the goods are in transit.

    no one has legal title to the goods until they are delivered.

    Question 13 Which inventory method usually gives higher net income when prices are rising?

    LIFO.

    Specific ID.

    Average Cost.

    FIFO.

    Question 14 Cost of goods sold is not known until after the taking of a physical count of the inventory at the end of the year under which of the following inventory methods?

    Periodic

    Perpetual

    NIFO

    None of the above

    Question 15 Which one of the following is not an objective of a system of internal controls?

    Safeguard company assets

    Enhance the accuracy and reliability of accounting records

    Increase total sales

    Reduce the risks of errors

    Question 16 At Harley Davidson, the motorcycles on the assembly line are classified as

    Work in Progress

    Finished Goods

    Raw Materials

    Completed sales

    Question 17 Which of the following promotes good internal control?

    increased sales commissions

    pay shareholders a larger dividend

    undertake a new advertising campaign

    one employee is assigned to handle the accounting for an asset and another employee has physical control over the asset.

    Question 18 For which of the following errors should the appropriate amount be added to the balance per books on a bank reconciliation?

    Check for $43 was incorrectly recorded on the books as $34

    Deposit of $500 was incorrectly recorded by the bank as $50

    A $200 check was incorrectly recorded by the bank as $20

    Check for $35 was incorrectly recorded on the books as $53

    Question 19 With respect to a bank reconciliation, a journal entry is required for which of the following

    Deposits in Transit

    Outstanding Checks

    NSF Checks

    All of the above

    Question 20 The maturity value of a $2,000, 6%, 60-day note receivable dated February 10th is

    $2,020.

    $2,010.

    $2,000.

    $2,120.

    Question 21 When an account is written off using the allowance method, accounts receivable:

    is unchanged and the allowance account increases.

    increases and the allowance account increases.

    decreases and the allowance account decreases.

    decreases and the allowance account increases.

    Question 22 The gross profit rate is computed by dividing:

    net sales by net income.

    net sales by total assets.

    gross profit by net sales.

    net sales by gross profit.

    Question 23 Using the allowance method, the uncollectible accounts for the year is estimated to be $28,000. If the balance for the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a $7,000 credit before adjustment, what is the amount of bad debt expense for the period?

    $7,000

    $21,000

    $28,000

    $35,000

    Question 24 The Allowance for Doubtful Accounts account is:

    an expense account.

    a contra equity account.

    a contra asset account

    none of the above

    Question 25 Matrix Company makes an 8% loan on November 1, 2008. The loan is due in 90 days. What is the due date of this loan?

    January 30, 2009

    February 1, 2009

    January 1, 2009

    March 1, 2009

    acc 561 managerial analysis 510137

    Writea paper that is at least 750 words(papers less than 750 words, will receive a reduction in points) in which you respond to the Broadening Your Perspective 17-2 activity titled Managerial Perspective in Ch. 17 of Accounting.

    MANAGERIAL ANALYSIS

    BYP17-2Ideal Manufacturing Company of Sycamore, Illinois, has supported a research and development

    (R&D) department that has for many years been the sole contributor to the company s

    new farm machinery products. The R&D activity is an overhead cost center that provides services

    only to in-house manufacturing departments (four different product lines), all of which produce

    agricultural/farm/ranch related machinery products.

    The department has never sold its services outside, but because of its long history of success,

    larger manufacturers of agricultural products have approached Ideal to hire its R&D department

    for special projects. Because the costs of operating the R&D department have been spiraling uncontrollably,

    Ideal s management is considering entertaining these outside approaches to absorb

    the increasing costs. But, (1) management doesn t have any cost basis for charging R&D services

    to outsiders, and (2) it needs to gain control of its R&D costs. Management decides to implement

    an activity-based costing system in order to determine the charges for both outsiders and the inhouse

    users of the department s services.

    R&D activities fall into four pools with the following annual costs.

    Market analysis $1,050,000

    Product design 2,350,000

    Product development 3,600,000

    Prototype testing 1,400,000

    Activity analysis determines that the appropriate cost drivers and their usage for the four activities

    are:

    Total

    Activities Cost Drivers Estimated Drivers

    Market analysis Hours of analysis 15,000 hours

    Product design Number of designs 2,500 designs

    Product development Number of products 90 products

    Prototype testing Number of tests 500 tests

    Instructions

    (a) Compute the activity-based overhead rate for each activity cost pool.

    (b) How much cost would be charged to an in-house manufacturing department that consumed

    1,800 hours of market analysis time, was provided 280 designs relating to 10 products, and

    requested 92 engineering tests?

    (c) How much cost would serve as the basis for pricing an R&D bid with an outside company

    on a contract that would consume 800 hours of analysis time, require 178 designs relating to

    3 products, and result in 70 engineering tests?

    (d) What is the benefit to Ideal Manufacturing of applying activity-based costing to its R&D activity

    for both in-house and outside charging purposes?

    broadening your perspective

    acc 561 managerial analysis 510138

    Writea paper that is at least 750 words(papers less than 750 words, will receive a reduction in points) in which you respond to the Broadening Your Perspective 17-2 activity titled Managerial Perspective in Ch. 17 of Accounting.


    MANAGERIAL ANALYSIS

    BYP17-2Ideal Manufacturing Company of Sycamore, Illinois, has supported a research and development

    (R&D) department that has for many years been the sole contributor to the company s

    new farm machinery products. The R&D activity is an overhead cost center that provides services

    only to in-house manufacturing departments (four different product lines), all of which produce

    agricultural/farm/ranch related machinery products.

    The department has never sold its services outside, but because of its long history of success,

    larger manufacturers of agricultural products have approached Ideal to hire its R&D department

    for special projects. Because the costs of operating the R&D department have been spiraling uncontrollably,

    Ideal s management is considering entertaining these outside approaches to absorb

    the increasing costs. But, (1) management doesn t have any cost basis for charging R&D services

    to outsiders, and (2) it needs to gain control of its R&D costs. Management decides to implement

    an activity-based costing system in order to determine the charges for both outsiders and the inhouse

    users of the department s services.

    R&D activities fall into four pools with the following annual costs.

    Market analysis $1,050,000

    Product design 2,350,000

    Product development 3,600,000

    Prototype testing 1,400,000

    Activity analysis determines that the appropriate cost drivers and their usage for the four activities

    are:

    Total

    Activities Cost Drivers Estimated Drivers

    Market analysis Hours of analysis 15,000 hours

    Product design Number of designs 2,500 designs

    Product development Number of products 90 products

    Prototype testing Number of tests 500 tests

    Instructions

    (a) Compute the activity-based overhead rate for each activity cost pool.

    (b) How much cost would be charged to an in-house manufacturing department that consumed

    1,800 hours of market analysis time, was provided 280 designs relating to 10 products, and

    requested 92 engineering tests?

    (c) How much cost would serve as the basis for pricing an R&D bid with an outside company

    on a contract that would consume 800 hours of analysis time, require 178 designs relating to

    3 products, and result in 70 engineering tests?

    (d) What is the benefit to Ideal Manufacturing of applying activity-based costing to its R&D activity

    for both in-house and outside charging purposes?

    broadening your perspective

    acc 561 managerial analysis ideal manufacturing company 510139

    ACC 561 Managerial Analysis

    Writea paper that is at least 750 words(papers less than 750 words, will receive a reduction in points) in which you respond to the Broadening Your Perspective 17-2 activity titled Managerial Perspective in Ch. 17 of Accounting.

    MANAGERIAL ANALYSIS

    BYP17-2Ideal Manufacturing Company of Sycamore, Illinois, has supported a research and development

    (R&D) department that has for many years been the sole contributor to the company s

    new farm machinery products. The R&D activity is an overhead cost center that provides services

    only to in-house manufacturing departments (four different product lines), all of which produce

    agricultural/farm/ranch related machinery products.

    The department has never sold its services outside, but because of its long history of success,

    larger manufacturers of agricultural products have approached Ideal to hire its R&D department

    for special projects. Because the costs of operating the R&D department have been spiraling uncontrollably,

    Ideal s management is considering entertaining these outside approaches to absorb

    the increasing costs. But, (1) management doesn t have any cost basis for charging R&D services

    to outsiders, and (2) it needs to gain control of its R&D costs. Management decides to implement

    an activity-based costing system in order to determine the charges for both outsiders and the inhouse

    users of the department s services.

    R&D activities fall into four pools with the following annual costs.

    Market analysis $1,050,000

    Product design 2,350,000

    Product development 3,600,000

    Prototype testing 1,400,000

    Activity analysis determines that the appropriate cost drivers and their usage for the four activities

    are:

    Total

    Activities Cost Drivers Estimated Drivers

    Market analysis Hours of analysis 15,000 hours

    Product design Number of designs 2,500 designs

    Product development Number of products 90 products

    Prototype testing Number of tests 700 tests

    Instructions

    (a) Compute the activity-based overhead rate for each activity cost pool.

    (b) How much cost would be charged to an in-house manufacturing department that consumed

    1,800 hours of market analysis time, was provided 280 designs relating to 10 products, and

    requested 92 engineering tests?

    (c) How much cost would serve as the basis for pricing an R&D bid with an outside company

    on a contract that would consume 800 hours of analysis time, require 178 designs relating to

    3 products, and result in 70 engineering tests?

    (d) What is the benefit to Ideal Manufacturing of applying activity-based costing to its R&D activity

    for both in-house and outside charging purposes?

    broadening your perspective

    acc 561 managerial perspective analysis ideal manufacturing company 510140

    Writea paper that is at least 750 words(papers less than 750 words, will receive a reduction in points) in which you respond to the Broadening Your Perspective 17-2 activity titled Managerial Perspective in Ch. 17 ofAccounting.

    MANAGERIAL ANALYSIS

    BYP17-2Ideal Manufacturing Company of Sycamore, Illinois, has supported a research and development

    (R&D) department that has for many years been the sole contributor to the company s

    new farm machinery products. The R&D activity is an overhead cost center that provides services

    only to in-house manufacturing departments (four different product lines), all of which produce

    agricultural/farm/ranch related machinery products.

    The department has never sold its services outside, but because of its long history of success,

    larger manufacturers of agricultural products have approached Ideal to hire its R&D department

    for special projects. Because the costs of operating the R&D department have been spiraling uncontrollably,

    Ideal s management is considering entertaining these outside approaches to absorb

    the increasing costs. But, (1) management doesn t have any cost basis for charging R&D services

    to outsiders, and (2) it needs to gain control of its R&D costs. Management decides to implement

    an activity-based costing system in order to determine the charges for both outsiders and the inhouse

    users of the department s services.

    R&D activities fall into four pools with the following annual costs.

    Market analysis $1,050,000

    Product design 2,350,000

    Product development 3,600,000

    Prototype testing 1,400,000

    Activity analysis determines that the appropriate cost drivers and their usage for the four activities

    are:

    Total

    Activities Cost Drivers Estimated Drivers

    Market analysis Hours of analysis 15,000 hours

    Product design Number of designs 2,500 designs

    Product development Number of products 90 products

    Prototype testing Number of tests 500 tests

    Instructions

    (a) Compute the activity-based overhead rate for each activity cost pool.

    (b) How much cost would be charged to an in-house manufacturing department that consumed

    1,800 hours of market analysis time, was provided 280 designs relating to 10 products, and

    requested 92 engineering tests?

    (c) How much cost would serve as the basis for pricing an R&D bid with an outside company

    on a contract that would consume 800 hours of analysis time, require 178 designs relating to

    3 products, and result in 70 engineering tests?

    (d) What is the benefit to Ideal Manufacturing of applying activity-based costing to its R&D activity

    for both in-house and outside charging purposes?

    broadening your perspective

    acc 561 broadening your perspective 18 1 activity titled decision making across the 510141

    Writea paper of no more than 750 words in which you respond to the Broadening Your Perspective 18-1 activity titled “Decision Making Across the Organization” in Ch. 18 of Accounting.

    Martinez Company has decided to introduce a new product. The new product can b manufactured by either a capital-intensive method or a labor-intensive method. The manufacturing method will not affect the quality of the product The estimated manufacturing costs by the two methods are as follows:

    Capital Labor

    Intensive Intensive

    Direct materials $5 per unit $5.50 per unit

    Direct labor $6 per unit $8.00 per unit

    Variable overhead $ 3 per unit $ 4.50 per unit

    Fixed manufacturing costs $ 2,508,000 $ 1,538,000

    Martinez’s market research department has recommended an introductory unit sales price of $ 30. The incremental selling expenses are estimated to be $502,000 annually plus $2 for each unit sold regardless of manufaturing method.

    a. Calculate the estimated break-even point in annual unit sales of the new product if Martinez company uses the:

    1. Capital – intensive manufacuring method

    2. Labor – intensive manufacturting method

    b. Determine the annual unit sales volume at which Martinez Company would be indifferent between the two manufacturing methods.

    c. Explain the circumstance under which Martinez should employ each of the two manufacturing methods.

    acc3300 excel spreadsheet project fall 2013 510143

    ACC3300 Excel Spreadsheet Project Fall 2013

    On December 31, 2012, Barker Inc. provided consulting services to Carr Company at an agreed price of $151,121. Barker accepted $60,000 down and agreed to accept the balance in four equal installments of $30,000 to be received each December 31, beginning December 31, 2013. An assumed interest rate of 12% is imputed.

    Instructions:

    Using Excel, prepare the amortization schedule and then record all required journal entries that would be made by Barker on the following dates (a) December 31, 2012; (b) December 31, 2013; (c) December 31, 2014; (d) December 31, 2015; and (e) December 31, 2016.


    You will be assessed on the following skills:

    (1) correct data entered,

    (2) correct and accessible formulas,

    (3) column headings and labels,

    (4) titles merged and centered, and

    (5) spreadsheet formatting and printing.

    Each student must submit the completed spreadsheet to me by email

    Include the following in the subject line of your email: ACC3300 Excel Project Fall 2013, Your Name

    Failure to use the appropriate subject line in the email will result in grade reduction of 1 letter grade.

    accounting 3 problems brookhaven publishing red bank enterprise amp visconti s 510146

    1. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:
    Social Security taxes: 6% on the first $55,000 earned
    Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned
    Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
    State income taxes: 5% of gross earnings
    Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
    State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned
    Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned

    The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end.
    a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:
    Social Security taxes
    Medicare taxes
    Federal income taxes withheld
    State income taxes
    Insurance withholdings

    b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:
    Matching Social Security taxes
    Matching Medicare taxes
    State unemployment taxes
    Federal unemployment taxes

    2. Current liabilities: entries and disclosure. A review of selected financial activities of Visconti s during 20XX disclosed the following:

    12/1 Borrowed $20,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3- month, 15% note payable. Interest and principal are due at maturity.
    2/10 Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates that 2% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit.
    12/22 Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
    12/26 Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a note payable due in 60 days.
    12/31 Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162.
    12/31 Accrued 3 days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.

    Instructions
    a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
    b. Prepare adjusting entries on October 31 to record accrued interest.
    c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of October 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.

    3. Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:
    8/2: Borrowed $75,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 120-day note.
    8/20: Issued a $40,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $40,000 de livery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest rate.
    9/10: Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.
    9/11: Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and car ries a 14% interest rate.
    10/10: The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.

    10/31: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.
    11/30: Paid note to Bank of Kingville

    Instructions
    a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
    b. Prepare adjusting entries on October 31 to record accrued interest.
    c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of October 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.

    Additional Requirements

    Level of Detail: Show all work

    accounting 301 project zippy lines inc financial statement 510147

    Accounting 301 Project

    Due December 5, 2013

    Zippy Lines, Inc. is a small company based in Colorado. Zippy Lines, Inc. sells specialty outdoor sporting goods and equipment used by mountain climbers. Zippy Lines sells its goods to outdoor adventure firms and holds instructional classes. It is in its second year of operation.

    Kirk Krazen, the accountant for the company was hurt in a climbing accident and the company has requested that you prepare the monthly close for January 2013, including preparation of the monthly financial statements. The company s fiscal year coincides with the calendar year. The monthly financial statements should include a balance sheet, income statement and cash flow statement for the month.

    The company s president, Al Titude, has provided you with access to all of the company s books and records and you have gathered the information that is discussed below.

    The company has one bank account in which all of its operating expenses are paid and all of its cash receipts are deposited. The company s general ledger records the cash disbursement transactions, and reflects the cash receipts. Exhibit 1 is a list of accounts and balances as of January 31, 2013 taken from the general ledger.

    Exhibit 2 is a list of all of the transactions shown on the general ledger account for cash (Account 1010001).

    A copy of the company s bank statement for January is provided in Exhibit 3.

    The company maintains a subsidiary ledger for accounts receivable. All of the company s accounts receivable balances have been updated to reflect the cash receipt, and a journal entry to the cash account and the accounts receivable has been made. There are 20 outdoor adventure firms that have accounts with Zippy with terms N30, 10 of these firms had an open balance as of January. A copy of the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger is provided in Exhibit 4. The allowance for doubtful accounts was $1,500 as of December 31, 2012. The allowance is based on estimated default rates and set at 1% of balances currently due and balances past due less than 30 days, 2% on balances past due 30 to 60 days, 15% on balances past due over 60 but less than 90 days, and 30% of balances past due more than 90 days.

    The company uses lower of cost or market to value its inventory. The company uses a periodic inventory system and applies FIFO cost flow assumption. Exhibit 5 contains information on its inventory.

    The monthly adjusting entries have not been prepared. The following information has been gathered to support the closing process. The staff has done a physical count of inventory and supplies and found the following balances as of January 31, 2013:

    – Supplies – $17,250

    – Inventory items shown in Exhibit 5 (valued at Lower of Cost or Market, FIFO) (see Exhibit 5)

    Below are other items to consider for adjusting entries:

    – The company has a note with TP Bank for $250,000 that is due on July 1, 2016. The note has an interest rate of 10%, which is payable on June 30th of each year.

    – Employees earn $1,024 per day and have received payment through January 28th, so they are owed 3 days wages. There was no salary accrued as of December 31, 2012.

    – The payment for health and all other benefits is $6,125 every two months. In December, the company issued the payment and it cleared in January. No payment was made in January.

    – The prepaid insurance balance is for an annual property and liability policy with an annual cost of $36,000, which was purchased on July 1, 2012 and expires on June 30, 2013.

    – The company visited Big Corporation on January 31st and held an instructional course for a team-building activity for Big Corporation. Zippy charges $10,000 for the class, but has not been paid, prepared the invoice or recorded the revenue.

    – The accrued expense of $2,125 on December 31, 2012 represented unpaid consulting bills. The company paid the consultant $1,575 on January 14th and has an estimated balance of $3,250 open as of January 31, 2013.

    – The company uses straight-line depreciation. The depreciation periods are 20 years for the building, 10 for the equipment and 5 for office equipment. There is no salvage value for any of the property, plant and equipment assets.

    Requirements

    1. Prepare a bank reconciliation and any journal entries.

    2. Prepare a trial balances as of January 31, 2013

    3. Calculate the allowance for doubtful accounts, inventory, monthly depreciation, interest, cost of goods sold etc., and prepare all necessary adjusting entries for the month of January.

    4. Prepare an adjusted trial balance for the month of January.

    5. Prepare the financial statements for the month of January (income statement, statement of retained earnings, balance sheet and statement of cash flow (either direct or indirect basis).

    EXHIBIT 1

    Below is a list of accounts with their balances as of January 31, 2013 and December 31, 2012:

    Account Number

    Account Name

    January 31, 2013

    December 31, 2012

    1000001

    Cash

    60,660

    $45,125

    1000002

    Accounts receivable

    27,200

    17,500

    1000003

    Allowance for doubtful accounts

    1,500 CR

    1,500 CR

    1000004

    Inventory

    33,150

    33,150

    1000005

    Supplies

    21,300

    21,300

    1000006

    Prepaid insurance

    18,000

    18,000

    1010001

    P,P & E Store Equipment

    178,000

    178,000

    1010002

    Accumulated depreciation Store Equipment

    17,800 CR

    17,800 CR

    1010003

    P,P & E Office Equipment

    25,000

    25,000

    1010004

    Accumulated depreciation Office Equipment

    5,000 CR

    5,000 CR

    1010005

    P,P & E Building

    617,500

    617,500

    1010006

    Accumulated depreciation building

    30,875CR

    30,875 CR

    2000001

    Accounts payable

    34,410 CR

    31,525 CR

    2000002

    Accrued expenses

    2,125 CR

    2,125 CR

    2000003

    Salaries payable

    0 CR

    0 CR

    2000004

    Interest payable

    12,500 CR

    12,500 CR

    2010001

    Notes payable

    250,000 CR

    250,000 CR

    3000001

    Common stock

    100,000 CR

    100,000 CR

    3000002

    Capital in excess of par

    400,000 CR

    400,000 CR

    3000003

    Retained earnings

    104,250 CR

    104,250 CR

    3000004

    Dividends

    0

    $0

    4000001

    Sales Revenue

    121,000 CR

    – $0 –

    5000001

    Purchases

    75,000

    $0

    5000002

    Cost of goods sold

    0

    $0

    5010001

    Salary expense

    20,480

    $0

    5010002

    Benefits expense

    0

    $0

    5010003

    Supplies expense

    0

    $0

    5010004

    Insurance expense

    0

    $0

    5010005

    Utilities expense

    895

    $0

    5010006

    Travel expenses

    275

    $0

    5010007

    Advertising expenses

    425

    $0

    5010008

    Interest expense

    0

    $0

    5010009

    Bank fees

    0

    $0

    5010010

    Consulting expenses

    1,575

    $0

    5010011

    Depreciation expense

    0

    $0

    5010012

    Bad debt expense

    0

    $0

    Exhibit 2 Detail of transactions on ACCT 100001, Cash.

    Date

    Description

    Amount

    DR/CR

    Balance

    DR/CR

    12/31/12

    Beginning Balance

    DR

    $45,125

    DR

    1/4/13

    Cash receipts

    $61,500

    DR

    $106,625

    DR

    1/4/13

    Payment for inventory

    $62,115

    CR

    $44,510

    DR

    1/7/13

    Payment for salaries

    $5,120

    CR

    $39,390

    DR

    1/11/13

    Payment for utilities

    $895

    CR

    $38,495

    DR

    1/14/13

    Payment for salaries

    $5,120

    CR

    $33,375

    DR

    1/14/13

    Payment for consulting

    $1,575

    CR

    $31,800

    DR

    1/14/13

    Cash receipts

    $26,525

    DR

    $58,325

    DR

    1/21/13

    Payment for salaries

    $5,120

    CR

    $53,205

    DR

    1/27/13

    Cash receipts

    $13,275

    DR

    $66,480

    DR

    1/28/13

    Payment for salaries

    $5,120

    CR

    $61,360

    DR

    1/28/13

    Payment for travel

    $275

    CR

    $61,085

    DR

    1/28/13

    Payment for advertising

    $425

    CR

    $60,660

    DR

    Note: Entries for cash receipts on accounts receivables have not been made for January. The outstanding checks as of December 31, 2012 was $6,125. There were no outstanding deposits.

    Exhibit 3 Summary of Bank statement

    TDC Bank

    Denver, CO

    Beginning balance .$51,250

    Deposits ..$61,300

    Checks cleared (51,890)

    Bank fees (600)

    Ending balance ..$60,060

    Exhibit 4 Accounts receivable subsidiary ledger

    Name

    Balance

    12/31/12

    New Sales

    Cash Receipts

    Balance 3/31/13

    Aging Schedule

    Due or

    31-60

    61-90

    >90

    Johnson Guides

    $1,200

    35,000

    33,850

    $2,350

    $2,350

    Adirondack Adventures

    $4,000

    8,500

    7,000

    $5,500

    $4,500

    $1,000

    Colorado Climbers

    $2,000

    12,500

    12,000

    $2,500

    $2,500

    Outdoor Ways

    $3,150

    $6,000

    $3,000

    $6,150

    $3,150

    Kincade Climbers

    $650

    950

    600

    $1,000

    $950

    $50

    Spartan Adventures

    $500

    3,250

    500

    $3,200

    $3,200

    Nature s Highway

    $750

    500

    $1,250

    $500

    $750

    Billings Mountains

    $2,250

    $2,250

    $250

    $2,000

    Sky Adventures

    $2,000

    4,350

    4,350

    $2,000

    $2,000

    Spirit Adventures

    $1,000

    $1,000

    $1,000

    Total

    $17,500

    $71,000

    $61,300

    $28,100

    $20,400

    $4,000

    $2,000

    $800

    Exhibit 5 Inventory

    I. Ending Counts:

    Item Name

    Units

    Replacement Cost

    Selling Price

    Selling Costs

    Normal Profit %

    Ropes

    100

    10

    25

    5

    30%

    Climbing shoes

    800

    35

    60

    5

    25%

    Climbing Hardware

    100

    20

    35

    5

    20%

    Helmets

    600

    25

    40

    5

    30%

    II. Ropes

    Date

    Units

    Unit Cost

    Total

    Beginning inventory

    1/1/13

    50

    9

    450

    Purchase

    1/11/13

    100

    9.5

    950

    Purchase

    1/18/13

    200

    10

    2000

    Purchase

    1/25/13

    200

    10

    2000

    End

    1/31/13

    100

    III. Climbing Shoes

    Date

    Units

    Unit Cost

    Total

    Beginning inventory

    1/1/13

    600

    32

    19,200

    Purchase

    1/11/13

    1000

    33

    33,000

    Purchase

    1/18/13

    200

    34

    6,400

    Purchase

    1/25/13

    1000

    35

    35,000

    End

    1/31/13

    800

    IV. Climbing Hardware

    Date

    Units

    Unit Cost

    Total

    Beginning inventory

    1/1/13

    50

    18

    900

    Purchase

    1/11/13

    100

    19

    1,900

    Purchase

    1/18/13

    200

    20

    4,000

    Purchase

    1/25/13

    200

    20

    4,000

    End

    1/31/13

    100

    V. Helmets

    Date

    Units

    Unit Cost

    Total

    Beginning inventory

    1/1/13

    500

    24

    12,000

    Purchase

    1/11/13

    1,000

    24

    24,000

    Purchase

    1/18/13

    800

    25

    20,000

    Purchase

    1/25/13

    1,000

    25

    25,000

    End

    1/31/13

    600

    accounting 510148

    Financial Ratios

    Liquidity ratios.Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:

    Edison

    Stagg

    Thornton

    Cash

    $4,000

    $2,500

    $1,000

    Short-term investments

    3,000

    2,500

    2,000

    Accounts receivable

    2,000

    2,500

    3,000

    Inventory

    1,000

    2,500

    4,000

    Prepaid expenses

    800

    800

    800

    Accounts payable

    200

    200

    200

    Notes payable: short-term

    3,100

    3,100

    3,100

    Accrued payables

    300

    300

    300

    Long-term liabilities

    3,800

    3,800

    3,800

    1. Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?

    Computation and evaluation of activity ratios.The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:

    19X5

    19X4

    Net credit sales

    $832,000

    $760,000

    Cost of goods sold

    440,000

    350,000

    Cash, Dec. 31

    125,000

    110,000

    Average Accounts receivable

    180,000

    140,000

    Average Inventory

    70,000

    50,000

    Accounts payable, Dec. 31

    115,000

    108,000

    1. Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 19X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.

    Profitability ratios, trading on the equity.Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 19X7:

    Net sales

    $1,500,000

    Interest expense

    120,000

    Income tax expense

    80,000

    Preferred dividends

    25,000

    Net income

    130,000

    Average assets

    1,100,000

    Average common stockholders” equity

    400,000

    1. Compute the gross profit margin ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.
    2. Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly ex plain.

    Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

    20X2

    20X1

    Current Assets

    $ 76,000

    $ 80,000

    Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

    99,000

    90,000

    Intangibles

    25,000

    50,000

    Current Liabilities

    40,800

    48,000

    Long-Term Liabilities

    143,000

    160,000

    Stockholders Equity

    16,200

    12,000

    Net Sales

    500,000

    500,000

    Cost of Goods Sold

    332,500

    350,000

    Operating Expenses

    93,500

    85,000

    Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

    Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

    20X2

    20X1

    Current Assets

    $ 76,000

    $ 80,000

    Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

    99,000

    90,000

    Intangibles

    25,000

    50,000

    Current Liabilities

    40,800

    48,000

    Long-Term Liabilities

    143,000

    160,000

    Stockholders Equity

    16,200

    12,000

    Net Sales

    500,000

    500,000

    Cost of Goods Sold

    332,500

    350,000

    Operating Expenses

    93,500

    85,000

    Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

    6. Ratio computation. The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.

    LONE PINE COMPANY

    Comparative Balance Sheets

    December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)

    20X2

    20X1

    Assets

    Current Assets

    Cash and Short-Term Investments

    $ 400

    $ 600

    Accounts Receivable (net)

    3,000

    2,400

    Inventories

    2,000

    2,200

    Total Current Assets

    $5,400

    $5,200

    Property, Plant, and Equipment

    Land

    $1,700

    $ 600

    Buildings and Equipment (net)

    1,500

    1,000

    Total Property, Plant, and Equipment

    $3,200

    $1,600

    Total Assets

    $8,600

    $6,800

    Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

    Current Liabilities

    Accounts Payable

    $1,800

    $1,700

    Notes Payable

    1,100

    1,900

    Total Current Liabilities

    $2,900

    $3,600

    Long-Term Liabilities

    Bonds Payable

    4,100

    2,100

    Total Liabilities

    $7,000

    $5,700

    Stockholders Equity

    Common Stock

    $ 200

    $ 200

    Retained Earnings

    1,400

    900

    Total Stockholders Equity

    $1,600

    $1,100

    Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

    $8,600

    $6,800

    LONE PINE COMPANY

    Statement of Income and Retained Earnings

    For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)

    Net Sales*

    $36,000

    Less: Cost of Goods Sold

    $20,000

    Selling Expense

    6,000

    Administrative Expense

    4,000

    Interest Expense

    400

    Income Tax Expense

    2,000

    32,400

    Net Income

    $ 3,600

    Retained Earnings, Jan. 1

    900

    $ 4,500

    Cash Dividends Declared and Paid

    3,100

    Retained Earnings, Dec. 31

    $ 1,400

    *All sales are on account.

    Instructions

    Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calcu lations to two decimal places when necessary:

    a. Quick ratio

    b. Current ratio

    c. Inventory-turnover ratio

    d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio

    e. Return-on-assets ratio

    f. Net-profit-margin ratio

    g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity

    h. Debt-to-total assets

    i. Number of times that interest is earned

    j. Dividend payout rate

    accounting for business decisions 510149

    Accounting for Business Decisions

    This assignment is in two parts, the first one that will require you to undertake some research, the

    Second part will involve a preparation of worksheet.

    The assignment aims to develop understanding of financial statements and their use in decision-making. The task is to study and compare 2 publicly held company specifically in the same

    Industry, (use ASX s website to select a company) and be able to understand the structure of

    Financial statements. This project itself includes several assignments, each of which comprises a

    Part of the students task. However it is well encouraged to include any additional information

    That students may think will be useful in conducting financial statements analysis of the

    Company.

    General Rules and Requirements:

    The report should be prepared by a small group (with a maximum of three to four members) with

    the contribution of each member specified on the report s title page. Reports must be confined to

    3,000 words (+/- 5%). A title page, table of contents page (based on your report headings),

    Introduction, conclusion and list of the references actually cited should accompany your report.

    Font type should be Arial (size 11), paragraph spacing should be equal to 1.5.

    Note: any additional material from external sources that you paste into your report is NOT

    Included in the word limit. Also, ensure it is appropriately referenced.

    PART A: (50 MARKS)

    Section A (total marks are 50. Whatever student scores 15% will be the weightage of this

    Section)

    Part A1 (10 points)

    Before the actual financial statements are evaluated, your group must inform interested parties

    About the company s business structure, operations, services and all other business activities that

    Are conducted, etc.

    Part A2 (10 points)

    Locate the most recent annual report of your public listed chosen companies of the same year.

    Your group will need to review the major sections of this report in order to familiarize

    Yourselves with the content of each of the financial statements and appropriate footnotes.

    Review the most recent year-end balance sheets of the companies and indicate the

    following:

    The amount of total current assets

    The amount of total non-current assets

    The amount of total current liabilities 2

    The amount of total non-current liabilities

    The amount of total stockholder s equity

    Compare the above figures with the figure of second company. Compare percentage

    increase or decrease.

    (Use Excel Sheet)

    Part A3 (10 points)

    Review the most recent year s income statement and indicate the following:

    total (operating) revenues;

    cost of goods sold (if listed);

    total expenses (before income taxes)

    any non-operating (or extraordinary) gains and losses; and

    Earnings per common share.

    Compare the above figures with the figure of second company. Compare percentage

    increase or decrease.

    Part A4 (10 points)

    Review the statement of cash flows for the most recent year and indicate the

    following:

    net cash inflow (outflow) from operating activities;

    net cash inflow (outflow) from financing activities;

    net cash inflow (outflow) from investing activities; and

    net increase (decrease) in cash during the year.

    Compare the above figures with the figure of second company. Compare percentage

    increase or decrease.

    Part A5 (10 points)

    Review the stockholders’ equity section in your chosen company’s most recent year-end

    balance sheet and compare that with the figure of second company. Compare percentage

    increase or decrease. Compare percentage increase or decrease.

    List the stockholders’ equity account balances and number of outstanding

    shares from these two balance sheets and compute the increase or decrease for each during this past year.

    accounting mcqs 510150

    1)Under a relevant range of production, when total quantities sold increase, total fixed costs

    a.

    increase

    b.

    decrease

    c.

    remain equal

    d.

    there is no relationship

    2)Conversion costs are

    a.

    only direct material

    b.

    only direct labor

    c.

    only overhead

    d.

    overhead and direct labor

    3)XY Company sells its unique product at $30.00. Variable costs per unit are $20.00. Total fixed sales salaries per month $40,000.00. Other fixed costs per month $60,000.00. Assume that the company wants to change the sales salaries as follows: Total fixed sales salaries per month 25,000. Sales commission of 10% of sales.?Find at what sale-level is the company indifferent between the two alternatives

    a.

    $5,000

    b.

    5,000 units

    c.

    10,000

    d.

    7,500 units

    4) AJ Company makes three products.

    ?

    ?

    ?

    Current selling price per unit, variable cost per unit, and machine hours required are as follows:

    ?

    ?

    Products

    ?

    ?

    X

    Y

    Z

    Current selling price per unit

    $20

    $30

    $20

    Variable cost per unit

    10

    18

    12

    Machine hours required for each unit

    2

    3

    4

    The company has a maximum of 1000 machine hours available per month.

    Assume the company produces all products; find the total contribution margin per hour.

    a.

    $13.50

    b.

    $12

    c.

    $9

    d.

    $4

    5) TC Company makes several printing works using two machines (X and Y).

    Data on the two machines for June 2010 are as follows:

    X

    Y

    Direct material

    10

    15

    Time required for each unit (TR)

    2

    3

    Expected volume during the month (EV)

    2,000

    500

    Expected labor cost per hour

    50

    Budgeted overhead costs

    660,000

    Determine

    The overhead rate per labor hour

    1.

    FOAR = $120.00 per hour worked

    2.

    FOAR = 120.00 per dollar

    3.

    FOAR = $60.00 per hour worked

    4.

    FOAR = $120.00 per overhead costs

    6) Assume the cost structure is as follows: TC = 25,000 + 5q, where TC = total costs, q = quantities sold. Under relevant range of sales, selling price per unit is $8.00. Total fixed costs are

    $100,000

    $50,000

    $25,000

    More information is needed

    7) The income statements of Tahany Company for June and July 2005 are as follows:

    June

    July

    Sales

    610

    650

    Cost of goods sold

    420

    460

    Gross margin

    190

    190

    Selling and administrative expenses

    185

    195

    Income before tax

    5

    -5

    Using High Low Method, the variable component of cost of goods sold is

    a.

    1.00

    b.

    .25

    c.

    1.25

    d.

    0

    8) Non value added activities are

    a.

    Direct material (only)

    b.

    Direct labor (only)

    c.

    Overhead (only)

    d.

    Not essential costs to make/manufacture a product

    9) Tany Corporation is a small table manufacturing company operating in the north of Puerto Rico.

    Managers estimate the following costs per unit (one table)

    Direct material (DM)

    $6.00

    Direct labor (DL)

    $4.00

    Variable manufacturing overhead (VMO)

    $3.00

    Variable administrative expenses (VAE)

    $1.00

    The estimated contribution margin is

    30%

    Monthly fixed costs are

    Manufacturing

    $10,000.00

    Administrative

    $5,000.00

    a.

    2,000

    b.

    2,200

    c.

    2,500

    d.

    2,750

    10) Tany Corporation is a small table manufacturing company operating in the north of Puerto Rico.

    Managers estimate the following costs per unit (one table)

    Direct material (DM)

    $6.00

    Direct labor (DL)

    $4.00

    Variable manufacturing overhead (VMO)

    $3.00

    Variable administrative expenses (VAE)

    $1.00

    The estimated contribution margin is

    30%

    Monthly fixed costs are

    Manufacturing

    $10,000.00

    Administrative

    $5,000.00

    Total unit sold during last month is 2525, what is the total operating income.

    a.

    between $100 and $120

    b.

    between $120 and $140

    c.

    between $140 and $160

    d.

    between $160 and $180

    11) BC Company estimates the following data for the coming month: total variable costs $60,000.00, income tax rate 30%, contribution margin percentage 60%. Find the estimated total sales for the coming month.

    a.

    $100,000

    b.

    $60,000 / 40%

    c.

    $60,000 / 60%

    d.

    $60,000 X 60%

    12) If a company raises its required net income

    a.

    the tax rate will decrease

    b.

    break even point is negative

    c.

    required contribution margin increases

    d.

    required contribution margin decreases

    13)If a company raises its required operating profit

    a.

    break even point is negative

    b.

    break even point is zero

    c.

    required contribution margin increases

    d.

    required contribution margin decreases

    14) Copy of

    XYZ has three products X, Y and Z. The following information pertains to these products X, Y, and Z. Contribution margin percentages are 40%, 50%, and 40% respectively. Sales mix percentages are 20%, 30%, and 50% respectively. Monthly fixed costs are estimated to be $100.00. The weighted average contribution margin percentage is

    a.

    43%

    b.

    40%

    c.

    30%

    d.

    0

    15) Which of the following examples is a short term decision?

    a.

    Make or buy decision

    b.

    Purchase of land

    c.

    Issuing bonds

    d.

    Joint venture

    e.

    Purchase of building

    16) Sales (in units)

    60,000

    Selling price per unit

    25

    Manufacturing costs per unit:

    Materials

    5

    Direct labor

    4

    Overhead

    Variable

    4

    Fixed

    6

    Total

    19

    Gross margin

    6

    Selling and admin. Expenses per unit

    2

    Operating income

    4

    A company in a foreign market offer to buy and the offer specifies the following data

    units to be sold

    10000

    price per unit

    20

    If the Company accepts the special offer, the incremental profit would be

    a.

    $70,000.00

    b.

    ($70,000.00)

    c.

    $10,000.00

    d.

    ($10,000.00)

    17) Total Costs

    Unit Cost

    Direct materials

    20,000

    2.00

    Direct labor

    25,000

    2.50

    Variable overhead

    15,000

    1.50

    Fixed overhead (non-avoidable)

    24000

    2.40

    Fixed overhead (avoidable)

    26,000

    2.60

    Purchase cost

    85,999

    Should the company produce the product internally?

    a.

    Yes

    b.

    No

    c.

    Indifferent to to make or to buy

    d.

    Yes if the market price per unit covers the fixed cost per unit.

    18) Sales (in units)

    60,000

    Selling price per unit

    25

    Manufacturing costs per unit:

    Materials

    5

    Direct labor

    4

    Overhead

    Variable

    4

    Fixed

    6

    Total

    19

    Gross margin

    6

    Selling and admin. Expenses per unit (fixed)

    2

    Operating income

    4

    A company in a foreign market offer to buy and the offer specifies the following data

    units to be sold

    10,000

    price per unit

    13.1

    Should the company sell this special order?

    a.

    Yes, accept

    b.

    No, reject

    c.

    Indifferent to reject or not

    d.

    Always reject

    Which of the following costs should be considered in short term decisions?

    accounting mcqs 510151

    The cash disbursements journal also is called the

    a) Voucher register.

    b) Purchases journal.

    c) Check register.

    d) Accounts payable subsidiary ledger.

      1. In assessing control risk for purchases, an auditor vouches a sample of entries in the voucher register to the supporting documents. Which assertion would this test of controls most likely support?

    a) Completeness.

    b) Existence or occurrence.

    c) Valuation or allocation.

    d) Rights and obligations.

      1. An important purpose of the auditor s review of the client s procurement system should be to determine the effectiveness of the procedures to protect against

    a) Improper materials handling.

    b) Unauthorized persons issuing purchase orders.

    c) Mispostings of purchase returns.

    d) Excessive shrinkage or spoilage.

      1. A client erroneously recorded a large purchase twice. Which of the following internal control measures would be most likely to detect this error in a timely and efficient manner?

    a) Footing the purchases journal.

    b) Reconciling vendors monthly statements with subsidiary payable ledger accounts.

    c) Tracing totals from the purchases journal to the ledger accounts.

    d) Sending written quarterly confirmation to all vendors.

      1. Which of the following departments most likely would approve changes in pay rates and deductions from employee salaries?

    a) Personnel.

    b) Treasurer.

    c) Controller.

    d) Payroll.

      1. Possible misstatements related to the validity internal control objective for payroll transactions include all of the following except

    a) Payments to fictitious employees.

    b) Payments to terminated employees.

    c) Payments to valid employees who have not worked.

    d) Payment to valid employees at a rate in excess of the authorized amount.

      1. When examining payroll transactions, an auditor is primarily concerned with the possibility of

    a) Posting of gross payroll amounts to incorrect salary expense accounts.

    b) Overpayments and unauthorized payments.

    c) Misfootings of employee time records.

    d) Excess withholding of amounts required to be withheld.

      1. An auditor vouched data for a sample of employees in a payroll register to approved clock card data to provide assurance that

    a) Payments to employees are computed at authorized rates.

    b) Internal controls relating to unclaimed payroll checks are operating effectively.

    c) Segregation of duties exist between the preparation and distribution of the payroll.

    d) Employees work the number of hours for which they are paid.

      1. Which of the following circumstances most likely would cause an auditor to suspect an employee payroll fraud scheme?

    a) Payrolls checks are disbursed be the same employee each payday.

    b) There are significant unexplained variances between standard and actual labor cost.

    c) Employee time cards are approved by individual departmental supervisors.

    d) A separate payroll bank account is maintained on an imprest basis.

      1. If preparation of a periodic scrap report is essential in order to maintain adequate control over the manufacturing process, the data for this report should be accumulated in the

    a) Production Department.

    b) Accounting Department.

    c) Warehousing Department.

    d) Budget Department.

      1. Which of the following departments typically approves purchase requisitions?

    a) Raw materials stores.

    b) Cost accounting.

    c) IT.

    d) Inventory management.

      1. Which of the following best describes the validity audit objectives for inventory?

    a) Purchase requisitions initiated by authorized personnel.

    b) Recorded inventory actually exists.

    c) Inventory properly accumulated from journals and ledgers.

    d) All inventory is recorded.

      1. Auditors are most likely to ensure that no production activity is scheduled prior to

    a) Determining standard costs.

    b) Observing physical inventory.

    c) Completing the book to physical adjustment.

    d) Determining the amount of consigned inventory.

      1. Which of the following is least likely to be a possible cause of book-to-physical differences in inventory quantities?

    a) Inventory cutoff errors.

    b) Misapplication of LIFO.

    c) Unreported scrap or spoilage.

    d) Theft.

      1. The auditor is most likely t seek information from the plant manager with respect to the

    a) Adequacy of the provision for uncollectible accounts.

    b) Appropriateness of physical inventory observation procedures.

    c) Existence of obsolete machinery.

    d) Deferral or procurement of certain necessary insurance coverage.

      1. In the examination of property, plant, and equipment, the auditor tries to determine all of the following except the

    a) Adequacy of internal controls.

    b) Extent of property abandoned during the year.

    c) Adequacy of replacement funds.

    d) Reasonableness of the depreciation.

      1. The auditor may conclude that depreciation charges are insufficient by noting

    a) Insured values greatly in excess of book values.

    b) Large amounts of fully depreciated assts.

    c) Continuous trade-in s of relatively new assets.

    d) Excessive recurring losses on assets retired.

      1. Which of the following accounts should be reviewed by the auditor to gain reasonable assurance that additions to property, plant, and equipment are not understated?

    a) Depreciation expense.

    b) Accounts payable.

    c) Cash.

    d) Repairs and maintenance.

      1. In auditing intangible assets, an auditor most likely would review or recomputed amortization and determine whether the amortization period is reasonable in support of management s financial statement assertion of

    a) Valuation or allocation.

    b) Existence or occurrence.

    c) Completeness.

    d) Rights and obligations.

      1. Several years ago, Conway, Inc. secured a conventional real estate mortgage loan. Which of the following audit procedures would be least likely to be performed by an auditor examining the mortgage balance?

    a) Examine the current year s canceled checks.

    b) Review the mortgage amortization schedule.

    c) Inspect public records of lien balances.

    d) Re-compute mortgage interest expense.

      1. An internal control that ensures that long-term borrowing is properly initiated by appropriate individuals addresses the internal control objective of

    a) Validity.

    b) Authorization.

    c) Completeness.

    d) Ownership.

      1. The primary reason for preparing a reconciliation between interest-bearing obligations outstanding during the year and interest expense presented in the financial statements is to

    a) Evaluate internal control over securities.

    b) Determine the validity of prepaid interest expense.

    c) Ascertain the reasonableness of imputed interest.

    d) Detect unrecorded liabilities.

      1. Valuation is most likely an issue for long-term debt if

    a) Bonds are sold on the open market.

    b) Bonds are issued at a discount or premium.

    c) The loans are from banks.

    d) The company has many short-term leases.

      1. A substantive strategy is typically used to audit stockholders equity because

    a) The number of transactions is small.

    b) Controls over stockholders equity transactions typically are weak.

    c) A reliance strategy is most efficient.

    d) A substantive strategy likely was used in prior years.

      1. The least crucial element of internal control over cash is

    a) Separation of cash record-keeping from custody of cash.

    b) Preparation of the monthly bank reconciliation.

    c) Batch processing of checks.

    d) Separation of cash receipts from cash disbursements.

      1. Which of the following is one of the better auditing techniques that might be used by an auditor to detect kiting between inter-company banks?

    a) Review the composition of authenticated deposit slips.

    b) Review subsequent bank statements received directly from the banks.

    c) Prepare a schedule of bank transfers.

    d) Prepare year-end bank reconciliations.

      1. An unrecorded check issued during the last week of the year would most likely be discovered by the auditor when the

    a) Check register for the last month is reviewed.

    b) Cutoff bank statement is reconciled.

    c) Bank confirmation is reviewed.

    d) Search for unrecorded liabilities is preformed.

      1. Which of the following audit procedures is the most appropriate when internal control over cash is weak or when a client requests an investigation of cash transactions?

    a) Proof of cash.

    b) Bank reconciliation.

    c) Cash confirmation.

    d) Evaluate ratio of cash to current liabilities.

      1. Which of the following internal controls most likely would reduce the risk of diversion of customer receipts by an entity s employees?

    a) A bank lockbox system.

    b) Pre-numbered remittance advices.

    c) Monthly bank reconciliation.

    d) Daily deposit of cash receipts.

      1. When auditing contingent liabilities, which of the following procedures would be least effective?

    a) Reading the minutes of the board of directors.

    b) Reviewing the bank confirmation letter.

    c) Examining customer confirmation replies.

    d) Examining invoices for professional services.

      1. The auditor s primary means of obtaining corroboration of management s information concerning litigation is a

    a) Letter of audit inquiry to the client s lawyer.

    b) Letter of corroboration from the auditor s lawyer upon review of the legal documentation.

    c) Confirmation of claims and assessments from the other parties to the litigation.

    d) Confirmation of claims and assessments from an officer of the court presiding over the litigation.

      1. An auditor will ordinarily examine invoices from lawyers primarily in order to

    a) Substantiate accruals.

    b) Assess the legal ramifications of litigation in progress.

    c) Estimate the dollar amount of contingent liabilities.

    d) Identify possible unasserted litigation, claims, and assessments.

      1. If a lawyer refuses to furnish corroborating information regarding litigation, claims, and assessments, the auditor should

    a) Honor the confidentiality of the client-lawyer relationship.

    b) Consider the refusal to be tantamount to a scope limitation.

    c) Seek to obtain the corroborating information from management.

    d) Disclose this fact in a footnote to the financial statements.

      1. Which of the following situations would require adjustment to or disclosure in the financial statements?

    a) a merger discussion.

    b) The application for a patent on a new production process.

    c) Discussions with a customer that could lead to a 40 percent increase in the client s sales.

    d) The bankruptcy of a customer who regularly purchased 30 of the company s output.

      1. Which of the following parties is responsible for the fairness of the representations made in financial statements?

    a) Client s management.

    b) Independent auditor.

    c) Audit committee.

    d) AICPA.

      1. Which of the following situations will not result in modification of the auditor s report because of a scope limitation?

    a) Restriction imposed by the client.

    b) Reliance placed on the report of another auditor.

    c) Inability to obtain sufficient competent evidential matter.

    d) Inadequacy in the accounting records.

      1. Management believes, and the auditor is satisfied, that a material loss probably will occur when pending litigation is resolved. Management is unable to make a reasonable estimate of the amount or range of the potential loss, but fully discloses the situation in the notes to the financial statements. If management does not make an accrual in the financial statements, the auditor should express a/an

    a) Qualified opinion due to a scope limitation.

    b) Qualified opinion due to a departure from GAAP.

    c) Unqualified opinion with an explanatory paragraph.

    d) Unqualified opinion in a standard auditor s report.

      1. When a question arises about an entity s continued existence, the auditor should consider factors tending to mitigate the significance of contrary information concerning the entity s alternative means for maintaining adequate cash flow. An example of such a factor is the

    a) Possibility of purchasing certain assets rather than leasing them.

    b) Capability of extending the due dates of existing loans.

    c) Feasibility of operating at increased levels of production.

    d) Marketability of property and equipment that management plans to keep.

      1. An auditor issued an audit report that was dual dated for a subsequent event occurring after the completion of fieldwork but before issuance of the auditor s report. The auditor s responsibility for events occurring subsequent to the completion of fieldwork was

    a) Limited to include only events occurring up to the date of the last subsequent event referenced.

    b) Limited to the specific event referenced.

    c) Extended to subsequent events occurring through the date of issuance of the report.

    d) Extended to include all events occurring since the completion f fieldwork.

      1. With respect to ethics, the theory of rights

    a) Suggests that auditors should always verify ownership of a client s material tangible assets.

    b) Is primarily concerned with equity and impartiality.

    c) Suggests that an individual s actions should not violate the liberties of any individual.

    d) Recognizes that decisions involve trade-offs between costs and benefits.

      1. In which of the following instances would the independence of the CPA not be considered to be impaired? The CPA has been retained as the auditor f a brokerage firm

    a) Which owes the CPA audit fees for more than one year.

    b) In which the CPA has a large active margin account.

    c) In which the CPA s brother is the controller.

    d) Which owes the CPA audit fees for current year services and has just filed a petition for bankruptcy.

      1. A CPA, while performing an audit, strives to achieve independence in appearance in order to

    a) Reduce risk and liability.

    b) Comply with the generally accepted standards of fieldwork.

    c) Become independent in face.

    d) Maintain public confidence in the profession.

      1. Which of the following is not a principle of professional conduct as defined by the Code of Professional Conduct?

    a) Integrity.

    b) Due care.

    c) Reporting.

    d) Scope and nature of services.

      1. According to the profession s standards, which of the following is not required of a CPA performing a consulting engagement?

    a) Complying with Statements on Standards for Consulting Services.

    b) Obtaining an understanding of the nature, scope, and limitations of the engagement.

    c) Supervising staff who are assigned to the engagement.

    d) Maintaining independence from the client.

      1. According to the ethical standards of the profession, which of the following acts is generally prohibited?

    a) Issuing a modified report explaining a failure to follow a governmental regulatory agency s standards when conducting an attest service for a client.

    b) Revealing confidential client information during a quality review of a professional practice by a team from the state CPA society.

    c) Accepting a contingent fee for representing a client in an examination of the client s federal tax return by an IRS agent.

    d) Retaining client records after an engagement is terminated prior to completion and the client has demanded their return.

      1. An auditor, using the same degree of due care as other members of the profession, fails to create an adequate allowance for bad debts. This occurrence is an example of

    a) Negligence.

    b) Fraud.

    c) An error in judgment.

    d) Constructive negligence.

      1. Which of the following is the best statement of the general standard of performance owed by an accountant in his or her professional work?

    a) To do the job correctly and discover all irregularities.

    b) To follow generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) and generally accepted auditing standards (GAAS).

    c) To act as a professional and not commit fraud.

    d) To exercise the skill and care of the ordinarily prudent accountant in the same circumstances.

      1. Which of the following is not within the class of foreseen users of an accountant s work product?

    a) A shareholder of the client.

    b) A lender bank when the accountant knows only that the client will use the financial statements to obtain a loan from an unspecified source.

    c) A bank when the accountant knows the client will rely on the financial statements as the basis for a loan from the bank.

    d) An investor if the accountant knows that the client is seeking capital from a select group of investors.

      1. Which of the following statements is correct with respect to ownership, possession, or access to a CPA firm s audit work-papers?

    a) Work-papers are subject to the privileged communication rule, which, in most jurisdictions, prevents any third-party access to the work-papers.

    b) Work-papers may never be obtained by a third-party unless the client consents.

    c) Work-papers are the client s exclusive property.

    d) Work-papers are not transferable to a purchaser of a CPA practice unless the client consents.

      1. At which point in an ordinary sales transaction of a wholesaling business would a lack of specific authorization be of least concern to the auditor?

    a) Granting of credit.

    b) Shipment f goods.

    c) Determination of discounts.

    d) Selling of goods for cash

    accounting problems 510152

    The Marchetti soup Company entered into the following transactions during the month of june: (1) purchased inventory on account for $171,000 (assume Marchetti uses a perpetual inventory system); (2) paid $48,000 in salaries to employees for work performed during the month; (3) sold merchandise that cost $120,000 to credit customers for $208,000; (4) collected $167,000 in cash from credit customers; and (5) paid suppliers of inventory $140,000.

    Required:

    Analyze each transaction and show the effect of each on the accounting equation for a corporation. (Select “None” if the category is not affected.)

    Brief Exercise 2-4 Journal entries [LO2]

    A company has a fiscal year-end of December 31: (1) on October 1, $14,400 was paid for a one-year fire insurance policy; (2) on June 30 the company lent its chief financial officer $12,000; principal and interest at 9% are due in one year; and (3) equipment costing $63,000 was purchased at the beginning of the year for cash.

    Required:

    Prepare journal entries for each of the above transactions. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Brief Exercise 2-5 Journal entries [LO4, 5]

    A company has a fiscal year-end of December 31: (1) on October 1, $14,400 was paid for a one-year fire insurance policy; (2) on June 30 the company lent its chief financial officer $12,000; principal and interest at 8% are due in one year; and (3) equipment costing $52,000 was purchased at the beginning of the year for cash. Depreciation on the equipment is $10,400 per year.

    Required:

    Prepare the necessary adjusting entries at December 31 for each of the above items. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Brief Exercise 2-11 Closing entries [LO7]

    The year-end adjusted trial balance of the Timmons Tool and Die Corporation included the following account balances: retained earnings, $226,000; sales revenue, $855,000; cost of goods sold, $565,000; salaries expense, $178,000; rent expense, $37,000; and interest expense, $16,000.

    Required:

    Prepare the necessary closing entries. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Exercise 2-5 The accounting processing cycle [LO2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7]

    Listed below are several terms and phrases associated with the accounting processing cycle. Pair each item from List A (by letter) with the item from List B that is most appropriately associated with it.

    List A

    List B

    k

    Source documents

    e

    Transaction analysis

    a

    Journal

    j

    Posting

    f

    Unadjusted trial balance

    b

    Adjusting entries

    h

    Adjusted trial balance

    c

    Financial statements

    d

    Closing entries

    g

    Post-closing trial balance

    i

    Worksheet

    Exercise 2-6 Debits and credits [LO1]

    Indicate whether a debit will increase (I) or decrease (D) each of the following accounts listed in items 1 through 16:

    Increase (I) or Decrease (D)

    Account

    Inventory

    Depreciation expense

    Accounts payable

    Prepaid rent

    Sales revenue

    Common stock

    Wages payable

    Cost of goods sold

    Utility expense

    Equipment

    Accounts receivable

    Allowance for uncollectible accounts

    Bad debt expense

    Interest expense

    Interest revenue

    Gain on sale of equipment

    Exercise 2-14 Cash versus accrual accounting; adjusting entries [LO4, 5, 8]

    The Righter Shoe Store Company prepares monthly financial statements for its bank. The November 30 and December 31, 2011, trial balances contained the following account information:

    Nov. 30

    Dec. 31

    Supplies

    1,100

    2,200

    Prepaid insurance

    5,700

    4,275

    Wages payable

    14,500

    21,750

    Unearned rent revenue

    1,500

    750

    The following information also is known:

    The December income statement reported $1,467 in supplies expense.

    No insurance payments were made in December.

    $14,500 was paid to employees during December for wages.

    On November 1, 2011, a tenant paid Righter $2,250 in advance rent for the period November through January. Unearned rent revenue was credited.

    Requirement 1:

    What was the cost of supplies purchased during December? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Requirement 2:

    What was the adjusting entry recorded at the end of December for prepaid insurance? (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Requirement 3:

    What was the adjusting entry recorded at the end of December for accrued wages? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Requirement 4:

    What was the amount of rent revenue earned in December? What adjusting entry was recorded at the end of December for unearned rent? (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    The following transactions occurred during 2011 for the Beehive Honey Corporation:

    Exercise 2-15 External transactions and adjusting entries [LO2, 4, 5]

    Feb. 1

    Borrowed $16,000 from a bank and signed a note. Principal and interest at 9.5% will be paid on January 31, 2012.

    Apr. 1

    Paid $3,100 to an insurance company for a two-year fire insurance policy.

    July 17

    Purchased supplies costing $2,200 on account. The company records supplies purchased in an asset account. At the December 31, 2011, year-end, supplies costing $982 remained on hand.

    Nov. 1

    A customer borrowed $5,200 and signed a note requiring the customer to pay principal and 6% interest on April 30, 2012.

    Requirement 1:

    Record each transaction in general journal form. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Requirement 2:

    Prepare any necessary adjusting entries at the December 31, 2011, year-end. No adjusting entries were made during the year for any item.(Round your answers to the nearest whole number. Enter adjusting entries in the same order as above. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Problem 2-3 Adjusting entries [LO 4, 5]

    Pastina Company manufactures and sells various types of pasta to grocery chains as private label brands. The company’s fiscal year-end is December 31. The unadjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2011, appears below.

    Account Title

    Debits

    Credits

    Cash

    30,000

    Accounts receivable

    40,000

    Allowance for uncollectible accounts

    3,000

    Supplies

    1,500

    Inventory

    60,000

    Note receivable

    25,000

    Interest receivable

    0

    Prepaid rent

    4,000

    Prepaid insurance

    0

    Equipment

    80,000

    Accumulated depreciation equipment

    30,000

    Accounts payable

    28,000

    Wages payable

    0

    Note payable

    68,000

    Interest payable

    0

    Unearned revenue

    0

    Common stock

    60,000

    Retained earnings

    16,500

    Sales revenue

    148,000

    Interest revenue

    0

    Cost of goods sold

    70,000

    Wage expense

    18,900

    Rent expense

    11,000

    Depreciation expense

    0

    Interest expense

    0

    Supplies expense

    1,100

    Insurance expense

    9,000

    Bad debt expense

    3,000

    Totals

    353,500

    353,500

    Information necessary to prepare the year-end adjusting entries appears below.

    Depreciation on the equipment for the year is $11,000.

    The company estimates that of the $40,000 in accounts receivable outstanding at year-end, $5,200 probably will not be collected.

    Employee wages are paid twice a month, on the 22nd for wages earned from the 1st through the 15th, and on the 7th of the following month for wages earned from the 16th through the end of the month. Wages earned from December 16 through December 31, 2011, were $3,000.

    On October 1, 2011, Pastina borrowed $68,000 from a local bank and signed a note. The note requires interest to be paid annually on September 30 at 9%. The principal is due in 10 years.

    On March 1, 2011, the company lent a supplier $25,000 and a note was signed requiring principal and interest at 11% to be paid on February 28, 2012.

    On April 1, 2011, the company paid an insurance company $9,000 for a two-year fire insurance policy. The entire $9,000 was debited to insurance expense.

    $900 of supplies remained on hand at December 31, 2011.

    A customer paid Pastina $1,000 in December for 1,500 pounds of spaghetti to be manufactured and delivered in January 2012. Pastina credited sales revenue.

    On December 1, 2011, $4,000 rent was paid to the owner of the building. The payment represented rent for December and January 2012, at $2,000 per month.

    Required:

    Prepare the necessary December 31, 2011, adjusting journal entries. (Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount.Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Problem:

    The general ledger of the Karlin Company, a consulting company, at January 1, 2011, contained the following account balances:

    Account Title

    Debits

    Credits

    Cash

    30,000

    Accounts receivable

    15,000

    Allowance for uncollectible accounts

    500

    Equipment

    20,000

    Accumulated depreciation

    6,000

    Salaries payable

    9,000

    Common stock

    40,000

    Retained earnings

    9,500

    Total

    65,000

    65,000

    The following is a summary of the transactions for the year:

    Sales of services, $100,000, of which $30,000 was on credit.

    Collected on accounts receivable, $27,300.

    Issued shares of common stock in exchange for $10,000 in cash.

    Paid salaries, $50,000 (of which $9,000 was for salaries payable).

    Paid miscellaneous expenses, $24,000.

    Purchased equipment for $15,000 in cash.

    Paid $2,500 in cash dividends to shareholders.

    Requirement 1:

    (Offline – not submitted or graded in this system). Prepare the necessary T-accounts, entering the beginning balances from the trial balance.

    Requirement 2:

    Prepare a general journal entry for each of the summary transactions listed above. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Requirement 3:

    Post the journal entries to the offline T-accounts.

    Requirement 4:

    Prepare an unadjusted trial balance. (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter a 0 wherever required.Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Requirement 5:

    Prepare and post adjusting journal entries. Post to offline T-accounts. Accrued salaries at year-end amounted to $1,000. Depreciation for the year on the equipment is $2,000. The allowance for uncollectible accounts is estimated to be $1,500. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Requirement 6:

    Prepare an adjusted trial balance. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Requirement 7:

    Prepare an income statement for 2011 and a balance sheet as of December 31, 2011. (Amounts in parentheses do not require a minus sign. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Requirement 8:

    Prepare and post closing entries. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Selected balance sheet information for the Wolf Company at November 30, and December 31, 2011, is presented below. The company uses the perpetual inventory system and all sales to customers are made on credit.

    Nov. 30

    Dec. 31

    Debits

    Credits

    Debits

    Credits

    Accounts receivable

    10,000

    3,000

    Prepaid insurance

    5,000

    7,500

    Inventory

    7,000

    6,000

    Accounts payable

    12,000

    15,000

    Wages payable

    5,000

    3,000

    The following cash flow information also is available:

    Cash collected from credit customers $55,000.

    Cash paid for insurance $8,000.

    Cash paid to suppliers of inventory $44,000 (the entire accounts payable amounts relate to inventory purchases).

    Cash paid to employees for wages $10,000.

    Requirement 1:

    Determine the following for the month of December. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Requirement 2:

    Prepare a summary journal entry to record the month’s sales and cost of those sales. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    The general ledger of the Karlin Company, a consulting company, at January 1, 2011, contained the following account balances:

    Account Title

    Debits

    Credits

    Cash

    30,000

    Accounts receivable

    15,000

    Allowance for uncollectible accounts

    500

    Equipment

    20,000

    Accumulated depreciation

    6,000

    Salaries payable

    9,000

    Common stock

    40,000

    Retained earnings

    9,500

    Total

    65,000

    65,000

    The following is a summary of the transactions for the year:

    Sales of services, $100,000, of which $30,000 was on credit.

    Collected on accounts receivable, $27,300.

    Issued shares of common stock in exchange for $10,000 in cash.

    Paid salaries, $50,000 (of which $9,000 was for salaries payable).

    Paid miscellaneous expenses, $24,000.

    Purchased equipment for $15,000 in cash.

    Paid $2,500 in cash dividends to shareholders.

    Requirement 1:

    (Offline – not submitted or graded in this system). Prepare the necessary T-accounts, entering the beginning balances from the trial balance.

    Requirement 2:

    Prepare a general journal entry for each of the summary transactions listed above. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Requirement 3:

    Post the journal entries to the offline T-accounts.

    Requirement 4:

    Prepare an unadjusted trial balance. (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter a 0 wherever required.Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Requirement 5:

    Prepare and post adjusting journal entries. Post to offline T-accounts. Accrued salaries at year-end amounted to $1,000. Depreciation for the year on the equipment is $2,000. The allowance for uncollectible accounts is estimated to be $1,500. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Requirement 6:

    Prepare an adjusted trial balance. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Requirement 7:

    Prepare an income statement for 2011 and a balance sheet as of December 31, 2011. (Amounts in parentheses do not require a minus sign. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Requirement 8:

    Prepare and post closing entries. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Requirement 9:

    Prepare a post-closing trial balance. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    managerial accounting 1b ch15 510156

    Managerial Accounting 1B – Ch15

    1.Exercise 15-4 Analysis of cost flows L.O. C2, P1, P2, P3

    As of the end of June, the job cost sheets at Racing Wheels, Inc., show the following total costs accumulated on three custom jobs.

    Job 102

    Job 103

    Job 104

    Direct materials

    $ 30,000

    $ 66,000

    $ 54,000

    Direct labor

    16,000

    28,400

    42,000

    Overhead

    8,000

    14,200

    21,000

    Job 102 was started in production in May and the following costs were assigned to it in May: direct materials, $12,000; direct labor, $3,600; and overhead, $1,800. Jobs 103 and 104 are started in June. Overhead cost is applied with a predetermined rate based on direct labor cost. Jobs 102 and 103 are finished in June, and Job 104 is expected to be finished in July. No raw materials are used indirectly in June. Using this information, answer the following questions. (Assume this company s predetermined overhead rate did not change across these months).

    1. What is the cost of the raw materials requisitioned in June for each of the three jobs (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    2. How much direct labor cost is incurred during June for each of the three jobs (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    3. What predetermined overhead rate is used during June (Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

    4. How much total cost is transferred to finished goods during June (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    5. 2.Exercise 15-6 Analysis of costs assigned to goods in process L.O. P3

    Lopez Company uses a job order cost accounting system that charges overhead to jobs on the basis of direct material cost. At year-end, the Goods in Process Inventory account shows the following.

    Date

    Explanation

    Debit

    Credit

    Balance

    2011

    Dec. 31

    Direct materials cost

    1,500,000

    1,500,000

    31

    Direct labor cost

    240,000

    1,740,000

    31

    Overhead costs

    450,000

    2,190,000

    31

    To finished goods

    2,100,000

    90,000

    1. Determine the overhead rate used (based on direct material cost). (Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

    2. Only one job remained in the goods in process inventory at December 31, 2011. Its direct materials cost is $30,000. How much direct labor cost and overhead cost are assigned to it (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    3. Exercise 15-7 Cost flows in a job order cost system L.O. P1, P2, P3, P4

    The following information is available for Lock-Down Company, which produces special-order security products and uses a job order cost accounting system.

    April 30

    May 31

    Inventories

    Raw materials

    $

    40,000

    $

    50,000

    Goods in process

    9,600

    19,500

    Finished goods

    60,000

    33,200

    Activities and information for May

    Raw materials purchases (paid with cash)

    189,000

    Factory payroll (paid with cash)

    400,000

    Factory overhead

    Indirect materials

    12,000

    Indirect labor

    75,000

    Other overhead costs

    100,500

    Sales (received in cash)

    1,200,000

    Predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost

    65

    %

    1. Compute the following amounts for the month of May. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sig

    4. Exercise 15-8 Journal entries for materials L.O. P1

    The following information is available for Lock-Down Company, which produces special-order security products and uses a job order cost accounting system.

    April 30

    May 31

    Inventories

    Raw materials

    $

    40,000

    $

    50,000

    Goods in process

    9,600

    19,500

    Finished goods

    60,000

    33,200

    Activities and information for May

    Raw materials purchases (paid with cash)

    189,000

    Factory payroll (paid with cash)

    400,000

    Factory overhead

    Indirect materials

    12,000

    Indirect labor

    75,000

    Other overhead costs

    100,500

    Sales (received in cash)

    1,200,000

    Predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost

    65

    %

    1. Raw materials purchases for cash.

    2. Direct materials usage.

    3. Indirect materials usage.

    Prepare journal entries for the above events for the month of May. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    5. Exercise 15-9 Journal entries for labor L.O. P2

    The following information is available for Lock-Down Company, which produces special-order security products and uses a job order cost accounting system.

    April 30

    May 31

    Inventories

    Raw materials

    $

    40,000

    $

    50,000

    Goods in process

    9,600

    19,500

    Finished goods

    60,000

    33,200

    Activities and information for May

    Raw materials purchases (paid with cash)

    189,000

    Factory payroll (paid with cash)

    400,000

    Factory overhead

    Indirect materials

    12,000

    Indirect labor

    75,000

    Other overhead costs

    100,500

    Sales (received in cash)

    1,200,000

    Predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost

    65

    %

    1. Factory payroll costs in cash.

    2. Direct labor usage.

    3. Indirect labor usage.

    Prepare journal entries for the above events for the month of May. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    6. Exercise 15-10 Journal entries for overhead L.O. P3

    The following information is available for Lock-Down Company, which produces special-order security products and uses a job order cost accounting system.

    April 30

    May 31

    Inventories

    Raw materials

    $

    40,000

    $

    50,000

    Goods in process

    9,600

    19,500

    Finished goods

    60,000

    33,200

    Activities and information for May

    Raw materials purchases (paid with cash)

    189,000

    Factory payroll (paid with cash)

    400,000

    Factory overhead

    Indirect materials

    12,000

    Indirect labor

    75,000

    Other overhead costs

    100,500

    Sales (received in cash)

    1,200,000

    Predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost

    65

    %

    1. Factory overhead excluding indirect materials and indirect labor (record credit to Other Accounts).

    2. Application of overhead to goods in process.

    Prepare journal entries for the above events for the month of May. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    7. Exercise 15-11 Adjusting factory overhead L.O. P4

    The following information is available for Lock-Down Company, which produces special-order security products and uses a job order cost accounting system.

    April 30

    May 31

    Inventories

    Raw materials

    $

    40,000

    $

    50,000

    Goods in process

    9,600

    19,500

    Finished goods

    60,000

    33,200

    Activities and information for May

    Raw materials purchases (paid with cash)

    189,000

    Factory payroll (paid with cash)

    400,000

    Factory overhead

    Indirect materials

    12,000

    Indirect labor

    75,000

    Other overhead costs

    100,500

    Sales (received in cash)

    1,200,000

    Predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost

    65

    %

    Prepare the journal entry to allocate (close) overapplied or underapplied overhead to Cost of Goods Sold.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Problem 15-1A Production costs computed and recorded; reports prepared L.O. C2, P1, P2, P3, P4

    [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

    Winfrey Co.’s March 31 inventory of raw materials is $150,000. Raw materials purchases in April are $400,000, and factory payroll cost in April is $220,000. Overhead costs incurred in April are: indirect materials, $30,000; indirect labor, $14,000; factory rent, $20,000; factory utilities, $12,000; and factory equipment depreciation, $30,000. The predetermined overhead rate is 50% of direct labor cost. Job 306 is sold for $380,000 cash in April. Costs of the three jobs worked on in April follow.

    8. Poblem 15-1A Part 1

    Required:

    Determine the total of each production cost incurred for April (direct labor, direct materials, and applied overhead), and the total cost assigned to each job (including the balances from March 31).(Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response. )

    9. Problem 15-1A Part 2

    a. Materials purchases (on credit), factory payroll (paid in cash), and actual overhead costs including indirect materials and indirect labor. (Factory rent and utilities are paid in cash.)

    b. Assignment of direct materials, direct labor, and applied overhead costs to the Goods in Process Inventory.

    c. Transfer of Jobs 306 and 307 to the Finished Goods Inventory.

    d. Cost of goods sold for Job 306.

    e. Revenue from the sale of Job 306.

    f. Assignment of any underapplied or overapplied overhead to the Cost of Goods Sold account. (The amount is not material.)

    2. Prepare journal entries for the month of April to record the above transactions. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    10. Problem 15-1A Part 3

    3. Prepare a manufacturing statement for April (use a single line presentation for direct materials and show the details of overhead cost.) (Amounts to be deducted should be indicated with a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    11. Problem 15-1A Part 4

    4.1 Compute gross profit for April. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    4.2 Show how to present the inventories on the April 30 balance sheet. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    managerial accounting 1b ch16 510158

    Managerial Accounting 1B

    Financial and Managerial Accounting

    Chapter 16

    1. Exercise 16-6 Recording cost flows in a process cost system L.O. P1, P2, P3, P4

    Lowes Lumber produces bagged bark for use in landscaping. Production involves packaging bark chips in plastic bags in a bagging department. The following information describes production operations for October.

    Bagging Department

    Direct materials used

    $

    230,000

    Direct labor used

    $

    38,000

    Predetermined overhead rate (based on direct labor)

    120

    %

    Goods transferred from bagging to finished goods

    $

    (203,500

    )

    The company”s revenue for the month totaled $450,000 from credit sales, and its cost of goods sold for the month is $250,000.

    2. Prepare journal entry dated October 31 to record its October production activities for direct labor usage.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    1. Prepare journal entry dated October 31 to record its October production activities for direct material usage.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    3. Prepare journal entry dated October 31 to record its October production activities for overhead allocation.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    4. Prepare journal entry dated October 31 to record its October production activities for goods transfer from production to finished goods. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    5. Prepare journal entries dated October 31 to record its October activities for sales. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Exercise 16-8 Computing equivalent units of production-weighted average L.O. C2

    During April, the production department of a process manufacturing system completed a number of units of a product and transferred them to finished goods. Of these transferred units, 37,500 were in process in the production department at the beginning of April and 150,000 were started and completed in April. April”s beginning inventory units were 60% complete with respect to materials and 40% complete with respect to labor. At the end of April, 51,250 additional units were in process in the production department and were 80% complete with respect to materials and 30% complete with respect to labor.

    Number of units

    Compute the number of units transferred to finished goods.

    Compute the number of equivalent units with respect to both materials used and labor used in the production department for April using the weighted-average method.

    Direct
    Materials

    Direct Labor

    Number of equivalent units

    3. Exercise 16-9 Costs assigned to output and inventories-weighted average L.O. C2, P4

    During April, the production department of a process manufacturing system completed a number of units of a product and transferred them to finished goods. Of these transferred units, 37,500 were in process in the production department at the beginning of April and 150,000 were started and completed in April. April s beginning inventory units were 60% complete with respect to materials and 40% complete with respect to labor. At the end of April, 51,250 additional units were in process in the production department and were 80% complete with respect to materials and 30% complete with respect to labor.

    The production department had $531,480 of direct materials and $407,689 of direct labor cost charged to it during April. Also, its beginning inventory included $74,075 of direct materials cost and $28,493 of direct labor.

    Using the weighted-average method, compute the direct materials cost and the direct labor cost per equivalent unit for the department. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Direct Materials

    Direct Labor

    Cost per equivalent unit

    Using the weighted-average method, assign April”s costs to the department s output specifically, its units transferred to finished goods and its ending goods in process inventory. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Total cost

    4. Exercise 16-10 Computing equivalent units of production-FIFO L.O. C4

    During April, the production department of a process manufacturing system completed a number of units of a product and transferred them to finished goods. Of these transferred units, 37,500 were in process in the production department at the beginning of April and 150,000 were started and completed in April. April”s beginning inventory units were 60% complete with respect to materials and 40% complete with respect to labor. At the end of April, 51,250 additional units were in process in the production department and were 80% complete with respect to materials and 30% complete with respect to labor.

    Direct
    Materials

    Direct Labor

    Number of equivalent units

    Compute the number of equivalent units with respect to both materials used and labor used in the production department for April using the FIFO method.

    5. Exercise 16-11A Costs assigned to output-FIFO L.O. C4, P4

    During April, the production department of a process manufacturing system completed a number of units of a product and transferred them to finished goods. Of these transferred units, 37,500 were in process in the production department at the beginning of April and 150,000 were started and completed in April. April s beginning inventory units were 60% complete with respect to materials and 40% complete with respect to labor. At the end of April, 51,250 additional units were in process in the production department and were 80% complete with respect to materials and 30% complete with respect to labor.

    The production department had $531,480 of direct materials and $407,689 of direct labor cost charged to it during April. Also, its beginning inventory included $74,075 of direct materials cost and $28,493 of direct labor.

    Using the FIFO method, compute the direct materials cost and the direct labor cost per equivalent unit for the department. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Direct Materials

    Direct Labor

    Cost per equivalent unit

    $

    $

    Using the FIFO method, assign April”s costs to the department s output specifically, its units transferred to finished goods and its ending goods in process inventory. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Total cost

    Problem 16-1A Production cost flow and measurement; journal entries L.O. P1, P2, P3, P4

    [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

    Edison Company manufactures wool blankets and accounts for product costs using process costing. The following information is available regarding its May inventories.

    The following additional information describes the company”s production activities for May.

    Raw materials purchases (on credit)

    $

    135,000

    Factory payroll cost (paid in cash)

    791,500

    Other overhead cost (Other Accounts credited)

    43,000

    Materials used

    Direct

    $

    93,500

    Indirect

    31,000

    Labor used

    Direct

    $

    352,000

    Indirect

    439,500

    Overhead rate as a percent of direct labor

    110

    %

    Sales (on credit)

    $

    1,500,000

    Beginning
    Inventory

    Ending
    Inventory

    Raw materials inventory

    $

    28,000

    $

    25,500

    Goods in process inventory

    220,750

    252,000

    Finished goods inventory

    319,000

    277,000

    Problem 16-1A Part 1

    Required:

    a. Compute the cost of products transferred from production to finished goods. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Cost of products transferred

    Cost of goods sold

    Problem 16-1A Part 2

    1. b. Compute the cost of goods sold. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    2. a. Prepare journal entry dated May 31 to record the raw materials purchases. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    2. b. Prepare journal entry dated May 31 to record the direct materials usage. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    2.c. Prepare journal entry dated May 31 to record the indirect materials usage. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    2.d. Prepare journal entry dated May 31 to record the payroll costs. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    2.e. Prepare journal entry dated May 31 to record the direct labor costs. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    2.f. Prepare journal entry dated May 31 to record the indirect labor costs. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    2.g. Prepare journal entry dated May 31 to record the other overhead costs. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    2.h. Prepare journal entry dated May 31 to record the overhead applied. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    2.i. Prepare journal entry dated May 31 to record the goods transferred from production to finished goods.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    2.j. Prepare journal entry dated May 31 to record the sale of finished goods. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Problem 16-2A Cost per equivalent unit; costs assigned to products L.O. C2, C3

    [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

    Fairfax Company uses weighted-average process costing to account for its production costs. Direct labor is added evenly throughout the process. Direct materials are added at the beginning of the process. During September, the company transferred 735,000 units of product to finished goods. At the end of September, the goods in process inventory consists of 207,000 units that are 90% complete with respect to labor. Beginning inventory had $244,920 of direct materials and $69,098 of direct labor cost. The direct labor cost added in September is $1,312,852, and the direct materials cost added is $1,639,080.

    Required:

    1.a. Determine the equivalent units of production with respect to direct labor.

    Problem 16-2A Part 1

    Equivalent units

    1.b. Determine the equivalent units of production with respect to direct materials.

    Problem 16-2A Part 2

    Compute both the direct labor cost and the direct materials cost per equivalent unit. (Round your answers to 2 decimal place. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    – Per equivalent unit

    – Direct labor cost

    – Direct materials cost

    10. Problem 16-2A Part 3

    3.a. Compute both direct labor cost and direct materials cost assigned to units completed and transferred out. (Round your per unit costs to 2 decimal places and final answers to the nearest dollar amount.)

    – Cost transferred out

    – Direct materials

    – Direct labor

    3.b. Compute both direct labor cost and direct materials cost assigned to ending goods in process inventory.(Round your per unit costs to 2 decimal places and final answers to the nearest dollar amount.)

    managerial accounting 1b ch19 510160

    Managerial Accounting 1B

    Financial and Managerial Accounting

    Chapter 19

    Exercise 19-1 Income reporting under absorption costing and variable costing L.O. P2

    Adams Company, a manufacturer of in-home decorative fountains, began operations on September 1 of the current year. Its cost and sales information for this year follows.

    Production costs

    Direct materials

    $

    40

    per unit

    Direct labor

    $

    60

    per unit

    Overhead costs for the year

    Variable overhead

    $

    3,000,000

    Fixed overhead

    $

    7,000,000

    Nonproduction costs for the year

    Variable selling and administrative

    $

    770,000

    Fixed selling and administrative

    $

    4,250,000

    Production and sales for the year

    Units produced

    100,000

    units

    Units sold

    70,000

    units

    Sales price per unit

    $

    350

    per unit

    Prepare an income statement for the company using absorption costing. (Input all amounts as positive values except net loss which should be indicated with a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Prepare an income statement for the company using variable costing. (Input all amounts as positive values except net loss which should be indicated with a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Under what circumstance(s) is reported income identical under both absorption costing and variable costing?

    Exercise 19-4 Income reporting under absorption costing and variable costing L.O. P2

    [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

    Woodson Company, a producer of solid oak tables, reports the following data from its current year operations, which is its second year of business.

    Sales price per unit

    $

    320

    per unit

    Units produced this year

    115,000

    units

    Units sold this year

    118,000

    units

    Units in beginning-year inventory

    3,000

    units

    Beginning inventory costs

    Variable (3,000 units $135)

    $

    405,000

    Fixed (3,000 units $80)

    240,000

    Total

    $

    645,000

    Production costs this year

    Direct materials

    $

    40

    per unit

    Direct labor

    $

    62

    per unit

    Overhead costs this year

    Variable overhead

    $

    3,220,000

    Fixed overhead

    $

    7,400,000

    Nonproduction costs this year

    Variable selling and administrative

    $

    1,416,000

    Fixed selling and administrative

    4,600,000

    2. Exercise 19-4 Part 1

    Prepare the current year income statement for the company using absorption costing. (Input all amounts as positive values except net loss which should be indicated with a minus sign. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    3. Exercise 19-4 Part 2

    Prepare the current year income statement for the company using variable costing. (Input all amounts as positive values except net loss which should be indicated with a minus sign. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    4. Exercise 19-6 Converting variable costing income to absorption costing income L.O. P2, P4

    Lyon Furnaces prepares the income statement under variable costing for its managerial reports, and it prepares the income statement under absorption costing for external reporting. For its first month of operations, 375 furnaces were produced and 225 were sold; this left 150 furnaces in ending inventory. The income statement information under variable costing follows.

    Sales (225 $1,600)

    $

    360,000

    Variable production cost (225 $625)

    140,625

    Variable selling and administrative expenses (225 $65)

    14,625

    Contribution margin

    204,750

    Fixed overhead cost

    56,250

    Fixed selling and administrative expense

    75,000

    Net income

    $

    73,500

    Prepare this company’s income statement for its first month of operations under absorption costing.(Input all amounts as positive values except net loss which should be indicated with a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Exercise 19-9 Contribution margin format income statement L.O. P3

    Polarix is a retailer of ATVs (all terrain vehicles) and accessories. An income statement for its Consumer ATV Department for the current year follows. ATVs sell, on average, for $3,800. Variable selling expenses are $270 each. The remaining selling expenses are fixed. Administrative expenses are 40% variable and 60% fixed. The company does not manufacture its own ATVs; it purchases them from a supplier for $1,830 each.

    POLARIX
    Income Statement Consumer ATV Department
    For Year Ended December 21, 2011

    Sales

    $

    646,000

    Cost of goods sold

    311,100

    Gross margin

    334,900

    Operating expenses

    Selling expenses

    $

    135,000

    Administrative expenses

    59,500

    194,500

    Net income

    $

    140,400

    Required:

    Prepare an income statement for this current year using the contribution margin format. (Input all amounts as positive values except net loss which should be indicated with a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    For each ATV sold during this year, what is the contribution toward covering fixed expenses and that toward earning income (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Contribution margin per ATV

    Exercise 19-11 Absorption costing and over-production L.O. C2

    Rourke Inc. reports the following annual cost data for its single product.

    Normal production and sales level

    60,000

    units

    Sales price

    $

    56.00

    per unit

    Direct materials

    $

    9.00

    Direct labor

    $

    6.50

    per unit

    Variable overhead

    $

    11.00

    per unit

    Fixed overhead

    $

    720,000

    in total

    If Rourke increases its production to 80,000 units, while sales remain at the current 60,000 unit level, by how much would the company s gross margin increase or decrease under absorption costing? Assume the company has idle capacity to double current production. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Gross margin

    1. Problem 19-1A Variable costing income statement and conversion to absorption costing income L.O. P2, P4

    Torres Company began operations this year. During this first year, the company produced 100,000 units and sold 80,000 units. The absorption costing income statement for its first year of operations follows.

    Sales (80,000 units $50 per unit)

    $

    4,000,000

    Cost of goods sold

    Beginning inventory

    $

    0

    Cost of goods manufactured (100,000 units $30 per unit)

    3,000,000

    Cost of good available for sale

    3,000,000

    Ending inventory (20,000 $30)

    600,000

    Cost of goods sold

    2,400,000

    Gross margin

    1,600,000

    Selling and administrative expenses

    530,000

    Net income

    $

    1,070,000

    Additional Information

    Selling and administrative expenses consist of $350,000 in annual fixed expenses and $2.25 per unit in variable selling and administrative expenses.

    The company’s product cost of $30 per unit is computed as follows.

    Direct materials

    $

    5

    per unit

    Direct labor

    $

    14

    per unit

    Variable overhead

    $

    2

    per unit

    Fixed overhead ($900,000 / 100,000 units)

    $

    9

    per unit

    Required:

    Prepare an income statement for the company under variable costing. (Input all amounts as positive values except net loss which should be indicated with a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    managerial accounting 1b ch20 510161

    Managerial Accounting 1B

    Financial and Managerial Accounting-Chapter-20

    1.Exercise 20-5 Computing budgeted cash payments for purchases L.O. P1

    Powerdyne Company s cost of goods sold is consistently 60% of sales. The company plans to carry ending merchandise inventory for each month equal to 40% of the next month s budgeted cost of good sold. All merchandise is purchased on credit, and 50% of the purchases made during a month is paid for in that month. Another 35% is paid for during the first month after purchase, and the remaining 15% is paid for during the second month after purchase. Expected sales are: August (actual), $150,000; September (actual), $350,000; October (estimated), $200,000; November (estimated), $300,000.

    Use this information to determine October s expected cash payments for purchases. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Cash payments for purchases

    2.Exercise 20-6 Computing budgeted purchases and costs of goods sold L.O. P1

    Sand Dollar Company purchases all merchandise on credit. It recently budgeted the following month-end accounts payable balances and merchandise inventory balances. Cash payments on accounts payable during each month are expected to be: May, $1,300,000; June, $1,450,000; July, $1,350,000; and August, $1,400,000.

    Accounts
    Payable

    Merchandise Inventory

    May 31

    $

    120,000

    $

    250,000

    June 30

    170,000

    400,000

    July 31

    200,000

    300,000

    August 31

    160,000

    330,000

    1. Compute the budgeted amounts of merchandise purchases for June, July, and August. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    June

    July

    August

    Budgeted merchandise purchases

    $

    $

    $

    2. Compute the budgeted amounts of cost of goods sold for June, July, and August. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    June

    July

    August

    Budgeted cost of goods sold

    $

    $

    $

    Explanation:

    1.Budgeted merchandise purchases

    2.Budgeted cost of goods sold

    3. Exercise 20-16 Cash budget L.O. P1

    Kool-Ray is preparing its master budget for the quarter ended September 30. Budgeted sales and cash payments for merchandise for the next three months follow:

    Sales are 20% cash and 80% on credit. All credit sales are collected in the month following the sale. The June 30 balance sheet includes balances of $12,000 in cash; $45,000 in accounts receivable; $4,500 in accounts payable; and a $2,000 balance in loans payable. A minimum cash balance of $12,000 is required. Loans are obtained at the end of any month when a cash shortage occurs. Interest is 1% per month based on the beginning of the month loan balance and is paid at each month-end. If an excess balance of cash exists, loans are repaid at the end of the month. Operating expenses are paid in the month incurred and consist of sales commissions (10% of sales), office salaries ($4,000 per month), and rent ($6,500 per month).

    Prepare a cash receipts budget for July, August, and September. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    2. Prepare a cash budget for each of the months of July, August, and September. (Input all amounts as positive values. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Problem 20-5A: Preparation of a complete master budget L.O. C2, P1, P2

    [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

    Near the end of 2011, the management of Simid Sports Co., a merchandising company, prepared the following estimated balance sheet for December 31, 2011.

    To prepare a master budget for January, February, and March of 2012, management gathers the following information.

    a. Simid Sports single product is purchased for $30 per unit and resold for $55 per unit. The expected inventory level of 2,500 units on December 31, 2011, is more than management s desired level for 2012, which is 20% of the next month s expected sales (in units). Expected sales are: January, 3,500 units; February, 4,500 units; March, 5,500 units; and April, 5,000 units.

    b. Cash sales and credit sales represent 25% and 75%, respectively, of total sales. Of the credit sales, 60% is collected in the first month after the month of sale and 40% in the second month after the month of sale. For the December 31, 2011, accounts receivable balance, $62,500 is collected in January and the remaining $200,000 is collected in February.

    c. Merchandise purchases are paid for as follows: 20% in the first month after the month of purchase and 80% in the second month after the month of purchase. For the December 31, 2011, accounts payable balance, $40,000 is paid in January and the remaining $140,000 is paid in February.

    d. Sales commissions equal to 20% of sales are paid each month. Sales salaries (excluding commissions) are $30,000 per year.

    e. General and administrative salaries are $72,000 per year. Maintenance expense equals $1,000 per month and is paid in cash.

    f. Equipment reported in the December 31, 2011, balance sheet was purchased in January 2011. It is being depreciated over eight years under the straight-line method with no salvage value. The following amounts for new equipment purchases are planned in the coming quarter: January, $18,000; February, $48,000; and March, $14,400. This equipment will be depreciated under the straight-line method over eight years with no salvage value. A full month s depreciation is taken for the month in which equipment is purchased.

    g. The company plans to acquire land at the end of March at a cost of $75,000, which will be paid with cash on the last day of the month.

    h. Simid Sports has a working arrangement with its bank to obtain additional loans as needed. The interest rate is 12% per year, and interest is paid at each month-end based on the beginning balance. Partial or full payments on these loans can be made on the last day of the month. The company has agreed to maintain a minimum ending cash balance of $12,500 in each month.

    i. The income tax rate for the company is 40%. Income taxes on the first quarter s income will not be paid until April 15.

    4. Problem 20-5A Part 1

    1. Monthly sales budgets. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    SIMID SPORTS CO.
    Sales Budget
    January, February, and March 2012

    Budgeted
    Units

    Budgeted
    Unit Price

    Budgeted
    Total Dollars

    January 2012

    $

    $

    February 2012

    March 2012



    Total for the first quarter

    $






    SIMID SPORTS CO.
    Merchandise Purchases Budget
    January, February, and March 2012

    January

    February

    March

    Total

    Next month s budgeted sales

    Ratio of inventory to future sales

    %

    %

    %




    Budgeted ending inventory

    Add: Budgeted sales




    Required units of available merchandise

    Deduct: Beginning inventory




    Units to be purchased









    Budgeted cost per unit

    $

    $

    $

    $

    Budgeted merchandise purchases

    $

    $

    $

    $









    5. Problem 20-5A Part 2

    2. Monthly merchandise purchases budgets. (Units to be deducted should be indicated with a minus sign. Omit the “$” & “%” signs in your response.)

    6. Problem 20-5A Part 3

    3. Monthly selling expense budgets. (Omit the “$” & “%” signs in your response.)

    SIMID SPORTS CO.
    Selling Expense Budget
    January, February, and March 2012

    January

    February

    March

    Total

    Budgeted sales

    $

    $

    $

    Sales commission percent

    %

    %

    %





    Sales commissions expense

    $

    Sales salaries





    Total selling expenses

    $

    $

    $

    $









    7.Problem 20-5A Part 4

    4. Monthly general and administrative expense budgets. (Do not round your intermediate calculations. Round your final answers to the nearest whole dollar. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    SIMID SPORTS CO.
    General and Administrative Expense Budget
    January, February, and March 2012

    January

    February

    March

    Total

    Salaries

    $

    $

    $

    $

    Maintenance

    Depreciation





    Total expenses

    $

    $

    $

    $










    8. Problem 20-5A Part 5

    5. Monthly capital expenditures budgets. (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    SIMID SPORTS CO.
    Capital Expenditures Budget
    January, February, and March 2012

    January

    February

    March

    Equipment purchases

    $

    $

    $

    Land purchase




    Total

    $

    $

    $







    9. Problem 20-5A Part 6

    6. Monthly cash budgets. (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Input all amounts as positive values except negative preliminary cash balance and repayment of loan to bank which should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    SIMID SPORTS CO.
    Cash Budget
    January, February, and March 2012

    January

    February

    March

    Beginning cash balance

    $

    $

    $

    Cash receipts from customers




    Total cash available

    Cash disbursements

    Payments for merchandise

    Sales commissions

    Sales salaries

    General & administrative salaries

    Maintenance expense

    Interest

    Taxes payable

    Purchases of equipment

    Purchase of land




    Total cash disbursements




    Preliminary cash balance

    Repayment of loan to bank




    Ending cash balance

    $

    $

    $




    Loan balance, end of month

    $

    $

    $








    10. Problem 20-5A Part 7

    7. Budgeted income statement for the entire first quarter (not for each month). (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    SIMID SPORTS CO.
    Budgeted Income Statement
    For Three Months Ended March 31, 2012

    Sales

    $

    Cost of goods sold


    Gross profit

    Operating expenses

    Sales commissions

    $

    Sales salaries

    General administrative salaries

    Maintenance expense

    Depreciation expense

    Interest expense



    Income before taxes

    Income taxes


    Net income

    $




    11.

    Problem 20-5A Part 8

    8. Budgeted balance sheet as of March 31, 2012. (Input all amounts as positive values. Be sure to list the assets in order of their liquidity. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    SIMID SPORTS CO.
    Budgeted Balance Sheet
    March 31, 2012

    Assets

    Cash

    $

    Accounts receivable

    Inventory


    Total Current Assets

    Land

    Equipment

    $

    Less: Accumulated depreciation



    Total Assets

    $



    Liabilities and Equity

    Accounts payable

    $

    Bank loan payable

    Taxes payable


    Total Liabilities

    Common stock

    $

    Retained earnings


    Total Stockholders” Equity


    Total Liabilities & Equity

    $

    managerial accounting 1b ch21 510162

    Managerial Accounting 1B

    Financial and Managerial Accounting

    Chapter 21

    1.Exercise 21-1 Preparation of flexible budgets L.O. P1

    Mesa Company’s fixed budget for the first quarter of calendar year 2011 reveals the following.

    Prepare flexible budgets that show variable costs per unit, fixed costs, and three different flexible budgets for sales volumes of 7,500, 10,000, and 12,500 units. (Round your “Variable amount per unit” to 2 decimal places. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    MESA COMPANY
    Flexible Budgets
    For Quarter Ended March 31, 2011

    Flexible Budget


    2.

    Exercise 21-4 Preparation of a flexible budget performance report L.O. P1

    Daytec Company s fixed budget performance report for June follows. The $440,000 budgeted expenses include $300,000 variable expenses and $140,000 fixed expenses. Actual expenses include $130,000 fixed expenses.

    Prepare a flexible budget performance report showing any variances between budgeted and actual results. List fixed and variable expenses separately. (Input all amounts as a positive value. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    DAYTEC COMPANY
    Flexible Budget Performance Report
    For Month Ended June 30

    Flexible Budget

    Actual Results

    Variances

    Sales

    $

    $

    $

    F

    Variable expenses

    U




    Contribution margin

    F

    Fixed expenses

    F




    Income from operations

    $

    $

    $

    F








    Exercise 21-7A Computation and interpretation of overhead spending, efficiency, and volume variances L.O. P3

    [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

    Sonic Company set the following standard costs for one unit of its product for 2011.

    Direct material (20 Ibs. @ $2.50 per Ib.)

    $

    Direct labor (15 hrs. @ $8.00 per hr.)

    Factory variable overhead (15 hrs. @ $2.50 per hr.)

    Factory fixed overhead (15 hrs. @ $0.50 per hr.)


    Standard cost

    $






    The $3.00 ($2.50 + $0.50) total overhead rate per direct labor hour is based on an expected operating level equal to 75% of the factory’s capacity of 50,000 units per month. The following monthly flexible budget information is also available.

    During the current month, the company operated at 70% of capacity, employees worked 500,000 hours, and the following actual overhead costs were incurred.

    Variable overhead costs

    $

    Fixed overhead costs


    Total overhead costs

    $






    3.

    Exercise 21-7 Part 1

    1.

    Compute variable overhead spending and efficiency variances. (Input all amounts as a positive value. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Spending variances

    $

    U

    Efficiency variances

    $

    F


    4.

    Exercise 21-7 Part 2

    2.

    Compute Fixed overhead spending and volume variances. (Input all amounts as a positive value. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Spending variances

    $

    U

    Volume variances

    $

    U


    5.Exercise 21-7 Part 3

    3.

    Compute controllable variance. (Input all amounts as a positive value. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Controllable variance

    $

    F

    6.Exercise 21-8 Computation and interpretation of materials variances L.O. P2

    BTS Company made 6,000 bookshelves using 88,000 board feet of wood costing $607,200. The company s direct materials standards for one bookshelf are 16 board feet of wood at $7 per board foot.

    (1)

    Compute the direct materials variances incurred in manufacturing these bookshelves. (Do not round your intermediate calculations. Input all amounts as a positive value. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Price variance

    $

    F

    Quantity variance

    $

    F


    Total materials variance

    $

    F



    Problem 21-1A Computation of materials, labor, and overhead variances L.O. P2, P3

    [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

    Tuna Company set the following standard unit costs for its single product.

    The predetermined overhead rate is based on a planned operating volume of 80% of the productive capacity of 60,000 units per quarter. The following flexible budget information is available.

    Operating Levels


    70%

    80%

    90%

    Production in units

    42,000

    48,000

    54,000

    Standard direct labor hours

    252,000

    288,000

    324,000

    Budgeted overhead

    Fixed factory overhead

    $

    2,016,000

    $

    2,016,000

    $

    2,016,000

    Variable factory overhead

    $

    1,260,000

    $

    1,440,000

    $

    1,620,000


    During the current quarter, the company operated at 70% of capacity and produced 42,000 units of product; actual direct labor totaled 250,000 hours. Units produced were assigned the following standard costs:

    Actual costs incurred during the current quarter follow:

    7.Problem 21-1A Part 1

    Required:

    1.

    Compute the direct materials cost variance, including its price and quantity variances. (Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    8.

    Problem 21-1A Part 2

    2.

    Compute the direct labor variance, including its rate and efficiency variances. (Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    9.Problem 21-1A Part 3

    3.

    Compute the overhead controllable and volume variances. (Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Controllable variance

    $

    Fixed overhead volume variance

    $


    Problem 21-3A Preparation and analysis of a flexible budget L.O. P1

    [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

    Pebco Company s 2011 master budget included the following fixed budget report. It is based on an expected production and sales volume of 20,000 units.

    PEBCO COMPANY
    Fixed Budget Report
    For Year Ended December 31, 2011

    10.Problem 21-3A Part 1

    1.

    Classify all items listed in the fixed budget as variable or fixed. Also determine their amounts per unit or their amounts for the year, as appropriate. (Round your variable amount answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    11.Problem 21-3A Part 2

    2.

    Prepare flexible budgets for the company at sales volumes of 18,000 and 24,000 units. (Round your variable amount per unit answers to 2 decimal places. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    PEBCO COMPANY

    Flexible Budgets

    For Year Ended December 31, 2011

    12.Problem 21-3A Part 3

    3.

    The company s business conditions are improving. One possible result is a sales volume of approximately 28,000 units. The company president is confident that this volume is within the relevant range of existing capacity. How much would operating income increase over the 2011 budgeted amount of $125,000 if this level is reached without increasing capacity (Do not round intermediate calculations.Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Operating income increase

    $

    13.Problem 21-3A Part 4

    4.

    An unfavorable change in business is remotely possible; in this case, production and sales volume for 2011 could fall to 14,000 units. How much income (or loss) from operations would occur if sales volume falls to this level (Input the amount as positive value. Do not round intermediate calculations.Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Potential operating loss

    $

    managerial accounting 1b ch21 510163

    Managerial Accounting 1B

    Financial and Managerial Accounting

    Chapter 21

    1. Exercise 21-1 Preparation of flexible budgets L.O. P1

    Mesa Company”s fixed budget for the first quarter of calendar year 2011 reveals the following.

    MESA COMPANY
    Flexible Budgets
    For Quarter Ended March 31, 2011

    Flexible Budget

    Prepare flexible budgets that show variable costs per unit, fixed costs, and three different flexible budgets for sales volumes of 7,500, 10,000, and 12,500 units. (Round your “Variable amount per unit” to 2 decimal places. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Daytec Company s fixed budget performance report for June follows. The $440,000 budgeted expenses include $300,000 variable expenses and $140,000 fixed expenses. Actual expenses include $130,000 fixed expenses.

    Prepare a flexible budget performance report showing any variances between budgeted and actual results. List fixed and variable expenses separately. (Input all amounts as a positive value. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    DAYTEC COMPANY
    Flexible Budget Performance Report
    For Month Ended June 30

    Flexible Budget

    Actual Results

    Variances

    Sales

    $

    $

    $

    F

    Variable expenses

    U

    Contribution margin

    F

    Fixed expenses

    F

    Income from operations

    $

    $

    $

    F

    Exercise 21-4 Preparation of a flexible budget performance report L.O. P1

    Exercise 21-7A Computation and interpretation of overhead spending, efficiency, and volume variances L.O. P3

    [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

    Sonic Company set the following standard costs for one unit of its product for 2011.

    Direct material (20 Ibs. @ $2.50 per Ib.)

    $

    Direct labor (15 hrs. @ $8.00 per hr.)

    Factory variable overhead (15 hrs. @ $2.50 per hr.)

    Factory fixed overhead (15 hrs. @ $0.50 per hr.)

    Standard cost

    $

    The $3.00 ($2.50 + $0.50) total overhead rate per direct labor hour is based on an expected operating level equal to 75% of the factory”s capacity of 50,000 units per month. The following monthly flexible budget information is also available.

    During the current month, the company operated at 70% of capacity, employees worked 500,000 hours, and the following actual overhead costs were incurred.

    Variable overhead costs

    $

    Fixed overhead costs

    Total overhead costs

    $

    Exercise 21-7 Part 1

    Compute variable overhead spending and efficiency variances. (Input all amounts as a positive value. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Spending variances

    $

    U

    Efficiency variances

    $

    F

    4. Exercise 21-7 Part 2

    Compute Fixed overhead spending and volume variances. (Input all amounts as a positive value. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Spending variances

    $

    U

    Volume variances

    $

    U

    5.Exercise 21-7 Part 3

    Compute controllable variance. (Input all amounts as a positive value. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Controllable variance

    $

    F

    6.Exercise 21-8 Computation and interpretation of materials variances L.O. P2

    BTS Company made 6,000 bookshelves using 88,000 board feet of wood costing $607,200. The company s direct materials standards for one bookshelf are 16 board feet of wood at $7 per board foot.

    Price variance

    $

    F

    Quantity variance

    $

    F

    Total materials variance

    $

    F

    1. Compute the direct materials variances incurred in manufacturing these bookshelves. (Do not round your intermediate calculations. Input all amounts as a positive value. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Problem 21-1A Computation of materials, labor, and overhead variances L.O. P2, P3

    [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

    Tuna Company set the following standard unit costs for its single product.

    Operating Levels

    70%

    80%

    90%

    Production in units

    42,000

    48,000

    54,000

    Standard direct labor hours

    252,000

    288,000

    324,000

    Budgeted overhead

    Fixed factory overhead

    $

    2,016,000

    $

    2,016,000

    $

    2,016,000

    Variable factory overhead

    $

    1,260,000

    $

    1,440,000

    $

    1,620,000

    The predetermined overhead rate is based on a planned operating volume of 80% of the productive capacity of 60,000 units per quarter. The following flexible budget information is available.

    Actual costs incurred during the current quarter follow:

    During the current quarter, the company operated at 70% of capacity and produced 42,000 units of product; actual direct labor totaled 250,000 hours. Units produced were assigned the following standard costs:

    7. Problem 21-1A Part 1

    Required:

    Compute the direct materials cost variance, including its price and quantity variances. (Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Problem 21-1A Part 2

    Compute the direct labor variance, including its rate and efficiency variances. (Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Problem 21-1A Part 3

    Compute the overhead controllable and volume variances. (Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Controllable variance

    $

    Fixed overhead volume variance

    $

    Problem 21-3A Preparation and analysis of a flexible budget L.O. P1

    [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

    Pebco Company s 2011 master budget included the following fixed budget report. It is based on an expected production and sales volume of 20,000 units.

    Problem 21-3A Part 1

    PEBCO COMPANY
    Fixed Budget Report
    For Year Ended December 31, 2011

    Classify all items listed in the fixed budget as variable or fixed. Also determine their amounts per unit or their amounts for the year, as appropriate. (Round your variable amount answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    11. Problem 21-3A Part 2

    Prepare flexible budgets for the company at sales volumes of 18,000 and 24,000 units. (Round yourvariable amount per unit answers to 2 decimal places. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    PEBCO COMPANY

    Flexible Budgets

    For Year Ended December 31, 2011

    12.Problem 21-3A Part 3

    The company s business conditions are improving. One possible result is a sales volume of approximately 28,000 units. The company president is confident that this volume is within the relevant range of existing capacity. How much would operating income increase over the 2011 budgeted amount of $125,000 if this level is reached without increasing capacity (Do not round intermediate calculations.Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Operating income increase

    $

    13.Problem 21-3A Part 4

    An unfavorable change in business is remotely possible; in this case, production and sales volume for 2011 could fall to 14,000 units. How much income (or loss) from operations would occur if sales volume falls to this level (Input the amount as positive value. Do not round intermediate calculations.Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Potential operating loss

    $

    managerial accounting 1b ch22 510164

    Managerial Accounting 1B
    Financial and Managerial Accounting Chapter 22 1. Exercise 22-1 Departmental expense allocations L.O. C1 Won Han Co. has four departments: materials, personnel, manufacturing, and packaging. In a recent month, the four departments incurred three shared indirect expenses. The amounts of these indirect expenses and the bases used to allocate them follow.

    Indirect Expense

    Cost

    Allocation Base

    Supervision

    $

    75,000

    Number of employees

    Utilities

    60,000

    Square feet occupied

    Insurance

    16,500

    Value of assets in use

    Total

    $

    151,500

    Departmental data for the company s recent reporting period follow.

    Department

    Employees

    Square Feet

    Asset Values

    Materials

    18

    27,000

    $

    6,000

    Personnel

    6

    4,500

    1,200

    Manufacturing

    66

    45,000

    37,800

    Packaging

    30

    13,500

    15,000

    Total

    120

    90,000

    $

    60,000

    1. Use this information to allocate each of the three indirect expenses across the four departments.
    (Omit the “$” & “%” signs in your response.) 2. Prepare a summary table that reports the indirect expenses assigned to each of the four departments.
    (Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Exercise 22-12B Joint real estate costs assigned L.O. C4 Tidy Home Properties is developing a subdivision that includes 300 home lots. The 225 lots in the Garden section are below a ridge and do not have views of the neighboring gardens and hills; the 75 lots in the Premier section offer unobstructed views. The expected selling price for each Garden lot is $50,000 and for each Premier lot is $100,000. The developer acquired the land for $2,500,000 and spent another $2,000,000 on street and utilities improvements. Assign the joint land and improvement costs to the lots using the value basis of allocation and determine the average cost per lot.
    (Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Exercise 22-13B Joint product costs assigned L.O. C4 [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.] Pike Seafood Company purchases lobsters and processes them into tails and flakes. It sells the lobster tails for $20 per pound and the flakes for $15 per pound. On average, 100 pounds of lobster are processed into 57 pounds of tails and 24 pounds of flakes, with 19 pounds of waste. Assume that the company purchased 3,000 pounds of lobster for $6.00 per pound and processed the lobsters with an additional labor cost of $1,800. No materials or labor costs are assigned to the waste. The company sold 1,510 pounds of tails and 710 pounds of flakes. 1. What is the allocated cost of the sold items? The company allocates joint costs on a value basis.
    (Round your cost per pound to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Cost of goods sold Lobster tails Lobster flakes Exercise 22-13B Part 2 2. What is the allocated cost of the ending inventory? The company allocates joint costs on a value basis.
    (Round your cost per pound to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Cost of the ending inventory Lobster tails Lobster flakes Problem 22-1A Allocation of building occupancy costs to departments L.O. P1 [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.] City Bank has several departments that occupy both floors of a two-story building. The departmental accounting system has a single account, Building Occupancy Cost, in its ledger. The types and amounts of occupancy costs recorded in this account for the current period follow.

    Depreciation Building

    $

    18,000

    Interest Building mortgage

    27,000

    Taxes Building and land

    8,000

    Gas (heating) expense

    2,500

    Lighting expense

    3,000

    Maintenance expense

    5,500

    Total occupancy cost

    $

    64,000

    The building has 4,000 square feet on each floor. In prior periods, the accounting manager merely divided the $64,000 occupancy cost by 8,000 square feet to find an average cost of $8 per square foot and then charged each department a building occupancy cost equal to this rate times the number of square feet that it occupied. Laura Diaz manages a first-floor department that occupies 1,000 square feet, and Lauren Wright manages a second-floor department that occupies 1,800 square feet of floor space. In discussing the departmental reports, the second-floor manager questions whether using the same rate per square foot for all departments makes sense because the first-floor space is more valuable. This manager also references a recent real estate study of average local rental costs for similar space that shows first-floor space worth $30 per square foot and second-floor space worth $20 per square foot (excluding costs for heating, lighting, and maintenance). Problem 22-1A Part 1 Required: Allocate occupancy costs to the Diaz and Wright departments using the current allocation method.
    (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Department

    Total

    Diazs Dept.

    Wright’s Dept.

    6.Problem 22-1A Part 2 Allocate the depreciation, interest, and taxes occupancy costs to the Diaz and Wright departments in proportion to the relative market values of the floor space. Allocate the heating, lighting, and maintenance costs to the Diaz and Wright departments in proportion to the square feet occupied (ignoring floor space market values).
    (Round your cost per Sq. ft rate to 2 decimal places and final answers to the nearest whole number. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    Department

    Total

    Diazs Dept.

    $

    Wright’s Dept.

    $

    Problem 22-3A Departmental income statements; forecasts L.O. P1 Time-To-See Company began operations in January 2011 with two operating (selling) departments and one service (office) department. Its departmental income statements follow.

    TIME-TO-SEE COMPANY
    Departmental Income Statements
    For Year Ended December 31, 2011

    Clock

    Mirror

    Combined

    Sales

    $

    122,500

    $

    52,500

    $

    175,000

    Cost of goods sold

    60,000

    32,000

    92,000

    Gross profit

    62,500

    20,500

    83,000

    Direct expenses

    Sales salaries

    20,000

    7,000

    27,000

    Advertising

    1,200

    500

    1,700

    Store supplies used

    900

    400

    1,300

    Depreciation Equipment

    1,500

    300

    1,800

    Total direct expenses

    23,600

    8,200

    31,800

    Allocated expenses

    Rent expense

    7,020

    3,780

    10,800

    Utilities expense

    2,600

    1,400

    4,000

    Share of office department expenses

    10,500

    4,500

    15,000

    Total allocated expenses

    20,120

    9,680

    29,800

    Total expenses

    43,720

    17,880

    61,600

    Net income

    $

    18,780

    $

    2,620

    $

    21,400

    Time-To-See plans to open a third department in January 2012 that will sell paintings. Management predicts that the new department will generate $35,000 in sales with a 55% gross profit margin and will require the following direct expenses: sales salaries, $8,000; advertising, $800; store supplies, $500; and equipment depreciation, $200. It will fit the new department into the current rented space by taking some square footage from the other two departments. When opened the new painting department will fill one-fifth of the space presently used by the clock department and one-sixth used by the mirror department. Management does not predict any increase in utilities costs, which are allocated to the departments in proportion to occupied space (or rent expense). The company allocates office department expenses to the operating departments in proportion to their sales. It expects the painting department to increase total office department expenses by $7,000. Since the painting department will bring new customers into the store, management expects sales in both the clock and mirror departments to increase by 7%. No changes for those departments gross profit percents or their direct expenses are expected except for store supplies used, which will increase in proportion to sales.
    Required Prepare departmental income statements that show the company s predicted results of operations for calendar year 2012 for the three operating (selling) departments and their combined totals.
    (Input all amounts as positive values. Round your percentage values to 1 decimal place, intermediate and final answers to the nearest whole dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

    jefferson jerome is interested in purchasing ac oart specialists inc ac an auction h 510107

    Jefferson Jerome is interested in purchasing Art Specialists, Inc. , an auction
    house. The company receives the right to sell art, but not to purchase the art
    themselves, for a 5% commission. Art Specialists rents office space and holds its
    auctions at local hotels.
    Art Specialists, Inc.

    Unadjusted Trial Balance

    December 31, 2009

    Cash

    $ 65,000.00

    Accounts receivable

    $ 36,000.00

    Supplies

    $ 8,000.00

    Equipment

    $ 53,000.00

    Accumulated Depreciation

    $ 14,500.00

    Accounts payable

    $ 5,600.00

    Dividends

    $ 50,000.00

    Capital stock

    $ 25,000.00

    Retained earnings

    $ 84,900.00

    Commission income

    $ 250,000.00

    Rent Expense

    $ 20,000.00

    Wages Expense

    $ 70,000.00

    Auction Expenses

    $ 56,000.00

    Depreciation Expenses

    $ 7,000.00

    Membership Expenses

    $ 6,000.00

    Supplies Expense

    $ 9,000.00

    TOTAL

    $ 380,000.00

    $ 380,000.00

    As Jefferson s accountant, you have received the trial balance above as well as
    the general ledger. The review has found the following errors:
    Year end bank reconciliation showed that the balance should be $40,000.
    A customer should have been billed for $25,000, but it was recorded as a
    cash payment of the commission income.
    Membership expenses are not related to the business and should be
    shown as a dividend to shareholder.
    Depreciation expense should be $3,500 for the year.
    Supplies expenses failed to record $2,000 in packing supplies used during
    the year.
    Accounts receivables that have not been billed $10,000.
    Required:
    1. Record the correcting entry.
    2. Prepare financial statements
    3. Current owners want $200,000 for the business. Jefferson does not want to pay more than Net Worth x 1.5. Should he buy?

    linda s lampshades started business on jan 1 2001 510108

    Linda s Lampshades started business on Jan. 1, 2001. They had the following inventory transactions:

    Journals – Jan. 2001

    Purchases

    Supplier Date Received Quantity Unit Cost Amount

    Donna 01/10/01 110 12.00 1320.00

    Thomas 01/15/01 160 14.00 2240.00

    Cindy 01/18/01 150 15.00 2250.00

    Sales

    Customer Date shipped Quantity Sel. Price Amount

    Norilene 01/16/01 200 25.00 5000.00

    1. Calculate the ending inventory, using the perpetual inventory method:

    A. Using FIFO

    B. Using LIFO

    C. Using Average Cost

    2. Prepare the following statement

    Using

    FIFO LIFO Average Cost

    Sales

    Cost of Sales

    Gross Profit

    international accounting standards are unusable from an investor s viewpoint and ma 510111

    2000 words

    International accounting standards are unusable from an investor s viewpoint and make global allocation of capital more complex instead of simplifying it . Chief financialofficers at large listed entities say. Millions of dollars have been spent adopting international financial reporting standards to help investors make like-for-like comparisons between companies inglobal capital markets. But CFO s say they are useless and have driven financial disclosuresto unmanageable levels…… Investors don t openthe 60-70 pages of IFRS account, theyrely on investor reports and management briefing to understand a company s numbers……. The criticism comes as the United States, the world s largest capital market, decideswhether to retire its domestic accounting standard (US GAAP) and adopt IFRS .Australian Financial Review, 6/2/2012.

    In the light of the above statement;

    1. Describe the IASBConceptual Framework s perspective of users and their decisions.

    2. Which qualitative characteristics of financial reporting, as per the IASB Conceptual

      Framework, appear not to be satisfied by current reporting practices as per IFRS.

    3. In your opinion, do corporate financial reports satisfy the central objective of financial

      reporting as identified in the Conceptual Framework? Discuss and give example to support your opinion.Assessment criteria

      2000 words max.

      Excellent (HD)

      Very Good (D)

      Good (C)

      Satisfactory (P)

      Unsatisfactory (F)

      1. Introduction (10)

      2. Body/Discussion (40)Criticalevaluation of topic

      3. Recommendation/s (10) Conclusion (5)

      4. Examples (10)

      6. Referencing, citations (5)

      7. Evidence of reading, quality and quantity (10)

      8. English expression, coherence, grammar and spelling. Logical flow of ideas

      APA referencing

    cone client had indicated that they were interested in purchasing 45 500 worth of p 510112

    One client had indicated that they were interested in purchasing $45,500 worth of products, so the bookkeeper recorded the transaction. However, the client has not actually committed to the purchase.

    The bookkeeper already corrected the sales account. However, the bookkeeper may have made a mistake when computing cost of goods sold. She included total production costs for 2012 and did not adjust ending inventory for the $45,500 worth of units left at the end of the year. The amount of ending inventory was determined using a physical count.

    Smith Company

    31-Dec-12

    Trial Balance (accounts in alphabetical order)

    Debit

    Credit

    Accounts payable

    67,000

    Accounts receivable

    24,500

    Cash

    30,000

    Common stock

    10,000

    Depreciation expense

    24,350

    Cost of goods sold

    234,000

    Equipment (net of depreciation)

    316,000

    Insurance

    1,400

    Inventory

    25,000

    Long-term debt

    145,000

    Marketing

    4,500

    Paid-in capital

    90,000

    Property taxes

    8,900

    Rent

    18,000

    Retained earnings

    Revenues

    406,000

    Salaries

    67,500

    Utilities

    6,700

    Total

    760,850

    718,000

    Required

    Prepare an income statement for the company in good format. Also, explain the adjustments separately. Always include the name of the company and the period covered in the title. Don’t forget dollar signs where appropriate. You do not need to include the balance sheet. Consequently, you will not need all the accounts listed above. How does the income or loss compare to the original income statement? Explain the importance of the matching concept

    1 a 95 coni dence interval for the mean income of shop assistants in a certain city 510114

    1 A 95% con dence interval for the mean income of shop assistants in a certain city
    is found to be ( 12,000, 15,000). Say in one sentence what this means. Would a
    99% con dence interval be better than a 95% one? (Say why/why not.)

    2. A charity believes that when it puts out an appeal for charitable donations the
    donations it receives will be normally distributed with a mean of 50 and a standard
    deviation of 6.
    a) Find the probability that the rst donation it receives will be less than 40.
    b) Find the value x such that 5% of donations are more than x.

    3. A consultant for Dell was investigating computer usage among students at a
    particular university. 200 undergraduates and 100 postgraduates were chosen at
    random and asked if they owned a laptop. It was found that 81 of the
    undergraduates and 63 of the postgraduates owned a laptop. The consultant
    calculated that 48% (144 out of 300) of the students interviewed owned a laptop.
    Explain, with reasons, whether the gure of 48% will be a good estimate of the
    proportion of all students who own a laptop.

    4. For a certain variable, the standard deviation in a large population is equal to 12.5.
    How big a sample is needed to be 95% sure that the sample mean is within 1.5 units
    of the population mean?
    (5 marks)
    5. a) What conclusions would you draw from a test which is signi cant at the 1%
    level?
    b) What conclusions would you draw from a test which is signi cant at the 10%
    level, but not the 5% level?
    c) An accounting rm wishes to test the claim that no more than 5% of a large
    number of transactions contains errors. In order to test this claim, they examine
    a random sample of 225 transactions and nd that exactly 20 of these are in
    error. What conclusion should the rm draw? Use a 5% signi cance level.

    6. A pro t-maximising retailer can obtain cameras from the manufacturer at a cost of
    50 per camera. The retailer has been selling the cameras at a price of 80, and
    at this price consumers have been buying 40 cameras per month. The retailer is
    planning to lower the price to stimulate sales and knows that for each 5 reduction
    in the price, 10 more cameras will be sold each month. Assuming price is a multiple
    of 5, what price should the retailer charge and what will the monthly pro ts be?

    7. Explain brie y the purpose of
    a) sampling
    b) model building.
    Discuss any advantages and limitations.

    8. The prospective operator of a shoe store has the opportunity to locate in an
    established and successful shopping centre. Alternatively, at lower cost, he can
    locate in a new centre, whose development has recently been completed. If the new
    centre turns out to be very successful, it is expected that annual store pro ts from
    location in it would be 130,000. If the centre is only moderately successful, annual
    pro ts would be 60,000. If the new centre is unsuccessful, an annual loss of 10,000
    would be expected. The pro ts to be expected from location in the established
    centre will also depend to some extent on the degree of success of the new centre,
    as potential customers may be drawn to it. If the new centre was unsuccessful,
    annual pro ts for the shoe store located in the established centre would be expected
    to be 90,000. However, if the new centre was moderately successful, the expected
    pro ts would be 70,000, while they would be only 30,000 if the new centre turned
    out to be very successful. All pro ts are inclusive of location cost. The probability
    that the new shopping centre will be very successful is 0.4 and the probability it will
    be moderately successful is also 0.4.
    a) Draw the decision tree for this problem.
    b) According to the expected monetary value criterion, where should the shoe
    store be located? Assume a risk-neutral decision-maker.
    c) Without calculating or drawing anything, explain brie y how a perfect forecast
    of shopping centre success changes the decision tree in a) .

    1 below you will find selected information in millions from coca cola co s 2012 annu 510115

    1. Below you will find selected information (in millions) from Coca-Cola Co. s 2012 Annual Report: Income Taxes Payable $471 Short-term Investments and Marketable Securities 8,109 Cash 8,442 Other non-current Liabilities 10,449 Common Stock 1,760 Receivables 4,812 Other Current Assets 2,973 Long-term Investments 10,448 Other Non-current Assets 3,585 Property, Plant and Equipment 23,486 Trademarks 6,527 Other Intangible Assets 20,810 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 53 Accumulated Depreciation 9,010 Accounts Payable 8,680 Short Term Notes Payable 17,874 Prepaid Expenses 2,781 Other Current Liabilities 796 Long-Term Liabilities 14,736 Paid-in-Capital in Excess of Par Value 11,379 Retained Earnings 55,038 Inventories 3,264 Treasury Stock 35,009 Other information taken from the Annual Report: Sales Revenue for 2012 $48,017 Cost of Goods Sold for 2012 19,053 Net Income for 2012 9,019 Inventory Balance on 12/31/11 3,092 Net Accounts Receivable Balance on 12/31/11 4,920 Total Assets on 12/31/11 79,974 Equity Balance on 12/31/11 31,921 Required:

    1. Using the information provided prepare a Balance Sheet. Separate the current assets from non-current assets and provide a total for each. Also separate the current liabilities from the non-current liabilities and provide a total for each.

    2. Using the Balance Sheet from your answer above calculate; Current Ratio, Days in Inventory, Average Collection Period, Return on Assets Ratio, Debt to Total Assets and Return on common stockholders equity ratio. (Make sure to show all your work) (Points : 36)

    2. The following selected data was retrieved from the Wal-Mart, Inc. financial statements for the year ending January 31, 2013: Accounts Payable $38,080 Accounts Receivable 6,768 Cash 7,781 Common Stock 3,952 Cost of Goods Sold 352,488 Income Tax Expense 7,981 Interest Expenses 2,064 Membership Revenues 3,048 Net Sales 466,114 Operating, Selling and Administrative Expenses 88,873 Retained Earnings 72,978 Required: Using the information provided above: 1. Prepare a multiple-step income statement 2. Calculate the Profit Margin, and Gross profit rate for the company. Be sure to provide the formula you are using, show your calculations, and discuss your findings/results. (Points : 36)

    3. Please review the following real-world Hewlett Packard Statement of Cash flows and address the 2 questions below: Cash flow from operating activities In millions In millions For the year ended 2012 For the year ended 2011 Net (loss) earnings $(12,650) $7,074 Depreciation and amortization 5,095 4,984 Impairment of goodwill and purchased intangible assets 18,035 885 Stock-based compensation expense 635 685 Provision for doubtful accounts 142 81 Provision for inventory 277 217 Restructuring charges 2,266 645 Deferred taxes on earnings (711) 166 Excess tax benefit from stock-based competition (12) (163) Other, net 265 (46) Accounts and financing receivables 1,269 (227) Inventory 890 (1,252) Accounts payable (1,414) 275 Taxes on earnings (320) 610 Restructuring (840) (1,002) Other assets and liabilities (2,356) (293) Net cash provided by operating activities 10,571 12,639 Cash flows from investing activities: Investment in property, plant, and equipment (3,706) (4,539) Proceeds from sale of property, plant, and equipment 617 999 Purchases of available-for-sale securities and other investments (972) (96) Maturities and sales of available-for-sale securities and other investment 662 68 Payments in connection with business acquisitions, net of cash acquired (141) (10,480) Proceeds from business divestiture, net 87 89 Net cash used in investing activities (3,453) (13,959) Cash flow from financing activities: (Payments) issuance of commercial paper and notes payable, net (2,775) (1,270) Issuance of debt 5,154 11,942 Payment of debt (4,333) (2,336) Issuance of common stock under employee stock plans 716 896 Repurchase of common stock (1,619) (10,117) Excess tax benefit from stock-based compensation 12 163 Cash dividends paid (1,015) (844) Net cash used in financing activities (3,860) (1,566) Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents 3,258 (2,886) Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period 8,043 10,929 Cash and cash equivalents at end of period $11,301 $8,043 Required: 1) Please calculate the percentage increase or decrease in cash for the operating, investing, and financing sections and explain the major reasons for the increase or decrease for each of these sections. 2) Please calculate the free cash flow for 2012 and explain the meaning of this ratio.

    4. You are CFO of Goforit, Inc., a wholesale distribution company specializing in emerging technologies. Your CEO is a brilliant marketer, but relies on you to explain issues and choices in accounting and finance. She has heard from other members of a CEO organization to which she belongs that a company s net income can vary widely depending on which accounting choices are made from the GAAP menu.
    Assuming the goal is to maximize net income, choose an accounting treatment from each of the following scenarios, and explain to your CEO why the choice will produce the desired effect on reported Net Income for the current year. Include in your answer the effect of the choice on both the income statement and balance sheet.
    Required:

    a. Goforit carries significant electronics inventory in a competitive environment where prices are actually falling. Which inventory valuation method would you choose LIFO, FIFO, or average cost? Assume that unit purchases exceed unit sales.

    b. Goforit has a large investment in warehouse equipment including conveyor belts, forklifts, and automated packaging systems. Which depreciation method would you choose: Straight line (SL) or double declining balance (DDB)?

    (Points : 36)

    5. Please review the following real-world ratios for Johnson & Johnson and Pfizer for the year ended 2012 and address the 2 questions below.

    Ratio Name
    Johnson & Johnson
    Pfizer
    Profit margin
    16.1%

    1 the information below depicts 2013 summary for match company 2 lancaster inc s dec 510116

    1. 1. The information below depicts 2013 summary for Match Company. The company has two operations, that is, manufacturing and wholesale. The amounts are in thousands.

    Sales revenue $25,000
    Cost of goods sold 16,000
    Interest revenue 70,000
    Selling and administrative expenses 4,700
    Goodwill write-off 820
    2014 Income taxes 1,244
    Gain on sale of investments (This is normal and recurring) 110
    Loss due to flood damage, net of tax (This is extraordinary item) 390
    Loss on disposition of wholesale division, net of tax 440
    Loss on operations of wholesale division, net of tax 90

    Match Company has 500,000 shares of common stock outstanding throughout the year. The company decided to discontinue its entire wholesale operations. On August 31, 2013, Match Company sold the wholesale operations to Reed Company.

    Required:

    Prepare a multi-step income statement and earnings per share for the Match Company.

    L 2. Lancaster Inc. s December 31, 2013 balance sheet accounts are copied below:

    Cash $20,000

    Accounts receivable 21,200

    Accounts payable 30,000
    Long-term notes payable 41,000

    Long-term Investments 32,000

    Common stock 100,000
    Property, plant, and equipment assets (net of depreciation) 81,000

    Retained earnings 23,200

    Land 40,000

    During 2014, the following transactions occurred. Lancaster Inc.

    1. Purchased a tract of land for $18,000 cash.

    2. Sold part of its $32,000 investment for $15,000. This transaction resulted in a gain of $3,400. The investment was classified as available-for-sale.

    3. Issued additional $20,000 in common stock. The issue was at par.

    4. Declared and paid dividends of $8,200 to stockholders.

    5. Purchased land through the issuance of $30,000 in bonds.

    6. Retired Long-term notes payable with the face value of $16,000. The company paid $16,000 cash.

    7. Recorded depreciation expense of $11,000.

    Lancaster s Net income for 2014 was $32,000.

    Balances on December 31, 2014 are below:

    Cash $32,000

    Accounts Receivable $41,600

    Accounts Payable $30,000

    Required:

    a. Prepare a statement of cash flows for year ended December 31, 2014. Use the indirect method for cash flows from operating activities.

    b. How can users of financial statements utilize statement of cash flows in making informed decisions?

    1 tco a below you will find selected information in millions from coca cola co s 201 510117

    1. (TCO A) Below you will find selected information (in millions) from Coca-Cola Co. s 2012 Annual Report:

    Income Taxes Payable

    $471

    Short-term Investments and Marketable Securities

    8,109

    Cash

    8,442

    Other non-current Liabilities

    10,449

    Common Stock

    1,760

    Receivables

    4,812

    Other Current Assets

    2,973

    Long-term Investments

    10,448

    Other Non-current Assets

    3,585

    Property, Plant and Equipment

    23,486

    Trademarks

    6,527

    Other Intangible Assets

    20,810

    Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

    53

    Accumulated Depreciation

    9,010

    Accounts Payable

    8,680

    Short Term Notes Payable

    17,874

    Prepaid Expenses

    2,781

    Other Current Liabilities

    796

    Long-Term Liabilities

    14,736

    Paid-in-Capital in Excess of Par Value

    11,379

    Retained Earnings

    55,038

    Inventories

    3,264

    Treasury Stock

    35,009

    Other information taken from the Annual Report:

    Sales Revenue for 2012

    $48,017

    Cost of Goods Sold for 2012

    19,053

    Net Income for 2012

    9,019

    Inventory Balance on 12/31/11

    3,092

    Net Accounts Receivable Balance on 12/31/11

    4,920

    Total Assets on 12/31/11

    79,974

    Equity Balance on 12/31/11

    31,921

    Required:
    1. Using the information provided prepare a Balance Sheet. Separate the current assets from non-current assets and provide a total for each. Also separate the current liabilities from the non-current liabilities and provide a total for each.
    2. Using the Balance Sheet from your answer above calculate; Current Ratio, Days in Inventory, Average Collection Period, Return on Assets Ratio, Debt to Total Assets and Return on common stockholders equity ratio. (Make sure to show all your work)

    (Points : 36)

    1 tco a below you will find selected information in millions from coca cola co s 201 510118

    1. Below you will find selected information (in millions) from Coca-Cola Co. s 2012 Annual Report: Income Taxes Payable $471 Short-term Investments and Marketable Securities 8,109 Cash 8,442 Other non-current Liabilities 10,449 Common Stock 1,760 Receivables 4,812 Other Current Assets 2,973 Long-term Investments 10,448 Other Non-current Assets 3,585 Property, Plant and Equipment 23,486 Trademarks 6,527 Other Intangible Assets 20,810 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 53 Accumulated Depreciation 9,010 Accounts Payable 8,680 Short Term Notes Payable 17,874 Prepaid Expenses 2,781 Other Current Liabilities 796 Long-Term Liabilities 14,736 Paid-in-Capital in Excess of Par Value 11,379 Retained Earnings 55,038 Inventories 3,264 Treasury Stock 35,009 Other information taken from the Annual Report: Sales Revenue for 2012 $48,017 Cost of Goods Sold for 2012 19,053 Net Income for 2012 9,019 Inventory Balance on 12/31/11 3,092 Net Accounts Receivable Balance on 12/31/11 4,920 Total Assets on 12/31/11 79,974 Equity Balance on 12/31/11 31,921 Required:

    1. Using the information provided prepare a Balance Sheet. Separate the current assets from non-current assets and provide a total for each. Also separate the current liabilities from the non-current liabilities and provide a total for each.

    2. Using the Balance Sheet from your answer above calculate; Current Ratio, Days in Inventory, Average Collection Period, Return on Assets Ratio, Debt to Total Assets and Return on common stockholders equity ratio. (Make sure to show all your work) (Points : 36)

    2. The following selected data was retrieved from the Wal-Mart, Inc. financial statements for the year ending January 31, 2013: Accounts Payable $38,080 Accounts Receivable 6,768 Cash 7,781 Common Stock 3,952 Cost of Goods Sold 352,488 Income Tax Expense 7,981 Interest Expenses 2,064 Membership Revenues 3,048 Net Sales 466,114 Operating, Selling and Administrative Expenses 88,873 Retained Earnings 72,978 Required: Using the information provided above: 1. Prepare a multiple-step income statement 2. Calculate the Profit Margin, and Gross profit rate for the company. Be sure to provide the formula you are using, show your calculations, and discuss your findings/results. (Points : 36)

    3. Please review the following real-world Hewlett Packard Statement of Cash flows and address the 2 questions below: Cash flow from operating activities In millions In millions For the year ended 2012 For the year ended 2011 Net (loss) earnings $(12,650) $7,074 Depreciation and amortization 5,095 4,984 Impairment of goodwill and purchased intangible assets 18,035 885 Stock-based compensation expense 635 685 Provision for doubtful accounts 142 81 Provision for inventory 277 217 Restructuring charges 2,266 645 Deferred taxes on earnings (711) 166 Excess tax benefit from stock-based competition (12) (163) Other, net 265 (46) Accounts and financing receivables 1,269 (227) Inventory 890 (1,252) Accounts payable (1,414) 275 Taxes on earnings (320) 610 Restructuring (840) (1,002) Other assets and liabilities (2,356) (293) Net cash provided by operating activities 10,571 12,639 Cash flows from investing activities: Investment in property, plant, and equipment (3,706) (4,539) Proceeds from sale of property, plant, and equipment 617 999 Purchases of available-for-sale securities and other investments (972) (96) Maturities and sales of available-for-sale securities and other investment 662 68 Payments in connection with business acquisitions, net of cash acquired (141) (10,480) Proceeds from business divestiture, net 87 89 Net cash used in investing activities (3,453) (13,959) Cash flow from financing activities: (Payments) issuance of commercial paper and notes payable, net (2,775) (1,270) Issuance of debt 5,154 11,942 Payment of debt (4,333) (2,336) Issuance of common stock under employee stock plans 716 896 Repurchase of common stock (1,619) (10,117) Excess tax benefit from stock-based compensation 12 163 Cash dividends paid (1,015) (844) Net cash used in financing activities (3,860) (1,566) Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents 3,258 (2,886) Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period 8,043 10,929 Cash and cash equivalents at end of period $11,301 $8,043 Required: 1) Please calculate the percentage increase or decrease in cash for the operating, investing, and financing sections and explain the major reasons for the increase or decrease for each of these sections. 2) Please calculate the free cash flow for 2012 and explain the meaning of this ratio.

    4. You are CFO of Goforit, Inc., a wholesale distribution company specializing in emerging technologies. Your CEO is a brilliant marketer, but relies on you to explain issues and choices in accounting and finance. She has heard from other members of a CEO organization to which she belongs that a company s net income can vary widely depending on which accounting choices are made from the GAAP menu.

    Assuming the goal is to maximize net income, choose an accounting treatment from each of the following scenarios, and explain to your CEO why the choice will produce the desired effect on reported Net Income for the current year. Include in your answer the effect of the choice on both the income statement and balance sheet.

    Required:

    a. Goforit carries significant electronics inventory in a competitive environment where prices are actually falling. Which inventory valuation method would you choose LIFO, FIFO, or average cost? Assume that unit purchases exceed unit sales.

    b. Goforit has a large investment in warehouse equipment including conveyor belts, forklifts, and automated packaging systems. Which depreciation method would you choose: Straight line (SL) or double declining balance (DDB)?

    (Points : 36)

    5. Please review the following real-world ratios for Johnson & Johnson and Pfizer for the year ended 2012 and address the 2 questions below.

    Ratio Name

    Johnson & Johnson

    Pfizer

    Profit margin

    16.1%

    24.7%

    Inventory turnover ratio

    3.1

    1.7

    Average collection period

    59.4 days

    69.1 days

    Cash debt coverage ratio

    .27

    .16

    Debt to Total assets

    46.6%

    127.5%

    Required:

    ) Please explain the meaning of each of the Pfizer ratios above.

    2) Please state which company performed better for each ratio.

    (Points : 36)

    3 adjusting entries and financial statements the following information pertains to f 510124

    3. Adjusting entries and financial statements. The following information pertains to Fixation Enterprises: The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one third of this amount had been earned. Fixation provided $2,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31. Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,650. The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period. The company paid $18,000 on October 1 of the current year to Vantage Property Management. The payment was for 6 months rent of Fixation s headquarters, beginning on November 1. Fixation s accounting year ends on December 31.

    Instructions Analyze the five preceding cases individually and determine the following: a. The type of adjusting entry needed at year-end (Use the following codes: A, adjust ment of a prepaid expense; B, adjustment of an unearned revenue; C, adjustment to record an accrued expense; or D, adjustment to record an accrued revenue). b. The year-end journal entry to adjust the accounts. c. The income statement impact of each adjustment (e.g., increases total revenues by $500).

    4. Adjusting entries. You have been retained to examine the records of Kathy s Day Care Center as of December 31, 20X3, the close of the current reporting period. In the course of your examination, you discover the following: On January 1, 20X3, the Supplies account had a balance of $2,350. During the year, $5,520 worth of supplies was purchased, and a balance of $1,620 remained unused on December 31. Unrecorded interest owed to the center totaled $275 as of December 31. All clients pay tuition in advance, and their payments are credited to the Unearned Tuition Revenue account. The account was credited for $75,500 on August 31. With the exception of $15,500 all amounts were for the current semester ending on December 31. Depreciation on the school s van was $3,000 for the year. On August 1, the center began to pay rent in 6-month installments of $21,000. Kathy wrote a check to the owner of the building and recorded the check in Pre paid Rent, a new account. Two salaried employees earn $400 each for a 5-day week. The employees are paid every Friday, and December 31 falls on a Thursday. Kathy s Day Care paid insurance premiums as follows, each time debiting Pre paid Insurance:

    Date Paid Policy No. Length of Policy Amount Feb. 1, 20X2 1033MCM19 1 year $540 Jan. 1, 20X3 7952789HP 1 year 912 Aug. 1, 20X3 XQ943675ST 2 years 840 Instructions

    The center s accounts were last adjusted on December 31, 20X2. Prepare the adjusting entries necessary under the accrual basis of accounting.

    5. Bank reconciliation and entries. The following information was taken from the accounting records of Palmetto Company for the month of January: Balance per bank $6,150 Balance per company records $3,580 Bank service charge for January $20 Deposits in transit $940 Interest on note collected by bank $100 Note collected by bank $1,000 NSF check returned by the bank with the bank statement $650 Outstanding checks $3,080

    Instructions: a. Prepare Palmetto s January bank reconciliation. b. Prepare any necessary journal entries for Palmetto.

    6. Direct write-off method. Harrisburg Company, which began business in early 20X7, reported $40,000 of accounts receivable on the December 31, 20X7, balance sheet. Included in this amount was $550 for a sale made to Tom Mattingly in July. On January 4, 20X8, the company learned that Mattingly had filed for personal bankruptcy. Harrisburg uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectibles.

    a. Prepare the journal entry needed to write off Mattingly s account. b. Comment on the ability of the direct write-off method to value receivables on the year-end balance sheet.

    7. Allowance method: analysis of receivables. At a January 20X2 meeting, the presi dent of Sonic Sound directed the sales staff to move some product this year. The president noted that the credit evaluation department was being disbanded be cause it had restricted the company s growth. Credit decisions would now be made by the sales staff. By the end of the year, Sonic had generated significant gains in sales, and the president was very pleased. The following data were provided by the accounting department: 20X2 20X1 Sales $23,987,000 $8,423,000 Accounts Receivable, 12/31 12,444,000 1,056,000 Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, 12/31 ? 23,000 cr.

    The $12,444,000 receivables balance was aged as follows: Age of Receivable Amount Percentage of Accounts Expected to Be Collected Under 31 days $5,321,000 99% 31260 days 3,890,000 90 61290 days 1,067,000 80 Over 90 days 2,166,000 60

    Assume that no accounts were written off during 20X2. Instructions

    a. Estimate the amount of Uncollectible Accounts as of December 31, 20X2. b. What is the company s Uncollectible Accounts expense for 20X2? c. Compute the net realizable value of Accounts Receivable at the end of 20X1 and 20X2. d. Compute the net realizable value at the end of 20X1 and 20X2 as a percentage of respective year-end receivables balances. Analyze your findings and comment on the president s decision to close the credit evaluation department.

    3 hinds industries inc is a manufacturer of soup and condiment products under its ow 510125

    1. Hinds Industries, Inc. is a manufacturer of soup and condiment products under its own standard and premium labels. The company has been in business for many years, and is a household name . Their Denver soup plant has a capacity of 120,000 cases/month, but has been operating at a normal volume of 75,000 cases/month Hinds has been approached by Mondo Mart, a large discount retailer, about producing a line of soups under a Mondo Mart house label. Mondo would initially place an order for 10,000 cases/month, with the understanding that the order will be expanded if the product is successful. The initial order would be for a reduced line of four relatively simple, standard-label soups, following Hinds normal recipes.

    All of these soups have essentially the same production cost of $27 per case, as follows: ingredients and packaging, $14; direct labor, $2; overhead, $11. The overhead is 65% fixed manufacturing costs, 20% variable manufacturing costs, and 15% allocated general corporate overhead. Hinds would incur $2,000/month additional setup costs if the order is accepted. Packaging would cost ten cents/case less because of a cheaper label used by Mondo.
    Hinds normally sells these soups for $34/case. Mondo Mart has offered $23/case, arguing that the steep discount is necessary for them to price the product in conformity with their pricing philosophy and customer expectations.
    The regional marketing director is inclined to reject the offer, because it is below cost, and therefore Hinds will lose money on the contract. The ultimate decision is up to the regional director of operations. Discuss the factors that the operations director should consider in making the decision.

    3a auerbach enterprises 510126

    CASE 3A AUERBACH ENTERPRISES

    Auerbach Enterprises manufactures air conditioners for automobiles and trucks manufactured throughout North America. The company designs its products with flexibility to accommodate many makes and models of automobiles and trucks. The company s two main products are MaxiFlow and Alaska. MaxiFlow uses a few complex fabricated parts, but these have been found easy to assemble and test. On the other hand, Alaska uses many standard parts but has a complex assembly and testing process. MaxiFlow requires direct materials costs which total $135 per unit, while Alaska s direct materials requirements total $110 per unit. Direct labor costs per unit are $75 for MaxiFlow and $95 for Alaska.

    Auerbach Enterprises uses machine hours as the cost driver to assign overhead costs to the air conditioners. The company has used a company-wide predetermined overhead rate in past years, but the new controller, Bennie Leon, is considering the use of departmental overhead rates beginning with the next year.

    The following planning information is available for the next year for each the four manufacturing departments within the company:

    Overhead Machine

    Costs Hours

    Radiator parts fabrication………….. $ 80,000 10,000

    Radiator assembly, weld, and test…. 100,000 20,000

    Compressor parts fabrication………. 120,000 5,000

    Compressor assembly and test…….. 180,000 45,000

    Total $480,000 80,000

    Normally, the air conditioners are produced in batch sizes of 20 at a time. A production batch of 20 units requires the following number of hours in each department:

    MaxiFlow Alaska

    Radiator parts fabrication……….. 28 16

    Radiator assembly, weld, and test……. 30 74

    Compressor parts fabrication……… 32 8

    Compressor assembly and test……… 26 66

    Total 116 164

    Required:

    1. Compute the departmental overhead rates using machine hours as the cost driver.

    2. Compute a company-wide overhead rate using machine hours as the cost driver.

    3. Compute the overhead costs per batch of MaxiFlow and Alaska assuming:

    (a) The company-wide rate.

    (b) The departmental rates.

    4. Compute the total costs per unit of MaxiFlow and Alaska assuming:

    (a) The company-wide rate.

    (b)

    The departmental rates.

    5. Is one product affected more than the other by use of departmental rates rather than a company-wide rate? Why or why not?

    assignment requirment

    In this case, you are provided the overhead cost data for the Auerbach
    Enterprises. Management needs advice in determining how to allocate these costs
    utilizing a job order costing system either department-wide or company-wide.
    Address Questions 1through 5 located at the end of the case. Based on the case
    questions, you are required to provide a three to five double-spaced written
    report addressing management s concerns and providing recommendations. The
    written report should be properly formatted according to APA guidelines and
    demonstrate research and critical thinking skills. Conclusions and
    recommendations should be supported by at least 2 scholarly sources from the
    Ashford Library or other external sources, excluding the textbook.

    For Questions 1 through 4, you will need to complete several calculations. Be
    sure to label and clearly identify your work to demonstrate your understanding
    of the concept even if you arrive at the incorrect answer. The calculations
    should be included as part of your analysis and written recommendations required
    for submission.

    For Question 5, fully address management s concerns as part of your written
    analysis and recommendation using the new or the previous calculations to
    support your recommendation/explanation. The written analysis should be
    supported by at least 2 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.

    Week 2 Written Assignment should:

    Demonstrate graduate level work including appropriate research and critical
    thinking skills.

    • Be presented as a written analysis (not a question/answer format).
    • Incorporate case questions into the overall analysis.
    • Follow APA formatting guidelines including title page, reference page and
      in-text citations.
    • Consists of three to five double-spaced pages of content.
    • Provide at least 2 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.

    a 5 abby ellen opened abby s toy house as her newly hired accountant your tasks are 510129

    A-5 Abby Ellen opened Abby s Toy House. As her newly hired accountant, your tasks are to:

    1. Journalize the transactions for the month of March.

    2. Record to subsidiary ledgers and post to the general ledger as appropriate.

    3. Total and rule the journals.

    4. Prepare a schedule of accounts receivable and a schedule of accounts payable.

    The following is a partial chart of accounts for Abby s Toy House:

    Assets Revenue

    110 Cash 410 Toy Sales

    112 Accounts receivable 412 Sales returns and allowances

    114 Prepaid Rent 414 Sales discounts

    121 Delivery Truck

    Cost of Goods

    Liabilities 510 Toy Purchases

    210 Accounts Payable 512 Purchase Returns and Allowances

    Owner s Equity 514 Purchase Discount

    310 A. Ellen, Capital

    Expenses

    610 Salaries Expense

    612 Cleaning Expense

    200X

    Mar. 1 Abby Ellen invested $8,000 in the toy store.

    1 Paid three months rent in advance, check no. 1, $3,000

    1 Purchased merchandise from Earl Miller Company on account, $4,000, invoice no. 410, dated March 2; terms 2/10, n/30.

    3 Sold merchandise to Bill Burton on account, $1,000, invoice no. 1; terms 2/10, n/30.

    6 Sold merchandise to Jim Rex on account, $700, invoice no. 2; terms 2/10, n/30.

    8 Purchased merchandise from Earl Miller Co. on account, $1,200, invoice no. 415, dated March 9; terms 2/10, n/30.

    9 Sold merchandise to Bill Burton on account, $600, invoice no. 3; terms 2/10, n/30.

    9 Paid cleaning service, check no. 2, $300.

    10 Jim Rex returned merchandise that cost $300 to Abby s Toy House. Abby issued credit memorandum no. 1 to Jim Rex for $300.

    10 Purchased merchandise from Minnie Katz on account, $4,000, invoice no. 311, dated March 11; terms 1/15, n/60.

    12 Paid Earl Miller Co. invoice no. 410, dated March 2, check no. 3.

    13 Sold $1,300 of toy merchandise for cash.

    13 Paid salaries, $600, check no. 4

    14 Returned merchandise to Minnie Katz in the amount of $1,000. Abby s Toy House issued a debit memorandum no. 1 to Minnie Katz.

    15 Sold merchandise for $4,000 cash.

    16 Received payment from Jim Rex, invoice no. 2 (less returned merchandise) less discount.

    16 Bill Burton paid invoice no.1.

    16 Sold toy merchandise to Amy Rose on account, $4,000, invoice no. 4; terms 2/10, n/30.

    20 Purchased delivery truck on account from Sam Katz Garage, $3,000, invoice3 no. 111, dated March 21 (no discount).

    22 Sold to Bill Burton merchandise on account, $900, invoice no. 5; terms 2/10, n/30.

    23 Paid Minnie Katz balance owed, check no. 5.

    24 Sold toy merchandise on account to Amy Rose, $1,100, invoice no. 6; terms 2/10, n/30.

    25 Purchased toy merchandise, $600, check no. 6.

    26 Purchased toy merchandise from Woody Smith on account6, $4,800, invoice no. 211, dated March 27; terms 2/10, n/30.

    28 Bill Burton paid invoice no. 5, dated March 22.

    28 Amy Rose paid invoice no. 6, dated March 24.

    28 Abby invested an additional $5,000 in the business.

    28 Purchased merchandise from Earl Miller Co., $1,400, invoice no. 436, dated March 29; terms 2/10, n/30.

    30 Paid Earl Miller Co. invoice no. 436, check no. 7.

    30 Sold merchandise to Bonnie Flow Company on account, $3,000, invoice no. 7; terms 2/10, n/30.

    ac505 managerial accounting practice final 510130

    1. Use the following information to determine the gross margin for Pacific States Manufacturing for the year just ended (all amounts are in thousands ($000) of dollars:

    Sales $31,800
    Purchases of direct materials 7,000
    Direct labor 5,000
    Work in process inventory, 1/1 800
    Work in process inventory, 12/31 3,000
    Finished goods inventory, 1/1 4,000
    Finished goods inventory, 12/31 5,300
    Accounts payable, 1/1 1,700
    Accounts payable, 12/31 1,500
    Direct materials inventory, 1/1 6,000
    Direct materials inventory, 12/31 1,000
    Indirect labor 600
    Indirect materials used 500
    Utilities expense, factory 1,900
    Depreciation on factory equipment 3,500

    Gross Margin _________________

    2. Which costs will change with a decrease in activity within the relevant range?
    A) Total fixed costs and total variable cost.
    B) Unit fixed costs and total variable cost.
    C) Unit variable cost and unit fixed cost.
    D) Unit fixed cost and total fixed cost.

    3. An increase in the activity level within the relevant range results in:
    A) an increase in fixed cost per unit.
    B) a proportionate increase in total fixed costs.
    C) an unchanged fixed cost per unit.
    D) a decrease in fixed cost per unit.

    Use the following

    to answer questions 4-5:

    The following information has been provided by the Evans Retail Stores, Inc., for the first quarter of the year:

    Sales $350,000
    Variable selling expense 35,000
    Fixed selling expenses 25,000
    Cost of goods sold (variable) 160,000
    Fixed administrative expenses 55,000
    Variable administrative expenses 15,000

    4. The gross margin of Evans Retail Stores, Inc. for the first quarter is:
    A) $210,000.
    B) $140,000.
    C) $220,000.
    D) $190,000.

    5. The contribution margin of Evans Retail Stores, Inc. for the first quarter is:
    A) $300,000.
    B) $140,000.
    C) $210,000.
    D) $190,000.

    6. The total contribution margin decreases if sales volume remains the same and:
    A) fixed expenses increase.
    B) fixed expenses decrease.
    C) variable expense per unit increases.
    D) variable expense per unit decreases.

    7. A company has provided the following data:
    Sales 3,000 units
    Sales price $70 per unit
    Variable cost $50 per unit
    Fixed cost $25,000

    If the sales volume decreases by 25%, the variable cost per unit increases by 15%, and all other factors remain the same, net income will:
    A) decrease by $31,875.
    B) decrease by $15,000.
    C) increase by $20,625.
    D) decrease by $3,125.

    8. Wallace, Inc., prepared the following budgeted data based on a sales forecast of $6,000,000:

    Variable Fixed
    Direct materials $1,600,000
    Direct labor 1,400,000

    Factory overhead 600,000 $ 900,000

    Selling expenses 240,000 360,000

    Administrative expenses 60,000 140,000

    Total $3,900,000 $1,400,000

    aaaaaaaa aaaaaaaa

    What would be the amount of sales dollars at the break-even point?

    A) $2,250,000

    B) $3,500,000

    C) $4,000,000

    D) $5,300,000

    9. The following information pertains to Rica Company:

    Sales (50,000 units) $1,000,000
    Manufacturing costs:
    Variable 340,000
    Fixed 70,000
    Selling and admin. expenses:
    Variable 10,000
    Fixed 60,000

    How much is Rica’s break-even point in number of units?
    A) 9,848
    B) 10,000
    C) 18,571
    D) 26,000

    Use the following to answer questions 10-11:

    Dorian Company produces and sells a single product. The product sells for $60 per unit and has a contribution margin ratio of 40%. The company’s monthly fixed expenses are $28,800.

    10. The variable expense per unit is:
    A) $31.20.
    B) $24.00.
    C) $36.00.
    D) $28.80.

    11. The break-even point in sales dollars is:
    A) $48,000.
    B) $72,000.
    C) $28,800.
    D) $0.

    12. An allocated portion of fixed manufacturing overhead is included in product costs under:
    Absorption Variable
    Costing costing
    A) No No
    B) No Yes
    C) Yes No
    D) Yes Yes

    Use the following to answer questions 13-16:

    Farron Company, which has only one

    product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

    Selling price $92

    Units in beginning inventory 0
    Units produced 8,700
    Units sold 8,300
    Units in ending inventory 400

    Variable costs per unit:
    Direct materials $13
    Direct labor 55
    Variable manufacturing overhead 1
    Variable selling and administrative 5

    Fixed costs:
    Fixed manufacturing overhead $130,500
    Fixed selling and administrative 8,300

    13. What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?
    A) $69
    B) $84
    C) $89
    D) $74

    14. What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?
    A) $74
    B) $89
    C) $69
    D) $84

    15. What is the net income for the month under variable costing?
    A) $10,600
    B) ($17,000)
    C) $16,600
    D) $6,000

    16. What is the net income for the month under absorption costing?
    A) ($17,000)
    B) $16,600
    C) $6,000
    D) $10,600

    17. Orion Corporation is preparing a cash budget for the six months beginning January 1. Shown below are the company’s expected collection pattern and the budgeted sales for the period.

    Expected collection pattern:
    65% collected in the month of sale
    20% collected in the month after sale
    10% collected in the second month after sale
    4% collected in the third month after sale
    1% uncollectible

    Budgeted sales:
    January $160,000
    February 185,000
    March

    190,000

    April 170,000

    May 200,000

    June 180,000

    The estimated total cash collections during April from sales and accounts receivables would be:

    A) $155,900.
    B) $167,000.
    C) $171,666.
    D) $173,400.

    18. Avril Company makes collections on sales according to the following schedule:

    30% in the month of sale
    60% in the month following sale
    8% in the second month following sale

    The following sales are expected:

    Expected Sales
    January $100,000
    February 120,000
    March 110,000

    Cash collections in March should be budgeted to be:
    A) $110,000.
    B) $110,800.
    C) $105,000.
    D) $113,000.

    19. A labor efficiency variance resulting from the use of poor quality materials should be charged to:
    A) the production manager.
    B) the purchasing agent.
    C) manufacturing overhead.
    D) the engineering department.

    20. An unfavorable labor efficiency variance indicates that:
    A) The actual labor rate was higher than the standard labor rate.
    B) The labor rate variance must also be unfavorable.
    C) Actual labor hours worked exceeded standard labor hours for the production level achieved.
    D) Overtime labor was used during the period.

    21. A favorable labor rate variance indicates that
    A) actual hours exceed standard hours.
    B) standard hours exceed actual hours.
    C) the actual rate exceeds the standard

    rate.

    D) the standard rate exceeds the actual rate.

    Use the following to answer questions 22-25:

    Cole laboratories makes and sells a lawn fertilizer called Fastgro. The company has developed standard costs for one bag of Fastgro as follows:
    Standard
    Standard Quantity Cost per Bag
    Direct material 20 pounds $8.00
    Direct labor 0.1 hours 1.10
    Variable manuf. overhead 0.1 hours .40

    The company had no beginning inventories of any kind on Jan. 1. Variable manufacturing overhead is applied to production on the basis of direct labor hours. During January, the following activity was recorded by the company:

    Production of Fastgro: 4,000 bags
    Direct materials purchased: 85,000 pounds at a cost of $32,300
    Direct labor worked: 390 hours at a cost of $4,875
    Variable manufacturing overhead incurred: $1,475
    Inventory of direct materials on Jan. 31: 3,000 pounds

    22. The materials price variance for January is:
    A) $1,640 F.
    B) $1,640 U.
    C) $1,700 F.
    D) $1,300 U.

    23. The materials quantity variance for January is:
    A) $800 U.
    B) $300 U.
    C) $300 F.
    D) $750 F.

    24. The labor rate variance for January is:
    A) $475 F.
    B) $475 U.
    C) $585 F.
    D) $585 U.

    25. The labor efficiency variance for January is:
    A) $475 F.
    B) $350 U.
    C) $130 U.
    D) $110 F.

    Use the following to answer questions 26-27:

    The following selected data pertain to Beck Co.’s Beam Division for last year:

    Sales $400,000
    Variable

    expenses $100,000

    Traceable fixed expenses $250,000

    Average operating assets $200,000

    Minimum required rate of return 20%

    26. How much is the residual income?
    A) $40,000
    B) $50,000
    C) $10,000
    D) $80,000

    27. How much is the return on the investment?
    A) 25%
    B) 20%
    C) 12.5%
    D) 40%

    28. One of the dangers of allocating common fixed costs to a product line is that such allocations can make the line appear less profitable than it really is.
    A) True
    B) False

    29. In responsibility accounting, each segment in an organization should be charged with the costs for which it is responsible and over which it has control plus its share of common organizational costs.

    A) True
    B) False

    30. Some managers believe that residual income is superior to return on investment as a means of measuring performance, since it encourages the manager to make investment decisions that are more consistent with the interests of the company as a whole.

    A) True
    B) False

    31. The performance of the manager of Division A is measured by residual income. Which of the following would increase the manager’s performance measure?

    A) Increase in average operating assets.
    B) Decrease in average operating assets.
    C) Increase in minimum required return.
    D) Decrease in net operating income.

    32. A segment of a business responsible for both revenues and expenses would be called:

    A) a cost center.

    B) an investment center.

    C) a profit center.

    D) residual income.

    33. The Northern Division of the Smith Company had average operating assets totaling $150,000 last year. If the minimum required rate of return is 12%, and if last year’s net operating income at Northern was $20,000, then the residual income for Northern last year was:

    A) $20,000.
    B) $l8,000.
    C) $5,000.
    D) $2,000.

    Use the following to answer questions 34 – 35:

    The following information is available on Company A:

    Sales $900,000
    Net operating income 36,000
    Stockholders’ equity 100,000
    Average operating assets 180,000
    Minimum required rate of return 15%

    34. Company A’s residual income is:

    A) $9,000.
    B) $21,000.
    C) $45,000.
    D) $24,000.

    35. Company A’s return on investment (ROI) is:

    A) 4%.
    B) 15%.
    C) 20%.
    D) 36%.

    36. Gata Co. plans to discontinue a department that has a $48,000 contribution margin and $96,000 of fixed costs. Of these fixed costs, $42,000 cannot be avoided. What would be the effect of this discontinuance on Gata’s overall net operating income?

    A) Increase of $48,000
    B) Decrease of $48,000
    C) Increase of $6,000
    D) Decrease of $6,000

    37. Pitkin Company produces a part used in the manufacture of one of its products. The unit product cost of the part is $33, computed as follows:

    Direct materials $12
    Direct labor 8
    Variable manufacturing

    overhead 3

    Fixed manufacturing overhead . 10

    Unit product cost $33

    An outside supplier has offered to provide the annual requirement of 10,000 of the parts for only $27 each. The company estimates that 30% of the fixed manufacturing overhead costs above will continue if the parts are purchased from the outside supplier. Assume that direct labor is an avoidable cost in this decision. Based on these data, the per unit dollar advantage or disadvantage of purchasing the parts from the outside supplier would be:

    A) $3 advantage.
    B) $1 advantage.
    C) $1 disadvantage.
    D) $4 disadvantage.

    38. Some investment projects require that a company expand its working capital to service the greater volume of business that will be generated. Under the net present value method, the investment of working capital should be treated as:
    A) an initial cash outflow for which no discounting is necessary.
    B) a future cash inflow for which discounting is necessary.
    C) both an initial cash outflow for which no discounting is necessary and a future cash inflow for which discounting is necessary.
    D) irrelevant to the net present value analysis.

    39. Which of the following capital budgeting techniques consider(s) cash flow over the entire life of the project?

    Internal rate of return Payback
    A) Yes Yes
    B) Yes No
    C) No Yes
    D) No No

    Use the following to answer question 40:

    (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Treads Corporation is considering

    the replacement of an old machine that is currently being used. The old machine is fully depreciated but can be used by the corporation for five more years. If Treads decides to replace the old machine, Picco Company has offered to purchase the old machine for $60,000. The old machine would have no salvage value in five years.

    The new machine would be acquired from Hillcrest Industries for $1,000,000 in cash. The new machine has an expected useful life of five years with no salvage value. Due to the increased efficiency of the new machine, estimated annual cash savings of $300,000 would be generated.

    Treads Corporation uses a discount rate of 12%.

    40. The net present value of the project is closest to:
    A) $171,000.
    B) $136,400.
    C) $141,500.
    D) $560,000.

    Use the following to answer questions 41-42:

    (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Oriental Company has gathered the following data on a proposed investment project:

    Investment in depreciable equipment $200,000
    Annual net cash flows $ 50,000
    Life of the equipment 10 years
    Salvage value -0-
    Discount rate 10%

    The company uses straight-line depreciation on all equipment.

    41. The payback period for the investment would be:

    A) 2.41 years.
    B) 0.25 years.
    C) 10 years.
    D) 4 years.

    42. The net present value of this investment would be:

    A) ($14,350).
    B) $107,250.
    C) $77,200.
    D) $200,000.

    43. The Tse Manufacturing Company uses a job-order costing system and applies overhead to jobs using

    a predetermined overhead rate. The company closes any balance in the Manufacturing Overhead account to Cost of Goods Sold. During the year the company’s Finished Goods inventory account was debited for $125,000 and credited for $110,000. The ending balance in the Finished Goods inventory account was $28,000. At the end of the year, manufacturing overhead was overapplied by $4,500. The balance in the Finished Goods inventory account at the beginning of the year was:

    A. $28,000

    B. $13,000

    C. $17,500

    D. $8,500

    44. Matthias Corporation has provided data concerning the company’s Manufacturing Overhead account for the month of May. Prior to the closing of the overapplied or underapplied balance to Cost of Goods Sold, the total of the debits to the Manufacturing Overhead account was $53,000 and the total of the credits to the account was $69,000. Which of the following statements is true
    A. Manufacturing overhead applied to Work in Process for the month was $69,000.
    B. Manufacturing overhead for the month was underapplied by $16,000.
    C. Manufacturing overhead transferred from Finished Goods to Cost of Goods Sold during the month was $53,000.
    D. Actual manufacturing overhead incurred during the month was $69,000.

    45. Yoder Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The following data pertain to operations in the first processing department for a recent month:

    [pic]

    45. What was the cost per equivalent unit for materials during the month
    A. $0.30
    B. $0.25
    C. $0.20
    D. $0.15

    acc 115 final exam ch 1 6 510131

    Part 1: Multiple Choice 100 Points

    1.
    Prehire questions pertaining to religion, gender, national origin, or age are allowed if:
    a. all employees are asked the same questions.
    b. only foreign-born applicants are asked these questions.
    c. these factors are bona fide occupational qualifications for the job.
    d. they are not in written form.
    e. the applicant is married.

    2.
    ERISA provides for full vesting of the employer s contribution to an employee s pension fund in three years or gradually over:
    a. ten years.
    b. five years.
    c. six years.
    d. seven years.
    e. No gradual vesting is allowed.

    3.
    Form I-9, which is completed by each employee, deals with:
    a. contributions to individual retirement accounts.
    b. verification of employment eligibility.
    c. eligibility for unemployment benefits.
    d. eligibility for Medicare benefits.
    e. none of the above.

    4.
    Which of the following is not a provision of the Fair Labor Standards Act (FLSA)?
    a. Restricts the employment of child labor
    b. Sets up minimum wage
    c. Forbids discrimination in hiring
    d. Mandates equal pay for equal work, regardless of sex
    e. All are provisions of the FLSA.

    5.
    In August 2011, the minimum hourly wage was:
    a. $3.35.
    b. $7.25.
    c. $5.85.
    d. $5.15.
    e. $3.6125.

    6.
    The tips received by a tipped employee are less than $5.12 of the minimum hourly tip credit rate. The maximum permissible tip credit is:
    a. $30 a month.
    b. $5.12 an hour.
    c. 45% of the employee s minimum wage.
    d. 50% of the employee s minimum wage.
    e. the amount of tips actually received by the employee.

    7.
    To determine a pieceworker s regular hourly rate for one week:
    a. divide the total weekly earnings from piece rates and all other
    sources by the hours worked in the week.
    b. divide the total weekly earnings from piece rates by the number of
    pieces produced.
    c. divide the total weekly earnings from piece rates, less earnings from
    other sources, by the hours worked in a week.
    d. add the total weekly earnings from piece rates and all other sources
    and divide by the total number of pieces produced.
    e. do none of the above.

    8.
    The taxes imposed under the Social Security Act consist of:
    a. two taxes on employers.
    b. two taxes on employees.
    c. OASDI and HI taxes.
    d. taxes on the net earnings of the self-employed.
    e. all of the above.

    9.
    Which of the following payments are not taxable for FICA?
    a. Back-pay awards.
    b. Wage supplements to cover difference between employees salaries and their military pay.
    c. Dismissal pay.
    d. Difference between employees regular wages and the amount received for jury duty.
    e. Retroactive wage increase.

    10.
    FICA defines all of the following as employees except:
    a. vice presidents.
    b. partners.
    c. superintendents.
    d. full-time life insurance salespersons.
    e. payroll managers.

    11.
    The FICA tax rates for the self-employed are:
    a. 6.2% (OASDI) and 1.45% (HI).
    b. 12.4% (OASDI) and 1.45% (HI).
    c. 6.2% (OASDI) and 2.9% (HI).
    d. 10.0% (OASDI) and 1.0% (HI).
    e. none of the above.

    12.
    Which of the following deposit requirements pertains to a monthly depositor who has accumulated employment taxes of $2,900 at the end of October?
    a. No deposit is required.
    b. The undeposited taxes should be carried over to the end of November.
    c. The taxes must be deposited on or before November 15.
    d. The taxes must be deposited on or before the next banking day.
    e. None of the above.

    13.
    Barr fails to make a timely deposit of FICA taxes and withheld income taxes until five days after the due date. The penalty facing Barr is:
    a. 2% of the undeposited taxes.
    b. 5% of the undeposited taxes.
    c. 10% of the undeposited taxes.
    d. 25% of the undeposited taxes.
    e. none of the above.

    14.
    Which of the following cannot be included in a cafeteria plan?
    a. Health insurance
    b. Group-term life insurance (first $50,000 of coverage)
    c. Dependent care assistance (first $5,000)
    d. Self-insured medical reimbursement plan
    e. Educational assistance

    15.
    Which of the following noncash fringe benefits does not represent taxable income subject to federal income tax withholding?
    a. Flight on employer-provided airline
    b. Personal use of company car
    c. Sick pay
    d. Employer-paid membership to a country club
    e. All of the above are taxable.

    16.
    A company must withhold federal income taxes from payments made to independent contractors in which of the following cases?
    a. When there is a signed contract between the parties
    b. When the contractor is paid more than $10,000
    c. When the contractor is a corporation
    d. When the contractor has not provided a taxpayer identification number and the contract is $600 or more
    e. All of the above

    17.
    Which of the following forms is used to report the amount of distributions from pension and retirement plans?
    a. W-2c
    b. 1099-R
    c. 1099-PEN
    d. W-3p
    e. W-4

    18.
    If the employer is tardy in paying the state contributions, the credit against the federal tax is limited to what percent of the late payments that would have been allowed as a credit if the contributions had been paid on time?
    a. 6.2%
    b. 90%
    c. 5.13%
    d. 20%
    e. 0%

    19.
    In order to avoid a credit reduction for Title XII advances, a state must repay the loans by:
    a. the end of the year of the loans.
    b. the end of the year the credit reduction is scheduled to take effect.
    c. the end of the third year after the year of the loans.
    d. November 10 of the year the credit reduction is scheduled to take effect.
    e. June 30 of the year after the loans.

    20.
    An employer must pay the quarterly FUTA tax liability if the liability is more than:
    a. $3,000.
    b. $500.
    c. $1,000.
    d. $1.
    e. $100.

    21.

    Which of the following is not an expense of the employer?
    a. FUTA tax
    b. FICA tax HI
    c. FICA tax OASDI
    d. SUTA tax
    e. Union dues withheld

    22.
    Which of these accounts shows the total gross earnings that the employer incurs as an expense each payday?
    a. Payroll Taxes
    b. Federal Income Taxes Payable
    c. Wages Expense
    d. Salaries Payable
    e. None of the above

    Part 2: Problems 100 Points

    1. Bakker is paid an hourly rate of $7.65. For 130 minutes spent on a
    certain job, Bakker is paid

    2. Elder is paid a monthly salary of $2,250. Overtime is paid for hours
    beyond 40 in each workweek. One week, Elder works 7 hours overtime.
    Elder s gross pay for the week is

    3. Kerr receives an annual $25,700 base salary for working the territory
    in Arizona. A quota of $900,000 in sales has been set for that state.
    Kerr receives an 8% commission on all sales in excess of $900,000.
    This year, the sales are $965,000. The total earnings due Kerr this year
    are

    4. Fess receives wages totaling $74,500 and has net earnings from self-employment amounting to $51,300. In determining her taxable self-
    employment income for the OASDI tax, how much of her net self-
    employment earnings must Fess count?

    5. During 20 , Garr was paid a weekly salary of $2,090. The
    amount of FICA to be withheld from the following payments is:
    OASDI HI
    (a) For the 51st week

    (b) For the 52nd week

    (c) For the 53rd week

    6. Use the appropriate table to determine the amount to withhold for federal income tax from each of the following biweekly wages (biweekly withholding allowance = $140.38):
    Patrick Patrone (single, 2 allowances), $925 wages
    Carson Leno (married, 4 allowances), $1,195 wages
    Carli Lintz (single, 0 allowances), $700 wages

    7. Queno Company had FUTA taxable wages of $510,900 during the year. Determine its: Gross FUTA Tax Rate-6.2%; Net FUTA Tax Rate-.8%; SUTA Tax Rate-5.4%
    (a) gross FUTA tax
    (b) FUTA tax credits (assuming no penalties)

    (c) net FUTA tax

    acc 205 week 5 exercise assignment 510132

    Week Five Exercise Assignment

    Financial Ratios

    1. Liquidity ratios.Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:

    Edison

    Stagg

    Thornton

    Cash

    $6,000

    $5,000

    $4,000

    Short-term investments

    3,000

    2,500

    2,000

    Accounts receivable

    2,000

    2,500

    3,000

    Inventory

    1,000

    2,500

    4,000

    Prepaid expenses

    800

    800

    800

    Accounts payable

    200

    200

    200

    Notes payable: short-term

    3,100

    3,100

    3,100

    Accrued payables

    300

    300

    300

    Long-term liabilities

    3,800

    3,800

    3,800

    1. Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?

    2. Computation and evaluation of activity ratios.The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:

    20X5

    20X4

    Net credit sales

    $832,000

    $760,000

    Cost of goods sold

    530,000

    400,000

    Cash, Dec. 31

    125,000

    110,000

    Average Accounts receivable

    205,000

    156,000

    Average Inventory

    70,000

    50,000

    Accounts payable, Dec. 31

    115,000

    108,000

    Instructions

    a. Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 20X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.

    3. Profitability ratios, trading on the equity.Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 20X7:

    Net sales

    $1,750,000

    Interest expense

    120,000

    Income tax expense

    80,000

    Preferred dividends

    25,000

    Net income

    130,000

    Average assets

    1,200,000

    Average common stockholders’ equity

    500,000

    1. Compute the profit margin on sales ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.
    2. Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly ex plain.

    4. Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

    20X2

    20X1

    Current Assets

    $86,000

    $80,000

    Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

    99,000

    90,000

    Intangibles

    25,000

    50,000

    Current Liabilities

    40,800

    48,000

    Long-Term Liabilities

    153,000

    160,000

    Stockholders Equity

    16,200

    12,000

    Net Sales

    500,000

    500,000

    Cost of Goods Sold

    322,500

    350,000

    Operating Expenses

    93,500

    85,000

    a. Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

    5.Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

    20X2

    20X1

    Current Assets

    $86,000

    $80,000

    Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

    99,000

    80,000

    Intangibles

    25,000

    50,000

    Current Liabilities

    40,800

    48,000

    Long-Term Liabilities

    153,000

    150,000

    Stockholders Equity

    16,200

    12,000

    Net Sales

    500,000

    500,000

    Cost of Goods Sold

    322,500

    350,000

    Operating Expenses

    93,500

    85,000

    a. Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

    6. Ratio computation.The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.

    LONE PINE COMPANY

    Comparative Balance Sheets

    December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)

    20X2

    20X1

    Assets

    Current Assets

    Cash and Short-Term Investments

    $400

    $600

    Accounts Receivable (net)

    3,000

    2,400

    Inventories

    3,000

    2,300

    Total Current Assets

    $6,400

    $5,300

    Property, Plant, and Equipment

    Land

    $1,700

    $500

    Buildings and Equipment (net)

    1,500

    1,000

    Total Property, Plant, and Equipment

    $3,200

    $1,500

    Total Assets

    $9,600

    $6,800

    Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

    Current Liabilities

    Accounts Payable

    $2,800

    $1,700

    Notes Payable

    1,100

    1,900

    Total Current Liabilities

    $3,900

    $3,600

    Long-Term Liabilities

    Bonds Payable

    4,100

    2,100

    Total Liabilities

    $8,000

    $5,700

    Stockholders Equity

    Common Stock

    $200

    $200

    Retained Earnings

    1,400

    900

    Total Stockholders Equity

    $1,600

    $1,100

    Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

    $9,600

    $6,800

    LONE PINE COMPANY

    Statement of Income and Retained Earnings

    For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)

    Net Sales*

    $36,000

    Less: Cost of Goods Sold

    $20,000

    Selling Expense

    6,000

    Administrative Expense

    4,000

    Interest Expense

    400

    Income Tax Expense

    2,000

    32,400

    Net Income

    $3,600

    Retained Earnings, Jan. 1

    900

    Ending Retained Earnings

    $4,500

    Cash Dividends Declared and Paid

    3,100

    Retained Earnings, Dec. 31

    $1,400

    *All sales are on account.

    Instructions

    Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calcu lations to two decimal places when necessary:

    a. Quick ratio

    b. Current ratio

    c. Inventory-turnover ratio

    d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio

    e. Return-on-assets ratio

    f. Net-profit-margin ratio

    g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity

    h. Debt-to-total assets

    i. Number of times that interest is earned

    acc 205 week 5 exercise assignment solutions brand new 100 accuarte answer solved by 510133

    Week Five Exercise Assignment

    Financial Ratios

    1. Liquidity ratios. Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:

    Edison

    Stagg

    Thornton

    Cash

    $6,000

    $5,000

    $4,000

    Short-term investments

    3,000

    2,500

    2,000

    Accounts receivable

    2,000

    2,500

    3,000

    Inventory

    1,000

    2,500

    4,000

    Prepaid expenses

    800

    800

    800

    Accounts payable

    200

    200

    200

    Notes payable: short-term

    3,100

    3,100

    3,100

    Accrued payables

    300

    300

    300

    Long-term liabilities

    3,800

    3,800

    3,800

    a. Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?

    2. Computation and evaluation of activity ratios. The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:

    20X5

    20X4

    Net credit sales

    $832,000

    $760,000

    Cost of goods sold

    530,000

    400,000

    Cash, Dec. 31

    125,000

    110,000

    Average Accounts receivable

    205,000

    156,000

    Average Inventory

    70,000

    50,000

    Accounts payable, Dec. 31

    115,000

    108,000

    Instructions

    a. Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 20X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.

    3. Profitability ratios, trading on the equity. Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 20X7:

    Net sales

    $1,750,000

    Interest expense

    120,000

    Income tax expense

    80,000

    Preferred dividends

    25,000

    Net income

    130,000

    Average assets

    1,200,000

    Average common stockholders” equity

    500,000

    a. Compute the profit margin on sales ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.

    b. Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly explain.

    4. Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

    20X2

    20X1

    Current Assets

    $86,000

    $80,000

    Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

    99,000

    90,000

    Intangibles

    25,000

    50,000

    Current Liabilities

    40,800

    48,000

    Long-Term Liabilities

    153,000

    160,000

    Stockholders Equity

    16,200

    12,000

    Net Sales

    500,000

    500,000

    Cost of Goods Sold

    322,500

    350,000

    Operating Expenses

    93,500

    85,000

    a. Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

    5.Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

    20X2

    20X1

    Current Assets

    $86,000

    $80,000

    Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

    99,000

    80,000

    Intangibles

    25,000

    50,000

    Current Liabilities

    40,800

    48,000

    Long-Term Liabilities

    153,000

    150,000

    Stockholders Equity

    16,200

    12,000

    Net Sales

    500,000

    500,000

    Cost of Goods Sold

    322,500

    350,000

    Operating Expenses

    93,500

    85,000

    a. Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

    6. Ratio computation. The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.

    LONE PINE COMPANY

    Comparative Balance Sheets

    December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)

    20X2

    20X1

    Assets

    Current Assets

    Cash and Short-Term Investments

    $400

    $600

    Accounts Receivable (net)

    3,000

    2,400

    Inventories

    3,000

    2,300

    Total Current Assets

    $6,400

    $5,300

    Property, Plant, and Equipment

    Land

    $1,700

    $500

    Buildings and Equipment (net)

    1,500

    1,000

    Total Property, Plant, and Equipment

    $3,200

    $1,500

    Total Assets

    $9,600

    $6,800

    Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

    Current Liabilities

    Accounts Payable

    $2,800

    $1,700

    Notes Payable

    1,100

    1,900

    Total Current Liabilities

    $3,900

    $3,600

    Long-Term Liabilities

    Bonds Payable

    4,100

    2,100

    Total Liabilities

    $8,000

    $5,700

    Stockholders Equity

    Common Stock

    $200

    $200

    Retained Earnings

    1,400

    900

    Total Stockholders Equity

    $1,600

    $1,100

    Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

    $9,600

    $6,800

    LONE PINE COMPANY

    Statement of Income and Retained Earnings

    For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)

    Net Sales*

    $36,000

    Less: Cost of Goods Sold

    $20,000

    Selling Expense

    6,000

    Administrative Expense

    4,000

    Interest Expense

    400

    Income Tax Expense

    2,000

    32,400

    Net Income

    $3,600

    Retained Earnings, Jan. 1

    900

    Ending Retained Earnings

    $4,500

    Cash Dividends Declared and Paid

    3,100

    Retained Earnings, Dec. 31

    $1,400

    *All sales are on account.

    Instructions

    Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calcu lations to two decimal places when necessary:

    a. Quick ratio

    b. Current ratio

    c. Inventory-turnover ratio

    d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio

    e. Return-on-assets ratio

    f. Net-profit-margin ratio

    g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity

    h. Debt-to-total assets

    i. Number of times that interest is earned

    acc 280 week 5 exercises e15 1 blevins inc e15 2 gallup corporation amp e15 11 scull 510134

    Exercise 15-1Financial information for Blevins Inc. is presented below.

    December 31, 2009 December 31, 2008

    Current assets $125,000 $100,000

    Plant assets (net) 396,000 330,000

    Current liabilities 91,000 70,000

    Long-term liabilities 133,000 95,000

    Common stock, $1 par 161,000 115,000

    Retained earnings 136,000 150,000

    Instructions

    Prepare a schedule showing a horizontal analysis for 2009 using 2008 as the base year.

    E15-2 Operating data for Gallup Corporation are presented below.
    2009 2008
    Sales $750,000 $600,000
    Cost of goods sold 465,000 390,000
    Selling expenses 120,000 72,000
    Administrative expenses 60,000 54,000
    Income tax expense 33,000 24,000
    Net income 72,000 60,000
    Instructions
    Prepare a schedule showing a vertical analysis for 2009 and 2008.

    E15-11 Scully Corporation s comparative balance sheets are presented below.

    SCULLY CORPORATION

    Balance Sheets

    December 31

    2008 2007

    Cash $ 4,300 $ 3,700

    Accounts receivable 21,200 23,400

    Inventory 10,000 7,000

    Land 20,000 26,000

    Building 70,000 70,000

    Accumulated depreciation (15,000) (10,000)

    Total $110,500 $120,100

    Accounts payable $ 12,370 $ 31,100

    Common stock 75,000 69,000

    Retained earnings 23,130 20,000

    Total $110,500 $120,100

    Scully s 2008 income statement included net sales of $100,000, cost of goods sold of $60,000, and net income of $15,000.

    Instructions

    Compute the following ratios for 2008.

    (a) Current ratio.

    (b) Acid-test ratio.

    (c) Receivables turnover.

    (d) Inventory turnover.

    (e) Profit margin.

    (f) Asset turnover.

    (g) Return on assets.

    (h) Return on common stockholders equity.

    (i) Debt to total assets ratio.

    acc 305 midterm examination august 6 2013 510135

    ACC 305 Midterm Examination August 6, 2013

    The exam must be submitted by Sunday, August 11, 2013 on or before 5:59 p.m. To receive full credit you must show ALL of your work!

    1. On February 1, 2012, Marsh Contractors agreed to construct a building at a contract price of $5,400,000. Marsh estimated total construction costs would be $4,000,000 and the project would be finished in 2014. Information relating to the costs and billings for this contract is as follows:

    2012

    2013

    2014

    Total costs incurred to date

    $1,500,000

    $2,640,000

    $4,600,000

    Estimated costs to complete

    2,500,000

    1,760,000

    -0-

    Customer billings to date

    2,200,000

    4,000,000

    5,600,000

    Collections to date

    2,000,000

    3,500,000

    5,500,000

    Using the percentage-of-completion method, calculate the gross profit that should be recorded for 2012, 2013 and 2014. (30 points)

    2. Ashleigh Company provides the following selected information related to its defined benefit pension plan for 2012.

    Pension asset/liability, January 1

    $25,000 Cr.

    Accumulated benefit obligation, December 31

    400,000

    Actual and expected return on plan assets

    10,000

    Contributions in 2012

    150,000

    Fair value of plan assets, December 31

    800,000

    Settlement rate

    10%

    Projected benefit obligation, January 1

    700,000

    Service cost

    80,000

    Compute (a.) the pension expense and prepare the journal entry to record pension expense and the employer s contribution to the pension plan in 2012, if benefits paid in 2012 were $35,000 and (b.) prepare the pension worksheet for Ashleigh Company for 2012. (80 points)

    3. Keele Company has the following securities in its investment portfolio on December 31, 2012 (all securities were purchased in 2012): (1) 3,000 shares of Anderson Company common stock which cost $58,500, (2) 10,000 shares of Munter Ltd. common stock which cost $580,000, and (3) 6,000 shares of King Company preferred stock which cost $255,000. The Fair Value Adjustment account shows a credit balance of $10,100 at the end of 2012. In 2013, Keele Company completed the following securities transactions; (a.) On January 15th, sold 3,000 shares of Anderson s common stock at $22 per share less fees of $2,150 and (b.) On April 17th, purchased 1,000 shares of Castle s common stock at $33.50 per share plus fees of $1,980. On December 31, 2013, the market values per share of these securities were: Munter $61, King $40 and Castle $29.

    Perform the following: (a.) prepare the journal entry for the security sale on January 15, 2013; (b.) prepare the journal entry to record the security purchase on April 17, 2013 and (c.) compute the unrealized gains or losses of the revised investment portfolio and prepare the adjusting entry for Keele Company on December 31, 2013. (60 points)

    4. At the end of the year, the Otaigbe Corporation has pretax financial income of $550,000. Included in the $550,000 is $70,000 interest income on municipal bonds, $25,000 fine for the dumping of hazardous waste, and depreciation of $60,000. Depreciation for tax purposes is $45,000. Compute the income taxes payable, assuming the tax rate is 30% for all periods. (15 points)

    5. Wills and Turkvant Inc. have a deferred tax liability of $68,000 at the beginning of 2013. At the end of 2013, the company reports accounts receivable on the books at $90,000 and the tax basis at zero (the only temporary difference). If the enacted tax rate is 34% for all periods, and income taxes payable for the period is $230,000, determine the amount of total income tax expense to report for 2013. (15 points)

    acc 305 midterm examination august 6 2013 the exam must be submitted by sunday augus 510136

    ACC 305 Midterm Examination August 6, 2013 The exam must be submitted by Sunday, August 11, 2013 on or before 5:59 p.m. To receive full credit you must show ALL of your work! 1. On February 1, 2012, Marsh Contractors agreed to construct a building at a contract price of $5,400,000. Marsh estimated total construction costs would be $4,000,000 and the project would be finished in 2014. Information relating to the costs and billings for this contract is as follows: 2012 2013 2014 Total costs incurred to date $1,500,000 $2,640,000 $4,600,000 Estimated costs to complete 2,500,000 1,760,000 -0- Customer billings to date 2,200,000 4,000,000 5,600,000 Collections to date 2,000,000 3,500,000 5,500,000 Using the percentage-of-completion method, calculate the gross profit that should be recorded for 2012, 2013 and 2014. (30 points) 2. Ashleigh Company provides the following selected information related to its defined benefit pension plan for 2012. Pension asset/liability, January 1 $25,000 Cr. Accumulated benefit obligation, December 31 400,000 Actual and expected return on plan assets 10,000 Contributions in 2012 150,000 Fair value of plan assets, December 31 800,000 Settlement rate 10% Projected benefit obligation, January 1 700,000 Service cost 80,000

    Compute (a.) the pension expense and prepare the journal entry to record pension expense and the employer s contribution to the pension plan in 2012, if benefits paid in 2012 were $35,000 and (b.) prepare the pension worksheet for Ashleigh Company for 2012. (80 points) 3. Keele Company has the following securities in its investment portfolio on December 31, 2012 (all securities were purchased in 2012): (1) 3,000 shares of Anderson Company common stock which cost $58,500, (2) 10,000 shares of Munter Ltd. common stock which cost $580,000, and (3) 6,000 shares of King Company preferred stock which cost $255,000. The Fair Value Adjustment account shows a credit balance of $10,100 at the end of 2012. In 2013, Keele Company completed the following securities transactions; (a.) On January 15th, sold 3,000 shares of Anderson s common stock at $22 per share less fees of $2,150 and (b.) On April 17th, purchased 1,000 shares of Castle s common stock at $33.50 per share plus fees of $1,980. On December 31, 2013, the market values per share of these securities were: Munter $61, King $40 and Castle $29. Perform the following: (a.) prepare the journal entry for the security sale on January 15, 2013; (b.) prepare the journal entry to record the security purchase on April 17, 2013 and (c.) compute the unrealized gains or losses of the revised investment portfolio and prepare the adjusting entry for Keele Company on December 31, 2013. (60 points) 4. At the end of the year, the Otaigbe Corporation has pretax financial income of $550,000. Included in the $550,000 is $70,000 interest income on municipal bonds, $25,000 fine for the dumping of hazardous waste, and depreciation of $60,000. Depreciation for tax purposes is $45,000. Compute the income taxes payable, assuming the tax rate is 30% for all periods. (15 points) 5. Wills and Turkvant Inc. have a deferred tax liability of $68,000 at the beginning of 2013. At the end of 2013, the company reports accounts receivable on the books at $90,000 and the tax basis at zero (the only temporary difference). If the enacted tax rate is 34% for all periods, and income taxes payable for the period is $230,000, determine the amount of total income tax expense to report for 2013. (15 points)

    e11 14 kaiser company s partial amortization schedule follows 509383

    Kaiser Company s partial amortization schedule follows:

    Payment NumberDatePaymentInterest Expense (Principal X 6% X 1/12)PrincipalMortgage Balance

    Loan1/1/2013 $500,000.00

    11/31/2013 3,597.30 2,500.00 1,097.30 498,902.70

    22/28/2013 3,597.30 2,494.51 1,102.79 497,799.91

    33/31/2013 3,597.30 2,489.00 1,108.30 496,691.61

    44/30/2013 3,597.30 2,483.46 1,113.84 495,577.77

    55/31/2013 3,597.30 2,477.89 1,119.41 494,458.36

    66/30/2013 3,597.30 2,472.29 1,125.01 493,333.35

    77/31/2013 3,597.30 2,466.67 1,130.63 492,202.72

    88/31/2013 3,597.30 2,461.01 1,136.29 491,066.43

    99/30/2013 3,597.30 2,455.33 1,141.97 489,924.46

    1010/31/2013 3,597.30 2,449.62 1,147.68 488,776.78

    1111/30/2013 3,597.30 2,443.88 1,153.42 487,623.36

    1212/31/2013 3,597.30 2,438.12 1,159.18 486,464.18

    2013 totals 43,167.60 29,631.78 13,535.82

    Requirements

    1. Journalize the note issuance and the reclassification of the current portion on January 1, 2013 (explanations are not required).

    2. What is the balance in Estimated warranty payable?

    3. Journalize the second payment on February 28, 2013 (do not round).

    e2 7 accounting principles comprehensive problem 509385

    E2-7
    (Accounting Principles Comprehensive) Presented below are a number of business transactions that occurred during the current year for Gonzales, Inc.

    Instructions
    In each of the situations, discuss the appropriateness of the journal entries in terms of generally accepted accounting principles.

    The president of Gonzales, Inc. used his expense account to purchase a new Suburban solely for personal use. The following journal entry was made.

    Miscellaneous Expense 29,000
    Cash 29,000

    Merchandise inventory that cost $620,000 is reported on the balance sheet at $690,000, the expected selling price less estimated selling costs. The following entry was made to record this increase in value.

    Merchandise Inventory 70,000
    Revenue 70,000

    The company is being sued for $500,000 by a customer who claims damages for personal injury apparently caused by a defective product. Company attorneys feel extremely confident that the company will have no liability for damages resulting from the situation. Nevertheless, the company decides to make the following entry.

    Loss from Lawsuit 500,000
    Liability for Lawsuit 500,000

    Because the general level of prices increased during the current year, Gonzales, Inc. determined that there was a $16,000 understatement of depreciation expense on its equipment and decided to record it in its accounts. The following entry was made.

    Depreciation Expense 16,000
    Accumulated Depreciation 16,000

    Gonzales, Inc. has been concerned about whether intangible assets could generate cash in case of liquidation. As a consequence, goodwill arising from a purchase transaction during the current year and recorded at $800,000 was written off as follows.

    Retained Earnings 800,000
    Goodwill 800,000

    Because of a fire sale, equipment obviously worth $200,000 was acquired at a cost of $155,000. The following entry was made.

    Equipment 200,000
    Cash 155,000
    Revenue 45,000

    the fashion shoe company operates a chain of women s shoe shops around the country 509387

    The Fashion Shoe Company operates a chain of women s shoe shops around the country. The shops carry many styles of shoes that are all sold at the same price. Sales personnel in the shops are paid a substantial commission on each pair of shoes sold (in addition to a small basic salary) in order to encourage them to be aggressive in their sales efforts. The following worksheet contains cost and revenue data for Shop 48 and is typical of the company s many outlets:

    Per Pair of Shoes

    Selling price $ 30.00

    Variable expenses:

    Invoice cost $ 13.50

    Sales commission 4.50

    Total variable expenses $ 18.00

    Annual Fixed expenses:

    Advertising $ 30,000

    Rent 20,000

    Salaries 100,000

    Total fixed expenses $ 150,000

    1. Calculate the annual break-even point in dollar sales and in unit sales for Shop 48.

    2. Prepare a CVP graph showing cost and revenue data for Shop 48 from zero shoes up to 17,000 pairs of shoes sold each year. Clearly indicate the break-even point on the graph.

    3. If 12,000 pairs of shoes are sold in a year, what would be Shop 48’s net operating income or loss?

    4. The company is considering paying the store manager of Shop 48 an incentive commission of Shop 48 an incentive commission of 75 cents per pair of shoes (in addition to the salesperson’s commission). If this change is made, what will be the new break-even point in dollar sales and in unit sales?

    5. Refer to the original data. As an alternative to (4) above, the company is considering paying the store manager 50 cents commission on each pair of shoes sold in excess of the break-even point. If this change is made, what will be the shop’s net operating income or loss if 15,000 pairs of shoes are sold?

    6. Refer to the original data. The company is considering eliminating sales commissions entirely in its shops and increasing fixed salaries by $31,500 annually. If this change is made, what will be the new break-even point in dollar sales and in unit sales for Shop 48? Would you recommend that the change be made? Explain.

    fianacial analysis 509388

    Problem 17-1A Ratios, common-size statements, and trend percents L.O. P1, P2, P3

    [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

    Selected comparative financial statements of Bennington Company follow:

    BENNINGTON COMPANY

    Comparative Income Statements

    For Years Ended December 31, 2012, 2011, and 2010

    2012

    2011

    2010

    Sales

    $

    457,083

    $

    350,163

    $

    243,000

    Cost of goods sold

    275,164

    219,202

    155,520

    Gross profit

    181,919

    130,961

    87,480

    Selling expenses

    64,906

    48,322

    32,076

    Administrative expenses

    41,137

    30,814

    20,169

    Total expenses

    106,043

    79,136

    52,245

    Income before taxes

    75,876

    51,825

    35,235

    Income taxes

    14,113

    10,624

    7,153

    Net income

    $

    61,763

    $

    41,201

    $

    28,082

    BENNINGTON COMPANY

    Comparative Balance Sheets

    December 31, 2012, 2011, and 2010

    2012

    2011

    2010

    Assets

    Current assets

    $

    47,321

    $

    37,023

    $

    49,491

    Long-term investments

    0

    1,200

    3,960

    Plant assets, net

    85,231

    90,490

    53,188

    Total assets

    $

    132,552

    $

    128,713

    $

    106,639

    Liabilities and Equity

    Current liabilities

    $

    19,353

    $

    19,178

    $

    18,662

    Common stock

    71,000

    71,000

    53,000

    Other paid-in capital

    8,875

    8,875

    5,889

    Retained earnings

    33,324

    29,660

    29,088

    Total liabilities and equity

    $

    132,552

    $

    128,713

    $

    106,639

    references

    value:
    1.00 points

    Problem 17-1A Part 1

    Required:

    Compute each year’s current ratio. (Round your answers to 1 decimal place.)

    Current ratio

    December 31, 2012:

    to

    Current ratio

    December 31, 2011:

    to

    Current ratio

    December 31, 2010:

    to

    eBook Links (3)references

    value:
    1.00 points

    Problem 17-1A Part 2

    Express the income statement data in common-size percents. (Percents are rounded to two decimals and thus may not exactly sum to totals and subtotals. Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

    BENNINGTON COMPANY
    Common-Size Comparative Income Statements
    For Years Ended December 31, 2012, 2011, and 2010

    2012

    2011

    2010

    Sales

    %

    %

    %

    Cost of goods sold

    Gross profit

    Selling expenses

    Administrative expenses

    Total expenses

    Income before taxes

    Income taxes

    Net income

    %

    %

    %

    eBook Links (3)references

    value:
    1.00 points

    Problem 17-1A Part 3

    Express the balance sheet data in trend percents with 2010 as the base year. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

    BENNINGTON COMPANY
    Balance Sheet Data in Trend Percents
    December 31, 2012, 2011, and 2010

    2012

    2011

    2010

    Assets

    Current assets

    %

    %

    %

    Long-term investments

    Plant assets

    Total assets

    Liabilities and Equity

    Current liabilities

    %

    %

    %

    Common stock

    Other contributed capital

    Retained earnings

    Total liabilities and equity

    eBook Links (3)references

    Problem 17-4A Calculation of financial statement ratios L.O. P3

    Selected year-end financial statements of McCord Corporation follow. (All sales were on credit; selected balance sheet amounts at December 31, 2010, were inventory, $53,900; total assets, $229,400; common stock, $95,000; and retained earnings, $52,348.)

    McCORD CORPORATION
    Income Statement
    For Year Ended December 31, 2011

    Sales

    $

    450,600

    Cost of goods sold

    297,450

    Gross profit

    153,150

    Operating expenses

    99,500

    Interest expense

    3,900

    Income before taxes

    49,750

    Income taxes

    20,041

    Net income

    $

    29,709

    McCORD CORPORATION
    Balance Sheet
    December 31, 2011

    Assets

    Liabilities and Equity

    Cash

    $

    16,000

    Accounts payable

    $

    16,500

    Short-term investments

    8,800

    Accrued wages payable

    4,800

    Accounts receivable, net

    31,400

    Income taxes payable

    3,300

    Notes receivable (trade)*

    4,000

    Long-term note payable, secured

    Merchandise inventory

    32,150

    by mortgage on plant assets

    65,400

    Prepaid expenses

    3,050

    Common stock

    95,000

    Plant assets, net

    153,300

    Retained earnings

    63,700

    Total assets

    $

    248,700

    Total liabilities and equity

    $

    248,700

    * These are short-term notes receivable arising from customer (trade) sales.

    Required:

    Compute the following. (Use 365 days a year. Do not round intermediate calculations and round your final answers to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response):

    (1)

    Current ratio

    to

    (2)

    Acid-test ratio

    to

    (3)

    Days’ sales uncollected (including note)

    days

    (4)

    Inventory turnover

    times

    (5)

    Days’ sales in inventory

    days

    (6)

    Debt-to-equity ratio

    to

    (7)

    Times interest earned

    times

    (8)

    Profit margin ratio

    %

    (9)

    Total asset turnover

    times

    (10)

    Return on total assets

    %

    (11)

    Return on common stockholders’ equity

    %

    fiber technology inc manufactures glass fibers used in the communications industry t 509389

    Exercise 3

    Economic Order Quantity

    For each of the following independent cases, use the equation method to compute the economic order quantity.

    Case A Case B Case C

    Annual requirement (in units) 13,230 1,681 560

    Cost per order $250 $40 $10

    Annual holding cost per unit 6 20 7

    Exercise 4

    Lead Time and Safety Stock

    Andrew and Fulton, Inc. uses 780 tons of a chemical bonding agent each year. Monthly demand fluctuates between 50 and 80 tons. The lead time for each order is one month, and the economic order quantity is 130 tons.

    1. Determine the safety stock appropriate for the chemical bonding agent.

    2. At what order point, in terms of tons remaining in inventory, should Andrew and Fulton, Inc. order the bonding agent?

    Exercise 5

    Economic Order Quantity Equation Approach; JIT Purchasing

    Fiber Technology, Inc. manufactures glass fibers used in the communications industry. The company s materials and parts manager is currently revising the inventory policy for XL-20, one of the chemicals used in the production process. The chemical is purchased in 10 pound canisters for $95 each. The firm uses 4,800 canisters per year. The controller estimates that it costs $150 to place and receive a typical order of XL-20. The annual cost of storing XL-20 is $4 per canister.

    1. Write the formula for the total annual cost of ordering and storing XL-20.

    2. Use the EOQ formula to determine the optimal order quantity.

    3. What is the total annual cost of ordering and storing XL-20 at the economic order quantity?

    4. How many orders will be placed per year?

    5. Fiber Technology s controller Jay Turnbull, recently attended a seminar on JIT purchasing. Afterward he analyzed the cost of storing XL-20 including the cost of wasted space and inefficiency. He was shocked when he concluded that the real annual holding cost was $19.20 per canister. Turnbull then met with Doug Kaplan, Fiber Technology s purchasing manager. Together they contacted Reno Industries, the supplier of XL-20, about a JIT purchasing arrangement. After some discussion and negotiation, Kaplan concluded that the cost of placing an order for XL-20 could be reduced to just $20. Using these new cost estimates, Turnbull computed the new EOQ for XL-20.

    a. Use the equation approach to compute the new EOQ.

    b. How many orders will be placed per year?

    final exam v1 mcqs 509390

    Identify the letter of the choice that best completes the statement or answers the question.

    Bexley Company produces retractable pens. November budgeted production costs are given below:

    Pens to be produced

    100,000

    Direct material (variable)

    $30,000

    Direct Labor (variable)

    $50,000

    Supplies (variable)

    $25,000

    Supervision (fixed)

    $40,000

    Depreciation (fixed)

    $30,000

    Other (fixed)

    $10,000

    In December, Bexley expects to produce 120,000 pens. Assuming no structural changes, what is Bexley s budgeted production cost per pen for December?

    A) $1.54
    B) $1.72
    C) $1.85
    D) $1.93

    Use the cost information in (1) above. In October, the actual direct labor costs were $46,000 and Bexley produced and sold 90,000 pens. The direct material performance variance (difference) is:
    A) $5,000 unfavorable.
    B) $5,000 favorable.
    C) $1,000 unfavorable.
    D) $1,000 favorable.

    A typical use of managerial accounting is to:
    A) Help investors and creditors to assess the financial position of the company.
    B) Help management get a clean audit report.
    C) Help the SEC decide whether management is in compliance with its policies.
    D) Help the marketing manager decide which product promotion to implement.

    A manufacturing company produces 80,000 units of product A at a total cost of $2.4 million. Total fixed costs are $1million. If the company increases production by 25% and uses a 40% markup the price per unit will be:
    A) $30.80
    B) $31.54
    C) $37.10
    D) $38.50

    Use the following to answer questions 5-6:

    RNO Company”s market for the Model 55 has changed significantly, and RNO has had to drop the price per unit from $285 to $200. There are some units in the work in process inventory that have costs of $280 per unit associated with them. RNO could sell these units in their current state for $160 each. It will cost RNO $35 per unit to complete these units so that they can be sold for $200 each.

    A new employee looks at the analysis and exclaims, We”ll lose money with either of these alternatives! Let”s just throw these units in the trash! Suppose the alternative to trashing is choosing the more profitable of the two alternatives (that the new employee looked at and did not like). What effect will the trashing option (that the new employee wants) have on net income?
    A) Net income will increase by $35 per unit for each unit discarded.
    B) Net income will decrease by $115 per unit for each unit discarded.
    C) It will have no effect on net income.
    D) Net income will decrease by $165 per unit for each unit discarded.

    When the incremental revenues and expenses are analyzed, the company is better off by
    A) $5 per unit if they complete the units.
    B) $15 per unit if they sell the units in their current state.
    C) $25 per unit if they sell the units in their current state.
    D) $35 per unit if they complete the units.

    A company using activity based pricing marks up the direct cost of goods by 39% plus charges customers for indirect costs based on the activities utilized by the customer. Indirect costs are charged as follows: $6.00 per order placed; $3.00 per separate item ordered; $28.00 per return. A customer places 10 orders with a total direct cost of $2,210, orders 312 separate items, and makes 8 returns. What will the customer be charged?
    A) $3,000
    B) $4,292
    C) $5,330
    D) $5,755

    Manufacturing overhead is allocated to products based on the number of machine hours required. In a year when 20,000 machine hours were anticipated, costs were budgeted at $125,000. If a product requires 7,000 machine hours, how much manufacturing overhead will be allocated to this product?
    A) $41,667
    B) $43,750
    C) $1,120
    D) $50,000

    Use the following information to answer questions 9-10:
    The Sunrise Hotel has 200 rooms. Each room rents at $160 per night and variable costs total $35 per room per night of occupancy. Fixed costs total $80,000 per month.

    If the hotel spends an additional $10,000 in the month of February on advertising they feel that they can expect occupancy rate to increase by 10%. What would be the financial impact of spending this additional money on advertising for the month of February (28 days)?
    A) Total fixed costs will increase by $10,500.
    B) Net income will increase by $50,000.
    C) Net income will increase by $26,320.
    D) Total fixed costs will remain the same.

    If 70% of the rooms are occupied each night in the month of February (28 days) what will total costs be for the month?
    A) $118,560.
    B) $173,600.
    C) $217,200.
    D) $155,680.

    A company believes it can sell 6,000,000 of its proposed optical mouse for $14 each. There will be $7,500,000 in fixed costs associated with the mouse. If the company desires to make a profit of $3,000,000 on the mouse, what is the target variable cost per mouse?
    A) $10.60
    B) $11.00
    C) $12.25
    D) $9.00

    12. Below is a performance report that compares budgeted and actual profit of Boyles Beer for the month of April:

    Budget

    Actual

    Difference

    Sales

    $200,000

    $202,000

    $2,000

    Less:

    Cost of ingredients

    $162,000

    $166,000

    $4,000

    Salaries

    $31,000

    $31,200

    $200

    Controllable Profit

    $47,000

    $44,800

    -$2,200

    In evaluating the department in terms of its increase in sales and expenses, what will be

    most important to investigate?

    A) Sales

    B) Cost of ingredients

    C) Salaries

    D) All three components have equal importance.

    K-Henry”s Dull Diner has a contribution margin ratio of 16%. If fixed costs are $148,952, how many dollars of revenue must K-Henry”s generate in order to reach the break-even point?
    A) $930,950
    B) $1,060,800
    C) $208,476
    D) $1,105,000

    A company has a total cost of $50.00 per unit at a volume of 100,000 units. The variable cost per unit is $20.00. What would the price be if the company expected a volume of 120,000 units and used a markup of 50%?
    A) $75.00
    B) $62.50
    C) There is not enough information in the problem to answer
    D) $67.50

    Max s Pizza produced and sold 1,000 pizzas last month and had total variable ingredients that cost $4,575. If production and sales are expected to increase by 17% next month, which of the following statements is true?
    A) Total variable materials costs are expected to be $4,779.50
    B) Variable material cost per unit is expected to be $4.99.
    C) Total variable materials costs are expected to be $4,345
    D) Total variable materials costs are expected to be $5,352.75

    16. FarnsworthCompany s break-even point is 14,377. Each unit generates variable costs
    Of $3.2, and is sold for $4.90. What are the fixed costs?
    A) $26,845.
    B) $59,780.
    C) $24,441.
    D) $32,940.

    17. One Small Grill Company is a start up with the following profile:
    Unit selling price = $230; Variable cost per unit = $130; Fixed Costs = $36,000;
    Tax rate = 40%. How many units should Small Grill sell to achieve an after-tax target
    income of $6,000?
    A) 200
    B) 460
    C) 230
    D) 300

    Western Apparel Company owns two stores and management is considering eliminating the East store due to declining sales. Segmented contribution income statements are as follows and common fixed costs are allocated on the basis of sales.

    West

    East

    Total

    Sales

    $500,500

    90,000

    $590,500

    Variable costs

    262,500

    45,000

    307,500

    Direct fixed costs

    62,500

    25,000

    87,500

    Segment margin

    175,500

    20,000

    195,500

    Allocated fixed costs

    137,500

    35,000

    172,500

    Net Income

    $38,000

    ($15,000)

    $23,000

    Western feels that if they eliminate the East store that sales in the West store will decline by 15%. If they close the East store, overall company net income will:
    A) decline by $90,000.
    B) decline by $62,000.
    C) decline by $85,625.
    D) decline by $55,700.

    JungleGym, a best-selling toy has a selling price of $15. If the contribution margin ratio is 40% and if the fixed costs are $60,000, how many JungleGyms must the company sell to realize a profit of $450,000?
    A) 100,000
    B) 30,000
    C) 34,000
    D) 85,000

    After a good year in 2012, JungleGym decides it needs to increase sales by 12% in 2013. Which of the following is most likely to stay the same in 2013?
    A) Total sales revenue.
    B) Total variable costs
    C) Total fixed costs
    D) Total contribution margin
    Information for Questions 21-22

    Anderson Manufacturing makes a single product. Budget information regarding the current period is given below:

    Revenue (100,000 units at $8.00)

    $800,000

    Direct materials

    150,000

    Direct labor

    125,000

    Variable manufacturing overhead

    235,000

    Fixed manufacturing overhead

    110,000

    Net income

    $180,000

    Dye Company approaches Anderson with a special order for 15,000 units at a price of $7.50 per unit. Variable costs will be the same as the current production and accepting the special order will not have any impact on the rest of the company”s orders. However, Anderson is operating at capacity and will incur an additional $50,000 in fixed manufacturing overhead if the order is accepted.
    What is the incremental income (loss) associated with accepting the special order?
    A) ($14,000)
    B) $36,000
    C) ($23,500)
    D) $27,000

    What is the incremental revenue associated with accepting the special order?
    A) $170,000
    B) $112,500
    C) $70,000
    D) $120,000

    On July 26, 2012, radio Shack announced disappointing 2nd quarter earnings that caused the stock to fall 29% to all time lows. Although sales were up 1.2% to $953.2 million gross profit fell 16.6% to $360.3 million. Assuming Radio Shack s store count and fixed costs were the same in the 2ndquarter of 2011 and 2012, which of the following statements is the best explanation for the decrease in the firm s profitability?
    A) Opportunity costs decreased.
    B) Margin of safety decreased.
    C) Contribution margin decreased.
    D) Selling price decreased.

    Innovations, Inc is looking to achieve a net income of 15 percent of sales. Unit sales price is $10; variable cost per unit is $6; total fixed costs are $50,000 what is the level of sales (in units) required to achieve a net income of 15 percent of sales
    A) 12,000 units.
    B) 21,000 units.
    C) 16,000 units.
    D) 20,000 units.

    Anthony s Bakery sold 2,000 muffins last month and had fixed costs of $6,000. If production and sales are expected to increase by 10% next month, which of the following statements is true?
    A) Total fixed costs will decrease.
    B) Fixed cost per unit will decrease.
    C) Total fixed costs will increase.
    D) Fixed cost per unit will increase.

    The Dynamaco Company uses cost-plus pricing with a 50% mark-up. The company is currently selling 100,000 units at $12 per unit. Each unit has a variable cost of $6. In addition, the company incurs $200,000 in fixed costs annually. If demand falls to 80,000 units and the company wants to continue to earn a 50% return, what price should the company charge?
    A) $12.75
    B) $14.55
    C) $13.50
    D) $10.95

    27. An auto executive is considering how to price a 2014 hybrid in order to maximize profits for the company. Manufacturing each hybrid involves $9,500 of materials, $12,500 of labor, $3,800 of shipping and $4,000 of other supplies. The facility where the car is manufactured has $12.5 million of fixed costs. The marketing department says that adding a Bose sound system would boost demand, but it would add an additional $750 per car.

    The quantity demanded at each unit price is as follows:

    Price

    Quantity Demanded (No Bose)

    Quantity Demanded (with Bose)

    $31,000

    8,960

    10,752

    $32,000

    7,168

    8,602

    $33,000

    5,734

    6,881

    $34,000

    4,588

    5,505

    $35,000

    3,670

    4,404

    $36,000

    2,936

    3,523

    $37,000

    2,349

    2,819

    $38,000

    1,879

    2,255

    $39,000

    1,503

    1,804

    What profit maximizing price should the executive choose?
    A) $34,000 without Bose sound system.
    B) $39,000 with Bose sound system.
    C) $36,000 without Bose sound system.
    D) $35,000 with Bose sound system

    Use the following to answer question 28:

    The Wall Street Journal has the following monthly data for newspapers sold and total cost.

    Month

    Issues Sold

    Total Cost

    January

    1,000,000

    $20,000,000

    February

    950,000

    $19,100,000

    March

    1,050,000

    $21,060,000

    April

    1,200,000

    $23,000,000

    May

    1,060,000

    $21,075,000

    June

    800,000

    $18,000,000

    Using the high-low method, what is the total cost that the Wall Street Journal will incur if it is expecting to sell 750,000 newspapers in July?
    A) $17,625,000
    B) $17,500,000
    C) $17,375,000
    D) $17,250,000

    During 2011, Bonzai Corporation reported revenues of $891,640 and profits of $91,486. Fixed costs were $332,043 and 44,582 units were sold. If costs and prices are expected to stay the same in 2012, and Bonzai expects to sell 45,000 units, what will be the company s budgeted profit
    A) $95,457
    B) $142,957
    C) $525,000
    D) $667,957

    Visit finance.yahoo.com and determine which of the following statements is incorrect:
    A) The market cap of Microsoft is more than double that of Google.
    B) Revenues of Microsoft for 2011 were more than double revenues of Google.
    C) The Price per share of Google is more than ten times that of Microsoft.
    D) Assets of Microsoft at the end of 2011 were more than that of Google.

    financial ratios 509391

    Week Five Exercise Assignment

    Financial Ratios

    1. Liquidity ratios.Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:

    Edison

    Stagg

    Thornton

    Cash

    $6,000

    $5,000

    $4,000

    Short-term investments

    3,000

    2,500

    2,000

    Accounts receivable

    2,000

    2,500

    3,000

    Inventory

    1,000

    2,500

    4,000

    Prepaid expenses

    800

    800

    800

    Accounts payable

    200

    200

    200

    Notes payable: short-term

    3,100

    3,100

    3,100

    Accrued payables

    300

    300

    300

    Long-term liabilities

    3,800

    3,800

    3,800

    1. Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?

    2. Computation and evaluation of activity ratios.The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:

    20X5

    20X4

    Net credit sales

    $832,000

    $760,000

    Cost of goods sold

    530,000

    400,000

    Cash, Dec. 31

    125,000

    110,000

    Average Accounts receivable

    205,000

    156,000

    Average Inventory

    70,000

    50,000

    Accounts payable, Dec. 31

    115,000

    108,000

    Instructions

    a. Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 20X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.

    3. Profitability ratios, trading on the equity.Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 20X7:

    Net sales

    $1,750,000

    Interest expense

    120,000

    Income tax expense

    80,000

    Preferred dividends

    25,000

    Net income

    130,000

    Average assets

    1,200,000

    Average common stockholders’ equity

    500,000

    1. Compute the profit margin on sales ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.
    2. Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly ex plain.

    4. Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

    20X2

    20X1

    Current Assets

    $86,000

    $80,000

    Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

    99,000

    90,000

    Intangibles

    25,000

    50,000

    Current Liabilities

    40,800

    48,000

    Long-Term Liabilities

    153,000

    160,000

    Stockholders Equity

    16,200

    12,000

    Net Sales

    500,000

    500,000

    Cost of Goods Sold

    322,500

    350,000

    Operating Expenses

    93,500

    85,000

    a. Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

    5.Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

    20X2

    20X1

    Current Assets

    $86,000

    $80,000

    Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

    99,000

    80,000

    Intangibles

    25,000

    50,000

    Current Liabilities

    40,800

    48,000

    Long-Term Liabilities

    153,000

    150,000

    Stockholders Equity

    16,200

    12,000

    Net Sales

    500,000

    500,000

    Cost of Goods Sold

    322,500

    350,000

    Operating Expenses

    93,500

    85,000

    a. Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

    6. Ratio computation.The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.

    LONE PINE COMPANY

    Comparative Balance Sheets

    December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)

    20X2

    20X1

    Assets

    Current Assets

    Cash and Short-Term Investments

    $400

    $600

    Accounts Receivable (net)

    3,000

    2,400

    Inventories

    3,000

    2,300

    Total Current Assets

    $6,400

    $5,300

    Property, Plant, and Equipment

    Land

    $1,700

    $500

    Buildings and Equipment (net)

    1,500

    1,000

    Total Property, Plant, and Equipment

    $3,200

    $1,500

    Total Assets

    $9,600

    $6,800

    Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

    Current Liabilities

    Accounts Payable

    $2,800

    $1,700

    Notes Payable

    1,100

    1,900

    Total Current Liabilities

    $3,900

    $3,600

    Long-Term Liabilities

    Bonds Payable

    4,100

    2,100

    Total Liabilities

    $8,000

    $5,700

    Stockholders Equity

    Common Stock

    $200

    $200

    Retained Earnings

    1,400

    900

    Total Stockholders Equity

    $1,600

    $1,100

    Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

    $9,600

    $6,800

    LONE PINE COMPANY

    Statement of Income and Retained Earnings

    For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)

    Net Sales*

    $36,000

    Less: Cost of Goods Sold

    $20,000

    Selling Expense

    6,000

    Administrative Expense

    4,000

    Interest Expense

    400

    Income Tax Expense

    2,000

    32,400

    Net Income

    $3,600

    Retained Earnings, Jan. 1

    900

    Ending Retained Earnings

    $4,500

    Cash Dividends Declared and Paid

    3,100

    Retained Earnings, Dec. 31

    $1,400

    *All sales are on account.

    Instructions

    Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calcu lations to two decimal places when necessary:

    a. Quick ratio

    b. Current ratio

    c. Inventory-turnover ratio

    d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio

    e. Return-on-assets ratio

    f. Net-profit-margin ratio

    g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity

    h. Debt-to-total assets

    i. Number of times that interest is earned

    finite math week 4 quiz financial topics 509392

    Finite Math
    Week4Quiz FinancialTopics
    Foreachsectionreadthedirectionsanddeterminethebestanswer
    Choose the best answer for the questions below. Answers are rounded to nearest whole dollar amount.

    1. What is the simple interest earned over 6
    years on a principal of $55,000 at 12% interest?
    a. $39,600 b. $94,600 c. $61,600 d. $58,960
    3. What is the value after 4 years if $8,700 is invested in an account that pays 9% interest compounded monthly?
    a. $3,300 b.$12,453 c. $9,519
    d. $279,979
    5. Which of the following choices of investment
    yields the greatest for a deposit of $20,000 over
    20 years?
    a. 12% simple interest
    b. 10.5% compounded quarterly
    c. 11.5% compounded weekly
    d. 11% compounded daily

    2. What is the effectiverateofinterest for a one year loan of $3,000 given at 15% interest if the interest is compounded quarterly?
    a. 15.24% b. 15.27% c. 15.87% d. 15.94%
    4. How much is the discount on a loan for which you agree to pay the lender $6,000 in one year at 8% interest?
    a. $480
    b. $5,520 c. $6,480 d. $960
    6. You are due to receive 3 payments (one per year) which you can invest in an account that earns 9% interest per year. Which sequence of payments yields the greatest amount?
    a. $200, $300, $250 b. $250, $100, $300 c. $400, $100, $100 d. $300, $200, $250

    7. Compute the monthly loan payment required to pay off $150,000 dollars at 7% interest over 15 years. (Note: a monthly payment means the interest is compounded monthly)
    a. $1,348.24
    b. $427,342.01
    c. $2,374.12
    d. $16,084.35

    Finite Math
    Week 4 Quiz Financial Topics
    8. How much money should be invested in an account that earns 9% interest, compounded monthly, if you want to have $500,000 after 20 years?
    a. $45,600.00 b. $83,206.42 c. $41,603.21 d. $430,594.93
    9. What is the value of an annuity if $250 dollars is deposited monthly for 7 years at 12% interest?
    a. $1,803.38 b. $32,668.07 c. $113,527.42 d. $52,098.73
    10. How much would you need to deposit if you wanted to withdrawal $750 a month for 3 years if a bank will pay 8% interest?
    a. $25,000.00 b. $18,781.22 c. $23,933.85 d. $31,060.74

    fmac exam 509393

    Part A MULTIPLE CHOICE and TRUE/FALSE (1 mark each x 15 questions = 15 marks). Choose the one alternative that best completes the statement or answers the question.

    1. The globalization of business activity has resulted in which of the following?

    a. Increased corruption and unethical behavior.

    b. The FASB and IASB working jointly on a project to converge accounting standards.

    c. The requirement that major Canadian companies use International Financial Reporting Standards.

    d. All of the above.

    e. b and c.

    2. The manipulation of the allowance for doubtful accounts by management would be best indicated by when a company:

    a. tightens its credit standards and the allowance account decreases.

    b. lowers its credit standards and the allowance account decreases.

    c. tightens its credit standards and the allowance account increases.

    d. lowers its credit standards and the allowance account increases.

    3. The best measure for determining how well a firm operates within its industry is

    a. Gross Profit

    b. Operating Profit

    c. Earnings before Taxes

    d. Net profit

    4. A change in retained earnings from one year end to the next can result from cash flows related to both operating and financing activities. (True/false)

    5. Consider the following statements

    I. The cash conversion cycle of a firm can be improved by decreasing the days inventory held and days payable outstanding, while decreasing the average collection period.

    II. The DuPont System helps the analyst see how a firm s decisions and activities over an accounting period interact to produce return on equity.

    a. Only Statement I is true.

    b. Only Statement II is true.

    c. Both Statements I and II are true.

    d. Both Statements I and II are false.

    6. How should a company report total comprehensive income?

    a. On the face of its income statement.

    b. In a separate statement of comprehensive income.

    c. In its statement of stockholders’ equity.

    d. All of the above ways are acceptable.

    7. Currently, management accounting information within government and nonprofit organizations is in greater demand because:

    a. public and private donors are demanding accountability

    b. citizens are requesting responsive and efficient performance from their governing units

    c. more nonprofit organizations are competing for limited funds

    d. All of the above are correct.

    8. The measurement of the objectives for the Balanced Scorecard

    a. creates focus for the future.

    b. communicates an important message to all employees.

    c. focuses the entire organization on strategic implementation of company s outcomes.

    d. All of the above are correct.

    9. The strategy MOST LIKELY to reduce the break-even point would be to:

    a. increase both the capacity-related (fixed) costs and the contribution margin per unit.

    b. decrease both the capacity-related (fixed) costs and the contribution margin per unit.

    c. decrease the capacity-related (fixed) costs and increase the contribution margin per unit.

    d. increase the capacity-related (fixed) costs and decrease the contribution margin per unit.

    10.The major reason for using practical capacity as the denominator for activity driver calculations is to:

    a. avoid distortions created by the assignment of unused capacity costs to the products produced or customers served.

    b. simplify the calculations of the activity cost drivers.

    c. reduce the cost of unused capacity.

    d. place less emphasis on the cost of unused capacity.

    11.An activity-based costing system is most useful when:

    a. Operations throughout the plant are fairly similar.

    b. There are small amounts of overhead costs.

    c. Products produced in the company all show large profits.

    d. Products make diverse demands on resources because of differences in volume, process steps, batch size, or complexity.

    12.Which of the following is NOT an option to transform breakeven or loss customers into profitable ones?

    a. Use more discipline in granting discounts and allowances.

    b. Improve the process used to produce, sell, deliver and service the customer.

    c. Use less menu-based pricing that allows customers to select features and services it wishes to pay for.

    d. Improve margins by lowering costs.

    13.A performance measurement system should accomplish all of the following except:

    a. communicate the company s strategy.

    b. motivate employees to achieve strategic objectives.

    c. identify financial measures to evaluate an organization s intangible assets.

    d. help managers allocate resources to the most productive alternatives.

    14.Committed costs are those that the organization agrees must be set aside to cover product costs through the three major stages of the life cycle. (True/False)

    15.Budgeting provides all of the following EXCEPT:

    a. a means to communicate the organization’s short-term goals to its members

    b. support for the management functions of planning and coordination

    c. a means to anticipate problems

    d. an ethical framework for decision making


    Part B – Short Answer (10 questions; 50 marks). Please highlight your answers and show your work to receive partial credit for incorrect answers.

    1. (2 marks) Assume that Zebra Company has no opening inventory. The following purchases of inventory occurred during the year:

    Date Purchases (units) Purchase Price per Unit

    Jan 2 2 $3

    Feb. 15 3 $5

    March 30 4 $7

    July 29 6 $6

    October 30 5 $4

    Assume Zebra sells 10 items on October 31 and uses the LIFO method of inventory valuation.

    Required: What amount would appear as cost of goods sold on the income statement?

    2. (5 marks) The following calculations have been made for Rogers Company:

    Growth Rate

    2012 to 2013

    Net sales 10.5%

    Total accounts receivable 21.3%

    Allowance for doubtful accounts 2.6%

    2013 2012

    Allowance for doubtful accounts as a

    percentage of total accounts receivable 3.8% 5.4%

    Required: Analyze the accounts receivable and allowance for doubtful accounts changes and provide plausible explanations for the results.


    3. (5 marks) Analyze the common size income statements below:

    2013

    2012

    Net sales

    100%

    100%

    COGS

    54

    63

    Gross margin

    46

    37

    Research and development

    14

    20

    Selling, general and administrative

    5

    9

    Restructuring, asset impairments and other charges

    1

    8

    Income from operations

    26

    0

    Interest expense

    (1)

    (2)

    Income (loss) before income taxes

    25

    (2)

    Provision for income taxes

    8

    0

    Net income (loss)

    17%

    (2)%

    Sales revenue increase, 2012 to 2013

    80%

    Operating expense increase, 2012 to 2013

    31%

    4. (7 marks) Yak Corporation reported the following information:

    (1) Net income for the year was $52 million.

    (2) Purchases of equipment were $12 million.

    (3) Customer accounts receivable decreased by $6 million.

    (4) Dividends paid to common shareholders were $10 million.

    (5) Depreciation expense was $18 million.

    (6) Income tax payable decreased by $3 million.

    (7) Long-term debt decreased by $14 million.

    (8) Accounts payable increased by $8 million.

    (9) Inventories decreased by $5 million.

    (10) Opening cash balance was $4 million.

    Required: Based on the above information, calculate the ending cash balance.


    5. (4 marks) Able Manufacturing uses departmental cost driver rates to allocate manufacturing support costs to products. Manufacturing support costs are allocated on the basis of machine hours in Department A and on the basis of direct labor hours in Department B. At the beginning of 2013, the following estimates were provided for the coming year:

    Dept. A Dept. B

    Direct labor cost $600,000 $1,800,000

    Manufacturing overhead costs $400,000 $600,000

    Direct labor-hours 25,000 60,000

    Machine-hours 10,000 12,000

    The accounting records of the company show the following data for Job #123:

    Dept. A Dept. B

    Direct labor-hours 10 20

    Machine-hours 2 15

    Direct material cost $100 $200

    Required: Calculate the total manufacturing costs of Job #123.

    6. (6 marks) Pete s Publishing, Inc. has excess capacity. Company management is approached by a new customer to fill a large one-time order for 1,000 books, a product similar to one offered to regular customers. The following information applies to sales to regular customers:

    Sales (100,000 units) $12,000,000

    Direct materials $5,000,000

    Direct labor 4,000,000

    Variable manufacturing support 500,000

    Fixed manufacturing support 200,000

    Total manufacturing costs 9,700,000

    Profit $2,300,000

    Required: What is the minimum acceptable price at which overall profit will not change?

    7. (3 marks) Bob s Boots Ltd. manufactures three different products boots, slippers, and runners. Considerable market demand exists for all models. The following per unit data apply:

    Boots Slippers Runners

    Selling price $150 $20 $85

    Direct materials 100 8 40

    Direct labor ($20 per hour) 20 5 10

    Variable support costs ($4 per machine hour) 10 2 12

    Fixed costs 8 4 20

    Gross profit 12 1 3

    Required: If there is no excess capacity, what should the company do to maximize profits?

    8. (8 marks) Engineers at Jones & Smith Ltd. developed the following standard costs for direct material and direct labor for one of their major products:

    Standard quantity Standard price

    Direct materials 10 kilograms $5 per kilogram

    Direct labor 0.5 hours $30 per hour

    During 2013, the company produced and sold 100,000 units using 990,000 kilograms of direct materials at an average cost of $4.95 per kilogram,and total direct labour costs of $1,428,000 (51,000 DLHs incurred).

    Required: Calculate the 2013 price and quantity (efficiency) variances, and total variances, for direct material and direct labour.

    9. (5 marks) Mercury Manufacturing produces a single product that sells for $30. Variable (flexible) costs per unit equal $20. Management believes that a 5% reduction in the selling price will result in a 15% increase in unit sales, currently 10,000 units. The company expects the total capacity-related costs to rise from $10,000 to $15,000 to accommodate the required increase in production if this proposed reduction in selling price is implemented.

    Required: What will happen to profits?

    10.(5 marks) Marcel s Manufacturing, Inc., is considering reorganizing its plant into manufacturing cells. The following estimates have been prepared to evaluate the benefits from the reorganization:

    Before the change After the change

    Total annual sales $600,000 $800,000

    Costs as a percentage of sales:

    Direct materials 23% 20%

    Direct labor 9% 7%

    Manufacturing Support costs 18% 13%

    Work-in-process inventory $125,000 $ 90,000

    Inventory carrying costs are estimated to be 10% per year.

    Required: Calculate the amount that total benefits are projected to increase annually as a result of switching to a cellular manufacturing operation.


    Part C Problems (3 problems, 65 marks in total). Show your work to receive partial credit for incorrect answers.

    Problem 1 (14 marks)

    Over the years, Donna Dow has been a very successful investor. She investigates a company thoroughly before purchasing its shares. Donna is interested in the common stock of IBU Computers Limited. The following data are available for the company:

    2013

    2012

    2011

    Current ratio*

    1.9

    2.0

    2.1

    Acid-test ratio

    1.1

    1.0

    .9

    Accounts receivable turnover

    3.6X

    3.5X

    3.0X

    Inventory turnover

    4X

    5X

    6X

    Current liabilities

    $1M

    $1M

    $1M

    Sales

    $10M

    $10M

    $10M

    Gross Profit Ratio

    30%

    30%

    30%

    Dividends paid per share**

    $4

    $3

    $2.50

    Dividend yield ratio

    5.5%

    5.5%

    5.5%

    Dividend payout ratio

    40%

    40%

    40%

    Return on total assets

    10%

    12%

    8%

    Return on common stockholders equity

    8%

    14.5%

    9%

    * Current assets consist of cash, accounts receivable, and inventory.

    **There were no changes in common stock outstanding over the three-year period.

    Donna would like answers to a number of specific questions regarding this data. Respond in a complete but concise manner to each of her questions.

    1. Is the market price of the company s stock going up or down?,

    2. Is the earnings per share increasing or decreasing?

    3. Is the company employing financial leverage to the advantage of the common stockholders?

    4. Is it becoming easier for the company to pay its bills as they come due?

    5. Are customers paying their bills at least as fast now as they did in Year 1?

    6. Is the total of accounts receiving increasing, decreasing, or remaining constant?

    7. Is the level of inventory increasing, decreasing, or remaining constant?


    Problem 2 (16 marks)

    AudioFile Products Ltd. is a retailer that sells sound systems. The company is planning its cash needs for the month of January, 2013. In the past, AudioFile has had to borrow money during the post-Christmas season to offset a significant decline in sales. The following information has been assembled to assist in preparing a cash flow forecast for January.

    a. January 2013 forecasted income statement:

    Sales $200,000

    Cost of goods sold 150,000

    Gross profit 50,000

    Variable selling expenses $ 10,000

    Fixed administrative expenses 20,000 30,000

    Forecast net operating income $ 20,000

    b. Sales are 10% for cash and 90% on credit.

    c. Credit sales are collected over a three-month period with 40% collected in the month of sale, 30% in the following month, and 20% in the second month following sale. November 2012 sales totaled $300,000 and December sales totaled $500,000.

    d. 40% of a month s inventory purchases are paid for in the same month. The remaining 60% are paid in the following month. Accounts payable relate solely to inventory purchases. At December 31, these totaled $400,000.

    e. The company maintains its ending inventory levels at 60% of the cost of the merchandise to be sold in the following month. The merchandise inventory at December 31, 2012 was $90,000. February 2013 sales are budgeted at $150,000. Gross profit percentage is expected to remain unchanged.

    f. The company pays a $10,000 monthly cash dividend to shareholders.

    g. The cash balance at December 31, 2012 was $30,000; the company must maintain a cash balance of at least this amount at the end of each month.

    h. The company can borrow on its operating loan in increments of $10,000 at the beginning of each month, up to a total loan balance of $500,000. The interest rate on this loan is 1% per month. There is no operating loan at December 31, 2012.

    Required: Prepare a Cash Flow Forecast for AudioFile for the month of January 2013. Include appropriate supporting schedules.


    Problem 3 (35 marks)

    In the past, the Big Dog Carworks Ltd. (BDCL) allocated indirect manufacturing costs based on direct labour hours. Recently, management has decided to pilot a system of time-driven activity-based costing to allocate these costs. The division produces two small engine models: Basic and Heavy Duty. The following information has been obtained from the company s records over the past year:

    Basic

    Heavy Duty

    Units produced

    500,000

    50,000

    Direct material cost per engine

    $40

    $60

    Direct labour cost per hour

    $30

    $30

    Direct labour hours incurred

    200,000

    40,000

    Inspections per engine

    2

    4

    Inspection time per engine (hrs.)

    .1

    .3

    Engines packed and shipped per batch

    2,000

    500

    Individual engine packing time (hrs.)

    .25

    .4

    Additional preparation time per batch (hrs.)

    30

    15

    BDCL employs 245 employees to perform indirect labour functions, rotating among machine setups, engine inspections, and shipping. Each employee is paid $50,000 per year on average, including benefits. On average, each employee works 1,600 hours per year.

    200 automated production machines are leased for $14,000,000 in total each year. Each machine is available for 1,600 hours per year, including set up time. Once a machine is set up, no labour is necessary to oversee it. Machine-related information for the year is as follows:

    Basic

    Heavy Duty

    Machining hours per engine

    .4

    .6

    Set up time per run (hrs.)

    300

    600

    Number of production runs

    100

    50

    Required

    a. (7 marks). Determine the amount of indirect manufacturing costs allocated to one engine of each type (Basic, Heavy Duty) based on the existing cost allocation basis (direct labour hours).

    b. (5 marks) Determine the total cost (direct material, direct labour, indirect manufacturing overhead) of producing one engine of each type using the existing cost allocation basis.

    c. (15 marks) Determine the indirect manufacturing support costs for one engine of each type using time-driven activity-based costing.

    d. (8 marks) Comment on the differences between results calculated in parts b and c.

    Template for Part A

    Part A

    Answer

    1.

    2.

    3.

    4.

    5.

    6.

    7.

    8.

    9.

    10.

    11.

    12.

    13.

    14.

    15.

    e1 18 business exchanges identify the transactions from the following story for each 509808

    E1-18.Business exchanges. Identify the transactions from the following story. For each, identify the give and get portion. Who would be interested in this information? (LO I, 3) Bonnie Lawhon decided to start a business for herself breeding AKC miniature dachshunds .As a talented breeder who gave puppies to her friends and family, she decided to open as mall kennel with $6,500 of her own money. She received common stock in exchange. Thebusiness had concrete poured and fences installed to give the dogs and puppies shelter at acostof $3,250,p aid in cash. Then, Bonnie”s business hired a consultant design and maintain a Web page for the company at a cost of $200 for the original design and $25 a monthmaintenance. She paid for the design and one month”s maintenance fee. The business requireda separatemobile phoneto be purchasedat a cost of $169 cash.Then, the businessput an advertisement in the local newspaper, at a cost of $20 per month for weekly ads. Thebusinesspaid cashfor one month”s advertisingThe businesswas readyto go.

    fsa 1 1 use apple computerinc balancesheetsgiven hereto answerthe questions lo 5 509833

    FSA 1-1. Use Apple ComputerInc.” balancesheetsgiven hereto answerthe questions.( LO 5)

    AppleComputer Inc.

    Condense balance Sheets

    (in millions)

    Assets

    At 9/24/O5

    9/l25/04

    Cash and cash equivalents

    $ 3,491

    $ 2,969

    Short-term investments

    4,770

    2,495

    Accountsreceivable(n et)

    895

    774

    Inventories

    165

    101

    Other current assets

    979

    716

    Total current assets

    1 0,300

    7,055

    Property, plantand equipment( net)

    817

    707

    Goodwill

    69

    80

    Other assets

    365

    208

    Total assets

    $11,551

    $8,050

    Liabilities and Shareholders” Equity:

    Accounts payable

    $ 1,779

    $ t,qst

    Accrued expenses

    1,705

    1,200

    Total current liabilities

    3,484

    2,651

    Other noncurrent liabilities

    601

    323

    Total liabilities

    4,085

    2,974

    Common stock

    3,521

    2,514

    Retained earnings

    4,005

    2,670

    Other equity accounts

    (60)

    (1 08)

    Totals shareholders” equity

    7,46

    5,076

    Total liabilities and shareholders equity

    $11,551

    $ 8,0s0

    Required

    a. What date marks the end of Apple”s most recent fiscal year?

    b. Did Apple earn a net income or net loss during the year? How can you tell?

    c. Did the owners of Apple make any capital contributions during the year (or did

    Apple get some new owners)?

    d. Did Apple buy or sell any property, plant, or equipment during the year? How can you tell?

    e. On the last day of the fiscal year, did Apple have any debts? If so, what was the total amount?

    the following information is used for lucky 039 s inc s monthly master budget 510094

    The following information is used for Lucky’s Inc. s monthly master budget.

    June’s balance sheet balances:

    Cash

    $10,500

    Accounts payable

    $53,760

    Accounts receivable

    $80,000

    Capital stock

    $260,000

    Inventory

    $26,000

    Retained earnings

    $2,740

    Building and equipment (net)

    $200,000

    Actual sales for June and budgeted sales for July, August, and September:

    June (actual)

    $140,000

    July (budget)

    $320,000

    August (budget)

    $180,000

    September (budget)

    $200,000

    Sales are 25% cash and 75% on credit. All credit sales are collected in the following month. There are no bad debts.

    Gross margin percentage is 60% of sales.

    The desired ending inventory is expected to be 20% of the following month’s cost of goods sold. One fifth of the purchases are paid for in the month of purchase, and the remaining balance is purchased on credit and paid in the following month.

    The monthly cash operating expenses are $80,000, including the monthly depreciation expense of $7,000.

    During July, Lucky’s Inc. will purchase new office equipment for $17,000 cash.

    Dividends of $13,500 were declared and paid in July.

    The company must maintain a minimum cash balance of $25,000. A line of credit is used to maintain this balance. Borrowing will be made in increments of $1,000. All borrowing is done at the beginning of the month, and repayments are made at the end of the month. The annual interest rate is 12%, paid when the loan is repaid (ignore accrual of interest).

    Required:

    Prepare a balance sheet, income statement, and cash budget for the month of July.

    franklin s tower company completes these transactions during april of the current ye 510096

    Franklin s Tower Company completes these transactions during April of the current year (the terms of all its credit sales are 2/10, n/30):

    Apr. 2 Purchased $15,400 of merchandise on credit from Garcia Company, invoice dated April 2, terms 2/10, n/60.

    3 Sold merchandise on credit to M. Jagger, Invoice No. 760, for $3,500 (cost is $2,000).

    3 Purchased $880 of office supplies on credit from Paper Clips, Inc. Invoice dated April 2, terms n/10 EOM.

    4 Issued Check No. 587 to NewLook Magizine for advertising expense, $750.

    5 Sold merchandise on credit to C. Watts, Invoice No. 761, for $6,000 (cost is $4,400).

    6 Received an $75 credit memorandum from Paper Clips, Inc., for some of the office supplies received on April 3 and returned for credit.

    9 Purchased $11,000 of store equipment on credit from Jane s Junk, invoice dated April 9, terms n/10 EOM.

    11 Sold merchandise on credit to K. Richards, Invoice No. 762, for $12,800 (cost is $6,900).

    12 Issued Check No. 588 to Garcia Company in payment of its April 2 invoice, less the discount.

    13 Received payment from M. Jagger for the April 3 sale, less the discount.

    13 Sold $4,200 of merchandise on credit to M. Jagger (cost is $2,100), Invoice No. 763.

    14 Received payment from C. Watts for the April 5 sale, less the discount.

    16 Issued Check No. 589, payable to Payroll, in payment of sales salaries for the first half of the month, $8,850. Cashed the check and paid employees.

    16 Cash sales for the first half of the month are $42,420 (cost is $20,070). (Cash sales are recorded daily from cash register readings but are recorded only twice in this problem to reduce repetitive entries.)

    17 Purchased $16,600 of merchandise on credit from Lesh Company, invoice dated April 16, terms 2/10, n/30.

    18 Borrowed $50,000 cash from Second National Bank by giving a long-term note payable.

    20 Received payment from K. Richards for the April 11 sale, less the discount.

    20 Purchased $690 of store supplies on credit from Jane s Junk, invoice dated April 19, terms n/10 EOM.

    23 Received a $600 credit memorandum from Lesh Company for defective merchandise received on April 17 and returned for credit.

    23 Received payment from M. Jagger for the April 13 sale, less the discount.

    25 Purchased $9,470 of merchandise on credit from Garcia Company, invoice dated April 24, terms 2/10, n/60.

    26 Issued Check No. 590 to Lesh Company in payment of its April 17 invoice, less the return and the discount.

    27 Sold $2,880 of merchandise on credit to C. Watts, Invoice No. 764 (cost is $2,120).

    27 Sold $1,700 of merchandise on credit to K. Richards, Invoice No. 765 (cost is $810).

    30 Issued Check No. 591, payable to Payroll, in payment of the sales salaries for the last half of the month, $12,000.

    30 Cash sales for the last half of the month are $69,690 (cost is $45,500).

    Required

    1. Prepare a sales journal like Exhibit 7.5 and a cash receipts journal like Exhibit 7.7. Number both journal pages as page 3. Then review the transactions of Franklin s Tower Company and enter those that should be journalized in the sales journal and those that should be journalized in the cash receipts journal. Ignore any transactions that should be journalized in a purchases journal, a cash disbursements journal, or a general journal.

    2. Open the following general ledger accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Inventory, Long-Term Notes Payable, Cost of Goods Sold, Sales, and Sales Discounts. Enter the March 31 balances for Cash ($55,000), Inventory ($101,000), and Long-Term Notes Payable ($156,000). Also open accounts receivable subsidiary ledger accounts for C. Watts, M. Jagger, and K. Richards.

    3. Verify that amounts that should be posted as individual amounts from the journals have been posted. (Such items are immediately posted.) Foot and crossfoot the journals and make the month-end postings.

    4. Prepare a trial balance of the general ledger and prove the accuracy of the subsidiary ledger by preparing a schedule of accounts receivable.

    Analysis Component

    5. Assume that the total for the schedule of Accounts Receivable does not equal the balance of the controlling account in the general ledger. Describe steps you would take to discover the error(s).

    gb518 financial accounting principles and analysis final exaam 510097

    The useful life of a plant asset is: (Points : 2)

    The length of time it is used productively in a company’s operations
    Never related to its physical life
    Its productive life, but not to exceed one year
    Determined by the FASB
    Determined by law

    2.Depreciation: (Points : 2)

    Measures the decline in market value of an asset
    Measures physical deterioration of an asset
    Is the process of allocating to expense the cost of a plant asset
    Is an outflow of cash from the use of a plant asset
    Is applied to land

    3.Plant assets are: (Points : 2)

    Tangible assets used in the operation of a business that have a useful life of more than one accounting period
    Current assets
    Held for sale
    Intangible assets used in the operations of a business that have a useful life of more than one accounting period
    Tangible assets used in the operation of business that have a useful life of less than one accounting period

    4.A company has net sales of $870,000 and average accounts receivable of $174,000. What is its accounts receivable turnover for the period? (Points : 2)

    0.20
    5.00
    20.0
    73.0
    1,825

    5.FICA taxes include: (Points : 2)

    Social Security taxes
    Charitable giving
    Employee income taxes
    Unemployment taxes

    6.Times interest earned is calculated by: (Points : 2)

    Multiplying interest expense times income
    Dividing interest expense by income before interest expense
    Dividing income before interest expense and any income tax by interest expense
    Dividing interest and income tax expense by income before interest and income tax expense

    7.Amortization: (Points : 2)

    Is the systematic allocation of the cost of an intangible asset to expense over its estimated useful life
    Is the process of allocating to expense the cost of a plant asset to the accounting periods benefiting from its use
    Is the process of allocating the cost of natural resources to periods when they are consumed
    Is an accelerated form of expensing an asset’s cost
    Is the same as depletion

    8.A method of estimating bad debts expense that involves a detailed examination of outstanding accounts and their length of time past due is the: (Points : 2)

    Direct write-off method
    Aging of accounts receivable method
    Percentage of sales method
    Aging of investments method
    Percent of accounts receivable method

    9.A company purchased a tract of land for its natural resources at a cost of $1,500,000. It expects to mine 2,000,000 tons of ore from this land. The salvage value of the land is expected to be $250,000. The depletion expense per ton of ore is: (Points : 2)

    $0.75
    $0.625
    $0.875
    $6.00
    $8.00

    10.The matching principle requires: (Points : 2)

    That expenses be ignored if their effect on the financial statements are less important than revenues to the financial statement user
    The use of the direct write-off method for bad debts
    The use of the allowance method of accounting for bad debts
    That bad debts be disclosed in the financial statements
    That bad debts not be written off

    11.Liabilities: (Points : 2)

    Must be certain
    Must sometimes be estimated
    Must be for a specific amount
    Must always have a definite date for payment
    Must involve an outflow of cash

    12.In the accounting records of a defendant, lawsuits: (Points : 2)

    Are estimated liabilities
    Should always be recorded
    Should always be disclosed
    Should be recorded if payment for damages is probable and the amount can be reasonably estimated

    13.A contingent liability: (Points : 2)

    Is always of a specific amount
    Is a potential obligation that depends on a future event arising out of a past transaction or event
    Is an obligation not requiring future payment
    Is an obligation arising from the purchase of goods or services on credit
    Is an obligation arising from a future event

    14.Total asset turnover is calculated by dividing: (Points : 2)

    Gross profit by average total assets
    Average total assets by gross profit
    Net sales by average total assets
    Average total assets by net sales
    Net assets by total assets

    15.If the times interest ratio: (Points : 2)

    Increases, then risk increases
    Increases, then risk decreases
    Is greater than 1.5, then the company is in default
    Is less than 1.5, the company is carrying too little debt

    16.Promissory notes that require the issuer to make a series of payments consisting of both interest and principal are: (Points : 2)

    Debentures
    Discounted notes
    Installment notes
    Indentures
    Investment notes

    17.A company borrowed $300,000 cash from the bank by signing a 5-year, 8% installment note. The present value factor for an annuity at 8% for 5 years is 3.9927. Each annuity payment equals $75,137. The present value of the note is: (Points : 2)

    $75,137
    $94,013
    $300,000
    $375,685

    18.A bond traded at 102 means that: (Points : 2)

    The bond pays 2.5% interest
    The bond traded at $1,025 per $1,000 bond
    The market rate of interest is 2.5%
    The bonds were retired at $1,025 each

    19.Dividend yield is the percent of cash dividends paid to common shareholders relative to the: (Points : 2)

    Common stock’s market value
    Earnings per share
    Investors’ purchase price of the stock
    Amount of retained earnings
    Amount of cash

    20.A bondholder that owns a $1,000, 10%, 10-year bond has: (Points : 2)

    Ownership rights
    The right to receive $10 per year until maturity
    The right to receive $1,000 at maturity
    The right to receive $10,000 at maturity

    21.A company issues at 9% bonds at par with a par value of $100,000 on April 1, which is 4 months after the most recent interest date. How much total cash interest is received on April 1 by the bond issuer? (Points : 2)

    $750
    $5,250
    $1,500
    $3,000
    $6,000

    22.Bonds owned by investors whose names and addresses are recorded by the issuing company and for which interest payments are made with checks to the bondholders, are called: (Points : 2)

    Callable bonds
    Serial bonds
    Registered bonds
    Coupon bonds

    23.The right of common shareholders to protect their proportionate interest in a corporation by having the first opportunity to buy additional proportionate shares of common stock issued by the corporation
    is called a: (Points : 2)

    Preemptive right
    Proxy right
    Right to call
    Financial leverage

    24.Owners of preferred stock often do not have: (Points : 2)

    Ownership rights to assets of the corporation
    Voting rights
    Preference to dividends
    The right to sell their stock on the open market
    Preference to assets at liquidation

    25.The dividend yield is computed by dividing: (Points : 2)

    Cash dividends per share by earnings per share
    Earnings per share by cash dividends per share
    Cash dividends per share by the market price per share
    Market price per share by cash dividends per share
    Cash dividends per share by retained earnings

    26.A company issues 9%, 20-year bonds with a par value of $750,000. The current market rate is 9%. The amount of interest owed to the bondholders for each semiannual interest payment is. (Points : 2)

    $0
    $33,750
    $67,500
    $750,000
    $1,550,000

    27.Secured bonds: (Points : 2)

    Are also referred to as debentures
    Have specific assets of the issuing company pledged as collateral
    Are backed by the issuer’s bank
    Are subordinated to those of other unsecured liabilities
    Are the same as sinking fund bonds

    28.Bonds with a par value of less than $1,000 are known as: (Points : 2)

    Junk bonds
    Baby bonds
    Callable bonds
    Unsecured bonds
    Convertible bonds

    29.A corporation’s distribution of additional shares of its own stock to its stockholders without the receipt of any payment in return is called a: (Points : 2)

    Stock dividend
    Stock subscription
    Premium on stock
    Discount on stock
    Treasury stock

    30.A premium on common stock: (Points : 2)

    Is the amount paid in excess of par by purchasers of newly issued stock
    Is the difference between par value and issue price when the amount paid is below par
    Represents profit from issuing stock
    Represents capital gain on sale of stock
    Is prohibited in most states

    31.A company had a market price of $83.12 per share, earnings per share of $4.87 and dividends per share of $5.40. Its price-earnings ratio is equal to: (Points : 2)

    .056
    .065
    8.09
    15.39
    17.07

    32.Reporting of discontinued segments includes: (Points : 2)

    Income or loss from operating the discontinued segment net of tax and gain or loss from disposal of the segment’s net assets net of tax
    Extraordinary items
    Changes in accounting principle
    Items that are both unusual and infrequent
    Writing off of receivables

    33.One of several ratios that reflects solvency includes the: (Points : 2)

    Acid-test ratio
    Current ratio
    Times interest earned ratio
    Total asset turnover
    Days’ sales in inventory

    34.The ability to meet short-term obligations and to efficiently generate revenues is called: (Points : 2)

    Liquidity and efficiency
    Solvency
    Profitability
    Market prospects
    Creditworthiness

    35.A company’s transactions with its creditors to borrow money and/or to repay the principal amounts of loans are reported as cash flows from: (Points : 2)

    Operating activities
    Investing activities
    Financing activities
    Direct activities
    Indirect activities

    36.A company had net cash flows from operations of $120,000, total cash flows of $500,000 and average total assets of $2,500,000. The cash flow on total assets ratio equals: (Points : 2)

    4.8%
    5.0%
    20.0%
    20.8%
    24.0%

    37.Net sales divided by average accounts receivable is equal to the: (Points : 2)

    Days’ sales uncollected
    Average accounts receivable ratio
    Current ratio
    Profit margin
    Accounts receivable turnover ratio

    38.The comparison of a company’s financial condition and performance across time is known as: (Points : 2)

    Horizontal analysis
    Vertical analysis
    Political analysis
    Financial reporting
    Investment analysis

    39.Selected information from Doodle Company’s for 2010 is below (in millions):
    Inventory decreased $6.0
    Accounts Payable increased by $7.0
    Cost of goods sold $36.50
    Salaries Expense $24.0
    Salaries Payable decreased $6.0
    Accounts Receivable increased by $10.0
    Sales $56.4
    What is the amount of cash paid for salaries by Doodle during 2010? (Points : 2)

    $4.0
    $6.0
    $24.0
    $30.0
    $18.0

    40.A company has sales of $5,417,000, a gross profit ratio of 35%, ending merchandise inventory of $201,425, and total current assets of $1,539,600. What is the days sales’ in inventory ratio for the year? (Points : 2)

    6.10
    20.88
    26.15
    22.67
    15.77

    41.Financial statements with data for two or more successive accounting periods placed in columns side by side, sometimes with changes shown in dollar amounts and percents, are referred to as: (Points : 2)

    Period-to-period statements
    Controlling statements
    Successive statements
    Comparative statements
    Serial statements

    42.The average number of times a company’s inventory is sold during an accounting period, calculated by dividing cost of goods sold by the average inventory balance is equal to the: (Points : 2)

    Accounts receivable turnover
    Inventory turnover
    Days’ sales uncollected
    Current ratio

    43.Which of the following items is not likely to be considered an extraordinary item? (Points : 2)

    Loss from an unexpected union strike
    Condemnation of property by the city government
    Loss of use of property due to a new and unexpected environmental regulation
    Loss due to an earthquake in Florida
    Expropriation of property by a foreign government

    44.Net income divided by net sales is equal to the: (Points : 2)

    Return on total assets
    Profit margin
    Current ratio
    Total asset turnover
    Days’ sales in inventory

    45.Comparative financial statements in which each amount is expressed as a percentage of a base amount and in which the base amount is expressed as 100%, are called: (Points : 2)

    Comparative statements
    Common-size comparative statements
    General-purpose financial statements
    Base line statements
    Index statements

    46.The reporting of net cash provided or used by operating activities that lists the major items of operating cash receipts, such as receipts from customers and subtracts the major items of operating cash disbursements, such as cash paid for merchandise is referred to as the: (Points : 2)

    Direct method of reporting net cash provided or used by operating activities
    Cash basis of accounting
    Classified statement of cash flows
    Indirect method of reporting net cash provided or used by operating activities
    Net method of reporting cash flows from operating activities

    47.The indirect method for the preparation of the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows: (Points : 2)

    Separately lists each major item of operating cash receipts
    Separately lists each major item of operating cash payments
    Reports net income and then adjusts it for items necessary to determine net cash provided or used by operating activities
    Is required if the company is a merchandiser

    48.A company has a profit margin of 5%. If net income is equal to $83,000 and average total assets is equal to $45,000, how much are net sales? (Points : 2)

    $4,150
    $2,250
    $1,660,000
    $6,400
    $128,000

    49.A component of operating efficiency and profitability, calculated by expressing net income as a percent of net sales is equal to the: (Points : 2)

    Acid-test ratio
    Merchandise turnover
    Price earnings ratio
    Accounts receivable turnover
    Profit margin ratio

    50.An investment that is readily convertible to a known amount of cash and that is sufficiently close to its maturity date so that its market value is relatively insensitive to interest rate changes is a(n): (Points : 2)

    Short-term marketable equity security
    Operating activity
    Common stock
    Cash equivalent
    Financing activity

    hamilton company s beginning inventory and purchases during the fiscal year ended 510099

    Hamilton Company s beginning inventory and purchases during the fiscal year ended September 30, 20-2, were as follows:

    Units Unit Price Total Cost

    Oct 1, 20-1 Beginning inventory 300 $20.00 $ 6,000

    October 18 First purchase 500 21.50 10,750

    November 25 2nd purchase 400 22.00 8,800

    January 12, 20-2 3rd purchase 800 23.00 18,400

    March 17 4th purchase 900 23.50 21,150

    June 2 5th purchase 600 24.00 14,400

    August 21 6th purchase 500 25.00 12,500

    September 27 7th purchase 400 25.75 10,300

    4,400 $ 102,300

    Use the following information for the specific identification method.

    There are 1,000 units of inventory on hand on September 30, 20-2. Of these 1,000 units:

    100 are from October 18, 20-1 .. 1st purchase

    300 are from January 12, 20-2 .. 3rd purchase

    100 are from March 17 . 4th purchase

    200 are from June 2 .. 5th purchase

    100 are from August 21 6th purchase

    200 are from September 27 7th purchase

    REQUIRED

    Calculate the total amount to be assigned to cost of goods sold for the fiscal year ended September 30, 20-2, and ending inventory on September 30, 20-2, under each of the following periodic inventory methods:

    Cost of Goods Sold Ending Inventory

    1. FIFO

    2. LIFO

    3. Weighted-average (round calculations to two decimal places)

    4. Specific identification

    hiatt corporation s balance sheet at december 31 2010 is presented below 510101

    Hiatt Corporation s balance sheet at December 31, 2010, is presented below.

    HIATT CORPORATION

    Balance Sheet

    December 31, 2010

    Cash $ 24,600 Accounts payable $ 25,600

    Accounts receivable 45,500 Common stock ($10 par) 80,000

    Allowance for doubtful Retained earnings 127,400

    accounts (1,500)

    Supplies 4,400

    Land 40,000

    Building 142,000

    Accumulated depreciation building (22,000)

    $233,000 $233,000

    During 2011, the following transactions occurred.

    1. On January 1, 2011, Hiatt issued 1,500 shares of $20 par, 7% preferred stock for $33,000.

    2. On January 1, 2011, Hiatt also issued 900 shares of the $10 par value common stock for $21,000.

    3. Hiatt performed services for $280,000 on account.

    4. On April 1, 2011, Hiatt collected fees of $36,000 in advance for services to be performed

    from April 1, 2011, to March 31, 2012.

    5. Hiatt collected $267,000 from customers on account.

    6. Hiatt bought $35,100 of supplies on account.

    7. Hiatt paid $32,200 on accounts payable.

    8. Hiatt reacquired 400 shares of its common stock on June 1, 2011, for $38 per share.

    9. Paid other operating expenses of $188,200.

    10. On December 31, 2011, Hiatt declared the annual preferred stock dividend and a $1.20 per share dividend on the outstanding common stock, all payable on January 15, 2012.

    11. An account receivable of $1,300 which originated in 2010 is written off as uncollectible

    Adjustment data:

    1. A count of supplies indicates that $5,900 of supplies remain unused at year-end.

    2. Recorded revenue earned from item 4 above.

    3. The allowance for doubtful accounts should have a balance of $3,500 at year end.

    4. Depreciation is recorded on the building on a straight-line basis based on a 30-year life and a salvage value of $10,000.

    5. The income tax rate is 30%. (Hint: Prepare the income statement up to income before taxes

    and multiply by 30% to compute the amount.)

    Instructions

    (You may want to set up T accounts to determine ending balances.)

    (a) Prepare journal entries for the transactions listed above and adjusting entries.

    (b) Prepare an adjusted trial balance at December 31, 2011.

    (c) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the year ending

    December 31, 2011, and a classified balance sheet as of December 31, 2011.

    Check figures:

    (b) Totals $671,350

    (c) Net income $54,250

    Total assets $361,200

    hills company s june 30 2010 bank statement and the june ledger account for cash are 510102

    Hills Company s June 30, 2010, bank statement and the June ledger account for cash are summarized here:

    Bank Statement

    Balance June 30, 2013 ——- 6,070

    Cash

    June 30 Balance —————– 6,400

    Required:

    1. Prepare a bank reconciliation. A comparison of the checks written with the checks that have cleared the bank shows outstanding checks of $700. Some of the checks that cleared in June were written prior to June. No deposits in transit were noted in May, but a deposit is in transit at the end of June.

    2. Give any journal entries that should be made as a result of the bank reconciliation.

    3. What is the balance in the Cash account after the reconciliation entries

    4. In addition to the balance in its bank account, Hills Company also has $300 cash on hand. This amount is recorded in a separate T-account called Cash on Hand. What is the total amount of cash that should be reported on the balance sheet at June 30

    how would you respond to sergio alonzo s request 510104

    The Encore Video Store Co. is owned and operated by Sergio Alonzo. The following is an excerpt from a conversation between Sergio Alonzo and Suzie Engel, the chief accountant for The EncoreVideo Store:

    Sergio: Suzie, I ve got a question about this recent balance sheet.

    Suzie: Sure, what s your question?

    Sergio: Well, as you know, I m applying for a bank loan to finance our new store in Cherokee, and I noticed that the accounts payable are listed as $120,000.

    Suzie: That s right. Approximately $100,000 of that represents amounts due our suppliers, and the remainder is miscellaneous payables to creditors for utilities, office equipment, supplies, etc.

    Sergio: That s what I thought. But as you know, we normally receive a 2% discount from our suppliers for earlier payment, and we always try to take the discount.

    Suzie: That s right. I can t remember the last time we missed a discount.

    Sergio: Well, in that case, it seems to me the accounts payable should be listed minus the 2% discount. Let s list the accounts payable due suppliers as $98,000, rather than $100,000. Every little bit helps. You never know. It might make the difference between getting the loan and not.

    How would you respond to Sergio Alonzo s request?

    Needs to be at least 100 words. I would need this by no later than 05/18/2013 12pm CT

    individual tax return problem 4 extra credit required ac c use the following informa 510105

    Individual Tax Return Problem 4

    Extra Credit

    Required:

    Use the following information to complete Phillip and Claire Dunphy s 2013 federal income tax return. If information is missing, use reasonable assumptions to fill in the gaps. Ignore the alternative minimum tax for this problem.

    Any required forms, schedules, and instructions can be found at the IRS Web site (

    www.irs.gov

    ). The instructions can be helpful in completing the forms.

    Facts:

    1. Phillip and Claire are married and file a joint return. Phillip is self-employed as a real estate agent, and Claire is a flight attendant. Phillip and Claire have three dependent children. All three children live at home with Phillip and Claire for the entire year.

    The Dunphys provide you with the following information:

    The Dunphys do not want to contribute to the presidential election campaign.

    The Dunphys live at 3701 Brighton Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90018

    Phillip s birthday is 11/5/1967 and his Social Security number is 321-44-5766.

    Claire s birthday is 5/12/1970 and her Social Security number is 567-77-1258

    Haley s birthday is 11/6/2001 and her Social Security number is 621-92-8751.

    Alex s birthday is 2/1/2003 and her Social Security number is 621-92-9926.

    Luke s birthday is 12/12/2007 and his Social Security number is 621-99-9926.

    The Dunphys do not have any foreign bank accounts or trusts.

    2. Claire is a flight attendant for Western American Airlines (WAA), where she earned $57,000 in salary. WAA withheld federal income tax of $6,375, state income tax of $1,800, Los Angeles city income tax of $675, Social Security tax of $3,600, and Medicare tax of $825.

    3. Phillip and Claire received $300 of interest from State Savings Bank on a joint account. They also received a qualified dividend of $395 on jointly owned stock in Xila Corporation.

    4. Phillip s Real Estate business is named “Phillip Dunphy Realty.” His business is located at 645 Grove Street, Los Angeles, CA 90018, and his employer identification number is 93-3488888. Phillip s gross receipts during the year were $730,000. Phillip uses the cash method of accounting for his business. Phillip s business expenses are as follows:

    Advertising $5,000

    Professional Dues $800

    Professional Journals $200

    Employee wages $48,000

    Insurance on office contents $1,120

    Accounting services $2,100

    Miscellaneous office expense $500

    Utilities and telephone $3,360

    Payroll taxes $3,600

    Depreciation- to be calculated (by you the paid tax preparer)

    On March 20, Phillip moved his business out of the old offices at 1103 Allium Lane into a newly constructed and equipped office on Grove Street. Phillip sold his old office building and all its furnishings. Phillip s expenditures for the new office building are as follows:

    Date Acquired

    Asset

    Cost

    3/20

    Land

    $300,000

    3/20

    Office Building

    $2,500,000

    3/20

    Furniture

    $200,000

    4/1

    Computer System

    $350,000

    6/1

    Artwork

    $150,000

    on january 1 2011 lurch inc had the following stockholders equity balances 510106

    On January 1, 2011, Lurch, Inc. had the following stockholders equity balances.

    Common Stock (500,000 shares issued) $1,000,000

    Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value 500,000

    Common Stock Dividends Distributable 100,000

    Retained Earnings 600,000

    During 2011, the following transactions and events occurred.

    1. Issued 50,000 shares of $2 par value common stock as a result of 10% stock dividend declared on December 15, 2010.

    2. Issued 30,000 shares of common stock for cash at $5 per share.

    3. Purchased 25,000 shares of common stock for the treasury at $6 per share.

    4. Declared and paid a cash dividend of $111,000.

    5. Sold 8,000 shares of treasury stock for cash at $6 per share.

    6. Earned net income of $360,000.

    Instructions

    Prepare a stockholders equity statement section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2011.

    assignment 1 auditing 300 509355

    You have just been employed as a junior auditor at the chartered accountant firm of PMG.

    Upon joining the firm, the partners request that you review the firm s audit clients to ensure

    that the independence requirements of APES 110 are being met. Your review has revealed

    the following:

    (a) Paul Smith, the current senior manager on the audit of John Deer (JD) Ltd which

    specialises in the production in mining equipment, has just entered into a business

    venture (PJ Motors) with the CFO of JD Ltd, whereby they are both equal partners in

    a business retailing motor vehicles. Paul has informed you that this is not a problem

    since the 2 entities (JD Ltd and PJ Motors) are in different non-competing industries.

    (b) PMG has recently accepted an engagement to provide audit services to Stocky Ltd.

    Upon discussion with the manager of the Audit Team for Stocky Ltd, you were

    informed that one of PMG s partner, Jeff Bates daughter currently works at Stocky

    Ltd. You later found out that Jeff s daughter is the Financial Accountant at Stocky

    Ltd. Jeff Bates is not on the Audit Team of Stocky Ltd.

    (c) PMG s secretarial services division has a pool of experienced and qualified company

    secretaries. These qualified company secretaries are either outsourced full time or

    part time to listed entities in Australia. Due to cost effective quality services, this

    division has a high growth in the last three years. Treck Manufacturing Ltd and

    Platinum Fabricators Ltd are two listed companies to whom secretarial services have

    been outsourced and assurance services provided.

    (d) Audrey Jones, a senior auditor at PMG, has been on the audit team of Barminco Ltd

    for a number of years. The account clerk of Barminco resigned 9 months ago, and

    Barminco has yet to replace him. As a result, Barminco is significantly behind in their

    bookkeeping. The financial controller of Barminco recently asked one of PMG s

    partners to allow Audrey to join Barminco s accounting team for a period of up to 6

    months in order to bring their bookkeeping up-to-date and ready for the year end

    audit.

    (e) While discussing with one of your colleagues, Shelly McDonald, she told you that she

    had a great weekend attending a musical show at the theatre. She further let out that

    the tickets to the show were gifted to her by the CFO of Macmahon Ltd at the

    completion of this year s review because he was so please with the speed and

    efficiency to which the audit was completed.

    Required

    For each of the independent situations above, and using the conceptual framework in

    APES 110, answer the following questions.

    1. Identify potential threats to independence & recommend safeguards to reduce

    the independence threat (5 marks)

    2. Provide an objective assessment of whether audit independence can be

    achieved

    assignment 1 auditing 300 semester 2 2013 509356

    You have just been employed as a junior auditor at the chartered accountant firm of PMG.
    Upon joining the firm, the partners request that you review the firm s audit clients to ensure
    that the independence requirements of APES 110 are being met. Your review has revealed
    the following:
    (a) Paul Smith, the current senior manager on the audit of John Deer (JD) Ltd which
    specialises in the production in mining equipment, has just entered into a business
    venture (PJ Motors) with the CFO of JD Ltd, whereby they are both equal partners in
    a business retailing motor vehicles. Paul has informed you that this is not a problem
    since the 2 entities (JD Ltd and PJ Motors) are in different non-competing industries.
    (b) PMG has recently accepted an engagement to provide audit services to Stocky Ltd.
    Upon discussion with the manager of the Audit Team for Stocky Ltd, you were
    informed that one of PMG s partner, Jeff Bates daughter currently works at Stocky
    Ltd. You later found out that Jeff s daughter is the Fina ncial Accountant at Stocky
    Ltd. Jeff Bates is not on the Audit Team of Stocky Ltd.
    (c) PMG s secretarial services division has a pool of experienced and qualified company
    secretaries. These qualified company secretaries are either outsourced full time or
    part time to listed entities in Australia. Due to cost effective quality services, this
    division has a high growth in the last three years. Treck Manufacturing Ltd and
    Platinum Fabricators Ltd are two listed companies to whom secretarial services have
    been ou tsourced and assurance services provided.
    (d) Audrey Jones, a senior auditor at PMG, has been on the audit team of Barminco Ltd
    for a number of years. The account clerk of Barminco resigned 9 months ago, and
    Barminco has yet to replace him. As a result, Barminco is significantly behind in their
    bookkeeping. The financial controller of Barminco recently asked one of PMG s
    partners to allow Audrey to join Barminco s accounting team for a period of up to 6
    months in order to bring their bookkeeping up-to -date and ready for the year end
    audit.
    (e) While discussing with one of your colleagues, Shelly McDonald, she told you that she
    had a great weekend attending a musical show at the theatre. She further let out that
    the tickets to the show were gifted to her by the CFO of Macmahon Ltd at the
    completion of this year s review because he was so please with the speed and
    efficiency to which the audit was completed.
    Required
    For each of the independent situations above, and using the conceptual framework in
    APES 110, answer the following questions.
    1. Identify potential threats to independence & recommend safeguards to reduce
    the independence threat
    (5 marks)
    2. Provide an objective assessment of whether aud it independence can be
    achieved
    (5 marks)
    (Total 10 Marks)

    assignment 2 lasa 1 cost and decision making analysis 509357

    Assignment 2: LASA 1 Cost and Decision-Making Analysis

    Cheryl Montoya picked up the phone and called her boss, Wes Chan, Vice President of Marketing at Piedmont Fasteners Corporation.

    Cheryl: Wes, I’m not sure how to go about answering the questions that came up at the meeting with the President yesterday.

    Wes: What’s the problem

    Cheryl: The president wanted to know the break-even point for each of the company’s products, but I am having trouble figuring them out.

    Wes: I’m sure you can handle it, Cheryl. And, by the way, I need your analysis on my desk tomorrow morning at 8:00 sharp in time for the follow-up meeting at 9:00.

    Piedmont Fasteners Corporation makes three different clothing fasteners at its manufacturing facility in North Carolina. Data concerning these products appear below:

    Velcro Metal Nylon

    Normal annual sales volume

    100,000 units 200,000 units 400,000 units
    Unit selling price $1.65 $1.50 $0.85
    Variable cost per unit $1.25 $0.70 $0.25

    Total fixed expenses are $400,000 per year.

    All three products are sold in highly competitive markets, so the company is unable to raise its prices without losing unacceptably large numbers of customers.

    The company has a very effective lean production system, so there is no beginning or ending work in process or finished-goods inventories.

    Using the module readings, the Argosy University online library resources, and the Internet, research break-even point and costing systems. Analyze the case based on your research and what you have learned so far in the course.

    Respond to the following:

    • Calculate the company’s overall break-even point in total sales dollars. Explain your methodology (approximately 2 pages).
    • Of the total fixed costs of $400,000: $20,000 could be avoided if the Velcro product were dropped, $80,000 if the Metal product were dropped, and $60,000 if the Nylon product were dropped. The remaining fixed costs of $240,000 consist of common fixed costs such as administrative salaries and rent on the factory building that could be avoided only by going out of business entirely (approximately 2 pages):
      1. Calculate the break-even point in units for each product. Explain your methodology.
      2. Determine the overall profit of the company if the company sells exactly the break-even quantity of each product. Present your results.
    • Evaluate costing systems for this company. Explain if this company should be using a job order or process-costing system to accumulate costs (1 page).

    Be sure to include your calculations in Microsoft Excel format.

    Write a 5 6-page report in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M3_A2.doc.

    By Sunday, November 10, 2013, deliver your report and calculations to the M3: Assignment 2 Dropbox.

    This assignment is worth 200 points and will be graded using a rubric. Download and read the rubric to understand the expectations.

    Assignment 2 Grading Criteria Maximum Points

    Calculate the company’s overall break-even point in total sales dollars.

    Explain your methodology.

    30

    Calculate the break-even point in units for each product in the scenario.

    Explain your methodology.

    52
    Explain if the company sells exactly the break-even quantity of each product, what will be the overall profit of the company and show your results. 16
    Compare and explain if this company should be using a job order or process-costing system to accumulate costs. 82
    Write in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrate ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; and display accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. 20
    Total: 200

    assignment 3 end of the week assignment course project task financial structures 509359

    Assignment 3: End of the Week Assignment: Course Project Task Financial Structures

    This week, research financial structures of ventures, using the following questions to guide you:

    • What is the typical financial structure of ventures in the industry you have selected?
    • What are the financial alternatives available to ventures in this industry? What are the advantages and disadvantages of these alternatives?
    • Do many of the firms have preferred stock in their capital structure?
    • Do any of the firms have convertible preferred stock in their capital structure? Are you surprised by your findings?

    Present the information and your analysis as a three-page report formatted in the APA style. Submit your report to the W4: Assignment 3 Dropbox by Tuesday, October 8, 2013. Include your Excel worksheets.

    Grading Criteria Maximum Points
    Analyzed existing capital structure of industry chosen. 25
    Analyzed information to draw conclusions about important features of venture financing. 25
    Presented a structured document free of spelling and grammatical errors. 5
    Properly cited sources using APA format. 5
    Total: 60

    baker amp baker chapters 9 12 healthcare finance hlth420 1304a 01 509360

    Healthcare Finance: HLTH420 – 1304A 01
    Unit3 – Individual Project
    500-700 words
    Your facility has the following payer mix:

    40% commercial insurances = 800
    25% Medicare insurance = 500
    15% Medicaid insurance = 300
    15% liability insurance = 300
    5% all others including self-pay = 100

    Assume that for the time in question you have 2000 cases in the proportions above. (what are the proportions of the total cases for each payer?)
    (Calculated above )
    The average Medicare rate for each case is $6200- use this as the baseline. Commercial insurances average 110% of Medicare, Medicaid averages 65% of Medicare, Liability insurers average 200% of Medicare and the others average 100% of Medicare rates. (what are the individual reimbursement rates for all 5 payers?)

    Calculating Individual Reimbursement Rates for the 5 Payers (Commercial Medicare Medicaid Liability Self pay / Other
    Medicare Rate (Baseline) $6200
    Commercial Insurance 110%
    Medicaid 65% of Medicare
    Liability Insurers 200% of Medicare
    Others Average 100% of Medicare Rates
    1. What are the expected rates of reimbursement for this time frame for each payer? What is your expected A/R?
    2. What rate should you charge for these services (assuming one charge rate for all payers)?(this gives you your total A/R.) Calculate the total charges for all cases based on this rate.
    3. What is the difference between the two A/R rates above? Can you collect it from the patient? What happens to the difference?
    Rate to be charged for Services $12,400 *125% Total= $15,500 2000 *$15,500= 31,00,000.00You may not collect over R/C contracted fees if you are a Participating Provider. However you would be able to collect on a self-pay patient.Differences would need to be a write-off. Cost Fixed Variable Direct IndirectMaterials/Supplies Variable Direct Wages Fixed Direct Utility/Building Variable Indirect Medications Variable Direct Licensing of Facility Fixed Indirect Insurances Fixed Indirect PerDiem Staff Variable Direct Materials/Supplies $ 2,270.00 Wages $ 2,000.00 Utility/Building 1,125.00 Insurances $ 175.00 TFC/TVC $2,175.00 $3,395.00 Contribution Margin $14,105,XXX-XX-XXXX000 $5,565,000.00 CM per case (NNN) NNN-NNNN2000 $2,782.50 BREAK EVEN $2600000/$2782.5 934.41 $150,000 PROFIT 150,000=2782.50V -(NNN) NNN-NNNN P=(V x AR) – TFC V= (NNN) NNN-NNNN The only payers possible to use for an NIC
    4. Which of these costs are fixed (does not change z)? Which are variable(changes)? Direct or indirect? Your costs can be either direct or indirect, which is a description of how they are associated with production. (Direct costs are associated with specific units while indirect costs are a lump sum that goes into doing business in general and cannot be easily measured with the production of a specific thing).
    o materials/supplies (gowns, drapes, bedsheets) variable indirect
    o Wages (nurses, technicians) fixed indirect
    o Utility, building, usage exp (lights, heat, technology) fixed indirect
    o Medications fixed direct
    o
    o Licensing of facility fixed indirect
    o Per diem staff fixed indirect
    o Insurances (malpractice, business etc.) fixed direct
    5. Calculate the contribution margin for one case (in $) with the following costs for this period, per case: a. materials/supplies: $2270 b. Wages: $2000 c. Utility, building, usage exp: $1125 d. Insurances (malpractice, business etc.): $175
    6. Using the above information, determine which is fixed (remains the same ) and which cost is variable (changes). Then calculate the breakeven volume of cases in units for this period.
    7. Suppose you want to make $150,000 profit between this period and next period to fund an expansion to the NICU, how many cases would you have to see? At what payer mix would this

    baker amp baker chapters 9 12 healthcare finance hlth420 1304a 01 509361

    Healthcare Finance: HLTH420 – 1304A 01

    Unit3 – Individual Project

    500-700 words

    Your facility has the following payer mix:

    40% commercial insurances = 800

    25% Medicare insurance = 500

    15% Medicaid insurance = 300

    15% liability insurance = 300

    5% all others including self-pay = 100

    Assume that for the time in question you have 2000 cases in the proportions above. (what are the proportions of the total cases for each payer?)

    (Calculated above )

    The average Medicare rate for each case is $6200- use this as the baseline. Commercial insurances average 110% of Medicare, Medicaid averages 65% of Medicare, Liability insurers average 200% of Medicare and the others average 100% of Medicare rates. (what are the individual reimbursement rates for all 5 payers?)

    Calculating Individual Reimbursement Rates for the 5 Payers (Commercial Medicare Medicaid Liability Self pay / Other

    Medicare Rate (Baseline) $6200

    Commercial Insurance 110%

    Medicaid 65% of Medicare

    Liability Insurers 200% of Medicare

    Others Average 100% of Medicare Rates

    1. What are the expected rates of reimbursement for this time frame for each payer? What is your expected A/R?

    2. What rate should you charge for these services (assuming one charge rate for all payers)?(this gives you your total A/R.) Calculate the total charges for all cases based on this rate.

    3. What is the difference between the two A/R rates above? Can you collect it from the patient? What happens to the difference?

    Rate to be charged for Services $12,400 *125% Total= $15,500 2000 *$15,500= 31,00,000.00You may not collect over R/C contracted fees if you are a Participating Provider. However you would be able to collect on a self-pay patient.Differences would need to be a write-off. Cost Fixed Variable Direct IndirectMaterials/Supplies Variable Direct Wages Fixed Direct Utility/Building Variable Indirect Medications Variable Direct Licensing of Facility Fixed Indirect Insurances Fixed Indirect PerDiem Staff Variable Direct Materials/Supplies $ 2,270.00 Wages $ 2,000.00 Utility/Building 1,125.00 Insurances $ 175.00 TFC/TVC $2,175.00 $3,395.00 Contribution Margin $14,105,XXX-XX-XXXX000 $5,565,000.00 CM per case (NNN) NNN-NNNN2000 $2,782.50 BREAK EVEN $2600000/$2782.5 934.41 $150,000 PROFIT 150,000=2782.50V -(NNN) NNN-NNNN P=(V x AR) – TFC V= (NNN) NNN-NNNN The only payers possible to use for an NIC

    4. Which of these costs are fixed (does not change z)? Which are variable(changes)? Direct or indirect? Your costs can be either direct or indirect, which is a description of how they are associated with production. (Direct costs are associated with specific units while indirect costs are a lump sum that goes into doing business in general and cannot be easily measured with the production of a specific thing).

    o materials/supplies (gowns, drapes, bedsheets) variable indirect

    o Wages (nurses, technicians) fixed indirect

    o Utility, building, usage exp (lights, heat, technology) fixed indirect

    o Medications fixed direct

    o

    o Licensing of facility fixed indirect

    o Per diem staff fixed indirect

    o Insurances (malpractice, business etc.) fixed direct

    5. Calculate the contribution margin for one case (in $) with the following costs for this period, per case: a. materials/supplies: $2270 b. Wages: $2000 c. Utility, building, usage exp: $1125 d. Insurances (malpractice, business etc.): $175

    6. Using the above information, determine which is fixed (remains the same ) and which cost is variable (changes). Then calculate the breakeven volume of cases in units for this period.

    7. Suppose you want to make $150,000 profit between this period and next period to fund an expansion to the NICU, how many cases would you have to see? At what payer mix would this

    burleson corporation s projected benefit obligation was 30 509363

    1. On January 1, 2013, Burleson Corporation s projected benefit obligation was $30 million. During 2013 pension benefits paid by the trustee were $4 million. Service cost for 2013 is $12 million. Pension plan assets (at fair value) increased during 2013 by $6 million as expected. At the end of 2013, there was no prior service cost and a negligible balance in net loss AOCI. The actuary s discount rate was 10%.

    Required:

    Determine the amount of the projected benefit obligation at December 31, 2013. (Enter your answer in millions.)

    2. Pension data for Sterling Properties include the following:

    Required:

    Service cost, 2013 $112

    Projected benefit obligation, January 1, 2013 850

    Plan assets (fair value), January 1, 2013 900

    Prior service cost AOCI (2013 amortization, $8) 80

    Net loss AOCI (2013 amortization, $1) 101

    Interest rate, 6%

    Expected return on plan assets, 10%

    Actual return on plan assets, 11%

    Required

    Determine pension expense for 2013.

    3. Pension data for Millington Enterprises include the following:

    Discount rate, 10%

    Projected benefit obligation, January 1 $ 360

    Projected benefit obligation, December 31 465

    Accumulated benefit obligation, January 1 300

    Accumulated benefit obligation, December 31 415

    Cash contributions to pension fund, December 31 150

    Benefit payments to retirees, December 31 54

    Required:

    Assuming no change in actuarial assumptions and estimates, determine the service cost component of pension expense for the year ended December 31. (Enter your answer in millions.)

    4. Abbott and Abbott has a noncontributory, defined benefit pension plan. At December 31, 2013, Abbott and Abbott received the following information:

    ($in millions)

    Projected Benefit Obligation

    Balance, January 1 $120

    Service cost 20

    Interest cost 12

    Benefits paid (9)

    Balance, December 31 $143

    Plant Assets

    Balance, January 1 $80

    Actual return on plan assets 9

    Contribution 2011 20

    Benefits paid (9)

    Balance, December 31 $100

    The expected long-term rate of return on plan assets was 10%. There was no prior service cost and a negligible net loss AOCI on January 1, 2013.

    Required:

    a. Determine Abbott and Abbott s pension expense for 2013.

    b. Prepare the journal entries to record Abbott and Abbott s pension expense, funding, and payment for 2013.

    busn379 final 509365

    1.(TCO 4) Which of the following is true regarding the evaluation of projects?(Points : 4)

    sunk costs should be included
    erosion effects should not be considered
    financing costs need to be included
    opportunity costs are relevant

    2.(TCO 4) There are several disadvantages to the payback method, among them:(Points : 4)

    payback ignores the time value of money.
    payback can be used in conjunction with time adjusted methods of evaluation.
    payback is easy to use and to understand.
    none of the above is a disadvantage.

    3.(TCO 3 and 4) A net present value of zero implies that an investment: (Points : 4)

    has no initial cost.
    has an expected return that is less than the required return.
    should be rejected even if the discount rate is lowered.
    never pays back its initial cost.
    is earning a return that exactly matches the requirement.

    4.(TCO 3 and 4) What is the net present value of a project with the following cash flows, if the discount rate is 10 percent

    Year

    0

    1

    2

    3

    4

    Cash flow

    -$32,000

    $9,000

    $10,000

    $15,200

    $7,800

    (Points : 4)

    $1,085.25
    $1,193.77
    $3,498.28
    $4,102.86
    $4,513.15

    5.(TCO 4) Howard Company is considering a new project that will require an initial cash investment of $575,000. The project will produce no cash flows for the first three years. The projected cash flows for years 4 through 8 are $73,000, $112,000, $124,000, $136,000, and $145,000, respectively. How long will it take the firm to recover its initial investment in this project? (Points : 4)

    5.81 years
    6.05 years
    6.96 years
    7.90 years
    This project never pays back

    6.(TCO 4) Ignoring the option to expand: (Points : 4)

    overestimates the internal rate of return on a project.
    ignores the possibility that a negative net present value project might be positive, given changes over time.
    ignores the possibility that one variable is the primary source of the forecasting risk associated with a project.
    underestimates the net present value of a project.

    7.(TCO 4) ___________, occurs when a firm cannot raise financing for a project under any circumstances. (Points : 4)

    contingency planning.
    hard rationing.
    soft rationing.
    capital constraint.
    scenario analysis.

    8.(TCO 3 and 4) ABC Cameras is considering an investment that will have a cost of $10,000 and the following cash flows: $6,000 in year 1, $4,000 in year 2 and $3,000 in year 3. Assume the cost of capital is 10%. Which of the following is true regarding this investment? (Points : 4)

    The net present value of the project is $11,000
    This project should be accepted because it has a negative net present value
    This project should be accepted because it has a payback higher than 3 years
    The net present value of the project is close to $1,000

    9.(TCO 4) Assume Company X plans to invest $60,000 in new computers. Using Tables 9.6 and 9.7 of your textbook (Page 277), which is the second year depreciation amount under MACRS? (Points : 4)

    $12,000
    $19,200
    $19,800
    None of the above

    10.(TCO 1 and 4) Assume a corporation has earnings before depreciation, and taxes of $100,000, depreciation of $40,000, and that it has a 30 percent tax bracket. What are the after-tax cash flows for the company?(Points : 4)

    $82,000
    $110,000
    $42,000
    none of these

    11.(TCO 8) Which of the following factors will affect the expected rate of return on a security? (Points : 4)

    multiple states of the economy
    probability of occurrence for any one economic state
    market rate of return given a particular economic state
    all of the above will affect the expected rate of return

    12.(TCO 8) Which statement is true regarding risk?(Points : 4)

    the expected return is usually the same as the actual return
    a key to assess risk is determining how much risk an investment adds to a portfolio
    risks can always be decreased or mitigated by the financial manager
    the higher the risk, the lower the return investors require for the investment

    13.(TCO 8) The stock of Chocolate Galore is expected to produce the following returns, given the various states of the economy. What is the expected return on this stock?

    State of Economy

    Probability of State of Economy

    Rate of Return

    Recession

    .02

    -.06

    Normal

    .88

    .11

    Boom

    .10

    .17

    (Points : 4)

    7.33 percent
    9.82 percent
    11.26 percent
    11.33 percent
    11.50 percent

    14.(TCO 8) You own a portfolio that consists of $8,000 in stock A, $4,600 in stock B, $13,000 in stock C, and $5,500 in stock D. What is the portfolio weight of stock D? (Points : 4)

    17.68 percent
    17.91 percent
    18.42 percent
    19.07 percent
    19.46 percent

    15.(TCO 8) Stock A has an expected return of 14 percent and a beta of 1.3. Stock B has an expected return of 10 percent and a beta of .9. Both stocks have the same reward-to-risk ratio. What is the risk-free rate? (Points : 4)

    1.0 percent
    1.8 percent
    2.3 percent
    2.5 percent
    3.1 percent

    1.(TCO 8) Weak form market efficiency states that the value of a security is based on: (Points : 4)

    all public and private information.
    historical information only.
    all publicly available information.
    all publicly available information, plus any data that can be gathered from insider trading.
    random information with no clear distinction as to the source of that information.

    2.(TCO 5) Royal Petroleum Co. can buy a piece of equipment that can be financed with debt at a cost of 6 percent (after-tax) and common equity at a cost of 18 percent. Assume debt and common equity each represent 50 percent of the firm’s capital structure. What is the weighted average cost of capital? (Points : 4)

    between 3 and 9%
    exactly 12%
    more than 14%
    exactly 11%
    none of the above

    3.(TCO 5, 6 and 7) An issue of common stock is selling for $57.20. The year end dividend is expected to be $2.32, assuming a constant growth rate of six percent. What is the required rate of return?(Points : 4)

    10.3%
    10.1%
    4.1%
    5.8%

    4.(TCO 5, 6 and 7) Which of the following is true regarding the cost of debt? (Points : 4)

    It is the return that the firm s creditors demand on new borrowing.
    It is always equal to the weighted cost of capital.
    An appropriate method to compute the cost of debt is using the coupon rate of current bonds outstanding.
    All of the above are true.

    5.(TCO 5) Which of the following is true regarding the cost of retained earnings? (Points : 4)

    it is irrelevant to the WACC
    requires new funds to be raised
    need to be adjusted for the flotation costs
    have a cost, which is the opportunity cost associated with stockholder funds

    6.(TCO 4) A project has the following cash flows. What is the internal rate of return

    Year

    0

    1

    2

    3

    Cash flow

    -$443,600

    $224,800

    $224,800

    $67,200

    (Points : 4)

    less than 7%
    between 8 and 11%
    more than 13%
    exactly 15%

    7.(TCO 5, 6 and 7) Which one of the following is a correct statement? (Points : 4)

    Current tax laws favor debt financing.
    A decrease in the dividend growth rate increases the cost of equity.
    An increase in the systematic risk of a firm will decrease the firm’s cost of capital.
    A decrease in a firm’s debt-equity ratio will usually decrease the firm’s cost of capital.
    The cost of preferred stock decreases when the tax rate increases.

    8.(TCO 5, 6 and 7) The preferred stock of Blue Sky Air pays an annual dividend of $7.25 a share and sells for $54 a share. The tax rate is 35 percent. What is the firm’s cost of preferred stock? (Points : 4)

    8.56 percent
    9.32 percent
    11.85 percent
    13.43 percent
    14.47 percent

    9.(TCO 2) Which one of the following occurs if a firm files for Chapter 7 bankruptcy, but does not generally occur if the firm files for Chapter 11 bankruptcy? (Points : 4)

    a petition is filed in federal court
    administrative fees are incurred
    a list of creditors is compiled
    pre-bankruptcy shareholders tend to lose part, if not all, of their investment in the firm
    a trustee-in-bankruptcy is elected by the creditors

    10.(TCO 5) Which of the following statements is true regarding the cost of capital? (Points : 4)

    The cost of capital should not consider any flotation costs.
    All other being equal, it is preferable to use book value weights than market value weights.
    The WACC is the most appropriate discount rate for all projects.
    Depends primarily on the use of the funds, not the source.

    11.(TCO 2) Which of the following increases the cash account? (Points : 4)

    Goods are sold on credit
    An interest payment on a notes payable is made
    A payment due is received from a client
    Raw materials are purchased and paid for with credit

    12.(TCO 2) Which of the following statements is true? (Points : 4)

    The optimal credit policy minimizes the total cost of granting credit.
    Firms should avoid offering credit at all cost.
    An increase in a firm’s average collection period generally indicates that an increased number of customers are taking advantage of the cash discount.
    Character, refers to the ability of a firm to meet its credit obligations out its operating cash flows.
    The optimal credit policy, is the policy that produces the largest amount of sales for a firm.

    13.(TCO 2) All else constant, a decrease in the accounts receivable period will: (Points : 4)

    lengthen the accounts payable period.
    shorten the inventory period.
    lengthen the operating cycle.
    shorten the cash cycle.
    shorten the accounts payable period.

    14.(TCO 2) Highland, Inc. has the following estimated quarterly sales for next year. The accounts receivable period is 30 days. How much does the firm expect to collect in the fourth quarter? Assume that each month has 30 days.

    Q1

    Q2

    Q3

    Q4

    Sales

    $3,200

    $4,500

    $4,400

    $2,900

    (Points : 4)

    $3,250
    $3,400
    $3,600
    $3,750
    $3,900

    15.(TCO 1) Which one of the following actions best matches the primary goal of financial management? (Points : 4)

    increasing the net, working capital while lowering the long-term asset requirements
    improving the operating efficiency, thereby increasing the market value of the stock
    increasing the firm s market share
    reducing fixed costs and increasing variable costs
    increasing the liquidity of the firm by transferring short-term debt into long-term debt

    1.(TCO 1) Which of the following are capital structure concerns?

    I. how to obtain short-term financing
    II. the company’s financing mix
    III. the cost of funds
    IV. how and where to raise money (Points : 4)

    I and II
    I, II and III
    II, III and IV
    I, III and IV
    All of the above

    2.(TCO 1) Market value is important to the financial manager because: (Points : 4)

    It reflects the value of the asset based on generally-accepted accounting principles.
    Is a crucial component of the balance sheet, and can impact the financial statements.
    Market values reflect the amount someone is willing to pay today for an asset. The market value of an asset reflects its historical cost.

    3.(TCO 1) Use the following tax table to answer this question:

    Taxable Income

    Tax Rate

    $0-

    $50,000

    15%

    $50,001-

    75,000

    25

    $75,001-

    100,000

    34

    $100,001-

    335,000

    39

    $335,001-

    10,000,000

    34

    John has taxable income of $389,745. What is John s average tax rate? (Points : 4)

    33%
    34%
    36%
    37%
    38%

    4.(TCO 3) Regional Bank offers you an APR of nine percent compounded quarterly, and Local Bank offers you an EAR of 9.15 percent for a new automobile loan. You should choose ______________ because its _______ is lower. (Points : 4)

    Regional Bank, APR
    Local Bank, EAR
    Regional Bank, EAR
    Local Bank, APR

    5.(TCO 3) You deposited $5,000 in your bank account today. An increase in which of the following will increase the future value of your deposit, assuming that all interest is reinvested? Assume the interest rate is a positive value. Select all that apply:(Points : 4)

    interest rate
    initial amount of your deposit
    frequency of the interest payments

    length of the investment period

    6.(TCO 3) Thirteen years from now, you will be inheriting $30,000. What is this inheritance worth to you today, if you can earn four percent interest compounded annually? (Points : 4)

    $18,017.22
    $20,741.87
    $23,190.98
    $26,359.88
    $28,846.15

    7.(TCO 3) Paper Pro needed a new store. The company spent $65,000 to refurbish an old shop and create the current facility. The firm borrowed 75 percent of the refurbishment cost at eight percent interest for 11 years. What is the amount of each monthly payment? (Points : 4)

    $91.05
    $284.13
    $556.50
    $682.87
    $731.60

    8.(TCO 3) Which type of loan is comparable to the present value of a future lump sum? (Points : 4)

    effective annual rate
    amortized
    interest-only
    annual percentage
    pure discount

    9.(TCO 3) Fanta Cola has $1,000 par value bonds outstanding at 12 percent interest. The bonds mature in 25 years. What is the current price of the bond if the YTM is 13 percent? Assume annual payments. (Points : 4)

    $1078
    $1085
    $927
    $1000

    10.(TCO 6) The market where new securities are offered is called the _____ market. (Points : 4)

    primary
    main
    secondary
    principal
    dealer

    11.(TCO 7) A taxpaying, levered firm’s optimal capital structure: (Points : 4)

    is 100 percent equity financing.
    consists of equal amounts of debt and equity financing.
    is the mixture of debt and equity financing that minimizes the firm’s aftertax cost of debt.
    is the mixture of debt and equity financing that minimizes the weighted average cost of capital.
    is 100 percent debt financing.

    12.(TCO 3) SmithKline Company’s bonds are currently selling for $1,157.75 per $1000 par-value bond. The bonds have a 10 percent coupon rate and will mature in 10 years. What is the approximate yield to maturity? (Points : 4)

    6.96%
    7.69%
    11.0%
    12.1%

    13.(TCO 8) Which of the following is true regarding bonds? (Points : 4)

    Bonds do not carry default risk.
    Bonds are sensitive to changes in the interest rates.
    Moody s and Standard and Poor s provide information regarding a bond s interest rate risk.
    Municipal bonds are free of default risk.
    None of the above is true

    14.(TCO 8) Two years ago, Maple Enterprises issued six percent, 20-year bonds and Temple Corp issued six percent, 10-year bonds. Since their time of issue, interest rates have increased. Which of the following statements is true of each firm’s bond prices in the market, assuming they have equal risk? (Points : 4)

    Maple’s decreased more than Temple’s
    Temple’s decreased more than Maple’s
    Maple’s increased more than Temple’s
    They are both priced the same

    15.(TCO 6) A call provision in a bond agreement grants the issuer the right to: (Points : 4)

    repurchase the bonds prior to maturity at a pre-specified price.
    replace the bonds with equity securities.
    repurchase the bonds after maturity at a pre-specified price.
    change the coupon rate, provided the bondholders are notified in advance.
    buy back the bonds on the open market prior to maturity.

    candy cain s candy company 509366

    On January1, 2013, Candy Cain s Candy Company, a company that produces candy for specific events and holidays for large corporations, is solely owned by Candace Cain had the following account balances in their general ledger (see attached page of T-accounts):

    During the month of January, the company engaged in the following transactions:

    Jan 2 Received $3,600 cash from customers as payment on account.

    Paid $5,000 towards a new vehicle that costs $30,000. The remainder was borrowed from the bank.

    5 Candace deposited a dividend check of $500 into her personal account.

    9 Payday—employees are paid a total of $3,200 for a two-week, 8 hours a day, 5 days a week work schedule; some of which is for work performed in December. (HINT: Look in the General Ledger)

    12 Candy Cain s Candy Company received $12,000 cash from customers for services to be rendered in April.

    13 Paid $600 for six months of ads in the Candytime a magazine for candy makers, with ads to be run monthly, starting this month

    14 Purchased an insurance policy that covered the company for two years, $7,200.

    15 Purchased supplies on account, $3,000.

    16 Recorded serviced rendered on account of $15,000.

    20 Received $6,000 from Mardi Gras Parties, Inc. for services rendered.

    21 Paid for 80% of the CURRENT balance in Accounts Payable.

    22 Received $10,000 from customers on account.

    23 Payday employees are paid a total of $3,200.

    28 Paid $300 utility bill for January; Paid landlord, who raised the rent starting February 1 to $750.

    29 A new employee was hired to help with the marketing of products. She starts on February 1st, she will be making $1,500 per week working Monday through Friday

    31 Candace received $5,000 from the company as a dividend in lieu of salary.

    Step-by-step through the accounting cycle:

    Write journal entries for each transaction listed above on notebook paper: This is your General Journal.

    Post each transaction to the ledger, checking off each entry as you enter it into the ledger

    After all entries are posted, then strike a balance in each account. Each one should have its normal balance.

    Prepare an unadjusted trial balance on the worksheet provided to test DR = CR (follow model in Chapter 4 or in lecture notes) recording only the DR or CR balances for each account. If DR don t = CR, find your errors. This should total $128,153 and the Cash balance should be $5,103.

    Prepare adjusting entries in the General Journal at the end of January. Note that the problem is based on the actual calendar for January 2009. Some useful information follows:

    1) Depreciation is for the month is $433.

    2) Unearned Fees at January 31 are $10,000.

    3) Supplies on hand at the end of January total $2,200.

    4) Prepaid Insurance balance includes a policy that expires $400 per month.

    5) Record accrued salaries for one last week of January 31.

    6) Record the expiration of one month of insurance on the new policy.

    7) Accrue interest on the note payable of $250.

    8) Adjust for expired rent

    9) Adjust for advertising services received.

    Be sure to SHOW CALCULATIONS for these!!! Round to nearest dollar!

    Record the adjusting entries in the adjustments columns on the worksheet and also post them to the General Ledger. Strike new balances in the accounts in the GL.

    Then add/subtract the adjustments as appropriate from the unadjusted trial balance to the adjusted trial balance (are these amounts the same as the balances you found in the ledger in part f.?) Follow model provided in the text.

    Test to see if DR = CR in the Adjusted Trial Balance columns on the worksheet. If not, find your errors.

    Sort amounts out from the adjusted TB to appropriate columns (Income Statement and Balance Sheet) on the worksheet. Find balances in each column. Do DR = CR here? And why not However, is the difference between the two sets of columns the same? (It should be equal to $9,717)

    Prepare three financial statements: Income, Statement of Owner s Equity, and Balance Sheet in GOOD FORM. Use examples in the textbook.

    Now write all necessary closing entries in your General Journal and post them to the General Ledger

    Finally prepare a Post-Closing Trial Balance (see Blackboard Course Materials for an example) to test the accuracy of the journalizing/posting of the closing entries.

    chapter 11 cost of capital block 509368

    Chapter 11 Cost Of Capital (Block)

    1. Capital structure is a firm s mix of

    a. Short-term financing
    b. Long-term financing
    c. Neither (a) or (b)

    2. Which form of capital finance is considered less expensive because of the tax effect?

    a. Equity financing
    b. Debt financing
    c. Personal financing

    3. The after-tax cost of debt where the yield is 14.0 percent and the corporate tax rate is 35 percent is

    a. 4.9%
    b. 9.10%
    c. 14.0%

    4. United Business Forms capital structure is as follows:

    Debt 65%
    Preferred stock 5%
    Common equity 30%

    Under this debt-oriented arrangement, the after-tax cost of debt is 9.8 percent; the cost of preferred stock is 12 percent; and the cost of common equity (in the form of retained earnings) is 15.5 percent. The weighted average cost of capital is

    a. 4.65%
    b. 6.37%
    c. 11.62% ;

    5. The overall weighted average cost of capital is used instead of costs for specific sources of funds because

    a. Use of the cost for specific sources of capital would make investment decisions inconsistent.
    b. A project with the highest return would always be accepted under the specific cost criteria.
    c. Investments funded by low cost debt would have an advantage over other investments.
    d. Both a and c are correct.

    6. Debreu Beverages has an optimal capital structure that is 50% common equity, 40% debt, and 10% preferred stock. Debreu’s pretax cost of equity is 12%. Its pretax cost of preferred equity is 7%, and its pretax cost of debt is also 7%. If the corporate tax rate is 35%, what is the weighted average cost of capital?

    a. Between 7% and 8%
    b. Between 8% and 9%
    c. Between 9% and 10%
    d. Between 10% and 12%

    7. For a firm paying 7% for new debt, the higher the firm’s tax rate
    a. The higher the after-tax cost of debt.
    b. The lower the after-tax cost of debt.
    c. After-tax cost is unchanged.
    d. Not enough information to judge.

    8. A firm is paying an annual dividend of $3.63 for its preferred stock which is selling for $62.70. There is a selling cost of $3.30. What is the after-tax cost of preferred stock if the firm’s tax rate is 33%?
    a. 2.02%
    b. 4.09%
    c. 5.79%
    d. 6.11%

    9. The cost of equity capital in the form of new common stock will be higher than the cost of retained earnings because of
    a. The existence of taxes.
    b. The existence of flotation costs.
    c. Investors’ unwillingness to purchase additional shares of common stock.
    d. The existence of financial leverage.

    10. Within the capital asset pricing model
    a. The risk-free rate is usually higher than the return in the market.
    b. The higher the beta the lower the required rate of return.
    c. Beta measures the volatility of an individual stock relative to a stock market index.
    d. Two of the above are true.

    Chapter 12 – The Capital Budgeting Decision (Block)

    11. A capital investment evaluation method designed to measure the length of time required to recoup an initial investment.

    a. Payback period&nbs p;
    b. Net present value
    c. Accounting rate of return

    12. A capital investment evaluation method that discounts future cash flows to their present value; the present value of all the future cash flows is compared with the amount of the proposed expenditure to determine if the investment should be made.

    a. Payback period
    b. Net present value ;
    c. Accounting rate of return
    d. Discounted payback period

    Use information given below to complete the following two (2) questions:
    Recycle Paper Company utilizes the payback method to evaluate investment proposals. It is presently considering two investment opportunities as indicated below. The cost of capital for Recycle Paper Company is 14%.

    Investment A Investment B
    Net Investment = $100,000 Net Investment = $500,000
    Expected Expected
    Year Cash Inflows Year Cash Inflows
    1 $25,000 1 $125,000
    2 $25,000 2 $250,000
    3 $25,000 3 $300,000
    4 $25,000 4 $225,000
    5 $25,000 5 $100,000

    13. Compute the payback period for Investment A (round to 1 decimal place if needed).

    a. 2.4 years
    b. 3.5 years
    c. 4.0 years

    14. Compute the net present value for Investment A.

    a. -$14,175
    b. $14,175
    c. -$26,275
    d. $26,275

    15. In most capital budgeting decisions the emphasis is on

    a. Accounting net income
    b. Operating net income
    c. Cash flow
    d. Accrual income

    16. Which capital investment evaluation method does not require the use of time value of money technique?

    a. Payback period
    b. Net present value
    c. Internal rate of return

    17. Cash flow can be said to equal

    a. Operating income less taxes plus depreciation.
    b. Operating income less taxes.
    c. Operating income before depreciation and taxes plus depreciation.
    d. Operating income after taxes minus depreciation.

    18. Assuming that a firm has no capital rationing constraint and that a firm’s investment alternatives are not mutually exclusive, the firm should accept all investment proposals

    a. For which it can obtain financing.
    b. That have a positive net present value.
    c. That have positive cash flows.
    d. That provide returns greater than the after-tax cost of debt.

    19. The Net Present Value Method is a more conservative technique for selecting investment projects than the Internal Rate of Return method because the NPV method

    a. Assumes that cash flows are reinvested at the project’s internal rate of return.
    b. Concentrates on the liquidity aspects of investment projects.
    c. Assumes that cash flows are reinvested at the firm’s weighted average cost of capital.
    d. None of these.

    20. Capital rationing assumes:

    a. A limited amount of capital is available.
    b. A limited amount of investments are available.
    c. Maximum profitability will be obtained.
    d. B and C.

    Chapter 14 (Capital Markets)

    21. The major supplier of funds for investment in the whole economy is

    a. Businesses
    b. Households
    c. Government
    d. Financial institutions

    22. The difference between brokers and dealers is that

    a. Brokers can trade only on organized exchanges and dealers can trade only over-the-counter
    b. Dealers own the securities they trade and brokers act as agent for buyer and seller
    c. Brokers own the securities they trade and dealers act as agent for buyer and seller
    d. There is no difference

    23. Corporations prefer bonds over preferred stock for financing their operations because

    a. Preferred stocks required a dividend
    b. Bond interest rates change with the economy while stock dividends remain constant
    c. The after-tax cost of debt is less than the cost of preferred stock
    d. None of the above

    24. A firm that buys an issue of securities from a company and resells it to the public is called

    a. Initial public offering firm
    b. Venture capitalist
    c. Underwriter &n bsp;

    25. Which of the following will be less expensive to raise when a company requires funds?

    a. External Funds
    b. Government Funds
    c. Internal Funds

    26. Transactions in currently outstanding securities are traded in

    a. Primary markets
    b. Secondary markets
    c. Overseas markets

    27. Corporations prefer bonds over preferred stock for financing their operations because

    a. Preferred stocks require a dividend.
    b. Bond interest rates change with the economy while stock dividends remain constant.
    c. The after-tax cost of debt is less than the cost of preferred stock.
    d. None of these.

    28. Which of the following is an internal source of funds?

    a. Cash flow from depreciation (tax shield)
    b. Net loss
    c. Repurchase of debt securities
    d. Bank loan

    29. Which of the following are benefits of financial intermediaries?

    a. Increase market liquidity
    b. Provide a direct market for investors
    c. Act as agents of the government
    d. Only a and b

    30. The Securities Act of 1933 is primarily concerned with

    a. Original issues of securities.
    b. Secondary trading of securities.
    c. National securities market.
    d. Protecting customers of bankrupt securities firms.

    31. The Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is primarily concerned with
    a. A central market system.
    b. Regulation of organized exchanges.
    c. Protecting customers of bankrupt securities firms.
    d. Original issues of securities.

    Chapter 15 (Investment Banking: Public and Private Placement)

    32. Which of the following is considered an advantage (for the corporation) of going public?

    a. The president becomes a public relations person
    b. Extensive and time-consuming reporting requirements
    c. Increased liquidity for the corporation s shareholders
    d. The cost of flotation

    33. Publicly-traded companies generally have

    a. More pressure for short-term performance
    b. Less pressure for short-term performance
    c. Very strong stock market performance
    d. Low distribution costs in selling securities

    34. Which of the following is a characteristic of leveraged buyouts?

    a. Buyouts are usually financed by debt
    b. Some corporate assets are often sold after the buy-out is completed
    c. Funds for the buy-out are raised through securities markets
    d. All of the above are characteristics

    35. Publicly-traded companies generally have

    a. More pressure for short-term performance
    b. Less pressure for short-term performance
    c. Very strong stock market performance
    d. Low distribution costs in selling securities

    36. Which of the following is a characteristic of leveraged buyouts?

    a. Buyouts are usually financed by debt
    b. Some corporate assets are often sold after the buy-out is completed
    c. Funds for the buy-out are raised through securities markets
    d. All of the above are characteristics

    37. When an investment banker acts as an “underwriter” he

    a. Gives a “firm commitment” to purchase the securities from the corporation at a set price.
    b. The company suffers a decline in earnings after taxes.
    c. May sell as many securities as possible and return the rest unsold.
    d. May give advice to management.

    38. In issuing stock, the term “spread” refers to

    a. The profit the managing investment banker gets for an issue of stock.
    b. The disparity between the initial asking price and the average price for the stock issued some months
    later.
    c. The difference between what the corporation gets for new issues of stock and what the public pays for
    the stock.
    d. The total cost to the corporation for issuing new stock.

    39. Generally, the total cost to issue securities (as a percent of total proceeds)

    a. Is greater for common stock than for debt and increases as the size of the issue increases.
    b. Is greater for debt than for common stock and decreases as the size of the issue increases.
    c. Is greater for debt than for common stock and increases as the size of the issue increases.
    d. Is greater for common stock than for debt and decreases as the size of the issue increases.

    40. Which of the following is considered an advantage (for the corporation) of going public?

    a. The president becomes a public relations man.
    b. Extensive and time-consuming reporting requirements.
    c. Increased liquidity for the corporation’s shareholders.
    d. The cost of flotation.

    comprehensive accounting project 509371

    KENDALL SCHOOL OF BUSINESS

    ACC272 B1 – Fall 2013

    Comprehensive Accounting Project

    Four students from Kendall Hospitality program, decide to start a business and open an icecream shop in the month of June.

    The students names are: Victoria, Matt, Jean & Tracy.

    They form a company (partnership) and name it “Chicago Summers”. They decide to use the same name for the ice cream shop.

    The students divide the duties – Matt and Victoria will make the purchases needed to produce the Ice Creams. They will hire two helpers to be at the ice cream shop during business hours, prepare and sell the ice cream. Jean will supervise the employees

    She also will be in charge of counting the materials at the end of each business day and communicate to Victoria and Matt how much more they need to purchase. Tracy is in charge of keeping the accounting records of the company as well as preparing the financial statements for each month

    Here are the transactions Chicago Summers company incurs during the month of June & July 2010:

    June Transactions

    Setting up the shop

    Description

    Quantity in LB

    Price

    Total Cost

    Milk

    200

    $ 1.25

    $ 250.00

    Sugar

    200

    $ 0.75

    $ 150.00

    Vanilla

    1

    $ 500.00

    $ 500.00

    Cacao

    200

    $ 3.00

    $ 600.00

    Butter

    200

    $ 2.00

    $ 400.00

    Each of the students/owners invests $15,000 of cash in the Chicago Summer Company.

    The students open a business checking account with City Bank and deposit their initial investments.

    6/1 They sign a 2-year lease to rent a space on Michigan Avenue for the Chicago Summers Ice cream shop.

    Monthly rent of the space is $2000, payable on the first day of each month.

    6/2 They purchase Ice cream Equipments, on account for 12,600, payable in three equal installments, in the next three months

    The first installment is due for payment in July 2nd. It is estimated that the equipment has a life of 7 years with no salvage value.

    6/2 They purchase Furniture for the Ice Cream Shop on account for 10,000 on account, payable in 45 days.

    It is estimated that the furniture will be used for 5 years, with no salvage value.

    6/2 They purchase a laptop for $1200 on account to be used exclusively in keeping track of the accounting records.

    Payment for the computer is due in 45 days. Estimated life of the laptop is 3 years with no salvage value.

    6/2 They purchase a QuickBooks software, to be used in Accounting, for $1500 on account – payable in 45 days.

    It is estimated that the software will be used for 10 years.

    6/5 They call a technician to install the Ice Cream equipment. Estimated bill of the technician is $700. At the end of the month, the company has not yet received the bill, however, the technician completed in full his installation work.

    6/5 They hire two employees. Total salary cost for the two employees is $1500 a month, payable at the end of the month.

    Starting the Operations

    6/5 Victoria & Matt are in charge of purchasing the key materials to make the ice cream. At the beginning of the month they purchase the following:

    Description

    Quantity in LB

    Price

    Total Cost

    Milk

    200

    $ 1.35

    $ 270.00

    Sugar

    200

    $ 0.90

    $ 180.00

    Butter

    100

    $ 2.20

    $ 220.00

    $ 670.00

    6/5 They incur freight costs of $50, which they pay in full

    6/15 Victoria and Matt purchase additional materials. Because of market changes, they realize that rices for their key ingredients have gone up.

    Throughout the month, the Chicago Summers ice cream shop is able to generate a total of $6,000 in cash sales.

    Inventory

    6/30 Jean is in charge of keeping track of key material quantities. She knows that most of the materials purchased during the month have been used in making ice cream. However some quantities still are left unused. These will be used in the next month’s production of ice cream. At the end of the month, Jean performs a physical count of the materials left. Below is the result of the count.

    Quantity in LB

    Description

    Milk

    50

    Sugar

    70

    Vanilla

    0.5

    Cacao

    50

    Butter

    90

    June’s financial statement

    6/30 Tracy is in charge of keeping the accounting records. She records all the economic events presented above by doing the following:

    Preparing the journal entries,

    Posting the appropriate journal entries in the T accounts

    Preparing the Trial balance for the month of June

    Completing the Balance Sheet and Income Statement for the month of June

    July Transactions

    7/1 The company paid the monthly rent

    ‘7/1 Paid on account for an ad in the local radio station for $700

    7/2 Paid the first installment due for the purchase of the Ice Cream Equipment (total $4200)

    7/5 Purchased the following inventory items:

    Description

    Quantity in LB

    Price

    Total Cost

    Milk

    200

    $ 1.30

    $ 260.00

    Sugar

    200

    $ 0.90

    $ 180.00

    Cacao

    100

    $ 2.80

    $ 280.00

    Butter

    100

    $ 1.90

    $ 190.00

    $ 910.00

    7/5 Incurred $50 of freight cost, which they paid in cash

    All the inventory left over from June and purchased July was fully utilized in making the ice creams in July

    7/15 Paid in full the Furniture purchased on account in June.

    7/15 Paid in full the cost of the laptop

    7/15 Paid in full the cost of the QuickBooks software

    7/30 Paid the salaries of the two employees

    7/30 Collected $7,000 in cash sales

    Instructions

    I June Financial Statements

    Assume you are doing Tracy’s job:

    Analyze each of June’s transactions and prepare the journal entries

    Calculate the depreciation and amortization expenses for the month of June for the tangible and intangible assets

    Calculate Cost of Goods Sold assuming the company uses a periodic inventory system and FIFO for cost method

    Post the appropriate journal entries in T accounts

    Prepare a trial balance

    Prepare the Balance Sheet and Income Statement for the month of June.

    II July Financial Statements

    Repeat the steps above for July:

    Analyze each of July’s transactions and prepare the journal entries

    Calculate the depreciation and amortization expenses for the month of July for the tangible and intangible assets

    Calculate Cost of Goods Sold assuming the company uses a periodic inventory system and FIFO for cost method

    Post the appropriate journal entries in T accounts

    Prepare a trial balance

    Prepare the Balance Sheet and Income Statement for the month of July

    III Analysis of Accounting Records

    Prepare a horizontal analysis by comparing June and July balance sheets

    Calculate the following ratios:

    1 Current ratio (Liquidity)

    2 Return on Assets (Profitability)

    3 Debt to Total Assets ratio (Solvency)

    Assume you are reviewing the Financial Statements and the analysis together with Victoria, Matt and Jean

    What are some of the conclusions? What should the company do to stay in business?

    comprehensive problem 3 general weapons 509372

    General Weapons, Inc. (Comprehensive time value of money)Mr. Rambo, President of General Weapons, Inc., was pleased to hear that he had three offers from major defense companies for his latest missile firing automatic ejector. He will use a discount rate of 10 percent to evaluate each offer.

    OfferI

    $1,600,000 now plus $825,000 from the end of years 6 through 15. Also if the product goes over $60 million in cumulative sales by the end of year 15, he will receive an additional $3,000,000. Rambo thought there was an 80 percent probability this would happen.

    Offer II

    Thirty percent of the buyer s gross margin for the next four years. The buyer in this case is Air Defense, Inc. (ADI). Its gross margin is 70 percent. Sales for year 1 are projected to be $3.75 million and then grow by 35 percent per year. This amount is paid today and is not discounted.

    Offer III

    A trust fund would be set up for the next four years. At the end of that period, Rambo would receive the proceeds (and discount them back to the present at
    10 percent). The trust fund called for semiannual payments for the next four years of $150,000 (a total of $300,000 per year). The payments would start immediately. Since the payments are coming at the beginning of each period instead of the end, this is an annuity due. To look up the future value of the annuity due in the tables, add 1 to n, where n is the number of periods, and subtract 1 from the value in the table. Assume the annual interest rate on this annuity is 10 percent annually (5 percent semiannually). Determine the present value of the trust fund s final value.

    Required: Find the present value of each of the three offers and then indicate which one has the highest present value.

    comprehensive problem 3 general weapons inc 509373

    COMPREHENSIVE PROBLEM 3 GENERAL WEAPONS, INC.

    COMPREHENSIVE PROBLEM 3 GENERAL WEAPONS, INC.

    General Weapons, Inc. (Comprehensive time value of money) Mr. Rambo, President of General Weapons, Inc., was pleased to hear that he had three offers from major defense companies for his latest missile firing automatic ejector. He will use a discount rate of 10 percent to evaluate each offer.

    Offer I $1,200,000 now plus $625,000 from the end of years 6 through 15. Also if the product goes over $60 million in cumulative sales by the end of year 15, he will receive an additional $3,000,000. Rambo thought there was an 80 percent probability this would happen.
    Offer II Thirty percent of the buyer s gross margin for the next four years. The buyer in this case is Air Defense, Inc. (ADI). Its gross margin is 60 percent. Sales for year 1 are projected to be $3.5 million and then grow by 35 percent per year. This amount is paid today and is not discounted.
    Offer III A trust fund would be set up for the next four years. At the end of that period, Rambo would receive the proceeds (and discount them back to the present at
    10 percent). The trust fund called for semiannual payments for the next four years of $110,000 (a total of $220,000 per year). The payments would start immediately. Since the payments are coming at the beginning of each period instead of the end, this is an annuity due. To look up the future value of the annuity due in the tables, add 1 to n (16 + 1) and subtract 1 from the value in the table. Assume the annual interest rate on this annuity is 10 percent annually (5 percent semiannually). Determine the present value of the trust fund s final value.

    Required: Find the present value of each of the three offers and then indicate which one has the highest present value.

    costello corporation manufactures a single product the standard cost per unit of pro 509374

    Costello Corporation manufactures a single product. The standard cost per unit of product is shown below.

    Direct materials 2 pound plastic at $7.46 per pound $ 14.92 Direct labor 1.50 hours at $11.00 per hour 16.50 Variable manufacturing overhead 9.75 Fixed manufacturing overhead 11.25 Total standard cost per unit $52.42

    The predetermined manufacturing overhead rate is $14 per direct labor hour ($21.00 1.50). It was computed from a master manufacturing overhead budget based on normal production of 9,000 direct labor hours (6,000 units) for the month. The master budget showed total variable costs of $58,500 ($6.50 per hour) and total fixed overhead costs of $67,500 ($7.50 per hour). Actual costs for October in producing 4,600 units were as follows.

    Direct materials (9,340 pounds) $ 72,292 Direct labor (6,730 hours) 75,645 Variable overhead 67,811 Fixed overhead 30,919 Total manufacturing costs $246,667

    The purchasing department buys the quantities of raw materials that are expected to be used in production each month. Raw materials inventories, therefore, can be ignored.

    (a) Compute all of the materials and labor variances.

    davis corp s 509375

    Davis Corp s comparative balance sheet and income statement for the last year appear below:
    Balance Sheet
    For the Year Ended December 31
    2009 2008
    Assets Cash 57,000 23,000
    Accounts receivable 90,000 69,000
    Inventory 30,000 49,000
    Prepaid expenses 9,000 15,000
    Long-term investments 270,000 190,000
    Plant and equipment 450,000 450,000
    Less accumulated depreciation 273,000 231,000
    Total assets 633,000 565,000
    Liabilities Accounts Payable 22,000 45,000
    Accrued liabilities 31,000 24,000
    Taxes payable 18,000 25,000
    Bonds payable 60,000 100,000
    Deferred taxes 39,000 24,000
    Owners Equity Common stock 140,000 110,000
    Retained earnings 323,000 237,000
    Total liabilities and owners equity 633,000 565,000
    Income Statement
    For the year 2009
    Sales 850,000
    Cost of goods sold 410,000
    Gross margin 440,000
    Selling & admin expenses 280,000
    Net operating income 160,000
    Income taxes 48,000
    Net income 112,000
    Davis declared and paid a cash dividend of $26,000 during 2009, and has another cash dividend planned for 2010 in the amount of $40,000. Davis has also planned to spend $150,000 in new capital equipment in 2010.
    Required:
    Prepare a statement of cash flows for Davis Corp. for the year ended December 31, 2009. Use the indirect method.

    davis corp s comparative balance sheet and income statement for the last year appear 509376

    Davis Corp s comparative balance sheet and income statement for the last year appear below:

    Balance Sheet

    For the Year Ended

    December 31

    2009 2008

    Assets

    Cash 57,000 23,000

    Accounts receivable 90,000 69,000

    Inventory 30,000 49,000

    Prepaid expenses 9,000 15,000

    Long-term investments 270,000 190,000

    Plant and equipment 450,000 450,000

    Less accumulated depreciation 273,000 231,000

    Total assets 633,000 565,000

    Liabilities

    Accounts Payable 22,000 45,000

    Accrued liabilities 31,000 24,000

    Taxes payable 18,000 25,000

    Bonds payable 60,000 100,000

    Deferred taxes 39,000 24,000

    Owners Equity

    Common stock 140,000 110,000

    Retained earnings 323,000 237,000

    Total liabilities and owners equity 633,000 565,000

    Income Statement

    For the year 2009

    Sales 850,000

    Cost of goods sold 410,000

    Gross margin 440,000

    Selling & admin expenses 280,000

    Net operating income 160,000

    Income taxes 48,000

    Net income 112,000

    Davis declared and paid a cash dividend of $26,000 during 2009, and has another cash dividend planned for 2010 in the amount of $40,000. Davis has also planned to spend $150,000 in new capital equipment in 2010.

    Required:

    Prepare a statement of cash flows for Davis Corp. for the year ended December 31, 2009. Use the indirect method.

    dermaplus biomed s 509377

    Harry the CEO is asking you to complete a time sensitive project that another person, Selwyn, had started working on before he retired. Harry explains that BioMed has a manufacturing plant that produces a prescription topical cream called DermaPlus , which is used for treating certain skin conditions. Hospitals and pharmacies are the main buyers of DermaPlus . A number of other firms produce creams that are almost identical to DermaPlus and the market for these creams is extremely competitive. In fact, BioMed s current share of the market for this type of topical cream is small, so it has no ability to influence the market price. On the other hand, because Biomed is relatively small compared to the size of the market, it can sell as much of the cream as it likes at the prevailing market price. The plant producing DermaPlus has been operating for a little over three years with the same manufacturing equipment. Currently there are no plans for upgrading or adding to this equipment. Over the last three years, the price of DermaPlus and related creams has been quite volatile and BioMed has tried to react to the changing price by varying its output level to constantly maximize its monthly profit. To date, BioMed has been able to vary monthly production quite easily by taking advantage of a flexible, non union workforce with a large number of part time workers. However, the workforce at the DermaPlus plant is just about to be unionized. Once that happens, it will become much more difficult to vary the amount of labour used in the short run and therefore much more difficult to vary the monthly production of DermaPlus . Before he left, Selwyn had been asked to estimate the short run cost functions for the DermaPlus manufacturing plant. The goal was to use this information to determine the profit maximizing output level and use that information to estimate the optimal size for the new unionized workforce. Harry tells you that DermaPlus and related products are just about to come under the umbrella of a new reference based pricing scheme. Under the new scheme, the government will set the price of DermaPlus and competing creams, and review that price every two years. Once the price has been set, BioMed and other manufacturers simply have to decide how much of the cream, if any, they want to produce and sell. Unfortunately, although the workforce will be unionized in just over a week, the referenced based price for DermaPlus will not be announced for another two months. Consequently, BioMed has to choose the size of its workforce (and therefore its production capacity) before it knows the price it will get for its product. To reduce the uncertainty about this decision, Harry recently hired a consultant with expertise in the pharmaceutical industry and reference based pricing to estimate the price that will be announced for DermaPlus . The consultant estimates that there is a 5% chance that the price will be $50 per unit, a 20% chance that the price will be $100 per unit, and a 75% chance that the price will be $150 per unit. This is the best estimate the consultant can provide given the lack of information coming from the government about the issue. After giving you this background information, Harry asks you to complete the following tasks: 1. Determine the profit maximizing average monthly production capacity for DermaPlus for each of the possible reference based prices identified by the consultant. Estimate the expected monthly profit in each case. 2. Recommend an average daily production capacity for the next 12 months given the uncertainty about the price of DermaPlus . Your recommendation will be used to set the size of the manufacturing plant s unionized workforce. (Note: You simply have to determine the best daily production capacity for the next 12 months, not the number of workers required.) 3. Write a short report summarizing the results of your analysis and any recommendations. Harry makes it clear to you that he is a risk neutral person. You only have a week to complete the analysis, interpret the results, and summarize your findings and recommendations in a brief report. When Harry makes his recommendations about the structure and format of the report you realize that they are much the same for Assignment 1 that you completed at another company. Finally, Harry gives you a copy of one of Selwyn s spreadsheets. This one contains data that Selwyn collected on the variables he thought would be needed to estimate the short run cost functions for DermaPlus and the firm s profit maximizing output level. Harry makes it clear that he has complete confidence in Selwyn s technical abilities and professional judgment and tells you to take the information in Selwyn s spreadsheet at face value and to use it as a starting point for your analysis.

    determine abbott and abbott s pension expense 509378

    Abbott and Abbott has a noncontributory, defined benefit pension plan. At December 31, 2011, Abbott and Abbott received the following information:

    ($in millions)

    Projected Benefit Obligation

    Balance, January 1

    $120

    Service cost

    20

    Interest cost

    12

    Benefits paid

    (9)

    Balance, December 31

    $143

    Plant Assets

    Balance, January 1

    $80

    Actual return on plan assets

    9

    Contribution 2011

    20

    Benefits paid

    (9)

    Balance, December 31

    $100

    The expected long-term rate of return on plan assets was 10%. There was no prior service cost and a negligible net loss AOCI on January 1, 2011.

    Required:

    1.Determine Abbott and Abbott s pension expense for 2011.

    2.Prepare the journal entries to record Abbott and Abbott s pension expense, funding, and payment for 2011.

    devry busn 379 week 8 final exam 509379

    1.(TCO 4) Which of the following is true regarding the evaluation of projects?(Points : 4)

    sunk costs should be included
    erosion effects should be considered
    financing costs need to be included
    opportunity costs are irrelevant

    Question 2. 2.(TCO 4) Which of the following investment ranking methods does not consider the time value of money?(Points : 4)

    net present value method
    payback method
    internal rate of return method
    all of these are time-adjusted methods

    Question 3. 3.(TCO 3 and 4) You can ensure that an investment is expected to create value for(Points : 4)

    have a PI equal to zero.
    produce negative rates of return.
    have positive AARs.
    have positive IRRs.
    have positive NPVs.

    Question 4. 4.(TCO 3 and 4) What is the net present value of a project with the following cash flows, if the discount rate is 10 percent

    Year

    0

    1

    2

    3

    4

    Cash flow

    -$32,000

    $9,000

    $10,000

    $15,200

    $7,800

    (Points : 4)

    $1,085.25
    $1,193.77
    $3,498.28
    $4,102.86
    $4,513.15

    Question 5. 5.(TCO 4) Howard Company is considering a new project that will require an initial cash investment of $575,000. The project will produce no cash flows for the first three years. The projected cash flows for years 4 through 8 are $73,000, $112,000, $124,000, $136,000, and $145,000, respectively. How long will it take the firm to recover its initial investment in this project? (Points : 4)

    5.81 years
    6.05 years
    6.96 years
    7.90 years
    This project never pays back

    Question 6. 6.(TCO 4) The postponement of a project until conditions are more favorable:(Points : 4)

    is a valuable option.
    is referred to as the option to extend.
    could not cause a negative net present value project to become a positive net present value project.
    will generally cause the internal rate of return for a project to decline.

    Question 7. 7.(TCO 4) ___________, occurs when a firm cannot raise financing for a project under any circumstances. (Points : 4)

    contingency planning.
    hard rationing.
    soft rationing.
    capital constraint.
    scenario analysis.

    Question 8. 8.(TCO 4) ABC Cameras is considering an investment that will have a cost of $10,000 and the following cash flows: $6,000 in year 1, $4,000 in year 2 and $3,000 in year 3. Assume the cost of capital is 10%. Which of the following is true regarding this investment? (Points : 4)

    The net present value of the project is approximately $1,011
    This project should be accepted because it has a negative net present value
    This project s payback period is 10 years or more
    All of the above are true

    Question 9. 9.(TCO 4) Assume Company X plans to invest $60,000 in industrial equipment. Using Tables 9.6 and 9.7 of your textbook (Page 277), which is the first year depreciation amount under MACRS? (Points : 4)

    $12,000
    $8,574
    $19,800
    None of the above

    Question 10. 10.(TCO 1 and 4) Assume a corporation has earnings before depreciation, and taxes of $100,000, depreciation of $40,000, and that it has a 30 percent tax bracket. What are the after-tax cash flows for the company?(Points : 4)

    $82,000
    $110,000
    $42,000
    none of these

    Question 11. 11.(TCO 8) Which of the following statements is true regarding systematic risk? (Points : 4)

    is diversifiable
    is the total risk associated with surprise events
    it is measured by beta
    it is measured by standard deviation

    Question 12. 12.(TCO 8) Which statement is true regarding risk?(Points : 4)

    the expected return is usually the same as the actual return
    a key to assess risk is determining how much risk an investment adds to a portfolio
    risks can always be decreased or mitigated by the financial manager
    the higher the risk, the lower the return investors require for the investment

    Question 13. 13.(TCO 8) The stock of Chocolate Galore is expected to produce the following returns, given the various states of the economy. What is the expected return on this stock?

    State of Economy

    Probability of State of Economy

    Rate of Return

    Recession

    .02

    -.06

    Normal

    .88

    .11

    Boom

    .10

    .17

    (Points : 4)

    7.33 percent
    9.82 percent
    11.26 percent
    11.33 percent
    11.50 percent

    Question 14. 14.(TCO 8) You own a portfolio that consists of $8,000 in stock A, $4,600 in stock B, $13,000 in stock C, and $5,500 in stock D. What is the portfolio weight of stock D? (Points : 4)

    17.68 percent
    17.91 percent
    18.42 percent
    19.07 percent
    19.46 percent

    Question 15. 15.(TCO 8) You currently own a portfolio valued at $24,000 that has a beta of 1.1. You have another $8,000 to invest, and would like to invest it in a manner such that the risk of the new portfolio matches that of the overall market. What does the beta of the new security have to be? (Points : 4)

    .46
    .55
    .61
    .70
    .90

    1.(TCO 8) If the financial markets are strong form efficient, then: (Points : 4)

    only the most talented analysts can determine the true value of a security.
    only company insiders have a marketplace advantage.
    technical analysis provides the best tool to gain a marketplace advantage.
    no one person has an advantage in the marketplace.
    every security offers the same rate of return.

    Question 2. 2.(TCO 5) Royal Petroleum Co. can buy a piece of equipment that can be financed with debt at a cost of 9 percent (after-tax) and common equity at a cost of 16 percent. Assume debt and common equity each represent 50 percent of the firm’s capital structure. What is the weighted average cost of capital? (Points : 4)

    between 4.5% and 8%
    more than 13%
    between 12 and 13%
    between 13 and 14%
    none of the above

    Question 3. 3.(TCO 5, 6 and 7) An issue of common stock is expected to pay a dividend of $4.80 at the end of the year. Its growth rate is equal to eight percent. If the required rate of return is 13 percent, what is its current price?(Points : 4)

    $103.68
    $36.92
    $96.00
    none of these

    Question 4. 4.(TCO 5, 6 and 7) Which of the following is not true regarding the cost of debt? (Points : 4)

    It is the return that the firm s creditors demand on new borrowing.
    It is the interest rate that the firm pays on current/existing borrowing.
    An appropriate method to compute the cost of debt is using the YTM of current bonds outstanding.
    It needs to be converted into an after-tax cost.

    Question 5. 5.(TCO 5) Which of the following is not true regarding the cost of retained earnings? (Points : 4)

    it is relevant to the WACC
    does not require new funds to be raised
    has associated flotation costs
    has a cost, which is the opportunity cost associated with stockholder funds

    Question 6. 6.(TCO 4) A project has the following cash flows. What is the internal rate of return

    Year

    0

    1

    2

    3

    Cash flow

    -$195,600

    $99,800

    $87,600

    $75,300

    (Points : 4)

    less than 5%
    between 5 and 15%
    between 15 and 18%
    more than 21%

    Question 7. 7.(TCO 5, 6 and 7) Which one of the following is a correct statement regarding a firm’s weighted average cost of capital (WACC)? (Points : 4)

    the WACC can be used as the required return for all new projects.
    the WACC of a leveraged firm will decrease when the tax rate decreases.
    an increase in the market risk premium will tend to decrease a firm’s WACC.
    the WACC is a starting point for the subjective approach to setting discount rates.
    a reduction in the risk level of a firm will tend to increase the firm’s WACC.

    Question 8. 8.(TCO 5, 6 and 7) The six percent preferred stock of FKH Manufacturing is selling for $62 a share. What is the firm’s cost of preferred stock, if the tax rate is 34 percent and the par value per share is $100? (Points : 4)

    5.98%
    7.06%
    8.05%
    9.68%
    10.10%

    Question 9. 9.(TCO 2) Which one of the following occurs if a firm files for Chapter 7 bankruptcy, but does not generally occur if the firm files for Chapter 11 bankruptcy? (Points : 4)

    a petition is filed in federal court
    administrative fees are incurred
    a list of creditors is compiled
    pre-bankruptcy shareholders tend to lose part, if not all, of their investment in the firm
    a trustee-in-bankruptcy is elected by the creditors

    Question 10. 10.(TCO 5) Which of the following statements is false regarding the cost of capital? (Points : 4)

    The cost of capital should consider the flotation costs.
    All other being equal, it is preferable to use market value weights than book value weights.
    The WACC is the most appropriate discount rate for all projects.
    Should include the cost of retained earnings.

    Question 11. 11.(TCO 2) Select any actions that do not affect the cash account. (Points : 4)

    Goods are sold cash
    An interest payment on a notes payable is made
    A payment due is received from a client
    Dividends are paid to shareholders
    Inventory is purchased and paid for with credit

    Question 12. 12.(TCO 2) Which of the following statements is true (Points : 4)

    There is an opportunity cost associated with not offering credit.
    The costs of the credit application process and the costs expended in the collection process are not carrying costs of granting credit.
    Character, refers to the ability of a firm to meet its credit obligations out its operating cash flows.
    The optimal credit policy, is the policy that produces the largest amount of sales for a firm.

    Question 13. 13.(TCO 2) Which one of the following industries is most apt to have the shortest cash cycle? (Points : 4)

    electric utility company
    airplane manufacturer
    fast-food restaurant
    furniture store
    clothing manufacturer

    Question 14. 14.(TCO 2) Delphinia’s has the following estimated quarterly sales for next year. The accounts receivable period is 30 days. What is the expected accounts receivable balance at the end of the second quarter? Assume each month has 30 days.

    Q1

    Q2

    Q3

    Q4

    Sales

    $1,800

    $1,700

    $2,100

    $1,900

    (Points : 4)

    $567
    $600
    $821
    $1,134
    $1,200

    Question 15. 15.(TCO 1) Why is maximization of the current value per share a more appropriate financial management goal than profit maximization? (Points : 4)

    Because by maximizing the current stock value, you also maximize the company s profit for the year.
    Because this criterion is non-ambiguous.
    Because financial managers always act in the best interest of shareholders.
    Because it creates short-term gains in the financial statements.

    6.(TCO 1) Provide three examples of recent well-known unethical behavior cases. Explain the situation in one or two paragraphs. How do you believe that this behavior affected the firm s value? (Points : 10)

    7.(TCO 4) What are sunk costs? Provide at least two real-life examples of sunk costs for a project. Should sunk costs be included as incremental cash flows? Why or why not? Explain your rationale. (Points : 10)

    8.(TCO 8) What is the difference between business risk and financial risk? If Company A has a higher business risk than Company B, should its cost of capital be higher? Why or why not? Explain your rationale.(Points : 10)

    9.(TCO 2) What are some important factors to consider when conducting a credit evaluation and scoring?(Points : 10)

    0. Do you believe that it is appropriate for some industries to be more leveraged than others? Explain your rationale. (Points : 10)

    1.(TCO 1) Which of the following are capital structure concerns?

    I. how to obtain short-term financing
    II. the company’s financing mix
    III. the cost of funds
    IV. how and where to raise money (Points : 4)

    I and II
    I, II and III
    II, III and IV
    I, III and IV
    All of the above

    Question 2. 2.(TCO 1) Book values are different from market values because: (Points : 4)

    Book values reflect the value of the asset based on generally-accepted accounting principles.
    Book values are used in the company s balance sheet.
    Book values do not reflect the amount someone is willing to pay today for an asset.
    All of the above
    None of the above

    Question 3. 3.(TCO 1) Use the following tax table to answer this question:

    Taxable Income

    Tax Rate

    $0-

    $50,000

    15%

    $50,001-

    75,000

    25

    $75,001-

    100,000

    34

    $100,001-

    335,000

    39

    $335,001-

    10,000,000

    34

    John has taxable income of $389,745. What is John s average tax rate? (Points : 4)

    33%
    34%
    36%
    37%
    38%

    Question 4. 4.(TCO 3) Regional Bank offers you an APR of 19 percent compounded semiannually, and Local Bank offers you an EAR of 19.50 percent for a new automobile loan. You should choose ______________ because its _______ is lower. (Points : 4)

    Regional Bank, APR
    Local Bank, EAR
    Regional Bank, EAR
    Local Bank, APR

    Question 5. 5.(TCO 3) You deposited $11,000 in your bank account today. Which of the following will decrease the future value of your deposit, assuming that all interest is reinvested? Assume the interest rate is a positive value. Select all that apply:(Points : 4)

    a decrease in the interest rate
    increasing the initial amount of your deposit
    increasing the frequency of the interest payments
    decreasing the length of the investment period

    Question 6. 6.(TCO 3) Amy needs to save $20,000 in cash to buy a new car five years from today. She expects to earn 6.5 percent, compounded annually, on her savings. How much does she need to deposit today, if this is the only money she saves for this purpose? (Points : 4)

    $12,468.07
    $12,502.14
    $14,597.62
    $17,044.32
    $17,129.01

    Question 7. 7.(TCO 3) Paper Pro needed a new store. The company spent $65,000 to refurbish an old shop and create the current facility. The firm borrowed 75 percent of the refurbishment cost at eight percent interest for 11 years. What is the amount of each monthly payment? (Points : 4)

    $91.05
    $284.13
    $556.50
    $682.87
    $731.60

    Question 8. 8.(TCO 3) John borrowed $5,500 four years ago at an annual interest rate of 10 percent. The loan term is seven years. Since he borrowed the money, Sonny has been making annual payments of $550 to the bank. Which type of loan does John have? (Points : 4)

    interest-only
    pure discount
    compounded
    amortized
    complex

    Question 9. 9.(TCO 3) Fanta Cola has $1,000 par value bonds outstanding at 12 percent interest. The bonds mature in 25 years. What is the current price of the bond, if the YTM is 11 percent? Assume annual payments. (Points : 4)

    $1080
    $1085
    $925
    $1000

    Question 10. 10.(TCO 6) The market where one shareholder sells shares to another shareholder is called the _____ market. (Points : 4)

    primary
    main
    secondary
    principal
    dealer

    Question 11. 11.(TCO 7) Which one of the following statements concerning financial leverage is correct? (Points : 4)

    Financial leverage increases profits and decreases losses.
    Financial leverage has no effect on a firm’s return on equity.
    Financial leverage, refers to the use of common stock.
    Financial leverage magnifies both profits and losses.
    Increasing financial leverage will always increase the earnings per share.

    Question 12. 12.(TCO 3) What is the approximate yield to maturity for a seven-year bond that pays 11 percent interest on a $1000 face value annually if the bond sells for $952? (Points : 4)

    10.5%
    10.6%
    11.5%
    12.1%

    Question 13. 13.(TCO 8) Which of the following is true regarding bonds? (Points : 4)

    Most bonds do not carry default risk.
    Municipal bonds are free of default risk.
    Bonds are not sensitive to changes in the interest rates.
    Moody s and Standard and Poor s provide information regarding a bond s interest rate risk.
    None of the above is true

    Question 14. 14.(TCO 8) Which one of the following bonds is the most sensitive to interest rate movements (Points : 4)

    zero-coupon, five year
    seven percent annual coupon, five year
    zero-coupon, 10 year
    five percent semi-annual coupon, 10 year
    five percent annual coupon, 10 year

    Question 15. 15.(TCO 6) A sinking fund is an account managed by a bond trustee for the sole purpose of: (Points : 4)

    paying interest payments on a semi-annual basis.
    redeeming bonds early.
    repaying the face value at maturity.
    paying the expenses required to reissue outstanding bonds.
    paying the “balloon payment” at maturity.

    the download instructions for acct 504 case study 2 internal control case study 2 in 509380

    Case Study 2 Internal Control

    Due by Sunday of Week 5,

    LJB Company, a local distributor, has asked your accounting firm to evaluate their system of internal controls because they are planning to go public in the future. The president wants to be aware of any new regulations required of his company if they go public, so he met with a colleague of yours at a local restaurant. The president of the company explained the current system of internal controls to your colleague. Your colleague has since been promoted to a tax position so she has passed on the information below so you can generate recommendations for the partner at your accounting firm to share with the president of LJB Company.

    Since LJB Company is a relatively lean organization, they have a lot of faith in their long-term employees. They have one accountant who serves as treasurer and controller, which streamlines many of their processes. In this dual role, he purchases all of the supplies and pays for these purchases. He also receives the checks and completes the monthly bank reconciliation. The accountant is so busy that the company handles petty cash a bit differently. All employees have access to the petty cash in a desk drawer and are asked to only place a note if they use any of the cash.

    The accountant has recently started using pre-numbered invoices and wants to buy an indelible ink machine to print their checks. The president is waiting to hear from you if this is a necessary purchase before authorizing.

    On payday, the checks are picked up by the accountant and left in his office for pick-up. Before he leaves for the weekend, he will move the checks into a safe in his office.

    The president is still quite embarrassed because he had to fire one of his employees for viewing pornography on a company computer. He later found out this individual was a convicted felon who served time for molesting children. The company had a hard time getting the employee to admit it was him because the company does not assign individual passwords. The president expressed his frustration because both he and the accountant both interview and approve all of the new hires.

    Required:

    Based on the above information, prepare a Word document to address the following.

    1. Inform the president of any new internal control requirements if the company decides to go public. (7 points)

    2. Advise the president of what the company is doing right (they are doing some things well), and also recommend to the president whether or not they should buy the indelible ink machine. When you advise the president, please be sure to reference the applicable internal-control principle that applies. (13 points)

    3. Advise the president of what the company is doing wrong (they are definitely doing some things poorly). Please be sure to include the internal-control principle that is being violated along with a recommendation for improvement. (20 points)

    You must prepare a formal report for the partner to distribute to the president, so no abbreviations or short-hand answers. You also must cite your references. At a minimum, your textbook should be cited.

    Below is a grading rubric for this assignment.

    Category

    Points

    Description

    Understanding

    10

    Demonstrate a strong grasp of the problem at hand. Demonstrate understanding of how the course concepts apply to the problem.

    Analysis

    30

    Apply original thought to solving the business problem. Apply concepts from the course material correctly toward solving the business problem.

    Execution

    10

    Write your answer clearly and succinctly using strong organization and proper grammar. Use citations correctly.

    Total

    50

    A quality paper will meet or exceed all of the above requirements.

    Best Practices

    The following are best practices in preparing this paper.

    • Cover page: Include whom you prepared the paper for, who prepared it, and the date.
    • Table of contents: List the main ideas and sections of the paper and the pages where they are located. Illustrations should be included separately.
    • Introduction:Use a header on your paper. This will indicate that you are introducing the paper.

      The purpose of an introduction or opening is to

    1. introduce the subject and why the subject is important;

    2. preview the main ideas and the order in which they will be covered; and

    3. Establish the tone of the document.

    Include in the introduction a reason for the audience to read the paper. Also include an overview of what you will cover and the importance of the material. (This should include or introduce the questions you are asked to answer in each assignment.)

    • Body of the report: Use a header with the name of the case study. An example is, “The Development of Hotel X: A World Class Resort.” Proceed to break out the main ideas: State the main ideas, the major points of each idea, and provide evidence. Show some type of division, such as separate, labeled sections; separate groups of paragraphs; or headers. Include the information you found during your research and investigation.
    • Summary and conclusion: Summarizing is similar to paraphrasing but presents the gist of the material in fewer words than the original. An effective summary identifies the main ideas and the major support points from the body of the report; minor details are left out. Summarize the benefits of the ideas and how they affect the subject.
    • Work cited: Use the citation format specified in the Syllabus.

    depreciation from form 4562 not claimed on form 1125 a or elsewhere on return attach 507869

    year 2011 or tax year beginning , 2011, ending , 20 ? See separate instructions. OMB No. 1545-0123 2011 TYPE OR PRINT Name Number, street, and room or suite no. If a P.O. box, see instructions. City or town, state, and ZIP code A Check if: 1a Consolidated return (attach Form 851) . b Life/nonlife consolidated return . . . 2 Personal holding co. (attach Sch. PH) . . 3 Personal service corp. (see instructions) . . 4 Schedule M-3 attached B Employer identification number C Date incorporated D Total assets (see instructions) $ E Check if: (1) Initial return (2) Final return (3) Name change (4) Address change Income 1a Merchant card and third-party payments. For 2011, enter -0- . . . . . . 1a b Gross receipts or sales not reported on line 1a (see instructions) . . . . . 1b c Total. Add lines 1a and 1b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1c d Returns and allowances plus any other adjustments (see instructions) . . . 1d e Subtract line 1d from line 1c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1e 2 Cost of goods sold from Form 1125-A, line 8 (attach Form 1125-A) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3 Gross profit. Subtract line 2 from line 1e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4 Dividends (Schedule C, line 19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5 Interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 6 Gross rents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 7 Gross royalties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 8 Capital gain net income (attach Schedule D (Form 1120)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 9 Net gain or (loss) from Form 4797, Part II, line 17 (attach Form 4797) . . . . . . . . . . . 9 10 Other income (see instructions—attach schedule) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 11 Total income. Add lines 3 through 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ? 11 Deductions (See instructions for limitations on deductions.) 12 Compensation of officers from Form 1125-E, line 4 (attach Form 1125-E) . . . . . . . . . . ? 12 13 Salaries and wages (less employment credits) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 14 Repairs and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 15 Bad debts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 16 Rents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 17 Taxes and licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 18 Interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 19 Charitable contributions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 20 Depreciation from Form 4562 not claimed on Form 1125-A or elsewhere on return (attach Form 4562) . . 20 21 Depletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 22 Advertising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 23 Pension, profit-sharing, etc., plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 24 Employee benefit programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 25 Domestic production activities deduction (attach Form 8903) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 26 Other deductions (attach schedule) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 27 Total deductions. Add lines 12 through 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ? 27 28 Taxable income before net operating loss deduction and special deductions. Subtract line 27 from line 11. 28 29a Net operating loss deduction (see instructions) . . . . . . . . . . 29a b Special deductions (Schedule C, line 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . 29b c Add lines 29a and 29b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29c Tax, Refundable Credits, and Payments 30 Taxable income. Subtract line 29c from line 28 (see instructions) . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 31 Total tax (Schedule J, Part I, line 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 32 Total payments and refundable credits (Schedule J, Part II, line 21) . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 33 Estimated tax penalty (see instructions). Check if Form 2220 is attached . . . . . . . . ? 33 34 Amount owed. If line 32 is smaller than the total of lines 31 and 33, enter amount owed . . . . . 34 35 Overpayment. If line 32 is larger than the total of lines 31 and 33, enter amount overpaid . . . . . 35 36 Enter amount from line 35 you want: Credited to 2012 estimated tax ? Refunded ? 36 Sign Here Under penalties of perjury, I declare that I have examined this return, including accompanying schedules and statements, and to the best of my knowledge and belief, it is true, correct, and complete. Declaration of preparer (other than taxpayer) is based on all information of which preparer has any knowledge. ? Signature of officer Date ? Title May the IRS discuss this return with the preparer shown below (see instructions)? Yes No Paid Preparer Use Only Print/Type preparer’s name Preparer’s signature Date Check if self-employed PTIN Firm’s name ? Firm’s EIN ? Firm’s address ? Phone no. For Paperwork Reduction Act Notice, see separate instructions. Cat. No. 11450Q Form 1120 (2011) Form 1120 (2011) Page 2 Schedule C Dividends and Special Deductions (see instructions) (a) Dividends received (b) % (c) Special deductions (a) × (b) 1 Dividends from less-than-20%-owned domestic corporations (other than debt-financed stock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Dividends from 20%-or-more-owned domestic corporations (other than debt-financed stock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Dividends on debt-financed stock of domestic and foreign corporations . . . . . 4 Dividends on certain preferred stock of less-than-20%-owned public utilities . . . 5 Dividends on certain preferred stock of 20%-or-more-owned public utilities . . . . 6 Dividends from less-than-20%-owned foreign corporations and certain FSCs . . . 7 Dividends from 20%-or-more-owned foreign corporations and certain FSCs . . . 8 Dividends from wholly owned foreign subsidiaries . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Total. Add lines 1 through 8. See instructions for limitation . . . . . . . . 10 Dividends from domestic corporations received by a small business investment company operating under the Small Business Investment Act of 1958 . . . . . 11 Dividends from affiliated group members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Dividends from certain FSCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Dividends from foreign corporations not included on lines 3, 6, 7, 8, 11, or 12 . . . 14 Income from controlled foreign corporations under subpart F (attach Form(s) 5471) . 15 Foreign dividend gross-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 IC-DISC and former DISC dividends not included on lines 1, 2, or 3 . . . . . . 17 Other dividends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Deduction for dividends paid on certain preferred stock of public utilities . . . . 19 Total dividends. Add lines 1 through 17. Enter here and on page 1, line 4 . . . ? 20 Total special deductions. Add lines 9, 10, 11, 12, and 18. Enter here and on page 1, line 29b . . . . . . . ? Form 1120 (2011) Form 1120 (2011) Page 3 Schedule J Tax Computation and Payment (see instructions) Part I–Tax Computation 1 Check if the corporation is a member of a controlled group (attach Schedule O (Form 1120)) . . . . ? 2 Income tax. Check if a qualified personal service corporation (see instructions) . . . . . . . . ? 2 3 Alternative minimum tax (attach Form 4626) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4 Add lines 2 and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5 a Foreign tax credit (attach Form 1118) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5a b Credit from Form 8834, line 30 (attach Form 8834) . . . . . . . . . . 5b c General business credit (attach Form 3800) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5c d Credit for prior year minimum tax (attach Form 8827) . . . . . . . . . 5d e Bond credits from Form 8912 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5e 6 Total credits. Add lines 5a through 5e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 7 Subtract line 6 from line 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 8 Personal holding company tax (attach Schedule PH (Form 1120)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 9 a Recapture of investment credit (attach Form 4255) . . . . . . . . . . 9a b Recapture of low-income housing credit (attach Form 8611) . . . . . . . 9b c Interest due under the look-back method—completed long-term contracts (attach Form 8697) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9c d Interest due under the look-back method—income forecast method (attach Form 8866) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9d e Alternative tax on qualifying shipping activities (attach Form 8902) . . . . . 9e f Other (see instructions—attach schedule) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9f 10 Total. Add lines 9a through 9f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 11 Total tax. Add lines 7, 8, and 10. Enter here and on page 1, line 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Part II–Payments and Refundable Credits 12 2010 overpayment credited to 2011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 13 2011 estimated tax payments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 14 2011 refund applied for on Form 4466 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 ( ) 15 Combine lines 12, 13, and 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 16 Tax deposited with Form 7004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 17 Withholding (see instructions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 18 Total payments. Add lines 15, 16, and 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 19 Refundable credits from: a Form 2439 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19a b Form 4136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19b c Form 3800, line 17c and Form 8827, line 8c . . . . . . . . . . . . 19c d Other (attach schedule—see instructions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19d 20 Total credits. Add lines 19a through 19d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 21 Total payments and credits. Add lines 18 and 20. Enter here and on page 1, line 32 . . . . . . . . 21 Schedule K Other Information (see instructions) 1 Check accounting method: a Cash b Accrual c Other (specify) ? Yes No 2 See the instructions and enter the: a Business activity code no. ? b Business activity ? c Product or service ? 3 Is the corporation a subsidiary in an affiliated group or a parent-subsidiary controlled group? . . . . . . . . . . If “Yes,” enter name and EIN of the parent corporation ? 4 At the end of the tax year: a Did any foreign or domestic corporation, partnership (including any entity treated as a partnership), trust, or tax-exempt organization own directly 20% or more, or own, directly or indirectly, 50% or more of the total voting power of all classes of the corporation’s stock entitled to vote? If “Yes,” complete Part I of Schedule G (Form 1120) (attach Schedule G) . . . . . . b Did any individual or estate own directly 20% or more, or own, directly or indirectly, 50% or more of the total voting power of all classes of the corporation’s stock entitled to vote? If “Yes,” complete Part II of Schedule G (Form 1120) (attach Schedule G) . Form 1120 (2011) Form 1120 (2011) Page 4 Schedule K Other Information continued (see instructions) Yes No 5 At the end of the tax year, did the corporation: a Own directly 20% or more, or own, directly or indirectly, 50% or more of the total voting power of all classes of stock entitled to vote of any foreign or domestic corporation not included on Form 851, Affiliations Schedule? For rules of constructive ownership, see instructions. If “Yes,” complete (i) through (iv) below. (i) Name of Corporation (ii) Employer Identification Number (if any) (iii) Country of Incorporation (iv) Percentage Owned in Voting Stock b Own directly an interest of 20% or more, or own, directly or indirectly, an interest of 50% or more in any foreign or domestic partnership (including an entity treated as a partnership) or in the beneficial interest of a trust? For rules of constructive ownership, see instructions. If “Yes,” complete (i) through (iv) below. (i) Name of Entity (ii) Employer Identification Number (if any) (iii) Country of Organization (iv) Maximum Percentage Owned in Profit, Loss, or Capital 6 During this tax year, did the corporation pay dividends (other than stock dividends and distributions in exchange for stock) in excess of the corporation’s current and accumulated earnings and profits? (See sections 301 and 316.) . . . . . . . If “Yes,” file Form 5452, Corporate Report of Nondividend Distributions. If this is a consolidated return, answer here for the parent corporation and on Form 851 for each subsidiary. 7 At any time during the tax year, did one foreign person own, directly or indirectly, at least 25% of (a) the total voting power of all classes of the corporation’s stock entitled to vote or (b) the total value of all classes of the corporation’s stock? . . . . For rules of attribution, see section 318. If “Yes,” enter: (i) Percentage owned ? and (ii) Owner’s country ? (c) The corporation may have to file Form 5472, Information Return of a 25% Foreign-Owned U.S. Corporation or a Foreign Corporation Engaged in a U.S. Trade or Business. Enter the number of Forms 5472 attached ? 8 Check this box if the corporation issued publicly offered debt instruments with original issue discount . . . . . . ? If checked, the corporation may have to file Form 8281, Information Return for Publicly Offered Original Issue Discount Instruments. 9 Enter the amount of tax-exempt interest received or accrued during the tax year ? $ 10 Enter the number of shareholders at the end of the tax year (if 100 or fewer) ? 11 If the corporation has an NOL for the tax year and is electing to forego the carryback period, check here . . . . . ? If the corporation is filing a consolidated return, the statement required by Regulations section 1.1502-21(b)(3) must be attached or the election will not be valid. 12 Enter the available NOL carryover from prior tax years (do not reduce it by any deduction on line 29a.) ? $ 13 Are the corporation’s total receipts (line 1c plus lines 4 through 10 on page 1) for the tax year and its total assets at the end of the tax year less than $250,000? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If “Yes,” the corporation is not required to complete Schedules L, M-1, and M-2 on page 5. Instead, enter the total amount of cash distributions and the book value of property distributions (other than cash) made during the tax year. ? $ 14 Is the corporation required to file Schedule UTP (Form 1120), Uncertain Tax Position Statement (see instructions)? . . . . If “Yes,” complete and attach Schedule UTP. 15a Did the corporation make any payments in 2011 that would require it to file Form(s) 1099 (see instructions)? . . . . . . b If “Yes,” did or will the corporation file all required Forms 1099? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form 1120 (2011) Form 1120 (2011) Page 5 Schedule L Balance Sheets per Books Beginning of tax year End of tax year ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Assets (a) (b) (c) (d) 1 Cash . . . . . . . . . . . . 2a Trade notes and accounts receivable . . . b Less allowance for bad debts . . . . . 3 Inventories . . . . . . . . . . . 4 U.S. government obligations . . . . . 5 Tax-exempt securities (see instructions) . . 6 Other current assets (attach schedule) . . . 7 Loans to shareholders . . . . . . . 8 Mortgage and real estate loans . . . . . 9 Other investments (attach schedule) . . . 10a Buildings and other depreciable assets . . b Less accumulated depreciation . . . . . 11a Depletable assets . . . . . . . . . b Less accumulated depletion . . . . . . 12 Land (net of any amortization) . . . . . 13a Intangible assets (amortizable only) . . . b Less accumulated amortization . . . . . 14 Other assets (attach schedule) . . . . . 15 Total assets . . . . . . . . . . Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity 16 Accounts payable . . . . . . . . . 17 Mortgages, notes, bonds payable in less than 1 year 18 Other current liabilities (attach schedule) . . 19 Loans from shareholders . . . . . . . 20 Mortgages, notes, bonds payable in 1 year or more 21 Other liabilities (attach schedule) . . . . 22 Capital stock: a Preferred stock . . . . b Common stock . . . . 23 Additional paid-in capital . . . . . . . 24 Retained earnings—Appropriated (attach schedule) 25 Retained earnings—Unappropriated . . . 26 Adjustments to shareholders’ equity (attach schedule) 27 Less cost of treasury stock . . . . . . 28 Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity . . Schedule M-1 Reconciliation of Income (Loss) per Books With Income per Return Note: Schedule M-3 required instead of Schedule M-1 if total assets are $10 million or more—see instructions 1 Net income (loss) per books . . . . . . 2 Federal income tax per books . . . . . 3 Excess of capital losses over capital gains . 4 Income subject to tax not recorded on books this year (itemize): 5 Expenses recorded on books this year not deducted on this return (itemize): a Depreciation . . . . $ b Charitable contributions . $ c Travel and entertainment . $ 6 Add lines 1 through 5 . . . . . . . . 7 Income recorded on books this year not included on this return (itemize): Tax-exempt interest $ 8 Deductions on this return not charged against book income this year (itemize): a Depreciation . . $ b Charitable contributions $ 9 Add lines 7 and 8 . . . . . . 10 Income (page 1, line 28)—line 6 less line 9 Schedule M-2 Analysis of Unappropriated Retained Earnings per Books (Line 25, Schedule L) 1 Balance at beginning of year . . . . . 2 Net income (loss) per books . . . . . . 3 Other increases (itemize): 4 Add lines 1, 2, and 3 . . . . . . . . 5 Distributions: a Cash . . . . b Stock . . . . c Property . . . 6 Other decreases (itemize): 7 Add lines 5 and 6 . . . . . . 8 Balance at end of year (line 4 less line 7)

    Attachments:

    ratio of fixed assets to long term liabilities 508154

    Required:

    Determine the following measures for 2014, rounding to one decimal place, except dollars amounts which should be rounded to the nearest cent. Use the rounded answer of the requirement for subsequent requirement, if required. Assume 365 days a year.

    1. Working capital $
    2. Current ratio
    3. Quick ratio
    4. Accounts receivable turnover
    5. Number of days’ sales in receivables days
    6. Inventory turnover
    7. Number of days’ sales in inventory days
    8. Ratio of fixed assets to long-term liabilities
    9. Ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity
    10. Number of times interest charges are earned
    11. Number of times preferred dividends are earned
    12. Ratio of net sales to assets
    13. Rate earned on total assets %
    14. Rate earned on stockholders’ equity %
    15. Rate earned on common stockholders’ equity %
    16. Earnings per share on common stock $
    17. Price-earnings ratio
    18. Dividends per share of common stock $
    19. Dividend yield

    at the beginning of 2013 p d enterprises had the following balances in its accounts 509088

    At the beginning of 2013, P & D Enterprises had the following balances in its accounts:
    Cash $13,800
    Inventory 6,000
    Land 3,300
    Common stock 11,000
    Retained earnings 12,100

    During 2013, P & D Enterprises experienced the following events:
    1. Purchased inventory costing $12,500 on account from Stone Company under terms 2/10, n/30. The merchandise was delivered FOB shipping point. Freight costs of $930 were paid in cash.
    2. Returned $600 of the inventory that it had purchased because the inventory was damaged in transit. The seller agreed to pay the return freight cost.
    3. Paid the amount due on its account payable to Stone Company within the cash discount period.
    4. Sold inventory that had cost $10,500 for $18,500. The sale was on account under terms 2/10, n/45.
    5. Received merchandise returned from a customer. The merchandise had originally cost $1,850 and had been sold to the customer for $2,400 cash. The customer was paid $2,400 cash for the returned merchandise.
    6. Delivered goods in Event 4 FOB destination. Freight costs of $820 were paid in cash.
    7. Collected the amount due on accounts receivable within the discount period.
    8. Sold the land for $6,100.
    9. Recognized $350 of accrued interest revenue .
    10. Took a physical count indicating that $4,400 of inventory was on hand at the end of the accounting period.
    b. Record the events in general journal format.
    Events General Journal Debit Credit
    1a.
    1b.
    2.
    3a.
    3b.
    4a.
    4b.
    5a.
    5b.
    6.
    7a.
    7b.
    8.
    9.
    10.

    rev

    c. Post the beginning balances and the events to the T-accounts. (Record the transactions in the given order. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required.)
    Cash


    Bal.


    Bal.


    Merchandise Inventory


    Bal.


    Bal.


    Bal.


    Accounts Receivable




    Bal.


    Interest Receivable




    Bal.


    Land


    Bal.


    Bal.


    Accounts Payable




    Bal.


    Common Stock


    Bal.
    Retained Earnings


    Bal.
    cl cl


    Bal.


    Sales Revenue




    Bal.
    cl


    Bal.


    Cost of Goods Sold




    Bal.
    cl


    Bal.


    Transportation-out




    Bal.
    cl


    Bal.


    Interest Revenue


    cl.


    Bal.


    Gain on Sale of Land


    cl.


    Bal.


    : 10_01_2012

    d. Prepare a multistep income statement, statement of changes in stockholders’ equity, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows (Amounts to be deducted and losses should be indicated with a minus sign. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Be sure to list the assets in order of their liquidity.)
    P & D ENTERPRISES
    Income Statement
    For the Year Ended December 31, 2013
    $

    Operating expenses

    $
    Nonoperating items

    $



    P & D ENTERPRISES
    Statement of Changes in Stockholders’ Equity
    For the Year 2013
    $

    $
    $


    Total stockholders’ equity $



    P & D ENTERPRISES
    Balance Sheet
    As of December 31, 2013
    Assets
    $

    Total assets $


    Liabilities $
    Stockholders’ equity
    $

    Total stockholders’ equity $

    Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $



    P & D ENTERPRISES
    Statement of Cash Flows
    For the Year Ended December 31, 2013
    Cash flows from operating activities:
    $

    Net cash flow from operating activities $
    Cash flows from investing activities
    Cash flows from financing activities


    Ending cash balance $



    Attachments:

    the management of hence corporation is considering the purchase of a new machine cos 509126

    The management of Hence Corporation is considering the purchase of a new machine costing $200,000. The company’s desired rate of return is 10%. The present value factors for $1 at compound interest of 10% for 1 through 5 years are 0.909, 0.826, 0.751, 0.683, and 0.621, respectively. In addition to the foregoing information, use the following data in determining the acceptability in this situation:

    Income from Net Cash
    Year Operations Flow
    1 $50,000 $90,000
    2 30,000 60,000
    3 10,000 50,000
    4 5,000 45,000
    5 5,000 45,000

    The average rate of return for this investment is

    Question 52 answers

    pepsico v coca cola 2007 509129

    Using these 2007 annual reports for The Coca-Cola Company and PepsiCo, Inc., answer the following questions. Write these up in a Word document, clearly identifying your response to each lettered item. Show supporting calculations for the items lettered c, f, h, l, m, o, p, r, s and u.

    a. What are the primary lines of business of these two companies as shown in their notes to the financial statements?

    b. Which company has the dominant position in beverage sales?

    c. Which company has the greater percentage increase in total assets from 2006 to 2007?

    d. Which company had more depreciation and amortization expense for 2007? Provide a rationale as to why there is a difference in these amounts between the two companies.

    e. What type of income format(s) is used by these two companies? Identify any differences in income statement format between these two companies.

    f. What are the gross profits, operating profits, and net incomes for these two companies over the three-year period 2005-2007? Which company has had better financial results over this period of time?

    g. What format(s) did these companies use to present their balance sheets?

    h. How much working capital did each of these companies have at the end of 2007? Speculate as to their rationale for the amount of working capital they maintain.

    i. What is the most significant difference in the asset structure of the two companies? What causes this difference?

    j. What were the two companies’ trends in net cash provided by operating activities over the period 2005 to 2007?

    k. What were the cash and cash equivalents reported by Coca-Cola and PepsiCo at the end of 2007? What does each company classify as cash equivalents?

    l. What were the accounts receivable (net) for Coca-Cola and PepsiCo at the end of 2007? Which company reports the greater allowance for doubtful accounts receivable (amount and percentage of gross receivable) at the end of 2007?

    m. What is the amount of inventory reported by Coca-Cola at December 31, 2007, and by PepsiCo at December 29, 2007? What percent of total assets is invested in inventory by each company?

    n. What inventory costing methods are used by Coca-Cola and PepsiCo? How does each company value its inventories?

    o. Compute and compare the inventory turnover ratios and days to sell inventory for Coca-Cola and PepsiCo for 2007. Indicate why there might be a significant difference between the two companies.

    p. What amount is reported in the balance sheets as property, plant, and equipment (net) of Coca- Cola at December 31, 2007, and of PepsiCo at December 29, 2007? What percentage of total assets is invested in property, plant, and equipment by each company?

    q. What depreciation methods are used by Coca-Cola and PepsiCo for property, plant, and equipment? How much depreciation was reported by Coca-Cola and PepsiCo in 2007, 2006, and 2005?

    r. Compute and compare the following ratios for Coca-Cola and PepsiCo for 2007: Asset turnover, Profit margin on sales, and Rate of return on assets.

    s. What amounts for intangible assets were reported in their respective balance sheets by Coca- Cola and PepsiCo? What percentage of total assets is each of these reported amounts?

    t. On what basis and over what periods of time did Coca-Cola and PepsiCo amortize their intangible assets?

    u. What were Coca-Cola’s and PepsiCo’s net revenues (sales) for the year 2007? Which company increased its revenues more (dollars and percentage) from 2006 to 2007?

    v. Are the revenue recognition policies of Coca-Cola and PepsiCo similar? Explain.

    accounting ratios 509336

    Week Five Exercise Assignment

    Financial Ratios

    1. Liquidity ratios.Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:

    Edison

    Stagg

    Thornton

    Cash

    $6,000

    $5,000

    $4,000

    Short-term investments

    3,000

    2,500

    2,000

    Accounts receivable

    2,000

    2,500

    3,000

    Inventory

    1,000

    2,500

    4,000

    Prepaid expenses

    800

    800

    800

    Accounts payable

    200

    200

    200

    Notes payable: short-term

    3,100

    3,100

    3,100

    Accrued payables

    300

    300

    300

    Long-term liabilities

    3,800

    3,800

    3,800

    1. Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?

    2. Computation and evaluation of activity ratios.The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:

    20X5

    20X4

    Net credit sales

    $832,000

    $760,000

    Cost of goods sold

    530,000

    400,000

    Cash, Dec. 31

    125,000

    110,000

    Average Accounts receivable

    205,000

    156,000

    Average Inventory

    70,000

    50,000

    Accounts payable, Dec. 31

    115,000

    108,000

    Instructions

    a. Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 20X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.

    3. Profitability ratios, trading on the equity.Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 20X7:

    Net sales

    $1,750,000

    Interest expense

    120,000

    Income tax expense

    80,000

    Preferred dividends

    25,000

    Net income

    130,000

    Average assets

    1,200,000

    Average common stockholders’ equity

    500,000

    1. Compute the profit margin on sales ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.
    2. Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly ex plain.

    4. Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

    20X2

    20X1

    Current Assets

    $86,000

    $80,000

    Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

    99,000

    90,000

    Intangibles

    25,000

    50,000

    Current Liabilities

    40,800

    48,000

    Long-Term Liabilities

    153,000

    160,000

    Stockholders Equity

    16,200

    12,000

    Net Sales

    500,000

    500,000

    Cost of Goods Sold

    322,500

    350,000

    Operating Expenses

    93,500

    85,000

    a. Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

    5.Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

    20X2

    20X1

    Current Assets

    $86,000

    $80,000

    Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

    99,000

    80,000

    Intangibles

    25,000

    50,000

    Current Liabilities

    40,800

    48,000

    Long-Term Liabilities

    153,000

    150,000

    Stockholders Equity

    16,200

    12,000

    Net Sales

    500,000

    500,000

    Cost of Goods Sold

    322,500

    350,000

    Operating Expenses

    93,500

    85,000

    a. Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

    6. Ratio computation.The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.

    LONE PINE COMPANY

    Comparative Balance Sheets

    December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)

    20X2

    20X1

    Assets

    Current Assets

    Cash and Short-Term Investments

    $400

    $600

    Accounts Receivable (net)

    3,000

    2,400

    Inventories

    3,000

    2,300

    Total Current Assets

    $6,400

    $5,300

    Property, Plant, and Equipment

    Land

    $1,700

    $500

    Buildings and Equipment (net)

    1,500

    1,000

    Total Property, Plant, and Equipment

    $3,200

    $1,500

    Total Assets

    $9,600

    $6,800

    Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

    Current Liabilities

    Accounts Payable

    $2,800

    $1,700

    Notes Payable

    1,100

    1,900

    Total Current Liabilities

    $3,900

    $3,600

    Long-Term Liabilities

    Bonds Payable

    4,100

    2,100

    Total Liabilities

    $8,000

    $5,700

    Stockholders Equity

    Common Stock

    $200

    $200

    Retained Earnings

    1,400

    900

    Total Stockholders Equity

    $1,600

    $1,100

    Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

    $9,600

    $6,800

    LONE PINE COMPANY

    Statement of Income and Retained Earnings

    For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)

    Net Sales*

    $36,000

    Less: Cost of Goods Sold

    $20,000

    Selling Expense

    6,000

    Administrative Expense

    4,000

    Interest Expense

    400

    Income Tax Expense

    2,000

    32,400

    Net Income

    $3,600

    Retained Earnings, Jan. 1

    900

    Ending Retained Earnings

    $4,500

    Cash Dividends Declared and Paid

    3,100

    Retained Earnings, Dec. 31

    $1,400

    *All sales are on account.

    Instructions

    Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calcu lations to two decimal places when necessary:

    a. Quick ratio

    b. Current ratio

    c. Inventory-turnover ratio

    d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio

    e. Return-on-assets ratio

    f. Net-profit-margin ratio

    g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity

    h. Debt-to-total assets

    i. Number of times that interest is earned

    accounting test bank 509337

    1. A bonus usually differs from a salary in terms of:

    A. Amount and timing.

    B. Base, timing, and financial statement effect.

    C. Tax implications.

    D. Motivation effects.

    E. Base, pool, and payment terms.

    2. Of the three basic forms of management compensation (salary, bonus, benefits), the fastest growing part of total compensation is:

    A. Salary.

    B. Bonus.

    C. Benefits.

    D. Salary and bonus.

    3. As a firm’s strategy changes to respond to different stages of a product’s life cycle, compensation:

    A. Can be affected.

    B. Is affected, but only to a very limited extent.

    C. Should change in response to the new strategy.

    D. Should increase.

    E. Should decrease.

    4. Risk aversion by managers should be recognized when revising compensation plans because:

    A. Compensation mix (salary, bonus) can influence a manager’s risk aversion.

    B. Most companies want risk averse managers.

    C. Most companies want risk taking managers.

    D. It costs less to pay risk averse managers.

    5. Due in part to the failure of many banks in 2008, executive compensation is getting increased oversight by:

    A. Audit committees of corporate boards

    B. Top management

    C. Compensation committees of corporate boards

    D. Banking regulators and corporate compensation committees

    E. Banking regulators such as the SEC

    6. Any system of compensation:

    A. May encourage unethical behavior.

    B. Must be approved by the appropriate regulatory authority.

    C. Should be designed by top management.

    D. Must be approved by the auditor.

    7. The objectives of management compensation, when compared to the objectives used to develop performance measurement systems, are:

    A. More numerous.

    B. Less specific.

    C. Consistent in content.

    D. Significantly broader in scope.

    E. More specific.

    8. In developing compensation plans, the management accountant works to achieve fairness by making the plan:

    A. Precise, comprehensive and directive.

    B. Simple, clear and consistent.

    C. Attractive.

    D. Rewarding.

    E. Selective.

    9. Bases for management bonus compensation often include:

    A. Stock price performance.

    B. Percentage of salary.

    C. Achievement of break-even sales.

    D. Percentage of firm-wide net income.

    10. When strategic performance measures or critical success factors are used to determine bonus compensation, the bonus will usually depend either on the amount of improvement in the measure or on:

    A. Maintaining the current level.

    B. Achieving a predetermined goal.

    C. Quality of work completed.

    D. Intensity of effort expended.

    11. Bonus plans should be tied to variable cost income which is not affected by inventory level changes, rather than the conventional:

    A. Tax-based net income.

    B. Marginal cost income.

    C. Full cost income.

    D. Operating income.

    12. The balanced scorecard critical success factors (CSFs) provide strong motivation in bonus compensation plans if the non-controllable factors are:

    A. Emphasized.

    B. Separated.

    C. Recognized.

    D. Excluded.

    E. Controlled.

    13. If fairness only is considered, unit managers prefer:

    A. Not to be evaluated.

    B. A subjective measure.

    C. A single, objective measure.

    D. A firm-wide pool over a unit-based pool.

    E. A unit-based pool over a firm-wide pool.

    14. Generally, the current and deferred types of bonus payment options currently in use tend to focus the manager’s attention on short-term performance measures, most commonly:

    A. Division profit.

    B. After tax corporate profit.

    C. Cash flow.

    D. Growth in firm value.

    E. Stock price.

    15. The stock option form of bonus payments to managers usually:

    A. Motivates well even in extended market downturns.

    B. Can lose some motivation because of the delay in reward.

    C. Focuses on the short-term.

    D. Is not consistent with shareholder interests.

    E. Has less risk than other types of bonus payment plans.

    16. The ideal compensation plan would make all company contributions to the plan immediately tax-deductible and all tax consequences for managers:

    A. Insignificant.

    B. Deferred or avoidable.

    C. Limited, but current.

    D. Limited, but pre-paid.

    17. In management compensation, the use of the balanced scorecard achieves:

    A. Fairness.

    B. Alignment of manager’s incentives and the organization’s strategy.

    C. The desired ethical environment.

    D. Revenue generation and cost control.

    E. A specific non-financial measurement.

    18. The balanced scorecard evaluation of the firm is an especially strong financial tool because of its:

    A. Use of qualitative measures.

    B. Use of quantitative measures.

    C. Simplicity in use.

    D. Ability to predict change.

    E. Use of multiple critical success factors (CSFs).

    19. The receivables turnover ratio is a measure of:

    A. Asset value.

    B. Leverage.

    C. Sales performance.

    D. Profitability.

    E. Liquidity.

    20. Market value of equity is an objective measure which clearly shows what:

    A. The firm’s financial statements show the firm’s value to be.

    B. Investors think is the firm value.

    C. Stock analysts calculate as the firm’s value.

    D. Is the sales value of the firm.

    E. Is the liquidation value of the firm.

    21. Analysts prefer the following three valuation methods over all others:

    A. EVA, cash flow multiplier and sales multiplier

    B. Enterprise value, discounted cash flow, and sales multiple

    C. Sales multiple, earnings multiple, and discounted cash flow

    D. EVA, return on equity and discounted cash flow

    E. Enterprise value, earnings multiple, and sales multiple

    22. Since it is based on cash flows, the discounted cash flow (DCF) method of valuation has the added advantage that it is not subject to the bias of different:

    A. Discount rates.

    B. Internal rates of return.

    C. Monetary systems.

    D. Accounting policies for determining total assets and net income.

    23. The multiplier used in an earnings-based method of valuation of a firm is often estimated from the price-to-earnings ratios of the stocks of comparable:

    A. Taxable entities.

    B. Industries.

    C. Firms.

    D. For-profit firms.

    E. Publicly-held firms.

    24. Which one of the following items is not a measure of a company’s liquidity?

    A. Accounts receivable turnover.

    B. Return on equity.

    C. Quick ratio.

    D. Cash flow ratio.

    E. Day’s sales in inventory.

    25. Which one of the following forms of compensation is a based upon the achievement of performance goals for current the period?

    A. Perk.

    B. Stock option.

    C. Performance shares.

    D. Bonus.

    E. Salary.

    26. Which one of the following forms of compensation includes special services and benefits for the employee?

    A. Perk.

    B. Stock option.

    C. Performance shares.

    D. Bonus.

    E. Salary.

    27. A method for determining a bonus based upon the performance of the unit is a(n):

    A. Segment-based pool.

    B. Unit-based pool.

    C. Firm-based pool.

    D. Activity-based pool.

    E. Function-based pool.

    28. A method for determining a bonus based upon the performance of the firm is a(n):

    A. Segment-based pool.

    B. Unit-based pool.

    C. Firm-based pool.

    D. Activity-based pool.

    E. Volume-based pool.

    29. All of the following are listed as common payment options for bonus compensation plans except:

    A. Performance shares.

    B. Current bonus.

    C. Deferred bonus.

    D. Preferred bonus.

    E. Stock options.

    30. The profit multiplier is used to measure:

    A. Efficiency.

    B. Effectiveness.

    C. Net revenue.

    D. Collectability.

    E. Accountability.

    31. Each one of the following is a method for directly measuring the value of a firm’s equity except:

    A. The discounted cash flow method.

    B. Market value.

    C. Sales multiple.

    D. Earnings-based valuation.

    E. Enterprise value.

    32. Which one of the following refers to the firm’s ability to pay its current operating expenses and maturing debt?

    A. Discounted cash flow.

    B. Liquidity.

    C. Earnings base.

    D. Profitability.

    E. Purchasing power.

    33. Which one of the following develops the value of the firm as the discounted present value of the firm’s net free cash flows?

    A. Discounted cash flow method.

    B. Liquidity method.

    C. Multiples-based method.

    D. Profitability method.

    E. Purchasing power method.

    34. A deferred bonus consists of:

    A. Cash only.

    B. Stock only.

    C. Cash and/or stock.

    D. Membership in a fitness club.

    35. Which one of the following computes value based on annual earnings?

    A. Discounted cash flow method.

    B. Liquidity method.

    C. Multiples-based method.

    D. Profitability method.

    E. Market value method.

    36. Jackson Supply Company has a 2 to 1 current ratio. This ratio would increase to more than 2 to 1 if the company:

    A. Purchased a marketable security for cash.

    B. Wrote off an uncollectible receivable.

    C. Sold merchandise on account that earned a normal gross margin.

    D. Purchased inventory on account.

    37. Benefits include all of the following except:

    A. Travel.

    B. Life insurance.

    C. Medical benefits.

    D. Membership in a fitness club.

    E. Performance shares.

    38. A current bonus consists of:

    A. Cash only.

    B. Stock only.

    C. Cash and/or stock.

    D. Membership in a fitness club.

    39. In service firms, improvement in long term profitability is best measured by all the following except:

    A. Staff utilization.

    B. Net revenues.

    C. Collections of customer accounts.

    D. Materials usage.

    accounting mcqs cash flow statement 509338

    Use the following to answer questions 1-4:

    The financial statements of Wines, Inc., provide the following information for the current year

    12-31 jan 1

    Accounts Receivable

    210,000

    180,000

    Inventory

    200,000

    190,000

    Prepaid Expenses

    14,000

    10,000

    Accts Pay for mdse

    176,000

    161,000

    Accrued Expenses Payable

    13,000

    19,000

    Net Sales

    2,900,000

    COGS

    1,500,000

    Oper Expenses incl depreciation of $40,000

    300,000

    1. Refer to the above data. Compute the amount of cash

    1. Refer to the above data. Compute the amount of cash received from customers during the current year.

    NET SALES LESS INCREASE IN ACCTS REC.

    Answer

    1. A) $2,900,000.

    1. B) $2,690,000.

    1. C) $2,870,000.

    1. D) Some other amount.

    1. 2. Refer to the above data. Compute the amount of Wine”s cash payments for purchases of merchandise during the current year.

    A) 1,500,000

    B) 1,495,000

    C) 1,505,000

    D) Other Amount

    1. 3. Refer to the above data. Compute the amount of Wine”s cash payments for operating expenses.

    1.Answer

    1. A) $260,000.

    1. B) $270,000

    1. C) $250,000.

    1. D) Some other amount.

    1. 4. Refer to the above data. Wine”s net cash flow from operating activities for the current year is:

    1.Answer

    1. A) $1,105,000.

    1. B) $1,375,000.

    1. C) $1,495,000.

    1. D) Some other amount.

    1. Use the following to answer questions 5-8:

    1.An analysis of Elmont Corporation”s Investment in Marketable Securities account during 2005 disclosed the following:

    Debit entries $150,000

    Credit entries $230,000

    Elmont”s 2005 income statement included a $30,000 gain on sale of marketable securities and $20,000 dividend income from marketable securities. All payments and proceeds relating to marketable securities transactions were in cash.

    5. Refer to the above data. The amount of cash paid by Elmont Corporation in 2005 for the purchase of marketable securities was:

    A) 230,000

    B) 150,000

    C) 180,000

    D) 190,000

    D) 6. Refer to the above data. The cash proceeds received by Elmont Corporation in 2005 for the sale of marketable securities was:

    E) A) 150,000

    F) B) 200,000

    G) C) 230,000

    H) D) 260,000

    1. 7. Refer to the above data. How should the transactions involving marketable securities be classified in Elmont”s statement of cash flows for 2005?

    1.Answer

    1. A) The purchase of marketable securities, sales of marketable securities, and receipt of dividends are all classified as investing activities.

    1. B) The purchase and the sale of marketable securities are classified as investing activities; the receipt of dividends is classified as an operating activity.

    1. C) The purchase of marketable securities is classified as an investing activity; the sale of marketable securities is classified as a financing activity; the receipt of dividends is classified as an operating activity.

    1. D) The purchase and the sale of marketable securities are classified as investing activities; the receipt of dividends is classified as a financing activity.

    1. 8. Refer to the above data. Based solely on the above information, Elmont”s net cash flow from investing activities for 2005 is:

    2. A) $80,000 net cash used by investing activities

    3. B) $80,000 net cash provided by investing activities

    4. C) $110,000 net cash provided by investing activities

    5. D) $230,000 net cash provided by investing activities

    1. Use the following to answer questions 9-12:

    1.An analysis of changes in selected balance sheet accounts of Gotham Corporation shows the following for the current year:

    2. Plant and Equipment accounts

    Debit entries to asset accounts = 210,000

    Credit entries to asset accounts = 320,000

    Debit entries to accumulated depreciation accounts

    (resulting from sale of plant assets) = 30,000

    Credit entries to accumulated depreciation accounts

    (representing depreciation for the current year = 80,000

    Gotham”s income statement for the current year includes a $4,000 gain on disposal of plant assets. All payments and proceeds relating to purchase or sale of plant assets were in cash.

    9. Refer to the above data. The amount of cash paid by Gotham to acquire plant assets during the current year was:

    A) $130,000 B) $210,000 C) $320,000 D) Some other amount

    1. 10. Refer to the above data. Total cash proceeds received by Gotham from sales of plant assets during the current year amounted to:

    2. A) $324,000 B) $294,000 C) $316,000 D) Some other amount

    1. 11. Refer to the above data. How should purchases, sales, and depreciation of plant assets be classified in Gotham”s statement of cash flows for the current year (Assume the direct method is used by Gotham.)

    1.Answer

    1. A) Purchases of plant assets are classified as investing activities; sales of plant assets are classified as financing activities; depreciation is classified as an operating activity.

    1. B) Purchases of plant assets and depreciation are classified as investing activities; sales of plant assets are classified as financing activities.

    1. C) Purchases and sales of plant assets are classified as investing activities; depreciation does not appear as an operating, financing, or investing activity.

    1. D) Since plant assets are used to generate income from operations, purchases, sales, and depreciation of plant assets are all classified as operating activities.

    1. 12. Refer to the above data. Based solely on the data provided above, Gotham”s net cash flow from investing activities for the current year is:

    1.Answer

    1. A) $110,000 net cash provided by investing activities.

    1. B) $110,000 net cash used by investing activities.

    1. C) $84,000 net cash provided by investing activities.

    1. D) $504,000 net cash provided by investing activities.

    1. Use the following to answer questions 13-15:

    1.During 2006, the cash flows related to Dodge Data, Inc. s lending and borrowing activities are summarized as follows:

    1.Invest Oper Finan

    1. Cash lent to borrowersLESS

    1. $85,000

    1. Payment to retire(LESS) bonds payable.

    1. 175,000

    1. Proceeds from borrowing at bank (note payable)………………..

    1. 105,000

    1. Interest received from borrowers…………………………………….

    1. 15,000

    1. Interest payments made on bonds payable.LESS………………………..

    1. 20,000

    .

    13. Refer to the above data. On the basis of the above information alone, what is Dodge Data”s net cash flow from financing activities?

    Answer

    1. A) $70,000 net cash used for financing activities.

    1. B) $260,000 net cash used for financing activities.

    1. C) $155,000 net cash used for financing activities.

    1. D) $245,000 net cash used for financing activities.

    1. 14. Refer to the above data. If Dodge Data”s income statement for 2006 reports interest expense of $12,000, then:

    1.Answer

    1. A) Interest payable decreased by $8,000 in 2006.

    1. B) Interest payable increased by $8,000 in 2006.

    1. C) Interest payable at the end of 2006 amounts to $8,000.

    1. D) Either the amount reported in the income statement or the interest payment shown above must be incorrect.

    1. 15. Refer to the above data. If interest receivable was $3,000 at December 31, 2005, and is $5,000 at the end of 2006, interest revenue reported in Dodge Data”s income statement for 2006 must have been:

    1.Answer

    1. A) $8,000.

    1. B) $10,000.

    1. C) $17,000.

    1. D) Some other amount.

    1. 16. Acme Company uses the indirect method to prepare its statement of cash flows. The following information has been gathered for the current period:

    2. Gain on Sale of land = $45,000

    3. Net Income 162,000

    4. Depreciation Expense = 74,000

    5. Cash Received from sale of land = 160,000

    6. Decrease in inventory = 10,000

    7. Increase in accounts receivable = 5,000

    8. Increase in accounts payable= 11,000

    On the basis of the above information only, Acme Company”s statement of cash flows shows net cash flow from operating activities to be:

    A 185,000

    B 307,000

    C 207,000

    D 367,000

    accounts payable are listed as 120 000 suzie that s right approximately 100 000 of t 509339

    accounts payable are listed as $120,000.

    Suzie: That s right. Approximately $100,000 of that represents amounts due our suppliers, and the remainder is miscellaneous payables to creditors for utilities, office equipment, supplies, etc.

    Sergio: That s what I thought. But as you know, we normally receive a 2% discount from our suppliers for earlier payment, and we always try to take the discount.

    Suzie: That s right. I can t remember the last time we missed a discount.

    Sergio: Well, in that case, it seems to me the accounts payable should be listed minus the 2% discount. Let s list the accounts payable due suppliers as $98,000, rather than $100,000. Every little bit helps. You never know. It might make the difference between getting the loan and not.

    acct 346 managerial accounting week 8 final devry acct346 509340

    1. (TCO 1) The principle managers follow when they only investigate significant departures from the plan is commonly known as
    2. (TCO 1) Which of the following is not likely to be a fixed cost?
    3. (TCO 2) Which of the following is not a manufacturing cost?
    4. (TCO 2) An allocation base is
    5. (TCO 3) Equivalent units are calculated by
    6. (TCO 3) In the assembly department, all the direct materials are added at the beginning of the processing. Beginning Work in Process inventory consists of 2,000 units with a direct materials cost of $31,860. During the period, 15,000 units are started and direct materials costing $250,000 are charged to the department. If there are 1,000 units in ending inventory, what is the cost per equivalent unit?
    7. (TCO 4) Regression analysis
    8. (TCO 4) The number of units that must be sold to exactly cover its fixed and variable costs is the
    9. (TCO 5) Which of the following is treated as a product cost in variable costing?
    10. (TCO 5) If the number of units sold is less than the number of units produced
    11. (TCO 6) A contract which specifies that the suppler will be paid for the cost of production as well as some fixed amount or percentage of cost is called a(n)
    12. (TCO 6) Which of the following is not generally true when a company compares ABC and traditional costing?
    13. (TCO 7) Fixed costs that will be eliminated if a particular course of action is undertaken are called
    14. (TCO 7) Common costs
    15. (TCO 8) Target costing
    16. (TCO 8) Which of the following are relevant in deciding whether to accept or reject a special order?
    17. (TCO 9) Present value techniques
    18. (TCO 9) The internal rate of return
    19. (TCO 10) A method of budget preparation that requires all budgeted amounts to be justified by the department, even if the amounts were supported in prior periods, is called
    20. (TCO 10) Which budget is prepared first?
    21. (TCO 10) The standard cost is
    22. (TCO 10) In general, an unfavorable material variance arises from
    23. (TCO 10) The type of center that has responsibility for generating revenue as well as controlling costs is a(n)
    24. (TCO 10) Responsibility accounting holds managers responsible for
    25. (TCO 10) Which ratio measures the rate earned on total capital provided by the owners?
    26. (TCO 1) Distinguish managerial accounting from financial accounting. Include a brief discussion of the differences in the types of information provided to users as well as the differences of the users of the accounting information.
    27. (TCO 6) Booth Financial Services, LLC has two revenue producing departments, Financial Planning and Business Consulting. The accounting department is trying to determine the best method to allocate $1,000,000 of common costs (secretarial staff, reception personnel, etc), either by salary or number of employees. Information on the revenue departments are as follows:
    Department
    Employees
    Salaries
    Financial Planning
    150 employees
    $10,000,000
    Business Consulting
    50 employees
    $5,000,000

    (a) Allocate the $1,000,000 common costs to the two revenue departments using both methods.
    (b) Why are allocations called arbitrary?

    28. (TCO 10) Charlie Corp sells it products on both credit and cash basis. Monthly sales are sold 20% for cash, 80% for credit. Credit sales are collected 40% in the month of sale and 60% the following month. Sales for the first quarter are as follows:

    January $100,000
    February $150,000
    March $125,000

    Compute cash collections for February.
    Points Received:
    25. (TCO 2) Acme Fireworks uses a traditional overhead allocation based on direct labor hours. For the current year overhead is estimated at $1,000,000 and direct labor hours are budgeted at 200,000 hours. Actual hours worked were 195,000 and actual overhead was $978,000.

    (a) Compute the predetermined manufacturing overhead rate.
    (b) Compute the applied manufacturing overhead.
    (c) Compute the amount of over/under applied manufacturing overhead.
    26. (TCO 9) An investment of $185,575 is expected to generate returns of $65,000 per year for each of the next four years. What is the investment”s internal rate of return?
    27. (TCO 4) Legal Docs Inc is a legal services firm that files incorporation papers for small businesses. They charge $1,000 per application. This year”s income statement shows the following:

    Sales $1,295,000
    Variable Expenses $1,023,000
    Contribution margin $272,000
    Fixed costs $250,000
    Profit $22,000

    Required:
    (a) Compute the break-even point in units.
    (b) Compute the contribution margin ratio.
    (c) Compute the current margin of safety.
    (d) How many applications must the company sell to make a profit of $350,000?

    28. (TCO 5) The following data has been taken from Air-Tite company in its first year of business.

    Units produced 100,000
    Units sold 80,000
    Units in ending inventory 20,000
    Fixed manufacturing overhead $400,000

    (a) Compute the amount of fixed manufacturing overhead that would be expensed in the current year if full absorption costing is used.
    (b) Compute the amount of fixed manufacturing overhead that would be expensed in the current year if variable costing is used.
    (c) Compute the amount of fixed manufacturing overhead that would be included in ending inventory under full absorption costing.

    acct 504 final question 509341

    Top of Form

    1.

    (TCO A) Below you will find selected information (in millions) from Coca-Cola Co. s 2012 Annual Report:

    Income Taxes Payable

    $471

    Short-term Investments and Marketable Securities

    8,109

    Cash

    8,442

    Other non-current Liabilities

    10,449

    Common Stock

    1,760

    Receivables

    4,812

    Other Current Assets

    2,973

    Long-term Investments

    10,448

    Other Non-current Assets

    3,585

    Property, Plant and Equipment

    23,486

    Trademarks

    6,527

    Other Intangible Assets

    20,810

    Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

    53

    Accumulated Depreciation

    9,010

    Accounts Payable

    8,680

    Short Term Notes Payable

    17,874

    Prepaid Expenses

    2,781

    Other Current Liabilities

    796

    Long-Term Liabilities

    14,736

    Paid-in-Capital in Excess of Par Value

    11,379

    Retained Earnings

    55,038

    Inventories

    3,264

    Treasury Stock

    35,009

    Other information taken from the Annual Report:

    Sales Revenue for 2012

    $48,017

    Cost of Goods Sold for 2012

    19,053

    Net Income for 2012

    9,019

    Inventory Balance on 12/31/11

    3,092

    Net Accounts Receivable Balance on 12/31/11

    4,920

    Total Assets on 12/31/11

    79,974

    Equity Balance on 12/31/11

    31,921

    Required:
    1. Using the information provided prepare a Balance Sheet. Separate the current assets from non-current assets and provide a total for each. Also separate the current liabilities from the non-current liabilities and provide a total for each.
    2. Using the Balance Sheet from your answer above calculate; Current Ratio, Days in Inventory, Average Collection Period, Return on Assets Ratio, Debt to Total Assets and Return on common stockholders equity ratio. (Make sure to show all your work)

    (Points : 36)

    2.

    (TCO B) The following selected data was retrieved from the Wal-Mart, Inc. financial statements for the year ending January 31, 2013:

    Accounts Payable

    $38,080

    Accounts Receivable

    6,768

    Cash

    7,781

    Common Stock

    3,952

    Cost of Goods Sold

    352,488

    Income Tax Expense

    7,981

    Interest Expenses

    2,064

    Membership Revenues

    3,048

    Net Sales

    466,114

    Operating, Selling and Administrative Expenses

    88,873

    Retained Earnings

    72,978

    Required:

    Using the information provided above:
    1. Prepare a multiple-step income statement
    2. Calculate the Profit Margin, and Gross profit rate for the company. Be sure to provide the formula you are using, show your calculations, and discuss your findings/results.

    (Points : 36)

    3.(TCO C) Please review the following real-world Hewlett Packard Statement of Cash flows and address the 2 questions below:

    Cash flow from operating activities

    In millions

    In millions

    For the year ended 2012

    For the year ended 2011

    Net (loss) earnings

    $(12,650)

    $7,074

    Depreciation and amortization

    5,095

    4,984

    Impairment of goodwill and purchased intangible assets

    18,035

    885

    Stock-based compensation expense

    635

    685

    Provision for doubtful accounts

    142

    81

    Provision for inventory

    277

    217

    Restructuring charges

    2,266

    645

    Deferred taxes on earnings

    (711)

    166

    Excess tax benefit from stock-based competition

    (12)

    (163)

    Other, net

    265

    (46)

    Accounts and financing receivables

    1,269

    (227)

    Inventory

    890

    (1,252)

    Accounts payable

    (1,414)

    275

    Taxes on earnings

    (320)

    610

    Restructuring

    (840)

    (1,002)

    Other assets and liabilities

    (2,356)

    (293)

    Net cash provided by operating activities

    10,571

    12,639

    Cash flows from investing activities:

    Investment in property, plant, and equipment

    (3,706)

    (4,539)

    Proceeds from sale of property, plant, and equipment

    617

    999

    Purchases of available-for-sale securities and other investments

    (972)

    (96)

    Maturities and sales of available-for-sale securities and other investment

    662

    68

    Payments in connection with business acquisitions, net of cash acquired

    (141)

    (10,480)

    Proceeds from business divestiture, net

    87

    89

    Net cash used in investing activities

    (3,453)

    (13,959)

    Cash flow from financing activities:

    (Payments) issuance of commercial paper and notes payable, net

    (2,775)

    (1,270)

    Issuance of debt

    5,154

    11,942

    Payment of debt

    (4,333)

    (2,336)

    Issuance of common stock under employee stock plans

    716

    896

    Repurchase of common stock

    (1,619)

    (10,117)

    Excess tax benefit from stock-based compensation

    12

    163

    Cash dividends paid

    (1,015)

    (844)

    Net cash used in financing activities

    (3,860)

    (1,566)

    Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

    3,258

    (2,886)

    Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period

    8,043

    10,929

    Cash and cash equivalents at end of period

    $11,301

    $8,043

    Required:

    1)Please calculate the percentage increase or decrease in cash for the operating, investing, and financing sections and explain the major reasons for the increase or decrease for each of these sections.

    2) Please calculate the free cash flow for 2012 and explain the meaning of this ratio.

    (Points : 36)

    4.(TCO D) You are CFO of Goforit, Inc., a wholesale distribution company specializing in emerging technologies. Your CEO is a brilliant marketer, but relies on you to explain issues and choices in accounting and finance. She has heard from other members of a CEO organization to which she belongs that a company s net income can vary widely depending on which accounting choices are made from the GAAP menu.

    Assuming the goal is to maximize net income, choose an accounting treatment from each of the following scenarios, and explain to your CEO why the choice will produce the desired effect on reported Net Income for the current year. Include in your answer the effect of the choice on both the income statement and balance sheet.

    Required:

    a. Goforit carries significant electronics inventory in a competitive environment where prices are actually falling. Which inventory valuation method would you choose LIFO, FIFO, or average cost Assume that unit purchases exceed unit sales.

    b. Goforit has a large investment in warehouse equipment including conveyor belts, forklifts, and automated packaging systems. Which depreciation method would you choose: Straight line (SL) or double declining balance (DDB)

    (Points : 36)

    5.(TCO F) Please review the following real-world ratios for Johnson & Johnson and Pfizer for the year ended 2012 and address the 2 questions below.

    Ratio Name

    Johnson & Johnson

    Pfizer

    Profit margin

    16.1%

    24.7%

    Inventory turnover ratio

    3.1

    1.7

    Average collection period

    59.4 days

    69.1 days

    Cash debt coverage ratio

    .27

    .16

    Debt to Total assets

    46.6%

    127.5%

    Required:

    1)Please explain the meaning of each of the Pfizer ratios above.

    2)Please state which company performed better for each ratio.

    (Points : 36)

    Page 1

    1.(TCO A) An advantage of the corporate form of business is that _____. (Points : 5)

    2.(TCO A) The Dividends account _____. (Points : 5)

    3.(TCOs A, B) Below is a partial list of account balances for Cerner Company:

    Cash $5,000
    Prepaid insurance 500
    Accounts receivable 2,500
    Accounts payable 2,000
    Notes payable 3,000
    Common stock 1,000
    Dividends 500
    Revenues 15,000
    Expenses 12,500

    What did Cerner Company show as total credits? (Points : 5)

    4.(TCOs B, E) Under the accrual basis of accounting, _____. (Points : 5)

    5.(TCO D) Two companies report the same cost of goods available for sale, but each employs a different inventory costing method. If the price of goods has increased during the period, then the company using _____. (Points : 5)

    6.(TCO A, E) Equipment was purchased for $17,000 on January 1, 2006. Freight charges amounted to $700 and there was a cost of $2,000 for building a foundation and installing the equipment. It is estimated that the equipment will have a $3,000 salvage value at the end of its 5-year useful life. What is the amount of accumulated depreciation at December 31, 2007, if the straight-line method of depreciation is used? (Points : 5)

    7.(TCOs D, G) Lopez Corporation issues 500 ten-year, 8%, $1,000 bonds dated January 1, 2007, at 96. The journal entry to record the issuance will show a _____. (Points : 5)

    8.(TCO C) Accounts receivable arising from sales to customers amounted to $40,000 and $35,000 at the beginning and end of the year, respectively. Income reported on the income statement for the year was $110,000. Exclusive of the effect of other adjustments, the cash flows from operating activities to be reported on the statement of cash flows is _____. (Points : 5)

    9.(TCO F) One variation of the horizontal analysis is known as _____. (Points : 5)

    10.(TCO F) In a common-size balance sheet, the 100% figure is _____. (Points : 5)

    11.(TCO F) Which one of the following is not a characteristic generally evaluated in ratio analysis? (Points : 5)

    12.(TCO F) A common measure of profitability is the _____. (Points : 5)

    13.(TCO F) Return on common stockholder’s equity ratio is affected by _____. (Points : 5)

    14.(TCO G) To calculate the market value of a bond, we need to _____. (Points : 5)

    Bottom of Form

    Bottom of Form

    acct315 caleb company s fiscal year runs from january through december its january 1 509342

    Caleb Company s fiscal year runs from January through December. Its January 1, 2013 s trial balances are below:

    Account Title Debits Credits

    Cash $30,000

    Accounts Receivable 15,000

    Equipment 20,000

    Accumulated Depreciation $ 6,000

    Salaries Payable 9,000

    Common Stock 40,500

    Retained Earnings 9,500

    Total $ 65,000 $ 65,000

    Summary of transactions that occurred during the year are below:

    a. Sales of services $100,000

    Out of the sales, credit sales was 30,000

    b. Accounts Receivable collected 27,300

    c. Shares issued for cash 10,000

    d. Salaries paid 50,000

    Out of the salaries paid, Salaries Payable amount was 9,000

    e. Miscellaneous Expense paid 24,000

    f. Equipment Purchased 15,000

    g. Cash Dividends paid 2,500

    Other pertinent information:

    Year-end accrued salaries $ 1,000

    Equipment Depreciation

    2,000

    Required:

    1.Set up the necessary T- accounts and enter the beginning balances from the trial balance provided.

    2.Prepare a journal entry for each of the summary of transactions listed above.

    3.Post the journal entries to the T-accounts.

    4.Prepare an unadjusted trial balance.

    5.Prepare and post adjusting journal entries. Enter the adjusting entries in the T-accounts as applicable. The two adjusting entries are the year-end accrued salaries and equipment depreciation provided in the question.

    6.Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

    7.Prepare an income statement for year ended 2013 and a balance sheet as of December 31, 2013.

    8.Prepare and post closing entries.

    9.Prepare a post- closing trial balance.

    acg12 financial accounting i assignment 1 sp4 2013 509343

    ACG12 Financial Accounting I Assignment 1, SP4 2013

    DETAILS OF ASSESSMENT

    Assignment 1 Due 29th December 2013 (11:00pm Adelaide time)

    Compu-sell Enterprises are preparing their financial reports for the year ending 30th June

    2013. Compu-sell specialises in selling new and used computers. The owner of Compu-sell

    has prepared the financial reports himself. Unfortunately, the owner has not studied

    accounting and believes he made a number of mistakes when preparing the end of year

    financial reports. He has asked you for assistance in preparing the financial reports. You are

    given all of the information used to prepare the financial reports for the year ending 30th

    June 2013. The owner was not sure about adjusting entries and wants you to make sure they

    have all been recorded correctly. He would like you to process any adjustments that are

    deemed necessary. During your investigation you have identified the following issues

    which may require further action:

    (a) The telephone bill for the shop was still owing for the month ending 30th June

    2013. The bill was received in the mail on the 21st of June but because everyone

    was so busy, the bill was not paid or recorded in the financial reports for the year

    ending 30th June. The amount shown on the bill was $315.

    (b) All non-current assets purchased by the business are depreciated using straight

    line depreciation as this is the only method the owner of Compu-sell has learnt.

    (Show your depreciation journal entries in (b)).

    (c) Allowance for doubtful debts has not been recorded for the year ending 30th June

    2013. Credit sales for the year ending 30th June 2012 were $360,000 and

    $410,000 for the year ending 3oth June 2013. The allowance for bad debts is

    estimated as 2% of credit sales. Credit sales make up 70% of total sales.

    (d) During the year, the owner took home some office supplies (which had

    previously been recorded in the books as a current asset) for personal use (worth

    $800). The owner recorded a debit to the Miscellaneous Expenses account and

    a credit to Drawings .

    (e) Office furniture was purchased by the business for $8,200 cash on the 1st of

    March 2013. You have checked and the purchase was recorded correctly. It is

    policy for the owner to replace office furniture every 3 years and give the old

    furniture away to charity for free at the end of its useful life of three years. The

    owner has not recorded anything else relating to this non-current asset for the year

    ending 30th June 2013.

    ACG12 Financial Accounting I Assignment 1, SP4 2013

    (f) Compu-sell received $2,000 cash from a customer on the 15th of June 2012 as

    part payment for a sale of a computer which the customer purchased from

    Compu-sell and was recorded as a debit to Cash at Bank and a credit to Unearned

    Income. The total sale price was $3,500 and the computer was delivered to the

    customer on the 4th of July 2012. The customer paid the balance owing once the

    computer was delivered. A review of the records shows that the payment by the

    customer of $1,500 was not recorded. The $2,000 was also still showing as

    unearned income of $2,000 in the trial balance as at 30th June 2013.

    (g) Rent for the office (where the administrative staff work) for 6 months covering

    March August was paid on the 1st of March 2013. The amount paid was $5,100.

    The only reference to this payment is a Rent Expense account showing $5,100

    (you can assume the cash was correctly credited for $5,100). No other entries can

    be found associated with this rental payment at the 30th of June 2013.

    (h) The records show that on the 1st of February 2013, the owner purchased a new

    microwave oven for the staff to use in the staffroom. He purchased the microwave

    from his own personal bank account and gave the microwave to the business. The

    microwave will be used evenly for the remainder of its useful life (another 6

    years). He recorded the contribution of the microwave to the business by the

    owner as a debit to Miscellaneous Income and a credit to Capital . The

    microwave was valued at $1,200. Nothing else has been recorded in relation to

    this microwave in the year ending 30th June 2013.

    (i) Staff employed by Compu-sell are paid using commission. Commission is

    calculated as 8% of sales and is recorded at the end of the financial year (that is,

    on the 30th of June). The owner has forgotten to record the commission on sales

    for the year ending 30th June 2013.

    (j) The monthly bank statement for the month of June shows that interest earned and

    received on the bank account was $120 for the month of June. The bank statement

    also indicates that bank fees paid for June were $85. Neither of these items has

    been recorded by the owner of Compu-sell. The bank statement also shows that a

    customer used direct deposit to pay for the amount owing for a credit sale made

    by Compu-sell on the 10th of June 2013 (You can assume that the sale was

    recorded correctly). The amount paid by the customer was $1,900 and was paid

    using an electronic transfer by the customer directly into the bank account of

    Compu-sell. Compu-sell has only just found out about receiving the cash when

    they received the bank statement.

    (k) Compu-sell hired a part time accountant at the beginning of June 2013. The

    accountant is being paid $2,000 per month. No entry has been processed for the

    salary of the accountant for June the accountant was paid on the 30th of June

    2013.

    Continued over the page

    ACG12 Financial Accounting I Assignment 1, SP4 2013

    (l) Rent for the shop (where the business operates and generates income) for 6

    months covering April September was paid on the 1st of April 2013. The

    amount paid was $9,600. A debit to Prepaid Rent and a credit to Cash at

    Bank was recorded on the 1st of April 2013. On the 30th of June the owner of

    Compu-sell found a new shop in a very popular shopping complex which was

    offering a long term rental contract at a better price. Therefore, an agreement was

    signed for the new shop to be rented for the 12 months from the 1st of July 2013

    until the 30th of June 2014 payment was made on the 30th of June 2013 for 12

    months. The inventory was moved out of the old shop on the 28th of June 2013

    and the old shop would no longer be used for anything from the 1st of July 30th

    of September. The old shop was left empty for the remainder of the life of the

    rental agreement (ie July September 2013) and the shop would no longer be

    used to help contribute any future income to the business. The new shop was

    rented for $900 per month and nothing had been recorded yet for the payment of

    the rent for the new shop.

    (m) Compu-sell uses a periodic inventory system to record inventory. The accounting

    records indicate that opening inventory for the year ending 30th June 2013 was

    $80,900. A physical stocktake on the 30th June 2013 indicated that inventory on

    hand was $80,100. The owner did not make any changes to the financial reports

    because he was unsure what to do. He has made a note in the financial reports to

    ask you whether he needs to account for the discrepancy between the inventory

    figures.

    (n) Office supplies used during the year amounted to $1,030. The only reference to

    Office Supplies in the trial balance at the 30th of June is the Office Supplies

    account which has a balance of $1,340.

    (o) Compu-sell paid $1,200 for advertising on the local radio on the 1st of June 2013.

    The advertising will occur on the 1st Tuesday of each month for June August

    2013. The amount paid was recorded as a debit to Advertising Expense and a

    credit to Cash at Bank for $1,200 on the 1st of June.

    (p) Office furniture (a chair) was purchased by the business on the 30th of June 2013.

    The value of the purchase was $100 cash. The $100 has been recorded as a debit

    to the General Expense account and a credit to Cash at Bank because the

    owner thought the amount was too small to record it as an asset. You have been

    asked by the owner to provide a brief explanation as to why it is/is not appropriate

    to record the $100 as a General Expense. You are encouraged to look at your

    notes from ACG11 Accounting for Business in relation to the Conceptual

    Framework, to answer this question.

    Continued over the page

    ACG12 Financial Accounting I Assignment 1, SP4 2013

    (q) Unless otherwise stated, depreciation has already been recorded for all noncurrent

    assets and you have checked the records and are satisfied that the

    calculations for depreciation for the non-current assets are correct.

    Additional Notes:

    For the purposes of this assignment you are not required to account for

    GST

    No narrations are required for the General Journal Entries

    If you believe that no entry is required for any of the items shown

    above, please write No entry required as your answer

    If in your opinion, no entry is required for any of the items above,

    please provide a brief explanation using your knowledge of the

    conceptual framework (eg definitions, recognition criteria,

    assumptions etc)

    No entries should be dated earlier than 30th of June. All of your

    entries are occurring on balance date if you think something should

    have been recorded at an earlier date and it hasn t been recorded,

    the date you should use is still the 30th of June.

    REQUIRED

    Prepare the general journal entries to make (if) necessary,

    adjustments/corrections for the information presented to you above.

    HINT: If you believe an entry is not required (that is, the information has been

    recorded correctly), please indicate in your answer why you think that an entry

    is not required. You are encouraged to refer to your assumed knowledge from

    ACG11 and the Conceptual Framework wherever possible.

    Total Marks for Assignment 50 Marks

    IMPORTANT: STUDENTS ARE ENCOURAGED TO READ THROUGH

    ALL OF THE INFORMATION IN THE QUESTION ABOVE FIRST

    BEFORE ANSWERING THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE QUESTION.

    adjustment data for ms ellen s laundry inc for the year ended december 31 2013 are a 509344

    Adjustment process and financial statements

    Adjustment data for Ms. Ellen s Laundry Inc. for the year ended December 31, 2013, are as follows:

    a. Wages accrued but not paid at December 31, $2,150

    b. Depreciation of equipment during the year, $12,500

    c. Laundry supplies on hand at December 31, $1,500

    d. Insurance premiums expired, $4,600

    Instructions

    1. Using the following integrated financial statement framework, record each adjustment to the appropriate accounts, identifying each adjustment by its letter. After all adjustments are recorded, determine the balances.

    2. Prepare an income statement and retained earnings statement for the year ended December 31, 2013. The retained earnings balance as of January 1, 2013, was $101,500.

    3. Prepare a classified balance sheet as of December 31, 2013.

    4. Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2013.

    allied company s small motor division manufactures a number of small motors used in 509345

    E11-11

    Allied Company s Small Motor Division manufactures a number of small motors used in household and office appliances. The Household Division of Allied then assembles and packages such items as blenders and juicers. Both divisions are free to buy and sell any of their components internally or externally. The following costs relate to small motor LN233 on a per unit basis.

    Fixed cost per unit $5

    Variable cost per unit $8

    Selling price per unit $30

    Instructions:

    (a) Assuming that the Small Motor Division has excess capacity, compute the minimum acceptable price for the transfer of small motor LN233 to the Household Division.

    (b) Assuming that the Small Motor Division does not have excess capacity, compute the minimum acceptable price for the transfer of the small motor to the Household Division.

    (c) Explain why the level of capacity in the Small Motor Division has an effect on the transfer price.

    andre s hair styling 509348

    Andre has asked you to evaluate his business, Andre s Hair Styling. Andre has five barbers working for him. (Andre is not one of them.) Each barber is paid $9.90 per hour and works a 40-hour week and a 50-week year, regardless of the number of haircuts. Rent and other fixed expenses are $1,750 per month. Hair shampoo used on all clients is .40 per client. Assume that the only service performed is the giving of haircuts (including shampoo), the unit price of which is $12. Andre has asked you to find the following information.

    Find the contribution margin per haircut. Assume that the barbers’ compensation is a fixed cost. Show calculations to support your answer.
    Determine the annual break-even point, in number of haircuts. Support your answer with an appropriate explanation. Show calculations to support your answer.
    What will be the operating income if 20,000 haircuts are performed? Show calculations to support your answer.
    Suppose Andre revises the compensation method. The barbers will receive $4 per hour plus $6 for each haircut. What is the new contribution margin per haircut? What is the annual break-even point (in number of haircuts)? Show calculations to support your answer.

    andre has asked you to evaluate his business andre s hair styling andre has five bar 509349

    Andre has asked you to evaluate his business, Andre s Hair Styling. Andre has five barbers working for him. (Andre is not one of them.) Each barber is paid $9.90 per hour and works a 40-hour week and a 50-week year, regardless of the number of haircuts. Rent and other fixed expenses are $1,750 per month. Hair shampoo used on all clients is .40 per client. Assume that the only service performed is the giving of haircuts (including shampoo), the unit price of which is $12. Andre has asked you to find the following information.

    1. Find the contribution margin per haircut. Assume that the barbers’ compensation is a fixed cost. Show calculations to support your answer.

    2. Determine the annual break-even point, in number of haircuts. Support your answer with an appropriate explanation. Show calculations to support your answer.

    3. What will be the operating income if 20,000 haircuts are performed? Show calculations to support your answer.

    4. Suppose Andre revises the compensation method. The barbers will receive $4 per hour plus $6 for each haircut. What is the new contribution margin per haircut? What is the annual break-even point (in number of haircuts)? Show calculations to support your answer.

    angler s dream company supplies flies and fishing gear to sporting goods stores and 509350

    Angler s Dream Company supplies flies and fishing gear to sporting goods stores and outfitters throughout the western United States. The accounts receivable clerk for Angler s Dream prepared the following partially completed aging of receivables schedule as of the end of business on December 31, 2011:

    And so on

    The following accounts were unintentionally omitted from the aging schedule:

    And so on

    Angler s Dream has a past history of uncollectible accounts by age category, as follows:

    Age Class Percent Uncollectible
    Not past due .. 1%
    1 30 days past due ….. 4
    31 60 days past due .. 8
    61 90 days past due . 25
    91 120 days past due 45
    Over 120 days past due . 80

    Instructions:

    1. Determine the number of days past due for each of the preceding accounts.

    2. Complete the aging of receivables schedule by adding the omitted accounts to the bottom of the schedule and updating the totals.

    3. Estimate the allowance for doubtful accounts, based on the aging of receivables schedule.

    4. Assume that the allowance for doubtful accounts for Angler s Dream Company has a debit balance of $1,405 before adjustment on December 31, 2011. Journalize the adjusting entry for uncollectible accounts.

    5. Assume that the adjusting entry in (4) was inadvertently omitted, how would the omission affect the balance sheet and incomestatement?

    aq amp q has ebit of 2 million total assets of 10 million stock holder s equity of 4 509351

    AQ&Q has EBIT of $2 million, total assets of $10 million, stock holder s equity of $4 million, and pretax interest expense of 10 percent.
    a) What is AQ&Q s indifference level of EBIT?
    b) Given its current situation, might it benefit from increasing or decreasing its use of debt? Explain.
    c) Suppose we are to AQ&Q s average tax rate is 40 percent. How does this affect your answers to (A) and (B)?
    4) Faulkner s Fine Fries, Inc. (FFF) is thinking about reducing its debt burden. Given the following capital structure information and an expected EBIT of $50 million (plus or minus 10 percent) next year, should FFF change their capital structure?

    CURRENT PROPOSED
    Total assets $750 million $750 million
    Debt $450 million $300 million
    Equity $300 million $450 million
    Common stock price $30 $30
    Number of shares 10,000,000 15,000,000
    Interest rate 12% 12%

    8) The Nutrex Corporation wants to calculate its weighted average cost of capital. Its target capital structure weights are 40 percent long-term debt and 60 percent common equity. The before-tax cost of debt is estimated to be 10 percent and the company is in the 40 percent tax bracket. The current risk-free interest rate is 8 percent on Treasury bills. The expected return on the market is 13 percent and the firm s stock beta is 1.8.
    a. What is Nutrex s cost of debt?
    b. Estimate Nutrex s expected return on common equity using the security market line.
    c. Calculate the after-tax weight average cost of capital.

    ashford week five exercise assignment for martin only acc205 principles of accountin 509354

    Week Five Exercise Assignment

    Financial Ratios

    ACC205: Principles of Accounting I 
    ACC205: Principles of Accounting I

    1. Liquidity ratios. Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:

    Edison

    Stagg

    Thornton

    Cash

    $6,000

    $5,000

    $4,000

    Short-term investments

    3,000

    2,500

    2,000

    Accounts receivable

    2,000

    2,500

    3,000

    Inventory

    1,000

    2,500

    4,000

    Prepaid expenses

    800

    800

    800

    Accounts payable

    200

    200

    200

    Notes payable: short-term

    3,100

    3,100

    3,100

    Accrued payables

    300

    300

    300

    Long-term liabilities

    3,800

    3,800

    3,800

    a. Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid Why?

    2. Computation and evaluation of activity ratios. The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:

    20X5

    20X4

    Net credit sales

    $832,000

    $760,000

    Cost of goods sold

    530,000

    400,000

    Cash, Dec. 31

    125,000

    110,000

    Average Accounts receivable

    205,000

    156,000

    Average Inventory

    70,000

    50,000

    Accounts payable, Dec. 31

    115,000

    108,000

    Instructions

    a. Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 20X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.

    3. Profitability ratios, trading on the equity. Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The company reported the following information for 20X7:

    Net sales

    $1,750,000

    Interest expense

    120,000

    Income tax expense

    80,000

    Preferred dividends

    25,000

    Net income

    130,000

    Average assets

    1,200,000

    Average common stockholders” equity

    500,000

    a. Compute the profit margin on sales ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.

    b. Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage Briefly explain.

    4. Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

    20X2

    20X1

    Current Assets

    $86,000

    $80,000

    Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

    99,000

    90,000

    Intangibles

    25,000

    50,000

    Current Liabilities

    40,800

    48,000

    Long-Term Liabilities

    153,000

    160,000

    Stockholders Equity

    16,200

    12,000

    Net Sales

    500,000

    500,000

    Cost of Goods Sold

    322,500

    350,000

    Operating Expenses

    93,500

    85,000

    a. Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

    5.Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

    20X2

    20X1

    Current Assets

    $86,000

    $80,000

    Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

    99,000

    80,000

    Intangibles

    25,000

    50,000

    Current Liabilities

    40,800

    48,000

    Long-Term Liabilities

    153,000

    150,000

    Stockholders Equity

    16,200

    12,000

    Net Sales

    500,000

    500,000

    Cost of Goods Sold

    322,500

    350,000

    Operating Expenses

    93,500

    85,000

    a. Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

    6. Ratio computation. The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.

    LONE PINE COMPANY

    Comparative Balance Sheets

    December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)

    20X2

    20X1

    Assets

    Current Assets

    Cash and Short-Term Investments

    $400

    $600

    Accounts Receivable (net)

    3,000

    2,400

    Inventories

    3,000

    2,300

    Total Current Assets

    $6,400

    $5,300

    Property, Plant, and Equipment

    Land

    $1,700

    $500

    Buildings and Equipment (net)

    1,500

    1,000

    Total Property, Plant, and Equipment

    $3,200

    $1,500

    Total Assets

    $9,600

    $6,800

    Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

    Current Liabilities

    Accounts Payable

    $2,800

    $1,700

    Notes Payable

    1,100

    1,900

    Total Current Liabilities

    $3,900

    $3,600

    Long-Term Liabilities

    Bonds Payable

    4,100

    2,100

    Total Liabilities

    $8,000

    $5,700

    Stockholders Equity

    Common Stock

    $200

    $200

    Retained Earnings

    1,400

    900

    Total Stockholders Equity

    $1,600

    $1,100

    Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

    $9,600

    $6,800

    LONE PINE COMPANY

    Statement of Income and Retained Earnings

    For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)

    Net Sales*

    $36,000

    Less: Cost of Goods Sold

    $20,000

    Selling Expense

    6,000

    Administrative Expense

    4,000

    Interest Expense

    400

    Income Tax Expense

    2,000

    32,400

    Net Income

    $3,600

    Retained Earnings, Jan. 1

    900

    Ending Retained Earnings

    $4,500

    Cash Dividends Declared and Paid

    3,100

    Retained Earnings, Dec. 31

    $1,400

    *All sales are on account.

    Instructions

    Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calculations to two decimal places when necessary:

    a. Quick ratio

    b. Current ratio

    c. Inventory-turnover ratio

    d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio

    e. Return-on-assets ratio

    f. Net-profit-margin ratio

    g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity

    h. Debt-to-total assets

    i. Number of times that interest is earned.

    s corporation 507191

    Lockhart Corporation is a calendar-year corporation. At the beginning of 2013, its election to be taxed as an S corporation became effective. Lockhart Corp.’s balance sheet at the end of 2012 reflected the following assets (it did not have any earnings and profits from its prior years as a C corporation):

    Asset

    Adjusted Basis

    FMV

    Cash

    $ 35,000

    $ 35,000

    Accounts receivable

    25,000

    25,000

    Inventory

    180,000

    210,000

    Land

    125,000

    120,000

    Totals

    $365,000

    $390,000

    Lockhart’s business income for the year was $65,000 (this would have been its taxable income if it were a C corporation).

    1. During 2013, Lockhart sold all of the inventory it owned at the beginning of the year for $250,000. What is its built-in gains tax in 2013? Be sure to show your work.
    2. Assume the same facts as in part (1), except that if Lockhart were a C corporation, its taxable income would have been $17,000. What is its built-in gains tax in 2013? Be sure to show your work.
    3. Assume the original facts except the land was valued at $115,000 instead of $120,000. What is Lockhart’s built-in gains tax in 2013? Be sure to show your work.

    in the month of march style salon sevices 560 clients at an average price of 120 dur 507219

    In the month of March, Style Salon services 560 clients at an average price of $120. During the month, fixed costs were $21,024 and variable costs were 60% of sales.

    (a) Determine the contribution margin in dollars, per unit, and as a ratio.

    Contribution margin  

    $Entry

     
    Contribution margin per unit  

    $Entry

     
    Contribution margin ratio  

    Entry

    %

    (b) Using the contribution margin technique, compute the break-even point in dollars and in units.

    Break-even sales  

    $Entry

     
    Break-even sales  

    Entry

    units

    intermediate accounting 507225

    Assignment 4

    The following information pertains to a non-cancelable lease agreement between Kimono Leasing Company (lessor) and Clayton Company (lessee).

    Date/Amount Transaction/Information

    January 1, 2014 Lease Inception date with annual lease payment due at the beginning of each year starting with January 1, 2014.

    $81,365 Annual lease payment due at the beginning of each year starting with January 1, 2014.

    $50,000 Residual value of equipment at end of lease term; amount is guaranteed by the lessee.

    6 years Lease term

    6 years Economic life of leased equipment

    $400,000 Fair value of asset at January 1, 2014

    12% Lessor’s implicit rate

    12% Lessee’s incremental borrowing rate

    $4,000 Executory costs per year which the lessee assumes responsibility to pay.

    In addition to the above information, the asset will revert to the lessor at the end of the lease term. The

    lessee uses the straight-line depreciation method for all equipment.

    Required

    Use the spreadsheet Lease Amort Schedule to prepare an amortization schedule that would be suitable for the lessee for the lease term.

    Using the spreadsheet Journal Entries to prepare the journal entries for the lessee for 2014 and 2015 to record the lease agreement and all expenses related to the lease. Assume the lessee’s annual accounting period ends on December 31 and that reversing entries are used when appropriate.

    Assignment 5

    Complete the following exercise. Label each question clearly.

    Sonta Corp. provides a defined benefit pension plan for its employees. The balances below are on its books as of January 1, 2014.

    Account Balance

    Plan assets $480,000

    Projected benefit obligation (PBO) $625,000
    Accumulated OCI (Prior Service Cost) $100,000*

    * Prior Service Cost has a debit balance on January 1, 2014.

    The actuary has provided the following information:

    2014 Service cost $90,000

    Amortization of prior service cost $19,000

    Settlement rate 9%

    Actual return on plan assets in 2014 $57,000

    Unexpected loss from change in PBO due to actuarial

    predictions’ change $76,000

    Contributions in 2014 $99,000

    Benefits paid to retirees in 2014 $85,000

    Required

    Use the spreadsheet Pensionsto prepare a pension worksheet. On the pension worksheet, compute pension expense, pension asset/liability, projected benefit obligation, plan assets, prior service cost, and net gain or loss. Recall that settlement rate is 9%.

    Compute the same items as in (1), assuming that the settlement rate is now 7% and the expected rate of return is 10%. Hint: Simply change the interest cost to 7%; change actual/expected return to balance of plant asset on January 1, 2014*10%.

    Prepare the journal entry using the spreadsheet Journal Entriesto record pension expense in 2014.

    Indicate the reporting of the 2014 pension amounts in the income statement and balance sheet for Sonta Corp. using the spreadsheet Pensions.

    parent company statements 507246

    Parent Company Statements Parent Company acquired 90 percent of Son Inc. on January 31, 20X2 in exchange for cash. The book value of Son’s individual assets and liabilities approximated their acquisition-date fair values. On the date of acquisition, Son reported the following: During the year Son Inc. reported $310,000 in net income and declared $15,000 in dividends. Parent Company reported $520,000 in net income and declared $25,000 in dividends. Parent accounts for its investment using the equity method.

    Document Preview:

    Parent Company Statements Parent Company acquired 90 percent of Son Inc. on January 31, 20X2 in exchange for cash. The book value of Son’s individual assets and liabilities approximated their acquisition-date fair values. On the date of acquisition, Son reported the following: During the year Son Inc. reported $310,000 in net income and declared $15,000 in dividends. Parent Company reported $520,000 in net income and declared $25,000 in dividends. Parent accounts for its investment using the equity method. Answer the following questions: What journal entry will Parent make on the date of acquisition to record the investment in Son Inc.? If Parent were to prepare a consolidated balance sheet on the acquisition date (January 31, 201X), what is the basic elimination entry Parent would use in the consolidation worksheet? What is Parent’s balance in “Investment in Son Inc.” prior to consolidation on December 31, 201X? What is the basic elimination entry Parent would use in the consolidation worksheet on December 31, 201X?

    Attachments:

    a lump sum purchase or basket purchase involves paying a single price for several as 507267

    A lump-sum purchase or basket purchase involves paying a single price for several assets as a group.

    True or False

    The double-declining-balance method is an accelerated method of depreciation.

    True or False

    The gain or loss on the sale of a plant asset is determined by comparing:

    sale value and original cost.

    sale value and book value.

    sale value and residual value.

    book value and residual value.

    A company purchased a computer on July 1, 2015 for $50,000. Estimated useful life of the computer was 5 years and it has no residual value. Which of the following methods should be used to best match its expense against the revenue it produces?

    the straight-line method

    the first-in, first-out method

    the units-of-production method

    the double-declining-balance method

    When a plant asset is sold for a price lower than its book value, there will be a gain.

    True or False

    Which of the following accounting principles requires businesses to record depreciation?

    the matching principle

    the going concern principle

    the cost principle

    the revenue recognition principle

    Which of the following is included in the cost of a plant asset?

    amounts paid to make the asset ready for its intended use

    replacement of damaged parts of the asset

    regular repair and maintenance cost

    wages of workers who work with the asset

    Iverycoast Inc. purchased a van on January 1, 2015, for $800,000. Estimated life of the van was 5 years, and its estimated residual value was $90,000. Iverycoast uses the straight-line method of depreciation. At the beginning of 2017, the company revised the total estimated life of the asset from 5 years to 4 years. The estimated residual value remained the same as estimated earlier. Calculate the depreciation expense for the year 2017.

    $250,000

    $220,000

    $213,000

    $145,000

    Which of the following is true of asset turnover ratio?

    It measures how efficiently a business uses its sales to finance the assets.

    It measures how the ending inventory helps in increasing the value of assets.

    It measures how efficiently a business uses its net profit to finance the assets.

    It measures how efficiently a business uses its average total assets to generate sales.

    Which of the following is an expense resulting from decline in the utility of a natural resource?

    depletion

    amortization

    depreciation

    obsolescence

    Fred owns a delivery truck. Which of the following costs, associated with the truck, will be treated as a revenue expenditure?

    modification for new use

    addition to storage capacity

    major engine overhaul

    oil change and lubrication

    If a company uses the contra account, Accumulated Amortization, this account will typically be shown on the balance sheet.

    True or False

    A company purchased a used machine for $10,000. The machine required installation costs of $1,000 and insurance while in transit of $500. At which of the following amounts would the machine be recorded?

    $10,500

    $11,000

    $10,000

    $11,500

    Steel Rolling Company purchased a mine on January 1, 2015, for $500,000 and it is estimated to contain 30,000 tons of iron ore. There is no residual value. The company has extracted 2,500 tons of ore in 2015 and 3,800 tons of ore in 2016. What is depletion expense for 2016? (Do not round your intermediate calculations).

    $42,667

    $63,667

    $63,333

    $33,333

    Attachments:

    a lump sum purchase or basket purchase involves paying a single price for several as 507409

    A lump-sum purchase or basket purchase involves paying a single price for several assets as a group.

    True or False

    The double-declining-balance method is an accelerated method of depreciation.

    True or False

    The gain or loss on the sale of a plant asset is determined by comparing:

    sale value and original cost.

    sale value and book value.

    sale value and residual value.

    book value and residual value.

    A company purchased a computer on July 1, 2015 for $50,000. Estimated useful life of the computer was 5 years and it has no residual value. Which of the following methods should be used to best match its expense against the revenue it produces?

    the straight-line method

    the first-in, first-out method

    the units-of-production method

    the double-declining-balance method

    When a plant asset is sold for a price lower than its book value, there will be a gain.

    True or False

    Which of the following accounting principles requires businesses to record depreciation?

    the matching principle

    the going concern principle

    the cost principle

    the revenue recognition principle

    Which of the following is included in the cost of a plant asset?

    amounts paid to make the asset ready for its intended use

    replacement of damaged parts of the asset

    regular repair and maintenance cost

    wages of workers who work with the asset

    Iverycoast Inc. purchased a van on January 1, 2015, for $800,000. Estimated life of the van was 5 years, and its estimated residual value was $90,000. Iverycoast uses the straight-line method of depreciation. At the beginning of 2017, the company revised the total estimated life of the asset from 5 years to 4 years. The estimated residual value remained the same as estimated earlier. Calculate the depreciation expense for the year 2017.

    $250,000

    $220,000

    $213,000

    $145,000

    Which of the following is true of asset turnover ratio?

    It measures how efficiently a business uses its sales to finance the assets.

    It measures how the ending inventory helps in increasing the value of assets.

    It measures how efficiently a business uses its net profit to finance the assets.

    It measures how efficiently a business uses its average total assets to generate sales.

    Which of the following is an expense resulting from decline in the utility of a natural resource?

    depletion

    amortization

    depreciation

    obsolescence

    Fred owns a delivery truck. Which of the following costs, associated with the truck, will be treated as a revenue expenditure?

    modification for new use

    addition to storage capacity

    major engine overhaul

    oil change and lubrication

    If a company uses the contra account, Accumulated Amortization, this account will typically be shown on the balance sheet.

    True or False

    A company purchased a used machine for $10,000. The machine required installation costs of $1,000 and insurance while in transit of $500. At which of the following amounts would the machine be recorded?

    $10,500

    $11,000

    $10,000

    $11,500

    Steel Rolling Company purchased a mine on January 1, 2015, for $500,000 and it is estimated to contain 30,000 tons of iron ore. There is no residual value. The company has extracted 2,500 tons of ore in 2015 and 3,800 tons of ore in 2016. What is depletion expense for 2016? (Do not round your intermediate calculations).

    $42,667

    $63,667

    $63,333

    $33,333

    Attachments:

    ellwood house inc had the following condensed balance sheet at the end of 2012 507426

    Complete the following exercise. Submit journal entries in an Excel file and written segments in an MS Word document. Label each problem clearly.

    Ellwood House, Inc. had the following condensed balance sheet at the end of 2012.

    ELLWOOD HOUSE, INC.
    Balance Sheet
    December 31, 2012
    Cash $ 10,000 Current liabilities $ 14,500
    Current assets (non-cash) 34,000 Long-term notes payable 30,000
    Investments 40,000 Bonds payable 32,000
    Plant assets 57,500 Common stock 80,000
    Land 38,500 Retained earnings 23,500
    $180,000 $180,000

    During 2013, the following occurred.

    1. Ellwood House, Inc., sold part of its investment portfolio, which was classified as available-for-sale, for $15,500, resulting in a gain of $500 for the firm.
    2. Dividends totaling $19,000 were paid to stockholders.
    3. A parcel of land was purchased for $5,500.
    4. $20,000 of common stock were issued at par.
    5. $10,000 of bonds payable were retired at par.
    6. Heavy equipment was purchased through the issuance of $32,000 of bonds.
    7. Net income for 2013 was $42,000 after deducting depreciation of $13,550.
    8. Both current assets (other than cash) and current liabilities remained at the same amount.
    1. Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2013, using the indirect method. Assume that current assets (excluding cash) and current liabilities have remained the same on December 31, 2013. The cash balance on December 31, 2013 is $66,050.
    2. Draft a one-page letter to Gerald Brauer, president of Ellwood House, Inc., briefly explaining the changes within each major cash flow category. Refer to your cash flow statement whenever necessary.

    Attachments:

    complete the following exercise submit journal entries in an excel file 507427

    1. Complete the following exercise. Submit journal entries in an Excel file and written segments in an MS Word document. Label each problem clearly.
      Ellwood House, Inc. had the following condensed balance sheet at the end of 2012.
      ELLWOOD HOUSE, INC.
      Balance Sheet
      December 31, 2012
      Cash $ 10,000 Current liabilities $ 14,500
      Current assets (non-cash) 34,000 Long-term notes payable 30,000
      Investments 40,000 Bonds payable 32,000
      Plant assets 57,500 Common stock 80,000
      Land 38,500 Retained earnings 23,500
      $180,000 $180,000

      During 2013, the following occurred.

    2. Ellwood House, Inc., sold part of its investment portfolio, which was classified as available-for-sale, for $15,500, resulting in a gain of $500 for the firm.
    3. Dividends totaling $19,000 were paid to stockholders.
    4. A parcel of land was purchased for $5,500.
    5. $20,000 of common stock were issued at par.
    6. $10,000 of bonds payable were retired at par.
    7. Heavy equipment was purchased through the issuance of $32,000 of bonds.
    8. Net income for 2013 was $42,000 after deducting depreciation of $13,550.
    9. Both current assets (other than cash) and current liabilities remained at the same amount.
    10. Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2013, using the indirect method. Assume that current assets (excluding cash) and current liabilities have remained the same on December 31, 2013. The cash balance on December 31, 2013 is $66,050.
    11. Draft a one-page letter to Gerald Brauer, president of Ellwood House, Inc., briefly explaining the changes within each major cash flow category. Refer to your cash flow statement whenever necessary

    Attachments:

    my acc590 assignment watch the teamschedule and teamtec demonstration video and take 507494

    Practice Case Workbook Exercise 3: TeamSchedule and TeamTEC Watch the TeamSchedule and TeamTEC demonstration video and take notes. Use the information provided in the video to answer the following questions and critical thinking task.

    Practice Case Workbook
    Exercise 3: TeamSchedule and TeamTEC

    Watch the TeamSchedule and TeamTEC demonstration video and take notes. Use the information provided in the video to answer the following questions and critical thinking task.

    Multiple Choice

    1. Which of the following are components of TeamSchedule?
      1. TeamSchedule and TeamSchedule Web
      2. TeamSchedule and TeamTEC
      3. Audit Plan Monitoring and TeamSchedule Web
      4. None of the above
    2. The TeamSchedule Project Listing can include all of the following except:
      1. Projects created directly in TeamSchedule
      2. Projects released directly from TeamRisk
      3. Projects created in TeamAdmin
      4. Projects in TeamTEC identified on timesheets
    3. Which statement most accurately describes TeamSchedule’s Scheduling Wizard functionality?
      1. The Scheduling Wizard allows only single projects, filtered by a date parameter, to be scheduled.
      2. The Scheduling Wizard allows multiple projects to be scheduled at the same time.
      3. The Scheduling Wizard allows the scheduler to drag, drop, and draw projects directly within the Project Gantt.
      4. None of the above.
    4. TeamSchedule Web allows resources to do all of the following except:
      1. Send their assignments to their Outlook calendar
      2. Add vacation time
      3. Complete timesheets
      4. Update their profiles and qualifications information
    5. The TEC in TeamTEC stands for:
      1. Time Entry Coding
      2. Timesheet Expense Cost
      3. Time and Expense Capture
      4. Time Entered Capture

    True/False

    1. TeamSchedule is the last component in the TeamMate Audit Management System.
      1. True
      2. False
    2. Projects scheduled in TeamSchedule can be split into separate time periods or phases.
      1. True
      2. False
    3. Schedulers can assign resources to projects in TeamSchedule.
      1. True
      2. False
    4. Auditors can only enter expenses for a project using TEC.
      1. True
      2. False
    5. Timesheet overdue emails can be sent to auditors to ensure time is submitted for audit projects.
      1. True
      2. False
    6. Time entered on a timesheet can be entered weekly, biweekly, or monthly.
      1. True
      2. False

    Discussion Question

    1. How does the use of TeamSchedule and TeamTEC improve the monitoring and reporting of resources?

    Critical Thinking Task

    Using the TeamSchedule Project Gantt in Appendix A and the TeamSchedule Project Gantt Legend in Appendix B, explain how CPI’s internal audit management is managing and scheduling projects and resources.

    Appendix A – TeamSchedule Project Gantt

    Appendix B – TeamSchedule Project Gantt Legend

    Attachments:

    determine how much of the ending inventory consists of fixed manufacturing overhead 507496

    Ida Sidha Karya Company is a family-owned company located in the village of Gianyar on the island of Bali in Indonesia. The company produces a handcrafted Balinese musical instrument called a gamelan that is similar to a xylophone. The sounding bars are cast from brass and hand-filed to attain just the right sound. The bars are then mounted on an intricately hand-carved wooden base. The gamelans are sold for 850 (thousand) rupiahs. (The currency in Indonesia is the rupiah, which is denoted by Rp.) Selected data for the company”s operations last year follow (all currency values are in thousands of rupiahs):

    Units in beginning inventory 0
    Units produced 250
    Units sold 225
    Units in ending inventory 25
    Variable costs per unit:
    Direct materials Rp100
    Direct labor Rp320
    Variable manufacturing overhead Rp40
    Variable selling and administrative Rp20
    Fixed costs:
    Fixed manufacturing overhead Rp60,000
    Fixed selling and administrative Rp20,000
    ________________________________________

    The absorption costing income statement prepared by the company”s accountant for last year appears below (all currency values are in thousands of rupiahs):

    Sales Rp191,250
    Cost of goods sold 157,500
    Gross margin 33,750
    Selling and administrative expenses 24,500
    Net operating income Rp9,250
    ________________________________________

    Requirement 1:
    Determine how much of the ending inventory consists of fixed manufacturing overhead cost deferred in inventory to the next period.

    Requirement 2:
    Prepare an income statement for the year using the variable costing method.

    marloweville with 20000 residents is deciding how to finance the construction of a n 507513

    Marloweville, with 20000, residents, is deciding how to finance

    the construction of a new municipal golf course that will enhance

    both recreation and tourism in the area. The construction costs of

    the golf course is $10,000,000. By law all proceeds from debts

    issuance are placed in the Marlowevilles capital projects fund and

    all capital expenditures are made using this fund.

    1. Show how Marloweville would record the transactions if it

    were to issue a $10,000,000 bond and then use the proceeds to

    construct the golf course.

    2. Show how Marloweville would record the transactions if it

    were to finance 50% of the contruction with a miniciple bond and

    50% through a transfer from the Rainy Day Fund (a govermental

    fund)

    3. If at the end of the fiscal year, Marloweville makes a loan

    repayment of $250,000 plus a $50,000 interest payment, the total

    expenditure for the transaction will equal

    a.0

    b.250000

    c.50000

    d300000

    View less »

    capitalization of interest 507554

    Greig Landscaping began construction of a new plant on Dec 1,2014. On this date, the company purchased a parcel of land for $139,000 in cash. In addition it paid $2,000 in surveying costs and $4,000 for a title insurance policy. An old dwelling on the premises was demolished at a cost of $3,000 with $1,000 being received from the sale of material.

    Architectural plans were also formalized on December 1, 2014, whenthe architect was paid $30,000. The necessary building permits costing $3,000 were obtained from the city and paid for on Dec 1 as well. The excavation work began during the first week in Dec with payments made to the contractor as follows:

    March 1 – $240,000

    May 1 – $330,000

    July 1 – $60,000

    The building was completed on July 1, 2015.

    To finance construction on this plant, Grieg borrowed $600,000 from the bank on December 1, 2014. Grieg had no other borrowings. The $600,000 was a 10-year loan bearing interest at 8%.

    Using Excel, develop a well labeled spreadsheet that you could submit to your boss showing:

    • A spreadsheet with appropriate formulas (flexible design); everything can be placed on one sheet or multiple sheets depending on your design
    • The calculation for the capitalization of interest
    • The Land total for both Dec. 31, 2014 and Dec. 31, 2015
    • The Buildings total for both Dec. 31, 2014 and Dec. 31, 2015
    • The Interest Expense total for both Dec. 31, 2014 and Dec. 31, 2015

    discussing a performance evaluation system darmen corporation is one of the major pr 507584

    Discussing a performance evaluation system. Darmen Corporation is one of the major producers of prefabricated houses in the home building industry. The corporation consists of two divisions: (1) Bell Division, which acquires the raw materials to manufacture the basic house components and assembles them into kits, and (2) the Cornish Division, which takes the kits and constructs the homes for final home buyers. The corporation is decentralized, and the management of each division is measured by its income and return on investment.

    Bell Division assembles seven separate house kits using raw materials purchased at the prevailing market prices. The seven kits are sold to Cornish for prices ranging from $45,000 to $98,000. The prices are set by Darmen’s corporate management using prices paid by Cornish when it buys comparable units from outside sources. The smaller kits with the lower prices have become a larger portion of the units sold because the final house buyer is facing prices that are increasing more rapidly than personal income. The kits are manufactured and assembled in a new plant just purchased by Bell this year. The division had been located in a leased plant for the past four years.

    All kits are assembled upon receipt of an order from the Cornish Division. When the kit is completely assembled, it is loaded immediately on a Cornish truck. Thus, Bell Division has no finished goods inventory.

    The Bell Division’s accounts and reports are prepared on an actual cost basis. There is no budget, and standards have not been developed for any product. A factory overhead rate is calculated at the beginning of each year. The rate is designed to charge all overhead to the product each year. Any under- or over-applied overhead is allocated to the cost of goods sold account and work-in-process inventories.

    Bell Division’s annual report is presented next. This report forms the basis of the evaluation of the division and its management by corporate management.

    Bell Division
    Performancefor Report
    The Year Ended December 31, 20×6
    Increase Or From 20×5

    20×5

    20×6

    Amount

    Percent change

    Summary data Net income ($000 omitted)

    $34,222

    $31,573

    $2,649

    8.4

    Return on investment

    37%

    43%

    %

    Kits shipped (units)

    2,000

    2,100

    Production data (in units) Kits started

    2,400

    1,600

    800

    50.0

    Kits shipped

    2,000

    2,100

    Kits in process at year-end

    700

    300

    400

    133.3

    Increase in kits in process at year-end

    400

    Financial data ($000 omitted) Sales

    $138,000

    $162,800

    $

    Production costs of units sold: Raw material

    32,000

    40,000

    Labor

    41,700

    53,000

    Factory overhead

    29,000

    37,000

    Cost of units sold

    102,700

    130,000

    Other costs: Corporate charges for personnel services

    228

    210

    18

    8.6

    Accounting services

    425

    440

    Financing costs

    300

    525

    Total other costs

    953

    1,175

    Adjustments to income: Unreimbursed fire loss

    52

    Raw material losses due to improper storage

    125

    125

    Total adjustments

    125

    52

    73

    140.4

    Total deductions

    103,778

    131,227

    Division income

    $ 34,222 $

    31,573

    $ 2,649

    8.4

    Division investment

    $ 92,000 $

    73,000

    $ 19,000

    26.0

    Return nn investment

    37%

    43%

    %

    Additional information regarding corporate and division practices is as follows:

    • The corporate office does all the personnel and accounting work for each division.
    • The corporate personnel costs are allocated on the basis of the number of employees in the division.
    • The accounting costs are allocated to the division on the basis of total costs excluding corporate charges
    • The division administration costs are included in factory overhead.
    • The financing charges include a corporate imputed interest charge on division assets and any divisional lease payments.
    • The division investment for the return on investment calculation includes division inventory and plant and equipment at gross book value.

    Required:

    a. Discuss the value of the annual report presented for the Bell Division in evaluating the division and its management in terms of:

    • 1. The accounting techniques employed in the measurement of division activities.
    • 2. The manner of presentation.
    • 3. The effectiveness with which it discloses differences and similarities between years.

    b. Present specific recommendations you would make to the management of Darmen Corporation to improve its accounting and financial reporting system

    balance sheet columns indicate with an x whether each account total should be extend 507586

    Balance sheet columns indicate with an “X” whether each account total should be extended to the income statement to the income statement debit or credit or to the balance sheet debit or credit columns on the work sheet.

    Income Statement

    Balance Sheet

    Cash

    Debit

    Credit

    Debit

    Credit

    Accounts Receivable

    Supplies

    Prepaid Insurance

    Delivery Equipment

    Accum. Dept. Delivery Equipment

    Accounts Payable

    Wages payable

    Owner, capital

    Owner, drawing

    Delivery fees

    Wages expense

    Rent expense

    Supplies expense

    Insurance expense

    Depr. Exp. Delivery Equipment

    vertical analysis 507703

    I need to do a vertical analysis for kudler fine foods 2003 the income statement and balance sheet are below

    information

    Balance Sheet

    December 31, 2003

    Assets

    Current Assets:

    Cash

    Accounts Receivable

    Less: Reserve for Bad Debts

    Merchandise Inventory

    Prepaid Expenses

    Notes Receivable

    $86,000

    $0 $1,430,000

    $86,000

    $429,000

    $26,000

    $0

    Total Current Assets $1,971,000

    Fixed Assets:

    Vehicles

    Less: Accumulated Depreciation

    Furniture and Fixtures

    Less: Accumulated Depreciation

    Equipment

    Less: Accumulated Depreciation

    $63,000

    $27,750

    $435,000

    $186,000

    $634,000

    $214,000

    $35,250

    $249,000

    $420,000

    Total Fixed Assets $704,250

    Other Assets:

    Goodwill $0

    Total Other Assets $0

    TOTAL ASSETS $2,675,250

    Liabilities and Capital

    Current Liabilities:

    Accounts Payable

    Sales Tax Payable

    Payroll Taxes Payable

    Accrued Wages Payable

    Unearned Revenues

    Short-Term Notes Payable

    Short-Term ank Loan Payable

    $96,500

    $3,950

    $15,840

    $0

    $0

    $0

    $0

    Total Current Liabilities $116,290

    Long-Term Liabilities:

    Long-Term Notes Payable $630,000

    Total Long-Term Liabilities $630,000

    TOTAL LIABILITIES $746,290

    Capital:

    Owner’s Equity

    Net Profit $746,290

    $1,182,670

    TOTAL CAPITAL $1,928,960

    TOTAL LIABILITIES AND CAPITAL $2,675,250

    Kudler Fine Foods

    Income Statement

    For the Year Ended December 31, 2003

    Revenue:

    Gross Sales

    Less: Sales Returns and Allowances $10,804,000

    $7,800

    Net Sales $10,796,200

    Cost of Goods Sold:

    Beginning Inventory

    Add:

    Purchases

    Freight-in

    Direct Labor

    Indirect Expenses

    $467,890

    $3,752,891

    $165,010

    $3,769,591

    $748,539

    $8,903,921

    Less: Ending Inventory $429,090

    Cost of Goods Sold $8,474,831

    Gross Profit (Loss) $2,321,369

    Expenses:

    Advertising 263,000

    Amortization 2,700

    Bad Debts 2,300

    Bank Charges 19,258

    Charitable Contributions 5,000

    Bonuses 65,000

    Systems & Network Contract 82,000

    Credit Card Fees 125

    HR Payroll Outsource 8,500

    Depreciation 27,750

    Dues and Subscriptions 29,403

    Insurance 65,000

    Custodial Contract 48,000

    Interest 63,768

    Maintenance Contract 36,000

    Miscellaneous 1,100

    Office Expenses 8,300

    Operating Supplies 5,500

    Software Licenses 8,200

    Permits and Licenses 3,500

    Postage 46,000

    Professional Fees 32,157

    Office Lease 63,000

    Repairs 850

    Telephone 16,500

    Travel 4,500

    Utilities 7,900

    Vehicle Expenses 11,458

    Wages 725,650

    busn 5600 week 5 6 and 7 graded a work 507751

    On January 1, 2013, Learned, Inc., issued $90 million face amount of 20-year, 14% stated rate bonds when market interest rates were 16%. The bonds pay interest semiannually each June 30 and December 31 and mature on December 31, 2032

    Required:

    Calculate the proceeds (issue price) of Learned, Inc.’s, bonds on January 1, 2013, assuming that the bonds were sold to provide a market rate of return to the investor.

    Assume instead that the proceeds were $93,000,000. Use the horizontal model to record the payment of semiannual interest and the related premium amortization on June 30, 2013, assuming that the premium of $3,000,000 is amortized on a straight-line basis.

    Assume instead that the proceeds were $93,000,000. Record the journal entry to show the payment of semiannual interest and the related premium amortization on June 30, 2013, assuming that the premium of $3,000,000 is amortized on a straight-line basis.

    If the premium in partbwere amortized using the compound interest method, would interest expense for the year ended December 31,2013, be more than, less than, or equal to the interest expense reported using the straight-line method of premium amortization?

    prepare journal entries for the city of pudding s governmental funds 507795

    Prepare journal entries for the City of Pudding’s governmental funds to record the following transactions, first for fund financial statements and then for government-wide financial statements.

    a. A new truck for the sanitation department was ordered at a cost of $94,000.

    b. The city print shop did $1,200 worth of work for the school system (but has not yet been paid.

    c. An $11 million bond was issued to build a new road.

    d. Cash of $140,000 is transferred from the General Fund to provide permanent financing for a municipal swimming pool that will be viewed as an Enterprise Fund.

    e. The truck ordered in (
    a) is received at an actual cost of $96,000. Payment is not made at this time.

    f. Cash of $32,000 is transferred from the General Fund to the Capital Projects Fund.

    g. A state grant of $30,000 is received that must be spent to promote recycling.

    h. The first $5,000 of the state grant received in (
    g) is appropriately expended.

    (2)

    The following trial balance is taken from the General Fund of the City of Jennings for the year ending December 31, 2013. Prepare a condensed statement of revenues, expenditures, and other changes in fund balance and also prepare a condensed balance sheet.

    Debit Credit

    Accounts Payable $ 90,000

    Cash $ 30,000

    Contracts Payable 90,000

    Deferred Revenues 40,000

    Due from Capital Projects Funds 60,000

    Due to Debt Service Funds 40,000

    Expenditures 530,000

    Fund Balance—Unassigned 170,000

    Investments 410,000

    Revenues 760,000

    Other Financing Sources—Bond Proceeds 300,000

    Other Financing Sources—Transfers In 50,000

    Other Financing Uses—Transfers Out 470,000

    Taxes Receivable 220,000

    Vouchers Payable 180,000

    Totals $1,720,000 $1,720,000

    (3)

    The following information pertains to the City of Williamson for 2013, its first year of legal existence. For convenience, assume that all transactions are for the General Fund, which has three separate functions: general government, public safety, and health and sanitation.

    Receipts:

    Property taxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $320,000

    Franchise taxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,000

    Charges for general government services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,000

    Charges for public safety services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 3,000

    Charges for health and sanitation services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,000

    Issued long-term note payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200,000

    Receivables at end of year:

    Property taxes (90 percent estimated to be collectible) . . . . . . . . . . . . 90,000

    Payments:

    Salary:

    General government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,000

    Public safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,000

    Health and sanitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22,000

    Rent:

    General government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 11,000

    Public safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,000

    Health and sanitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,000

    Maintenance:

    General government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21,000

    Public safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,000

    Health and sanitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,000

    Insurance:

    General government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8,000

    Public safety ($2,000 still prepaid at end of year) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,000

    Health and sanitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,000

    Interest on debt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16,000

    Principal payment on debt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,000

    Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 120,000

    Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,000

    Supplies (20 percent still held) (public safety) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,000

    Investments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90,000

    Ordered but not received:

    Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,000

    Due in one month at end of year:

    Salaries:

    General government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 4,000

    Public safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,000

    Health and sanitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8,000

    Compensated absences for general government workers at year-end totaled at $13,000. These amounts will not be taken until late in the year 2014.

    The city received a piece of art this year valued at $14,000 that it is using for general government purposes. There are no eligibility requirements. The city chose not to capitalize this property.

    The general government uses the building that was acquired and is depreciating it over 10 years using the straight-line method with no salvage value. The city uses the equipment for health and sanitation and depreciates it using the straight-line method over five years with no salvage value.

    The investments are valued at $103,000 at the end of the year.

    For the equipment that has been ordered but not yet received, the City Council (the highest decision-making body in the government) has voted to honor the commitment when the equipment is received.

    a. Prepare a statement of activities and a statement of net assets for governmental activities for

    December 31, 2013, and the year then ended.

    b. Prepare a statement of revenues, expenditures, and other changes in fund balances and a balance sheet for the General Fund as of December 31, 2013, and the year then ended. Assume that the city applies the consumption method.

    Attachments:

    interpreting management reports capital investment analysis 507810

    Interpreting Management Reports: Capital Investment Analysis C4. Angelo Bank is planning to replace some old ATM machines and has decided to use the York Machine. Anita Chavez, the controller, has prepared the analysis shown here. Shc has recommended purchasing the machine based on the positive net present value shown in the analysis. The York Machine has an estimated useful life of five years and an expected residual value of $35,000. Its purchase price is 5385,000. Two existing ATMs, each having a carrying value of 525,000, can be sold to a neighboring hank for a total of 550,000. Annual operating cash inflows are expected to increase in the following manner:

    Year 1 $79,900 Year 2 76,600 Year 3 79,900 Year 4 83,200 Year 5 86,500

    Angelo Bank uses straight-line depredation. The minimum race of is 12 percent. APO° Bank Capital Investment Analysis Net Present Value Method

    Year 1 2 3 4 5 5 (residual value) Total present value Initial investment Less proceeds from the sale of existing ATM machines Net capital investment Net present value

    Present Value Factor 0.909 0.826 0.751 0.683 0.621 0.621

    ..385,000

    1. Analyze Chavez’s work. (Round to the ne.tt-,•,t made in her capital investment analysis? ) i% ould he your recommendation to bank 111.111.1..ic Machine?

    Present Value S

    Chapter 10, C 4. Please ONLY place data in the yellow cells.
    1. Managerial Analysis
    San Angelo Federal Bank
    Capital Investment Analysis
    Net Present Value Method
    Net Present
    Cash 12% Value
    Year Inflows Factor* (Rounded)
    1 $ — $ —
    2
    3
    4
    5
    5 (residual value)
    Total present value of cash inflows $ —
    Total present value of cash inflows $ —
    Net capital investment
    Initial investment $ —
    Less proceeds from sale of existing teller
    machines
    Net capital investment
    Net present value $ —
    * Table 1 in Appendix B on present value tables.
    2. Mangerial Analysis

    financial calculations in excel wsample xlsx contains questions 507853

    The file “WSample.xlsx” contains questions, with answers and using Excel to do the calculation using normal formulas. “Week 8 Problems.xls” contains 3 questions, these need to be solved just like the questions in “WSample.xlsx”, showing detailed calculations to get same answer as the one given in bold. PLEASE MAKE SURE THAT THIS IS FORMATTED JUST LIKE THE WORK IN “WSample.xlsx”.

    1 If you deposit $15,000 today and earn 8% annual interest, how much will you have in 9 years?
    Answer: $29,985.07 Using the Excel Future Value function. (Interest rate, pay periods, and present value).
    Calculated Answer: Amount Interest Total
    $15,000.00 $1,200.00 $16,200.00
    $16,200.00 $1,296.00 $17,496.00
    $17,496.00 $1,399.68 $18,895.68
    $18,895.68 $1,511.65 $20,407.33
    $20,407.33 $1,632.59 $22,039.92
    $22,039.92 $1,763.19 $23,803.11
    $23,803.11 $1,904.25 $25,707.36
    $25,707.36 $2,056.59 $27,763.95
    $27,763.95 $2,221.12 $29,985.07
    Calculated Total: $29,985.07 Since the interest calculated is compounded, the earned interest adds to the interest accumulated in the past terms.
    2 Tiffany will receive a graduation gift of $10,000 from her parents in 3 years. If the discount rate
    is 7%, what is this gift worth today?
    Answer: $8,162.98 Using the Excel Present Value function. (Interest rate, pay periods, and future value).
    Term in years Amount Discount 1 / (1+d)^term amount * 1 / (1+d)^term
    3 $10,000.00 0.07 0.816297877 $8,162.98
    Calculated Answer: $8,162.98 Calculated using the Present Value method – PV = FV * [ 1 / (1 + i)^n ]
    3 What is the present value of a 20-year ordinary annuity of $30,000 using a 6% discount rate?
    Answer: $3,44,097.64 Using the Excel Present Value function. (Interest rate, pay periods, payment each period).
    Term in years Amount Discount 1 – (1+d)^-term (1 – (1+d)^-term ) / d amount * [(1 – (1+d)^-term ) / d]
    20 $30,000.00 0.06 0.688195273 11.46992122 $3,44,097.64
    Calculated Answer: $3,44,097.64 Calculated using the Present Value method for Ordinary Annuities: PV = FV * [ (1 – (1 + i)^-n) / i ]

    paper inc s board of directors has requested a set of pro forma 505469

    As discussed in today’s meeting, Paper Inc. ‘s Board of Directors has requested a set of Pro-forma financial statements for the proposed acquisition of Scissor Company.

    For the past several years Paper Inc’s Executive Management Team hasreceived continued pressure from its investors for their lack of growth (markets share, revenue, and profits). On May 1, 2012 the Chief Executive Officer, Chief Operating Officer, and the Chief Financial Officer all resigned under duress (pressured by Board of Directors to resign).

    For the past twelve months, Paper Inc.’s Board of Directors and Executive Management Team had been in discussions with Scissor Company’s Board of Directors about a possible merger (Paper Inc. acquiring 75% of Scissor Company). The Paper Inc.Board has determined that this acquisition would be in the best interest of its shareholders.

    The Board has requested that the Accounting Department provide pro-forma financial statements (income statement, statement of retained earnings, and balance sheet) for the proposed consolidated company. In addition, the Board has asked for a detailed explanation on how the consolidation process works. They specifically requested a walk-through of the consolidation work paper.

    Detailed Request:

    1. Prepare a consolidated balance sheet (January 1, 2012) – assuming the acquisition had taken place on January 1, 2012 (remember to provide work paper detail).
    2. Prepare a pro-forma income statement, statement of retained earnings, and balance sheet (assuming the acquisition had taken place on January 1, 2012) as of December 31, 2012 (remember to show work paper detail using the 3-section format). Apply the cost method.
    3. Document all general ledger journal entries (REAL Entries) that would take place using the assumption above.

    Base Data:

    As of 1/1/12 the balance sheets for Paper Inc. (acquirer) and Scissor Company (acquired) immediately prior to the combination were as follows:

    Balance Sheet as of 12/31/11 Scissor Company
    Paper Inc. Scissor Company Fair Value
    Cash $750,000 $230,000 Same as BV
    Current Assets 207,000 6,000 Same as BV
    PPE (net) 813,000 54,000 Same as BV
    Land 150,000 25,000 $50,000
    Total 1,920,000 315,000
    Liabilities 850,000 90,000 Same as BV
    Common Stock, $20 par 825,000 120,000
    APIC 109,000 30,000
    Retained Earnings 136,000 75,000
    Total 1,920,000 315,000

    Key Data and Assumptions:

    • As of 12/31/11 FV of Scissor Company net assets is equal to BV with the exception of Land, which has a FV of $50,000. On January 1, 2012, Paper Inc. common stock had a fair value of $30 per share. It is expected that Paper Inc.’s common stock will have a fair value of $30 per share on 12/31/2012.
    • Assume that Paper Inc. issues 9,600 shares of its $20 par value common stock for 75% of Skins outstanding stock on January 1, 2012.
    • Assume that the income statements for Paper Inc. and Scissor are the following in fiscal year 2012. In addition, assume Paper Inc. had dividends declared of $40,000 and Scissor Company declared $20,000.
    Income Statement
    Paper Inc. Scissor
    Revenue $900,000 $350,000
    Dividend Income 15,000
    Total revenues 915,000 350,000
    COGS 550,000 150,000
    Operating Expenses 150,000 100,000
    700,000 250,000
    Net Income 215,000 100,000

    Note:

    • Ignore tax impact
    • Net Asset change for the year should be added to the cash account

    Attachments:

    explain how the analysis for the cooking department will differ from the analysis fo 505473

    Process Costing: FIFO Costing Method P6. Canned fruits and vegetables are the main products made by Yummy Foods, Inc. All direct materials are added at the beginning of the Mixing Department’s process. When the ingredients have been mixed, they go to the Cooking Department. There the mixture is heated to 100° Celsius and simmered for 20 minutes. When cooled, the slnixture goes to the Canning Department for final processing. Throughout the opera-tions, direct labor and overhead costs are incurred uniformly. No direct materials are added in the Cooking Department. Cost data and other information for the Mixing Department for January are as follows.

    Direct Conversion Production Cost Data Materials Costs Mixing Department Beginning Inventory $ 28,560 5 5,230 Current period costs 450,000 181,200 Work In process Inventory: Beginning inventory (40% complete in prior period) 5,000 liters Ending Inventory (60% complete) 6,000 liters Unit production data: Units started during January 90,000 liters Units transferred out during January 89,000 liters

    Assume that no spoilage or evaporation loss took place during January. REQUIRED 1. Using the FIR) costing method, prepare a process cost report for the Mixing 1)epartment for January. 2. ACCOUNTING CONNECTION ? Explain how the analysis for the Cooking Department will differ from the analysis for the Mixing Department.

    Attachments:

    evaluate and rank the options 1 5 1 being the best choice there are many non financi 506651

    MultiPaint, Inc. ~Case Questions & Deliverable

    Case Questions:

    1. Main issue: What to do with old paint site.

      1. Perform an NPV analysis on each option

      2. Evaluate and rank the options 1 – 5 (1 being the best choice). There are many non-financial issues surrounding these alternatives. Briefly discuss each option from both a quantitative and qualitative perspective. Be sure to include the reasoning behind your option number one.

        Deliverable:

    1. Create a spreadsheet that contains the calculations for Options 1-5. Label items appropriately for ease of understanding.

    1. Write a 1-2 page evaluation/analysis of each of your options. Briefly discuss each option from both a quantitative and qualitative perspective. Be sure to include the reasoning behind the option you chose.

    Document Preview:

    MultiPaint, Inc. ~ Case Questions & Deliverable Case Questions: Main issue: What to do with old paint site. Perform an NPV analysis on each option Evaluate and rank the options 1 – 5 (1 being the best choice). There are many non-financial issues surrounding these alternatives. Briefly discuss each option from both a quantitative and qualitative perspective. Be sure to include the reasoning behind your option number one. Deliverable: Create a spreadsheet that contains the calculations for Options 1-5. Label items appropriately for ease of understanding. Write a 1-2 page evaluation/analysis of each of your options. Briefly discuss each option from both a quantitative and qualitative perspective. Be sure to include the reasoning behind the option you chose.

    pensions and other postretirement benefits 506704

    Complete the following exercise. Label each question clearly.

    Sonta Corp. provides a defined benefit pension plan for its employees.The balances below are on its books as of January 1, 2014.

    AccountBalance

    Plan assets$480,000

    Projected benefit obligation (PBO)$625,000
    Accumulated OCI (Prior Service Cost)$100,000*

    * Prior Service Cost has a debit balance on January 1, 2014.

    The actuary has provided the following information:

    2014 Service cost$90,000

    Amortization of prior service cost $19,000

    Settlement rate9%

    Actual return on plan assets in 2014$57,000

    Unexpected loss from change in PBO due to actuarial

    predictions’ change$76,000

    Contributions in 2014$99,000

    Benefits paid to retirees in 2014$85,000

    Required

    1. Use the spreadsheetPensionsto prepare a pension worksheet. On the pension worksheet, compute pension expense, pension asset/liability, projected benefit obligation, plan assets, prior service cost, and net gain or loss. Recall that settlement rate is 9%.

    2. Compute the same items as in (1), assuming that the settlement rate is now 7% and the expected rate of return is 10%. Hint: Simply change the interest cost to 7%; change actual/expected return to balance of plant asset on January 1, 2014*10%.

    3. Prepare the journal entry using the spreadsheetJournal Entriesto record pension expense in 2014.

    Indicate the reporting of the 2014 pension amounts in the income statement and balance sheet for Sonta Corp. using the spreadsheetPensions.

    question4 506709

    Question 4

    During its first year of operations, Benji Corporation had the following transactions pertaining to its common stock.

    Jan. 10 Issued71,300shares for cash at $6per share.
    July 1 Issued42,100shares for cash at $10per share.

    (a) Journalize the transactions, assuming that the common stock has a par value of $6per share.
    (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

    selected t accounts for rolm company are given below for the just completed year 506749

    Selected T-accounts for Rolm Company are given below for the just completed year:
    Raw Materials Manufacturing Overhead
    Bal. 1/1 32,000 Credits? Debits386,000 Credits?
    Debits 410,000
    Bal. 12/3156,000
    Work in Process Factory Wages Payable
    Bal. 1/1 72,000 Credits 790,000 Debits 175,000 Bal. 1/114,000
    Direct materials324,000 Credits184,000
    Direct labor118,000 Bal. 12/3123,000
    Overhead450,000
    Bal. 12/31 ?
    Finished Goods Cost of Goods Sold
    Bal. 1/1 44,000 Credits ? Debits ?
    Debits ?
    Bal. 12/31 136,000
    Required:
    1. What was the cost of raw materials put into production during the year?
    The cost of raw materials $
    2. How much of the materials in (1) above consisted of indirect materials?
    Indirect materials $
    3. How much of the factory labor cost for the year consisted of indirect labor?
    Indirect labor cost $
    4. What was the cost of goods manufactured for the year?
    Cost of goods manufactured $
    5. What was the cost of goods sold for the year (before considering underapplied or overapplied overhead)?
    Cost of goods sold $
    6. If overhead is applied to production on the basis of direct materials cost, what predetermined rate was in effect during the year? (Round your answer to 2 decimal places.)
    The predetermined overhead rate was % of direct materials cost
    7. Was manufacturing overhead underapplied or overapplied? By how much? (Input the amount as apositive value.)
    Manufacturing overhead was (Click to select)underappliedoverapplied by $
    8. Compute the ending balance in the Work in Process inventory account. Assume that this balance consists entirely of goods started during the year. If $32,600 of this balance is direct materials cost, how much of it is direct labor cost? Manufacturing overhead cost? (Round your predetermined overhead rate percentage and final answers to 2 decimal places.)
    Ending balance in the work in process $
    Direct labor cost $
    Manufacturing overhead cost $

    3.

    value:

    10.00 points

    The Pacific Manufacturing Company operates a job-order costing system and applies overhead cost to jobs on the basis of direct labor cost. Its predetermined overhead rate was based on a cost formula that estimated $127,400 of manufacturing overhead for an estimated allocation base of $91,000 direct labor dollars. The company has provided the following data:
    Inventories Beginning Ending
    Raw materials $ 23,000 $ 12,000
    Work in process $ 50,000 $ 39,000
    Finished goods $ 71,000 $ 59,000
    The following actual costs were incurred during the year:
    Purchase of raw materials (all direct) $ 132,000
    Direct labor cost $ 87,000
    Actual manufacturing overhead costs:
    Insurance, factory $ 11,400
    Depreciation of equipment $ 18,000
    Indirect labor $ 33,800
    Property taxes $ 8,700
    Maintenance $ 15,000
    Rent, building $ 38,000
    Required:
    1-a. Compute the predetermined overhead rate for the year.
    Predetermined overhead rate %
    1-b. Compute the amount of underapplied or overapplied overhead for the year. (Input the amount as apositive value.)
    (Click to select)UnderappliedOverapplied overhead $
    2. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year. Assume all raw materials are used in production as direct materials. (Input all amounts as positive values.)
    Pacific Manufacturing Company
    Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured
    Direct materials:
    (Click to select)Work in process, beginningRaw materials inventory, endingRaw materials inventory, beginningManufacturing overhead applied to work in processWork in process, ending $
    (Click to select)DeductAdd: (Click to select)Work in process, beginningRaw materials inventory, endingCost of goods manufacturedWork in process, endingPurchases of raw materials
    Total raw materials available
    (Click to select)AddDeduct: (Click to select)Work in process, beginningWork in process, endingRaw materials inventory, endingRaw materials inventory, beginningPurchases of raw materials
    Raw materials used in production $
    (Click to select)Raw materials inventory, endingDirect laborWork in process, endingWork in process, beginningPurchases of raw materials
    (Click to select)Manufacturing overhead applied to work in processWork in process, endingPurchases of raw materialsWork in process, beginningRaw materials inventory, ending
    Total manufacturing cost
    (Click to select)AddDeduct: (Click to select)Raw materials inventory endingWork in process, beginningPurchases of raw materialsRaw materials inventory, beginningWork in process, ending
    (Click to select)DeductAdd: (Click to select)Work in process, beginningWork in process, endingRaw materials inventory, beginningRaw materials inventory, endingPurchases of raw materials
    Cost of goods manufactured $
    3. Compute the unadjusted cost of goods sold for the year. (Do not include any underapplied or overapplied overhead in your cost of goods sold figure.)
    Unadjusted cost of goods sold $
    4. Job 137 was started and completed during the year. What price would have been charged to the customer if the job required $4,000 in materials and $4,300 in direct labor cost, and the company priced its jobs at 40% above the job’s cost according to the accounting system?
    Price to customer $
    5. Direct labor made up $8,500 of the $39,000 ending Work in Process inventory balance. Supply the information missing below:
    Direct materials $
    Direct labor 8,500
    Manufacturing overhead
    Work in process inventory $ 39,000

    Attachments:

    managerial account question 506756

    Rosiek Corporation uses part A55 in one of its products. The company’s Accounting Department reports the following costs of producing the 4,000 units of the part that are needed every year.

    Direct Materials 2.80
    Direct Labor 6.30
    Variable Overhead 8.50
    Supervisor’s Salary 2.60
    Depreciation Of Special Equipment 6.80
    Allocated General Overhead 6.10

    An outside supplier has offered to make the part and sell it to the company for $32.30 each. If this offer is accepted, the supervisor’s salary and all of the variable costs, including direct labor, can be avoided. The special equipment used to make the part was purchased many years ago and has no salvage value or other use. The allocated general overhead represents fixed costs of the entire company. If the outside supplier’s offer were accepted, only $4,000 of these allocated general overhead costs would be avoided.

    In addition, the space used to produce part A55 could be used to make more of one of the company’s other products, generating an additional segment margin of $26,000 per year for that product.

    Required:

    a. Prepare a report that shows the effect on the company’s total net operating income of buying part A55 from the supplier rather than continuing to make it inside the company.

    b. Which alternative should the company choose?

    managerial accounting 506758

    Problem 17-2A

    Schultz Electronics manufactures two large-screen television models: the Royale which sells for $1,570, and a new model, the Majestic, which sells for $1,300. The production cost computed per unit under traditional costing for each model in 2014 was as follows.

    Traditional Costing Royale Majestic
    Direct materials $660 $410
    Direct labor ($20 per hour) 120 100
    Manufacturing overhead ($40per DLH) 240 200
    Total per unit cost $1,020 $710

    In 2014, Schultz manufactured 25,000 units of the Royale and 10,000 units of the Majestic. The overhead rate of $40per direct labor hour was determined by dividing total expected manufacturing overhead of $7,920,900by the total direct labor hours (200,000) for the two models.
    Under traditional costing, the gross profit on the models was Royale $550or ($1,570– $1,020), and Majestic $590or ($1,300– $710). Because of this difference, management is considering phasing out the Royale model and increasing the production of the Majestic model.
    Before finalizing its decision, management asks Schultz’s controller to prepare an analysis using activity-based costing (ABC). The controller accumulates the following information about overhead for the year ended December 31, 2014.

    Activities Cost Drivers Estimated
    Overhead
    Expected Use of
    Cost Drivers
    Activity-Based
    Overhead Rate
    Purchasing Number of orders $1,244,960 40,160 $31/order
    Machine setups Number of setups 913,680 16,920 54/setup
    Machining Machine hours 5,010,180 119,290 42/hour
    Quality control Number of inspections 752,080 26,860 28/inspection

    The cost drivers used for each product were:

    Cost Drivers Royale Majestic
    Total
    Purchase orders 16,600 23,560 40,160
    Machine setups 4,150 12,770 16,920
    Machine hours 74,450 44,840 119,290
    Inspections 10,300 16,560 26,860
    Assign the total 2014 manufacturing overhead costs to the two products using activity-based costing (ABC) and determine the overhead cost per unit.(Round cost per unit to 2 decimal places, e.g. $12.25.)

    Royale Majestic
    Total assigned costs $ $
    Cost per unit $ $

    LINK TO TEXT LINK TO VIDEO
    What was the cost per unit of each model using ABC costing.(Round cost per unit to 2 decimal places, e.g. $12.25.)

    Royale Majestic
    Cost per unit $ $

    LINK TO TEXT LINK TO VIDEO
    What was the gross profit of each model using ABC costing.(Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. $12.25.)

    Royale Majestic
    Gross profit $ $

    Exercise 17-8

    Santana Corporation manufactures snowmobiles in its Blue Mountain, Wisconsin, plant. The following costs are budgeted for the first quarter’s operations.

    Machine setup, indirect materials $4,000
    Inspections 16,000
    Tests 4,000
    Insurance, plant 110,000
    Engineering design 140,000
    Depreciation, machinery 520,000
    Machine setup, indirect labor 20,000
    Property taxes 29,000
    Oil, heating 19,000
    Electricity, plant lighting 21,000
    Engineering prototypes 60,000
    Depreciation, plant 210,000
    Electricity, machinery 36,000
    Machine maintenance wages 19,000
    Classify the above costs of Santana Corporation into activity cost pools using the following: engineering, machinery, machine setup, quality control, factory utilities, maintenance.

    Budgeted Costs Activity Cost Pool
    Machine setup, indirect materials Machine SetupEngineeringMachineryQuality ControlFactory UtilitiesMaintenance
    Inspections Machine SetupQuality ControlFactory UtilitiesEngineeringMachineryMaintenance
    Tests MaintenanceQuality ControlFactory UtilitiesEngineeringMachineryMachine Setup
    Insurance, plant EngineeringMaintenanceMachine SetupFactory UtilitiesMachineryQuality Control
    Engineering design MaintenanceEngineeringQuality ControlFactory UtilitiesMachine SetupMachinery
    Depreciation, machinery MachineryMaintenanceEngineeringFactory UtilitiesMachine SetupQuality Control
    Machine setup, indirect labor Quality ControlMaintenanceFactory UtilitiesEngineeringMachineryMachine Setup
    Property taxes MaintenanceEngineeringMachineryMachine SetupQuality ControlFactory Utilities
    Oil, heating MaintenanceFactory UtilitiesEngineeringMachineryMachine SetupQuality Control
    Electricity, plant lighting Machine SetupFactory UtilitiesMachineryMaintenanceEngineeringQuality Control
    Engineering prototypes Machine SetupQuality ControlEngineeringFactory UtilitiesMaintenanceMachinery
    Depreciation, plant MaintenanceMachineryQuality ControlMachine SetupFactory UtilitiesEngineering
    Electricity, machinery MaintenanceMachine SetupFactory UtilitiesEngineeringQuality ControlMachinery
    Machine maintenance wages Machine SetupQuality ControlEngineeringFactory UtilitiesMaintenanceMachinery

    LINK TO TEXT
    Identify a cost driver that may be used to assign each cost pool to each line of snowmobiles.

    Budgeted Costs Cost Driver
    Machine setup, indirect materials Engineering HoursNumber of Purchase OrdersSquare Feet or Machine HoursNumber of EmployeesDirect Labor HoursNumber of RequisitionsMachine HoursNumber of Machines or Machine HoursNumber of Tests or InspectionsNumber of SetupsNumber of Parts or Assemblies
    Inspections Number of Tests or InspectionsSquare Feet or Machine HoursNumber of Parts or AssembliesNumber of Purchase OrdersNumber of EmployeesNumber of Machines or Machine HoursMachine HoursNumber of RequisitionsEngineering HoursNumber of SetupsDirect Labor Hours
    Tests Machine HoursSquare Feet or Machine HoursNumber of Tests or InspectionsNumber of SetupsNumber of Machines or Machine HoursNumber of Parts or AssembliesNumber of RequisitionsNumber of EmployeesDirect Labor HoursNumber of Purchase OrdersEngineering Hours
    Insurance, plant Square Feet or Machine HoursNumber of Tests or InspectionsEngineering HoursNumber of EmployeesNumber of SetupsNumber of Purchase OrdersMachine HoursNumber of RequisitionsDirect Labor HoursNumber of Machines or Machine HoursNumber of Parts or Assemblies
    Engineering design Number of Tests or InspectionsEngineering HoursDirect Labor HoursSquare Feet or Machine HoursMachine HoursNumber of EmployeesNumber of RequisitionsNumber of SetupsNumber of Machines or Machine HoursNumber of Purchase OrdersNumber of Parts or Assemblies
    Depreciation, machinery Number of Tests or InspectionsEngineering HoursNumber of Purchase OrdersNumber of Machines or Machine HoursSquare Feet or Machine HoursNumber of RequisitionsNumber of Parts or AssembliesNumber of EmployeesDirect Labor HoursMachine HoursNumber of Setups
    Machine setup, indirect labor Number of RequisitionsNumber of Parts or AssembliesSquare Feet or Machine HoursNumber of Purchase OrdersNumber of EmployeesEngineering HoursDirect Labor HoursMachine HoursNumber of Tests or InspectionsNumber of SetupsNumber of Machines or Machine Hours
    Property taxes Machine HoursNumber of Machines or Machine HoursNumber of SetupsNumber of Tests or InspectionsSquare Feet or Machine HoursNumber of Parts or AssembliesNumber of EmployeesNumber of RequisitionsDirect Labor HoursNumber of Purchase OrdersEngineering Hours
    Oil, heating Direct Labor HoursNumber of Tests or InspectionsSquare Feet or Machine HoursNumber of Parts or AssembliesNumber of RequisitionsNumber of EmployeesNumber of Machines or Machine HoursNumber of Purchase OrdersEngineering HoursMachine HoursNumber of Setups
    Electricity, plant lighting Number of Machines or Machine HoursNumber of EmployeesNumber of RequisitionsDirect Labor HoursNumber of Parts or AssembliesEngineering HoursNumber of Purchase OrdersMachine HoursNumber of SetupsNumber of Tests or InspectionsSquare Feet or Machine Hours
    Engineering prototypes Machine HoursNumber of SetupsNumber of Tests or InspectionsNumber of RequisitionsSquare Feet or Machine HoursNumber of Purchase OrdersEngineering HoursNumber of Machines or Machine HoursNumber of Parts or AssembliesNumber of EmployeesDirect Labor Hours
    Depreciation, plant Engineering HoursNumber of Parts or AssembliesNumber of RequisitionsNumber of Purchase OrdersDirect Labor HoursMachine HoursSquare Feet or Machine HoursNumber of SetupsNumber of Tests or InspectionsNumber of EmployeesNumber of Machines or Machine Hours
    Electricity, machinery Engineering HoursDirect Labor HoursNumber of SetupsNumber of Tests or InspectionsMachine HoursNumber of Machines or Machine HoursNumber of Parts or AssembliesNumber of EmployeesNumber of RequisitionsNumber of Purchase OrdersSquare Feet or Machine Hours
    Machine maintenance wages Number of Tests or InspectionsNumber of Parts or AssembliesMachine HoursNumber of SetupsDirect Labor HoursEngineering HoursNumber of Purchase OrdersSquare Feet or Machine HoursNumber of Machines or Machine HoursNumber of EmployeesNumber of Requisitions

    fm midterm january 2014 t account analysis 506788

    FM Midterm January 2014: T-Account Analysis During 2013 the following events took place for a small distribution company. You are required to prepare the accounting entries for each event by: – labelling the T-accounts with the correct account name – labelling debit and credit on the T-account – entering the amounts for the event on the correct side of each T-account. You are only required to enter the events as described in 2013; do not attempt to combine all 12 events into a single financial statement. Note that answers may require more or less than four Taccounts. Explain any assumptions. 1. On December 31st the company sells on credit $5,000 of goods which had been bought a month previously at a cost of $3,500. 2. On January 2nd the company paid $500 by check for a three year buildings insurance policy. 3. On December 31st the company sells an unwanted machine for $1,500. The machine was bought at the beginning of 2012 for $8,200 and was expected to be used for three years after which its value had been forecast to be $1,000. 6. On December 31st the company reads an announcement in the newspaper that one of their customers, who currently owes $2,000 for goods shipped in November, has filed for bankruptcy. 4. Due to a shortage of cash the company was unable to pay December wages of one manager totalling $750, but promises to do so by January 15th 2014. 5. On December 31st the manager reads the electricity meter and realises that they will owe $100 more for electricity used than they had previously estimated. 8. During 2013 the company spent $20,000 on a project with a research company for a new product which they initially expected to introduce in 2015, but which now seems to be much less certain. 9. On December 1st the company placed an order for $12,000 of goods from a Chinese supplier, and paid a deposit of $6,000, with the remaining payment due when the goods have been delivered. The goods will be delivered in January 2014 and advertised for sale at $20,000. 7. In February the company declared that dividends of $7,000 would be paid for 2012 and these were subsequently paid in May. 10. The company’s managing director borrowed $1,000 in cash from the company on December 31st . 12. The company owns a building which is on its Balance Sheet for a value of $250,000. On December 31st the company’s finance manager received a call from a developer who explains that he is prepared to offer $500,000 for the building.

    your company is interested in having a new facility constructed 506811

    HW #3

    Directions: Answer all the questions.
    Please submit your work in Word or PDF formats only.
    You can submit an Excel file to support calculations, but please “cut and paste” your solutions into the Word or PDF file. Be sure to show how you did your calculations. Also, please be sure to include your name at the top of the first page of your file. You can use any sources you wish, except for other people. Please be sure to document any source you use. 17
    th.
    Please run spell check and proofread your answers.

    Question #1

    Consider the following potential investment, which has the same risk as the firm’s other projects:

    Time Cash Flow
    0 -$185,000
    1 $32,000
    2 $38,000
    3 $38,000
    4 $40,000
    5 $40,000
    6 $45,000
    7 $46,000
    1. What are the investment’s payback period, IRR, and NPV, assuming the firm’s WACC is 9%.
    1. If the firm requires a payback period of less than 5 years, should this project be accepted? Be sure to justify your choice.
    1. Based on the IRR and NPV rules, should this project be accepted? Be sure to justify your choice.
    1. Which of the decision rules (payback, NPV, or IRR) do you think is the best rule for a firm to use when evaluating projects? Be sure to justify your choice.

    Question #2

    A firm believes it can generate an additional $260,000 per year in revenues for the next 5 years if it replaces existing equipment that is no longer usable with new equipment that costs $280,000. The firm expects to be able to sell the new equipment when it is finished using it (after 5 years) for $20,000. The existing equipment has a book value of $35,000 and a market value of $25,000. Variable costs are expected to total 70% of revenue. The additional sales will require an initial investment in net working capital of $26,000, which is expected to be recovered at the end of the project (after 5 years). Assume the firm uses straight line depreciation, its marginal tax rate is 35%, and its weighted-average cost of capital is 10%.

    a) How much value will this new equipment create for the firm?

    b) At what discount rate will this project break even?

    c) Should the firm purchase the new equipment?
    Be sure to justify your recommendation.

    Question #3

    Your company is interested in having a new facility constructed. The contractor expects that it will take approximately 3 years to complete the building. The contractor has offered you three payment plans for the building. They are as follows:

    Time Plan 1 Plan 2 Plan 3
    Today $300,000 $1,035,000 $950,000
    1 year from now $1,300,000 $1,035,000 $0
    2 years from now $1,300,000 $1,035,000 $1,600,000
    3 years from now $1,300,000 $1,035,000 $1,600,000

    The CFO of your company has asked you to provide recommendation concerning which payment plan to accept. What is your recommendation? Assume your weighted-average cost of capital is 10%.

    Question #4

    List and describe four “red flags” that may indicate you should consider revising your overhead allocation system.

    Question #5

    a) Describe the differences between unit-related, batch-related, and product-sustaining activities. Give one example of each type of activity.

    b) Describe the difference between transaction drivers and duration drivers. When would one type be preferred over the other?

    Attachments:

    busn 5600 week 5 6 and 7 graded a work 506857

    E7.6 Notes payable discount basis On August 1, 2013, Colombo Co. s treasurer signed a note promising to pay $120,000 on December 31, 2013. The proceeds of the note were $114,000.

    Required:

    a. Calculate the discount rate used by the lender.

    b. Calculate the effective interest rate (APR) on the by Feven 1.8″ id=”_GPLITA_3″ style=”background: none !important; margin: 0px !important; padding: 0px !important; border: currentColor !important; border-image: none !important !important; width: auto !important; height: auto !important; text-decoration: underline !important; vertical-align: baseline !important; float: none !important; display: inline !important; min-height: 0px !important; min-width: 0px !important;” href=”#” in_rurl=”http://i.txtsrving.info/click?v=VVM6MjkyOTU6MTMwNDpsb2FuOjE5ZTY0ODFiMDg2NTRmM2UyNDkyNWRmZmE1MjMyZjBkOnotMTA5NC00ODUxMjg6d3d3LnRyYW5zdHV0b3JzLmNvbToyNDU5OTo5OTViNmM1NWRiNDZjZjAxZWJkOGI0OTZjYWE4OGRlMzoyOWIxNzJjNDRlNjU0M2Q5OWVlZDJlYTJkMTNiN2MzZTow&subid=g-485128-2882b90a67344267997bca3cf481c3c6-“>loan.

    c. Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to show the effects of

    1. Signing the note and the receipt of the cash proceeds on August 1, 2013.

    2. Recording interest expense for the month of September.

    3. Repaying the note on December 31, 2013.

    E7.12 Unearned revenues ticket sales Kirkland Theater sells season tickets for six events at a price of $378. For the 2013 season, 1,200 season tickets were sold.

    Required:

    a. Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to show the effect of the sale of the season tickets.

    b. Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to show the effect of presenting an event.

    c. Where on the balance sheet would the account balance representing funds received for performances not yet presented be classified?

    E7.18 Bonds payable various issues Atom Endeavour Co. issued $500 million face amount of 9% bonds when market interest rates were 9.14% for bonds of similar risk and other characteristics.

    Required:

    a. How much interest will be paid annually on these bonds?

    b. Were the bonds issued at a premium or discount? Explain your answer.

    c. Will the annual interest expense on these bonds be more than, equal to, or less than the amount of interest paid each year? Explain your answer.

    P7.28 Other accrued liabilities payroll and by Feven 1.8″ id=”_GPLITA_1″ style=”background: none !important; margin: 0px !important; padding: 0px !important; border: currentColor !important; border-image: none !important !important; width: auto !important; height: auto !important; text-decoration: underline !important; vertical-align: baseline !important; float: none !important; display: inline !important; min-height: 0px !important; min-width: 0px !important;” href=”#” in_rurl=”http://i.txtsrving.info/click?v=VVM6MzM1ODc6MTUyNTpwYXlyb2xsIHRheGVzOmIwYWYzYjg4YjE3M2Y2ZDA5ZWJjOWMxNGQ4Y2JjMTAyOnotMTA5NC00ODUxMjg6d3d3LnRyYW5zdHV0b3JzLmNvbTozMzQxNzoyZWFiNTYwMTg2MzRhMWI3YjQ1MWY3ZDcyYzE0MjYzNTo2NjRmMTcwYjI3MzA0YjI2YjYzYjY3MDVlNGQ3Yzg1MDow&subid=g-485128-2882b90a67344267997bca3cf481c3c6-“>payroll taxes. The following summary data for the payroll period ended December 27, 2012, are available for Cayman Coating Co.:

    Gross pay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 86,000

    FICA tax withholdings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ?

    Income tax withholdings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10,320

    Group by Feven 1.8″ id=”_GPLITA_0″ style=”background: none !important; margin: 0px !important; padding: 0px !important; border: currentColor !important; border-image: none !important !important; width: auto !important; height: auto !important; text-decoration: underline !important; vertical-align: baseline !important; float: none !important; display: inline !important; min-height: 0px !important; min-width: 0px !important;” href=”#” in_rurl=”http://i.txtsrving.info/click?v=VVM6NDI3MzQ6MTUyNjpob3NwaXRhbGl6YXRpb24gaW5zdXJhbmNlOmZjM2YxNWNlMzc1Y2IxYWU5N2MwYmQ2OTRlYWYxMjFiOnotMTA5NC00ODUxMjg6d3d3LnRyYW5zdHV0b3JzLmNvbTo3NDc5MToyYjYzYmNhODlmYjUxYjY4NWQ3MGYzOTIyZjU0YTZkMTplY2QxNWFiZDkxNjQ0NDc0YTM3YzE4ODE2ZmQ4MDhkOTow&subid=g-485128-2882b90a67344267997bca3cf481c3c6-“>hospitalization insurance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,270

    Employee contributions to pension plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ?

    Total deductions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,825

    Net pay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ?

    Additional information

    For employees, FICA tax rates for 2012 were 5.65% on the first $110,100 of each employee s annual earnings and 1.45% on any earnings in excess of $110,100. However, no employees had accumulated earnings for the year in excess of the $110,100 limit.

    For employers, FICA tax rates for 2012 were 7.65% on the first $110,100 of each employee s annual earnings and 1.45% on any earnings in excess of $110,100.

    The federal and state by Feven 1.8″ id=”_GPLITA_2″ style=”background: none !important; margin: 0px !important; padding: 0px !important; border: currentColor !important; border-image: none !important !important; width: auto !important; height: auto !important; text-decoration: underline !important; vertical-align: baseline !important; float: none !important; display: inline !important; min-height: 0px !important; min-width: 0px !important;” href=”#” in_rurl=”http://i.txtsrving.info/click?v=VVM6MjkyOTU6MTMwNDp1bmVtcGxveW1lbnQ6MzFlZDE2N2I4N2I4MTYyZTk1YmU0NmM0OTdhYzM1N2Q6ei0xMDk0LTQ4NTEyODp3d3cudHJhbnN0dXRvcnMuY29tOjI0NTk4OjNhMmZkNmRhMmI2NWJhNWE0NDA1ZGI0NWQwZDYyM2FmOjc1MWRjM2Q5MTI2MzQ0MDZiZWRhZjFkYjUzMGVmNDZhOjA&subid=g-485128-2882b90a67344267997bca3cf481c3c6-“>unemployment compensation tax rates are 0.6% and 5.4%, respectively. These rates are levied against the employer for the first $7,000 of each employee s annual earnings. Only $9,000 of the gross pay amount for the December 27, 2012, pay period was owed to employees who were still under the annual limit.

    Required:

    Assuming that Cayman Coating Co. s payroll for the last week of the year is to be paid on January 3, 2013, use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to record the effects of the December 27, 2012, entries for

    a. Accrued payroll.

    b. Accrued payroll taxes.

    P7.32 Bonds payable calculate issue price and amortize premium On January 1, 2013, Learned, Inc., issued $90 million face amount of 20-year, 14% stated rate bonds when market interest rates were 16%. The bonds pay interest semiannually each June 30 and December 31 and mature on December 31, 2032.

    Required:

    a. Using the present value tables in Chapter 6, calculate the proceeds (issue price) of Learned, Inc. s, bonds on January 1, 2013, assuming that the bonds were sold to provide a market rate of return to the investor.

    b. Assume instead that the proceeds were $93,000,000. Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to record the payment of semiannual interest and the related premium amortization on June 30, 2013, assuming that the premium of $3,000,000 is amortized on a straight-line basis.

    c. If the premium in part b were amortized using the compound interest method, would interest expense for the year ended December 31, 2013, be more than, less than, or equal to the interest expense reported using the straight-line method of premium amortization? Explain.

    d. In reality, the difference between the stated interest rate and the market rate would be substantially less than 2%. The dramatic difference in this problem was designed so that you could use present value tables to answer part a. What causes the stated rate to be different from the market rate, and why is the difference likely to be much less than depicted in this problem?

    ——————————————————————————————————————————————

    E8.20 Calculate stock dividend shares and cash dividend amounts Assume that you own 4,000 shares of Blueco, Inc. s, common stock and that you currently receive cash dividends of $0.84 per share per year.

    Required:

    a. If Blueco, Inc., declared a 5% stock dividend, how many shares of common stock would you receive as a dividend?

    b. Calculate the cash dividend per share amount to be paid after the stock dividend that would result in the same total cash dividend (as was received before the stock dividend).

    c. If the cash dividend remained at $0.84 per share after the stock dividend, what per share cash dividend amount without a stock dividend would have accomplished the same total cash dividend?

    d. Why would a company have a dividend policy of paying a $0.10 per share cash dividend and issuing a 5% stock dividend every year?

    P8.24 Common and preferred stock issuances and dividends Permabilt Corp. was incorporated on January 1, 2013, and issued the following stock for cash:

    4,000,000 shares of no-par common stock were authorized; 1,250,000 shares were issued on January 1, 2013, at $35 per share.

    1,500,000 shares of $100 par value, 8.5% cumulative, preferred stock were authorized, and 640,000 shares were issued on January 1, 2013, at $105 per share.

    Net income for the years ended December 31, 2013, 2014, and 2015, was $18,400,000, $24,600,000, and $28,750,000, respectively.

    No dividends were declared or paid during 2013 or 2014. However, on December 17, 2015, the board of directors of Permabilt Corp. declared dividends of $42,300,000, payable on February 9, 2016, to holders of record as of January 4, 2016.

    Required:

    a. Use the horizontal model (or write the entry) to show the effects of

    1. The issuance of common stock and preferred stock on January 1, 2013.

    2. The declaration of dividends on December 17, 2015.

    3. The payment of dividends on February 9, 2016.

    b. Of the total amount of dividends declared during 2015, how much will be received by preferred shareholders?

    P8.26 Treasury stock transactions On January 1, 2013, Metco, Inc., reported 622,100 shares of $3 par value common stock as being issued and outstanding. On March 15, 2013, Metco, Inc., purchased for its treasury 5,200 shares of its common stock at a price of $64 per share. On August 10, 2013, 1,900 of these treasury shares were sold for $76 per share. Metco s directors declared cash dividends of $2.10 per share during the second quarter and again during the fourth quarter, payable on June 30, 2013, and December 31, 2013, respectively. A 3% stock dividend was issued at the end of the year. There were no other transactions affecting common stock during the year.

    Required:

    a. Use the horizontal model (or write the entry) to show the effect of the treasury stock purchase on March 15, 2013.

    b. Calculate the total amount of the cash dividends paid in the second quarter.

    c. Use the horizontal model (or write the entry) to show the effect of the sale of the treasury stock on August 10, 2013.

    d. Calculate the total amount of cash dividends paid in the fourth quarter.

    e. Calculate the number of shares of stock issued in the stock dividend.

    P8.28 Transaction analysis various accounts Enter the following column headings across the top of a sheet of paper:

    Transaction

    Cash

    Other Assets

    Liabilities

    Paid-in Capital

    Retained Earnings

    Treasury Stock

    Net Income

    Enter the transaction letter in the first column and show the effect (if any) of each of the following transactions on each financial statement category by entering a plus (+) or minus ( ) sign and the amount in the appropriate column. Do not show items that affect net income in the retained earnings column. You may also write the entries to record these transactions. You should assume that the transactions occurred in the same chronological sequence as listed here:

    a. Sold 1,700 shares of $50 par value preferred stock at $52.50 per share.

    b. Declared the annual cash dividend of $4.10 per share on common stock. There were 9,300 shares of $1 par value common stock issued and outstanding throughout the year.

    c. Issued 2,500 shares of $50 par value preferred stock in exchange for a building when the market price of preferred stock was $54 per share.

    d. Purchased 700 shares of preferred stock for the treasury at a price of $56 per share.

    e. Sold 250 shares of the preferred stock held in treasury (see d ) for $57 per share.

    f. Declared and issued a 15% stock dividend on the $1 par value common stock when the market price per share was $36.

    P8.30 Transaction analysis various accounts Enter the following column headings across the top of a sheet of paper:

    Transaction

    Cash

    Other Assets

    Liabilities

    Paid-in Capital

    Retained Earnings

    Treasury Stock

    Net Income

    Enter the transaction letter in the first column and show the effect (if any) of each of the following transactions on each financial statement category by entering a plus (1) or minus ( ) sign and the amount in the appropriate column. Do not show items that affect net income in the retained earnings column. You may also write the entries to record these transactions. You should assume that the transactions occurred in the listed chronological sequence and that no stock had been previously issued. (Hint: Remember to consider appropriate effects of previous transactions.)

    a. Issued 3,000 shares of $100 par value preferred stock at par.

    b. Issued 4,800 shares of $100 par value preferred stock in exchange for land that had an appraised value of $612,000.

    c. Issued 34,000 shares of $5 par value common stock for $24 per share.

    d. Purchased 14,000 shares of common stock for the treasury at $27 per share.

    e. Sold 9,000 shares of the treasury stock purchased in transaction d for $29 per share.

    f. Declared a cash dividend of $3.50 per share on the preferred stock outstanding, to be paid early next year.

    g. Declared and issued a 12% stock dividend on the common stock when the market price per share of common stock was $30.

    P8.34 Analytical case (part 1) calculate missing stockholders equity amounts for 2013 (Note: The information presented in this case is also used for Case 8.35. For now you can ignore the 2014 column in the balance sheet; all disclosures presented here relate to the June 30, 2013, balance sheet.) DeZurik Corp. had the following stockholders equity section in its June 30, 2013, balance sheet (in thousands, except share and per share amounts):

    June 30 (in thousands)

    2014

    2013

    Paid-in capital:

    $4.50 Preferred stock, $ ____ par value, cumulative,
    200,000 shares authorized, 96,000 shares issued
    and outstanding

    _______________

    $5,760

    Common stock, $5 par value, 4,000,000 shares authorized,
    3,280,000 shares issued, 3,000,000 shares outstanding

    _______________

    _______________

    Additional paid-in capital on common stock

    _______________

    22,960

    Retained earnings

    _______________

    _______________

    Less: Treasury common stock, at cost, __?__ shares

    _______________

    _______________

    Total stockholders equity

    $66,168

    $60,000

    Required:

    a. Calculate the par value per share of preferred stock and determine the preferred stock dividend percentage.

    b. Calculate the amount that should be shown on the balance sheet for common stock at June 30, 2013.

    c. What was the average issue price of common stock shown on the June 30, 2013, balance sheet?

    d. How many shares of treasury stock does DeZurik Corp. own at June 30, 2013?

    e. Assume that the treasury shares were purchased for $18 per share. Calculate the amount that should be shown on the balance sheet for treasury stock at June 30, 2013.

    f. Calculate the retained earnings balance at June 30, 2013, after you have completed parts a e . (Hint: Keep in mind that Treasury Stock is a contra account.)

    g. (Optional) Review the solutions to parts a f of this case on the website for this book at www.mhhe.com/marshall10e. Assume that the Retained Earnings balance on July 1, 2012, was $19,200 (in thousands) and that net income for the year ended June 30, 2013, was $1,152 (in thousands). The 2013 preferred dividends were paid in full, and no other dividend transactions were recorded during the year. Verify that the amount shown in the solution to part f is correct. (Hint: Prepare a statement of retained earnings or do a T-account analysis to determine the June 30, 2013, balance.)

    ——————————————————————————————————————————————

    Berry7.1 Crow, Inc., had net income of $516,050 for its fiscal year ended September 30, 2014. During the year, the company had outstanding 24,000 shares of 8%, $50 par value preferred stock, and 135,500 shares of common stock.

    Required:

    Calculate the basic earnings per share of common stock for the 2014 fiscal year.

    Berry7.2 Wood s Cabinets, Inc., had net income of $424,800 for its fiscal year ended October 31, 2014. During the year, the company had outstanding 53,000 shares of 9%, $60 par value preferred stock, and 36,960 shares of common stock.

    Required:

    Calculate the Basic Earnings per share of common stock for the 2014 fiscal year.

    Berry7.3 Blue Glass, Inc. had cash dividends of $3.96 per share of common stock for calendar 2013. In 2014, the stock was split 3-for-1, and in 2015 a 10% stock dividend was issued.

    Required:

    Calculate the Dividends per share to be reported in the firm’s annual report for 2014, and 2015.

    Berry7.4 Silver Co. had cash dividends reported for 2013 of $3.64 per share of common stock. During 2014, the firm had a 4% common stock dividend.

    Required:

    Calculate the 2013 earnings per share to be reported in the annual report for 2014.

    P9.22 Use gross profit ratio to calculate inventory loss On April 8, 2013, a flood destroyed the warehouse of Stuco Distributing Co. From the waterlogged records of the company, management was able to determine that the firm s gross profit ratio had averaged 40% for the past several years and that the inventory at the beginning of the year was $314,200. It also was determined that during the year until the date of the flood, sales had totaled $638,400 and purchases totaled $355,140.

    Required:

    Calculate the amount of inventory loss from the flood.

    P9.24 Prepare a statement of cash flows indirect method The financial statements of Pouchie Co. included the following information for the year ended December 31, 2013 (amounts in millions):

    Depreciation and amortization expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 260
    Cash dividends declared and paid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
    Purchase of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
    Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
    Beginning cash balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
    Proceeds of common stock issued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
    Proceeds from sale of building (at book value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
    Accounts receivable increase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
    Ending cash balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
    Inventory decrease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
    Accounts payable increase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

    Required:

    Complete the following statement of cash flows, using the indirect method:

    POUCHIE CO.
    Statement of Cash Flows
    For the Year Ended December 31, 2013

    Cash Flows from Operating Activities:

    Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 384

    Add (deduct) items not affecting cash:

    ____________________________________. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

    ____________________________________. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

    ____________________________________. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

    ____________________________________. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __________

    Net cash provided (used) by operating activities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ __________

    Cash Flows from Investing Activities:

    ____________________________________. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

    ____________________________________. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __________

    Net cash provided (used) by investing activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ __________

    Cash Flows from Financing Activities:

    ____________________________________. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

    ____________________________________. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __________

    Net cash provided (used) by financing activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ __________

    Net increase (decrease) in cash for the year. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ __________

    Cash balance, January 1, 2013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

    Cash balance, December 31, 2013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 40

    P9.28 Complete balance sheet and prepare a statement of changes in retained earnings Following is a statement of cash flows (indirect method) for Hartford, Inc., for the year ended December 31, 2014. Also shown is a partially completed comparative balance sheet as of December 31, 2014 and 2013:

    HARTFORD, INC.
    Statement of Cash Flows
    For the Year Ended December 31, 2014

    Cash Flows from Operating Activities:

    Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 27,000

    Add (deduct) items not affecting cash:

    Depreciation expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,000

    Decrease in accounts receivable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,000

    Increase in inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (21,000)

    Increase in notes payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,000

    Decrease in accounts payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (18,000)

    Net cash provided by operating activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 228,000

    Cash Flows from Investing Activities:

    Purchase of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (150,000)

    Purchase of buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (144,000)

    Net cash used by investing activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (294,000)

    Cash Flows from Financing Activities:

    Proceeds from short-term debt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 15,000

    Cash used for retirement of long-term debt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (75,000)

    Proceeds from issuance of common stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,000

    Payment of cash dividends on common stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (9,000)

    Net cash used by financing activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (39,000)

    Net decrease in cash for the year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (105,000 )

    HARTFORD, INC.
    Comparative Balance Sheets
    At December 31, 2014 and 2013

    2014

    2013

    ASSETS

    Current Assets:
    Cash

    Accounts Receivable
    Inventory
    Total Current Assets
    Land

    Buildings and equipment
    Less: Accumulated depreciation

    Total land, buildings, and equipment

    Total Assets


    $

    168,000
    $ ________
    $

    780,000

    ___________
    $ _________
    $ _________


    $264,000
    219,000

    _________
    $ ________

    $ 120,000

    (369,000)

    $ _________
    $ _________

    LIABILIITIES
    Current Liabilities:
    Accounts payable
    Short-term debt
    Notes payable
    Total current liabilities

    Long-term debt


    $
    96,000
    ___________
    $ __________

    $ _255,000

    $ 87,000

    108,000

    $_______

    $ _______

    STOCKHOLDERS EQUITY

    Common stock

    Retained earnings

    Total Stockholders equity

    Total liabilities and stockholders equity


    $ 120,000

    __________

    $ ________
    $ ________

    $
    _________

    $ ________

    $ ________

    Required:

    a. Complete the December 31, 2014 and 2013, balance sheets.

    b. Prepare a statement of changes in retained earnings for the year ended December 31, 2014.

    E10.8 Calculate EPS and effect of stock split on EPS During the year ended December 31, 2014, Gluco, Inc., split its stock on a 3-for-1 basis. In its annual report for 2013, the firm reported net income of $7,407,840 for 2013, with an average 1,073,600 shares of common stock outstanding for that year. There was no preferred stock.

    Required:

    a. What amount of net income for 2013 will be reported in Gluco s 2014 annual report?

    b. Calculate Gluco s earnings per share for 2013 that would have been reported in the 2013 annual report.

    c. Calculate Gluco s earnings per share for 2013 that will be reported in the 2014 annual report for comparative purposes.

    E10.10 Calculate EPS and dividends per share before stock split For several years Orbon, Inc., has followed a policy of paying a cash dividend of $0.75 per share and having a 10% stock dividend. In the 2014 annual report, Orbon reported restated earnings per share for 2012 of $3.60.

    Required:

    a. Calculate the originally reported earnings per share for 2012. Round your answer to two decimal places.

    b. Calculate the restated cash dividend per share for 2012 reported in the 2014 annual report for comparative purposes. Round your answer to two decimal places.

    E10.12 Understanding note disclosures and financial summary data This problem is based on the 2011 annual report of Campbell Soup Company in the appendix. Find in the Selected Financial Data (also known as the Five-Year Review), or calculate, the following data:

    a. Dividends per share declared in 2011.
    b. Capital expenditures in 2010.
    c. Year in which total equity grew by the greatest amount over the previous year.
    d. Change in total debt from 2007 to 2011.

    Find the following data for 2011 in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements:

    e. Amount of finished products inventory.
    f. The company s effective income tax rate.
    g. Total assets of the Global Baking and Snacking segment.
    h. Market price range of common stock for the fourth quarter of 2011.

    chapter 10 c 4 please only place data in the yellow cells 506862

    Chapter 10, C 4. Please ONLY place data in the yellow cells.
    1. Managerial Analysis
    San Angelo Federal Bank
    Capital Investment Analysis
    Net Present Value Method
    Net Present
    Cash 12% Value
    Year Inflows Factor* (Rounded)
    1 $ — $ —
    2
    3
    4
    5
    5 (residual value)
    Total present value of cash inflows $ —
    Total present value of cash inflows $ —
    Net capital investment
    Initial investment $ —
    Less proceeds from sale of existing teller
    machines
    Net capital investment
    Net present value $ —
    * Table 1 in Appendix B on present value tables.
    2. Mangerial Analysis
    P 10-04 Name:
    Section:
    Enter the appropriate amount or item in the shaded cells. Use the drop-down lists when available.
    An asterisk (*) will appear next to an incorrect entry in the outlined cells.
    Leave no cell blank. Ensure to enter “0” wherever applicable. Round PV factors to three decimal places.
    1.
    a. Net present value method
    Year Net Cash Inflows 12% Factor = Present Value
    =
    =
    =
    =
    =
    Total present value
    Less purchase price of machine
    Net present value
    b.
    Accounting Rate of Return =
    =
    =
    c.
    Payback period method
    Total cash investment
    Less cash flow recovery:
    Year
    Unrecovered investment
    Payback period is years
    2.
    Net present value
    Accounting rate of return
    Payback period years

    how much of the 90 000 partnership profit for 2013 should be assigned to each partne 506882

    The partnership agreement of Jones, King, and Lane provides for the annual allocation of the business’s profit or loss in the following sequence:

    • Jones, the managing partner, receives a bonus equal to 20 percent of the business’s profit.

    • Each partner receives 15 percent interest on average capital investment.

    • Any residual profit or loss is divided equally.

    The average capital investments for 2013 were as follows:

    Jones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $100,000

    King . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200,000

    Lane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300,000

    How much of the $90,000 partnership profit for 2013 should be assigned to each partner?

    (2)

    Gray, Stone, and Lawson open an accounting practice on January 1, 2011, in San Diego, California, to be operated as a partnership. Gray and Stone will serve as the senior partners because of their years of experience. To establish the business, Gray, Stone, and Lawson contribute cash and other properties valued at $210,000, $180,000, and $90,000, respectively. Articles of partnership agreement are drawn up. It has the following stipulations:

    • Personal drawings are allowed annually up to an amount equal to 10 percent of the beginning capital balance for the year.

    • Profits and losses are allocated according to the following plan:

    (1) A salary allowance is credited to each partner in an amount equal to $8 per billable hour worked by that individual during the year.

    (2) Interest is credited to the partners’ capital accounts at the rate of 12 percent of the average monthly balance for the year (computed without regard for current income or drawings).

    (3) An annual bonus is to be credited to Gray and Stone. Each bonus is to be 10 percent of net income after subtracting the bonus, the salary allowance, and the interest. Also included in the agreement is the provision that the bonus cannot be a negative amount.

    (4) Any remaining partnership profit or loss is to be divided evenly among all partners. Because of monetary problems encountered in getting the business started, Gray invests an additional $9,100 on May 1, 2011. On January 1, 2012, the partners allow Monet to buy into the partnership. Monet contributes cash directly to the business in an amount equal to a 25 percent interest in the book value of the partnership property subsequent to this contribution. The partnership agreement as to splitting profits and losses is not altered upon Monet’s entrance into the firm; the general provisions continue to be applicable.

    The billable hours for the partners during the first three years of operation follow:

    2011 2012 2013

    Gray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,710 1,800 1,880

    Stone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,440 1,500 1,620

    Lawson . . . . . . . . . . . 1,300 1,380 1,310

    Monet . . . . . . . . . . . . –0– 1,190 1,580

    The partnership reports net income for 2011 through 2013 as follows:

    2011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 65,000

    2012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (20,400)

    2013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152,800

    Each partner withdraws the maximum allowable amount each year.

    a. Determine the allocation of income for each of these three years (to the nearest dollar).

    b. Prepare in appropriate form a statement of partners’ capital for the year ending December 31,

    2013.

    (3)

    A partnership of attorneys in the St. Louis, Missouri, area has the following balance sheet accounts as of January 1, 2013:

    Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $320,000 Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $120,000

    Athos, capital . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,000

    Porthos, capital . . . . . . . . .. . . 70,000

    Aramis, capital . . . . . . . . . . .. . 50,000

    According to the articles of partnership, Athos is to receive an allocation of 50 percent of all partnership profits and losses while Porthos receives 30 percent and Aramis, 20 percent. The book value of each asset and liability should be considered an accurate representation of fair value.

    For each of the following
    independent situations, prepare the journal entry or entries to be recorded by the partnership. (Round to nearest dollar.)

    a. Porthos, with permission of the other partners, decides to sell half of his partnership interest to D’Artagnan for $50,000 in cash. No asset revaluation or goodwill is to be recorded by the partnership.

    b. All three of the present partners agree to sell 10 percent of each partnership interest to D’Artagnan for a total cash payment of $25,000. Each partner receives a negotiated portion of this amount. Goodwill is recorded as a result of the transaction.

    c. D’Artagnan is allowed to become a partner with a 10 percent ownership interest by contributing $30,000 in cash directly into the business. The bonus method is used to record this admission.

    d. Use the same facts as in requirement (
    c) except that the entrance into the partnership is recorded by the goodwill method.

    e. D’Artagnan is allowed to become a partner with a 10 percent ownership interest by contributing $12,222 in cash directly to the business. The goodwill method is used to record this transaction.

    f. Aramis decides to retire and leave the partnership. An independent appraisal of the business and its assets indicates a current fair value of $280,000. Goodwill is to be recorded.

    Aramis will then be given the exact amount of cash that will close out his capital account.

    (4)

    The following balance sheet is for a local partnership in which the partners have become very unhappy with each other.

    Cash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 40,000 Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 30,000

    Land. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,000 Adams, capital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,000

    Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,000 Baker, capital. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,000

    Carvil, capital . . . . . . . . . . 60,000

    Dobbs, capital . . . . . . . . . 90,000

    Total assets . . . . . . . . . . . $290,000 Total liabilities and capital . . . . $290,000

    To avoid more conflict, the partners have decided to cease operations and sell all assets. Using this information, answer the following questions. Each question should be viewed as an
    independent situation related to the partnership’s liquidation.

    a. The $10,000 cash that exceeds the partnership liabilities is to be disbursed immediately. If profits and losses are allocated to Adams, Baker, Carvil, and Dobbs on a 2:3:3:2 basis, respectively, how will the $10,000 be divided?

    b. The $10,000 cash that exceeds the partnership liabilities is to be disbursed immediately. If profits and losses are allocated on a 2:2:3:3 basis, respectively, how will the $10,000 be divided?

    c. The building is immediately sold for $70,000 to give total cash of $110,000. The liabilities are then paid, leaving cash balance of $80,000. This cash is to be distributed to the partners. How much of this money will each partner receive if profits and losses are allocated to Adams, Baker, Carvil, and Dobbs on a 1:3:3:3 basis, respectively?

    d. Assume that profits and losses are allocated to Adams, Baker, Carvil, and Dobbs on a 1:3:4:2 basis, respectively. How much money must the firm receive from selling the land and building to ensure that Carvil receives a portion?

    (5)

    March, April, and May have been in partnership for a number of years. The partners allocate all profits and losses on a 2:3:1 basis, respectively. Recently, each partner has become personally insolvent and, thus, the partners have decided to liquidate the business in hopes of remedying their personal financial problems. As of September 1, the partnership’s balance sheet is as follows:

    Cash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 11,000 Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 61,000

    Accounts receivable . . . . . . 84,000 March, capital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25,000

    Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,000 April, capital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,000

    Land, building, and May, capital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,000

    Equipment (net) . . . . . . . . 38,000 Total liabilities and capital . . . . . $207,000

    Total assets . . . . . . . . . . . $207,000

    Prepare journal entries for the following transactions:

    a. Sold all inventory for $56,000 cash.

    b. Paid $7,500 in liquidation expenses.

    c. Paid $40,000 of the partnership’s liabilities.

    d. Collected $45,000 of the accounts receivable.

    e. Distributed safe cash balances; the partners anticipate no further liquidation expenses.

    f. Sold remaining accounts receivable for 30 percent of face value.

    g. Sold land, building, and equipment for $17,000.

    h. Paid all remaining liabilities of the partnership.

    i. Distributed cash held by the business to the partners.

    (6)

    The partnership of Frick, Wilson, and Clarke has elected to cease all operations and liquidate its business property. A balance sheet drawn up at this time shows the following account balances:

    Cash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 48,000 Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 35,000

    Noncash assets . . . . . . . . . . 177,000 Frick, capital (60%) . . . . . . . . . . . 101,000

    Wilson, capital (20%) . . . . . 28,000

    Clarke, capital (20%). . . . . . 61,000

    Total assets . . . . . . . . . . . $225,000 Total liabilities and capital . . . . $225,000

    The following transactions occur in liquidating this business:

    • Distributed safe capital balances immediately to the partners. Liquidation expenses of $9,000 are estimated as a basis for this computation.

    • Sold noncash assets with a book value of $80,000 for $48,000.

    • Paid all liabilities.

    • Distributed safe capital balances again.

    • Sold remaining noncash assets for $44,000.

    • Paid liquidation expenses of $7,000.

    • Distributed remaining cash to the partners and closed the financial records of the business permanently.

    Produce a final schedule of liquidation for this partnership.

    Attachments:

    budgeting 506937

    QuestionLance Limited manufactures a special component (WKQ 14) that is used in the making of calculators. As a step towards reducing uncertainty over the finance needs of the new business, the finance manager has asked you to prepare a cash budget for Lance Ltd for the eight (8) months period from 1 March 2014 till 31 October 2014.You have collected some raw data from the concerned department heads and tabulated them as follows:a) The following projected sales figures are given:Sales ForecastMonthEstimated Sales UnitsMarch260,000April250,000May270,000June280,000July300,000August290,000September310,000October270,000November280,000The estimated selling price per special component is $5.00.The collections for the above sales forecast are as follows:i. Collection from customers within the month of sale = 10% ( deemed to be cash sales)ii. Collection from customers following the month of sale = 50%iii. Collection from customers following the second month of sales = 30%iv. 10% of the sales are estimated to become irrecoverable.b) Direct materials are acquired one month prior to production and are paid the following month of purchase. One special component (WKQ 14) uses 2 units of direct materials. The company keeps stock of the direct materials, equal to 25% of the next month’s requirements.Balance of direct materials as at end of February 2014 amounts to 130,000 units of direct material at $0.30 per unit. There is no expected change in the direct material costs.c) The Direct Labour cost is paid in the month when such costs are incurred.The number of hours estimated are as follows:MarchAprilMayJuneJulyAugustSeptemberOctober130,000135,000140,000148,000152,000154,000150,000148,000The company pays $2.50 per direct labour hour.d) Operating Expenses are estimated to be $332,000 per month and this is paid at the end of the month in which it is incurred. Included in the operating expenses are depreciation charges worth $16,000 per month.e) Income tax payments of $60,000 are due both in June and September 2014.f) Lance Ltd’s Cash on Hand at the end of February 2014 was $350,000Credit for this assignment will be given on the workings, formulas and calculations used to arrive at the financial values.Required:Prepare the following budgets:1) Sales [4 marks]2) Direct Materials Purchase Budget [8 marks]3) Direct Labour Budget [4 marks]4) A monthly cash budget for the 8-month period of March to 31 October 2014. [22 marks]Format and presentation [2 marks]Total 40 Marks

    acct640 case 2 performance drinks questions 506981

    ‘ACCT640 Case 2 Performance Drinks Questions Part 1’ file is the original case. The ‘Solutions Part 1’ file is the solutions to the original 6 questions. Now I need solutions for the new questions in ‘Questions Part2’ file. Thank you so much for your help!!!!

    Document Preview:

    ACCT640 – Managerial Accounting Fall 2013 Case #2 – Performance Drinks: Applying Activity Based Costing Written by: Tim Bergsma, CMA, CFE Assistant Professor – Accounting Davenport University Donald W. Maine – College of Business Email: ? HYPERLINK “mailto:tbergsma@davenport.edu” ?tbergsma@davenport.edu? Background: Performance Drinks, LLC is owned by Dave N. Port. Performance Drinks produces a variety of sports centered drinks. They began operations in 1993 shortly after Mr. Port graduated with his M.B.A. from Davenport University. The company saw early success as sports and fitness nutritional products gained new popularity in the 1990’s. Financially the company is sound and has been wise in controlling their growth over the years. However, within the last 18 months Mr. Port has noticed a drop in overall company profitability. This is especially troubling considering that the company has continued to experience top-line growth. Mr. Port and his management team have been considering developing a new product line. However, those plans have been put on hold until they can figure out why their profits are shrinking. Performance Drinks makes four different kinds of sports drinks. Those drinks are as follows: Basic Hydration Intensity Post-Workout Each of these drinks contains a slightly different nutritional profile and is targeted for different users and uses. The Basic drink has the least nutritional benefit and is targeted for general consumption. The Hydration product targets endurance athletes and specializes in hydration replacement. The Intensity product was designed with energy enhancement in mind. It serves the needs of extreme athletes who need long durations of sustained energy. Lastly, the Post-Workout product is a nutritional replacement product that is generally used following exertion. You are the Controller for Performance Drinks. You feel as though you have a good handle on the financial reporting and the overall company…

    cost of goods manufactured and cost of goods sold 507035

    Lang products had the following beginning and ending inventory balances for April 2009.

    4/1/09 4/30/09

    Raw Material Inventory $18,000 $20,800

    Work in Process Inventory 85,200 50,800

    Finished Goods Inventory 43,200 14,700

    All raw materials are considered direct to the manufacturing process. During April, the company purchased $260,000 of raw materials. Direct labor cost for the month was $342,000; workers are paid $9.50 per hour. Overhead is applied at the rate of $12.50 for each direct labor hour.

    a. Prepare the Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured.

    b. Calculate Cost of Goods Sold for April 2009.

    CVP Analysis

    S’No’Kones has the following cost structure.

    Selling price per unit $1.50

    Variable cost per unit $0.45

    Fixed costs per month $1,260

    a. What is the break-even point for S’No’Kones?

    b. If the owner wamts to earn a monthly pretax profit of $1,200, how many units would neeed to be sold each month?

    c. The owner wants to earn a pretax profit of $24,360 annually. the snow cone stand is only open five months of the year (May through September) and no fixed costs are incurred when the stand is not open. How many snow cones would need to be sold in total during those five months? If three months of the five generate 75 percent of the company sales, how many snow cones would need to be sold during those three months?

    d. Recalculate your answer to part (c) assuming a tax rate of 20 percent and a desired after-tax profit of $24,360.

    e. S’No’Kones is located in the panhandle of Florida. Discuss circumstances that might cause the BEP and CVP assumptions to be inaccurate.

    Direct Material and Direct Labor Variances

    Dauterive Co. manufacturers wooden pen and pencil holders. The following material and labor standards have been set for one holder.

    5 ounces of wood at $0.50 per ounce $2.50

    4 minutes of labor time at $9.00 per hour 0.60

    During July, the company incurred the following costs to manufacture 46,800 holders.

    14,250 pounds of wood at $8.30 per pound $118,275

    3,840 hours of labor time at $9.25 per hour 35,520

    a. What is the standard quantity of material allowed for the actual production?

    b. Compute the material price and quantity variances.

    c. What are the standard hours of labor time allowed for the actual production?

    d. Compute the labor rate and efficiency variances.

    e. What relationship might exist between the material price variance and the material usage and labor efficiency variances?

    f. What relationship might exist between the labor rate variance and the labor efficiency variance?

    portfolio project intel inc refer to the intel inc 2012 financial statements and the 507102

    Portfolio Project

    Intel Inc.

    Refer to the Intel Inc. 2012 financial statements and the accompanying notes to answer the

    following questions. The 2012 financial statements of Intel can be accessed at:

    http://www.sec.gov/Archives/edgar/data/50863/000119312513065416/d424446d10k.htm

    Module 1
    1) What are the maturities on Intel’s Long-term debt?
    2) What are Intel’s projected obligations on Long-Term Debt and Payments due by period?
    3) What is the par or stated value of Intel’s preference shares?
    4) What is the par or stated value of Intel’s ordinary shares?
    5) What percentage of Intel’s authorized ordinary shares was issued at Dec 29, 2012?
    6) How many ordinary shares were outstanding at Dec 29, 2012, and Dec 31, 2011?
    Module 2
    Under Intel’s equity-based compensation plan, share options are granted annually to key managers and directors.
    1) How many options were granted and exercisable in 2011 and 2012 under the plan?
    2) What number of diluted weighted-average shares outstanding was used by Intel in computing
    earnings per share for 2011 and 2012? What were Intel’s diluted earnings per share in 2011 and
    2012?
    3) What other equity-based compensation plans does Intel have?
    4) What investments does Intel report in 2012?
    6) How does Intel determine fair value?
    7) How does Intel use derivative financial instruments?
    Module 3
    1) What amounts relative to income taxes does Intel report in its:
    a. 2012 income statement?
    b. 29 Dec 2012 balance sheet?
    c. 2012 statement of cash flows?
    2) Intel’s provision for income taxes in 2011 and 2012 was computed at what effective tax rates?
    3) How much of Intel’s 2012 total provision for income taxes was current tax expense, and how much was deferred tax expense?
    4) What did Intel report as the significant components (the details) of its 29 December, 2012 deferred tax assets and liabilities?
    Module 4
    1) What kind of pension plan does Intel provide its employees?
    2) What was Intel’s pension expense for 2011 and 2012?
    3) What is the impact of Intel’s pension plans on its 2011 and 2012 consolidated balance sheets?
    4) What information does Intel provide on the target allocation of its pension assets? How do the
    allocations relate to the expected returns on these assets?
    Module 5
    1) What types of leases are used by Intel?
    2) What amount of operating leases was reported by Intel for various years?
    Module 6
    1) Were there changes in accounting policies reported by Intel during the two years covered by its income statements (2011–2012)? If so, describe the nature of the change and the year of change.
    2) What types of estimates did Intel discuss in 2012?
    Module 7
    1) Which method of computing net cash provided by operating activities does Intel use? What were the amounts of net cash provided by operating activities for the years 2011 and 2012?
    2) What was the most significant item in the cash flows used for investing activities section in 2012?
    3) What was the most significant item in the cash flows used for financing activities section in 2012?
    4) Where is “deferred income taxes” reported in Intel’s statement of cash flows? Why does it appear in that section of the statement of cash flows?
    5) Where is depreciation reported in Intel’s statement of cash flows? Why is depreciation added to net income in the statement of cash flows?
    Module 8
    1) What specific items does Intel discuss in its Note 1—Summary of Significant Accounting Policies?
    (List the headings only.)
    2) For what segments did Intel report segmented information? Which segment is the largest? Who is Intel’s largest customer?

    Attachments:

    permtemp corporation 507162

    Permtemp Corporation formed in 2011 and, for that year, reported the following book

    income statement and balance sheet, excluding the federal income tax expense, deferred

    tax assets, and deferred tax liabilities:

    Sales $20,000,000

    Cost of goods sold )

    Gross profit $ 5,000,000

    Dividend income 50,000

    Tax-exempt interest income

    Total income $ 5,065,000

    Expenses:

    Depreciation $ 800,000

    Bad debts 400,000

    Charitable contributions 100,000

    Interest 475,000

    Meals and entertainment 45,000

    Other

    Total expenses )

    Net loss before federal income taxes )

    Cash $ 500,000

    Accounts receivable $ 2,000,000

    Allowance for doubtful accounts ) 1,750,000

    Inventory 4,000,000

    Fixed assets $10,000,000

    Accumulated depreciation ) 9,200,000

    Investment in corporate stock 1,000,000

    Investment in tax-exempt bonds

    Total assets

    Accounts payable $2,610,000

    Long-term debt 8,500,000

    Common stock 6,000,000

    Retained earnings )

    Total liabilities and equity

    Additional information for 2011:

    The investment in corporate stock is comprised of less-than-20%-owned corporations.

    Depreciation for tax purposes is $1.4 million under MACRS.

    Bad debt expense for tax purposes is $150,000 under the direct writeoff method.

    Limitations to charitable contribution deductions and meals and entertainment

    expenses must be tested and applied if necessary.

    Qualified production activities income is zero.

    Required for 2011:

    a. Prepare page 1 of the 2011 Form 1120, computing the corporation s NOL.

    b. Determine the corporation s deferred tax asset and deferred tax liability situation, and

    then complete the income statement and balance sheet to reflect proper GAAP

    accounting under ASC 740. Use the balance sheet information to prepare Schedule L of

    the 2011 Form 1120.

    c. Prepare the 2011 Schedule M-3 for Form 1120.

    d. Prepare a schedule that reconciles the corporation s effective tax rate to the statutory

    34% tax rate.

    Note: For 2011 forms, go to forms and publications, previous years, at the IRS website,

    www.irs.gov.

    For 2012, Permtemp reported the following book income statement and balance sheet,

    excluding the federal income tax expense, deferred tax assets, and deferred tax liabilities:

    Sales $33,000,000

    Cost of goods sold )

    Gross profit $11,000,000

    Dividend income 55,000

    Tax-exempt interest income

    Total income $11,070,000

    Expenses:

    Depreciation $ 800,000

    Bad debts 625,000

    Charitable contributions 40,000

    Interest 455,000

    Meals and entertainment 60,000

    Other

    Total expenses )

    Net income before federal income taxes

    Cash $ 2,125,000

    Accounts receivable $ 3,300,000

    Allowance for doubtful accounts ) 2,850,000

    Inventory 6,000,000

    Fixed assets $10,000,000

    Accumulated depreciation ) 8,400,000

    Investment in corporate stock 1,000,000

    Investment in tax-exempt bonds

    Total assets

    Accounts payable $ 2,120,000

    Long-term debt 8,500,000

    Common stock 6,000,000

    Retained earnings

    Additional information for 2012:

    Depreciation for tax purposes is $2.45 million under MACRS.

    Bad debt expense for tax purposes is $425,000 under the direct writeoff method.

    Qualified production activities income is $3 million.

    Required for 2012:

    a.Prepare page 1 of the 2012 Form 1120, computing the corporation s taxable income

    and tax liability.

    b.Determine the corporation s deferred tax asset and deferred tax liability situation, and

    then complete the income statement and balance sheet to reflect proper GAAP

    accounting ASC 740. Use the balance sheet information to prepare Schedule L of the

    2012 Form 1120.

    c.Prepare the 2012 Schedule M-3 for Form 1120.

    d.Prepare a schedule that reconciles the corporation s effective tax rate to the statutory

    34% tax rate.

    audit report just student guidance for the completion of this assignment 507177

    Whittington, Sparrow & Co.

    Student guidance for the completion of this assignment:

    • You are required to act, for the purposes of the case study, as a professional external auditor. This means responding in a professional and business like way to all tasks set
    • All means of communication used will be assessed as if produced in a real life situation and they must be prepared by you as if being communicated an actual business client
    • Where evaluation or judgements are required always use acceptable yardsticks (legal rules and / or audit standards) to measure against. Further, when critical appraisal is required and subjective judgement necessary always try to explain your point by using realistic examples

    Part 1:

    Whittington, Sparrow & Co. is a firm of chartered accountants and registered auditors operating from offices in central Manchester. You are employed as an audit manager for the firm.

    Simon Blake Ltd (
    Blake’s) is a company specialising in the manufacture and installation of reception masts and electronic components used in the industrial and domestic power generation and wind farms industry.

    Whittington, Sparrow & Co. has been invited to tender for the external audit of Blake’s.

    Justin Whittington (
    your firm’s senior audit partner) has expressed his keenness in the success of the tender. This would serve to expand the firm’s business in this high growth area and dilute the total of audit fees. The firm has a single client, the recurring audit fees from which; last year, accounted for 12.5% of total audit fees and, for this reason, Justin has recommended that a very competitive price be offered.

    The original invitation to tender came after a discussion between Justin Whittington and Carol Bond (
    the chief accountant for Blake’s).

    Carol Bond trained at your firm and was a senior member of the audit staff before leaving to set up in business on her own 4 years ago.

    The original discussion disclosed the following information:

    • Blake’s has, until this year, been exempted from the requirement for statutory because annual turnover had peaked at around £6.0m. Carol, acting as external accountant to Blake’s, had been engaged to prepare an annual independent financial statement review and statutory returns for Companies House and the Inland Revenue
    • Due to a significant increase in demand for Blake’s products and services over the last two financial years, it is expected that, for the current year, the statutory exemption will be removed. As a result of the growth, Carol became chief accountant for Blake’s 2 years ago and, with the support of two junior staff, has commenced the development of a number of internal audit initiatives
    • There are 10 shareholders in the company, all drawn from the Blake and the Glossop families. Chris Blake and Denise Glossop work full – time for the company; involved in day – to – day management operations. The rest of the shareholding is on an investment finance basis only
    • Today’s date is 1st August 2013 and the company’s accounting year – end date is 30th September 2013.
    • A meeting has been arranged between your firm and Blake’s (in one week’s time) the objective being to present and clarify the legal and practical requirements of the statutory audit to management and to outline the basis of audit fees (with a view to helping secure the engagement)

    Required for part 1:

    1. Prepare explanatory notes to support your forthcoming presentation to the management of Blake’s. Your notes should include explanation of:
    1. The legal rules relating to the statutory audit – including the small companies exemption and corporate governance requirements

    200 – 10%

    1. The nature, purpose and scope of the external audit and the difference between the statutory audit and the independent financial review

    300 – 10%

    1. Explain:
    1. The purpose of the threshold placed on a single audit fee as a proportion of total recurring audit fee income

    200 – 5%

    1. An appropriate basis for audit fee setting and any issues you feel may arise through competitive tendering

    200 – 5%

    Total for part 1 – 30%

    Part 2:

    Thanks, in part, to your clear and informative presentation and competitive fee structure, Blake’s has engaged Whittington, Sparrow & Co. as external auditors for the current year.

    Through subsequent meetings, communications and investigations, the following information has emerged:

    Chris Blake:

    Chris is the sales director and, with an office of eight staff, controls all dealings with the company’s customers. This includes:

    • Sales contract negotiations
    • Product distribution and installation (including the sub – contracting of specialist labour)
    • Sales invoicing and chasing outstanding payments
    • Banking customer receipts
    • Maintenance of the sales ledger (using spreadsheets)

    Chris spends most of his time on the road and delegates much responsibility to Barbara Chipley, the senior sales manager. David is actually brother to a colleague auditor at your firm.

    Denise Glossop:

    Denise is the production (
    works) manager. The production office employs 5 staff and is responsible for all supplier relations including:

    • Raw materials ordering, delivery and stock control
    • Production scheduling and machinery maintenance
    • Factory workers (60 direct labour employees)
    • Dealing with purchase invoice receipts and supplier payments
    • Maintenance of the purchase ledger (using spreadsheets)

    Denise spends all of her time at the factory / office site. Purchasing requirements and production scheduling is based on future sales order requirements discussed with Barbara Chipley at weekly planning meetings. Denise is the only authorised signatory of company cheques.

    Carol Bond:

    Carol Bond is the company accountant and will ultimately be responsible for the preparation of the year – end financial statements. The accounting function is a sub – section of the business administration office (
    manager Tom Plant). Carol’s main responsibilities are:

    • The co ordination of the financial activities of Chris Blake and Denise Glossop to produce monthly management reports (from spreadsheet print – outs)
    • Control of the payroll function and paying wages
    • All dealings with the business bankers

    Blake’s employed Carol as a result of the growth in activity and a requirement for more specific control of the financial function. Her first task was the preparation of a forecast income statement and statement of financial position. This allowed her to become familiar with all of the business operations.

    Internal audit work currently consists of testing sales and purchasing operations, through documentation, to the accounts, and reconciliation’s for receivables, payables and bank accounts.

    She admits that the on – site directors largely control operations (
    as they always have) and do not fully understand audit and the internal audit function although she does not doubt their integrity in business matters.

    The accounting system is not really appropriate for the size of the business. It is hoped that a new (
    bespoke) system will be developed and installed early next year.

    Required for part 2:

    1. Discuss any matters you may feel arise from the information provided above. Your discussion should include consideration of:
    1. Family links between auditor and client

    200 – 4%

    1. Internal control systems, their effectiveness and internal control risks

    300 – 8%

    1. The audit expectation gap and the purpose of the letter of engagement

    200 – 4%

    1. Prepare the letter of engagement for the approval of the Board of Blake’s (dated 25th August 2013)

    N/A – 4%

    Total for part 2 – 20%

    Part 3:

    Assume that today’s date is 15
    th October 2013.

    The draft financial statements for the year ended 30
    th September 2013 have been prepared and you have obtained additional relevant information (
    see appendices A and B).

    Required for part 3:

    1. Examine the financial data provided at appendices A, B and C and:
    1. Extract and analyse any (auditor generated) information that you may feel relevant for the purposes of analytical review and audit risk (all workings must be shown)

    N/A – 20%

    1. Explain the term ‘materiality’ and the importance of dis – aggregation as part of analytical review

    200 – 5%

    1. Audit planning for the audit will take a risk – based approach involving a detailed analysis of Blake’s internal control systems
    1. List and explain the four risk elements of audit (including possible sources of evidence for each element)

    300 – 5%

    1. List and describe 5 methods that the auditor may use to generate internal control systems audit evidence and how you would apply the methods described in your work for Blake’s

    300 – 10%

    1. You have been made aware of Carol Bond’s internal audit aims for the organisation
    1. Describe the circumstances where the external auditor might use the work of others as a means to obtaining audit evidence and the extent to which the work of others can be relied upon

    300 – 5%

    1. Discuss the extent to which you might use the Carol’s work

    200 – 5%

    Total for part 3 – 50%

    Assignment total – 100%

    Appendix A:

    Edward Blake Ltd
    Income statements
    for the years ended 30th September: 2012 2013 2013
    Actual Budget Draft
    £000 £000 £000
    Turnover 6,850 7,200 7,000
    Manufacturing costs (4,380) (4,320) (4,200)
    GROSS PROFIT: 2,470 2,880 2,800
    Distribution costs (500) (436) (390)
    Administrative expenses (740) (644) (1,165)
    OPERATING PROFIT: 1,230 1,800 1,245
    Interest and similar charges (100) (220) (180)
    PROFIT BEFORE TAX: 1,130 1,580 1,065
    Taxation (300) (470) (235)
    PROFIT AFTER TAX: 830 1,110 830
    Edward Blake Ltd
    Statement of financial position
    as at 30th September: 2012 2013 2013
    Actual Budget Draft
    £000 £000 £000
    Fixed assets 3,420 4,800 4,600
    Inventory 420 470 725
    Accounts receivable 600 690 780
    Bank and cash 100 200
    Total current assets: 1,120 1,360 1,505
    Accounts payable 460 530 660
    Interest 25 40 45
    Taxation 75 100 70
    Bank overdrafts 120
    Total current liabilities: (560) (670) (895)
    Net current assets: 560 690 610
    Total assets less current liabilities: 3,980 5,490 5,210
    Long -term debt (1,200) (2,200) (1,500)
    Net assets: 2,780 3,290 3,710
    Shareholders’ funds (Appendix B) 2,780 3,290 3,710

    Appendix B:

    Reconciliation of Shareholders’ Funds

    2012 2013 2013
    Actual Budget Draft
    Reconciliation of shareholders funds: £000 £000 £000
    Ordinary share capital (£1 ordinary shares) 2,000 2,500 3,500
    Revaluation reserve (land) 100 100
    Retained profits B/fwd: 700 780 780
    Add profit after tax 830 1,110 830
    Dividends (paid and proposed) (750) (1,200) (1,500)
    Retained profits c/fwd: 780 690 110
    Shareholders’ funds c/fwd: 2,780 3,290 3,710

    Appendix C:

    Condor & Viper (Financial analysis)
    Industry average
    Power generation – manufacturing
    as at 31st December 2011
    Gross profit margin 37.50%
    Net profit margin (operating profit) 20.00%
    ROCE (total capital employed) 25.00%
    Interest cover 9 times
    EPS 35p
    Dividend per share 40p
    Average receivable (days) 35 days
    Average payable (days) 40 days
    Average inventory turnover (days in stock) 40 days

    END of ASSIGNMENT

    Attachments:

    zurich company 507179

    On December 21, 2012, Zurich Company provided you with the following information regarding its trading securities.

    December 31, 2012
    Investments (Trading) Cost Fair Value Unrealized Gain (Loss)
    Stargate Corp. stock $20,320 $19,320 $(1,000 )
    Carolina Co. stock 10,940 9,940 (1,000 )
    Vectorman Co. stock 20,320 21,010 690
    Total of portfolio $51,580 $50,270 (1,310 )
    Previous fair value adjustment balance 0
    Fair value adjustment—Cr. $(1,310 )

    During 2013, Carolina Company stock was sold for $10,490. The fair value of the stock on December 31, 2013, was: Stargate Corp. stock—$19,600; Vectorman Co. stock—$20,830.

    (a) Prepare the adjusting journal entry needed on December 31, 2012.
    (b) Prepare the journal entry to record the sale of the Carolina Company stock during 2013.
    (c) Prepare the adjusting journal entry needed on December 31, 2013.

    acc 504843

    Canned fruits and vegetables are the main products made by Yummy Food, Inc. All direct materials are added at the beginning of the Mixing Department’s process. When the ingredients have been mixed, they go to the Cooking Department. There the mixture is heated to 100° Celsius and simmered for 20 minutes. When cooled, the mixture goes to the Canning Department for final processing. Throughout the operations, direct labor and overhead costs are incurred uniformly. No direct materials are added in the Cooking Department. Cost data and other information for the Mixing Department for January are as follows.

    Production Cost DataDirectConversion

    Mixing Department MaterialsCosts

    Beginning inventory 28,560 5,230

    Current period costs 450,000 181,200

    Workinprocessinventory:

    Beginning inventory (40%complete in prior period) 5,000 liters

    Ending Inventory (60% complete) 6,000 liters

    Unit productiondata:

    Units started during January 90,000 liters

    Units transferred out during January 89,000 liters

    Assume that no spoilage or evaporation loss took place during January.

    REQUIRED

    1. Using the FIFO costing method, prepare a process cost report for the Mixing Department for January.

    2.ACCOUNTING CONNECTIONExplain how the analysis for the Cooking Depart­ men t will differ from the analysis for the mixing Department.

    week 6 written 504890

    Chapter 9:

    • Pages 357and 358 – Problem 3: Elimination of Unprofitable Segment Decision

    Chapter 11:

    • Page 428 – Problem 8: Time and Material Pricing in a Service Business
    Document Preview:

    12 125 134.4 13.5 234 22 62 50 1200 1852.9 1852.9 1071.5999999999999 854 1925.6 2310.7199999999998 7942.12 P 25-08_Sol Enter appropriate amount or item in the shaded cells. An asterisk (*) will appear next to an incorrect entry in the outlined cells. 1. Materials and parts: Spark plugs Oil, quarts Hoses Sun visor Coolant, quarts Clamps Emergency kits Washer fluid Tires Total materials and parts Materials overhead Direct labor: Mechanic Assistant mechanic Total direct labor cost Direct labor overhead Total billing Name : SOLUTION Section : Round your answers to two decimal places. P 11-08 ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

    hw help 504899

    Fuzzy Monkey Technologies, Inc., purchased as a short-term investment $120 million of 6% bonds, dated January 1, on January 1, 2013. Management intends to include the investment in a short-term, active trading portfolio. For bonds of similar risk and maturity the market yield was 8%. The price paid for the bonds was $100 million. Interest is received semiannually on June 30 and December 31. Due to changing market conditions, the fair value of the bonds at December 31, 2013, was $110 million.

    Record the fair value adjustment

    How would Fuzzy Monkey’s 2013 statement of cash flows be affected by this investment?

    Operating Cash Flow

    Investing Cash flow

    describe the type of business you have created the product or service and general st 504923

    Assignment 2: You are an Entrepreneur

    • If you are using the Blackboard Mobile Learn IOS App, please click “View in Browser.”
      Click the link above to submit your assignment.
      Students, please view the “Submit a Clickable Rubric Assignment” in the Student Center.
      Instructors, training on how to grade is within the Instructor Center.
      Assignment 2: You Are an Entrepreneur!
      Due Week 6 and worth 280 points
      Student life does not generally afford a great deal of free time to pursue your personal interests; however, at one point, you may have considered turning a personal interest or hobby into an official enterprise. Today, you have finally decided to turn that hobby into a business but have realized that you need start-up capital from a lender or investor.
      To obtain funding, you need to convince a lender / investor that your business is more than a hobby. You need to demonstrate that you have a firm grasp of your business, the accounting practices that impact your business, the controls needed to safeguard assets, and which accounting system will produce accurate and relevant financial information.
      Write a six to eight (6-8) page business plan in which you:
      1. Describe the type of business you have created including:
        a.The product or service, and general staffing plan. Provide a rationale for your plan.
        b.The form of your business and the benefits it offers your particular business,
        c.A chart of accounts specific to your business, including a rationale as to the selection of each account. (Note: The chart of accounts is a blueprint of your business for the lender/investor. It should report the expected resources that you will consume in your business (assets), the sources of those resources (liabilities and equity), the sources of revenue, and expenditures that you expect to incur to earn those revenues. You may build a detailed chart that includes business units, divisions, product lines, etc.)
      2. Based on the form of your business, analyze whether or not you will be required to use Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) or International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) accounting methods and how the IFRS / GAAP convergence will impact your business. Suggest how you will incorporate any changes into your books and records. (Note: You need to demonstrate to the lender/investor that you have recognized possible changes to GAAP that may impact the accounting and reporting of your accounting events.)
      3. Prepare a pro forma balance sheet and income statement providing the assumptions made and support the valuations assigned.
      4. Considering the value of assets (assigned per your balance sheet) used within your business, recommend two (2) specific internal controls that you will implement to protect your company’s assets and resources, justifying how each will provide assurances to management. (NOTE: Safeguarding assets and protecting personal data are paramount to ensuring the viability of a business. Demonstrate to the lender/investor that your assets will be safeguarded and customer information (if applicable) will be protected.)
      5. Based on the internal control recommendations that you made, suggest how you will implement each within your business environment, indicating how challenges or resistances will be overcome.
      6. Evaluate the impact of the regulatory environment, including the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and other regulatory requirements, on your business venture, giving considering to how you intend to comply with the requirements and the general impact to decision making within your business.
      7. Use at least four (4) quality academic resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.

    Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:

    • Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
    • Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student’s name, the professor’s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length.

    The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:

    • Examine accounting principles and concepts used in businesses.
    • Assess appropriate internal controls, regulatory requirements according to the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, and fraud prevention and detection.
    • Use technology and information resources to research issues in financial accounting.
    • Write clearly and concisely about financial accounting using proper writing mechanics.

    statistical process 504932

    A statistical process analyst is responsible for assuring statistical control. In one process, a machine is supposed to drop 11.4 ounces of mints into a bag. (Assume that this process can be approximated by a normal distribution). The acceptable ranges for weights of the bags of mints are 11.25 ounces to 11.55 ounces, inclusive.An error with the release valve has caused the setting on the mint release machine to “shift”. Assume that the machine shift is filling the bags with a mean weight of 11.56 ounces and a standard deviation of 0.05 ounces. To check that the machine is placing the correct weight of mints into the bags, you randomly select three samples of five bags each and find the mean weight in ounces for each sample.
    While sampling individual bags You randomly select a bag of mints. What is the probability that the bag you select is not outside the acceptable range? (That is, you do not detect that the machine has shifted.) You randomly select 15 bags of mints. What is the probability that you select at least one bag that is not outside the acceptable range? While sampling groups of five You randomly select a sample of five bags. What is the probability that your sample of five bags has a mean that is not outside the acceptable range? (That is, you do not detect that the machine has shifted.) You randomly select three samples of five bags. What is the probability that you select at least one sample of five bags that has a mean that is not outside the acceptable range? Describe your solutions to each of these problems and explain whether taking 15 bags of mints in one sample or three samples of five bags each is the better way to test for a process that is out of statistical control.

    preparing a bank reconciliation and journal entries the december cash records of dun 504991

    P8-25A Preparing a bank reconciliation and journal entries The December cash records of Dunlap Insurance follow:

    Cash Receipts Cash Payments Date Cash Debit Check No. Cash Credit Dec. 4 $ 4,170 1416 $ 860 9 510 1417 130 14 530 1418 650 17 2,180 1419 1,490 31 1,850 1420 1,440 1421 900 1422 630

    Dunlap “s Lash account shows a balance of $1614U at December 31. Un December 31, Dunlap Insurance received the following bank statement:

    Bank Statement for December

    Beginning Balance S 13,600 Deposits and other Credits: Dec. 1 EFT 1 300 Dec. 5 4,170 Dec. 10 510 Dec. 15 530 Dec 18 2,180 Dec. 22 BC 1,400 9,090 Checks and other Debits: Dec. 8 NSF 1,000 Dec. 11 (check no. 1416) 860 Dec. 19 EFT 700 Dec. 22 (check no. 1417) 130 Dec. 29 (check no. 1418) 650 Dec. 31 (check no. 1419) 1,940 Dec. 31 SC 60 (5,340) Ending Balance S 17,350

    Additional data for the bank reconciliation follows: a. The EFT credit was a receipt of rent. The EFT debit was an insurance payment. b. The NSF check was received from a customer. c. The $1,400 bank collection was for a note receivable. d. The correct amount of check 1419, for rent expense, is $1,940. Dunlap’s controller mistakenly recorded the check for $1,490. Requirements 1. Prepare the bank reconciliation of Dunlap Insurance at December 31, 2015. 2. Journalize any required entries from the bank reconciliation.

    P9-28A Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance method (aging-of-receivables), and reporting receivables on the balance sheet At September 30, 2014, the accounts of Mountain Terrace Medical Center (MTMC) include the following:

    Accounts Receivable $ 145,000 Allowance for Bad Debts (credit balance) 3,500

    During the last quarter of 2014, MTMC completed the following selected transactions:

    Dec. 28 Wrote off accounts receivable as uncollectible: Regan, Co., $1,300; Owen Mac, $900; and Rain, Inc., $700 31 Recorded bad debts expense based on the aging of accounts receivable, as follows:

    Age of Accounts Accounts Receivable 1-30 Days 31-60 Days 61-90 Days Over 90 Days $165,000 Estimated percent uncollectible $97,000 0.3% $37,000 3% 514,000 30% 517,000 35% Requirements

    1. Journalize the transactions. 2. Open the Allowance for Bad Debts T-account, and post entries affecting that account. Keep a running balance. 3. Show how Mountain Terrace Medical Center should report net accounts receivable on its December 31, 2014, balance sheet.

    as 1, 3 P9-29A Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance method (percent-of-sales), and reporting receivables on the balance sheet 19,800 •ual. Watches corn leted the followin•selected transactions durin 201 and 2014:

    P9-3 IA Accounting for notes receivable and accruing interest Kelly Realty loaned money and received the following notes during 2014.

    Note Date Principal Amount Interest Rate Term (1) Aug.1 $ 24,000 17% 1 year (2) Nov. 30 18,000 6% 6 months (3) Dec. 19 12,000 12% 30 days

    Requirements 1. Determine the maturity date and maturity value of each note. 2. Journalize the entry to record the inception of each of the three notes and also journalize a single adjusting entry at December 31, 2014, the fiscal year-end, to record accrued interest revenue on all three notes. Explanations are not required. 3. Journalize the collection of principal and interest at maturity of all three notes. Explanations are not required.

    Attachments:

    1 tco a which of the following is not an objective of financial reporting by state a 505056

    1.(TCO A) Which of the following is not an objective of financial reporting by state and local governments? (Points : 5)

    To assist users in assessing financial condition and the results of operations.
    To assist in determining compliance with finance-related laws, rules, and regulations.
    To assist users in assessing the adequacy of systems and controls.
    To assist financial report users in comparing actual financial results with the legally adopted budget.

    2.(TCO B) Which of the following is a difference between financial reporting for internal service and enterprise funds?(Points : 5)

    Internal service funds are reported in the governmental fund financial statements.
    Internal services funds are reported in the proprietary fund financial statements.
    Internal service funds are generally reported in the Business-type Activities column of the government-wide financial statements.
    Internal service funds are generally reported in the Governmental Activities column of the government-wide financial statements.

    3.(TCO C) Which of the following is not a budgetary account? (Points : 5)

    Encumbrances
    Estimated Revenues
    Encumbrances Outstanding
    Appropriations

    4.(TCO D)What is the proper term that should be applied to the Encumbrances Outstanding Account? (Points : 5)

    Long-term Liability
    Reservation of unassigned fund balance.
    Current Liability if it is paid within one year, or otherwise, a long-term debt account.
    Budgetary account

    5.(TCO B) Which of the following is true regarding the composition of the Comprehensive Annual Financial Report (CAFR)? (Points : 5)

    The CAFR is required in order to be in conformity with Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP).
    The CAFR is to include both blended and discretely presented component units.
    The CAFR contains four major sections: introductory, financial, supplementary, and statistical.
    All of the above are true.

    6.(TCO D) Sales taxes, income taxes, and motor fuel taxes are examples of which class of nonexchange transactions? (Points : 5)

    Imposed non-exchange transactions
    Voluntary non-exchange transactions
    Government-mandated non-exchange transactions
    Derived tax revenues

    7.(TCOs A and B) Identify at least three items that are found in the Required Supplementary Information section of the Comprehensive Annual Financial Report.(Points : 10)

    8.(TCO D)Prepare entries in general journal form to record the following transactions in General Fund general ledger accounts for the fiscal year 2012. Please use the modified accrual accounting approach in recording the transactions.
    a. The legal budget for the provided for $6,530,000 of estimated revenues and $5,975,000 of appropriations.
    b. Assume that are $340,000 of purchase orders outstanding at the end of last fiscal year and these purchase orders will be honored in the current year. Prepare the entries to re-establish the encumbrance.
    c. Property taxes were levied in the amount of $4,650,000. It is estimated that 3.5 percent of the taxes will not be collected.
    d. Purchase orders were issued for equipment and supplies in the amount of $2,760,000.
    Supplies that were relating to all of the prior year purchase orders ($ 340,000) were received along with invoices amounting to $336,800.
    Collections of current property taxes amounted to $4,190,000. The uncollected taxes were recorded as delinquent.(Points : 10)

    9.(TCO D) The City of Martinville had the following pre-closing account balances in its General Fund as of June 30, 2012. Debits and credits are not separated; each account had its “normal” balance. Among the expenditures that are recorded this year is an amount that has been expended on supplies ordered at the end of the previous year. Assume that the encumbrances do not lapse and that the city failed to make the proper journal entry or entries necessary to re-establish the encumbrance in the current year.
    Pre-closing Trial Balance of the City of Martinville as of June 30, 2012:
    Cash $80,000
    Estimated Revenues 6,300,000
    Revenues 6,380,000
    Appropriations 5,890,000
    Estimated Other Financing Sources 79,000
    Estimated Other Financing Uses 320,000
    Expenditures 5,920,000
    Taxes Receivable-Delinquent 45,000
    Fund Balance – July 1, 2011 380,000
    Vouchers Payable 140,000
    Encumbrances 280,000
    Transfer Out to Debt Service Fund 150,000
    Transfer In from Enterprise Fund 100,000
    Fund Balance-Reserve for Encumbrances 300,000
    Required:
    (A) Prepare the necessary entries to close the General Fund of the City of Martinville.
    (B) Prepare a Statement of Revenues, Expenditures, and Changes in Fund Balance for the City of Martinville for the year ended June 30, 2012. Please make sure you end with the Fund Balance for the year ending June 30, 2012.(Points : 10)

    Attachments:

    the basic purpose of ifrs is to provide investors in listed companies with relevant 505059

    For the conceptual framework assignment, our group plans to compare the conceptual framework found in Part III of the handbook, “Not for Profit Organizations” with that of the one found in Part I, “IFRS”.

    • The major qualitative characteristic that we plan to use is representational faithfulness. The enhancing characteristic that we plan to use is timeliness.
    • We plan to divide up the work between the four of us in the following manner:
    1. One of us will write approximately 2-2.5 pages comparing the conceptual frameworks of the two handbooks based upon the degree to which they each stress representational faithfulness. This will include a discussion of which qualitative characteristics are traded off to make the information either more faithfully represented, or less faithfully represented. A conclusion will then be drawn stating which handbook places a greater degree of emphasis on faithfully representing financial statement information.
    1. One of us will write approximately 2-2.5 pages comparing the conceptual frameworks of the two handbooks based upon the degree to which they each stress timeliness, including which qualitative characteristics are traded off to make the information more timely, or less timely. A conclusion will then be drawn stating which handbook places a greater degree of emphasis on producing timely financial statement information.

    After these conclusions have been drawn, our remaining two group members will offer thoughts as to why the two handbooks place a different level of emphasis on the two characteristics.This will be accomplished in the following manner:

    1. One group member will use one or two theories discussed in our course to suggest why it is more/less important for information to be faithfully represented for the users of IFRS statements as compared to the users of NFP statements.
    1. The other will use one or two theories discussed in our course to suggest why it is more/less important for information to be timely for the users of IFRS statements as compared to the users of NFP statements.

    Each of c and d will be accomplished in approximately 2-2.5 pages.

    GUIDANCE

    The basic purpose of IFRS is to provide investors (in listed companies) with relevant information upon which to base their investment decisions. What is the basic purpose of the not-for-profit financial statements?

    Objective

    .12 The objective of financial statements is to communicate information that is useful to members, contributors, creditors and other users (“users”) in making their resource allocation decisions and/or assessing management stewardship. Consequently, financial statements provide information about:

    (a) an entity’s economic resources, obligations and net assets;

    (b) changes in an entity’s economic resources, obligations and net assets; and

    (c) the economic performance of the entity.

    I think you chose the perfect factor in faithful representation but I question timeliness – it used to be part of relevance and I am not sure it will be easily analyzed in the context of not-for-profit. One reason I think faithful representation is terrific is that NFP must be good stewards of the money other people donate. Donors do not expect financial return – what do they expect instead? BUT faithful representation is not a qualitative characteristic but reliability is – this in itself is an excellent point for discussion of at least 2.5 pages.

    In contrast there is a preamble to IFRS which states in part:

    The Board believes that financial statements prepared for this purpose meet the common needs of most users. This is because nearly all users are making economic decisions, for example:

    (a) to decide when to buy, hold or sell an equity investment.

    (b) to assess the stewardship or accountability of management.

    (c) to assess the ability of the entity to pay and provide other benefits to its employees.

    (d) to assess the security for amounts lent to the entity.

    (e) to determine taxation policies.

    (f) to determine distributable profits and dividends.

    (g) to prepare and use national income statistics.

    (h) to regulate the activities of entities.

    Moreover look at how complex and long the objective is for IFRS

    Objective, usefulness and limitations of general purpose financial reporting

    OB2 The objective of general purpose financial reporting 1 is to provide financial information about the reporting entity that is useful to existing and potential investors, lenders and other creditors in making decisions about providing resources to the entity. Those decisions involve buying, selling or holding equity and debt instruments, and providing or settling loans and other forms of credit.

    OB3 Decisions by existing and potential investors about buying, selling or holding equity and debt instruments depend on the returns that they expect from an investment in those instruments, for example dividends, principal and interest payments or market price increases. Similarly, decisions by existing and potential lenders and other creditors about providing or settling loans and other forms of credit depend on the principal and interest payments or other returns that they expect. Investors’, lenders’ and other creditors’ expectations about returns depend on their assessment of the amount, timing and uncertainty of (the prospects for) future net cash inflows to the entity. Consequently, existing and potential investors, lenders and other creditors need information to help them assess the prospects for future net cash inflows to an entity.

    OB4 To assess an entity’s prospects for future net cash inflows, existing and potential investors, lenders and other creditors need information about the resources of the entity, claims against the entity, and how efficiently and effectively the entity’s management and governing board 2 have discharged their responsibilities to use the entity’s resources. Examples of such responsibilities include protecting the entity’s resources from unfavourable effects of economic factors such as price and technological changes and ensuring that the entity complies with applicable laws, regulations and contractual provisions. Information about management’s discharge of its responsibilities is also useful for decisions by existing investors, lenders and other creditors who have the right to vote on or otherwise influence management’s actions.

    OB5 Many existing and potential investors, lenders and other creditors cannot require reporting entities to provide information directly to them and must rely on general purpose financial reports for much of the financial information they need. Consequently, they are the primary users to whom general purpose financial reports are directed.

    OB6 However, general purpose financial reports do not and cannot provide all of the information that existing and potential investors, lenders and other creditors need. Those users need to consider pertinent information from other sources, for example, general economic conditions and expectations, political events and political climate, and industry and company outlooks.

    OB7 General purpose financial reports are not designed to show the value of a reporting entity; but they provide information to help existing and potential investors, lenders and other creditors to estimate the value of the reporting entity.

    OB8 Individual primary users have different, and possibly conflicting, information needs and desires. The Board, in developing financial reporting standards, will seek to provide the information set that will meet the needs of the maximum number of primary users. However, focusing on common information needs does not prevent the reporting entity from including additional information that is most useful to a particular subset of primary users.

    OB9 The management of a reporting entity is also interested in financial information about the entity. However, management need not rely on general purpose financial reports because it is able to obtain the financial information it needs internally.

    OB10 Other parties, such as regulators and members of the public other than investors, lenders and other creditors, may also find general purpose financial reports useful. However, those reports are not primarily directed to these other groups.

    OB11 To a large extent, financial reports are based on estimates, judgements and models rather than exact depictions. The
    Conceptual Framework establishes the concepts that underlie those estimates, judgements and models. The concepts are the goal towards which the Board and preparers of financial reports strive. As with most goals, the
    Conceptual Framework‘s vision of ideal financial reporting is unlikely to be achieved in full, at least not in the short term, because it takes time to understand, accept and implement new ways of analysing transactions and other events. Nevertheless, establishing a goal towards which to strive is essential if financial reporting is to evolve so as to improve its usefulness.

    I think, again there is lots here to fill up your remaining analysis and would suggest you use a compare and contrast of the objective in each part I and III and of Representational Faithfulness compared/contrasted to Reliability.

    With respect to the theories – you will probably rely a lot on Public Interest theory to motivate your NFP in contrast to IFRS standards.

    I think there is a lot of opportunity here to also deal with issues of conflict of interest and moral hazard as a common issue to both sets of entities. For example in NFP most donors go to the website that indicates the percentage of donations that pay for administration and the percentage that goes to achieve the purpose of the NFP. Agency theory and game theory would be applicable to analyzing the standards for both types of entities.

    There is really very little in the free market theory, efficient markets hypothesis or capital asset pricing model that readily applies to non-listed and/or not-for-profit entities. It is worthwhile pointing this out and explaining why in about a half-page. You can also apply Theory of Knowledge. Please, there is NO NEED to do public interest and agency theory and theory of knowledge – pick 2 at most. Let me know what you think.

    costanza company experienced the following events and transactions during july july 505112

    Costanza Company experienced the following events and transactions during July.

    July 1 Received $3,000 cash in advance of performing work for Vivian Solana.
    6 Received $7,500 cash in advance of performing work for Iris Haru.
    12 Completed the job for Solana.
    18 Received $8,500 cash in advance of performing work for Amina Jordan.
    27 Completed the job for Haru.
    31 None of the work for Jordan has been performed.

    a.

    Prepare journal entries (including any adjusting entries as of the end of the month) to record these events using the procedure of initially crediting the Unearned Fees account when payment is received from a customer in advance of performing services.(If no journal entry is required for a particular transaction, select “No journal entry required” in the first account field.)

    b.

    Prepare journal entries (including any adjusting entries as of the end of the month) to record these events using the procedure of initially crediting the Fees Earned account when payment is received from a customer in advance of performing services.(If no journal entry is required for a particular transaction, select “No journal entry required” in the first account field.)

    c.

    Under each method, determine the amount of earned fees reported on the income statement for July and the amount of unearned fees reported on the balance sheet as of July 31.

    Under the first method (and using entries from a)



    6 star ltd over the past few years has experienced challenges within their operation 505147

    ACC300 – AUDITING AND ASSURANCE TRIMESTER 3 2013 – ASSIGNMENT

    You have recently been appointed as auditor of 6 Star Ltd which is a company that runs cinema complexes in Australia and has been in operation since 1985. The company has a 30 June balance date.

    During the preliminary planning for the audit you gather the below facts regarding the business and its operational processes.

    Business Background

    6 Star Ltd over the past few years has experienced challenges within their operations that have impacted their ability to turn over a profit. Events such as the Writers Guild of America strike in 2008, an increase of video piracy and demand for newer cinema technology (3D screens) has reduced what was a business that already had low margins.

    The 2013 financial year saw 6 Star Ltd experience a number of business challenges as they try to remain competitive with the rest of the market. The most notable operational challenges 6 Star faced in 2012/2013 were but not limited to:

    • – Change in minimum release period of movies from Cinema to DVD has been shortened from 3 months to 1 month

    • – More and more people are waiting to download movies for free rather than attend the cinemas.

    • – Two of 6 Star Ltd’s major competitors “Silver Harvest” and “Grasshopper” have merged becoming “Silver Grasshopper” and actively reduced ticket prices to increase market share. “Silver Grasshopper” have actively expanded and have opened more suburban cinemas

    • – Availability of new technology for projectors so that more movies can be shown in 3D has resulted in significant additions and disposals in 2012/2013. 4k High Definition technology has been announced to be released in 2013 and 6 Star expects to upgrade all projectors once again when technology becomes available.

    • – There has been a change in the modern industrial award which has resulted in a pay increase to all cinema workers.

    • – The above statutory increase in wages has caused 6 Star to think about its staffing with a view to reducing staff numbers and increasing operational frequency. One idea that has been implemented was the purchase of popcorn vending machines and front kiosk machines which facilitate movie ticket sales and money at the cinema.

    • – Change of accounting system from “Legacy” to “ASAP” half way during the year. ASAP went live on 1 January 2013 and 6 Star Ltd’s Finance staff still remain unfamiliar with ASAP. There have been a number of issues reconciling between daily sales from the front office system (i.e. the cash register) and the ASAP general ledger. ASAP has also been calculating PAYG income tax and superannuation incorrectly on staff payroll.

    • – Further cases of popcorn inventory (sold at a very high margin) being pilfered by staff, eating on popcorn on the job that has led to a higher number of staff being dismissed

    • – Overbooking of seats for particular showings.

    • – Purchase of 5 popcorn making machines from Lee Bing ($200 each) that are for non-

      commercial use, as the commercial grade popcorn making machines were deemed too expensive ($20,000 each).

      Operational Processes

      6 Star generates sales from the following sources:

      • – movie ticket sales sold online prior to film showing

      • – movie ticket sales sold at the cinema (the traditional way)

      • – popcorn and condiments sales at the cinema

        Online sales are all paid by customer credit card that provides details through the online booking system. Ticket, popcorn and condiments sales at the movies are received in either cash or through EFTPOS.

        On 20 June 2013, 6 Star announce that it would be releasingStar Wars Xwhich critics have praised as the greatest movie ever made. The movie was released for showing from 1 July 2013. This led to an immediate surge in online ticket sales on 20 June 2013 for screenings over the next 3 months resulting in the movie being sold out over that 3 month period.

        Customers that purchase online tickets must print out an online ticket which they are required to present to the usher on entry into the cinema. Once satisfied the usher allows the customer to see the movie at the cinema.

        Due to the initiative of 6 Star in cutting staff, they have been too few ushers available to vigilantly check printed online movie tickets for authenticity as it is common for customers to photocopy tickets and give them to friends who have not purchased a ticket.

        Sales register kiosks have been placed at the front of cinema so that customers that enter need to use them in order to purchase a ticket prior to entry. There is generally only one attendant from 6 Star who is administering the process and assisting customers with using the kiosk.

        Because the kiosk system had only been implemented part way through 2012/13, there have been multiple issues experienced by customers in purchasing a ticket. There have been issues with the system identifying the availability of films as well as the pricing of tickets. As a consequence the one attendant has had to spend a lot of time in helping each customer purchase a ticket.

        As a result of the above, the following situations have occurred:

    1.The attendant has had to override the system (so that the line of people keeps moving) in order to generate a ticket which has generally been at no charge or at a charge which has no reference to the sale being made to the customer for a particular film.

    2.Customers have just been walking into the cinema for free because the attendant has been too busy.

    At the end of each day’s trading the attendance opens the Kiosk with a key held only by him and empties the Kiosk of cash. The attendant then prints a sales report from the Kiosk (which acts as the point of sale front office system).

    The attendant counts the cash and reconciles the amount counted to the sales report. The reconciliation is documented on a pre-numbered reconciliation form identified to each specific date the reconciliation was performed on.

    Once the reconciliation is completed the attendant signs off and prepares a banking deposit slip for the amount to be banked into 6 Stars bank account. The attendant takes the reconciliation and the banking deposit slip to the store manager who is required to sign off on both documents. The store manager is generally not an accountant but an usher that has been promoted. Because of his lack of understanding of reconciliation he generally just signs off particularly since this is presented to him at the end of days trading (cinemas can closed past midnight depending on screenings).

    Once signed off the attendant takes the funds and deposits it at the bank the next day.

    Based upon earlier observation of staff it is noted that the usher, the store manager and the attendant are permanent staff and the remainder are casuals who work on an adhoc basis within the cinema.

    The casuals who work within the cinema are hired and brought in by the store manager. The store manager is responsible for drafting up the employment contract, keying the pay rates into the payroll system, establishes the weekly roster, keying in the timesheets of the hours worked for the staffs shift and signs off the weekly pay for all staff and initiates the payroll run.

    Attachments:

    assigment 505148

    ACC300 – AUDITING AND ASSURANCE TRIMESTER 3 2013 -ASSIGNMENT You have recently been appointed as auditor of 6 Star Ltd which is a company that runs cinema complexes in Australia and has been in operation since 1985. The company has a 30 June balance date. During the preliminary planning for the audit you gather the below facts regarding the business and its operational processes. Business Background 6 Star Ltd over the past few years has experienced challenges within their operations that have impacted their ability to turn over a profit.

    Document Preview:

    ACC300 – AUDITING AND ASSURANCE TRIMESTER 3 2013 – ASSIGNMENT You have recently been appointed as auditor of 6 Star Ltd which is a company that runs cinema complexes in Australia and has been in operation since 1985. The company has a 30 June balance date. During the preliminary planning for the audit you gather the below facts regarding the business and its operational processes. Business Background 6 Star Ltd over the past few years has experienced challenges within their operations that have impacted their ability to turn over a profit. Events such as the Writers Guild of America strike in 2008, an increase of video piracy and demand for newer cinema technology (3D screens) has reduced what was a business that already had low margins. The 2013 financial year saw 6 Star Ltd experience a number of business challenges as they try to remain competitive with the rest of the market. The most notable operational challenges 6 Star faced in 2012/2013 were but not limited to: – Change in minimum release period of movies from Cinema to DVD has been shortened from 3 months to 1 month – More and more people are waiting to download movies for free rather than attend the cinemas. – Two of 6 Star Ltd’s major competitors “Silver Harvest” and “Grasshopper” have merged becoming “Silver Grasshopper” and actively reduced ticket prices to increase market share. “Silver Grasshopper” have actively expanded and have opened more suburban cinemas – Availability of new technology for projectors so that more movies can be shown in 3D has resulted in significant additions and disposals in 2012/2013. 4k High Definition technology has been announced to be released in 2013 and 6 Star expects to upgrade all projectors once again when technology becomes available. – There has been a change in the modern industrial award which has resulted in a pay increase to all cinema workers. – The above statutory increase in wages has caused 6 Star to think about its staffing…

    Attachments:

    design flooring carpet company manufactures carpets fiber is placed in process in th 505163

    Design Flooring Carpet Company manufactures carpets. Fiber is placed in process in the Spinning Department, where it is spun into yarn. The output of the Spinning Department is transferred to the Tufting Department, where carpet backing is added at the beginning of the process and the process is completed On July 1, Design Flooring Carpet Company had the following inventories: Finished Goods…………………………………….$5,600 Work in Process – Spinning Department …..900 Work in Process – Tufting Department ……1,400 Materials…………………………………………………..4,200 -Departmental accounts are maintained for factory overhead, and both have zero balances on July 1. Manufacturing operations for July are summarized as follows: a. Materials purchased on account $$ 84,600 b. Materials requisitioned for use: Fiber”Spinning Department $ 42,800 Carpet backing”Tufting Department 34,400 Indirect materials”Spinning Department 3,200 Indirect materials”Tufting Department 2,800 c. Labor used: Direct labor”Spinning Department $ 24,200 Direct labor”Tufting Department 18,700 Indirect labor”Spinning Department 12,300 Indirect labor”Tufting Department 11,900 d. Depreciation charged on fixed assets: Spinning Department $ 5,300 Tufting Department 3,100 e. Expired prepaid factory insurance: Spinning Department $ 1,200 Tufting Department 900 f. Applied factory overhead: Spinning Department $ 21,600 Tufting Department 19,500 g. Production costs transferred from Spinning Department to Tufting Department $ 87,200 h. Production costs transferred from Tufting Department to Finished Goods $159,200 i. Cost of goods sold during the period $160,300 Instructions: Journalize the entries to record the operations, identifying each entry by letter. Compute the July 31 balances of the inventory accounts. Compute the July 31 balances of the factory overhead accounts.

    norma rottler has been your trusted employee for 24 years 505185

    Upside-1)mm Applications develops commit programs to customer’s specifica-tions. Recently development of a new program stopped while the programmers recksigned Upsick.1)own’s accounting system. Upsidc.Down’s accountants could have performed this task. Norma Rottler has been your trusted employee for 24 years. She performs all cash.handling and accounting duties. Ms. Roulet just purchased a new Lexu.s and a new home in an expensive suburb. As owner of the company. you wonder how she can afford these luxuries because you pay her only 530,000 a year and she has no source of outside income. Ink Hardwoods. a private company. falsified sales and inventory figures in order to get an important loan. The loan went through. but laic later went bankntpt and could not repay the bank. The office supply company where Pet Grooming Goods purchases sales receipts recently notified Pet Grooming Goods that its documents were not pre-numbered. Howard Muuro. the owner. replied that he never uses receipt numbers. Discount stores such as Cusco nuke most of their sales in cash, with the remainder in credit card sales. To reduce expenses. one store manager ceases purchasing fidelity bonds on the cashier. Cornelius Comdogs keeps all cash receipts in an empty box for a week because he likes to go to the bank on Thesdays when Joann is working

    Attachments:

    henson produces a product that requires 10 standard labor hours at 5 hr 505261

    1.) Henson produces a product that requires 10 standard labor hours at $5/hr. If Henson produces 1,000 units and used 10,000 direct labor hours, the labor rate efficiency variance is:

    a.) $10,000

    b.) $50,000

    c.) 0

    d.) None of the above

    2.) The present value of cash flow allows an individual to assess.

    a.) The value of a present cash flow

    b.) The Value of a stream of cash flows in terms of the best alternative

    c.) Both A and B

    d.) Neither A nor B

    3.) The capital expenditures budget is tied closely to the:

    a.) Sales Budget

    b.) Purchases budget

    c.) Cash receipts budget

    d.) Cash expenditures budget

    4.) There is a fixed cost element in ending inventory using the absorption costing approach.

    True or False

    5.) The labor efficiency variance is used in activity based costing.

    True or False

    6.) If production equals sales and there are no beginning or ending inventories:

    a.) Variable costing gives a higher net income than absorption costing

    b.) Variable costing gives a lower net income than absorption costing

    c.) Net income is the same under each assumption

    d.) None of the above

    7.) Jeremiah pays for 50% of its purchases in the month of purchase, 30% in the month after and 20% in the month after that. For a $100,000 purchase in January, what is the accounts payable with respect to this purchase at the end of February?

    a.) $50,000

    b.) $30,000

    c.) $20,000

    d.) None of the above

    Document Preview:

    1.) Henson produces a product that requires 10 standard labor hours at $5/hr. If Henson produces 1,000 units and used 10,000 direct labor hours, the labor rate efficiency variance is: a.) $10,000 b.) $50,000 c.) 0 d.) None of the above 2.) The present value of cash flow allows an individual to assess. a.) The value of a present cash flow b.) The Value of a stream of cash flows in terms of the best alternative c.) Both A and B d.) Neither A nor B 3.) The capital expenditures budget is tied closely to the: a.) Sales Budget b.) Purchases budget c.) Cash receipts budget d.) Cash expenditures budget 4.) There is a fixed cost element in ending inventory using the absorption costing approach. True or False 5.) The labor efficiency variance is used in activity based costing. True or False 6.) If production equals sales and there are no beginning or ending inventories: a.) Variable costing gives a higher net income than absorption costing b.) Variable costing gives a lower net income than absorption costing c.) Net income is the same under each assumption d.) None of the above 7.) Jeremiah pays for 50% of its purchases in the month of purchase, 30% in the month after and 20% in the month after that. For a $100,000 purchase in January, what is the accounts payable with respect to this purchase at the end of February? a.) $50,000 b.) $30,000 c.) $20,000 d.) None of the above

    Attachments:

    acc202 management accounting 505264

    ACC202 Management Accounting T3-13 Assignment Task 1. Group Report 2. Student learning outcome By successfully completing this assessment task students should be able to demonstrate: (a) Use management accounting approaches to describe and explain cost management and the effect of costs on product profitability (b) Understand financial performance measures, pricing and product mix decisions and how we as Management Accountants can add value to Customers and Shareholders. (c) Understand contemporary approaches to measuring and rewarding performance (If appropriate to selected case.) 3. Student assessment: You are to find two companies which MUST be in the same industry (e.g. Two grocery retailers, or two Transport Companies) to study. This will require you to investigate these businesses and (to a lesser extent) the industry in which they operate. The focus is NOT on purely financial performance but rather on HOW these companies have been overhauling its management practices and processes to add both Customer and Shareholder Value. Note that you should FOCUS on ONE “MAIN” company and use the additional companies for comparison purposes. You can research the examples given in Chapter 15 of the Text (6e p.685 Regarding Roberts Wool Link and The Merino Company. or 6e pp.686-687 Sigma and Blue Circle: A Supply Chain Partnership as examples of how you could START your report and the type of company activities you could examine.) Students are to work in a GROUP and produce a report (minimum 2500 words if three members, 3000 if four members in the Group) on how the companies you have chosen has worked on improving its performance and their cost management to add value to the firm. Focus of report: Ensure your report addresses the following issues: 1. What is it that makes the one ‘subject’ company more ‘successful’ than the other company? 2. Define clearly what you define as ‘success’. 3. Review each of the selected firm’s SUPPLY CHAIN and how this has contributed to their results including identifying how this may have given this entity a competitive advantage. 4. Address and comment on how each firm differs from each other and how Management Accountants would be necessary in assisting each entity to achieve their management goals. (Note for this part of the report, you should refer to the Text and other academic sources to support your conclusions and be specific!) 5. Where possible, research the remuneration package of the senior management (The Annual Report will give Salaries of the most highly paid individuals in all public companies.) Comment on how the senior management are rewarded (again, refer to the Remuneration Report in the Annual Report for disclosures on this aspect). Where there are a combination of Financial AND NON-Financial measures used, outline what factors are considered when calculating remuneration. The Report will require that you use Microsoft Word to format and complete the task. ACC202 ACC202 Management Accounting – Written Assignment Tasks Page 2 There are TWO steps to submitting your assignment: a) The Group Report is to be submitted using Turnitin EARLY to obtain a Turnitin Score. Once you have your score. The Turnitin Score MUST be less than 25% unless agreed in writing from the Lecturer. Please note that a second submission to Turnitin can take up to 24 hours to return so allow PLENTY of time if you think you may get close to or greater than a 25% Turnitin Score. b) Once your Report is at LESS THAN 25% Turnitin Score, you are then to make that final submission to Turnitin. NOTE: If you wish to submit additional supporting information (such as extracts from the Annual Report which may add to your group’s Turnitin score, you may submit these files in Moodle Assignment submission. Note this material will NOT BE MARKED however you may believe that such additional explanatory material helps explain your conclusion. The Moodle Assignment will allow up the three (3) separate files to be submitted. This will allow students to submit additional material such as Company Report Extracts or other Excel Files that may support the findings of your Group. Please make a note of this in your assignment if you wish the marker to refer to these additional materials. It is NOT the intention to have students submit three ‘versions’ of their reports! You may find, by including additional (fully referenced) materials that you can lower your Turnitin Score as you will not have to include referenced material within the Report which would otherwise appear to be plagiarised. Final due time and date is before 8 PM Tuesday 28 January 2014. This date is in Week 10. (Please consult the Library for instructions if necessary WELL BEFORE the due date and time.) A printed copy of the assignment should be submitted to the library at the same time however the time of electronic submission to Turnitin will be the time officially recorded as your lodgement time. Naturally you may lodge it earlier if desired. The Turnitin link will be open 2 weeks prior to final due date. Students MUST accompany their printed copy of the assignment submission with a completed and signed KOI Group Assignment Coversheet. Please note that marks will be awarded to all members of the group based on their input. The lecturer should be consulted if a group member is not contributing to the task WELL IN ADVANCE of the due date so action may be taken. Only ONE person in EACH GROUP (someone very reliable) should be nominated to make the GROUP lodgement to Turnitin. Do NOT lodge multiple copies of the GROUP assignment from each group member. The Total Assignment will be marked out of 20 Marks and this Group Assignment carries a course weighting of 20 COURSE MARKS. 4. Assignment and Research hints: How do you measure Customer and Shareholder value? Review more than just profitability as an absolute measure of ‘success’ (e.g. Telstra is by far the biggest telephony company but it does not automatically mean the ‘best’.). Other non-financial indicators may include such things as ‘growth in market share’ (e.g. Growth of Market Share of the Grocery Market for Coles over the past 5 years), ‘market leadership’, growth of a particular business segment (e.g. share of business class passengers for an airline.). Reading Financial Press articles (rather than simply consulting the Company’s own website) will often give you a very good indication of how well the business is being managed. Other key features of a well-run company is often such things as stability of senior management, the accolades (awards and acknowledgements) that the CEO and other senior managers may be given in the press for their leadership skills and innovative thinking. (Note you definitely SHOULD know the CEO’s name and how long they have been at the Company.) ACC202 ACC202 Management Accounting – Written Assignment Tasks Page 3 Where to find information: Remember, you are looking for additional academic articles and information to support your Report relating to “Supply Chain Reform” in an AUSTRALIAN Company or Industry. Also you should try to get current articles, so you should try to find articles written between 2005 and 2013. Earlier articles may be OK but you need to think as to whether they are still relevant given today’s circumstances. Finding articles: a) Type the term into the Library database b) Add a second search term such as management of supply chain or market share if you don’t get any results first c) Still no results that you can use? Try to use a different term that means the same thing. Reading/reviewing/analysing articles Many articles you will find will be several pages long – this is quite normal for academic research papers as they are required to explain in detail the research methodology and results. These details are necessary to support and validate the findings. Do not let this concern you, as, for the purposes of your research for this, and most other assessment tasks, you do not need to read the detail about the research methodology and results. What you need to find out is the purpose of the research: what question they are trying to answer; any context considerations; the findings – i.e. the answer to the question; and any comments about future directions or the application of the findings To gain this information, points 1 and 2 will be found in the abstract and the introductory section(s) – usually within the first 2 pages. Points 3 and 4 will be found at the end of the paper under the headings “Findings” and/or “Conclusions” and/or “Recommendations” or similar. These are usually the last page or two pages. A FULL copy of your ‘reference’ article can be found on the subject website along with all other information under the heading ‘Assignment’ however there is also an ‘abbreviated version’ which omits the research methodology and statistical data. Although the article is quite long, only the first two pages (336 & 337) and page 350 have been needed for the review – i.e. students usually only need to read the introduction and conclusion sections of the articles. 5. Late submission: Please note that late submission (any time after the due date and time) will incur a 20% penalty and then an additional 5% per day each day or part thereof that the Assignment is late. No Assignment will be collected or accepted after one week past the due date. As this is a Group Assignment, please note that Doctor’s Certificates for individual group members will NOT exempt a Group from lodging on time. Please lodge the Assignment showing your efforts to the due date and consideration may be given based upon the level of Assignment completion to the date of your illness or other misfortune. 6. Penalties will also be applied if all or part of this assessed work is plagiarised. 7. Any similarities or collaboration noted between group assignments will result in a fail grade. 8. Before handing in your assignment: Ensure you have referenced and cited all ideas, words or other intellectual property from other sources used in the completion of your assignment. ACC202 ACC202 Management Accounting – Written Assignment Tasks Page 4 Develop a proper reference list, which includes acknowledgement of all sources used to complete your assignment. References must use the Harvard Style. 9. Referencing: Referencing IS Required. Ensure that you fully reference ALL material that is directly copied and enclose direct quotations appropriately with full references. Also ensure you have referenced and cited all ideas, words or other intellectual property from other sources used in the completion of your assignment. Please see the Library for assistance if you are unfamiliar with the correct procedure for Academic Referencing. Please note that WIKIPEDIA is NOT an acceptable reference source other than for very superficial checking and should NOT be used as a primary resource as there are no controlled peer review of the content on this or similar ‘Wiki’ sites. 10. Working as a group: Group size: Minimum of three (3) and a maximum four (4) students to a group. Groups found to have less than three members may have additional students randomly assigned to that group to make up the minimum allowed. After forming your group and submitting the Group Membership details to me (on or before the fifth lecture), you should commence work immediately. Project Group Conflict For a project like this, success means being organised. The group will have to establish a division of labour and divide the work that needs to be done in a fair manner. Contributions to the project MUST be equitable. All group members will need to meet for a number of hours each week. Agree on a regular time and place and set an agenda. Group conflict is inevitable and should be resolved early in the semester. Group breakdowns are amongst the most common reasons why students fail. Make records (e.g. keeping emails sent and received) of all agreed meetings, who did and did not attend, agreed actions coming from the meeting and who is responsible for each of these. When group conflict becomes destructive, group members should first consider using mediation to resolve any dispute, disagreement, grievance or complaint. If the conflict still cannot be resolved, then group members can “fire” a member from the group by openly voting a person out BUT only after consulting the module lecturer. Upon the approval by the lecturer, the group leader/representative must inform the ousted person the outcome agreed via email and copy the message to all other group members including the lecturer. The ousted person has the right to present a defence within five calendar days if he or she wishes to remain in the group. In this situation, every group member must complete a Peer Group Evaluation to evaluate the contribution of every group member to the group project during the semester. All evaluations must be submitted in a sealed envelope directly to the Lecturer on the project due date. The results of the Peer Group Evaluation to assess group members’ relative contribution to the project task will affect the ACC202 ACC202 Management Accounting – Written Assignment Tasks Page 5 individual mark for the group project. A mark of zero will be awarded to any student who does not participate. When a group member has been fired and decides not to challenge the decision, he/she will have to complete the whole project on his/her own (and not just merely submit the part that he/she was previously assigned to contribute). Likewise, the remaining group members will have to take over the work originally assigned to the ousted person and complete it. Please note that in the event a project group breaks up and that the disintegrated groups do not finish the whole project on their own, the submission will be treated as partially done. The lecturer will not grade the project work on a partial basis (to compensate as a whole due to the breakup). Alternatively, the ousted group member is free to join any other project group provided there is still room for an additional group member (maximum four to a group) and a unanimous decision is made by all project members to accept him or her. Group members need to be familiar with all aspects of the project requirements. While the group may divide the project tasks up among members, the final document will need to flow smoothly.

    Attachments:

    sooner industries charges a price of 120 and has fixed cost of 458 000 505290

    Sooner Industries charges a price of $120 and has fixed cost of $458,000. Next year, Sooner expects to sell 15,600 units and make operating income of $166,000. What is the variable cost per unit? What is the contribution margin ratio? Round your answer to the nearest dollar. Enter the contribution margin ratio as a percentage, rounded to two decimal places.

    Variable cost per unit $

    Contribution margin ratio %

    3. Last year, Jasper Company earned operating income of $22,500 with a contribution margin ratio of 0.25. Actual revenue was $235,000. Calculate the total fixed cost. Round your answer to the nearest dollar.

    $

    4. Laramie Company has variable cost ratio of 0.56. The fixed cost is $103,840 and 23,600 units are sold at breakeven. What is the price? What is the variable cost per unit? The contribution margin per unit? (Round answers to the nearest cent.)

    Price $

    Variable cost per unit $

    Contribution margin per unit

    please follow the excel sheet and show your work in order to understand how is done 505388

    use excel sheet

    Document Preview:

    Preble Company manufactures one product. Its variable manufacturing overhead is applied to production based on direct labor-hours and its standard cost card per unit is as follows: Direct Materials: 5 pounds at $8.00 per pound……………………………. $40.00 Direct Labor: 2 hours at $14.00 per hour ……………………………………. 28.00 Variable Overhead: 2 hours at $5.00 per hour ……………………………. 10.00 Total standard variable cost per unit ……………………………………………. $78.00 The company also established the following cost formulas for its selling expenses: Fixed Cost Variable Cost Per Month Per Unit Sold Advertising ………………………………………………………… $200,000 Sales salaries and commisions …………………………. $100,000 $12.00 Shipping expenses ……………………………………………. $3.00 The planning budget for March was based on producing and selling 25,000 units. However, March the compnay actually produced and sold 30,000 units and incurred the following costs: a. Purchased 160,000 pounds of raw materials at a cost of $7.50 per pound. All of this material was used in production b. Direct-laborers worked 55,000 hours at a rate of $15.00 per hour. c. Total variable manufacturing overhead for the month was $280,500. d. Total advertising, sales salaries and commissions, and shipping expenses were $210,000, $455,000, and $115,000, respectively. Required to Answer: 1. What raw materials cost would be included in the company’s flexible budget for March? 2. What is the materials quantity variance for March? 3. What is the materials price variance for March? 4. If Preble had purchased 170,000 pounds of materials at $7.50 per pound and used 160,000 pounds in production, what would be the materials quantity variance for March? 5. If Preble had purchased 170,000 pounds of materials at $7.50 per pound and used 160,000 pounds in production, what would be…

    Attachments:

    the following information is used for lucky 039 s inc s monthly master budget 505427

    The following information is used for Lucky’s Inc. s monthly master budget.

    June’s balance sheet balances:

    Cash

    $10,500

    Accounts payable

    $53,760

    Accounts receivable

    $80,000

    Capital stock

    $260,000

    Inventory

    $26,000

    Retained earnings

    $2,740

    Building and equipment (net)

    $200,000

    Actual sales for June and budgeted sales for July, August, and September:

    June (actual)

    $140,000

    July (budget)

    $320,000

    August (budget)

    $180,000

    September (budget)

    $200,000

    Sales are 25% cash and 75% on credit. All credit sales are collected in the following month. There are no bad debts.

    Gross margin percentage is 60% of sales.

    The desired ending inventory is expected to be 20% of the following month’s cost of goods sold. One fifth of the purchases are by Savings Addon” in_rurl=”http://i.txtsrving.info/click?v=VVM6MzE3MDg6MTg2MTpwYWlkOjBmOTI3NjRjMDBhYTExZTRhNWE5Yzg3M2NhYzg4YmQxOnotMTM1MS0xNjI2MDQ6d3d3LnRyYW5zdHV0b3JzLmNvbToyOTk4OTpjZGRjZTc1MDViZDFlZmZiYmYwMjRkMDY5OTIyMDcyNjpkNTI4OTg3YjY4NTM0NDQyOTg3N2E5YmYwZmRkZWJjYjox” id=”_GPLITA_1″ href=”#”>paid for in the month of purchase, and the remaining balance is purchased on credit and paid in the following month.

    The monthly cash operating expenses are $80,000, including the monthly depreciation expense of $7,000.

    During July, Lucky’s Inc. will purchase new office equipment for $17,000 cash.

    Dividends of $13,500 were declared and by Savings Addon” in_rurl=”http://i.txtsrving.info/click?v=VVM6MzE3MDg6MTg2MTpwYWlkOjAzZGIxNTUwY2E1YzIzYzU5ZDYzMDg3ZWFhMzc4YWU1OnotMTM1MS0xNjI2MDQ6d3d3LnRyYW5zdHV0b3JzLmNvbToyOTc5OToyMDRhNGZhMzRhMzI5MDlhOGM3ZDdjY2EzMTdjOTA0Nzo0ODA2NTllYTczOTU0ZTUwOWM1Yzg2MmVjZDNlYmE2OTox” id=”_GPLITA_2″ href=”#”>paid in July.

    The company must maintain a minimum cash balance of $25,000. A by Savings Addon” in_rurl=”http://i.txtsrving.info/click?v=VVM6NTI4MjY6MzI0ODpsaW5lIG9mIGNyZWRpdDo3ODYyMTBkYTg4ZTY2OGVlZmE4MWFlZDU3YzY5MjQwZjp6LTEzNTEtMTYyNjA0Ond3dy50cmFuc3R1dG9ycy5jb206MTA4NDUwOjkxNDlmODExMmI0NzA4ODIxYmNmMzAwOWY3ZGFiZjM4OjM5NGFkMDYwYjEzZDQzYzRhNjFkYzVjODA2ODViM2RhOjE” id=”_GPLITA_0″ href=”#”>line of credit is used to maintain this balance. Borrowing will be made in increments of $1,000. All borrowing is done at the beginning of the month, and repayments are made at the end of the month. The annual interest rate is 12%, paid when the loan is repaid (ignore accrual of interest).

    Required:

    Prepare a balance sheet, income statement, and cash budget for the month of July.

    financial letter 505447

    the doc. Sample financial letter (1).pdf is an example of how the financial letter should be. I need to use only authoritative sources such as FASB codification or IFRS for question 4(b)

    instructions:

    William Jones, the controller for Ida Inc., is not familiar with the impairment rules, and he has asked your firm to research the issue. Write a letter to Mr.Jones explaining the proper accounting treatment. For the clients convenience,you should includeany required journal entries. The address of the company is 100International Boulevard, Brownsville, Texas 78520. You will need to come up with a name and address for your accounting firm.

    – Assume the year in question is 2013 (not 2010).

    – For Questions 1-4, only address the US GAAP accounting treatment (not IFRS).

    – For Question 4(a), assume you and the company decided to bypass the qualitative assessment of goodwill.

    – Do not answer Questions #3 and#5.

    – Use todays date for the letter.

    Document Preview:

    Johnson and Johnson Certified Public Accountants 3030 Main Street Brownsville, TX 78521 August 28, 2010 Boris Kloden, CFO Daimler Auto Parts 800 Mercedes Street Munich, Germany 70327 Dear Mr. Kloden: Comment [ITS1]: I think “response” might be I am writing in reference to your previous inquiry about the proper treatment of research and more appropriate in this case. development costs. It is my understanding that Daimler Auto Parts intends to register with the SEC in order to list the stock on the New York Stock Exchange. However, in order to do so, Daimler must comply with the U.S. generally accepted accounting standards. The following is a Comment [ITS2]: Good introduction and summary of the standards regarding research and development (R&D). summary of the facts/issues. Internally Generated Research and Development Internally developed R&D should be expensed. As the future benefit of the incurred R&D costs is presently unknown and uncertain, the standards choose to be conservative and expense 1 these costs. R&D costs include cost of materials, purchased equipment, personnel wages and 2 Comment [ITS3]: You should only use a colon expenditures, and contracted services. Additional R&D costs that are also expensed include: after a complete sentence. See page 89 of the (1) conceptual formulation and design of possible products, (2) testing or evaluation of product, Effective Writing textbook. 3 and (3) design, construction or testing of preproduction prototypes. Comment [ITS4]: Excellent. Acquired or Internally Constructed R&D Comment [ITS5]: Missing the subject. R&D or Acquired or constructed (e.g. warehouse facility or equipment) for a particular research project materials, equipment, and facilities? 4 may be capitalized. In such a case, the capitalized costs would be subject to amortization Comment [ITS6]: I think you should explain that 5 similar to that of property, plant and equipment….

    Attachments:

    on march 1 2008 kara frantz established mudcat realty which completed the following 505453

    On March 1, 2008, Kara Frantz established Mudcat Realty, which completed the following transactions during the month:

    a. Kara Frantz transferred cash from a personal bank account to an account to be used for the business, $15,000.

    b. Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $2,500.

    c. Purchased supplies on account, $850.

    d. Paid creditor on account, $400.

    e. Earned sales commissions, receiving cash, $15,750.

    f. Paid automobile expenses (including rental charge) for month, $2,400, and miscellaneous expenses, $600.

    g. Paid office salaries, $3,250.

    h. Determined that the cost of supplies used was $575.

    i. Withdrew cash for personal use, $1,000.

    Instructions

    1. Journalize entries for transactions (a) through (i), using the following account titles: Cash; Supplies; Accounts Payable; Kara Frantz, Capital; Kara Frantz, Drawing; Sales Commissions; Office Salaries Expense; Rent Expense; Automobile Expense; Supplies Expense; Miscellaneous Expense. Explanations may be omitted.

    2. Prepare T accounts, using the account titles in (1). Post the journal entries to these accounts, placing the appropriate letter to the left of each amount to identify the transactions.

    Determine the account balances, after all posting is complete. Accounts containing only a single entry do not need a balance.

    3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance as of March 31, 2008.

    4. Determine the following:

    a. Amount of total revenue recorded in the ledger.

    b. Amount of total expenses recorded in the ledger.

    c. Amount of net income for March.

    in order to understand more immediately the basics of business communications it is 504818

    In order to understand more immediately the basics of business communications, it is better to have those communication problems embedded in a context of a real company. Therefore, to provide real-life context to your communications, and to show that theory and practice inform one another, you will select a company (see below) and compose a business profile similar to that found on pages 32-35 of Contemporary Business Communications. You might also find helpful in your research of an appropriate business the Business & Company Resource Center in the Baker Online Library. You should review the structure of these documents prior to submitting your own.

    Your business must either be a multinational corporation with a culturally diverse workforce or a local business emphasizing global sales and outreach. In either case, there should be a significant emphasis on cultural diversity. You will be writing a three to four page memo report that defines the size, composition, and scope to the company. You should also identify, by name, two to four mid-level managers, a human resources manager, and the executive structure. It should also define what the company does and the corporate mission. Although you should not include any information on the biographical interpersonal relationships among managers or executive like that in the textbook’s profile, you might want to include any thoughts on ethical considerations, such as environmental impact for instance.

    in still life with plaster cast the viewer sees a painting within a painting identif 504819

    In Still Life with Plaster Cast, the viewer sees a painting-within-a-painting. Identify and describe another work in your text that uses a similar approach.

    Explain why you think an artist might choose to re-paint a painting into his or her work. In what ways is it the same painting? In what ways does it become different?

    Cézanne returned again and again to paint his mountain. Explain why you think an artist might choose to repaint a subject. In what ways is it the same painting? In what ways does it become different?

    Explain whether you agree with the opinion of many Parisians in 1889 that the Eiffel Tower was a ridiculous eyesore that should have been torn down after the World’s Fair.

    Explain why you think Gustave Eiffel’s design was the one chosen from over 700 submissions to a design competition.

    Describe a contemporary monument in your city or in another U.S. city and whether it holds some special significance for the citizens of the city where it was erected. State whether you like or dislike the monument and explain why.

    for your final task in this contractual theme this week you will provide your depart 504820

    For your final task in this contractual theme, this week you will provide your department with an understanding of cyber crimes that we see in the business world.

    The last primer you will prepare for your department’s training series will give your colleagues a background on the types of cyber crime and the ways we can guard against them in the workplace. Prepare a 2–3-page, double-spaced document explaining to your colleagues how to identify the various cyber crimes and what measures your business could take to ward them off before they happen.

    Identify the various cyber crimes that would apply in a business setting? Provide a scenario by way of example that will demonstrate to your colleagues a situation that might occur and explain how it should be managed to protect the business.

    read once more to the lake by e b white pp 97 100 and androgynous man by noel perrin 504821

    Part 1:

    Read “Once More to the Lake” by E. B. White, pp. 97-100, and “Androgynous Man” by Noel Perrin, pp. 243-244. Select one of the pieces to write about.

    Both of these stories involve trips or vacations, time spent away from the author’s everyday environment. Both deal with memory and growing up.

    Take a look at how the author uses sentences to give details of the vacation or the trip. Are the sentences long, short, poetic, matter of fact?

    Then write about whether you think the author is successful in creating an interesting or moving piece about memory. What makes the writing successful for you?

    Select a favorite sentence from the piece and include it as a quotation with MLA citation, like this:

    “I read all the interesting articles in a couple of magazines I had, and then I went back and read all the dull stuff” (Perrin 243).

    Try to select a sentence that no one else has selected yet. Why is it a favorite for you? What was your reaction when you read it, and how did the author evoke that reaction?

    Part 2: Writing to Tell Your Story

    This week you are working on your personal experience essay. You are dealing with memory and life events. How can you apply the reading you have done in Part 1 and the research you have done in Part 2 to your own story, to make your writing stronger, more interesting, or more effective?

    Your initial post (Part 1 and Part 2,) should be between 200-250 words. Please make your initial post by Wednesday, and then respond thoughtfully to at least two other classmates, in posts of at least 50-100 words

    the bp chairman carl henric svanberg said the bp board is deeply saddened to lose a 504823

    The BP chairman Carl-Henric Svanberg said: “The BP board is deeply saddened to lose a CEO whose success over some three years in driving the performance of the company was so widely and deservedly admired” (BP CEO, 2010, para. 2). “The tragedy of the Macondo well explosion and subsequent environmental damage has been a watershed incident. BP remains a strong business with fine assets, excellent people and a vital role to play in meeting the world’s energy needs. But it will be a different company going forward, requiring fresh leadership supported by robust governance and a very engaged board” (para. 3).

    • “No single factor caused the Macondo well tragedy. Rather, a sequence of failures involving a number of different parties led to the explosion and fire which killed [eleven] people and caused widespread pollution in the Gulf of Mexico [on April 20, 2010]” (BP Releases Report, 2010, para. 1).

    • “A report released by BP [on September 8, 2010] concludes that decisions made by “multiple companies and work teams” contributed to the accident which it says arose from “a complex and interlinked series of mechanical failures, human judgments, engineering design, operational implementation and team interfaces” (BP Releases Report, 2010, para 2).

    • CEO Tony Hayward was criticized on how his slow-to-react behavior culminated in one of the greatest environmental disasters in the new millennium. Let’s go back in time and imagine the BP Board of Directors hired you as an Executive.

    Coach to partner with Mr. Hayward to take appropriate actions in a timely manner to resolve the Macondo tragedy effectively. PLEASE conduct some background research to better understand the incident and best serve Mr. Hayward, the Board of Directors, the company, the environment, and the communities affected.

    PLEASE goo to the BP website (www.bp.com) and choose BP Global, then Gulf of Mexico response, and lastly, BP internal investigation.

    1. Click on Read the press release and review.

    2. Click on Watch the video (29 minutes) and take some notes that might help you with your coaching framework.

    3. Click on Download the executive summary (pdf, 3735KB) and review.

    4. Click on Download the full investigation report (pdf, 13959KB) and review.

    5. You can also download the Appendices A through and including AA for reference.

    6. Click on See presentation slides (pdf, 1347KB) and review

    In addition to this summary, please address the following questions that you must consider in order to create a culture of coaching / mentoring:

    1. Who or what is driving what is talked about / discussed in a coaching relationship?

    2. What is the impact of these influences?

    3. What might be possibly be denied / avoided in your coaching scheme? Why?

    4. Who is being empowered / disempowered in your coaching work relative to the BP case study?

    economists use elasticity to measure consumer responsiveness to changes in the vario 504824

    Original Requirements

    Introduction:

    Economists use elasticity to measure consumer responsiveness to changes in the various determinants associated with demand. Elasticity addresses percentage changes i.e. a percentage change in quantity demanded divided by a percentage change in (own price, the price of another good, or income). Understanding elasticity is important to businesses and policy makers alike as they consider how a potential change will impact markets when consumers adjust their purchasing behaviors.

    Task:

    A. Discuss elasticity of demand as it pertains to elastic, unit, and inelastic demand.

    B. Discuss cross price elasticity as it pertains to substitute goods and complementary goods.

    C. Discuss income elasticity as it pertains to inferior goods and to normal goods (sometimes also called superior goods).

    D. Use an example to discuss why demand tends to be relatively elastic in a situation where “Availability of Substitutes” exists.

    E. Discuss the “Proportion of Income Devoted to a Good” concept by contrasting two products typically purchased each month.

    1. Address, in your discussion, specific examples of how the same percentage change in the price of both goods affects the percentage change in the quantity demanded for each of the two goods.

    F. Contrast how a person would initially respond to a relatively large increase in the price of a product in the short run as opposed to how that same person might react to that same price increase over a longer time horizon (i.e., the long run), using the “Consumer’s Time Horizon” concept.

    G. Identify by price range the areas on the demand curve where demand is elastic, inelastic, and unit elastic using the attached “Graphs for Elasticity of Demand, Total Revenue.”

    1. Explain the corresponding impact on total revenue for each of the three price ranges indentified in part G.

    H. When you use sources, include all in-text citations and references in APA format.

    Edits Needed

    C. Income Elasticity

    Comments on this criterion: An adequate discussion of normal and inferior goods is included, but the explanation of income elasticity appears to have been left out in the submission. Please revise.

    E. Share of Income Devoted to a Good

    Comments on this criterion: The work incorrectly explains the share of income devoted to a good using the concept of income elasticity. Please review and revise.

    E1. Same Percentage Change

    Comments on this criterion: Once the discussion under E is revised, please provide 2 product examples (one high-priced and one low-priced item) and explain how the same percentage change in the price of both goods affects the demand for each of the 2 goods.

    the final paper should demonstrate understanding of the reading assignments as well 504825

    The Final Paper should demonstrate understanding of the reading assignments as well as the implications of new knowledge. The eight- to ten-page paper should integrate readings and class discussions into work and life experience. It should include explanation and examples from previous experience as well as implications for future application. The purpose of the Final Paper is for you to culminate the learning achieved in the course by describing your understanding and application of knowledge in organizational development.

    Focus of the Final Paper

    During this course, you have studied the principles of organizational development. You have engaged in discussion and learning about the organizational development process, developing high performance teams and excellence in people, as well as how to develop highly successful organizations.

    Describe specific ways you will apply three of the following course outcomes in order to achieve your personal and professional goals. Explain how particular theory and insights gained from this course will help you succeed. Include explanation and examples from previous experience as well as implications for future application.

    Course Outcomes:

    Develop diagnostic skills to identify OD issues, problems, and opportunities;

    Provide practice in identifying appropriate actions and selection of best alternative OD actions in actual work situations;

    Develop the ability to apply OD knowledge to organizational situations.

    Identify organizational situations that require professional assistance.

    Diagnose the systems issues and select the appropriate intervention.

    Integrate OD frameworks with broader HR frames and competency models.

    Describe and explain the steps involved to effectively manage organizational change in a variety of contexts and settings.

    Guidelines for Writing the Final Paper

    Paper must be eight to ten (8-10) double-spaced pages in length, exclusive of Appendix, References, Exhibits, etc.

    Formatted according to APA style as outlined in the approved APA style guide (including title page and reference list).

    Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.

    Must include an introductory paragraph with a succinct thesis statement.

    Must conclude with a restatement of the thesis and a conclusion paragraph.

    Must use a minimum of six scholarly references.

    discuss the components of the medical record what is the purpose of the medical reco 504827

    1. Discuss the components of the medical record. What is the purpose of the medical record? What future changes or modifications would you like to see to the medical record and why?

    Your State’s Advance Directive Law and Your Plan (Fort Wayne, IN)

    2. This is a two-part discussion. Chapter 6 in your text outlines the Patient Self Determination Act (PDSA) of 1990, types of advance directive forms, and that AD laws and forms required, vary by state. Using the internet, research the advance directive laws and forms required to be used in the state in which you live, identify your state and provide a summary of those laws, and copy and paste in the URL address(s) that support(s) the information in your post.

    3. Discuss serial numbering system, unit numbering system, social security numbering system, family numbering system and serial unit numbering. Which system do you prefer and why?

    4. Using the internet, research the organ donation laws in the state in which you live, identify your state and provide a summary of those laws, and copy and paste in the URL address(s) that support(s) the information in your post.

    encourage discovery and critical thinking about socio economic issues facing norther 504828

    The purpose of this assignment is to twofold:

    (i) Encourage discovery and critical thinking about socio-economic issues facing northern communities; and,

    (ii) Practice the art of writing a briefing note, a critical skill for all those employed by the government.

    The written assignment is due Tuesday, February 4, 2014 at 1:00pm (before class). The briefing note will be submitted to the drop box on nexus. It must be typed, and saved in Microsoft word (doc or docx) or rich text format (rtf).

    Assignment details:

    You work for the Honourable Bernard Valcourt, the Minister of Aboriginal Affairs and Northern Development Canada . You must prepare a briefing note for the Minister addressing one of the following issues:

    • The housing crisis facing many northern reserves;

    • Food insecurity north of 60°;

    • The position that the northwest passage falls within internal waters; or

    • The implications of the Idle No More movement.

    While a typical briefing note is usually 1 or 2 pages, you are permitted to use 3 pages (excluding reference list ), single- spaced, 12 point times new roman font, with a margin of no more than 2.4 centimetres.

    Although briefing notes typically do not include in-text citation, as this is a University, you will be required to cite, as necessary. However, DO NOT USE DIRECT QUOTES IN THIS MATERIAL. PLEASE SUMMARIZE IDEAS IN YOUR OWN WORDS!

    Structure:

    • Begin your briefing note a section entitled Issues. This should be 1 -2 sentences in length. This section should clearly state the topic covered by the briefing note, and in doing so, inform the minister as to why this topic is of critical importance.

    • The second section, key messages, should be 1 – 4 bullets in length. The key message outlines the position you wish the Minister to take. Be as specific as you can.

    • The third section is addresses Background. This section can be broken down, as needed, but should outline the issue in greater detail, and lead the Minister to the conclusion you have laid out in issue and key messages.

    • You may wish to include a section entitled, Recommendations. This section would discuss measures the government should take, if it implements the position advocated in the briefing note. This section is optional.

    • Finish with a section entitled, For Further Information (which for this purpose, will serve as your references cited list; as such, it should follow APA 6th edition format.

    Please submit your assignment electronically on nexus. Your files should be in microsoft word or rich text format.

    Helpful hints:

    • When collecting data, make sure you use the consult a variety of sources, both peer reviewed (where available), government websites, and media. Make sure you go beyond the material provided in the text! Start by reviewing the information available at Aboriginal Affairs and Northern Development. PLEASE DO NOT USE WIKIPEDIA AS A SOURCE OF INFORMATION.

    Below, I list some places you may wish to start for each topic. Please note that more recent topics will have fewer scholarly sources. This will make your data collection more challenging.

    • The housing crisis facing many northern reserves;

    • Assembly of First Nations (housing)

    • Scholarly journals, including the Canadian Journal of Urban Research

    • Media, most recently surrounding Attawapiskat

    • Food insecurity north of 60°

    • Nutrition North

    • Scholarly articles discussing “food mail” and “northern food security”

    • Media coverage critiquing changes

    • The position that the northwest passage falls within internal waters;

    • Many, many recent scholarly articles and books discussing this topic (see Michael Byers, Ken Coates, etc.)

    • CBC has an excellent synopsis

    • The implications of the Idle No More movement.

    • Canadian Centre for Policy Alternatives (www.policyalternatives.ca)

    • CBC also has a synopsis on this topic

    • Media

    • Writing a briefing note is a rather challenging task because you have very little space to explore some key messages. Make sure to give yourself extra time to edit your assignment so that you stay within the page requirements.

    The assignment will be graded based on clarity, the ability to focus on key issues, demonstration of issues explored in class, and mechanics, among others.

    consider what you ve read and learned about the 4 building blocks and how they build 504829

    Consider what you’ve read and learned about the 4-Building Blocks and how they build and support an organizations competitive advantage.

    Now consider Home Depot (HD) through the lens the 4-Building Blocks of Competitive Advantage. Assess HD from this perspective and discuss which of the four building blocks you feel HD possesses. Do you feel that one or more of the blocks are predominant over the others? If you are a regular shopper at HD have you noticed any change in any of the 4-building block areas during the current recession? Support your views from your readings.

    Submit your 1-page assessment by Midnight Monday.

    Note: Before submitting this assignment save it on your computer by adding your last name after the underscore! (E.g., “Module III Assignment_Jones”). Then submit it via the assignment feature.

    which of eppele s seven principles is violated in each of the following independent 504831

    Which of Eppele’s seven principles is violated in each of the following independent cases? Justify your responses. (Each case may violate more than one principle.)

    a. Amanda objected to her company’s new approach to training because they had never used it before.

    b. Esther started a BPM project by looking for appropriate information technology tools.

    c. Eugene, an entry-level employee, implemented a new system for taking inventory.

    d. Jeff decided to change his company’s purchasing process because the current process seemed too cumbersome.

    e. Minh told the consultants for a BPM project to prepare and submit reports as they felt appropriate.

    f. Molly told employees that all their concerns would be addressed at the end of the BPM project.

    g. Raul argued strongly that a proposed BPM project be managed by a consulting firm.

    while information systems has one meaning it can be used in different ways for compa 504832

    While information systems has one meaning, it can be used in different ways for companies to keep a competitive edge on the marketplace. Compare and Contrast two distinctly different organizations on how they use information systems in their organizations.

    Include in your post the following:

    Research the 4 competitive strategies and briefly describe them.

    From the 4 strategies, pick 2 and provide an example of a company that uses each strategy.

    How do they implement the strategy?

    Provide examples of how the companies use the strategy, and do not simply write the description.

    Appraise the individual and organizational consequences of the use of information technology and recognize potential security breaches and computer crimes.

    for this assignment you will apply the course material by answering the following qu 504833

    For this Assignment, you will apply the course material by answering the following questions in a 2-4 page, double-spaced paper. In completing this Assignment, be sure to use specific examples and references from the text. You will need a cover page, which includes your name, the name of the class and section, and the date.

    Psychological disorders and their treatment are a fascinating area to study. Imagine you are now a psychology professional, working with two separate clients, each experiencing one of the disorders which you read about this past week. (Be sure to use a different fictitious client than the one you discussed in the Unit 9 Discussion.)

    Describe how you will identify the specific disorder through actual symptoms which the clients present, using the DSM-IV TR.

    Recommend two different types of treatment options for each client based on the main four approaches we discussed this term (Psychodynamic, Humanistic, Cognitive, and Behavioral).

    What specific techniques might you try using to help this client based on these schools of thought?

    What are the ethical obligations of psychology professionals when it comes to selecting the best treatment?

    Be sure to use specific information from the text to support your answers when defining the different terms and concepts. When referencing the text, you need to use APA formatting. Information regarding APA formatting can be found in the Writing Center and should be reviewed thoroughly. APA formatting dictates how your paper should appear on each page.

    In addition, your paper should follow the conventions of Standard American English (correct grammar, punctuation, etc.). Your writing should be well ordered, logical, and unified, as well as original and insightful. Your work should display quality content, organization, style, and mechanics.

    Formatting Information

    Your paper should include:

    Cover page

    Main body of the paper (2-4 pages)

    Reference page

    Correct APA formatting for in-paper citations

    You should follow these formatting guidelines for your paper:

    Use standard margins: 1″ on all sides.

    Use standard 12-point font size.

    Use standard double-spacing

    Be sure the text is left-justified.

    Your paper must be your original work; plagiarism will not be tolerated. Be sure to review the syllabus in terms of what constitutes plagiarism.

    during the past two decades we have seen companies who had seemingly solid contracts 504834

    During the past two decades, we have seen companies who had seemingly solid contracts to conduct businesses in a country have had their contract obligations seemingly reworked in order to give more favorable terms to the host country. Russia and Chevron had a joint pipe line venture in which Russia reworked the contract. Kuwait pulled out of a financing deal with Dow Chemical to purchase a specialty chemical company. Venezuela attempted to nationalize the oil industry which includes US companies. Currently, there are other South American countries who are looking at what Venezuela has done in the past and considering the “taking” of American properties for their own use and profit (with no purchase of said properties). What is this saying about the climate of concern for American businesses in terms of whether they should continue global business relationships in certain countries or should they rethink their global strategy?

    1. In this week’s assignment, the student should identify and discuss ways companies need to structure deals to minimize these types of surprises.

    2. Is there anything that a management team can do to minimize these risks?

    3. Are there certain laws and/or regulations that these companies need to consider for current and potential business in overseas locations?

    4. Please consider how contracts are important to the daily operation and survival of overseas business operations.

    5. Students should use reference material from course readings and outside sources when needed to strengthen your argument.

    6. Complete your answers in a Word document with APA formatting and submit Assignment 2 by midnight, Day 7.

    when searching for a supplier which of the following provides the broadest reach of 504804

    1) When searching for a supplier, which of the following provides the broadest reach of possible suppliers in today’s competitive market environment?

    2.) Which term describes the diverse needs of many ethnic market segments?

    3.) Which of the following is known in marketing as attributes of a product or service that may not be unique to the product or service?

    4.) What other dimension helps market segments be measurable, substantial, accessible, and differentiable?

    5.) When purchasing, in which state does the consumer set a minimum acceptable cutoff level for each attribute and then makes a buying decision?

    6.) Which of the following is a tool a company uses to position its brands attributes in the minds of those in the organization?

    7.) What is the second stage of the consumer buying process?

    8.) Which group is experiencing the fastest population growth today?

    9.) Which market is known as the invisible market segment?

    10.)In behavioral segmentation, a product or service is grouped by which other dimension besides knowledge of, attitude toward, and use of?

    for this coursework you will implement in matlab a multilayer neural network for pre 504807

    For this coursework you will implement in MATLAB a Multilayer Neural Network for predicting the quality of red wines based on physicochemical tests. The quality is a value between 1 and 10; therefore you will treat this as a regression problem – i.e. trying to predict a value between 1 and 10 that is as near as possible to the correct value. You are given a dataset (winequality-red.train.txt and winequality-red.test.txt) consisting of 1000 training and 599 test examples and your aim is to train a network that predicts as closely as possible the values of the test examples. To do this you should try many different settings: different number of hidden units, size of validation examples, normalization type, initial weights, and optionally activation and/or training functions.

    Deliverables:

    Your code in electronic form – a zip file containing all files.

    A report describing your experiments and your findings (including all the different settings you tried, their results and any conclusions you can make based on your experiments).

    review the key federal legislation particularly the following 504808

    Review the key federal legislation, particularly the following:

    Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964

    The Civil Rights Act of 1991

    The Equal Employment Opportunity Act of 1972

    Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967

    Americans with Disabilities Act

    The Immigration Reform & Control Act of 1986

    Fair Labor Standards Act

    Create a PowerPoint presentation for a meeting to review these laws. In your PowerPoint presentation, explain to the key managers how these laws impact the recruitment and selection process. Be aware of any other state laws that may have additional requirements.

    In your discussion, explain how the laws intertwine. In addition, explain the repercussions for noncompliance.

    Explain how the number of employees in the company affects the company’s status if the company is not in compliance.

    Use the library, Internet, and other resources to research your response.

    For more information on creating PowerPoint presentations, please visit the PowerPoint Lab.

    Please refer to the following multimedia course material(s):

    Unit 1

    Human Resource Management

    Recruitment and Selection Tool

    Planning

    Equal Employment and The Law

    The Role of Human Resources

    The Value of Compensation and Benefits

    there are many different types of stress and various impacts that stressful situatio 504811

    There are many different types of stress and various impacts that stressful situations can have on all areas of our health. Review these possible stress-provoking situations.

    Sally is a hardworking young professional who was applauded for her work performance and given more responsibility. After a few months there is a rapid decline in her productivity and she is seen withdrawing from work. Sally’s new manager constantly criticizes her for her lack of productivity, which makes her performance worse, and causes her more worry.

    Nancy is ready to leave the house for work and spills coffee on her clean work clothes. Then, she finds that her car will not start. When she tries to call for help, she realizes her cell phone is disconnected because she did not pay the bill. She starts to cry.

    Bob found out that one of his best friends just died. The funeral will be held next week.

    Tom is called at work and told that he needs to pick up his teenage son from school. This is the second time this year that his son has been sent home for fighting. Tom’s boss is not happy that he requests to leave work early.

    Tracy, a single mother, finds she doesn’t have enough money left to buy food for her children before her next paycheck in two weeks. This is the third time this year she has struggled to put food on the table.

    Choose one situation to evaluate and answer the following questions:

    Does this represent chronic or acute stress?

    What type of response might the body and brain be experiencing to manage the stressor?

    What would be the goal for coping with this stress? (eliminate, reduce, tolerate)

    What type of coping strategy should be implemented—emotion-focused coping or problem-directed coping? How would the individual employ this approach? In other words, using this type of coping strategy, what could he or she do to cope with the stressor? Give 2 examples.

    Write 2 “coping self-statements” the individual might make in response to this stressor. You will find some examples of coping self-statements in your textbook.

    What are some of the potential long-term impacts on this individual’s health if he or she does not find a way to cope with this stress or?

    as the representative from your accounting firm or practice you are in charge of sto 504812

    As the representative from your accounting firm or practice, you are in charge of stock market analysis that will be presented to clients as part of professional consultation process. One of your high-profile clients is trying to determine the possible investment potential between two companies. However, before you can recommend investments to clients, you need to familiarize yourself with the background of the companies, analyze stock trends, research current events, and analyze financial statements. Select one (1) pair of these companies and conduct your analysis.

    Pepsi versus Coca Cola, or•

    Amazon versus eBay•

    Write an eight to ten (8-10) page paper in which you:

    1. Analyze each company’s history, product / services, major customers, major suppliers, and leadership and provide a synopsis of each company.

    2. Based on the stock price for the timeline listed below, present a graph that illustrates the stock price of each company. Indicate conclusions that can be drawn based on the trend:

    a. The day of its initial public offering

    b. January 1, 2012

    c. January 1, 2011

    d. January 1, 2010

    3. Research and summarize at least two (2) news events (this may include mergers, acquisitions, or political issues) that occurred from 2010 to the present day and the potential impact on the stock price of each company. Indicate how this influences your investment decision related to the company.

    4. Provide an overall financial analysis for each company that highlights the key characteristics for investment and how this may impact an investor’s decision.

    5. Based on your review of the financial data for each company, indicate the accuracy and reliability of the data for making investment decision. Provide support for your conclusion.

    6. Recommend which company you consider as the better investment for your client and how you will present your recommendation. Support your recommendation with data from your analysis.

    7. Use at least four (4) quality academic resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.

    Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:

    · Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.

    • Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student’s name, the professor’s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length.

    • The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:

    · Analyze the accounting for corporation requirements related to stock valuation, dividends, and retained earnings.

    · Determine how to value investments and how to report them based on that valuation.

    · Use technology and information resources to research issues in financial accounting.

    · Write clearly and concisely about financial accounting using proper writing mechanics.

    quantitative research design create a plan for a quantitative research design based 504813

    Quantitative Research Design: Create a plan for a quantitative research design based on your topic. Your plan will include the following:

    • Research problem

    · Purpose of research

    • Significance of research
    • Quantitative Research questions and hypotheses
    • Research design and rationale for its selection
    • Research methodology and rationale for its selection

    · Be sure to include basic data collection considerations including sampling, population description, data collection a procedures and feasibility of data collection

    • Instrument description and validation
    • Statistical analysis methods

    This assignment averages 1,000 to 1,200 words for most, please keep it short and simple. You’re not here to summarize the theory or give definitions. Please apply the concepts directly to your topic of interest

    from the scenario examine the key factors affecting the demand for and the supply of 504764

    * From the scenario, examine the key factors affecting the demand for and the supply of a good or service. Distinguish between changes in demand and changes in the quantity demand. Indicate the factors that could lead to changes in demand / supply and changes in the quantity demanded / supplied. Determine the sets of factors that could lead to an increase in supply or demand on the one hand and a decrease in supply or demand on the other.

    From the e-Activity, examine the key factors that influence the supply and demand of the selected good or service. Propose two (2) methods in which organizations that provide the selected good or service may utilize this information. Provide a rationale for your response.

    “Estimating Demand” Please respond to the following:

    * From the scenario, examine the procedure Herb will use to estimate the demand model developed in the scenario for Week 1. Determine the meaning, relevance, and importance of a manager interpreting the regression results.

    From the e-Activity, analyze the elasticity of demand for products within the selected industry. Determine the factors involved in making decisions about pricing these products that you believe to be the most influential. Provide a rationale for your response.

    “Managing in the Global Economy” Please respond to the following:

    * From the scenario, assuming the absence of quantitative data, determine the qualitative techniques that could be used within this scenario. Now, assume you have acquired some time series data that would enable you to make short, medium, and long term forecasts. Ascertain the quantitative technique that will provide you with the most accurate forecast. Provide a rationale for your responses.

    Aside from maximizing profits, develop guidelines that list the key factors that managers should consider when deciding whether or not to outsource or integrate forwards or backwards. Determine the key factors that you believe to be the most influential. Provide a rationale for your response

    reat britain put into several acts and rules that upset the american colonists durin 504766

    reat Britain put into several acts and rules that upset the American colonists during our early years. The Stamp…

    Pin It

    31.) Great Britain put into several acts and rules that upset the American colonists during our early years. The Stamp Act especially angered many colonists. Why did they not like the Stamp Act and protest it? What actions did they take during their protest of it? How did the Loyalists group respond to the Stamp Act and the rebellious colonist actions? Provide details & historical examples to support your answer.

    32.) The following table will be given for this response that will be used to help formulate your answer. Take time now to examine the chart and become familiar with what is being shared. Make sure to look closely at all of the labeling that is given on the chart to explain what information is being given. Support your answer with specific facts that you were able to learn from the chart.

    33.) The 1800s was an exciting time when people began to travel West across the continent in search of new lands, resources, and adventure. Aside from farmers, what other groups of people travelled West during this time period and WHY?

    YOU WANT A PROFESSIONAL WRITER TO WORK ON THIS PAPER? CLICK HERE TO MAKE AN ORDER …..

    34.) After the Civil War, Abraham Lincoln had strong opinions on how Southerners should be treated and what should happen in the South. Many Northerners did not agree with his ideas. What were Lincolns ideas and how did they differ from many Northerners?

    35.) Think about the Reconstruction. Historians often times do not agree on whether the Reconstruction was a success or a failure. Arguably there were positive and negative effects. What do you feel were 2 successful results of the Reconstruction? Also, what do you feel were 2 failures of the Reconstruction?

    36.) What is Social Darwinism? How does it apply to how some Americans viewed wealth and prosperity in the country?

    37.) The Transcontinental Railroad was a massive building project for our country. Why did the Federal government support the construction of the Transcontinental Railroad? What effects did this railroad have on people living in the area while it was being built AND after it was finished?

    38.) What was the goal of U.S. foreign policy with China? Why do you think Hay did not favor establishing colonies in China?

    39.) World War I impacted the world in many ways. Thinking about the United States specifically, how did WWI affect our country in the following three ways: politically, economically, and socially? Make sure to address all three ways.

    40.) Think back to the 1920s in the United States. This was a time of excitement, but also tough times for many Americans. What was life like specifically for people living in rural and urban areas of the country? How were the lifestyles and experiences of people living in these areas culturally different? How did these differences cause these two groups to argue and clash at times?

    The late 1800s was an important time period in our country. Immigrants were flowing in from all parts of the world. What did these immigrants experience when they first arrived? What were their lives like at home, in their neighborhoods, and at work? How did these immigrants help the nation’s growth during this period?

    because of limited resources in an era of plentiful opportunities companies must car 504767

    Assignment 2: Executive Summary Presentation

    Because of limited resources in an era of plentiful opportunities, companies must carefully select investments. To ensure the process will yield desired results, firms have a number of review cycles. M6: Assignment 2provided the first evaluative format. You analyzed Genesis’ expansion plans and explained your findings. In M7: Assignment 1, you had the opportunity to comment and critique your peers’ evaluation. This will ensure all known information is incorporated into your summary for this assignment.

    Based on your findings, you create a PowerPoint presentation that will include the following information:

    An executive summary of your findings from M6: Assignment 2. Be sure to adhere to the following:

    The presentation should be approximately 6–8 minutes (or 10–12 slides).

    A statement of the problem or topic of M6: Assignment 2 is included.

    A concise analysis of the findings is included.

    A recapitulation of any main conclusions or recommendations found in M6: Assignment 2 is presented.

    Specific details from M7: Assignment 1 to highlight or support the summary are incorporated.

    week 5 dq s need to be answered with 200 word count on each question zero plagarism 504768

    Week 5 DQ’s need to be answered with 200 word count on each question ZERO PLAGARISM.

    1. Week 5 DQ 1 – Innovation and Market Structure According to Colander in Chapter 17 of the text book from this week’s readings, perfectly competitive markets are not the most likely type of market to innovate. Please discuss what Colander states in the text regarding market structure and innovation. Why does Colander think that the oligopoly market structure is the most innovative, other than the available resources as you mention in your post?

    Discuss how monopoly market structure is related to the concepts of the lazy monopolist and x-inefficiency. What are some real world examples of innovative firms and what is their market type?

    2. Week 5 DQ 2 – U.S. Union Membership Increased competition in U.S. markets is also one of the reasons why union participation remains low in the U.S. labor force. Union membership in the U.S. has declined steadily over the last several decades, reducing the amount of bargaining power that many workers have with employers. For example, outsourcing to low wage countries overseas has accelerated this trend as manufacturers move to these countries in an attempt to avoid U.S. union policies in their industry.

    What is the current percentage of the U.S. labor force which is unionized? How much has this percentage declined from a previous period such as the 1970s? How does current U.S. union membership compare to other developed countries such as France, Sweden, Canada, etc?

    3. Week 4 DQ 1 – Government Failure If the government intervenes in an attempt to solve a negative externality it can worsen the problem as you state in your post, which could be called government failure instead of market failure. Even though market failure exists and markets may often have imperfect information, government may not be able to solve all market failure problems.

    In Chapter 21, Colander lists five possible reasons for government failure. Please list the five reasons cited by Colander. Of the five reasons listed by Colander in the textbook, which do you think most often applies to government failure? Please explain your answer

    watch a news program of your choice write down the verbal and nonverbal cues you not 504769

    Watch a news program of your choice. Write down the verbal and nonverbal cues you notice in the cast. Using your listening skills that you learned in this unit, write down the important points covered and the major themes (not the actual details that are covered). Also, try muting the sound on your television, and note any differences in what you notice and are able to understand. Address the following.

    1. How do thenewscasters’ verbal and nonverbal cues affect their communication with the audience (you)?

    2. What did you learn about your listening skills?

    3. How well were you able to identify important points and major themes?

    4. How does public presentation of the news (a newscast) compare to news in written form (newspaper, new Web site).

    5. How will you use your new awareness of verbal and nonverbal communication in business situations?

    Please answer all questions in Microsoft Word Format. This calls for 3 – 4 paragraphs. REFERENCES are essential.

    for your assignment this week construct a paper that provides an in depth analysis o 504770

    For your assignment this week, construct a paper that provides an in-depth analysis of the three parts of persuasion. Address the following points in your paper:

    1. Who – Describe the Characteristics of the Persuader: What influences our ability to become persuaded by someone? What specific characteristics must this person possess? Be sure to address the impact of credibility, physical attractiveness, and likeability in your response. Why do we respond well to those who possess such characteristics? Would we respond the same to an unattractive, angry, or non-credible person? Why not?

    2. What – Discuss the Characteristics of the Message: What attributes are inherent in persuasive messages? How are we influenced by the emotion, framing, narratives, and rational appeals in the messaging we receive? What is the significance of the sleeper effect?

    3. To Whom – Examine the Characteristics of the Audience: Why do different audiences perceive messages in different ways? What is the role of culture, gender, and self-esteem in this process? How does the elaboration likelihood model help to explain the relationship between the persuader, the message, and the audience?

    4. Review the excerpt from p. 97 of your textbook, Social Psychology in Depth: Word of Mouth and Persuasion. How does the e-word of mouth phenomena illustrate the concepts above? Please be specific in your response.

    Include an introduction, thesis statement, and conclusion. Your completed assignment must be three to four pages in length (excluding title and reference pages), and must follow APA guidelines as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. Include a minimum of three APA references.

    you have recently been appointed as the training manager for the southeastern divisi 504777

    You have recently been appointed as the training manager for the southeastern division of a major supermarket chain in the U.S. Your territory includes fifteen retail stores and your responsibility involves working directly with store managers and other stakeholders to develop training solutions to meet the specific needs of the employees in the various stores. This includes, but is not limited to, performing needs assessments, determining appropriate instructional design and training delivery methods, and implementing and evaluating training initiatives.

    Three of the stores in your territory have missed their sales goals for the last two quarters. All three stores have received low customer-satisfaction scores and are experiencing increased employee turnover rates. The high employee turnover has resulted in the store managers hiring many new and relatively inexperienced sales associates, which further contributes to the problem.

    The senior management team of this major supermarket chain believes that training and development may help alleviate these problems. You have been asked to assess the training needs and develop a proposal to address the situation in the three stores.

    Tasks:

    Using scholarly resources and what you have learned, write a 5 page training proposal including the following:

    Using simple heuristics, identify the indicators and problems experienced by the three stores that can be resolved through training.

    As a part of you training proposal, design a training proposal and identify three specific training initiatives that you would recommend for these employees. Make sure to include in your proposal the expected outcomes for the three training initiatives.

    the scientific method is used by scientists to understand the natural laws that the 504778

    1) The scientific method is used by scientists to understand the natural laws that the universe obeys. Scientists are not necessarily the only people who might use the scientific method. What professions, other than scientists, might use the scientific method? Explain your reasoning and use your understanding of what the scientific method is to support your answer.

    2) In exploring Newton’s laws, it is important to keep in mind all the forces that are at work in a given system and what their net effect is on a body. Suppose you simultaneously drop a hammer and a feather from the same height on the surface of the earth. Which will reach the ground first? Suppose you then do the same experiment on the surface of the moon. Does anything change? If so, what? Explain all your answers using what you have learned about Newton’s laws of motion. (There are some great video clips of this actual experiment online.)

    3) Imagine that you want to shoot an apple hanging from a branch with an arrow. You aim the arrow at the apple and at the exact time you shoot the arrow, the apple falls from the branch. Will the arrow hit the apple? It should still hit the apple if the air resistance (wind) is negligible that day. Why will the projectile always hit the falling object it is aimed at if it is fired at the same time the object starts to fall? Think about this problem in terms of projectile motion.

    It should be an explanatory answer. Each answer should be/have a minimum of 150 words and it is due tomorrow at 10pm. (UTC-05:00) Eastern Time (US & Canada)

    the final paper should demonstrate an understanding of the materials texts assignmen 504781

    The Final Paper should demonstrate an understanding of the materials (texts, assignments, and discussions) covered in this course.

    Assume the role of Marketing Manager. Select a product (good or service) that is sold in the United States and has sales opportunities in a foreign market. Apply your critical thinking skills and the knowledge you have acquired throughout this course and address the following in your Final Paper:

    Describe the product you selected in terms of the four utilities of customer value.

    Identify the product’s target market at home and in your stated foreign market.

    Indicate the competition of the product category in both home and foreign markets.

    Explain how you would apply the segmentation, targeting, and positioning (STP) approach to market the product in the foreign market.

    Discuss the major environmental facts and trends in the foreign markets that might affect sales of the product.

    Explain how you would develop, execute. and measure a campaign for this product considering the four p’s (product, price, promotion, and place).

    Discuss the U.S. and international ethical marketing considerations.

    scenario the board of directors for riordan manufacturing has asked your team to cre 504782

    Scenario: The board of directors for Riordan Manufacturing has asked your team to create a strategic plan for the organization.

    Create a 2,500- to 3,500-word strategic plan for Riordan Manufacturing starting from what you learned in Week One and using a similar strategic management process as Concepts in Strategic Management and Business Policy. You may also use information from the team project you completed for Riordan Manufacturing in Week Four to create the strategic plan.

    Cover thoroughly the areas of environmental scanning, strategy formulation, strategy implementation, and evaluation and control.

    Address the following questions in your strategic plan:

    • Why does Riordan need a strategic plan?

    · What role should ethical and social responsibility considerations have in Riordan’s strategic management plan

    · What competitive advantages does Riordan have, and which competitive strategies should Riordan utilize to improve innovation and sustainability in both domestic and international applications?

    · What measurement guidelines should be used to verify strategy effectiveness?

    · What internal dynamics along with cultural and structural leadership considerations should be used in implementing business strategy for Riordan?

    · How do they influence business continuity?

    · What assessment and feedback controls should be used to determine the direction to take Riordan? If the strategy of Riordan does not go according to plan, at what point would you consider altering the strategic plan you have suggested?

    Explain and justify all of the decisions you have made for your strategic plan, using research and understanding learned from the reading material.

    Format your paper consistent with APA guidelines.

    Present a completed strategic plan to the board of directors for Riordan Manufacturing.

    Outline your strategic plan for Riordan Virtual Organization in a 20- to 30-slide presentation using Microsoft® PowerPoint®.

    Describe why Riordan needs a plan, and walk the audience through every step in the strategic management process.

    Include ethical considerations, environmental scanning for competitive advantages, innovation and sustainability considerations, measurement guidelines, internal dynamic and resource considerations for strategy implementation, and what feedback considerations Riordan should put into place to ensure the success of the company.

    below are 10 common ethical lenses through which people see the world their world 504783

    Below are 10 common ethical lenses through which people see the world – their world.

    No vantage point is better than another.

    First, choose a lens that best suits your world view from the list below.

    In the space below, write a 200 word essay as to why it has served you well.

    Also, explain how you manage when you are confronted with someone with a different world view.

    Also, explain some of the techniques that you can use to be more open to new ethical lenses.

    Finally, what would happen in our world, if we all shared the same ethical lens?

    Do what the Bible tells me. – Divine Command Theory

    Follow my conscience. – Ethic of Conscience

    Self survival. – Ethical Egoism

    Do the RIGHT thing. – Ethic of Duty

    Don’t disrespect me. – Ethic of Respect

    All people are created equal and have the same rights. – Ethics of Rights

    I have to make the world a better place. – Utilitarianism

    That’s just not fair. – Ethic of Justice

    Also be a good person. – Ethic of Virtue

    It’s not about me; it’s about those in need. – Ethic of Care

    oppel as cited in torres 2009 argues that global business in the future will require 504785

    Oppel (as cited in Torres, 2009) argues that global business in the future will require leaders, and managers, to be like explorers, guiding their organizations through unfamiliar and turbulent environments. With markets, suppliers, competitors, technology and customers around the world constantly shifting, traditional leadership models no longer work. In their book titled, Global Explorers, Hal B. Gregerson, Allen J. Morrison & J. Stewart Black (as cited in Torres, 2009) argue that global leaders, and managers, will need to be proficient with languages and have knowledge of multiple cultures and experiences in other countries. “They must also have multidisciplinary perspectives, which are essential for problem solving in complex and changing environments. They must transcend the old ways of transactional relationships and seek more enduring, sustainable and transformational relationships. Leaders must empower their employees and seek to facilitate the employee’s development interests” (Oppel, as cited in Torres, 2009).

    As the world becomes more economically global, leaders, and managers, must be more culturally diverse-oriented in avoiding ethnocentrism and self-reference criteria approaches and in understanding cross-cultural behaviors and motivations in mobilizing the support of all employees, regardless of geographical and cultural differences. This is a basic requirement for developing effective global organizations.

    To this end, Strategy is probably the most basic and the most advanced discipline in management. The basic purpose of strategy is to make a series of moves designed to achieve sustained competitive advantage, which consists of superior performance in comparison to competitors over extended periods of time. Therefore, the fundamental principles of international business strategy should be regularly reconsidered by managers at the highest levels and understood by individuals just starting their business careers.

    Required Reading:

    Please refer to each Activity for required readings within Activity Resources.

    Assignment 5 International Strategic Alliances Griffin and Pustay (2010) argue that cooperation between MNCs can take on many different forms, such as cross-licensing of proprietary products, sharing of manufacturing facilities, co-funding of research projects, and marketing of each other’s products using existing distribution networks. These forms of cooperation are collectively called strategic alliances, or business arrangements.

    Activity Resources:

    Review of Dess, G. G., Lumpkin, G.T., & Eisner, A. B. (2010). Chapter 7

    Review of Griffin, R. W., & Pustay, M. W. (2010). Chapter 13

    Liu, W. (2009)

    Luo, Y. (2008)

    Ulset, S. (2008)

    Main Task Part 1: Describe Key Points of International Strategic Alliances

    The goal of this discussion is for you to summarize your thoughts on international strategic alliances, review ones that are successful and alliances that were or are not successful. Being able to successfully describe effects alliances will be beneficially in understanding what can be done to avoid the situation in the future. This discussion will be open-ended to afford you the opportunity to interact with your course instructor and possibly other students.

    Length: Content post 150-200 words; response post 75-100 words.

    Both your content post and your response post should reflect a collegial attitude, be free of grammar and spelling errors, and include criteria mentioned above.

    Post the response for Part 1 into the Activity Discussion Forum area below the Activity screen.

    Main Task Part 2: Analyze and Evaluate the Impact and Effectiveness of utilizing international Strategic Alliances in Global Business

    For this assignment, please respond to the following discussion questions: What are the basic differences between a joint venture and other types of strategic alliances? Could a firm conceivably take too many strategic alliances at one time? Why or why not? And what are the three basic ways of managing a strategic alliance?

    Support your paper with a minimum of five (5) external resources In addition to these specified resources, other appropriate scholarly resources, including older articles, may be included.

    Length: 5-7 pages not including title and reference pages

    Your paper should demonstrate thoughtful consideration of the ideas and concepts presented in the course and provide new thoughts and insights relating directly to this topic. Your response should reflect scholarly writing and current APA standards. Be sure to adhere to University’s Academic Integrity Policy.

    the case scenario provided will be used to answer the discussion questions that foll 504786

    The case scenario provided will be used to answer the discussion questions that follow.

    Case Scenario

    Ms. G., a 23-year-old diabetic, is admitted to the hospital with a cellulitis of her left lower leg. She has been applying heating pads to the leg for the last 48 hours, but the leg has become more painful and she has developed chilling.

    Subjective Data

    • Complains of pain and heaviness in her leg.

    • States she cannot bear weight on her leg and has been in bed for 3 days.

    • Lives alone and has not had anyone to help her with meals.

    Objective Data

    • Round, yellow-red, 2 cm diameter, 1 cm deep, open wound above medial malleolus with moderate amount of thick yellow drainage

    • Left leg red from knee to ankle

    • Calf measurement on left 3 in > than right

    • Temperature: 38.9 degrees C

    • Height: 160 cm; Weight: 83.7 kg

    Laboratory Results

    • WBC 18.3 x 10¹² / L; 80% neutrophils, 12% bands

    • Wound culture: Staphylococcus aureus

    Critical Thinking Questions

    1. What clinical manifestations are present in Ms. G and what recommendations would you make for continued treatment? Provide rationale for your recommendations.

    2. Identify the muscle groups likely to be affected by Ms. G’s condition by referring to “ARC: Anatomy Resource Center.”

    3. What is the significance of the subjective and objective data provided with regard to follow-up diagnostic/laboratory testing, education, and future preventative care? Provide rationale for your answer.

    4. What factors are present in this situation that could delay wound healing, and what precautions are required to prevent delayed wound healing? Explain.

    we are bombarded by statistical information from a wide variety of sources much of t 504791

    Assignment 1: Should You Believe a Statistical Study?

    We are bombarded by statistical information from a wide variety of sources. Much of the statistical research performed in the world is conducted with a great deal of integrity, validity, and reliability. However, there are many statistical studies that are conducted that are—whether intentionally or unintentionally—plagued by bias.

    As a member of society, and as a consumer, it is prudent to develop the skills necessary to critically examine reported statistical claims. Determining whether the report contains bias is a great way to determine the reliability of study results and make a better informed decision.

    In this assignment, you will apply the guidelines found in the textbook Unit 5B “Should You Believe a Statistical Study?” in order to critically analyze the content, design, and reported results of a statistical study.

    Conduct an Internet search to find a study whose statistical results have been published in the news or any other public forum. Applying the following guidelines, critically analyze the study’s reported content and results.

    1.

    Identify the goal, population, and type of study.

    2.

    Who conducted the study? Is there bias here?

    3.

    Is there bias in the sample used in the study?

    4.

    Are there any problems in defining or measuring the variables of interest in the study?

    5.

    Are there any confounding variables present in the study?

    6.

    Are the results presented fairly?

    7.

    Is the study’s conclusion reasonable? Does it make sense?

    8.

    Do the results make practical significance?

    Write your initial response in a minimum of 200 words. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.

    By Saturday, January 11, 2014, post your response to the appropriate Discussion Area. Through Wednesday, January 15, 2014, review the postings of your peers and respond to at least two of them. Consider commenting on the following:

    Do you agree with the student’s identification of bias in the study? Are there other sources of bias to consider?

    Based upon the student’s analysis, and your review, would you accept the conclusion of this study?

    complete two competitor profiles for a healthcare organization the healthcare organi 504793

    Complete two competitor profiles for a healthcare organization. The healthcare organization could be your current (or former) employer or the organization in your marketing plan. Write a three- to four-page (excluding title and reference pages) competitor profiling paper in APA format. In your paper, incorporate a minimum of three scholarly sources (in addition to the course text) that were published within the past five years and that are cited according to APA guidelines. Apart from the description of a healthcare organization, the Competitor Profiling should include the following elements for TWO competitors:

    Overview (Name of competitor and size/volume)

    Nature of organization/operation

    Competitive strength

    Competitive weakness

    Likely key competitive moves

    Likely key long-range strategy

    Market share data

    earlier in 2012 microsoft corporation and suse an independent business unit of the a 504794

    Earlier in 2012, Microsoft Corporation and SUSE, an independent business unit of The Attachmate Group, Inc., announced a 4-year extension of their groundbreaking agreement reached nearly 5 years ago for broad collaboration on Windows and Linux interoperability and support (“Computer software; Microsoft and SUSE renew successful interoperability agreement,” 2011). This collaboration has been successful not only because the partners agree on shared risks, resources, rewards, and vision, but because it promotes interoperability and sets the stage for other business partnerships.

    In the Required Resources, Jerry R. Mitchell, President/Founder of The Midwest Entrepreneurs Forum, argues that effective business partnerships are a function of four factors: (1) Shared Risk, (2) Shared Resources, (3) Shared Rewards, and (4) Shared Vision (Mitchell, 2004). He points out that building strong relationships with other organizations is often the best way to strengthen their own. Organizations can shore up weaknesses by accessing the strengths of others.

    Imagine a scenario in which only two of the four factors are in place, but the C-suite (the highest level executives of your company) is determined to forge ahead. As an HR executive in this situation, how would you counsel the CEO, who believes that only having two of the four factors is sufficient? Assuming the CEO is correct, which two factors do you see as absolutely essential to a successful partnership? Explain your reasoning.

    To complete this Assignment, respond to the following in a 3- to 4-page paper:

    •Analyze Mitchell’s four factors of effective business partnerships.

    ?Analyze a successful business partnership, indicating which of the four factors were present.

    ?Analyze a failed business partnership, indicating which of the four factors were absent.

    ?Is it possible for a business partnership to succeed when none of the four factors are present? Under what circumstances?

    •Examine HR’s responsibilities in a proposed business partnership where only two of the four factors are present.

    ?How should HR advise the CEO in this situation?

    ?From an HR perspective, which two factors do you consider to be most important, and why?

    the questionnaire gathered from the student population were 10 male and 10 female ba 504796

    Questionnaire report assignment (2000 words) and list of (10-15 Harvard references)

    The questionnaire gathered from the student population were 10 male and 10 female based under 3 different sub-headings e.g. problem-focused coping, emotional-focused coping and less effective coping. Each total score were grouped under their sub-headings.. the questionnaire asks students to indicate what they generally do and feel, when experience stressful event using the respond choice of (1,2,3,4 to mark out the questions given)

    The Questionnaire results have been gathered using SPSS statistics data, you have to analyse it and present it in a report format.

    What to do for the Report:

    • Undertake a very brief literature search on the background to your questionnaire so that you are informed on what you are collecting data on.

    • The student sample population is based on 10 males vs. 10 females participants. in total of 20 questionnaire were gathered for the student population sample group.

    • Score the questionnaires – some background on the theory to your questionnaire will help here.

    • Using SPSS, input your data and carry out the appropriate data analysis that you think is relevant. It is important that you decide on the analysis and only include relevant analysis in the report. Not everything that SPSS produces.

    • Writing the report includes:

    Very brief introduction method section including subsections of participants, procedure, design, and data analysis results – what they mean and very brief conclusion and Harvard Reference list, appendix.) There is no need to include an abstract,. Keep these brief.

    • For the Results section, only report results that are relevant (i.e. raw data is not a result so it can go in an appendix).

    • Think about how to put your results across as clearly as possible! – tables, words, figures (do not just include everything!). The statistics are written as a sentence, stating what they show/mean, not just presented as a figure.

    • Title and label everything!

    • Follow the correct style for tables etc…e.g read journals related to your topic to see how the results are laid out! Follow that!

    NO PLAGIRISM

    One reference could be made to Carver, Scheier and Weintraub (1989) interest in how people respond when they confront difficult or stressful events in their lives

    Learning Outcomes

    Knowledge and Understanding

    a) Demonstrate an understanding of a variety of research designs and methodologies.

    b) Understand qualitative and quantitative research

    Subject – specific Skills

    c) Apply the appropriate statistical analysis to data.

    d) Demonstrate the ability to gather and analyse data using specific methodologies.

    e) Use a range of research methods.

    Key Skills

    f) Be aware of the strengths and limitations research.

    g) Know the difference between descriptive and inferential statistics

    h) Know the difference between parametric and non-parametric tests.

    i) Communicate complex concepts clearly and accurately.

    you are the manager of an accounting department and would like to hire another manag 504800

    You are the manager of an accounting department and would like to hire another managerial accountant to focus on internal accounting. The CEO is not convinced that a managing accountant position is needed. Prepare a 1–2 page memo for the CEO on the following:

    • Explain the objectives and characteristics of an internal accounting system.

    • Include an explanation of the importance of this information to the company.

    • Include an explanation of ethics in business and the managerial accountant’s role in upholding the code of ethics.

    Grading Criteria

    Percentage

    Objectives and characteristics of an internal accounting system

    35%

    Importance of internal accounting information to the company

    35%

    Ethics in business and the managing accountant’s role

    30%

    in the country of genovia the president wants to ensure that the monetary committee 504801

    In the country of Genovia, the president wants to ensure that the Monetary Committee can activate a device that opens the country’s safe. The safe system is to be activated by a device that obeys the following rules:

    Each member of the Monetary Committee has a button to push.

    The vice president or the president has a button to push (at least one of them—or both—have a button to push).

    The safe opens only if a combination of the president, the vice president, and a number of the committee members push the button.

    Complete the following:

    Set the exact constrains of the problem.

    Design the safe circuit.

    Complete the corresponding truth table.

    Explain your rationale on the creation of safe circuit.

    Write the corresponding Boolean expression.

    Specify the input and output variables and the two states of each.

    Input:

    p = president’s button (1 = pushed, 0 = not pushed)

    vp = vice president’s button ( 1= pushed, 0 not pushed)

    x, y, z = Monetary committees’ buttons (1 = pushed, 0 = not pushed)

    Output:

    f = Safe lock (1 = open, 0 = locked))